Information Engineering and Education Science 9781138026551, 9781315752273

Table of contents :
Content: To investigate the Sichuan Province University sports culture development and system innovation way / F. Peng --
Analysis about optimal equilibrium of subject curriculum and activity curriculum / J. Wang --
On English speech and debate course aiming at improving critical thinking / Q.S. Zhang & Z. Guo --
Analysis on interaction mechanism among wholesale market, local manufacturing and logistics industry / Ch. Y. Liu --
How readers find you in the big data era? How to increase academic journals' influential power in big data era / J. Yu & B. Chen --
English education for the young learners in China and Europe / J.L. Du & P.F. Yu --
The teaching effect analysis of professional English for environmental science and engineering based on investigation questionnaire / S.J. Feng, D.H. Wang & Y. Xu --
The relation between equity incentives and earnings management in China / Y. Cai & L. Zhang --
Preliminary study on the construct "Information Management and Information System" major of the new local undergraduate colleges / L. Li --
Suggestions of deregulations of word limits of papers on domestic engineering academic journals / J. Yu & B. Chen --
Researches on coalition-proof data security in cloud computing / Y.H. Yu & L. Wu --
Research on China's government regulation on Outbound Foreign Direct Investment of Chinese companies / P. Wang & X. You --
An improved algorithm for image restoration / D. Li --
Research on meta-cognitive strategy in college English autonomous learning under network environment / W.L. Zhao.

Citation preview

IRAICS

5

About the series The IRAICS Proceedings series is devoted to the publication of proceedings sponsored by the International Research Association of Information and Computer Science (IRAICS), a registered non-profi t international scientifi c association of distinguished scholars engaged in Information and Computer Science. The mission of IRAICS is to foster and conduct collaborative interdisciplinary research in state-of-the-art methodologies and technologies within its areas of expertise. The main fi elds covered by the series are Computer Engineering, Biomedical Engineering, Civil Engineering, Computational Intelligence and Complexity, Control Engineering, Electronics & Electrical Engineering, Energy Technology, Mechanical Engineering, Production & Process Engineering, Robotics, Signals & Communication, Sports Engineering and Business Engineering.

Information Engineering and Education Science

The 2014 International Conference on Information Engineering and Education Science (ICIEES 2014) was held June 12-13 in Tianjin, China. The objective of ICIEES 2014 was to provide a platform for researchers, engineers, academics as well as industry professionals from all over the world to present their research results and development activities in Information Engineering and Education Science. The program consisted of invited sessions and technical workshops and discussions with eminent speakers, and contributions to this proceedings volume cover a wide range of topics in Information Engineering and Education Science.

IRAICS proceedings series

ISSN Print: 2334-0495 ISSN Online: 2377-2077

Editor Zheng

Information Engineering and Education Science Editor: Dawei Zheng

an informa business

5

INFORMATION ENGINEERING AND EDUCATION SCIENCE

ICIEES_Book.indb i

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

International Research Association of Information and Computer Science IRAICS Proceedings Series ISSN: 2334-0495

VOLUME 5

ICIEES_Book.indb ii

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

PROCEEDINGS OF THE INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON INFORMATION ENGINEERING AND EDUCATION SCIENCE, TIANJIN, CHINA, 12–13 JUNE, 2014

Information Engineering and Education Science

Editor

Dawei Zheng International Research Association of Information and Computer Science, Beijing, China

ICIEES_Book.indb iii

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

CRC Press/Balkema is an imprint of the Taylor & Francis Group, an informa business © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, UK Typeset by V Publishing Solutions Pvt Ltd., Chennai, India Printed and bound in Great Britain by CPI Group (UK) Ltd, Croydon, CR0 4YY All rights reserved. No part of this publication or the information contained herein may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, by photocopying, recording or otherwise, without written prior permission from the publisher. Although all care is taken to ensure integrity and the quality of this publication and the information herein, no responsibility is assumed by the publishers nor the author for any damage to the property or persons as a result of operation or use of this publication and/or the information contained herein. Published by: CRC Press/Balkema P.O. Box 11320, 2301 EH Leiden, The Netherlands e-mail: [email protected] www.crcpress.com – www.taylorandfrancis.com ISBN: 978-1-138-02655-1 (Hbk) ISBN: 978-1-315-75227-3 (eBook PDF)

ICIEES_Book.indb iv

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Table of contents

Preface

xi

Organizing committee

xiii

To investigate the Sichuan Province University sports culture development and system innovation way F. Peng

1

Analysis about optimal equilibrium of subject curriculum and activity curriculum J. Wang

5

On English Speech and Debate Course aiming at improving critical thinking Q.S. Zhang & Z. Guo

9

Analysis on interaction mechanism among wholesale market, local manufacturing and logistics industry Ch. Y. Liu

13

How readers find you in the big data era?—how to increase academic journals’ influential power in big data era J. Yu & B. Chen

17

English education for the young learners in China and Europe J.L. Du & P.F. Yu The teaching effect analysis of professional English for environmental science and engineering based on investigation questionnaire S.J. Feng, D.H. Wang & Y. Xu The relation between equity incentives and earnings management in China Y. Cai & L. Zhang

19

25 29

Preliminary study on the construct “Information Management and Information System” major of the new local undergraduate colleges L. Li

33

Suggestions of deregulations of word limits of papers on domestic engineering academic journals J. Yu & B. Chen

37

Researches on coalition-proof data security in cloud computing Y.H. Yu & L. Wu Research on China’s government regulation on Outbound Foreign Direct Investment of Chinese companies P. Wang & X. You An improved algorithm for image restoration D. Li

39

45 53

Research on meta-cognitive strategy in college English autonomous learning under network environment W.L. Zhao

57

v

FM.indd v

4/6/2015 9:03:15 PM

Discussion on the construction of modern international trade professional degree education system M. Luo The practical teaching system research on the business administration major S. Yang, Y. Zhang & G. Xu Study on fuzzy modeling and detection using a hybrid-adaptive multiple physiological signal analysis in dementia-switched singularly perturbed modeling C.J. Wang & J.S. Chiou

61 65

71

Learner’s motivation recognition in e-learning environment F. Ghorbani & Gh. A. Montazer

75

Research on current situation of student independent study under network environment Q. Cai & J. Jin

81

Analysis of dynamic image sequence based on Dynamic Programming Z. Sun & L. Wang

85

A study on the differences of development of teachers’ educational technology ability J. Qiu, X. Yang, J. Li & B. Chen

89

The practice and reflection of curriculum design for communication engineering major Y. Liu & X. Shi

95

The humane concern to learners in distance learning of pervasive environment Q. Che & Y. Fang

99

The research and practice on the relationship between research and teaching in university G. Liu, Y. Xie & Q. Zhang

103

A text analysis study on the business schools’ mission statements of 985 universities in China: Based on the stakeholder’s view W. Chu & Y. Zhao

107

2-3-3-2 based teaching evaluation for data structure course L. Guan, X.L. Zeng, X.G. Zhao & L. Li A study on the contemporary college students’ ideology of preparation to job with field trip and obtain employment T. Huang Research on database education reform for applied talents C. Fan, Y. Yang & Q. Zhang

111

115 119

The researching of educational technology majors students on the training mode of practical innovation ability B. Chen & X. Yang

123

Research on helping employment difficulties of students by department of computer science and software engineering, Jincheng college of Sichuan University L. Hou

127

Teaching reform of Engineering Thermodynamics for cultivation of innovative talents majored in Thermal Engineering J. Li & X.Y. Wang

131

Integration of Kazakhstan postgraduate education into international environment U. Abdibekov, D. Zhakebaev, O. Karuna & Ye. Moisseyeva The developmental trends of Tianjin information service industry in international competition context: A content-analysis approach L. Wang & Y.Y. Lou

135

139

vi

ICIEES_Book.indb vi

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

Investigation of female college students’ dormitory interpersonal relationship—taking Chongqing Normal University as an example N. Zhong

145

Research on education reform and practice of Ergonomics based on the teaching idea of progressive cross-modular L. Lin & M.Q. Yang

149

The calculation of the standard unit cost of the universities in Heilongjiang Province Y. Duan, J.Y. Zhang & G.J. Duan

153

Innovative management based on risks prediction A.I. Kostogryzov, P.V. Stepanov, G.A. Nistratov, A.A. Nistratov, L.I. Grigoriev & O.I. Atakishchev

159

Calculation of the supply and demand of China’s public higher education funding Y. Duan, S.S. Song & J.Y. Zhang

167

The study of undergraduate research in teaching-oriented universities T. Zhang, G.X. Sun & J.L. Zuo

171

Comparative study of conditions of mass sporting activities in Guanzhong Region, Shannxi Province C. Li

175

Effect of Leader–member high-quality exchanges on teachers’ organization commitment S.J. Fu

179

Endowment and waqf in higher education A. Md. Yusof, I. Omar & J. Johan

183

College campus culture construction research education based on students’ habits Y. Rong

189

Definition, process, performance and influencing factors of management innovation F. Li

193

Study on Chinese higher education financial crisis from the cost-sharing perspective J. Gan

197

The research on the teaching reform of computer basics J. Wu & G.Z. Hou

201

University R&D, formation of high-tech firms and employment growth Y. Guan, M. Qu, X. Liu & W. Zheng

205

Research on ideological and political education in the new media age Z. Wang & C. Liu

209

The alert correlation analysis of intrusion detection D. Xu, D. Wei, J. Zhu, X. Cheng & M. Li

213

College students intend to study the influence factors of honey consumption M. Zhu

219

The American Christian Right and 2012 presidential election G. Yao

225

Study on the theoretical physical education courses of the Chinese universities on the basis of physical and mental health of the students G. Cheng, D. Nie & D. Wei

229

Counselors’ role in unexpected events among college students X.H. Li & Y.F. Wang

233

Some measures of teaching reform of mathematical analysis in agricultural colleges W. Dong & X. Deng

237

vii

ICIEES_Book.indb vii

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

Study on government subsidy of SME: A case of Shenzhen stock market Y. Guan, C. Xie & M. Qu

241

Approach to etiquette and law theory into socialist legal education L. Wu

245

The exploration of adult higher education and the higher vocational education’s organic integration L. Yao & X. Li An empirical analysis of the relationship between urbanization progress and economic growth N. Tian Theory and empirical research of high-tech industry growth promoted by agglomeration from scale economy effect G. Ruan, J. Guo & C. Cui

249 253

257

Research on problems and strategies of independent innovation capabilities in SMEs W. Zhang

263

On the strategy of training pre-service geography teachers’ teaching skills based on PCK theory J. Xu & Z. Men

267

The practice and exploration of full English/bilingual teaching for Industrial Engineering majors Z.H. Qin & C. Deng

273

Theories reviews of banking internationalization M. An

279

Practice and thought of green education in higher education Y.Z. Ma, R.X. Wang & C. Wang

283

Reconstruction of knowledge hierarchy for higher vocational database curriculum based upon work process J. Zhang, Y. Jiang & X. Zhu

287

Analysis of some problems and ideas on sports being incorporated into the National College Entrance Examination H. Xiao

291

Application research of case teaching in mechanics course teaching L. Yu, L. Yan, Y. Yu, F. Gai & Y. Wu

295

The development of blog’s application in teaching reflected from the articles of CNKI’s sample documents X. Li, J. Li & J. Qiu

299

Research on the popularization model for innovation methods adopted by Shandong Province X. Zhao, J. Lv & C. Gao

303

An exploration on graduation design for communication engineering specialty in application-oriented universities M. Wang, S.G. Zhang, Q.Y. Sun & Y. Zhang

309

Sports biomechanics analysis of Taijiquan Xuanfengjiao 360° difficult action K. Hu & Y. Wang

313

Research on cultivation mode of electronic information specialty for undergraduates enrolled based on the general categories H.Y. Jiang, X.H. Yang, L.G. Liu & Y.T. Wang

317

Comparative study between business commercial-age and Z-score models—with listed firms in machinery sector as a case B. Ai, Y. Ma & Y. Xu

323

viii

ICIEES_Book.indb viii

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

Selecting marketing channel members based on Analytic Hierarchy Process Y. Dai & X. Wang

331

The effectiveness analysis of legalization of ideological and political education L. Wu

335

Analysis of the effect on moral education exerted by peer groups among college students and countermeasure research M. Song The co-integration relation research on the number of higher education and national economy Y. Dai & Y.J. Liu Practice with project-based teaching of mechanical vibration to international engineering students K.M. Wang

339 343

347

Early fault detection of gearbox bearings through combined vibration signal analysis method K.M. Wang

351

Study on the improved statistic algorithm in the graduation project packet achievement Y.K. Yan, Y.B. Cong & W.Y. Ma

357

Investigation of the interfaces between Second Language Acquisition and Language Testing X. Lin & J. Xia

361

The dilemma faced by rural migrant workers from China midwest areas with their return-home entrepreneurship and the countermeasures analysis—example Hunan Province Y. Zhou

367

Reform and exploration of college computer experiment teaching Y. Shi

371

Urban poor and housing affordability in Malaysia A. Md. Yusof, C.S. Chai & J. Johan

375

Determination of optimal number of doctors and appointment interval for an appointment T. Sinthamrongruk & N. Harnpornchai

379

Problems and countermeasures of constructing foreign enterprises engineering practice education center in higher engineering education M. Zhao & G.C. Wang

391

Evolution of Japanese post-war Agricultural Support Policy Z. Gu

395

Reliability assessment of mechanical equipment based on GO methodology Z.R. Yin, D. Su & J.S. Li

399

Shanghai platform on construction and sharing of moral education curriculum resources in schools and universities S. Johnson, M. Bian, D. Hsu & J. Yuan

403

Author index

411

ix

ICIEES_Book.indb ix

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Preface

We cordially invite you to attend the conference in Tianjin, China held June 12–13, 2014. The main objective of the conference is to provide a platform for researchers, engineers and academics as well as industry professionals from all over the world to present their research results and development activities in Information Engineering and Education Science. This conference provides opportunities for delegates to exchange new ideas and experiences face to face, to establish business or research relations and to find global partners for future collaboration. The conference received over 250 submissions which were all reviewed by at least two reviewers. As a result of our highly selective review process about 90 papers have been retained for inclusion in the proceedings, less than 40% of the submitted papers. The program of the conference consists of invited sessions and technical workshops and discussions covering a wide range of topics. This rich program provides all attendees with the opportunity to meet and interact with one another. We hope your experience is a fruitful and long-lasting one. With your support and participation, the conference will continue to be successful for a long time. The conference is supported by many universities and research institutes. Many professors play an important role in the successful holding of the conference, so we would like to take this opportunity to express our sincere gratitude and highest respects to them. They have worked very hard in reviewing papers and making valuable suggestions for the authors to improve their work. We also would like to express our gratitude to the external reviewers, for providing extra help in the review process, and to the authors for contributing their research results to the conference. Special thanks go to our publisher. At the same time, we also express our sincere thanks for the understanding and support of every author. Owing to time constraints, imperfection is inevitable, and any constructive criticism is welcome. We hope you will have a technically rewarding experience, and use this occasion to meet old friends and make many new ones. We wish all attendees an enjoyable scientific gathering in Tianjin, China. We look forward to seeing all of you at next year’s conference. The Conference Organizing Committee June 12–13, 2014 Tianjin, China

xi

ICIEES_Book.indb xi

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Organizing committee

GENERAL CO-CHAIRS Prof. M.N.B. Mansor, University Malaysia Perlis, Malaysia Prof. E. Ariwa, London Metropolitan University, UK TECHNICAL COMMITTEE G. Zhou, Biological, Chemical & Environmental Science Research Association, China L. Jiang, Science Technology Press, Hong Kong M. Xu, Electronics and Information Engineering Research Institute, USA Prof. A. Andronic, Spiru Haret University, Romania Dr-Ing., Habil. Jerzy Jan Nizinski, Université d’Orléans, France I.S.B. Zaine, UiTM Pulau Pinang, Malaysia Dr. M. Fiorini, Chairman IET Italy Dr. J. Chen, Chang Gung University, Taiwan Dr. M. Saied, Alexandria University, Egypt Prof. I. Tutanescu, University of Pitesti, Romania H. Yaghoubi, Iran Maglev Technology, Iran

xiii

ICIEES_Book.indb xiii

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

To investigate the Sichuan Province University sports culture development and system innovation way Fei Peng Department of Sports and Leisure, Sichuan Tourism University, Chengdu, Sichuan, China

ABSTRACT: The universities sports culture can guide students to engage in sports, form a good leisure life style in the best time, which has important influence in improving the quality of their adult’s leisure life. Since the university sports culture development in Sichuan Province is generally poor, the author from the survey of Sichuan Province universities sports culture, analyzes that the root cause is the old system, put forward the development of system innovation and provides the suggestion for the reform of public physical education in universities. Keywords: 1

Sichuan; University; sports culture; predicament; institutional innovation; way

QUESTION

3

The survey found that many universities sports culture development is generally poor, did not give full play to its education role. This article from the system innovation angle, finds the new mode of universities sports culture development, and provides reference for the development of PE in universities. 2 2.1

3.1

The lack of specialized organizations

Most of the development of university sports culture only contains three parts of work, physical education teaching responsible for department of PE, the community sports activities out class responsible for student management department, physical health test and the school sports meeting once a year responsible for the PE Commission in universities. The three departments were acting of one’s own free will, without a plan’s top leadership. But in fact, the development of university sports culture relates to construct the core values of sports culture, improve the sports system, rich sports culture forms and many other aspects of the work. If there is no special organization system, the development of sports culture will lack spirit of cooperation.

THE OBJECT OF STUDY AND METHOD Object

This paper, Sichuan Province University as the research object, includes chosen experts from twelve different Liberal Arts University And Science University, such as Sichuan University, Southwest University of Science and Technology and so on. At the same time, 200 students from four universities (not including the professional sports students) are taken as our research sample.

3.2 2.2

SICHUAN PROVINCE UNIVERSITY SPORTS CULTURAL DEVELOPMENT DILEMMA

Methods

Lack of funds led to ineffective activities

The universities sports culture development is not perfect. The expert consensus is the input of the Education Finance Limited, insufficient funds, will not be sufficient to carry out the work system. Survey data shows, in twelve schools surveyed, school finance put least school less than 3 yuan per person, put up 30 yuan per capita, 7 schools in per capita investment 10 yuan per person. The investment of funds support different items in the

In addition to the literature, logic analysis, mathematical statistics methods, we mainly adopted questionnaire survey method. We conducted two expert interviews. The first in some general questions, secondly in order to get a clear answer on some important, key, and sensitivity problems. We used the Delphy method back to back survey experts.

1

ICIEES_Book.indb 1

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

the students participation in sports activities, and thus more hindered the university’s development of sports culture.

following order: school sports events, sports teams, sports associations, sports culture environment. Obviously, even by the most in 30 yuan per capita cannot make anyone of these things to do well. In addition, the student sports associations have a lot of sports culture development task. But in our survey, the associations are all run and managed by the students, most of schools have no formal requirement for teachers help to its management and development. Sources of funds, 30 yuan per person per year for each association member, are so small that a series of problems caused, such as no equipment, no guidance, the lack of incentive mechanism, loss of community members. [1] 3.3

4

4.1

Analysis feasibility of system innovation

The core issue in reform is the contradiction between the supply shortage and the lack of fund. In order to solve this problem completely, we should seek a mechanism, which can provide for oneself development funds. We selected four universities in Sichuan Province, each university has 50 random samples, 200 questionnaires, 180 valid questionnaires. In leisure time, the students mainly engaged in leisure activities as listed in table 1. It is said that most of the students had chosen internet browsing, listening to music and reading as their mainly leisure activities, only 9.3% of the students had taken sports. But as shown in table 2: the student’s choice sometimes is not because of enjoy, do not choose not because he doesn’t enjoy, only restricted by some objective conditions. 33.2% of the students had chosen tourism firstly, which is also in line with the youth for the external world yearning features, most of the students are more like tour pal of backpacker tourism, which is a main content of sports and leisure, but because of economic conditions, many students are unable to choose this way of leisure. In the leisure sports school after travel, listen to music and the internet. Students have no choice of sports and leisure as the main way of leisure, the reason is shown in table 3.

The sports facilities construction and maintenance problems

Sports facilities are the basic condition for the development of university sports culture and the carrier. Generally, universities in Sichuan Province lack funds in the construction, especially the follow-up maintenance. In order to achieve the operating income to supplement funds, universities sports facilities are seeking for social services. Universities Stadiums to social service level is about 65%. During the holiday, the open rate reached 100% [2] which is also in line with the state since 2009 promulgated the “National Fitness Program regulations”: the school should, in their spare time and holidays, open their sports facilities to the public. But University gymnasium exists different stakeholders, the result of game is venue resources not use effectively [3], on the other hand, open mechanism did not increase the benefit to students’ physical welfare, but reduced chance of Table 1.

SICHUAN PROVINCE UNIVERSITY SPORTS CULTURE DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM INNOVATION WAY

The students mainly engaged in leisure activities comparison.

Online

Music

Reading

Sports

Shopping

Playing cards or chess

Tourism

33.7%

24%

16.3%

9.3%

7.3%

4.9%

4.5%

Table 2. Comparison of students’ subjective desire. Tourism

Music

Online

Sports

Reading

Shopping

Playing cards or chess

Others

33.2%

18.5%

15.8%

11.4%

11.4%

5.4%

2.7%

1.6%

Table 3.

The main reason not to choose sports leisure.

No organization

No time

Dislike

Too expensive

No sports venues

No sports technology

24.6%

23.6%

21.6%

14.1%

10.1%

6%

2

ICIEES_Book.indb 2

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

Table 4.

4.2.2 Concept innovation The sports organizing committee is the leadership of universities sports culture, which carry out various sports activities. In the course of development, the organization needs a core concept, so as to ensure that all work around it. The investigation in twelve schools, 9 schools have expert thinks, development goals of university sports culture is to help the students to form life style of the sports leisure, so every work of university sports culture should consider how to stimulate students’ interest in sports, so as to serve students better.

Attitudes towards part paying sports club.

Join the paying club wishes

Pay for the new sports equipment wishes

For an annual fee of 600 yuan cost the club wishes

60%

55%

35%

From the above data, the majority of the students are willing to participate in the organization movement. There are only 21.6% students didn’t like sports, that is to say, spend money, space and technology issues are not the major obstacles of students to participate in sports and leisure items. This conclusion implies the feasibility of paid club development in Universities, as shown in table 4. 60% of the students expressed their willingness to pay the cost of some new curriculum such as tennis, skating. 55% of the students expressed their willingness to pay a certain equipment rental fees. 35% of the students expressed willingness to participate some charge club. This shows that some students still have certain aversion to charges, but the proportion is under 35%, which is also a great encouragement because there is no publicity work. 4.2

4.2.3 Product innovation Cultural Development Committee of university sports need to distinguish between public education products and semipublic product standards and boundaries. Semipublic products are some of the projects, which can help us to get enough funds, these funds can protect the basic rights of students in physical exercise, thus forming the university sports culture is comprehensive, complementary development. Training students’ physical fitness and rehabilitation team is a public product, which the Commission shall be paid in full. Sports clubs and sports promotion is a semipublic product, students should be charged the appropriate fee. For example, we break the original sports teaching mode, use the new club teaching mode, sport activities span three school year, the first stage is mainly the interest class, is by the state to provide public goods, the second level is the intermediate technical training class, third grade is a senior sports training class, the two should be the semipublic product.

The basic content of innovation system

4.2.1 Organization innovation Break the original public physical education and extracurricular sports club, two branch institutions reorganized “culture construction of universities sports committee”. The work of universities sports culture contents are: sports club activities, physical test and exercise rehabilitation, sports promotion and sports team training class. These four kinds of work are divided into four departments. At the same time in order to cooperate with the committee to achieve the above four functions also have some auxiliary departments, such as the office responsible for the day-to-day management of affairs arrangement, propaganda department is responsible for the promotion of sports culture on campus and off campus, logistics department responsible for the facilities and equipment, market development department of market operation is responsible for facility operation and event activities, the four auxiliary department to assist the committee the realization of the four functions.

REFERENCES [1] Zheng Fang. Sichuan universities sports association development present situation and Countermeasure of. Journal of Sichuan University of Arts and Science, 2009 (5): 87∼89. [2] Mao liya. Sichuan Province universities sports facilities of social services and management. Sichuan Sports Science, 2010 (3): 129∼134. [3] Liu Xuesong, Sun Zhaoe, Li Dou. Research on rational use of universities sports resources in Sichuan Based on the stakeholder theory. Journal of Chengdu Sport University, 2010 (9): 20∼26.

3

ICIEES_Book.indb 3

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Analysis about optimal equilibrium of subject curriculum and activity curriculum Jinyan Wang School of Business, Linyi University, Linyi, Shandong, China

ABSTRACT: Subject-centered curriculum and activity curriculum that are ever independent are developing towards integration in the modern curriculum. Facing the limited teaching time, their allocation on time will affect the achievement of teaching effectiveness. The article analyzes allocation of two courses on the base of the economic tool. The study shows that they may achieve a balanced state when the last unit time brings equal effectiveness to teachers. Different stages of learning will influence teachers’ satisfaction of utility, which will determine different equilibrium state of the curriculums. Keywords: 1

subject-centered curriculum; activity curriculum; teaching effectiveness; equilibrium

INTRODUCTION

the need of modern science and technology development. But, subject-centered curriculum only concerned with the logical order of discipline, possibly far from the actual social life, and to mobilize the students’ interest in learning is difficult. It may not be conducive to the cultivation of students’ personality. Therefore, it has been criticized by naturalism, humanism philosophy. As the representative nature of progressive educators, John Dewey advocates conform to the nature of child, and thinks that child should gain experience and ability by his activities. Activities curriculum theory by empirical naturalism impacts emphasizes comprehensive learning. Students should develop their self-awareness, social attitudes, ways of thinking, values, etc. through exercise. To some extent activity curriculum remedies the shortcomings of the subject-centered curriculum, and fully mobilizes students’ interest. But, activity curriculum can’t make students to master the systematized scientific knowledge because of the lack of rigorous planning. Jerome Seymour Bruner has pointed out most education authorities have realized that activities should not be seen as a competitor formal curriculum, but should be seen as extended range of formal curriculum with people’s deeply understanding of curriculum theory. “It is proved to be wrong that progressive educators insist activity curriculum at the expense of sacrificing division courses and the traditional advocate division courses at the expense of ignoring Activities.” (Shi Liang fang, 2002). Schools should focus on a reasonable mix of the two with the continuous development and improvement of two courses philosophy.

In the 20th century, subject-centered curriculum advocated by elements doctrine and activity curriculum experience naturalism advocated are mutually antagonistic courses. They have ever largely affected the progress of curriculum theory. But modern international curriculum reform and practice shows that they are not isolated from each other. Their allocation on time will affect the achievement of teaching effectiveness. But the equilibrium of two curriculums is not about time, but is about utility that is a kind of satisfaction of students and teachers at teaching. Students and teachers may gain the maximum utility by reasonable and appropriate configuration of two types of courses in the certain time. So, how to configure the two types of courses is becoming important. 2

THE RELATIONS BETWEEN SUBJECTCENTERED CURRICULUM AND ACTIVITY CURRICULUM

Subject-centered curriculum has the following features: it will be a systematized scientific knowledge and textbooks are arranged according to certain logical order, and students can learn to master the certain basic knowledge and basic skills. It emphasizes students’ transmission of human creation and long-term accumulated experience. The curriculum is actively advocated by the main elements of doctrine. They stressed that the storage materials of human experience, and the curriculum system on the base of extensive scientific. These ideas meet

5

ICIEES_Book.indb 5

4/3/2015 7:08:15 AM

3

3.2 Indifference curve about teaching

THE OPTIMAL ALLOCATION OF THE TWO CURRICULUMS

Time budget constraint merely indicates the maximum possible combination of two types of courses, but where do the optimal allocation of two types occur in time constraints? To this question we need to introduce indifference curve for further analysis. Because we do not consider other factors, we can think teaching utility that is the subjective satisfaction of teachers and students for teaching only determined by the subject and activities curriculums. In other words, teaching utility is a function of the subject curriculum and activity curriculum. It is expressed as: U = U (T1, T2) (U represents the total utility, T1 is used for time on the subject curriculum, T2 is the time for the activities on the course). When U = U1, we get an indifference curve S1 in (T1, T2) the coordinate system, which represents to bring a variety of combinations of two types when utility is same for teachers and students. When U is different constants, we get about the effectiveness of different teaching indifference curves. In fact, we do not yet know the specific form of the utility function of teaching. Utility function of teaching staff (especially students) can’t be exactly the same because different people have different subjective evaluation for subject curriculum and activity curriculum, which determines the different shapes of indifference curve of utility of teaching staff. Furthermore, the two types of courses will have different results for school-age students that are at different age stages. We can use the general shape of the indifference curves to represent the difference of teaching (as shown in Figure 2), and we assume that preferences of teaching staff for two types of courses are a good preference (this assumption is consistent with conventional). It is consistent with the basic assumptions about rational man of the economics. The difference curve has the following characteristics: First, the farther away from the origin of the curve, the higher the level of utility (That is S3 > S2 > S1); Second, the indifference curves represents the same utility can’t intersect; Third, the indifference curves

Subject curriculum and activity curriculum should be indivisible overall, and they play their own unique features in course of teaching. We will analyze the optimal and balanced location of the two types of curriculum by budget constraint and utility indifference curve of economics. 3.1

Time constraint curve of the two curriculums

To simplify the analysis of the problem, we ignore other factors that affect teaching and learning activities and only consider the time factor, which is the optimal configuration problem on two types of courses at a certain time resources. Here, the time constraints of teaching activities become useful and limited resources. Budget constraint curve becomes the time constraint curve. Assuming the total class time available to “1”, Time for the subject curriculum is as “T1”, and time for activity courses is for “T2”. Thus we can get the time constraint curve of teaching: T1 + T2 = 1 (0 ≤ T1, T2 ≤ 1). It shows the various combinations of the two types of courses under certain teaching time. The slope of time constraint is 1. This is because the time for the curriculum or activity curriculum for the time is qualitative, which means that the time for the two types of programs have the same “price”. Figure 1 shows a budget constraint about teaching activities. Each point on the constraints line represents the maximum possible allocation combinations of time on two types of courses. The area on the left represents the total hours have not been fully utilized, but the area to the right of the teaching staff are unable to use. The points A and B are the two extreme cases, which point A means activity courses occupy the entire school curriculum, but the point B is accounted for all curriculums. In reality the two extreme cases are extremely rare. Two courses tend to swing between A and B. It is more elements of doctrine or empiricism more.

Figure 2.

Figure 1. The budget constraint about teaching activities.

Utility indifference curve about teaching.

6

ICIEES_Book.indb 6

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

above through the establishment of the Lagrangian function. This equilibrium condition means that when the last unit of time spent on each category of courses teaching staff brought on equal effectiveness, teaching effectiveness realizes the maximized. When the marginal utility of subject curriculum is greater than that of activity curriculum, teachers and students will continue to increase curriculum, which the last utility of the both curriculum is equal.

convex to the origin, which shows the slope of difference curve or the marginal rate of substitution of the two curriculums is decreasing. This means teaching staff will not give up the activity curriculum with the more and more subject curriculum. Of course, a good trait preferences itself means subject curriculum and activity course are not perfect substitutes (the two are not isolated). It brings a different level of teaching if subject curriculum replaces the activity in the same time. Meanwhile, the two types of courses are not entirely complementary products. It means all activity courses or subject curriculum are still feasible. 3.3

4

FACTORS INFLUENCING OPTIMAL BALANCED CURRICULUMS

4.1 Pre-school and primary school stage

The optimal allocation of the two curriculums

According to Piaget’s theory of cognitive development, children are in the pre-operational stage, and a representation of thinking. Their measure is specific and very characteristic appearance of familiar objects. The game is the dominant form of their activities. Thus, in the pre-school, curriculum is almost active. The equilibrium point is equivalent to four point A in Fig. 4. At the elementary level, abstract thinking began to develop the specific form of thinking. Their lives are dominated by learning. Schools should set some math, grammar, and other disciplines to develop children’s ability to perform the operation. But at this stage the ability to calculate depends on the specific things, and the game continues to occupy a dominant position. Optimal configuration of two courses is about the r point C in Fig. 4.

Putting the time budget constraint and indifference curve on the same coordinate, we can get the optimal equilibrium point of allocation of the two types of courses (such as Figure 3). The optimal combination must meet the following conditions: First, the optimal combination of courses must be the most preferred combination of teaching staff; second, the optimal combination must be located in a given time constraints of teaching. Figure 3 can be a good description of the second point. Any combination of constraint on the left is not desirable because there is some time allowed for teaching not to be made full use of. In reality, it is expressed as teacher’s absenteeism and the lack of teaching content. The right region of constraint has been on beyond the people’s choice. Thus, the optimal combination of the two courses should occur at the tangent point of teaching indifference curve and the budget constraint of time (Figure 3 point C). This is the same as the slope of the time constraint and teaching effectiveness indifference curve, that is MRS1, 2 = MU1/MU1 = 1. The slope of the indifference curve is marginal rate of substitution about both curriculums, which is the ratio of the marginal utility of two types of courses. This problem is actually extreme problems. That is the solution about the equation: Max • U (T1, T2); St T1 + T2 = 1 (0 ≤ T1, T2 ≤ 1). We can easily find a balanced solution

4.2 Secondary level Children begin no longer depending on specific things to calculate from 12 years old, and they can calculate and think according to abstract characterization. Students have the higher abstract, theoretical. School should provide more subject curriculums and appropriate activities courses, which helps students to understand abstract content. The optimal combination of the two courses is about at point D in Figure 4.

Figure 3. Optimal equilibrium point of two curriculums.

Figure 4.

The equilibrium point of different ages.

7

ICIEES_Book.indb 7

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

4.3

5

University and higher stage

Complex intellectual activity and strengthen of the concept mechanism makes intellectual activity be more effective and stable. Students’ cognitive is enough, which makes student carry out creative learning and searching. Studying systematic theory is even more important. If there is more activity curriculum, students can feel that the amount of knowledge is not big enough. They are more willing to choose the difficulty, high levels of activity. Subject curriculum should be the main part and its equilibrium point is in about E. The university classes that too much emphasis activities and forms should alert. 4.4

CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

1. Subject curriculum and activity courses are moving toward unity in theory and practice. They are all important parts of schooling. It is very wrong to make them isolated from each other. 2. In the limited time, schools should make the two curriculums optimally combine and achieve maximum utility. 3. The optimal equilibrium of the two curriculums is decided by teaching utility function. But, teaching utility function is influenced by age difference, the law of students’ physical and mental development and different professional. 4. Curriculum design should pay attention to the participation of teachers and students. They can deeply feel the utility of teaching, and can provide a relative data.

Other factors

Some special courses also affect the optimal equilibrium point, such as chemistry, PE and art etc. Full activity courses should be given to enable students to easily master the skills and law. Determining utility function is a complex process because it represents a subjective feeling. According to revealed preference theory of economics, we can finally find the right utility function of teaching if there are enough observation points of behavior of people. It means the suggestions and comments of students and teachers must be paid full attention in practice.

REFERENCES [1] Liangfang Shi, 2002. Curriculum Theory. Beijing: Education Science Press. [2] Chen Li, 1998. Activity Curriculum Research. Beijing: Beijing Education Science Press. [3] Mu jiu Zhu, 2003. New Curriculum, Beijing: Beijing Normal University Press. [4] Hongye Gao, 2010. Microeconomics, Beijing: China Renmin University Press.

8

ICIEES_Book.indb 8

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

On English Speech and Debate Course aiming at improving critical thinking QiuShuang Zhang & Zhe Guo North China Electric Power University, Beijing, China

ABSTRACT: English Speaking and Debating Course is one of the students’ favorite courses. However, due to the lack of experience, many problems arise, including how to choose the teaching materials suitable to the college students, how to guide the students correctly when selecting courses, what principles the course teacher need to follow and how to adopt modern science and technology appropriately into the teaching. With an attempt to figure out the solutions to the above problems, certain approaches are proposed in this paper in terms of teaching objective, form and methods. Keywords: 1

English speech and debate; curriculum; teaching suggestions

INTRODUCTION

courses are few, let alone the speech and debate course. To be specific, there are 3 major reasons that account for the deficiency of critical thinking among English majors.

With the rapid economic growth and deepening foreign exchanges and cooperation in China, the demand for high-quality talents specialized in English foreign languages has risen sharply, since in the course of international exchanges, foreign languages not only serve as a tool for communication but also a channel to spread Chinese civilization and culture. As an important means to cultivate the creative students who know well about the international cultures and a good embodiment of teaching reform, English Speaking and Debating Course (ESDC), has received increasingly considerable publicity in China, and various speech and debate contests are becoming more and more popular in colleges and universities. However, the critical thinking, a vital capacity for the students to be creative, is mostly ignored in our higher educational system. Instead, much more attention has been paid to the skill training, memorizing and imitating, resulting in the fact that most English-major students are weak in critical thinking. In recent years, the transfer of educational notion from linguistic competence to thinking competence has taken place in the cultivation of foreign language talents as the educational reform requires. As to the research and studies associated with critical thinking, western experts are taking the lead in the defining, categorizing and training and assessing critical thinking in adults, while Chinese educators has begun to get involved since about 20 years ago. Therefore, the findings that can be referred to when conducting critical thinking training through college English

2

REASONS

2.1 Exam-oriented testing system in China In 2010, the data obtained from the CCTST conducted on 25 students in China University of Geosciences reveals that the analytical skill is the weakest, which to some extent indicates that the absence of training in thinking competence is a common problem in our present educational system. This point can also be proved by the interviews to some students, who claim: “For the students of liberal arts, the CEE focuses more on what students can remember rather than what they can analyze. And the key to get high scores is not to acquire how to solve the problems, but to memorize large amount of knowledge, whether you have understood it or not. Besides, the standardized answer is usually obtained by listening to the teacher’s carefully in class instead of thinking about it ourselves. Therefore, we don’t have the awareness of cultivating the critical thinking”. What can be indicated from the words is that the deficiency of analytical ability is partially caused by the current exam-oriented educational system that has ignored the cultivation of critical thinking. In the teaching process, a conclusion is usually given to the students first, who are required to prove it then. Such practice leaves little time and

9

ICIEES_Book.indb 9

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

teachers and students is of great significance to the collection and analysis of learning materials, proposal and test of hypotheses, self-feedback of learning process, assessment of learning results and the final construction of the meaning. To be specific, the benefits of the speech and debate course are shown as follows. ESDC can enhance the students’ critical thinking by making them to interpret and analyze the other people’s viewpoint that is totally different from their own and to establish the connections and inference. With constant reflection and reasoning, the identifying skill, interpreting skill as well as communicating skill can all be boosted. Firstly, ESDC promotes the change of students’ learning style. Contrasted with the traditional teaching mode, ESDC has made a breakthrough by inspiring the students to search for information, sift and synthesize materials, analyze the problems, and eventually arrive at the solution. Secondly, ESDC expands the teaching content and enriches the knowledge. This debate-based course is a interrelated system, requiring the students to bring all the knowledge into play, probe in the known and unknown area, and expand the frontier of knowledge through active learning. Thirdly, ESDC exerts great influence on the students’ emotions, attitude and moral values, which are tightly associated with the motivation, effort, as well as learning process and results. The problem consciousness has been spurred to explore the unknown world with interest and passion, which alters their behavioral tendency.

room for the students to query and probe, leading to the fact that the students, especially those of liberal art, have the inertia in thinking and finds it difficult to adjust to the debate. They hope that it is the teacher who can tell them directly what the problem is, how to find out the approach to solve them, and how to build up a system instead of thinking actively and figuring out by themselves. 2.2

Deficiency of fundamental knowledge and skills

Deficiency of fundamental knowledge and skills makes students to have barriers in interpreting and expressing the intonation conveyed by the debate topic or in identifying the connections between issues. They usually feel confused when it comes to the unfamiliar topics, such as historic or political issues, or logical argumentation. When they prepare for the debate, the focus is usually on the background information about what it is rather than what it should be. Thus, even though most of the students would like to take notes and make summary after the debate, only few of them can make great progress. 2.3

Inappropriate learning style

Long-term repetitive practice must be the key in the growth of any skill or capacity. To cultivate analytical skill through debate course, students need to prepare carefully before class, analyze the content after class to interpret the connection and logic in other students’ argumentation. The interviews to the students indicate that due to the tight schedule, many students just regard the debate as a task that is usually done without any reflection after class. Actually, the debate should be an inspirer instead of the result of the thinking by reviewing literature with the guidance of the teacher. So, repeated debating on the same topic can be a feasible way to enhance their ability in analysis. 3

4

SUGGESTION FOR ESDC

It is not an easy task to introduce ESDC course into the curriculum because the teachers need to consider carefully about how to arouse the intermediate-level students’ interest in ESDC. In terms of the teaching content, the first step can be to familiarize them with the purpose of speech delivery, which is a kind of constant speakercentered verbal behavior to the audience and an important way to communicate with people in public. Some students believe that the more fluent they are, the better the speech becomes. However, the feelings of the audience are ignored. Thus, one of the primary tasks of ESDC is to make students to understand that the tone, pitch, and body languages are equally important in delivering speech, indicating that you are passionate and have the intention and ability to arouse echo in the hearts of the audience. The second step can be to make students know clearly that the logical organization and appropriate content can make the speech convincing. Compared with complicated theories and

THE ENGLISH SPEECH AND DEBATE COURSE

As an efficient training way, debate provides a good motivation for the students to improve the ability to interpret, analyze and solve problems and issues, which are composed of short-term objective—to make certain decision, as well as the long-term objective—to enrich the knowledge and enhance the ability. According to the theory of constructivism, knowledge is acquired by constructing meanings through the help of others, including teachers and peers, and utilization of relative materials. Besides, cooperation among students or between

10

ICIEES_Book.indb 10

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

uator is taking place in the ESDC. The teachers need to be involved in the entire process of speech or debate, cooperating or even debating with them. It can boost their spirits and confidence to participate more actively. Besides, teachers need to be more tolerant to the grammatical mistakes in the utterance and focus more on the idea exchanges.

uncommon terms, simple and grounded language is more effective in achieving the desirable results. The third step is to acquaint the students with the western culture and thinking patterns except from the knowledge and skills. Being culturally literate enables them to interpret or employ the proverbs, idioms, anecdotes, historical events, customs and sentence patterns. In terms of teaching materials, the ones that are suitable to students must be the good choice, which need to be refined according to the majors and levels of students. For example, if the teacher can conduct bilingual teaching and simplify the theories, that will be better for the non-English majors. As for the ESDC in many colleges, large amount of knowledge and training need to be covered in comparatively a few class hours. Thus, the pace of course needs to be adjusted based on the teaching content and students’ needs, and approaches of self-learning need to be taught to enable the students to learn autonomously after class. In terms of teaching style, the individualization can be employed, that is, teaching methods need to differ among students. For the introverted students, cooperation and team work are suitable, while for the extroverted ones, teacher’s guidance and higher demands are necessary. For the low-level students, encouragement and repeated practice are needed, while for the advanced-level ones, independent fulfillment of the task and more reference books and videos after class are integral. In terms of teaching role, the transfer from leader to organizer, participant, assistant and eval-

5

CONCLUSIONS

To conclude, it is an urgent task for the teachers to discuss and figure out the effective teaching mode to solve the problem of critical thinking deficiency in non-English majors. The suggestions provided in this paper are to cultivate the students’ ability of interpreting, analyzing and solving problems through the guidance and training in ESDC, which may be a good attempt for other teachers to adopt. REFERENCES [1] Anderson, R.C. & Pearson, P.D. A schema-theoretic view of basic processes in reading comprehension In Pearson, P.D. Handbook of Reading Research New York: Longman, 1984: 255–291. [2] Armbruster, B. Schema theory and the design of content-area textbooks J. Educational Psychologist, 1996 (21): 253–276. [3] Bloom, B.S. Taxonomy of Educational Objectives: The Classification of Educational Goals. Handbook 1: The Cognitive Domain. New York: Longmans, Green & Co. 1956.

11

ICIEES_Book.indb 11

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Analysis on interaction mechanism among wholesale market, local manufacturing and logistics industry Ch. Y. Liu Business School, Linyi University, Linyi, Shandong, China

ABSTRACT: This paper analyzed the Interaction mechanism among wholesale markets, local manufacturing and logistics industry. Wholesale markets promote the development of the local manufacturing by providing entrepreneurs, network platform and advertising for local manufacturing and deepen division of labor. Local manufacturing promotes the development of the wholesale market by providing budget products, various products and a flexible system of production for wholesale markets. Local manufacturing also promotes the upgrading of the market and creates new market demand. Logistics industry can improve the level of market service for customers, reduce total cost of goods, improve reaction speed of market and fully excavate “the third profits”. So, logistics industry can promote the development of the wholesale market and local manufacturing cluster. In conclusion, there are some internal mechanisms of mutual promotion among the wholesale market, local manufacturing cluster and logistics industry. Keywords: 1

Wholesale Market; Local Manufacturing cluster; Logistics Industry; Interaction mechanism

INTRODUCTION

2

Wholesale market is a place where wholesalers, agents or brokers focus on certain types of complementary commodities. It facilitates buying and selling by a single price for commodity. From the practice, there is a tight relationship among wholesale market, local manufacturing and logistics industry. For example, in Zhejiang province of China, there are many different kinds of large-scale wholesale markets, such as Shaoxing textile market, Wujiang silk market, Yongjia coin market and Haining leather market. The wholesale markets above mentioned are based on the cluster development of local manufacturing. At the same time, the huge demand of wholesale markets and local manufacturing clusters induce a booming of logistics industry. Subsequently, the logistics industry enlarges the radiation scope of the wholesale markets and enhances the competitiveness of the local manufacturing clusters. In some other areas, the wholesale markets were set up firstly, and then the logistics industry and related manufacturing clusters began to boom. The typical representatives of these areas are Yiwu city of Zhejiang province and Linyi city of Shandong province. Whether industry clusters leading the development of wholesale markets and logistics industry, or wholesale markets and logistics industry inducing the local manufacturing clusters, there is an internal mechanism among them.

WHOLESALE MARKETS PROMOTES THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE LOCAL MANUFACTURING

2.1 Wholesale markets provide entrepreneurs and primitive capital accumulation for local manufacturing Grasping market information and knowledge is highly dependent on the learning environment, which can be achieved only through “learning by doing”. Wholesale markets provide opportunities of “learning by doing” for market participants, and thus cultivate a group of entrepreneurs who have a concept of market economy and market experience. Linyi city of Shandong province was a backward agricultural area in the past, and the people there were much poor of concept of market economy. It was just the wholesale market which cultivated the people's concept of the market and commodity consciousness. Survey figures show that 80% of business owners ever engaged in business in the professional market. Not only that, when the wholesale market in certain products reaches a large scale, some big wholesalers will transfer commercial profits to the industrial production to save transportation cost. So, the professional wholesale market provides the primitive accumulation of capital for local industry cluster. In Shandong Linyi, there are twenty manufacturing industry clusters based on

13

ICIEES_Book.indb 13

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

diversification of products, specifications, prices and other information to the market information center and spread to all parts of the country, which is a kind of good propaganda for enterprises and products. As far as advertising cost is concerned, some large enterprises are reluctant to invest in advertising due to the higher costs, and the small and medium-sized enterprises have not capacity to advertise. But, wholesale markets can change this situation through the agglomeration effects of advertising, which can enhance corporate brand and get two-fold results with half the effort.

the corresponding professional wholesale market. There are about 60% of the industrial enterprises above designated size completed their primitive capital accumulation in the corresponding professional wholesale market. 2.2

Wholesale markets provide network sales platform for local manufacturing

Being restricted by their financial capacity, the majority of the small and medium-sized enterprises in industrial clusters would not establish their sales network by modern marketing methods like brand building, media, public relations etc. As a shared network sale platform, professional wholesale market provides a kind of market which owns much bigger radiation radius and demand for the enterprises within the industry cluster. Once an enterprise enters the cluster, it can make full use of the radiation of original professional wholesale market to sell their products and expand its sale radius. In Shandong Linyi, there are more than 6000 enterprises directly stationing in wholesale market to sale their products. For example, Jinluo group, the biggest meat products producer, was just a falling collapse refrigeration factory in over ten years ago. Just because of the rising of Linyi non-staple food wholesale market, Jinluo group directly entered the market to sale its products and soon its product sold to all over the country. 2.3

3

The growth and development of local manufacturing clusters provide product support for wholesale markets. Industrial clusters offer a flexible production system for wholesale markets by supplying low price and wide variety of products. So, wholesale markets improve its competitiveness and gain to further enhance. 3.1

Local manufacturing provides low-cost products for wholesale markets

The enterprises within a cluster can share the public infrastructure, the labor market, the public service, and so on. So, the high efficiency of specialization and cluster effects of industrial clusters can reduce transaction costs and the price of the products of local manufacturing is lower than that of the other areas, which is more attractive for businessmen. Certainly, this is also the basis of survival and development of wholesale markets. Artificial board industry cluster in Linyi city of Shandong province is the largest manufacturing base in China. It provides a lowcost supply of products to the plywood wholesale market in Linyi, which is also the biggest one.

Wholesale markets deepen division of labor and improve efficiency of local manufacturing

The nature of scale economy is specialization, and specialization is the basic reason for increasing return to scale (Xiaokai Yang, 1998). According to Smith theorem, “division of labor is limited to market scope”. That is to say, much bigger the market scope is, the more deepening the specialized division of labor becomes. Wholesale market significantly expands the radiation scope of the products of local manufacturing, which improves the degree of labor division and specialization. In addition, wholesale markets gather various production elements and intermediate products, which can reduce various costs such as information searching, transportation and warehousing and improves the economic efficiency of enterprises in industrial cluster. 2.4

LOCAL MANUFACTURING PROMOTES THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE WHOLESALE MARKET

3.2

Local manufacturing provides various products for wholesale markets

Firstly, the industrial clusters continue to expand the breadth and depth of specialization, which can provide all kinds of intermediate products and final products for wholesale markets. Secondly, there are many companies competing with each other in industrial clusters. Enterprises make their products competitive in the market, and they must take a competitive differentiation strategy. They must constantly develop new products and new models. Therefore, industrial clusters can provide a variety of products for wholesale markets by the competition. Finally, the vertical and horizontal expansion of

Wholesale markets provide advertising for local manufacturing

Wholesale markets attract many businessmen at home and abroad, which provides advertising support for enterprises in local manufacturing cluster. At the same time, wholesale market will transmit

14

ICIEES_Book.indb 14

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

industrial clusters lead to the development of products and services can be provided for businessmen. Product variety, complete specification and perfectly ancillary service are important factors, which can attract businessmen and promotes sustainable development of wholesale markets.

China. Compared with other countries, China still has a certain gap. Efficient distribution system can ensure the goods customer required to be delivered on time. Such can improve customer satisfaction and market competitiveness, which can strength marketing and retain customers.

3.3

4.2

Local manufacturing provides a flexible production system for wholesale markets

In the wholesale market, distribution system can connect supply and demand of market. It can make the market inventory concentrated and reduce the total reserve. It can also concentrate small quantity of goods customers need to ensure trucks to be filled. Such can realize scale transport efficiency.

A network organization is formed by the division of labor, cooperation, and close communication on the base of each others’ competition between enterprises. As a part of the industrial clusters, flexible Specialization SMEs are responsive to external stimuli. They are able to quickly change demand information or new technology into products or services to sell on market and adapt to changing market demands, which meets individual needs of consumers. So, such can improve the competitiveness of the wholesale markets. 3.4

4.3

Local manufacturing promotes the upgrading of the market and creates new market demand

4.4

Logistics can fully excavate “the third profits”, namely logistics profit

In the wholesale market, with the increased competition, it will become more and more difficult to gain profit for enterprises by reducing costs, expanding sales. Therefore, the right way is to improve the efficiency of distribution, change in distribution mode and enhance technology. 5

CONCLUSION

The service function and competitiveness of wholesale market will be enhanced with the development of cluster of local manufacturing industry. The local manufacturing can reduce costs of purchase and transportation. The cluster can reduce the manufacturing cost, to a certain extent, it has right pricing. Local manufacturing industry can improve competition ability by the developed wholesale market, because wholesale market not only provides broad distribution channel, but also provides the most agile information of market. With the wholesale market service function being increasingly stronger, and the higher degree of specialization of local manufacturing industry, modern logistics industry will develop faster. On the contrary, the cluster of logistics enterprises will reduce the cost of delivery of local manufacturing industry and wholesale market, which can also

LOGISTICS INDUSTRY PROMOTE THE WHOLESALE MARKET AND INDUSTRIAL CLUSTER

Logistics is an important part of the wholesale market. It provides a convenience for customers, and it makes customer to reduce the cost of buying goods. On the other hand, it also creates employment opportunities and increases income. In short, the effects of logistics on the wholesale market are reflected in the following aspects. 4.1

Logistics can improve reaction speed of market

Perfect system of logistics distribution can rapidly delivery goods, and improve market speed. Some investigation shows that the proportion of time in processing and manufacturing is now only about 10%, but that of delivery is almost 90% in China. Thus, logistics distribution has also a big space to improve.

At the beginning of the wholesale market, the goods sold in wholesale market are much more cheap stuff. With technological progress, industrial cluster is not only provides for wholesale markets’ variety of products, but also provides more topper goods. With the expansion of the industrial clusters, the demand for factors of production is increasing. The regional division of labor and specialization make the enterprises within the industry cluster growing on the “detour” intermediate product market demand, and the new market demand promotes further development of the wholesale market. 4

Logistics can reduce total cost of goods

Logistics improve the level of market service for customers

Timeliness and consistency of delivery is the main factor in creation of service value for customers. At present, the timely rate of delivery is about 90% in

15

ICIEES_Book.indb 15

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

improve the service ability and competition ability of them. The interactive development among the wholesale market, manufacturing industry and logistics has become an important force to promote regional economic development.

[3] Krugman P. Increasing Returns and Economic Geography. The Journal of Political Economy, 1991, (3):483–499. [4] Bromley R. Markets in the Developing Countries: A Review. The Geography, 1971, (56):124–132. [5] Kowaleski M. Local Markets and Regional Trade in Medieval Exeter. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1995.

REFERENCES [1] Marshall A. Principles of Economics, London: Macmillan Press, 1920. [2] Weber A. Theory of the Location of Industries. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1929.

16

ICIEES_Book.indb 16

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

How readers find you in the big data era?—how to increase academic journals’ influential power in big data era Jing Yu Editorial Board of Journal of Chemical Engineering of Chinese Universities, Department of Chemical and Biochemical Engineering, Zhejiang University, Hangzhou, China

Bo Chen Editorial Office of Chinese Journal of Engineering Design, Zhejiang University, Hangzhou, China

ABSTRACT: Big data reshaped the society in many ways both in personal and business related. Evolutions are expected in the academic journals. Just like a drop of water in the sea, academic journals are easily overwhelmed by this information ocean. A question before academic journalists is “How to be more visible?” Changing starts from: how to change work behavior from progressive to aggressive way. Backboned by providing the high-quality academic information, journalists are suggested to focusing on the selection of key words, readers’ habits, online reviews, knowing how to catch eyes, being beneficial from data mining and utilizing, resulting in better scholarly articles, journal quality and visibility. Keywords: 1

Big data; Academic journals; influential power

INTRODUCTION

2

In today’s world, with the rapid development of IT industry, diversified, 3-dimensional media forms exist everywhere. People access to information is not just through the traditional ways like books, magazines, newspapers, radio and television, but more often through internet, mobile phones, weibo, wechat and other new media channels. People are consciously or unconsciously coerced by the sea of information, this is the era of big data. Big data has penetrated into various industries and fields, changed the ways of working and behavior. As an example, document retrieval, an essential part of scientific research, was a tedious and arduous work to do in 1980’s, searching paper based books and magazines manually, and still unable to exhaust all literatures. Nowadays, paper books and magazines are slowly faded, replaced by all kinds of database like SCI, EI, CNKI.net, wanfangdata, cqvip; and search engines like baidu, google. Document retrieval becomes convenient, efficient and comprehensive. The way of how to use literature is changed. The scientific journals, as content providers, shall follow the lead naturally. So, the new challenge faced by scientific journalists is: how the journals not to be overwhelmed by vast information and resources? How to be visible by target readers among big data? Following points are presented to seek answers.

SELECTION OF KEYWORDS

Keywords are the codes of document retrieval among scholarly articles. Most used database search method is through keywords to find articles. Inappropriate selection of keywords may result in poor low retrieval and utilization rate. Some authors are found responsible for not valuing the importance of selecting enough keywords. Therefore, editors shall carefully check if authors had chosen appropriate keywords before publish. It is editors’ obligation to emphasize the importance of keywords, remind authors to provide accurate keywords. Suggestions of increscent keywords being added to cross-disciplinary or application engineering articles are necessary. For cross-disciplinary articles, reasons of increscent keywords are obvious, which allow readers to find the article from multiple angles. Application engineering articles are objectives to be addressed here. In the publishing experiences of Journal of Chemical Engineering of Chinese Universities, many articles are about the basic studies of applications in chemical and pharmaceutical production. Given the high relevancy between contents and upstream material, downstream products, to increase the retrieval rate, key materials and products shall be listed among keywords even if they were not main research objectives. Take the article “Synthesis of 4-methyl-5-formylthiazole” as an example.

17

ICIEES_Book.indb 17

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

5

In this article, 4-methyl-5-formylthiazole, which is a key intermediate for the synthesis of Cefditoren Pivoxil, was synthesized from raw material methyl 3-oxobutanoate via the preparation of an important intermediate 4-methylthiazole-5-carboxylate. Thus, the suitable key words include 4-methyl-5formylthiazole, Cefditoren Pivoxil, 4-methylthiazole -5-carboxylate, methyl 3-oxobutanoate and synthesis. 3

In addition to the above points, Editors are suggested to seizing the opportunity, taking a full advantage of Big Data and online wealth of Data Mining. The Data, from statistics and analyzing modules embedded into websites built by journals, leading databases like SCI, EI, CNKI.net, wanfangdata, cqvip and etc., can be good resources and references to publishing directions and strategies by supplying statistics of writers, papers, issues from different angles. With persistent detail oriented research and work, frequently quoted articles can be found among massive information, high performance scientific research team can be identified, industrial trends and interests can be highlighted, scientists demands can be heard. Efforts of approaching those high performers, inviting them to join peer viewing, engaging them for committed articles, recommending them highly related own journals, promoting journals more efficiently, serving them well, will grown them to be high caliber writers. Therefore, high-quality articles are drawn over.

DEVELOPMENT OF READING HABITS

When DOI became the “standard attribute” of scholarly articles, priority publishing, followed by open access is an important method of new subscriptions’ acquisition, loyal readers’ development. On an independent website, access to 3 latest issues of printing copies and OA (open access) to priority published articles, in addition to allowing readers a convenient free access to scholarly articles, more important is: to attract attentions on journal website(s), develop reading habits. Once reading habits was formed, the spoken journal was naturally planted into readers’ minds. It is same as the buying habits now, whenever speaking of online shopping, Taobao.com and JD.com are normally firstly mentioned. 4

CONVERT READERS TO WRITERS BY ANALYZING BIG DATA

6

CONCLUSION

In the Big Data era, academic journals can attract the high-quality original articles, achieve higher influence power, and boost brand awareness only by the journalists standing on readers’ and writers’ points of view, making wise decisions based on Big Data analyzing, expanding in depth services nature, extending services scopes and improving service efficiency.

DEAL WITH ONLINE REVIEWS

By paying attention to related online reviews, learned from writers, one particular domestic academic website: www.emuch.net is well recognized by the post graduate and PhD students. There’s a column named “Reviews of academic journals” on that website, comments are contributed mostly by the post graduate students from institutions and universities. Those “experienced” reviewers, by revealing their in depth working experiences with publishers and journals, play a leading and influential role to our target writers. Their comments shall not be over looked, they speak for writers. Gain their good opinions; gain writers’ good responses. Therefore, online reviews shall be frequently watched, reviewers’ ideas and expectations shall be understood, online reviews shall be considered by journalists for decision making process.

REFERENCES [1] Zhang Li. 2005. Evolution of literature retrieval and improvement of the journal’s influence. ACTA EDITOLOGICA (2) 17: 124–12. [2] Wang Changdu, Xiong Yun, Xu Jinlong, et al. 2003. On keyword indexing to sci-tech papers ACTA EDITOLOGICA (5) 15: 349–351. [3] Zhou Qinghui, Chen Hongyun, Zhang Jing, et al. 2009. DOI and CrossRef and their impact on scientific periodical publishing. ACTA EDITOLOGICA (1) 29: 67–69.

18

ICIEES_Book.indb 18

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

English education for the young learners in China and Europe J.L. Du & P.F. Yu Guangdong University of Foreign Studies, Guangzhou, Guangdong Province, China

ABSTRACT: This article discusses about the strategy and policy on English education for the young learners in China and Europe. ELT for very young learners is a double-edged sword. Before the establishment of native language acquisition, alien system plays a competitive role. Chinese and English belong to different families while many European languages belong to similar families. The competition between Chinese and English is fiercer than one among European languages. Chinese learners are encouraged to start English education at the age of nine when Chinese acquisition is nearly completed, while European learners are allowed to begin as young as possible. An effective ELT promotes the development of cultural diversity and social cohesion, and strengthens the sense of individual and national identity of young learners. Keywords: 1

English Language Teaching; English education; Chinese acquisition; Confucianism

INTRODUCTION

age is limited to between seven and nine in Estonia, and between seven and ten in Sweden. Both family and school are equally important in young learners’ education. All parents, authoritative or hard-pressed, are far more likely to facilitate the development of competence and self-reliance in young children by providing substantial financial support required during English education. Educators besides parents are responsible for the improvement of pupils’ English education.

English education at a primary school is now compulsory in most regions of China and Europe. With the enforcement of the official document in the year 2001, early English education is gradually on the upsurge in China. In promoting English education as a second language, the Ministry of Education of China in 2001signed An Action Plan for Primary English Education (Jiào j ī èr hào) (http:// www.gov.cn/gongbao/content/2001/content_61196. htm), which expressed official intent to develop English education from the third grade of primary education (between nine to eleven) throughout China except some specific region where Russian and Japanese education were traditionally regarded as the first foreign language education. The official document identifies early English education as an important action to promote the development of cultural diversity and social cohesion and to bring a sense of national identity. In Europe, some countries, e.g. Malta, Norway, Belgium (German-speaking community), Germany (Baden-Württemberg), Italy and Austria, set out the government’s policy framework on foreign language education, in which the first foreign language is compulsory from the age one. Four countries, i.e. Luxembourg, Estonia, Sweden and Iceland, even make second foreign language education compulsory. Some schools are sufficiently flexible to select the starting age in some counties according to pupils’ interests. For example, starting

2

EFFECTIVENESS AND EFFICIENCY IN YOUNG LEARNER EDUCATION

Sufficient contact time is necessary in young learner education. With the development of early English education, more contact time is provided by the family by means of various methods. For example, parents try their best to make their children taught as young as possible. The average time of learning increases due to lowered starting-ages both in China and Europe. Even though sometimes the increase of absolute time develops the language skill, the young pupils feel under a very high overburden pressure. Therefore, more concern should be given to the effectiveness and efficiency in young learner education. Parental pressure advances English education further in China. It is acknowledged that parental pressure in mainland is one of the key factors to foster the expansion of early English education

19

ICIEES_Book.indb 19

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

the curriculum. In addition, age, sex, and verbal IQ interact to affect English absorption (Burman et al. 2013). Besides the elements discussed above, the effectiveness of early language education is also determined by the factors below: starting age, perceived intensity, availability or appropriate materials, financial input, social settings, specific organizations, teachers’ L2 proficiency, class-size and classroom practice, amount of continuing professional development support for teachers, the degree of exposure to the L2 outside the school, the degree of political willingness, availability of national funding, societal attitudes to other-language groups, etc. The effective model and curriculum bring high-quality practice which helps practitioners to understand the beauty of English and consequently make the young learners enjoy the active teaching. Each English educator has to be qualified to become an effective teacher. According to the document signed by the Ministry of Education, there are few concrete regulations requiring teachers to study abroad even though all the English teachers at primary school should at least be the graduates of Middle Normal Schools. However, in a few European countries, e.g. Luxembourg, the special training teachers at primary schools have to go abroad to learn the new educational strategy. Four traditional skills of English education are not fully involved in primary education in China and in some European countries. According to the official document in China, priority should be given to listening and speaking, which are emphasized from the third grade. Pupils are not urged to intensively focus on reading and writing before the fifth or sixth grade (between 11 and 12 years). Reading performance may be explained as the result of applying the same learning mechanisms to the particular input statistics of writing systems shaped by both culture and the exigencies of communicating spoken language in a visual medium (Yang et al. 2009). Writing is a key to understanding second language acquisition in the contexts such as elementary and secondary level content area classrooms (Harklau 2002). Both reading and writing are great skills which need more time and energy to learn and possess. As a result, listening and speaking courses are usually provided before the reading and writing courses. In a few European countries, e.g. Greece, Ireland and Finland, the terms of listening, speaking, reading and writing fail to appear in the curricula, and there is no specific strategy to improve the four traditional skills clearly. In French-speaking Belgium, the Netherlands and Romania, even though not all skills are given a particular concern at primary school, the skill of reading is highlighted.

since parents think a good early beginning is halfdone in language learning. Early language learning has greatly developed since the Action Plan (2001) signed by the Ministry of Education was published. English teaching from Grade Three is increasingly common throughout mainland, and most parents do not see it as superfluous overburden to young pupils. They make their children speak fluently in English by forcing them to follow different English courses as young as possible. Having paid tuition fees, parents would ask the primary schools or tutors to provide English lessons intensively and ask the individual tutors to provide additional modern English education outside the school, which consequently brings a faster implementation of early ELT than expected and drives an increase in testing all through the mainland. According to the statistics, approximately 50% of primary pupils learn English or another foreign language before the third grade. Hope springs eternal optimism in the parents’ breasts. Parents pay for listening, speaking, reading and writing courses for the young pupils and they hope young English learners spend their entire lifetime on studying in order to be respected for themselves and families, which can attach a great importance to the family line expected to be stretched further and better. If English at primary school is to be dropped, parents will worry over the ability of their children and over whether they are able to hold their own in the jungle of careermaking since modern economies place a premium on the educated employees who need to retain a thirst for knowledge of English. The general trend for foreign language learning in primary education is to start earlier and offer more years for the young language learners in Europe. A few countries make the starting age at the kindergarten stage. For example, both Spain and German-speaking part of Belgium require early language education activities to start at age of three. The education of French and German in Luxembourg is called foreign language education even though both languages are official languages and nearly all the children begin learning at the age of two. In some countries, e.g. Finland, school heads and school boards are asked to provide a non-compulsory foreign language to pupils aged 10–11 years and to increase the minimum hours per week. Besides the model, the curriculum can enhance the effectiveness. In China, offering English education at the third grade is not inherently advantageous and effective unless a few factors are involved, e.g. the English teachers are good at working with pupils, language classes are small enough, the language material is adequate and pupils are given a sufficient time for practice in

20

ICIEES_Book.indb 20

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

Sino-Tibetan family, and the competition between Chinese and English is intense. Consequently, the acquisition of Chinese may be considerably influenced by English phonetics, alphabetic characters, grammar, and alien culture before the Chinese system is basically established. This is the reason why European countries encourage the very young foreign language education at primary school while Chinese government, with considering the negative influence of competition between linguistic systems, asks the primary schools to provide the English lessons at Grade Three at which Chinese acquisition is nearly completed. In addition, nonliteral language acquisition is closely and strongly related to the social experience of young learners, and the acquisition will be greatly affected if the learners are not sensitive to metapragmatic knowledge (Bernicot 2007). Multiple teaching models are introduced to improve the effectiveness. Among the models, the increased time and intensity in the form of bilingual or partial immersion education is emphasized during the process of language learning. Besides the unrestricted and dynamic models, the behaviour of educator is another key factor to influence English education.

Besides, there are 17 European countries which give equal priority to listening, speaking, reading and writing. Sufficient authentic learning materials are usually provided to young learners, which is called real materials in real schools. European children have more foreign language contact time than Chinese children. In China, the minimum amount of time devoted to learning English for pupils at primary schools remains about three contact hours per week. However, in Europe, most primary school children receive 30–50 hours of contact time to learn foreign languages. Even though it is not safe to say European pupils with more contact time are better than Chinese learners, constant practice indeed helps to make perfect, especially in listening and speaking. Early English education is an open discussion. Although the general public welcomes foreign language teaching at primary school, early English education has its critics. In mainland, there are fierce debates about whether the native language will suffer from early English learning. There are 56 Chinese consonants and vowels, 26 English alphabets, and 48 English Phonetics (total 130). The majority of critics think that pupils may be confused by the characters if they are urged to study simultaneously from the first grade at primary school. According to the competitive theory, there's a lot of competition between different linguistic systems. The competition between Chinese and English obviously affects the acquisition of native language for young learners. The native language system can be less influenced by alien language system only if the former has nearly been established. This is the reason why the Ministry of Education asks the primary schools to provide English lessons from Grade Three rather than from Grade One. In Europe, many countries encourage the early foreign language learning and a few countries even provide more than one foreign language courses for pupils. According to the data gathered in 2001/02 from a source published in 2004 by EU (http:// ec.europa.eu/education/policies/lang/doc/young_ en.pdf), more than half of pupils began to learn at least one foreign language at primary school stage; about 10% in Estonia, Finland, Sweden and Iceland, and around 80% in Luxembourg learned two or more foreign languages. There is a convincing explanation for the difference between Chinese and European linguistic policies for young learners. European languages usually belong to the same or similar linguistic branches, namely European-Indian family, and they share many linguistic characteristics. As a result, the competition between the native language and foreign language is not so fierce and complete. On the contrary, Chinese belongs to the particular

3

THE ROLE OF TEACHERS IN ENGLISH EDUCATION

Principles should be created to implicitly guide teacher behaviour. The active teaching method is a necessary one which should encourage rather than block the creativity of individual imagination and practices of representation. Most children are eager to enter the marvellous world of speaking and reading in English. There are a lot of principles created to serve English teaching, and empty vessel is a traditional one. According to empty vessel principle, the young learners are considered to be empty vessels. Just like a tap pouring water to the empty container, educators, who adhere to this empty vessel principle, pour knowledge into the passive students who are waiting to be filled. Even though the traditional method has its special function in English education, it is criticized because the young students have no active role in learning. A highly qualified and experienced ELT teacher has to debunk the empty vessel theory of teaching. Drawing the truth out of the pupil is better than filling an empty vessel. An effective teacher can inspire students’ self confidence in English learning. Tell a man he is brave, and you help him to become so. Praise or a correct response from the teacher can help the young learners enhance the validity and efficiency. A teacher should provide

21

ICIEES_Book.indb 21

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

processing system, but rather as a heterogeneous set of artifacts implicated in the cultural and cognitive activities (Cangelosi 2007). Cultural communication is of vital importance in implementing cross-cultural programmes (Yan 2008). Children’s narrative development is considered to be broadly situated in the social contexts, cultural institutions, and practices in which narratives are created and shared with one another (Mistry 1993). Language is used to extend its cultural influence over the young learners. Although there was much lively debate about whether the widespread English should bring serious retrogression of the language culture and about whether the popularity of English should be interpreted as defiance of the great traditional heritage, we believe that both Confucianism and Christianity exert enormous cultural influence over ELT. The social and cultural contexts in which children live affect the course of their language development (Hoff & Tian 2005). Cultural background shapes sensitivity in the liminal perception of Chinese characters (Peng et al. 2010) and increases the strong sense of national identity. Chinese and European students are influenced by their respective cultures and the foreign language learning is obviously the competition and combination of the native language and alien language. L2 users need to understand L2 communication as a cultural process and to be aware of their own culturally based communicative behaviour and that of others (Baker 2012). An educator cannot teach a language for long without coming face to face with cultural context factors which have bearing on language learning and teaching. Without the cultural background, a young learner will experience an identity crisis at an early age. Identity crises are often most acute when cultural identity and social formation collapse. Cultural background may have a special relationship with some intuitions, the universality of which is central to philosophical theories (Lam 2010). Language is the presentation of culture which brings significant differences in gender, experience, attitudes, usage, and self-confidence (Li & Kirkup 2007). Cultural deviation which brings the impact of cross-cultural differences should be given more concern during the ELT (Boers & Demecheleer 2001). English language educators should respect the cultural difference between East and West and regard the exotic pedagogical practice as difference but not as deficit (Le Ha 2004). Without being sensitive to cultural difference, a young learner may produce a grammatically acceptable expression which fails somehow to meet the cultural requirements of object language. The long-term communicative linguistic

positive feedback which is the evidence that the young learners’ efforts at mastering English are effective and that their progress towards achieving an ultimate goal of being native speakers is being made. The praise can enhance the attractiveness of English and boost students’ self-esteem, which will bring the sense of pride and joy for learners. The day-to-day lack of respect that many young learners experience in the classroom may create an atmosphere of personal stress and institutional cynicism, which combines to substantially undermine learners’ confidence. Positive feedback is helpful for pupils. Corrective feedback to children helps them to further refine their underlying language system. A suitably and fully qualified educator should ensure that young learner’s first encounter with English is a positive and pleasurable experience. He should avoid becoming unnecessarily pedantic, excessively pompous, and even unduly patronizing. Educators may encourage the pupils apply what they have learned in classroom in settings outside of school. If young learners cannot appropriately apply the linguistic knowledge to real situation and real world, the ultimate goal of ELT policy fails to be achieved. Meanwhile, educators should help the pupils to set a lifelong goal in learning as Confucius has done. Confucius asked the teachers to set a long-term goal for themselves and students. Shìbùkěyĭbùhóngyì, rènzhòng’érdàoyuˇan—from Lúnyˇu Tàibózhāng. The meaning is that the important thing in a great man’s life is to have a great aim and the determination to attain it despite the difficulties. Nothing is impossible to a willing heart. A qualified teacher should help their students to make and achieve the aim. An effective educator can support pupils to achieve their ultimate goals. Xúnxúnránshànyòurén—from Lúnyˇu Zĭhˇan. Confucian saying means education is not the filling of a pail but the lighting of a fire. Education is just like a thousand-miles-journey which begins with a single step, and a qualified teacher should teach the students step by step. For young learners, plain English without jargon or local authority expressions is more easily understood. An effective teacher should seek to direct the efforts towards meeting the young learners’ needs and wants. English education based on culture transplantation is a strong challenge to primary teachers. 4

CULTURE-INFLUENCED ENGLISH EDUCATION

The development of competence in Standard English is sensitive to the culture. Language is not seen as an isolated and dedicated symbol

22

ICIEES_Book.indb 22

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

school and family are responsible to capturer the essence of education and provide the pupils effective teaching strategy by maximizing contact time, lowing the starting age, increasing perceived intensity, etc. Chinese belongs to Sino-Tibetan family and many European languages, e.g. English, are the branches of Indian-European family. The competition between Chinese and English is fiercer than that among European languages before the acquisition of native language is completed. For Chinese learners, it is a feasible plan to start the English education as young as possible on the condition that Chinese acquisition system is nearly established. Besides linguistic knowledge, culture-based education to young learners is necessary and inevitable. The competition and combination of Confucianism and Christianity advance English education further to young learners in China and Europe.

contact among people can stimulate the natural evolution of language and culture, bringing significant deviation (Wray & Grace 2007). Confucianism, a philosophical system now 2,500 years old, has exerted a considerable influence over Chinese philosophical theology from the times of 500 years before the birth of Christ. It reflects the decent humanity in China and is considered to underlie so much of China’s cultural achievements. For example, according to the Chinese culture, dragon is the totem of Chinese people, and only the Emperor or the King can be called the son of great dragon and the common persons in an ancient time mustn’t use the design related to dragon. This is the reason why many Chinese parents give their children wonderful name with dragon, which reflects their hope for future, e.g. Li Xiaolong, Cheng Long, etc. However, western culture regards dragon as a large imaginary animal that has wings and a long tail and can breathe out fire, which is usually considered to be the guard of treasure in cave. Confucianism influences the absorption of English which is greatly affected by the Christianity. Confucianism is the root of Chinese culture which gives primacy to the public interest/public opinion rather than the spirit of individuals which is the great focus of Christianity. Qiān shòu yì means the modest receives benefit, while the conceited reaps failure, and humility often gains more than pride. As a result, nearly all students keep silence in classroom because they think being silence is the symbol of humility and modest, and speaking loudly to express their feelings is self pride. Chén mò shì j īn means silence is gold and keeping silence is better than speaking loudly. This is the reason why culture-influenced young Chinese students are very hard to speak English loudly in class at the beginning. Each teacher should be aware of the importance of cultural influence. The same culture-controlled teacher should fully understand the difference of cultures and respect the Chinese students’ rights. He can gradually inspire the learners’ great devotion to English learning and a yearning for more alien culture, thus making pupils fully understand English culture of individualism and leading them to a splendid English world. 5

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS This study is supported in part by the Chinese National Social Science Funds (no. 12FYY019 and no. 12FYY021). REFERENCES [1] Baker, W. 2012. From cultural awareness to intercultural awareness: Culture in ELT. ELT Journal, 66(1): 62–70. [2] Bernicot, J. et al. 2007. Nonliteral language forms in children: In what order are they acquired in pragmatics and metapragmatics? Journal of Pragmatics, 39(12): 2115–2132. [3] Boers, F. & Demecheleer, M. 2001. Measuring the impact of cross-cultural differences on learners' comprehension of imageable idioms. ELT Journal, 55(3): 255–262. [4] Burman, D.D., et al. 2013. Age, sex, and verbal abilities affect location of linguistic connectivity in ventral visual pathway. Brain and Language, 124(2): 184–193. [5] Cangelosi, A. 2007. Adaptive agent modeling of distributed language: Investigations on the effects of cultural variation and internal action representations. Language sciences, 29(5): 633–649. [6] Harklau, L. 2002. The role of writing in classroom second language acquisition. Journal of Second Language Writing, 11(4): 329–350. [7] Hoff, E. & Tian, C. 2005. Socioeconomic status and cultural influences on language. Journal of Communication Disorders, 38(4): 271–278. [8] Lam, B. 2010. Are Cantonese-speakers really descriptivists? Revisiting cross-cultural semantics. Cognition, 115(2): 320–329. [9] Le Ha, P. 2004. University classrooms in Vietnam: Contesting the stereotypes. ELT Journal, 58(1): 50–57.

CONCLUSION

Even though early English education is an open discussion, English education for the young learners becomes popular and compulsory in China and Europe. The basic function of language education is to help the pupils establish clear and certain individual and national identity. Both

23

ICIEES_Book.indb 23

4/3/2015 7:08:16 AM

[10] Li, N. & Kirkup, G. 2007. Gender and cultural differences in Internet use: A study of China and the UK. Computers & Education, 48(2): 301–317. [11] Mistry, J. 1993. Cultural context in the development of children's narratives. In J. Altarriba (ed) Advances in Psychology, North-Holland,103: 207–228. [12] Peng, G., et al. 2010. Cultural background influences the liminal perception of Chinese characters: An ERP study. Journal of Neurolinguistics, 23(4): 416–426. [13] Wray, A. & Grace, G.W. 2007. The consequences of talking to strangers: Evolutionary corollaries of

socio-cultural influences on linguistic form. Lingua, 117(3): 543–578. [14] Yan, C. 2008. Mutual adaptation: Enhancing longer-term sustainability of cross-cultural inservice teacher training initiatives in China. System, 36(4): 586–606. [15] Yang, J., et al. 2009. Simulating language-specific and language-general effects in a statistical learning model of Chinese reading. Journal of Memory and Language, 61(2): 238–257.

24

ICIEES_Book.indb 24

4/3/2015 7:08:17 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The teaching effect analysis of professional English for environmental science and engineering based on investigation questionnaire S.J. Feng, D.H. Wang & Y. Xu College of Environmental Science and Engineering, Liaoning Technical University, Fuxin, Liaoning, China

ABSTRACT: It has very important practical significance for the universities of China to open the courses of professional English for science and engineering majors especially for environmental science and engineering. But there exists the phenomenon that overemphasizing the decisive roles of the teachers in the teaching process while ignoring the interactivity of the students in the process of class learning and correct evaluation and examination for the learning effect. This article investigates about the learning ability of the undergraduates of science and engineering universities for specialized English and class teaching effect, analyzes the actual situation, and gives several relative suggestions about educational reforms. Keywords: Environmental Science and Engineering; Professional English; Investigation Questionnaire; Teaching Effect 1

INTRODUCTION

To improve the study interest of professional English for university students is not only the main goal of English teaching, but also the primary means to improve the effectiveness of English teaching. In order to predominate the present situation of professional English teaching effect and the students learning effect on professional English in China’s university, this article implemented a survey study on professional English teaching and learning effects in the three national universities of Liaoning province, By collecting and analyzing feedback information from the students can define the current deficiencies of professional English teaching, can promote the reform process of professional English teaching quality and improve the learning effectiveness of professional English.

Professional English mainly aims to train students to read professional literature in English fluently and the ability to use English for academic exchanges in interrelated professional fields. Professional English teaching has become the crucial link to train cultivating talents with increasingly frequent exchanges of China and the world in academic field. The teaching effectiveness will directly affect the academic ability of the students in foreign exchange field and the employment prospects in future. A questionnaire is a research instrument consisting of a series of questions and other prompts for the purpose of gathering information from respondents. The questionnaire was invented by Sir Francis Galton (Mellenbergh & G.J.). Questionnaires have advantages over some other types of surveys in that they are cheap, do not require as much effort from the questioner as verbal or telephone surveys, and often have standardized answers that make it simple to compile data (Smedts, de Vries & Rakhshandehroo). As the traditional social science research method and tool, the use of questionnaires has entered the scope of linguistics and applied linguistics from the fields of sociology, it can help the researchers to collect information from different aspects (Wallace, Michael J & Brown JD.). In addition to the advantages of information and samples collection, it is facilitate for questionnaires to combine classroom teaching practices and language tests organically (Williams J & Chesterman A.).

2

SURVEY METHOD

Teaching effect of professional English for environmental science and engineering is concerned with the knowledge and awareness of professional English, sell-evaluation of professional English of undergraduates and classroom teaching effect of professional English. The data used in this survey were collected through a questionnaire entitled, “Teaching effect Survey on Environmental Science and Engineering Professional English in Colleges and Universities of China”, that was administered to the undergraduates in the Faculty of Environmental Science and Engineering of Liaoning Technical University, Dalian University of Technology, Shenyang University of Technology and Bohai

25

ICIEES_Book.indb 25

4/3/2015 7:08:17 AM

Table 1.

Sample design, survey mode and completed interview.

Study population Sampling Target number of samples Survey mode Survey period Completed interviews

Liaoning Technical University

Dalian University of Technology

Shenyang University of Technology

Bohai University

Junior 2-stage sampling 50 Face-to-face interview 2011/06/10-06/30 48

Sophomore 2-stage sampling 50

Junior 2-stage sampling 50

Senior 3-stage sampling 50

2011/10/12-10/30 48

2012/06/01-06/25 47

2012/03/25-04/26 49

For the textbooks which the students used in professional English class, 67.2% of the students considered that the textbooks, which they referenced in classroom scheduled by universities were very difficult and 68.2% of the students preferred original English textbook. In terms of the assessment methods for professional English, most students preferred the exam mode that combined Spoken English with Written Chinese. About 33% of the students believed that the main purpose of learning professional English is to search and read foreign materials and literatures of their academic fields fluently and 27.1% of the students considered that the main purpose of learning professional English is to lay the foundation for their further studies. This survey proportion showed that most of the students can acquaint the main purpose and practical significance of professional English Courses, but 15.6% of the students considered that the main purpose of learning professional English is to pass the CET who had seriously psychological attributions in CET examination. As for learning path of professional English, almost 50% of the students preferred to adopt self-oriented approach to learn and with the teacher’s tutor as the supplemented aids. Another 8.9% of the students preferred completely independent learning, 18.2% of the students prefer to rely entirely on the teacher Speaker learning.

University from 2011 to 2012. Information on the sampling technique, survey mode and sample size in the universities are presented in Table 1. The questionnaire included items on undergraduates’ attitudes toward professional English teaching and examination mode, recognition of professional English learning, self-evaluation on professional English learning effect and evaluation on professional English teaching effect. The temporal scale was divided into the past, present and future, while the spatial scale contained four categories including neighborhood, region and country (Fuxin, Jinzhou, Shenyang and Dalian). The total of 5 question items (30 questions) were related to learning motivation, teaching methods evolution, spoken and professional knowledge of the teacher, course contents, experience or intention of professional English independent study, and 5 questions were designed on the basis of the different combinations of temporal and spatial divisions. In addition to attitudinal questions, demographic attributes such as gender, native place, parental education and senior middle school were included in the questionnaire. 3

RESULTS

3.1

Attitude and recognition on professional English learning

Most of the undergraduates support their university to set professional English class, and 75% of them believed that it is very necessary to learn specialized English for environmental science and engineering. About 43.2% of the students hope to learn professional English in the third year of college, and only a small part of students considered that there is no any sense in learning professional English which accounted for 5.2% of the total number. During face-to-face interview investigation process, the investigators discovered that almost all the students who disapproved to learn professional English are of those students who had not passed the CET (College English Test Band 4 and Band 6) and they bored English since they were in high school.

3.2

Self-evaluation on professional English learning

About 40% of the students considered that the most important factors to influence the learning effect of professional English are the level of professional knowledge and spoken English of the lectures. Moreover, 39.6% of the students considered that they are mainly depended on teacher’s guidance in professional English class. While only 18.8% of the students can take part in the activities positively in professional English class. This shows that the professional English teaching in colleges and universities emphasis on the decisive role of teachers and ignore the interactive learning process of the students in the classroom. The students who considered

26

ICIEES_Book.indb 26

4/3/2015 7:08:17 AM

students still holding indifferent attitude on professional English study and 13.5% of the students consider that professional English study did not play any role in helping to improve their English proficiency. This shows that, although the students had a correct recognition on professional English, but it did not reflect their independent study interest and some students gradually abandoned the motivation to participate in classroom interaction study initiatively because of their weak English foundation. Some students even never practise the supplementary reading exercise in their afterschool time. These cases should attract the attention of professional English teachers who should adopt some corresponding measures to encourage and guide students to learn English positively and initiatively which would be directly related to the teaching quality and teaching effect of professional English.

that professional English teaching can improve their English level accounted for about 30.2% and those who considered that professional English teaching can expand their professional knowledge and improve their ability to read foreign literature and communicate capacity with experts and scholars in the field of environmental science and engineering accounted for about 30.3% and 46.9%, respectively. 3.3

Evaluation on professional English teaching effect

In the 192 valid questionnaires of the survey, 31.3% of the students believed that their motivation to learn professional English actually was a direct result of their own excellent English foundation, while 20.8% of the students paid more attention to the oral English level of the teacher. After the system learning of professional English courses, 46.9% of the students can grasp more than 100 professional English vocabularies and 61.5% of the students believed that the professional English teaching should be supplemented with grammar teaching synchronously so can obtain satisfactory teaching results. More than half of the students thought it was reasonable to provide 60 class hours in professional English courses, and 40.1% of the students considered that the teaching model is an important factor to affect the teaching effect. Moreover, 30.7% of the students believed that such teachers should be well qualified for their jobs which are marked not only with their solid foundation of professional vocational knowledge, excellent teaching skills and outstanding achievements, but also with their humane attainments on the base of assimilating a rich knowledge of environmental science and engineering. 4

4.2

Take multimedia utilization and network resources as a useful complement to professional English teaching

From the statistical data of the questionnaire, almost 70% of the students consider that it is necessary to carry out multimedia instruction which act as the assistance method for professional English teaching. Moreover, almost all the students who interviewed admit that there hardly any multimedia assistance teaching method on their professional English class even without the teaching mode based on the network teaching platform which carried by the professional English teacher. It shows that the students have shown strong antipathy on currently traditional presentation mode of professional English, which mainly pursue instructor, platform and blackboard as the main teaching methods. It is imperative for the students to use multimedia assistance teaching method and network resources to learn professional English independently and read English materials. In order to adapt to these requirements of the students in colleges and universities, the professional English teaching should make full use of multimedia aids and combined with the appropriate network resources as a useful supplement simultaneously.

CONCLUSIONS

This study revealed that the diversity and preference of professional English learning of the undergraduates as well as the currently defects of professional English teaching in colleges and universities in China. The author analyzed the students’ attitudes toward satisfaction with their specialized English class and can reached the following four conclusions. 4.1 The students had a clear recognition on study attitude of professional English. It is urgent for us to guide the students correctly and develop their study interest on professional English

4.3

Reform the traditional assessment methods of professional English and adopt a comprehensive examine criteria that combine written examination with oral examination

From the analyses of questionnaire, we can learn that the recognition and the attitude of students on English learning are constitutively correct and they can definite the important significance of professional English. However, 19.8% of the

By the statistics of this survey, more than 50% students prospect a new assessment mode of the examination which can combine written examination with oral examination in view of the practice applicability of professional English. The students’

27

ICIEES_Book.indb 27

4/3/2015 7:08:17 AM

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

appeal is realistic, so the examination of professional English learning effect should adjustment appropriately compared with the traditional English exam. But we must note that this new exam method should distinguish with the examination content of CET especially in listening, speaking, reading, writing and language grammar, etc. The new exam mode of professional English should focus on the application of specialized vocabulary, ability of English literature reading and international communication skills in professional academic fields. 4.4

This study is supported by Liaoning Province Educational Fund Assistance Item (no: 5013945). Name of the Fund: Specialized Subject Construction of Experimental Reform Units on Undergraduate Engineering Talent Cultivation of Colleges and Universities in Liaoning Province of China. REFERENCES [1] Mellenbergh & G.J. Chapter 10: Tests and Questionnaires: Construction and administration. The Netherlands: Johannes van Kessel Press, 2008: 211–236. [2] Smedts, de Vries & Rakhshandehroo, et al. High maternal vitamin E intake by diet or supplements is associated with congenital heart defects in the offspring, 2009, 116(3): 416–423. [3] Wallace & Michael J. Action Research for Language Teachers. London: Cambridge University Press, 1998. [4] Brown J D. Understanding Research in Second Language Learning. CUP, 1988. [5] Williams J & Chesterman A. The MAP: A Beginners Guide to Doing Research in Translation Studies. Manchester: St. Jerome Press, 2002.

Professional English teachers should strengthen and improve their ability on professional knowledge and spoken English

The survey questionnaire show that the level of professional knowledge and spoken English of the teacher are the important factors for the undergraduates to learn a foreign language aggressively as well as to improve the ability of foreign language literature reading and searching in their specialized academic fields. Consequently, the level of spoken English and professional knowledge of the teacher will directly affect the classroom interaction effect and the self-study capable of the students on professional English learning.

28

ICIEES_Book.indb 28

4/3/2015 7:08:17 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The relation between equity incentives and earnings management in China Yang Cai & Lin Zhang Harbin University of Commerce, Harbin, China

ABSTRACT: Taken Chinese A-share listed firms that implement equity incentives in 2011 as samples, this study empirically researches the relation between equity incentives and earnings management in China. The cross-section modified Jones model is used to measure the degree of earnings management. Then, the paired sample T test and multiple linear regression method are used in the analysis. The results show that the listed firms widely manipulate downward earnings management before the announcement of equity incentive plans. Oppositely, the reported earnings are manipulated upward after the equity incentives are granted. Moreover, the degree of earnings management is positively related to the sum of equity incentives. Keywords: 1

Equity incentives; Earnings management; Discretionary accruals; Modified Jones model

INTRODUCTION

Cheng and Warfield (2005) examined the relation between managers’ equity incentives and earnings management, and they find that managers with high equity incentives are more likely to engage in earnings management and sell shares in the future. Bergstresser and Philippon (2006) find evidence that earnings are more likely to be manipulated through discretionary accruals when CEO’s total compensation is more closely tied to the value of the shares. Xu Xuexia (2013) suggests that the earnings management is positively related to equity incentives in the growth period of the firm, but in the mature period, the relation is no longer significant. Thus, this study seeks to determine the relation between equity incentives and earnings management of listed firms in Chinese A-share stock market through empirical analysis, in order to provide some reference for the participants in Chinese capital market.

Equity incentive mechanism is an effective way to solve the principal-agent problem, which plays a positive role in enhancing the governance structure, reducing agency costs and improving the management level. Starting in 2006, the Ministry of Finance, CRSC and SASAC have issued a series of regulations about the equity incentive mechanism, which provide legal protection for the implementation of equity incentives in Chinese listed firms from the institutional level. From then on, more and more firms start to provide equity incentives to the managers and core employees. By the end of 2013, the number of equity incentive plans released in Chinese stock market is 597. However, the implementation of equity incentives may cause some problems, such as the self-interest motivation of earnings management. Most of the exercise conditions of the equity incentive plans are accounting performance indicators, and the exercise equity price highly depends on the business performance and accounting surplus information of the firm. Therefore, managers may manipulate the reported earnings to meet the exercise conditions or influence the stock price towards the direction of their favour, which makes equity incentives become the welfare-transporting channel and bring a new moral risk to the managers. This phenomenon appears in the capital market of many countries and is confirmed by some prior studies. Jensen (2004) suggested that the equity-based exposure might motivate managers to manage their earnings in order to increase the short-term stock price.

2

HYPOTHESES DEVELOPMENT

In China, the released equity incentive plans are mainly composed of the stock options and restricted stock. The income of stock option mainly comes from the difference between exercise price and market price. In order to get high profits, managers are likely to manipulate down the earnings before the announcement date of equity incentive plan to reduce the exercise price. In the exercise period, reported earnings are more likely to be manipulated upward to increase the market price. In addition, the exercise conditions of stock options are

29

ICIEES_Book.indb 29

4/3/2015 7:08:17 AM

2. Due to the particularity of financial and insurance industry, the listed firms in the two industries are eliminated; 3. The PT, ST firms and other firms that are reserved or rejected by the certified public accountants are eliminated; 4. Some abnormal or missing data are eliminated.

usually an accounting performance, which always use the performance of the previous year as a benchmark. As a result, managers have the motivation of manipulating downward the earnings of previous year to reduce the benchmark indicators, so as to meet the exercise conditions smoothly. The restricted stock is also in the same way. Thus, we construct two hypotheses as follows: H1: The listed firms manipulate downward earnings before the announcement of equity incentive plans. H2: The listed firms manipulate upward earnings after the equity incentives are granted. With the equity incentives are more and more adopted in Chinese listed firms, the equity incentive part has a growing proportion among the entire compensation. From the perspective of the incented personnel, the more equity incentives are the better, because more equity incentives bring more potential benefits in the future. Even if they did not meet the exercise conditions, they can give up the exercise of stock options or repurchase restricted stock to avoid the loss. We can easily infer that, the managers with the higher equity incentives have greater motivation to manipulate reported earnings. Moreover, when the managers’ wealth is more sensitive to the changes of stock price, the reported earnings are more likely to be manipulated. Thus, we construct the second hypothesis as follows: H3: The degree of earnings management is positively related to the sum of equity incentives. Compared with the traditional incentive ways, equity incentive is a kind of long-term incentive mechanism. The exercise duration time has a certain influence to the income and risk of equity incentives. Under normal circumstances, the managers are more likely to shorten the exercise duration time in order to implement the firm’s performance indicators and maximize their own interests as soon as possible. If the exercise duration time is short, it will be easier for the managers to manipulate accounting earnings to meet the exercise conditions. Oppositely, long exercise duration time will increase the difficulty of earnings management. Thus, we construct the fourth hypothesis as follows: H4: The degree of earnings management is negatively related to the exercise duration time. 3

After the selection, 78 samples are remaining. The incentive mode and amplitude information mainly comes from the annual report of Chinese equity incentives and “www.cninfo.com.cn”. The financial information of the listed firms mainly comes from the RESSET database. In this study, the empirical analysis method is taken, and the regression model is constructed. The variables in the model are presented in Table 1. The description of each variable is shown as follows. 1. Dependent variable: The dependant variable is the degree of earnings management, which is usually represented by Discretionary Accruals (DA). According to the prior studies, DA are mostly calculated by Jones model or modified Jones model. In this study, the cross-section modified Jones model is taken, and the calculating steps are as follows: First of all, the entire accruals are calculated the according to the cash flows: GA Ai ,t = EBXI XI i ,t CFO Oi ,t

(1)

TA Ai ,t = NII i ,t − CFO Oi ,t

(2)

Ai ,t = total accruals before the below-thewhere GA line items for firm i in year t; TA Ai ,t = total accruals including the below-the-line items for firm i in year t; EBXI XI i ,t = the operating income for firm i in year t; NII i ,t = net income for firm i in year t; CFO Oi ,t = net cash flow from operating activities for firm i in year t. Then the linear regression and OLS method is taken by the divisions of year and industry:

Table 1.

Defination of variables.

Dependent variable Independent variables

MODEL CONSTRUCTION

In order to guarantee the validity and timeliness of the sample data, we select the sample data according to the following principles: 1. All the listed firms in Shanghai and Shenzhen A-share stock market that release equity incentive plans in 2011 and successfully implement the plans;

Name

Symbol

earnings management equity incentives exercise duration time total assets return on equity asset-liability ratio board size ownership concentration

DA SCOPE EDT LNSIZE ROE DBET LNBD TOP5

30

ICIEES_Book.indb 30

4/3/2015 7:08:17 AM

GA Ai ,t ΔREV Vi ,t FA Ai ,t 1 = β1 t + β 2,t + β 3,t + ξi ,t Ai ,t −1 Ai ,t −1 Ai ,t −1 Ai ,t

sample T test and multiple linear regression. The analysis results are shown as follows:

(3)

4.1

where Ai ,t −1 = total assets for firm i in year t − 1; ΔREV Vi ,t = changes in revenue for firm i in year t; FA Ai ,t = fixed assets for firm i in year t; ξi ,t = error term for firm i in year t; β1,t , β 2,t , β 3,t = coefficients in year t. Then, the non-discretionary accruals (NDA) are calculated using the β1,t , β 2,t , β 3,t coefficients from Equation (3). ⎛ ΔREV Vi ,t ΔREC Ci ,t ⎞ 1 NDA Ai ,t = β,t + β 2 ,t ⎜ ⎟ Ai ,t A ⎝ ⎠ i ,t −1 FA Ai ,t  + β 3,t Ai ,t −1

The descriptive statistics of DA are presented in Table 2. From Table 2, we can find that, in 2011, the mean value of DA is about −0.0024, which is negative. In 2012, the mean value of DA is about 0.117, which is positive. The comparison suggests that the earnings are widespread manipulated downward before the equity incentives plans are released. Meanwhile, the earnings are widespread manipulated upward after the equity incentives plans are granted. The value of DA in 2011 is only a bit smaller than zero. One possible reason is that most of the listed firms make earnings management more or less in China. Another reason may be that some firms released equity incentive plans at late 2011, and they may manipulate the earnings in the previous quarters rather than a year ago. Overall, the results in Table 2 provide preliminary evidence for H1 and H2, which shows that there is a reversal on earnings management around the time when the equity incentive plans are announced.

(4)

Ai ,t = non-discretionary accruals for firm where NDA i in year t; ΔREC Ci ,t = changes in accounts receivables for firm i in year t. Finally, the discretionary accruals are calculated: DA Ai ,t =

TA Ai ,t − NDA Ai ,t Ai ,t −1

Descriptive statistics

(5)

4.2 Paired-samples T test 2. Independent variables: There are seven independent variables in the model. Two main variables are equity incentives (SCOPE) and Exercise Duration Time (EDT). SCOPE is represented by the proportion of incentive stocks among the total stocks of the firm. EDT is the interval time starting from the equity is granted to the equity can be sold freely. On the basis of the prior studies, we also choose some controlling variables, including LNSIZE (the natural logarithm of the firm’s total assets), ROE (return on equity in the previous year), DAR (asset-liability ratio in the previous year), LNBD (natural logarithm of the board size), TOP5 (ownership concentration, represented by the sum of top 5 shareholders’ share-proportion). At last, the multiple linear regression model is established to analyze the relation between the equity incentives and earnings management. DA Ai ,t = α 1 + α 2 × SCOPE + α 3 E EDT + α 4 × LNSIZE Ei ,t,t + α 5 × ROE Ei ,t − + α 6 × DAR Ri ,t 1 + α 7 LNBDi ,t + α 8 × TOP5i ,t + ζ i

In order to provide more evidence for H1 and H2, the paired sample T test is used to find out whether the earnings management is made before and after equity incentives plan is released. The results are presented in Table 3. From Table 3, we can find that the DA difference value between 2011 and 2012 is mainly negative, and the mean value is about −0.119. The probabilistic value (0.001) is significant at the 1% level, which shows that the degree of earnings management around the announcement of equity incentive plans is significantly different. To sum up, H1 and H2 are verified based on the results in Table 2 and Table 3.

Table 2.

Mean 2012 DA 2011 DA

(6)

Table 3.

4

Descriptive statistics of DA.

EMPIRICAL ANALYSIS

Several statistic methods are used in the empirical analysis, including descriptive statistics, paired

ΔDA

Std. Maximum Minimum deviation

0.11692 0.72956 −0.00237 0.32452

−0.17231 −0.35175

0.14374 0.12433

Results of paired sample T test. Mean

Std. deviation

T

Sig.

−0.1193

0.1564

−7.4833

0.001

31

ICIEES_Book.indb 31

4/3/2015 7:08:18 AM

Table 4.

Coeffiecients SCOPE EDT LNSIZE ROE DAR LNBD TOP5 Adjust R2 F Sig.

4.3

management of Chinese listed firms is studied in this study. We find evidence that the incentivized managers have a strong motivation to manipulate reported earnings before and after the announcement of equity incentive plan, and the direction of earnings management behavior is opposite. Further regression analysis shows that the managers with more equity incentives are more likely to engage in higher-level earnings management. Therefore, the listed firms should take this problem into a consideration in the design of managers’ equity incentive plans. In addition, a series of measures should be taken, such as perfecting the internal governance structure, strengthening the information disclosure, and improving the external regulating environment. The key point is to strengthen the supervision and to penalize the illegal or fake manipulation behavior, so as to promote the healthy development of the capital market.

Results of regression analysis. Value

Std. error

T test

−0.564 0.089 0.093 0.014 0.397 −0.184 0.105 0.196

0.300 −1.890 0.331 1.942 0.021 2.263 0.012 1.182 0.093 9.693 −0.049 −4.094 0.075 1.411 0.890 2.200 0.233 4.136 0.001

Sig. 0.062 0.024 0.062 0.240 0.001 0.002 0.072 0.030

Multiple Regression

In order to verify H3 and H4, the multiple regression analysis is taken in SPSS 19, and the results are presented in Table 4. As can be seen from Table 4, the regression model is significant at the 1% level, which shows that there is a linear relation between dependent and in dependent variables. Although the value of adjusted R2 is 0.233, which is relatively low, that is because the value of DA itself is calculated through regression. Otherwise, the equity incentives are not the exclusive motivation of earnings management. Thus, the results in Table 4 are receivable. From Table 4, the amplitude of equity incentives coefficient SCOPE is positive and significant at the 5% level, which shows that more equity incentives brings higher-level earnings management. Thus H3 is verified. The exercise duration time coefficient EDT is significant at the 10% level, but the value is positive, which is contrary to H4. The possible reason is that the equity incentives mechanism of Chinese listed firms is not reasonable enough, leading to weakening the "bound" effect of equity incentives, also the governance structure of listed firms and the professional quality of managers leave much to be desired. In addition, we can see that the degree of earnings management is positively related to the firm’s return on equity, ownership concentration and board size at the 1%, 5%, 10% level, respectively. The degree of earnings management is negatively related to the firm’s asset-liability ratio at the 1% level. The relation between earnings management and the firm’s total assets is not significant. 5

REFERENCES [1] Bergstresser, D. & Philippon, T. 2006. CEO incentivess and earnings management. Journal of Financial Economics, 80 (3), 511–529. [2] Cheng, Q. & T. Warfield. 2005. Equity incentivess and earnings management. Accounting Review, 80, 441–476. [3] Crocker, K. & Slemrod, J. 2007.The Economics of Earnings Manipulation and Managerial Compensation. Journal of Economics 38(3): 698–713. [4] Daniel, B. & Philippon, T. 2006. CEO incentivess and earnings management. Journal of Financial Economics (80):811–850. [5] Dechow, P.M., Sloan, R. G. & Sweeny, A. 1995. Detecting earnings management. The Accounting Review 70(2): 193–225. [6] Gu F. & Zhang L. 2011. Empirical Research On The Relation Between Information Disclosure Quality and Earnings Management of Listed Firms. Academic Exchange(12):77–80. [7] Jensen, M. C. 2004. The agency costs of overvalued equity and the current state of corporate finance. European Financial Management 10(4): 549–565. [8] Kim J. & Yi C. H. 2006. Ownership structure, business group affiliation listing status, and earnings management: Evidence from Korea. Contemporary Accounting Research 23(2): 428–464 [9] Richardson V. J. & Waegelein J. F. 2002. The influence of long-term performance plans on earnings management and firm performance. Review of Quantitative Finance and Accounting 18: 161–183. [10] Tsai C.-C., Wu C.-C. & Chang R.-D. 2012. Effects of overvalued equity and managerial incentivess on corporate policy. Emerging Markets Finance & Trade 48 (Supplement 1): 74–87. [11] Xu X.-X., Wang Z.-Y. & Guo D.-D. 2013. Empirical research on the relation between equity incentives and earnings management—using life cycle of firm as regulated variable. Contemporary Economic Research 07: 81–86.

CONCLUSIONS

Taken the A-share listed firms that successfully implement the equity incentives in Shanghai and Shenzhen stock markets in 2011 as samples, the relation between equity incentives and earnings

32

ICIEES_Book.indb 32

4/3/2015 7:08:20 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Preliminary study on the construct “Information Management and Information System” major of the new local undergraduate colleges Ling Li Department of Information Technology, Sichuan Tourism University, Chengdu, Sichuan, China

ABSTRACT: The new local undergraduate colleges and universities goal are to train the applied talents. Department of information technology of Sichuan tourism university is to serve the tourism industry, the local economy on “Information Management and Information Systems” professional training “technology-oriented” information management and information system professionals. This article needs for the development of tourism economy in Sichuan, exploration of the tourism information cultivation orientation of application talents, professional ability, and to design the appropriate curriculum. Keywords: Information management and information system; applied talent; Educational objectives; Ability structure; Cultivation system 1

INTRODUCTION

The History and the Present: a undergraduate professional “Information Management and Information System.” The origin of Information Management and Information System can be traced back to “technological intelligence” professional of the 1950s. The “Information Management and Information System”, the professional name, officially appears, when the Ministry of Education in 1998 adjusted for professional, original “Economic Information Management”, “information science”, “information technology”, “Management Information Systems”, “forestry information management”, “Medical information Science” (six undergraduate majors in 1993 “ordinary undergraduate colleges directory”), unified merged into “Information Management and Information System” undergraduate. In 2012, “ordinary universities undergraduate catalog (2012)”, issued by the Ministry of Education, the “Information Management and Information System” undergraduate is under the “management science and engineering,” as a discipline, may be granted to “management” degree or “engineering” degree. Information Management and Information System, through decades of development, more than 600 colleges and universities have set up this profession [3], which to cultivate a large number of senior technical personnel for the state and society, they made a profound impact in the economic development, organization management and business operation activities. Because of the different angles and methods of information systems research, currently on the professional

Sichuan Tourism University is the newly-built local colleges which merge colleges Sichuan Higher Institute of Cuisine and Sichuan Academy of Agricultural cadre management in March 29, 2012, the Ministry of Education formally approved its establishment, following the formal establishment of the Ministry of Education colleges in April 26, 2013. The Institute “based in Sichuan, face western, national service”, training application-oriented talents, focusing on the development of tourism, food science majors, promoting tourism development, economic development and social progress of Sichuan. Computer information management specialist professional, was officially started in the year 2003 by College of Information technology, launching the research, exploration and practice of catering and tourism industry information research talent training mode, find the way out of a unique Applied Talents sustainable development [1], accumulating some experiences about starting “Information Management and Information system” applicationoriented professional. But how service the local economy and tourism economy of Sichuan, repositioning undergraduate major “Information Management and Information System” applicationoriented personnel’s training objectives and training specifications? How to build a scientific and rational course training system? Yet when we build the new undergraduate majors, from multiple angles about professional historical heritage and reality needs, carefully researching, seriously thinking.

33

ICIEES_Book.indb 33

4/3/2015 7:08:20 AM

use the core technology in the industry to solve business problems. Three types of application-oriented talents ability structure and jobs have a certain degree of overlapping and complex, face to different levels of students. In general, skill oriented application talents is trained mainly by the higher vocational training schools; technology-oriented personnel is largely trained by undergraduate schools, especially Applied Undergraduate Colleges [4]. Sichuan Institute of Tourism is a very distinctive characteristics of the industry newly-built local universities, which is used to develop “technology-oriented” applied talents as the main educational goals. According to the structure of three types of criteria, applied talents capability, combining the analysis of the ability to structure about the needs of the tourism industry of information technology professionals, “Information Systems and Information Management” is positioned as a professional training the “technology-oriented” talent in the business management, information management and utilization of information systems development and management and maintenance. Thus, the tourism industry background information into the “Information Management and Information System” professional target location is:

development and research, the formation of three pillars: Tsinghai University and Tonkin University, represented by science and engineering colleges, emphasizing systems development, program design knowledge, focusing on computer Science and Technology; Wuhan University and Peking University are a comprehensive university representatives, emphasizing informatics, information science and other knowledge, focusing on information and intelligence; Rennin University of China, a northeast fiscal greatly Financial College, is the representative which stressed the economic knowledge management, and focusing on economic information management [2]. 2

THE TARGET OF THE “INFORMATION MANAGEMENT AND INFORMATION SYSTEM” TOURISM INDUSTRY APPLIED TALENTS

As an application oriented universities, colleges have made clear positioning of the Applied Talents for Information Management and Information System, but how to understand the “applicationoriented talents”? Society classified talented person from different angles: analyzed from the purpose of production or work activities, the talent of modern society can be divided into four types: academic (theoretical model), project-based, technology-based and skillbased. Actually, the need of society applied talents into three types, namely the “dominant application-oriented engineering”, “technology-driven application-oriented” and “skill-led applied”. From the information management and information systems professionals, personnel structure, “leading engineering applications” talent is mainly engaged in the enterprise information system analysis, planning, organization and management, and the development of technical work and a small part of the information system application skills work, can apply the main of information technology and core skills of management and information systems professional field; “technology-driven application-oriented” talent is mainly engaged in the business management, technology development, information management, data processing, decision support and information systems development, system design, implementation, deployment, and a certain amount of skill work, this type understands the main concepts of the professional engineering field and to master some core skills of the industry; “skill-led applied” talent is mainly engaged in the production line operation of information systems, business data management, daily management and maintenance work, this type skillfully

“The professional trains new applications of information technology tourism industry professionals, who are able to adapt to the modern construction of tourism development and local economic construction, social development, all-round development, to master modern management, computer science, basic theory and basic knowledge of tourism school, to have the ability of business management, information systems management and application, and the technology development, in travel agencies and other organizations enterprises, to become the major human resources in the field, at the same time, to have a good sense of innovation and entrepreneurial quality to make a further contribution in the filed”. 3

“INFORMATION MANAGEMENT AND INFORMATION SYSTEM” TOURISM INDUSTRY APPLIED TALENTS PROFESSIONAL COMPETENCE STRUCTURE

Sichuan is rich in the tourism resources, tourism is developing rapidly, in 2010, a total tourism revenue reached 188.6 billion Yuan, tourism comprehensive strength ranks first in western, and the tourism industry has become one of the six pillars of economic development in Sichuan Economic [5]. Tourism industry is information-

34

ICIEES_Book.indb 34

4/3/2015 7:08:20 AM

for the core competence of professionals, in the curriculum system design, each specific capacity corresponds to a set of courses, to constitute a teaching module, to complete the appropriate training.

intensive industries, tourism information effectively support the development of tourism. “Wisdom Tour” is the Chinese tourism economy; it is the engine that makes a higher level of Sichuan tourism economic. Industrial ecology tourism economy, at least includes industry management departments, service enterprises, tourism consumers tripartite. Three have information needs, industry management departments need to process large amounts of collected data in tourism economy, strengthen macromanagement of the industry; services enterprises need to enhance the user experience, improve management efficiency in wisdom scenic construction and business management; tourism consumers need to consume tourism products, fast and easy to understand and experience. Tourism information is the three aspects of information technology. First, the management of information technology, industry management information technology and business management information technology, such as the “135” project of “1” (one center “Travel Data Center”), launched by Sichuan Provincial Tourism Bureau, and management information systems in each enterprises and so on. Second, information technology services, including scenic construction of intelligent and user experience aspects of digital construction, such as the wisdom of scenic construction, virtual scenic construction. Third, business service information, to make E-commerce platform for building enterprise as features. Three aspects of information technology constitute the information ecology of the tourism economy, organically joining management of the industry, business, user experience together to promote tourism economy. With the development of tourism information, as required by the tourism industry, “Information Management and Information System” professionals also have the ability to demand a new connotation. Tourism industry, “Information Management and Information Systems” core competencies of professionals is constituted by the three aspects: First, the information management capacity; Second, information systems planning and development capabilities; Third, the ability to use information and information systems. 4

4.1

The theoretical curriculum system

Public compulsory, discipline-based, professional compulsory, elective courses constitute theory Course System, which is used to constitute three knowledge teaching modules: 1. Industrial Management and basics of subject: Specific information system cannot be established and better applied if information manager does not understand the specific business process and working process. The teaching module courses include: management, economics, tourism financial management, tourism enterprise operation and management, modern service industry management, introduction to tourism, and so on. 2. Knowledge of information management and processing: This module includes: information collection, information retrieval, management, storage, modeling, analysis, statistics, organization and management, and knowledge of manufacturing operation. The teaching module courses include: advanced mathematics, linear algebra, probability theory and mathematical Statistics, operations research, management statistics, information storage and retrieval organization, information resources management, computer in economic management applications, data warehouse and data mining, mutual maintenance of data center operations, information systems security, tourism enterprise e-commerce, organizational behavior, statistical analysis software application, and so on. 3. Application and development of information systems: This module includes: information systems planning, design, development and maintenance of information systems, knowledge application. The teaching module courses include: operating system, network technology, data structure, database principles and applications, programming, management information systems, information systems analysis and design, things control technology and application, website construction technology and application, electronic and electrical foundation, Human sympathetic mobile technology, mobile application development, tourism business e-commerce, media production software, animation, net programming, and so on.

“INFORMATION MANAGEMENT AND INFORMATION SYSTEM” TOURISM INDUSTRY APPLIED TALENTS COURRICULUM SYSTEM

“Information management capabilities”, “Information systems planning and development capabilities”, and “the ability to use information and information systems”, are the three capabilities

35

ICIEES_Book.indb 35

4/3/2015 7:08:20 AM

4.2

The key of application-oriented talents training system is to find a professional position, which is to train what kind of person? If you have an accurate professional target position, you can design a scientific and rational personnel training programs. According to this article personnel training program, students after graduation can engage in business management, data processing, information management, information systems design, development of small-scale information systems, large-scale information system implementation and maintenance work. Of course, for meeting the training needs of the employer’s applicationoriented talents, during the implementation of the training program, we must handle expertise updates, teacher training, teaching practice base construction and so on, to ensure the achievement of training objectives.

The practical course system

Practice teaching of “Information Management and Information System” includes courses curricular experiments, curriculum design and comprehensive experiment, extracurricular activities, professional practice (awareness training), graduation practice and graduation design and other sectors. 1. Course experiment. It includes program design, operations research, management statistics, data structures and databases, computer networks, e-commerce, systems analysis and design, management applications system, computer applications in economic management, and things control technology, and so on. 2. Curriculum design and synthesis experiment are in 3, 4, 5, and 7th semester, usually one week. That consists of four parts: the first is corporate website building tools and comprehensive application of experimental techniques; the second is comprehensive information resources management experiment; the third is information System (IMIS system or service) development experiment; and the forth is digital scenic comprehensive experiment. 3. Studio Training in Campus Entrepreneurship Training Center Entrepreneurship is usually in the 2 to 7th semester. It can train students’ entrepreneurship, simple operational skills, communication skills with people, business operations project management capabilities, and career adaptability. 4. Professional Trainee is in the 5th semester, usually two weeks. It can prepare students for research communication skills; specific operational capabilities, the use of enterprise data management capabilities; operating various types of business enterprise application capabilities of information systems; combining the characteristics of information technology, analysis, diagnostics and the ability to redesign business processes. 5. Contests are usually in the 5 to 7th semester in order to prepare students for independent analysis and solving problem ability and innovation ability. 6. Graduation design is usually in the 7 and 8th semester. It can train students collect and collate data capacity, information retrieval capabilities, data analysis and literature review capabilities, research capabilities, planning, analysis, design and development of more complex information systems capabilities integrated use of the expertise. 7. Graduation practice (usually three months) is usually in the 8th semester in order to develop students’ professional skills.

AUTHOR BIOGRAPHIES Li Ling was born in 1971. He is an associate professor in Sichuan tourism University. Main teaching courses includes application foundation of Computer, Excel advanced data processing, application of computer in economic management. His research area includes application of informatization, course design and development, ICT education application. REFERENCES [1] Li Ling, Zhou Mei, Zhang Hua. 2012. Catering and tourism industry, information technology research and practice training model—Sichuan cooking professionals IT department as an example. Sichuan Cuisine College (4): 13–17. (In Chinese). [2] Tang Yi, Zhao Gangling. 2004. On Information Management and Information Systems professionals CBE construct. Modern Intelligence (11):210–212. (In Chinese). [3] History of Man Ray. 2013. Information Management and Information System Local Colleges positioning. Chinese management of information technology (4):102–103. (In Chinese). [4] Wang Yang Ting, Du qi Jun. 2010. Professional Training positioning information management and information systems thinking. Technological innovation Herald (3):160–161. (In Chinese). [5] Sichuan Provincial Tourism Bureau. Sichuan Province twelfth five Tourism Information Technology Development Program. September 2012. (In Chinese).

36

ICIEES_Book.indb 36

4/3/2015 7:08:20 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Suggestions of deregulations of word limits of papers on domestic engineering academic journals Jing Yu Editorial Board of Journal of Chemical Engineering of Chinese Universities, Department of Chemical and Biochemical Engineering, Zhejiang University, Hangzhou, China

Bo Chen Editorial Board of Industrial Design, Zhejiang University, Hangzhou, China

ABSTRACT: Many domestic engineering journals still have word limits towards single essays. To sample both domestic and foreign chemical engineering journals for comparison, domestic journals leaders such as CIESC Journal and Journal of Chemical Engineering of Chinese Universities and foreign top peer journals such as Chemical Engineering Science, AIChE Journal, and Industrial and Engineering Chemistry Research are selected. Based on the comparison of numbers in the 2011–2013 published articles, words, and references, besides language, foreign journals have more influential power because they published more articles, longer papers, and more extensive references. Therefore, domestic engineering academic journals are suggested to deregulate the word limits of papers, the authors should pursue for quality, rather than for amount of articles. Hence, journals will be more informative with higher quality papers. Keywords: 1

Domestic journals; Academic journals; Deregulation; Word limits of papers

INTRODUCTION

2

The number of domestic academic journals has been increasing rapidly up to 5000 now, slightly less than US journals. However, the domestic academic journals’ influence power is not achieved proportionally matching the scale. In addition to the reason of language, how to write a scholar paper is a need of improvement. It is frequently said to author by other writers as follows: the word limit of 6 pages makes them stretched while writing. Subject, Abstract in both Mandarin and English take over 1 page; Symbols and References also take 1 page more; the remaining 3–4 pages are not enough to squeeze in all the information. As a compromise, some contents are sacrificed, not to be explained and analyzed thoroughly, or some contents are separated into several articles for publishing. International leading academic journals have no such restrictions, this helps writers submitting the higher quality scholarly articles. This no word limit rule is not often seen in China, not few journals still limit the scale of papers for all kinds of reasons. To show the differences, 6 main chemical engineering journals from domestic and foreign journals are selected for statistics and analysis.

SELECTION OF JOURNALS FOR COMPARISON

Among the domestic journals, Chinese Journal of Chemical Engineering Journal (abbreviated title: CJChE), CIESC Journal, Journal of Chemical Engineering of Chinese Universities (abbreviated title: J Chem Eng of Chinese Univ), are selected from “A Guide to the Core Journals of China”, 2011 issue. From the foreign journals, well-known top chemical engineering journals like American Institute of Chemical Engineers Journal (abbreviated title: AIChE), Chemical Engineering Science (abbreviated title: CES) and Industrial and Engineering Chemistry Research (abbreviated title: IEC) are selected. Statistics cover 150 published papers every year on these sample journals from 2011 to 2013. 3

STATISTICS

There is one English version among 3 selected domestic journals because of the consideration of difference between English and Chinese. When comparing the article length, English journals are more comprisable, and also reflect the status of Chinese journals.

37

ICIEES_Book.indb 37

4/3/2015 7:08:20 AM

Table 1.

AIChE CES IEC CJChE CIES J Chem Eng of Chinese Univ

Table 2.

2011

2012

2013

11.51 10.26 9.15 6.71 6.67 5.79

11.65 10.97 9.18 8.11 7.18 6.03

11.67 11.26 11.21 7.6 7.5 6.24

2011

2012

2013

37.03 34.45 43.66 25.5 19.37 15.57

40.83 37 36.79 28.98 20.45 15.93

42.74 38.55 45.8 29.28 22.3 17.05

2011

2012

2013

8.61 10.3 9.56 9.54 8.62 11.88

8.88 10.18 9.25 10.46 10.37 11.24

8.63 10.65 10.95 9.98 10.52 12.24

References.

AIChE CES IEC CJChE CIES J Chem Eng of Chinese Univ

Table 3.

journals outnumbers the average, they are still far less than references published in the top peer foreign journals. The length of abstract is obtained from “Engineering Index Compendex” database. From Table 3, length of abstracts is similar crossing foreign and domestic chemical engineering journals. Based on the above statistics analysis, besides abstract, main body including “Foreword”, “Research”, “Result and Discussion” and references are limited. In addition, the domestic writers can gain international attention and recognition by publishing detailed informative and outstanding scholarly papers on the foreign leading journals.

Average length of single article.

4

Based on the above comparison and analysis, the word limit insisted by domestic journals hold the writers from well explained expressions. Domestic journals are resulted in less informative comparing with the international leading journals, and also affected in readability and credibility. Therefore, it is necessary to loosen the word limit to enhance influence power of engineering scholarly journals. Let the world hear better from China about good scientific inventions, journalists have a long way to go.

Length of abstract (Unit:line).

AIChE CES IEC CJChE CIES J Chem Eng of Chinese Univ

CONCLUSION

REFERENCES [1] Institute of Scientific and Technical Information of China. 2013. Chinese S&T Papers Statistics and Analysis 2013. [2] Li Jian, Xu Jie, Wu Yawen, et al. 2005. Differences in information characteristics of scientific papers in biology, agriculture and forestry between China and other countries ACTA EDITOLOGICA (6)17: 467–469.

The six journals have about same size of layout. AlChE Journal’s is 17.5 cm × 23.5 cm, CES is 18.2 cm × 23.5 cm, IEC is 17.7 cm × 23.5 cm, CJChE is 17 cm × 23.5 cm, CIESC is 17 cm × 23.5 cm, J Chem Eng of Chinese Univ is 16.5 cm × 25.2 cm. CIESC and J Chem Eng of Chinese Univ have Chinese abstracts. In 2012, the average citation as 14.85 was found among the Chinese academic journals. Although, the citations in 3 selected domestic

38

ICIEES_Book.indb 38

4/3/2015 7:08:20 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Researches on coalition-proof data security in cloud computing Y.H. Yu School of Management Science and Engineering of Anhui University of Finance and Economics, Bengbu, Anhui, China

L. Wu School of Finance and Public Administration of Anhui University of Finance and Economics, Bengbu, Anhui, China

ABSTRACT: Many proposals for the data security in cloud computing based on encryption cannot balance the contradiction between data security and efficient queries. This article discusses about the data security in cloud computing under the view of game theory. Based on the proposal of sensitive attribute decomposition without encryption, this article designs a mechanism that can avoid the coalition among un-trusted database service disclosing data privacy. It provides a complete information static game theory frame among a trusted data center and many un-trusted database service providers, and gives the coalition-proof Nash equilibrium. Some countermeasures and suggestions are also proposed to enhance the data security in cloud computing. Keywords: 1

Cloud Computing; Coalition-Proof Nash Equilibrium; Data Security

INTRODUCTION

architecture for outsourced database services. The key idea is that all sensitive attribute values are decomposed and are placed on two or more service providers without data encryption, and all these service providers are assumed to be unable to communicate directly with each other to achieve coalition, but this assumption is hard to realize in real situations. All proposals of data privacy mentioned above are from the view of technologies, and as we know, besides information security technology, many other factors also need to be considered such as economic and legal factors. This article proposes a novel approach to enabling privacy protection in cloud computing based on the idea of economics of information security in Anderson (2006), Nisan (2007). Anderson (2006) stated that the lacking of effective incentive and restraint mechanism can cause the security failure of many application systems. This article designs an effective mechanism that the rational and selfinterested service providers should be liable for their coalition to cause data privacy disclosure and bear the relevant punishment. However, if service providers abide by the agreement, they should get appropriate incentives. In order to balance the contradiction between data encryption and query performance, based on the idea of Agrawal (2005), the sensitive information is decomposed and allocated on different service providers without having to encrypt sensitive data. The general architecture

Data security and query performance plays an important role in cloud computing, and they are a pair of contradiction. As customers upload their data to un-trusted external database servers, how to ensure the security of customers’ data is the key point for the cloud computing applications. Data security in cloud computing involves many aspects, such as data confidentiality, data privacy, data correctness and completeness. This article mainly focuses on the data privacy security in the perspective of game theory. Many proposals for data privacy in cloud computing are based on the data encryption Hacigumus (2002), Mehrotra (2004) and Agrawal (2004). In order to allow executing a function while hiding the function from the server, the organization of trusted computing group TPG (2004) proposed a tamper-proof secure co-processor which was installed on the server side. Arrarwal (2004) proposed the secure multi-party computation techniques to ensure database safety. Murat (2004) has proved that any security methods under formal crypto-graphic notions are hopelessly inefficient for data processing. Agrawal (2005) and Motro (2005) noted that the exposure of a set of sensitive attribute values may result in a privacy violation, while the exposure of only some subset of it may be harmless, and also proposed a distributed

39

ICIEES_Book.indb 39

4/3/2015 7:08:20 AM

improvement of C upon σ N if ui ( C ,σ N \C ) ui (σ N ), for all i C . Definition 2 In the n-player normal-form game G {S1, , Sn u1, , un }, the strategies σ N { 1 , , n }, σ N ∈ S is a Nash equilibrium if no i N has an improvement upon σ N . Definition 3 In the n-player normal-form game G {S1, ,S Sn u1, , un }, let strategies σ N { 1 , , n },σ N ∈S and let C ∈2 N . An internally consistent improvement of C upon σ N is defined as follow: if (a)τ C is an improvement of C upon σ N , (b) if T C and |T | < |C| then T has no internally consistent improvement upon σ N . Definition 4 In the n-player normal-form game G = {S1, …, Sn; u1, …, un}, then σ N = {s1, …, sn}, σ N ∈ S is a coalition-proof Nash equilibrium if no C ∈2 N has a internally consistent improvement upon σ N . Theorem 1 In the n-player normal-form game G {S1, , Sn u1, , un }, if n is finite and Si is finite for every i, then there exist at least one Nash equilibrium, possibly involving mixed strategies.

Figure 1. The system architecture of data security game in cloud computing.

is illustrated in Figure 1. The trusted front-end provides three pieces of functionality: (a) Data Decomposition. The trusted data center decomposes sensitive attribute data in unencrypted form to different service providers. (b) Query Processing. The trusted data center receives queries of end users, translates queries into appropriate SQL sub-queries and sent them to different service providers. Then, the trusted data center gathers the results returned by different service providers, does some post-processing and returns the final results to end users. (c) Coalition Checking. The trusted data center randomly checks weather service providers have any coalition operation to cause data privacy disclosure. Once coalition among service providers was found, service providers will be published seriously, there exists a game between the trusted data center and service providers. All players of this game are assumed to be rational and risk neutral, and this is common knowledge. 2

3

ANALYSIS OF DATA SECURITY OF CLOUD COMPUTING BASED ON GAME THEORY

The trust data center decomposes the sensitive attributes of customers and places them on two or more trusted database service providers in the form of un-encryption, so multiple service providers may take coalition actions to gain additional benefits from disclosing user privacy. Without loss of generality, we assume that the sensitive attribute is placed on two un-trust service providers, and there exists a 3-players game among trust data center, service providers 1 and service providers 2. Normal form of 3-players complete information static game can be represented as follows:

PRELIMINARIES

a. Player set: defined as N = {1,2,3}, here 1 means the first cloud computing service providers, 2 means the second cloud computing service providers, 3 means trusted data center. b. Strategy set: defined as s1 = {honesty, coalition}, s2 = {honesty, coalition}, s3 = {inspection, lazy}. c. Payoff function: defined as u1(s1j, s2j, s3j), u2(s1j, s2j, s3j) and u3(s1j, s2j, s3j) as payoff of the first service provider, the second service provider and trusted data center respectively, which can be expressed as follows:

The concept of Coalition-Proof Nash Equilibrium (CPNE) was first introduced by Bernheim (1987), which stated that a profile of strategies is CPNE if no coalition can find another profile strategy to achieve better payoff. Keiding (1999) considered the representation problem for CPNE by introducing an efficiency function to find equilibrium. Let N = {1, …, n} be a set of players, a coalition is a nonempty subset of N, the number of all coalitions is 2N, and we denote by 2N the set of all coalition and denote SC the set of strategies of coalition C. According to Bernheim (1987), Gibbons (1992) and Keiding (1999), there exist following basic definitions and theorem: Definition 1 In the n-player normal-form game G = {S1, …, Sn; u1, …, un}, let strategies σ N = {s1, …, sn}, σ N ∈ S and let C ∈2 N . Then τ C ∈S C is an

u1(s11, s21, s31) = 0, u1(s11, s22, s31) = 0, u1(s12, s21, s31) = −b, u1(s12, s22, s31) = −b u1(s11, s21,s32) = 0, u1(s11, s22, s32) = 0, u1(s12, s21, s32) = c, u1(s12, s22, s32) = c − f u2(s11, s21, s31) = 0, u2(s11, s22, s31) = −b, u2(s12, s21, s31) = 0, u2(s12, s22, s31) = −b

40

ICIEES_Book.indb 40

4/3/2015 7:08:20 AM

u2(s11, s21, s32) = 0, u2(s11, s22, s32) = c, u2(s12, s21, s32) = 0, u2(s12, s22, s32) = c − f u3(s11, s21, s31) = d − a, u3(s11, s22, s31) = −a, u3(s12, s21, s31) = −a, u3(s12, s22, s31) = −a u3(s11, s21, s32) = a − e, u3(s11, s22, s32) = a − e, u3(s12, s21, s32) = a − e, u3(s12, s22, s32) = a − f

in this game: (honest, honest, inspection) and (coalition, coalition, lazy). As analysis mentioned above, (coalition, coalition, lazy) is not a coalition-proof Nash equilibrium. Now, we analysis the strategies profile (honest, honest, inspection), and we can find that it is a coalition-proof Nash equilibrium.

where a denotes the inspection cost of trusted data center, b denotes the penalty to service provider because of his coalition operation being found but not causing privacy disclose, c denotes the additional benefits of service provider providing coalition service, d denotes the incentive given to trusted data center for providing normal service, e denotes the credibility loss of trusted data center caused by not conducting inspection and without disclosing user data privacy, f denotes the penalty to service providers because of their coalition operation causing privacy disclose, and the penalty to trusted data center for not checking the coalition operation. This game can be represented in the payoff matrix in Table 1. Many factors affect the solution of this 3-players game, we adopt the underline drawing method to solve Nash equilibrium, and we mainly consider two situations as follows:

Under the condition c > f, a < f < 2a, e < f and d + e ≥ 2a, (honest, honest, inspection) is a coalition-proof Nash equilibrium because if anyone player deviates from the equilibrium, the payoff of the player will decrease. For example, if player 1 or player 2 unilaterally changes his strategy, the payoff will decrease from 0 to –b, and if they jointly change their strategies from (honest, honest) to (coalition, coalition), both of their payoff will decrease from 0 to –b. As we assume that all players are rational and risk neutral, anyone has incentive to deviate from the equilibrium. Because the number of players is finite and the number of strategy of each player is finite. According to theorem 1, this game has a Nash equilibrium of mixed strategy. Assume player 1 selects coalition strategy in probability α, and honest strategy in probability 1 − α. Player 2 selects coalition strategy in probability β, and honest strategy in probability 1 − β. Player 3 selects lazy strategy in probability γ, and inspection strategy in probability 1 − γ. Then, the expected payoff function of player 1 will be:

a. Given c > f, a > f, e < f and d + e < 2a, the only one pure strategy Nash equilibrium in this game is (coalition, coalition, lazy). Due to the benefit conflict between trust data center and service providers, (coalition, coalition, lazy) is not a selfenforcing strategies profile. Now, if players choose the strategies profile (coalition, honest, lazy) or (honest, coalition, lazy), because c > c − f, player 1 or player 2 has incentive to deviate from (coalition, coalition, lazy). Thus, (coalition, coalition, lazy) is not a coalition-proof Nash equilibrium. b. Given c > f, a < f < 2a, e < f and d + e ≥ 2a, there are two pure strategy Nash equilibrium Table 1.

π1

Honest Coalition

0, 0, d − a −b, 0, −a

0, −b, −a −b, −b, −a

(b)

π2

Player 2 Honest

Coalition

Honest Coalition

0, 0, a − e c, 0, a − e

0, c, a − e c − f, c − f, a − f

β )[(1 − α )(1 γ )0 + α (1 γ )0 + (1 α )γ 0 + αγγ 0 ] β α )(1− 1 γ )( − ) + α ( − γ )(− ( ) + ( − α )γ c + αγγ ( − f )]

The first order partical derivative of the expected payoff function π2 with respect to independent variable β is:

Payoff matrix of player 3 choose lazy strategy

Player 1

(1)

In the similar way, the expected payoff function of player 2 will be:

Player 2 Coalition

γ )0

∂π 1 = (1 − β − γ )( − ) + β − γ )(− ( ) ∂α + (1 − β γ c + βγ ( − f ) = γ b − b + γ c − βγγ f = 0

(a) Payoff matrix of player 3 choose inspection strategy

Honest

γ )0 + β

+ (1 β γ 0 + β γ 0 ] α β )(1− 1 γ )( ) + β − γ )(− ( ) + ( − β γ c + βγγ ( − f )]

The first order partical derivative of the expected payoff function π1 with respect to independent variable α is:

Analysis of coalition-proof Nash equilibrium.

Player 1

(1 α )[(1 − β

∂π 2 = (1 − α )(1 − γ )( − ) + α (1 − γ )(− ( ) ∂β + (1 − α )γ c + αγ ( − f ) = γ b − b + γ c − βγγ f = 0

(2)

41

ICIEES_Book.indb 41

4/3/2015 7:08:22 AM

ity that player 1 and player 2 choose coalition strategy is, and this decreases the probability of privacy disclosing, and player 3 may chooses lazy strategy to reduce inspection cost.

The expected payoff function of player 3 will be computed as the similar way mentioned above: π3

(1 γ )[(1 − α β )( d a ) α β )( − a ) + (1 − α β ( − ) + αβ β ( − )] + γ [(1 α 1 − β )( a − e ) + α 1 − β )( ) (1 − α β ( − ) + αβ β ( − f )]

4

The first order partical derivative of the expected payoff function π3 with respect to independent variable γ is: ∂π 3 ∂γ

CONCLUSIONS

This article discusses the data security in cloud computing under the view of game theory. The aim of this article is to design a rational mechanism that can avoid coalition of two service providers and also obtain the outcome of coalition-proof Nash equilibrium. In fact, in 3-players complete information static game, the coalition can only occurs between player1 and player 2. According to the analysis result mentioned above, when we design a mechanism that can provide the efficient data privacy protection based on sensitive attribute decomposition without encryption in cloud computing, we should enlarge the penalty to service providers for their coalition operation, and enlarge the credibility loss of trusted data center for not conducting inspection to decrease the probability of player 1 and player 2 choosing coalition strategies, and ensure that the sum value of the incentive and the credibility loss to trusted data center is larger than or equal to two times value of the inspection cost of trusted data center to achieve a coalition-proof Nash equilibrium, that is both service providers choose honest strategy and the trusted data center choose inspection strategy.

= −[(1 − α − β )( d − a ) + α − β )( − a ) + (1 − α β )( − a)) + αβ β ( − a )] + [(1 − α − β )( a − e ) + α − β )( − ) + ( − α β ( − ) + αβ ( − f )] = 0

(3) For simply, let 2a − d − e = 0. Solving equations consisting of equation (1), equation (2) and equation (3), we can obtain the mixed strategies Nash equilibrium as:

α * = 2d /( /(d + f − e ) ( 4a − 2e )/( f) β * = 2d /( /(d + f − e ) ( 4a − 2e )/( f) γ * = b(d + f − e )/((b + c )(d + f − e ) − df ) = b/(b + c − α * f ) = b/(b + c − β * f ) It means when player 3 selects lazy strategy (d f e ) ddf ), in probability b(d f e )/((b c )(d player 1 and player 2 will select coalition strategy in probability ( ) 2a f ). (1) The probability )/( of player 1 and player 2 choosing coalition strategy is mainly related to the factor e, the credibility loss of trusted data center not conducting inspection, and the factor f, the penalty to service providers for their coalition operation. The larger e and f is, the smaller the probability that player 1 and player 2 choose coalition strategy is. Because if penalty and credibility loss is strengthened, the trusted data center will increase the probability of inspection, and the payoff will exceed the benefit for player 1 and player 2 once their coalition operation is exposed. (2) The probability of player 3 choosing lazy strategy is mainly related to the factor c, the additional benefits of service provider providing coalition service, the factor f, the penalty to service providers for their coalition operation, and is related to the probability of player 1 and player 2 choosing coalition strategy. The larger c is, the smaller the probability that player 3 choose lazy strategy is. The larger f is, the larger the probability that player 3 choose lazy strategy is. The reason is that the larger the c is, the larger the probability that player 1 and player 2 choose coalition strategy is, and this increases the probability of privacy disclosing which decreases the payoff of trusted data center. The larger the f is, the smaller the probabil-

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This study was partially supported by the Education Quality Project of Anhui Province under grant no. 2012zjjh019. REFERENCES [1] Agrawal, G., Bawa, M. & Ganesan, P. et al. 2005. Two can keep a secret: A distributed architecture for secure database services. Proceeding of the 2nd biennial conference on innovative database system research, Asilomar, 2005: 186–199. [2] Agrawal, R., Kiernan, J. & Srikant, R. et al. 2004. Order-preserving encryption for numeric data. Proceeding of the ACM SIGMOD international conference on management of data, New York: ACM, 2004: 563–574. [3] Anderson, R. & Moore, T. 2006. The economics of information security. Science 314: 610–613. [4] Arrarwal, G., Mishra, N. & Pinks, B. 2004. Secure computation of the k th-marked element. Proceeding of EUROCRYPT, Berlin:Springer, 2004: 40–55.

42

ICIEES_Book.indb 42

4/3/2015 7:08:23 AM

[5] Bernheim, B.D., Peleg, B. & Whinston, M.D. 1987. Coalition-proof equilibria. I. Concepts. Journal of economic theory, 42: 1–12. [6] Gibbons, R. 1992. A primer in game theory. Prentice Hall. [7] Hacigumus, H., Iyer, B. & Mehrotra, S. 2002. Providing database as a service. Proceeding of the international conference on data engineering, New York: IEEE, 2002: 29–38. [8] Keiding, H. & Peleg, B. 1997. Representation of effectivity functions in coalition proof Nash equilibrium: a complete characterization, Copenhagen University. [9] Mehrotra, S., Hacigumus, H. & Iyer, B. 2004. Efficient execution of aggregation queries over encrypted relational database. Proceeding of the international

[10]

[11] [12] [13]

conference on database system for advances applications, Berlin: Springer, 2004: 125–136. Motro, A. & Parisi-Presicce, F. 2005. Blind Custodians: A database service architecture that supports privacy without encryption. Proceeding of the data and application security, Berlin: Springer, 2005: 338–352. Murat, K. & Chris, C. 2004. Security Issues in querying encrypted data. Purdue University. Nisan, N. 2007. Algorithmic game theory. Cambridge University. Trusted Computing Group. 2010. TPM specification version 1.2. Part 1 design principles. https:// www.trustedcomptinggroup.org/specs/TPM/Main_ Part_rev94.zip.

43

ICIEES_Book.indb 43

4/3/2015 7:08:24 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Research on China’s government regulation on Outbound Foreign Direct Investment of Chinese companies Peizhi Wang & Xiao You School of International Economics and Trade, Shandong University of Finance and Economics, Jinan, Shandong, P.R. China

ABSTRACT: After reform and opening-up, Chinese companies start to invest abroad, China’s government’s regulation develops at the same time, and it can be divided into three phases: (1) exploration and initial development phase, (2) adjustment phase, and (3) steady improvement phase. This article analyzes the problems of China’s government’s regulation, and makes an empirical analysis on the effectiveness of China’s government’s regulation based on the Vector Auto regression Model, reaching conclusions that the China’s government’s regulation has a significant positive effect on the Chinese companies’ Outbound Foreign Direct Investment (OFDI) in the long-term, the OFDI in the second phase of government regulation is 2.875% higher than that in the first phase of government regulation, and the OFDI in the third phase of government regulation is 5.043% higher than that in the first phase of government regulation. At last, some proposals are made for improving the China’s government’s regulation from the aspects of setting law, improving the regulation system and service system. Keywords: analysis 1

Outbound foreign direct investment; Government’s regulation; VAR model; Co-integration

INTRODUCTION

in 1982, to the issue of “Provision of Approval and Management of Opening Non-trade Companies Abroad (Trial)” in 1992, to the “going-out” strategy in 2001, to establishing “Trans-frontier Mineral Prospecting and Development Special Fund” in 2003, we can see that the China’s government’s regulation has been continually improved. This article divides the process of China’s government’s regulation for OFDI into three phases: (1) exploration and initial development phase (1979–1991), (2) adjustment phase (1992–2000), and (3) steady improvement phase (2001 to now). The following is a figure of combination of Chinese companies’ OFDI flow data and three phases of the China’s government’s regulation.

With an increasing global economic integration, China’s government’s regulation for outbound foreign direct investment develops with the growth of the investment. China’s government intervenes and controls activities of multi-national companies when they invest abroad based on the laws within a frame of market mechanism, in order to revise market failure. China’s government’s regulation for outbound foreign direct investment includes three aspects: From the political aspect, it is the refection of the government’s political function and the objective requirement of the government’s economic function. From the economic aspect, it is an indispensable requirement of strengthen market and regime. From the social relationship aspect, it is the necessity for sustaining the normal development of social relationship that is created from OFDI. 2

2.1

2.1.1

Exploring and initial development phase (1979–1991) During the early years of reform and opening-up, Chinese enterprises were lack of experience and the number of companies that invested abroad was relatively small, moreover, the country’s foreign exchange reserve was limited, therefore the government made strict control over investing abroad, only allowed some companies of central ministries grade and some province owned or municipality owned companies to invest abroad. With the development of Chinese multinational investment, the government began to reform

ANALYSIS OF SITUATION OF CHINA’S GOVERNMENT REGULATION ON OFDI OF CHINESE COMPANIES Process of China’s government regulation on Chinese companies’ OFDI

Since “Going out to Develop” policy was carried out in 1979 and fifteen economic reform measures

45

ICIEES_Book.indb 45

4/3/2015 7:08:24 AM

ity report were needed before establishing overseas investment projects, and the Ministry of Foreign Trade and Economic Cooperation were responsible for reviewing and approval of contracts and constitutions of these overseas investment projects. In 1994, the State-owned Assets Administration issued “Management Approach for Cross-border State-owned Property Rights Registration”, defined that the State-owned Assets Administration Bureau and local state-owned assets management departments were responsible for registration of Cross-border state-owned property rights. In 1996, article XVII of “Chinese Foreign Exchange Control Institution” indicated that domestic individual or organization who invested abroad should be registered in accordance with the provisions of the foreign exchange administration department of the State Council. In 1999, the Ministry of Finance and other departments jointly issued the “Interim Measures on Management of Overseas State-owned Assets”, establishing the principle of that foreign state-owned asset management was owned by the country and regulated by governments of all levels. During this phase, China had set basic regime for OFDI, and the responsibility of different departments was clearer. These constitute the basis of our regulation system for OFDI.

the regulation of OFDI. In 1983, State Council authorized the former Ministry of Foreign Trade of approval of the cross-border investment management business, but had not yet formed a standard process. In 1985, foreign trade and economic cooperation department issued an “Approval Procedures and Management Practices of Opening Non-trade Overseas Companies (Trial)”, which indicated the formation of standard process for approval of overseas investment. In 1989, SAFE (State Administration of Foreign Exchange) issued the “Measures for the Administration of Foreign Exchange for Overseas Investment”, prescribed that the Foreign Exchange Management Department is responsible for reviewing sources of foreign exchange and foreign exchange risk of overseas investment to further strengthen foreign exchange management of OFDI. In 1991, the State Planning Commission issued “Advice for Strengthening Management of Outbound Foreign Investment Projects ”, indicating that the country did not have conditions for large overseas investment in 1991, therefore this advice strengthened control over OFDI, such as increasing the approval procedures, strengthening controls over investment projects [8]. During this phase, the approving authority for OFDI was set, and the scope of OFDI subjects expanded gradually, not just limited to the initial few companies, but in general, the government regulation for OFDI was still tight.

2.1.3 The steady improvement phase (2001to now) In 2001, the national Tenth Five-Year Plan imposed “going-out” strategy, the government’s regulation of OFDI had entered steady improvement phase. Chinese current regulation system for cross-border investment truly started to be established from 2002. In 2002, “Foreign Investment Comprehensive Performance Evaluation (Trial)” and “Interim Measures for the Joint Annual Inspection of Foreign Investment” were published, which formed law basis for regulation of Chinese companies’ OFDI for the first time, making up for the deficiency of absence of regulation after OFDI. “The Statements of Further Deepening Foreign Exchange Management of Overseas Investment” issued in 2003 has made great change over foreign exchange management system of OFDI. “Provision on Approval of Opening Company Abroad” and “Interim Management Measures for Approval of Cross-border Investment Program” issued in 2004 have simplified the country’s overseas investment approval procedures. “The Statements of Strengthening Regulation of the Central Enterprises’ Overseas Investment” issued in 2007 has strengthened the supervision and management for our state-owned assets overseas to prevent state-owned assets from running off [9].

2.1.2 The adjustment phase (1992–2000) A number of problems had appeared with the development of cross-border investment, for example, phenomenon of blind investment, investment losses and state-owned assets exodus frequently occurred. The Government was aware of the urgency of strengthening regulation of OFDI, so they issued an “Approval and Management Provision for Opening Non-trade Enterprises Abroad (Trial)” in 1992. Submitting proposals and feasibil-

Figure 1. Flow of OFDI of Chinese companies. Source: UNCTAD.

46

ICIEES_Book.indb 46

4/3/2015 7:08:24 AM

tory authority responsible for multinational investment, as a result, repetitive regulation or absence of regulation occurs. The effectiveness of existing regulatory measures (such as the audit of the assets, property registration, annual inspection, corporate financial reporting sub-accounts statements, and so on) depends mainly on companies’ conscience. Meanwhile, regulation for private investment is absent [11]. Third, service system for outbound foreign investment is imperfect. Government’s macroeconomic policy guidance on outbound foreign investment direction beforehand is unsound; For a long time, SASAC’s (State-owned Assets Supervision and Administration Commission) industry guidelines for state-owned enterprises after multinational investment is not enough, management of investment decision is not scientific enough, governance mechanisms of business entity are inadequate, management of investment goal is not clear, leading to losses of project and a large number of state-owned assets running off [12]. Moreover, insurance system for outbound foreign investment is absent, while insurance system for outbound foreign investment is available in many developed countries, providing a guarantee for enterprises to invest overseas.

After 2009, “Overseas Investment Management Measures” issued by the Ministry of Commerce, “The Statements of Improving Management Issues of Overseas Investment Project” issued by the National Development and Reform Commission and “Provision of Foreign Exchange Regulation for Overseas Investment by Domestic Institutions” issued by the State Administration of Foreign Exchange have made greater improvement for Chinese cross-border investment regulation system, providing that the Ministry of Commerce and the provincial commerce departments were responsible for companies’ outbound foreign investment, and Ministry of Commerce was only responsible for approval of few large overseas investment, in the meanwhile, approval process of outbound foreign investment was greatly simplified [10]. Overall, compared with the previous stage, this phase refines the policy for cross-border investment, gradually makes up regulatory loopholes, and simplifies the approval process; moreover, the approval authority has been decentralized. 2.2

The existing problems of China’s government regulation on Chinese companies’ OFDI

Throughout the government regulatory process of outbound foreign investment companies, government’s regulation has achieved certain performance, such as cross-border investment approval procedures have been simplified, the scope of cross-border investment objects has been expanded but generally speaking, the development speed of government regulation is slower than that of overseas investment, because in general our policies are made after problems occur, moreover, the deficiency of government regulation for OFDI is very obvious now. First, China is short of a uniform law for OFDI. So far there is no law against the introduction of cross-border investment enterprise. In terms of the legislative subject, provisions relative to overseas investment regulation are scattered among various government rules, mainly among administrative regulations and departmental rules formulated by the State Council and its competent authorities, some are even internal documents that has not been announced to the public. These provisions mainly refer to investment approval, taxation, foreign exchange, the state-owned assets and the like. In the legislative process, too many institutions issue legal documents, leading to the phenomenon of scattered documents, different timelines and effectiveness and lack of authority and transparency. Second, regulation system for outbound foreign investment is imperfect. There is no unified regula-

3

3.1

EMPIRICAL ANALYSIS OF EFFECTS OF CHINA’S GOVERNMENT REGULATION ON OFDI OF CHINESE COMPANIES Selected variables and data

The main factors that influence Chinese OFDI considered in this article are Chinese GDP, exchange rate, domestic interest rate of one-year debt and regulation. The data introduction of these factors is as follows: 3.1.1 China’s OFDI It is represented by flow data of Chinese OFDI per year. This article divides the nominal data of OFDI by GDP index calculated basing on the price in 1978 to get the real data of OFDI, and selects the logarithm of the real OFDI to decrease the volatility of the data. We use LNROFDIFt to represent Chinese OFDI; the data comes from the UNCTAD. 3.1.2 China’s GDP The factor Chinese GDP is represented by the increasing rate of real Chinese GDP that is calculated by dividing the nominal GDP by GDP index calculated basing on the price in 1978, and dividing annual exchange rate. This factor is represented by GDPGRt. The data is collected from

47

ICIEES_Book.indb 47

4/3/2015 7:08:25 AM

Remark: (c, t, n) respectively represent whether there is constant term, time trend or number of lag period in the ADF test or not. The number of lag period is determined by the AIC and SC criterion. The result of the test shows that all variables are integrated of order one I (1), then we can use Johansen method to test whether there is cointegration relationship among the variables or not.

website of the National Bureau of Statistics of China. 3.1.3 Exchange rate Exchange rate in this article is RMB price of per U.S. dollar, represented by ERt. Generally, the lower the exchange rate of RMB against the U.S. dollar, the higher the value of the RMB, then the purchasing power of same amount of RMB will be strengthened to reduce the cost of OFDI, as a result, the exchange rate should be negatively correlated to Chinese OFDI. The data is collected from National Bureau of Statistics of China.

3.2.3 Test of cointegration Johansen Cointegration Test is based on the VAR model and is used to test whether there is longterm equilibrium relationship among variables. As we mentioned above, the optimal lag period for the VAR model is 1. First of all, this article checks the stability of the model. See Figure 2, all the eigenvalues fall within the unit circle. This is the sufficient and

3.1.4 Domestic interest rate of one-year debt Domestic interest rate of one-year debt is represented by LNLRt. To decrease the volatility of the data, this article selects the logarithm of the data of interest. The data comes from the Statistical Yearbook of China. 3.1.5 China’s government’s regulation China’s government’s regulation is represented by dummy variable. This article divides the government regulation into three phases, the first phase is from 1982 to 1991 and represented by G1t, the second phase is from 1992 to 2000 and represented by G2t, and the third phase is from 2001 in 2011 and represented by G3t. G1t is set as the basic group. The data used in this article is between 1982 and 2011, because the data of Chinese OFDI before 1982 is not available. 3.2

Table 1.

Establishment and analysis of model

We use the VAR model to examine the relationship between China’s government’s regulation and Chinese OFDI, in order to clarify the effectiveness of government regulation. 3.2.1 X

Results of stationary test.

Variables

(c, t, n)

ADF Stat

Prob

5% Critical value

Lnrofdif Δlnrofdif Er Δer Gdpgr Δgdpgr Lnlr Δlnlr G2 Δg2 G3 Δg3

(c,t,0) (c,0,0) (c,t,0) (c,0,0) (c,t,1) (c,0,2) (c,t,0) (c,0,0) (c,t,0) (c,0,0) (c,t,0) (c,0,0)

−2.9741 −6.8752 −0.2231 −4.6350 −5.2222 −6.8320 −1.8829 −4.7439 −1.5118 −5.1962 −2.0446 −5.3852

0.1561 0.0000 0.9893 0.0009 0.0012 0.0000 0.6383 0.0007 0.8028 0.0002 0.5543 0.0001

−3.5742 −2.9719 −3.5684 −2.9678 −3.5806 −2.9810 −3.5684 −2.9678 −3.5684 −2.9678 −3.5684 −2.9678

Create a VAR model ( LNROFDI F IF , GDPGR G , ER, LNLR, G 2, G 3) (1)

When establishing a VAR model, an optimal lag period should be selected. Considering the AIC and SC criterion, and considering the likelihood ratio LR statistic when these two criterion are contradictory, this article selects 1 as the optimal lag period based on Eviews 6.0. 3.2.2 Make stationary test for all the variables In order to avoid spurious regression generated in the regression model by non-stationary time series, a stationary test is needed before making regression analysis. Test results are as follows.

Figure 2. Inverse roots of AR characteristic polynomial.

48

ICIEES_Book.indb 48

4/3/2015 7:08:25 AM

necessary condition for the stability of this VAR model. Now we can make cointegration test for this VAR model. As we mentioned above, the optimal lag interval for the VAR model is 1, therefore the optimal lag interval for cointegration test is 0. However, considering that it’s hard to understand and analyze short-term and long-term relationship among variables and that some coefficients are not significant when we set lag interval as 0, we select 1 as the lag interval to make cointegration test. The conclusion is that trace test indicates 4 cointegrating equations at the 5% level. The first cointegration vector is (1, −10.57330, 0.882257, −4.830170, −4.204246, −7.393458), and the cointegration equation is as follows:

ut

LNROFDI F IFt −1 9 2 * GDPGR Rt −1 + 0.6916 * ER Rt − 4.1846 * LNLR Rt −1 − 2.8750 * G22t −11 − 5 0430 * G 3t −1 − 14.0636 (3)

From this error correction model, we can see that the relationship between government regulation and Chinese OFDI in the short-term is inconsistent with that in the long-term. One-period lagged G2 has a positive effect on OFDI in the short-term as in the long-term, but the effect is small with the correlation of 0.0676. One-period lagged G3 has a negative effect on OFDI in the short-term, but the effect is the opposite of that in the long-term. 3.2.5 Impulse response This article uses impulse response function to analyze response of Chinese OFDI to impulse of government regulation (G2, G3). Figure 3 to Figure 4 show the impulse-response results. The

LNMIDF = 7.5972GDPGR − 0.6916ER × [−2.29665] [4.87418] + 4.1846LNLR + 2.8750G2 + 5.0430G3 + 14.0638 × [−4.35563] [−4.12492] [−5.42391] The number in parentheses indicates t statistic for each coefficient, we can see that the coefficients of all variables are significant at 5% significant level, which means that the Chinese OFDI has stable relationship with government regulation, Chinese GDP, exchange rate, interest rate in the long term. From this cointegration equation, we can see that China’s government regulation has a significant positive impact on OFDI. OFDI in the second phase of the government regulation is 2.875% higher on average than that in the first phase of the government regulation when other conditions are the same. Similarly, OFDI in the third phase of the government regulation is 5.043% higher on average than that in the first phase of the government regulation when other conditions are the same.

Figure 3. Response of China’s OFDI to Cholesky one S.D. G2 Innovation.

3.2.4 Error correction Cointegration equation is used to find the longterm equilibrium relationship among variables, while the Error Correction Model is to used to find the short-term dynamic relationship among variables. Using the Eviews 6.0, we get the vector error correction equation as follows: D( LNROFDI F IFt = 0. * (ut (ut ) − 0. * D( LNROFDI F IFt 1 ) + 0. * D(GD DPGR Rt −1 ) − 0.18266

× D( E ER Rt ) 1 2867 * D( LNLRt −1 ) + 0.0676 * d (G 2t −1 ) 0.9636 × D(( 3t 1 ) 0.2431

(2)

Figure 4. Response of China’s OFDI to Cholesky one S.D. G3 Innovation.

49

ICIEES_Book.indb 49

4/3/2015 7:08:25 AM

horizontal axis is the lag periods, the article selects 30 lag periods, and the vertical axis represents the degree of the dependent variable in response to the impulse of independent variables. In Figure 3, the impulse-response value of Chinese OFDI in the second phase of China’s government regulation is negative before the ninth period, and reaches its negative peak at the third period, but after the ninth period, it turns positive and moves towards 0 in the longer term. In Figure 4, the impulse-response value of Chinese OFDI in the third phase of China’s government regulation is negative before the fourth period, and reaches its negative peak at the second period, after the fourth period, it turns positive and reaches the positive peak at the eighth period, however, it turns negative after eighteenth periods and moves towards 0 in the longer term.

Table 2.

Period S.E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

3.2.6 Variance decomposition Johansen cointegration test shows only the relationship between variables, but cannot explain the strength of the relationship, thus we need to use the variance decomposition analysis to study how changes of government regulation (G2, G3), the Chinese GDP (GDPGR), Exchange Rate (ER) and interest rates (LNLR) contribute to change of Chinese OFDI (LNROFDIF). The results of variance decomposition achieved from Eviews 6.0 are shown in Table 2. Table 2 shows that the explanatory power of government regulation G2 to Chinese OFDI increases before the 24th period and maintains at about 8% after that period, and that the explanatory power of government regulation G3 to Chinese OFDI increases before the 18th period and maintains at about 2.4% after that period. 3.3

Results of variance decomposition. Lnrofdif Gdpgr Er

0.64 100.00 0.79 98.02 0.86 95.24 0.89 92.60 0.91 90.27 0.92 88.28 0.93 86.60 0.94 85.19 0.95 84.01 0.95 83.03 0.96 82.20 0.96 81.48 0.97 80.87 0.97 80.33 0.97 79.86 0.97 79.45 0.98 79.10 0.98 78.81 0.98 78.56 0.98 78.35 0.98 78.19 0.99 78.06 0.99 77.96 0.99 77.89 0.99 77.84 0.99 77.80 0.99 77.77 0.99 77.75 0.99 77.74 0.99 77.73

0.00 0.11 0.22 0.49 0.90 1.43 2.03 2.65 3.25 3.80 4.27 4.65 4.95 5.17 5.32 5.41 5.46 5.48 5.48 5.47 5.46 5.44 5.43 5.42 5.42 5.42 5.42 5.42 5.42 5.42

0.00 0.01 0.02 0.07 0.15 0.22 0.28 0.31 0.32 0.31 0.32 0.35 0.41 0.51 0.64 0.79 0.95 1.10 1.25 1.39 1.50 1.60 1.67 1.73 1.77 1.80 1.82 1.83 1.84 1.84

Lnlr G2

G3

0.00 0.26 0.71 1.29 1.94 2.61 3.21 3.70 4.07 4.31 4.45 4.51 4.52 4.51 4.48 4.46 4.45 4.44 4.45 4.47 4.49 4.52 4.54 4.57 4.59 4.60 4.62 4.63 4.63 4.64

0.00 0.16 0.15 0.15 0.24 0.42 0.67 0.96 1.26 1.53 1.78 1.98 2.13 2.25 2.32 2.37 2.40 2.41 2.41 2.41 2.40 2.40 2.39 2.39 2.39 2.39 2.39 2.39 2.39 2.39

0.00 1.45 3.66 5.40 6.50 7.04 7.21 7.19 7.10 7.02 6.99 7.02 7.11 7.24 7.38 7.52 7.65 7.76 7.84 7.91 7.95 7.98 7.99 8.00 8.00 7.99 7.99 7.99 7.98 7.98

Cholesky ordering: LNROFDIF G2 G3 GDPGR ER LNLR.

explains about 8% of the change on Chinese OFDI, the second phase of China’s government’s regulation explains about 2.4% of the change on Chinese OFDI. In summary, the China’s government’s regulation of Chinese enterprises’ OFDI is effective.

Conclusion of the model

After establishing VAR model, cointegration test, impulse-response analysis and variance decomposition, we find the following: China’s government’s regulation has a significant positive effect on Chinese OFDI in the longterm, but we fail to get the same conclusion in the short-term. OFDI in the second phase of the government’s regulation is 2.875% higher on average than that in the first phase of the government’s regulation when other conditions are the same. Similarly, OFDI in the third phase of the government regulation is 5.043% higher on average than that in the first phase of the government regulation when other conditions are the same. The explanatory power of China’s government regulation to Chinese OFDI increases with the periods and keeps stable in the long-term. The second phase of China’s government’s regulation

4

PROPOSALS FOR CHINA’S GOVERNMENT REGULATION ON OFDI

First, establish a uniform law for the outbound foreign direct investment. Outbound foreign investment behavior should have a law as a yardstick; it is easy to deviate from the normal orbit without the yardstick. Our law of outbound foreign investment should follow the principle of combining our actual situation and international standards, the law should not be conflict with international

50

ICIEES_Book.indb 50

4/3/2015 7:08:26 AM

equipment, personnel for Chinese enterprises’ OFDI. Establish cross-border investment insurance system to enhance tour companies’ ability of anti-risk. Offer subsidy for the companies who make independent R&D to enhance their technical ability, and guide enterprises to invest more in technology-intensive industries.

laws and not depart from our actual situation. Our law of outbound foreign investment should follow the principle of the marketization, in the context of multinational investment in health development, the government should reasonably loosen the constraints on corporate investment, so that enterprises can play the main role in multinational investment and make decisions following the laws of the market. Second, improve the regulation system of outbound foreign investment. To avoid policies issued by many institutions and repetitive regulation or absence of regulation, an authority responsible for uniform regulation should be established. The structure of multinational investment subjects should be adjusted, privatization is the main rhythm of the world, while state-owned enterprises are still dominant in the cross-border investment in China, this leads to frequent phenomenon that state-owned enterprises fail in acquisition because of their political background in recent years [13], so there is a motive to encourage competitive private enterprises to invest abroad, for example, giving tax incentives and simplifying approval process of competitive enterprises’ OFDI. Now in many countries who’s OFDI develops fast offer tax incentives for domestic companies who invest abroad. The foreign exchange management system should be reformed; those competitive private enterprises should be given the right to export foreign currency. Management of state assets should be strengthened by improving related laws of state-owned assets management and establishing specialized stateowned enterprises multinational investment management organization, which focuses on overseeing the domestic parent company and provides that large trade of subsidiary company abroad should be approved by domestic parent company. Third, improve service system for outbound foreign investment. Specialized agencies should be established to integrate information about overseas investment environment and release the information timely through the authoritative platform. Strengthen the work of bilateral investment protection agreement negotiations, strive for more favorable international policy environment for Chinese Enterprises’ outbound foreign Investment, and clear the policy barriers for Chinese enterprises to go out. Eliminate obstacles of technology,

REFERENCES [1] George J. Stigler and Friedland Claire, “What can regulators regulate, What Can Regulators RegulateThe Case of Electricity,” The Journal of Law and Economics,Vol. 5, October 1962. [2] George J. Stigler, “The Theory of Economic Regulation,” The Bell Journal of Economics and Management Science, Vol. 2, pp. 3–21, Spring 1971. [3] Shuguang Zhang, “Case Study of Chinese Institutional Change,” China Financial and Economic Press, November 2008. [4] Yong Liang, “Legal protection and risk prevention for Chinese investors’ overseas investment,” Law Press, June 2010. [5] Li He, “Chinese overseas investment strategy and legal measures,” Foreign Economic and Trade University Press, October 2009. [6] Huijun Shen, “Improvement for regulatory legal institution of our overseas direct investment,” Anhui University, Master’s paper, 2010. [7] Yingxue Zhang, “Research on government’s regulation and service legal issues of Chinese enterprises’ overseas M & A,” Shanghai Academy of Social Sciences, Master’s paper, 2011. [8] Xiaoji Zhang, “Frontier issues of Chinese opening up,” Development Press of China, pp. 124–128, 2003. [9] Lei Chen, “Research of approval and regulation institution of Chinese overseas investment,” Minzu University of China, Master’s paper, 2005. [10] Bairu Zhang, “Research on legislation and practice of our overseas investment regulation,” Journal of Shenyang Industrial University, Vol. 1, No. 1, pp. 72, November 2011. [11] Zhixue Li, “Research on corporate acquisition and government’s regulation,” Economic and Management Press, pp. 140–148, 2008. [12] Qingyong Xie, “Analysis of risk in corporate outward foreign direct investment,” Business Times, pp. 31–32, 2007. [13] Luoling Wang and Yuyan Zhang, “Analysis and prediction of world economy in 2010,” Social Science Academic Press, pp. 189, 2010.

51

ICIEES_Book.indb 51

4/3/2015 7:08:27 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

An improved algorithm for image restoration Dan Li Jiangsu Key Laboratory of Large Engineering Equipment Detection and Control, Xuzhou Institute of Technology, Xuzhou, China Xuzhou Machine Vision Application Engineering Technology Research Center, Xuzhou, China

ABSTRACT: This article improved the Lucy–Richardson algorithm. The new algorithm was completely blind restored in the fuzzy noise and PSF unknown circumstance. PSF was modified by iteration and combined with the morphological dilation and zero padding method to better grasp the edge information, effectively removed the edge ring phenomenon. The Simulation results show that the image restoration has better robustness, noise smoothing, edge and texture details are recovered. Keywords: 1

Recovery; Lucy–Richardson; Gauss ambiguity PSF values, edge detection and morphological dilation and region filling technology, rebuild the restored image, improved the quality of the recovery and reduced the phenomenon of ring [3].

INTRODUCTION

Due to the influence of noise, the image will lead to degraded and fuzzy phenomena in the process of imaging, copying, scanning and transmission. Image restoration is a technique for image processing and maximum close to the original image. It is the basis of machine vision, image processing and pattern recognition technology. In many fields, such as astronomy, remote sensing, medical images have broad application prospects. Image restoration can be thought of as the inverse process of image degradation. The process of image degradation was estimated. To establish the mathematical model of degeneration compensated the distortion after building degradation model in order to obtain the original image without the degradation or the optimal estimate of the original images so can get the improved image quality. Currently, the most widely used image restoration algorithm is Lucy–Richardson. With the increasing number of iterations, algorithm will eventually converge on the maximum likelihood solution of Poisson Statistics [1,2]. When the Point Spread Function-PSF is known, but the image noise is unknown, you can use this function to work effectively. In the case of high SNR, it can provide a better recovery results. However, due to the recovery process noise amplification, the solution may be obtained with the noise, rather than the more matches with the real image. In low SNR conditions, the reconstructed image may have some spots. Therefore, this article improved the original recovery method. On the basis of the Lucy–Richardson algorithm, PSF and noise information were unknown, by estimating the

2

COMMON RECOVERY MODELS

2.1 Weiner filtering and constrained least squares filtering restoration model The Weiner filtering was first proposed by N. Wiener in 1942. The method is based on the view that image and noise are ∧random processes. The goal is to find an estimate f of the pollution image f to make a minimum mean square error between ∧ them. Error metric formula: e 2 E[( E [( f f )2 ] . Where E[ ] is the expectation value of the variable. Assuming noise and image are uncorrelated, one of them has a zero mean. Estimated grayscale is a linear function of the deteriorated image grayscale. Under these conditions, the minimum errors function in the frequency domain is by the following calculation formulas: ∧

⎡

⎤ ⎥ G ( u, v ) ⎣ S f ( u, v ) | H ( u, v ) | + Sη ( u, v ) ⎦ ⎡ ⎤ H ∗ ( u, v ) =⎢ ⎥ G ( u, v ) b 2 − 4ac 2 | H ( u , v ) | + S ( u , v ) / S ( u , v ) η f ⎣ ⎦

F ( u, v ) = ⎢

Onew

H ( u, v )S f ( u, v ) 2

∑ P (i | j )D(i ) / I (i ) ( j ) = O( j ) ∑ P (i | j ) i

(1) (2)

i

53

ICIEES_Book.indb 53

4/3/2015 7:08:27 AM

the minimum. When λ = 0, estimates resulting is called variable parameter Weiner filter. This recovery method can adopt some of the constraints on the output image. By default, it will be the smooth constraint. Compared with the constrained least squares filtering and Wiener filtering it is found that constrained least squares filtering has slight advantage for high and intermediate noise conditions, and in the low noise conditions almost the same. However, users should be required to provide information on PSF and noise functions in order to have a good recovery results.

H (u,v ) is the degraded function, G (u,v ) is the degraded image transformation, H (u,v ) is the complex conjugate of H (u,v ),| (u, ) |2 = H (u,v ) H ∗ (u,v ), Sη (u,v ) = | (u, ) |2 represents the noise power spectrum, and S f (u,v ) = | (u, ) |2 represents the not degraded image power spectrum. In the spatial domain, restored image is formed by Inverse Fourier∧ Transform of the frequency domain estimates F (u,v ). If there is no noise, the noise power spectrum will disappear, and Weiner filtering will degenerate into inverse filtering. Under the frequency characteristics of the image and the noise are known, the Weiner filtering image restoration works well. Figure 1 (a) is original figure, Figure 1 (b) and (c) show the effect of image restoration with a window size of 7 × 7 and a standard deviation of 10 gauss blur image before and after recovery. However, in actual image processing, most of the spread function can not know, estimated PSF is usually used to restore the image. If the motion blur using oversized fuzzy distance and oversized motion angle parameter, we can see the results in Figure 1 (d) and (e). The biggest advantage of the Wiener filter is considered as the effect of noise in the recovery process, therefore interfere with the recovery results by noise variation is small. However, in practical application, the noise information is generally not known, so how to accurately estimate the value of PSF and noise autocorrelation function is the key to influence the effect of image restoration. Constrained Least Squares filter and Weiner filter are both constrained filter restoration methods. Common expression is:

2.2

Lucy–Richardson filter recovery model

While using an iterative method, algorithm followed the poisons noise estimated standard, and can obtain the image which is most likely to become the input blurred image after PSF convolution is given. When PSF known and noise information are unknown, the algorithm can also be used for the recovery operation. From the imaging equation and Poisson Statistics can be derived as follows: I (i ) = ∑ P (i | j ) O ( j )

(4)

j

In the formula, O is the original image, P (i | j ) is PSF, and I is the no noise blurred image. When I (i ) is known, the joint likelihood function of estimate D(i ) in each pixel in the image is: ln Π = ∑ [ (i ) ln (i )

(i ) ln (i )] (i

(5)

i

⎡ ⎤ ⎢ ⎥ 2 1 | H ( u , v ) | ⎥ G (u,v ) F ( u, v ) = ⎢ ⎢ H (u,v ) 1 Sη (u,v ) ⎥ 2 | H (u,v ) | + ⎢ ⎥ λ S f ( u, v ) ⎦ ⎣

When satisfying the following formula, maximum likelihood function solution exists:

∧

⎡ D(( ) ⎤ ∂ ln Π = ∑⎢ − 1⎥P(( | j ) = 0 ∂O ( j ) i ⎣ I( ) ⎦

(3)

Weiner filter corresponds λ = 1, the estimate ∧ is the best estimate to make e 2 E [( f f )2 ] get

Figure 1.

(6)

Lucy–Richardson iteration can increase the likelihood of the solution. With increasing number of iterations, it will eventually converge at the place with the maximum likelihood solution.

Figure 2.

Weiner filter restoration.

Lucy–Richardson filter recovery.

54

ICIEES_Book.indb 54

4/3/2015 7:08:27 AM

PSF after reconstruction. By zero-filling method restore the true PSF size to optimize the effect of image restoration. Improved algorithm descriptions: Step 1: In Matlab7.1 environment, read the fruit image with 256 × 256 pixels, simulate a window size of 7 × 7, the standard deviation of 15 Gaussian blur noise images by convolution filter. Step 2: Presumed correct PSF size with the help of loop processing. Boundary point will∧ be modified if it meets the following formula: d( x, y ) ≤ , x ∈∂D . T is the threshold value, ∂D is a boundary of point spread function supports domain. Assuming support domain is a rectangular area. x ∈∂D is used for the boundary point of the rectangular region. If less than a threshold value, remove rows and columns from the PSF support domain. This process is repeated until no ranks can cut up. Each iteration should be cut once. At the same time, it solute the problem that how to choose the number of iterations effectively. Step 3: Reconstructed image by speculated PSF, specify certain pixel weighted value is 0 can ignore the bad pixels in the image. Step 4: Improve the recovery image, detect edges by sobel edge detection algorithm: Each pixel in digital image f (i, j )}, inspects the weighted difference between vertical and horizontal gray neighboring points, the weights will larger if belongs to the neighbor points. Operator s(i, j | Δ y f |, xf | ⎡ −1 0 1 ⎤ ⎡ −1 −2 −1⎤ where: Δ x f : ⎢⎢ −2 0 2 ⎥⎥ Δ y f : ⎢⎢ 0 0 0 ⎥⎥ . If ⎣⎢ −1 0 1 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 1 0 1 ⎦⎥

As shown in Figure 2 (a)–(c), Figure 1 (b) was iterated to the Gaussian blur images for 5,15,20 times. It can be observed, with increasing number of iterations, the person in the figure got clearer. However, the edge regions appear the edge ring phenomenon at the same time. 3

THE IMPROVED ALGORITHM

Due to Lucy–Richardson have many defects, therefore it needs further improvement. The real blind disconsolation algorithm [4,5] in the process of implementation PSF is not required, and use the same process to achieve convergence with Lucy– Richardson. Initial estimate of the PSF is used to be input parameter when calling. Then, return a rebuild PSF after image restoration. Although, Lucy–Richardson does not need the known image noise information, but after repeated treatment, especially in low SNR conditions, reconstructed image may be has some spots. These spots do not represent the actual structure of the image, merely a consequence of the noise generated by the approximation. To control these traces, we can use convergence parameter specifies the degree of threshold deviation of the resulting image with the original image. Data exceeding the threshold will be disabled. Another image reconstruction complication is that it may include a bad pixel data will vary with time and position. We can ignore certain specified pixel in the image set its element value to 0. In practical applications, by using different sizes of PSF for image to rebuild, choose one of the most suitable values to make the accelerating convergence Lucy–Richardson algorithm simultaneously reconstruct image and PSF. In the recovery process image, PSF can not get the exact expression of fuzzy systems. However, if we can determine the size of the PSF in advance, it can greatly simplify the calculation of the amount of image restoration work. If PSF support domain specified less than the actual PSF support domain, PSF estimated will be incorrect. In order to ensure the actual PSF within specified range, it should be assumed that a large range of support domain in each cycle process to modify the scope of support domain of the assumed PSF until it equals or approximates the original system. In the larger part of gray transform or the image boundary would produce a certain ring phenomenon. By sobel [6] image edge detection algorithm[7,8], it can identify changes larger part of the gray image. Based on a priori knowledge and select the gray threshold, the image morphological dilation operation can expand the image processing area meanwhile. Larger gray transformation pixels and image boundary pixels will be set to the value 0. You can continue to modify the

R(i, j ) TH T , TH is threshold, the experimental value is 0.3, so (i, j ) is the step-like edge points, { (i, j )} is edge image. Step 5: Expansion of operations can expand the image processing area, a collection of images with a structural element B to swell A ⊕ B = {x | [( B )x ∩ A] ≠ ∅}. Disk-shaped structure element is defined with Radius is 2. Step 6: Cycle call deconvolution of the weighting matrix to rebuild image again, the edge ring phenomenon has been better to eliminate. Figure 3 (a) is the original image, (b) is the Gaussian blur image, Figure (c) and (d) are 4 pixels smaller or larger than the true PSF, Figure (e) and (f) are the PSF diagrams corresponding to it. It can be observed, it has a great impact on the image by PSF. The image is still fuzzy if the impact of PSF is too small. The image will appear edge rings if the impact of PSF is too large. Figure (i) and (h) are the reconstructed PSF recovery image and reconstruction PSF. It can be observed, rebuild of the PSF Figure (h) close to the real figure (g). For ring phenomenon appears while image reconstruction, Figure (j) used the sobel edge detection and

55

ICIEES_Book.indb 55

4/3/2015 7:08:31 AM

Figure 4.

A new algorithm to recover.

ery Algorithm has a clear edge ring phenomenon. Compared with the new Algorithm, recovery effect is not clear enough. The improved algorithm eliminates the edge ring well, and texture is clearer. 4

Figure 3. Table 1.

This article describes about a new method of blind image restoration to solve the disadvantages of magnifying the noise and the phenomena of edge ring. The results of the simulated experiment show that the new algorithm has an advantage over the original Lucy–Richardson algorithm on noise restraint, stability, details keeping and the visual effects. And it can be widely used in many fields.

A new algorithm to recover. LR algorithm compare with new algorithm.

Standard Window devia- LRsize tion PSNR

LRISNR

New New algorithm- algorithmPSNR ISNR

7×7 9×9 7×7 9×9 7×7 9×9

−0.4194 −0.7113 −0.2590 −0.4510 −0.2326 −0.4086

34.3582 32.3943 34.3971 32.9854 34.7336 33.0161

5 5 10 10 15 15

32.0208 31.1776 32.1073 31.3157 32.1195 31.3337

CONCLUSION

REFERENCES [1] David S C B & Andrews M. 1997. Iterative blind deconvolution of extended objects. IEEE Image Processing, (2):454–457. [2] Dey N, Blanc-Féraud C & Zimmer C. 2004. A deconvolution method for confocal microscopy with total variation regulariza-tion. IEEE Biomedical Imaging, (2): 1223–1226. [3] Xie Mei-hua & Wang Zheng-ming. 2005. Image restoration based on edge-directed diffusion. Journal of Optoelectronics⋅Laser, 16(9):1107–1111. [4] Ayers G A & Dainty J C. 1998. Iterative blind deconvolution method and its applications. Optics Letter, 13(7):547–549. [5] Chan T F & Wong Chiu-Kwong. 1998. Total variation blind deconvolution. IEEE Transactions on Image Processing, 7(3): 370–375. [6] Rafael C. Gonzalez. 2004. Digital Image Processing. Second Edition, Beijing: Publishing house of electronics industry, (6):204–205. [7] Ohtani K & Baba M. 2001. A fast edge location measurement with subpixel accuracy using a CCD image, Proceedings of the 18th IEEE Instrumentation and Measurement Technology Conference, IMTC: 2087–2092. [8] Govindarajan B & Panetta K. 2008. Agaian S. Progressive edge detection on multi-bit images using polynomial-based binarization. Proceedings of the 7th International Conference on Machine Learning and Cybernetics, ICMLC: 3714–3719.

1.9179 0.5054 2.0308 1.2187 2.3815 1.2738

morphological edge dilation. After improving the PSF, we can see the recovered Figure (k). In Table 1, using different window size and standard deviation of Gaussian blur image respectively compared with LR (Lucy–Richardson) algorithm and the new algorithm of improved SNR values. The Data indicate that Peak Signal to Noise Ratio and improved SNR value of this algorithm are better than the LR algorithm. Take 7 × 7 window size, the size of the standard deviation is 15, chicken and koala images compared with LR algorithm and new algorithm. In Figure 4, the first column is the original figure, the second column is Gaussian blur Figure, the third and fourth figures are LR algorithm and the new algorithm recovery images. From the figure it can be found that the result of LR Recov-

56

ICIEES_Book.indb 56

4/3/2015 7:08:32 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Research on meta-cognitive strategy in college English autonomous learning under network environment W.L. Zhao Xianyang Normal University, Xianyang, Shaanxi Province, P.R. China

ABSTRACT: One of the objectives of college English teaching is to cultivate students’ autonomous learning ability and make students become life-long learners. Meta-cognitive ability which is regarded as the core of autonomous learning ability gets more and more scholars’ attention. The development of students’ meta-cognitive ability is mainly reflected in the use of meta-cognitive strategy. Through questionnaire and interview, this article investigated the use of meta-cognitive strategy in college English autonomous learning under network environment. The findings revealed that the use of meta-cognitive strategy is not satisfactory, and the network learning environment is not so good. Based on the above findings, the following suggestions are put forward: strengthen the training of meta-cognitive learning strategies, improve network environment, perfect the teaching management, and improve teachers’ educational technology literacy and students’ information literacy. Keywords: 1

meta-cognitive strategy; college English autonomous learning; network environment

INTRODUCTION

2

College English Curriculum Requirements issued by the Ministry of Education in 2007 emphasizes that colleges and universities should adopt a new teaching mode to improve the original single classroom teaching mode, which demands that “English teaching and learning based on the modern information technology, especially network technology should not be limited by time and place to a certain extent but should have the trend toward individualized and autonomous learning”. The promotion of this new mode requires learners to have a strong ability of autonomous learning, namely in the learning process learners can set goals, make plans, select learning methods and skills, monitor the language acquisition process and assess the ability of learning. Meta-cognitive strategy helps learners to plan, supervise and assess their learning at the right time. The use of meta-cognitive strategy is a bridge to the autonomous learning, and also it is the internal force of autonomous learning and the powerful tools of realizing autonomous learning. Grasping the meta-cognitive strategy means that learners can be responsible for their own learning. Therefore, it is very important that teachers cultivate learners’ meta-cognitive awareness and strategy in college English teaching in China, which is very helpful for students’ foreign language learning in present and future.

LITERATURE REVIEW

2.1 Core concepts 2.1.1 Meta-cognitive strategy Flavell, American psychologist, first proposed the concept of “metacognition” in the 1970s, in his theory of which metacognition is proactive monitoring in order to achieve the cognitive, and adjustment as well as coordination in the cognitive process. Metacognition is learners’ own cognitive cognition. In the process of metacognition, all kinds of strategies used by learners are called meta-cognitive strategies. Wenden (1987) pointed out that metacognition strategies are a more advanced and independent strategy system with cognition activities. Meta-cognitive strategies’ function is to plan, monitor and evaluate the cognition activity and behavior. Meta-cognitive strategy is mainly divided into three categories: plan strategy, monitoring strategy and evaluation strategy. Plan strategy refers to learners’ learning goals, process and steps arranged before learning. Monitoring strategy is that learning plan, learning method and the effect and so on are monitored consciously on the basis of learning goals. Evaluation strategy is that learners’ evaluate their own learning process and adjust the strategy adopted in the learning process according to the actual situation. O’Malley & Chamot (1990) divided language learning strategies into the following three

57

ICIEES_Book.indb 57

4/3/2015 7:08:33 AM

3

categories: meta-cognitive strategy, cognitive strategy and social/affective strategy, which work together in the learning process. However, metacognitive strategy plays a leading role in the entire learning strategy system, which is higher than the other two strategies. Chinese scholars started later on the study of second language learning strategies. In 1987, Huang Xiaohua with her supervisor finished a article whose title is Learning Strategies in Oral Communication, which marks the beginning of English learning strategies in China. There are a lot of books published, in which English learning strategy theory written by Wen Qiufang has a far-reaching influence on the later research. More and more researchers and teachers use the related theory to guide their research and teaching, the scope of the research involves all aspects of second language learning.

3.1

RESEARCH DESIGN Research purpose and objects

In order to investigate the current situation of the meta-cognitive strategy use in college English autonomous learning based on the network instructional platform, this article selected the college English network teaching system of Xianyang Normal University as a case study to investigate the use of meta-cognitive strategy. The study objects were non-English major fulltime undergraduates in Grade 2012 and 2013, college English teachers and management staff of the network platform. 160 questionnaires were given out to students and 156 were taken back. 3.2

Research methods

This questionnaire is divided into two parts, the first part of which is revised from the Oxford learning strategies questionnaire. The Likert-type scale is used in the first part, that it is to say, 1 = never or almost never true of me; 2 = usually not true of me; 3 = somewhat true of me; 4 = usually true of me; 5 = always or almost always true of me. The second part is the open questionnaire which needs to be answered. The purpose of interview is to make some problems clear, which are not directly investigated in questionnaire, including the attitude of students, teachers and managers using the network platform, difficulties of students using internet platform, opinions of teachers’ guidance, teachers’ problems and difficulties in network teaching counseling and so on nine students, five teachers and two network administrators participated in the interview, which has face to face and telephone interviews.

2.1.2 Autonomous learning Since the 1950s, autonomous learning has become an important research topic of educational psychology. By the 1980s, Holec first introduced autonomous learning theory to the field of foreign language teaching. Holec (1981) thought that autonomous learning is “taking charge of their own learning ability”, which includes the establishment of learning goals, self-monitoring and self-evaluation. Little (1990) considered that autonomous learning is the learners’ psychological reaction to learn the content and process. In autonomous learning, attitude and ability are the core, which are the key factors to determine the autonomous learning. Chinese scholar Pang Weiguo (2003) argued that the basic characteristics of the autonomous learning are initiative, independence, effectiveness and relativity. Shu Dingfang (2004) reduced the English autonomous learning system to three aspects: attitude, capacity, environment. Pang Weiguo has believed that the initiative is one of characteristics of autonomous learning, whereas Shu Dingfang has attached the importance to the attitude of autonomous learning. It can be observed, learners’ high sense of ownership in the process of autonomous learning is the most important feature of autonomous learning. Autonomous learning is not completely learning freely, however, students are responsible for their own learning under the guidance of teachers, which is the meaning of autonomous learning in this study. Meta-cognitive learning strategy is closely related to the cultivation of autonomous learning ability. Through questionnaire and interview, the article mainly investigates the current situation of meta-cognitive strategy use in college English autonomous learning.

4 4.1

ANALYSIS AND DISCUSSION Analysis and discussion of questionnaire

Meta-cognitive strategy is one kind of behavior that students manage, monitor and evaluate learning process by themselves. From the above Figure 1, it is found that only 2% of the students always use it, 86% of the students use it more or less, while 12% of the students never use it.

Figure 1.

Use of meta-cognitive strategy.

58

ICIEES_Book.indb 58

4/3/2015 7:08:33 AM

help they need to finish preview, the top student said: “I have the habit of preview and I think it is so important to do it to learn English well. When I am in trouble, I will try my best to solve it with materials in hand. If it is impossible, I will mark it clearly and listen to my teacher carefully”; the medium range student said: “I sometimes do the preview. When I am in trouble, I usually consult it with materials in hand”; the lower range student said: “My English is so poor and previewing English makes me sad. I think it is a way of wasting time.” All of the students want to communicate with foreigners when they meet them in daily life, but they can only say hello to them because their spoken English is not good.

Item 1: I try to find as many ways as I can to use my English. Item 2: I notice my English mistakes and I use that information to help me do better. Item 3: I pay attention when someone is speaking English. Item 4: I try to find shortcuts in English. Item 5: I plan my schedule so I will have enough time to study English. Item 6: I have clear goals for improving my English skills. Item 7: I think about my progress in learning English. From the above Figure 2, it is found that item 1 strategy is used more than others, the highest rate is 58%, then item 2 and item 6 are the same. 20% of the students try to find shortcuts in English. When someone is speaking English, 20% of the students often pay attention. From item 6, 20% of the students never have clear goals for improving their English skills, 28% students are not sure about their goals. In the second part of the open questionnaire, when asked what are the biggest difficulties and problems in digital network learning, they gave the following response: they are not familiar with the function of the network teaching platform and can’t operate well; the teaching equipment should be improved; counseling time should be increased; teaching and learning resources should be rich. 4.2

4.3 Results and suggestions Based on the above investigation of the questionnaire and interview, it is found that only 2% of the students always use meta-cognitive strategy, 86% of the students use it more or less, while 12% of the students never use it. The network learning environment is not satisfying, including equipment, resources, teachers and so on. The following suggestions are put forward. 4.3.1 Strengthen the training of meta-cognitive awareness and strategy Students should strengthen the ability of mastering meta-cognitive strategy, increase awareness of autonomous learning. First, they should make a learning objective and learning plan according to his/her existing knowledge foundation. Second, during learning process, students should realize self-monitoring by asking himself/herself questions and recording his/her learning under their teachers’ guidance. Third, they should evaluate his/ her learning with classmates or teachers at fixed period. Teachers should encourage students to ask for help form others when they are in trouble, and praise or blame students properly according to his/her performance done well or not. Mastering meta-cognitive is the key to realize autonomous learning.

Analysis and discussion of interview

Five teachers interviewed think that they need training in network teaching skills, and the biggest obstacles of students autonomous learning monitoring are poor network operation, and lack of incentives for students to learn English autonomously. Two network administrators think that autonomous learning equipment is often needed to be repaired and utilization of autonomous learning platform is not high. Nine students whose performances are in different levels in their class were chosen to do interview. For example, when asked if they had the habit of previewing English before class and what

Figure 2.

4.3.2 Improve the network environment A full range of learning conditions should be provided for students. Insufficient learning equipment is the important factors that limit autonomous learning, such as lack of autonomous learning classroom, outdated equipment, few net branches and so on. In the short term, it is maybe difficult to change the present situation. It is hoped to extend the open hours of autonomous learning classrooms and provide more internet cables in the library, student dormitories to facilitate students to learn independently.

Meta-cognitive strategy.

59

ICIEES_Book.indb 59

4/3/2015 7:08:33 AM

it is found that the use of meta-cognitive strategy is not satisfactory in some degree. Network learning environment is not so good because of some problems which partly come from students, teachers, net equipment, administrators and so on. Therefore, the following suggestions are put forward: Strengthen the training of meta-cognitive strategy, improve teachers’ educational technology literacy, network environment, perfect the teaching management, and improve teachers’ educational technology literacy and students’ information literacy. However, sometimes it is difficult to put the system of cultivating students’ meta-cognitive strategy into effect. It is hoped that more scholars pay attention to and do the research on autonomous learning strategies under network environment.

4.3.3 Perfect the teaching management School of foreign languages should be in combination with the practical situation and formulate suitable web-based English autonomous learning plan according to the course requirements. Establish and improve the network teaching management system to achieve English network teaching goals, put forward the functional requirements and assessment criteria, clarify the responsibilities of the teaching management staff at all levels and the mutual relationship. The network teaching of English teachers should be quantified. Draw up multilevel and multi-type learning evaluation index, online English learning should be brought into the credit system management. 4.3.4

Improve teachers’ educational technology literacy Promote the development of teachers’ network practical knowledge. The formation of network autonomous learning atmosphere is a key to improve teachers’ education technology literacy. Update teachers’ concepts, refresh teachers’ roles, improve teachers’ network teaching monitoring ability, and network teaching behaviors.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This article is one of the research results of Shaanxi Province education scientific “Twelfth Five-Year Plan” Project (SGH12376) and Xianyang Normal University Teaching Reform Project (201202013). REFERENCES

4.3.5 Improve students’ information literacy When teachers cultivate students’ meta-cognitive strategy, they can recommend students to use the information tools, which can promote students’ meta-cognitive strategy, such as electronics, web logs, self test tools and so on. Students can be conducted to set up their learning autonomy from the following aspects: strengthen students’ independent consciousness, clear goals of college English network learning and establish a system of autonomous learning cooperative group. 5

[1] Flavell, Jolm H. 1979. Metacognition and cognitive monitoring: a new area of cognitive developmental inquiry. American Psychologis. [2] Heloc. 1981. Autonomy and Foreign Language Learning. Oxford: Pergamon Press. [3] Little wood, W. 1999. Defining and developing autonomy in East Asian contexts. Applied Linguistics 20(1). [4] O’Malley, J.M. & Chamot, 1990. A.V. Learning Strategies in Second Language Acquisition. Cambidge University press. [5] Oxford, R. 1990. Language Learning Strategies: What every teacher should know. Rowley, Mass.: Newbury House. [6] Wenden, A. 1991. Learner Strategies for Learner Autonomy. New York: Prentice Hall. [7] Xu Jinfen, et al. 2004. A survey and analysis of nonEnglish major undergraduates’ autonomous English learning competence. (in Chinese) Foreign Language Teaching and Research.

CONCLUSION

Meta-cognitive strategy is the core of college English autonomous learning strategies that can realize the autonomous learning of college English and improve students’ autonomous learning ability under network teaching environment. However,

60

ICIEES_Book.indb 60

4/3/2015 7:08:33 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Discussion on the construction of modern international trade professional degree education system Ming Luo Department of Management, Guangdong University of Science and Technology, Dongguan, Guangdong, China

ABSTRACT: International trade professional degrees shall be well connected to realize scientific orientation and layout for specialty construction. Centering on curriculum cohesion, training objective, teaching resources, evaluation mechanism, teacher training and industry guidance shall become cohesive to achieve targeted, diverse and systemic training system. Professional education must depends on industry association and industry standards to establish training objective, teaching resources, objective standards for evaluation system, as well as promote targeted, diverse and systematic cultivation of international trade professional degree talents. Keywords: Professional Degree Education; International Standard Classification of Education; International Trade Professional Degree; Modern Vocational Education System; State-level Industry Standards 1

PROFESSIONAL DEGREE EDUCATION

1.1

short-term higher education, bachelor or equivalent, postgraduate or equivalent as well as doctor or equivalent. Level 5 (short-term higher education, higher vocational education in China) adopts the definition of general education and vocational education. From level 6 to 8 (level 6 for bachelor, level 7 for postgraduate and level 8 for doctor), terms “academic” and “professional” are used for “general” and “vocational”, which means 64 for academic bachelor, 65 for professional bachelor, 74 for academic postgraduate, 75 for professional postgraduate, 84 for academic doctor and 85 for professional doctor.

Definition of professional degree

Professional degree responds to professional demands of economic, social and industrial sectors by cultivating professional talents of particular professions in all walks of life with focus on the application of knowledge and technology and training talents for particular professions with admirable professional ethics, professional ability and quality such as international trader, international business executive, engineer, physician, teacher and lawyer and so on. Professional degree and academic degree are connected with and different from each other. Both are established upon the particular subjects, meet various demands for professionals from economic and social development. They have respective purpose but overlap with each other. They have respective focus but can not be replaced by one another. The fundamental differences between the two rest in talent training objective, knowledge structure, training mode and quality standard. As higher education matures, the division between the two would be clearer. 1.2

1.2.2

Professional degree education in developed countries The United States is the most developed in professional degree postgraduate education. After WWII, professional postgraduate education in the United States had witnessed a rapid development with increasingly expanding size and varieties and has become the main body of postgraduate education. Professional degree postgraduate education hierarchy corresponds with that of academic master degree in view of professional postgraduate and professional doctor. At the doctoral hierarchy, over 500 disciplines all over the United States confer doctorate. In addition to traditional PhD, there are 56 doctor professional degrees and 10 primary vocational degrees. In the postgraduate hierarchy, there are a great variety of professional master degrees, among which masters of architecture, business

Research status at home and abroad

1.2.1

UN International Standard Classification of Education 2011 UN The revised International Standard Classification of Education (ISCED 2011) classified the higher education into 5, 6, 7 and 8 level, namely

61

ICIEES_Book.indb 61

4/3/2015 7:08:33 AM

competent in foreign enterprises and institutions, government departments and social organizations in operation of management of international business, and cultivate high-level, applied, versatile and vocational international business professionals with good ideological and political quality and professionalism, knowledge on modern economics and commerce, complete knowledge of international business, international business analysis and decision-making ability, modern international business practice skill, high foreign language level and cross-cultural communication capability. Since its introduction, MIB has cultivated a large number of versatile talents for the society and made great contributions to the development of domestic foreign affairs.

administration, education, art, library science, public health, nursing science and social work enjoy a large training base. In the 1990s, the proportion of professional degree postgraduates accounted for over 55% of all master degree receivers in the United States. Harvard University conferred 6,791 degrees from 2001 to 2002, including 2,438 academic degrees that accounted for 36% and 4,353 professional degrees that accounted for 64%. In the United States, many industries see master professional degree as an important basis for entering the industry and for personal development as well as promotion, especially in circles of industry and commerce, education, engineering, and nursing. In postgraduate and doctoral hierarchy, UK trains talents of research and profession. According to UK statistics institutions, from 2003 to 2008, degrees conferred to postgraduate taught (professional degree) accounted for about 75% of all master degrees. In view of postgraduate education development trend in the world and in China, professional degree postgraduate education will be the focus of national support and guidance in the next period to come. As systems and mechanisms are established and improved, professional degree postgraduate education will definitely be greeted with a spring of rapid development and plays an increasingly significant part in promoting China’s socialist modernization. 1.3

2.2

Professional degree in China

Since from the 1990s, when China began to implement professional degree education, professional degree education has witnessed rapid development after a dozen of years with Chinese characterized professional degree education system preliminarily established and a large number of high-level applied talents cultivated for socialist modernization construction, with significant achievements made. By far, the doctor-master-bachelor professional degree education system with master degree as the core has been formed in China. In postgraduate hierarchy, there are 39 professional degrees such as master of finance, 5 doctor degrees such as doctor of oral medicine and 1 bachelor degree of architecture. 2

3 3.1

PROBLEMS IN INTERNATIONAL TRADE PROFESSIONAL DEGREE Lack of objectivity in professional cultivation

International trade professions, both international economic and trade as well as international business, target the same industries with academic international trade professions of the same hierarchy and provide similar courses though they are different in positioning of talent training target, training scale, teaching organization and management as well as priorities of education function. Secondary vocational education, vocational college education and professional master international trade education are also different in positioning of talent training target, training scale, teaching organization and management as well as priorities of education function, with problem in the cohesion between curriculum system and curriculum content. The cohesion between curriculum system and curriculum content

INTERNATIONAL TRADE PROFESSIONAL DEGREE

2.1

Bachelor degree of international trade

There is no bachelor professional degree of international trade in China with undergraduate profession catalog as international trade (020401 for international economy and trade and 120205 for international business). The degree is known as bachelor of economics and bachelor of management. There lacks a specified definition for applied undergraduates. It is generally recognized that applied international trade undergraduate professionals shall give top priority to actual demands for its training objective, cultivation of practical application ability as the key point, emphasize training of students’ practical ability and professional skills, combine cultivation of knowledge, ability and quality, as well as train high-level applied talents for foreign departments and enterprises in business, management, research, publicity and planning work.

International business professional postgraduate

Master of International Business (MIB) aims to train applied, versatile and vocational senior business professionals who adapt to economic globalization,

62

ICIEES_Book.indb 62

4/3/2015 7:08:33 AM

applied undergraduates of international trade has also expanded in size, quality standards and training process are almost the same with theory-based talents of science degree for various reasons, making it difficult to meet vocational demands.

is blind if it fails to comply with industry standards or admission level and standard for international trade professional postgraduates. 3.2

Teaching content fails to fully reflect characteristics of professional degree education

4

Both MIB and applied graduates of international trade follow academic and knowledge-impart system in curriculum setting, with the training program, teaching plan and syllabus the condensed or revised version of full-time postgraduate education and academic undergraduate education, confusing themselves with academic and degree education. There should have been deferent knowledge level and knowledge structure between the two, however, this is not reflected in curriculum design. As a result, students suffer from weak practical consciousness and insufficient knowledge of related fields especially that of practical knowledge of international trade and business, combined with poor problem-solving ability, detached theory and practice, inadequate innovation and creativity. There are few courses targeting cross-border e-commerce knowledge and ability. 3.3

4.1

Significance and value

4.1.1

The necessity of modern vocational education system construction As pointed by Lu Xin, Deputy Minister of Ministry of Education, the construction of modern vocational education system shall be established upon a clear understanding of its connotation, explore cultivating methods for undergraduate-level vocational talents, concentrate on versatile and applied professionals, develop high-end technical professional degree postgraduate training system, as well as systematically promote the ability of vocational education to serve economic and social development and support state industrial competitiveness.

Training method is limited to schooltextbook-classroom mode

4.1.2

Abide by growth law of professional applied talents International trade professional degrees shall be well connected to realize scientific orientation and layout for specialty construction. Centering on curriculum cohesion, training objective, teaching resources, evaluation mechanism, teacher training and industry guidance shall become cohesive to achieve targeted, diverse and systemic training system.

Teachers give top priority to theory imparting but they ignore ability cultivation, with insufficient experiment and difficult practice. There is a need of effective communication and cooperation between schools and enterprises. Teachers, especially the young, suffer from inadequate practical experience and professional quality. Education ideas, teaching materials and methods, laboratory and practice base fail to meet the needs of practice teaching. Furthermore, professional degree postgraduate training is not full-time but centralized and cramming teaching. There still exists cramming teaching in class. Teacher-dominated teaching mode finds it difficult to give a full play to students' initiative, enthusiasm, creativity and practicality. 3.4

THE IMPORTANCE OF ESTABLISHING MODERN INTERNATIONAL TRADE PROFESSIONAL DEGREE EDUCATION SYSTEM

4.1.3 Objective standard for talent training Experience-based practice shall be overcome in undergraduate specialty construction. The cohesion among international trade professional degree can leads to the seamless connection between the curriculum system and training objective to achieve admirable achievements in professional cultivation.

Training objective is not professional targeted but focuses on cultivation of “academic talents”

5

For a long time, higher education and scientific research departments in China have all been interested in “scientific research”, state organs, institutions, international trade customs declaration and inspection declaration, as well as international economic cooperation rather than “professional technical work” in grassroots international trade business. Although, the training of postgraduates of International business professional degree has started and

METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING MODERN INTERNATIONAL TRADE PROFESSIONAL DEGREE EDUCATION SYSTEM

In accordance with “to encourage industry departments, in line with state standards, to formulating professional talent training evaluation standards and higher learning institutions to develop scientific talent training program based on actual conditions” stipulated in Opinions of Ministry of

63

ICIEES_Book.indb 63

4/3/2015 7:08:33 AM

reference value for the construction of applied undergraduate development index system. It not only provides professional development of various levels with objective scale but also highlights education sovereignty as well.

Education on The Several Opinions on Improving Roundly Quality of Higher Education (MH [2012] No. 4), we shall timely implement Occupational classification and qualification management of international trade (GB/T 28158–2011) and construct applied undergraduates of international economy and trade. It is not only of great necessary but also for the practical significance in teaching reform and teaching quality improvement. 5.1

5.2.3

International trade qualification standard will promote connection and division of international trade professional courses at all levels Compared with secondary vocational education, higher vocational college education and even professional postgraduate education, although international trade specialty is of the same industry and has similar courses, they have different positioning in talent training objective, training scale, teaching organization and management as well as education function. Without industry standards, the curriculum system is blind in cohesion. Objectively speaking, core courses or vocational and technical skills in education of all levels needed to be organized by a common standard so that independent curriculum systems at various levels can be combined in an organic manner.

Occupational classification and qualification management of international trade (GB/T 28158–2011)

For a long time, China is in the need of systematic state standards for professional qualification of international trade specialties. In 2010, China Foreign Trade Economy Cooperation Business Enterprise and China National Institute of Standardization embarked on study and drafting of state-level industry standards including Occupational classification and qualification management of international trade. By far national standards of international trade qualification have been issued that classifies international trade practitioners into 20 occupations of 4 categories and 4 professional levels. The 4 categories are international trade business operation, international trade document, international trade accounting and international trade translation. The 4 professional levels are level 1, level 2, level 3 and level 4 with level 1 on the top. 5.2

6

CONCLUSION

As pointed by Qian Yingyi, Dean of Tsinghua University School of Economics and Management, “MBA education is not research-oriented postgraduate education but after-undergraduate vocational education”. MIB is not researchoriented postgraduate education but also afterundergraduate vocational education. Similarly, applied international trade undergraduate education is a profession-oriented vocational education. Professional education must depend on industry association and industry standards to establish training objective, teaching resources, objective standards for evaluation system, as well as promote targeted, diverse and systematic cultivation of international trade professional degree talents.

Mechanism and function

5.2.1

International trade qualification standard is the foundation of standardized international trade specialty construction International trade qualification standards aim for the best order within a certain scope and develop articles for common and repeated use in view of existing or potential problems in international trade business occupation classification and qualification management. Basic principles for standardization construction typical contain principle unification, simplification, coordination and optimization.

REFERENCES [1] UNESCO, The revised International Standard Classification of Education (ISCED 2011) [DB/OL] http:// www.uis.unesco.org/Education/Pages/internationalstandard-classification-of-education.aspxNovember 2011 [2] Wang Ying, Zhu Fang-chang, The Features of Professional Master Degree in America and Its Enlightenment to China Journal of Hunan Agricultural University (Social Sciences), 2009; 04:76–79 [3] Wei Li. Accelerating organic cohesion professional degree education and vocational qualification certificate Education Teaching Forum, 2013; 51:1–2 [4] Liang Zheng, Occupational classification and qualification management of international trade GB/T 28158–2011

5.2.2

Cohesion among international trade qualification standard is the fundamental norm of international trade specialty construction International trade qualification standard is the objective regulations of international trade industry imposed upon applied undergraduate and specific education activities, which acts as the fundamental education norms. With the guidance from industry association, the establishment of international trade specialty education standards can fundamentally overcome experience-based schooling, which serves as the base and provides

64

ICIEES_Book.indb 64

4/3/2015 7:08:33 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The practical teaching system research on the business administration major Shuili Yang, Yu Zhang & Gangquan Xu School of Economics and Management of Xi’an University of Technology, Xi’an, Shaanxi, China

ABSTRACT: Business administration discipline is an applied science that systematically studies the basic law and the general method of management activities by using multidisciplinary theory, method and technology in many areas. At present, there exist many problems in the system of practical teaching in business administration, such as indeterminate goals of practical teaching, sameness in form and innovation-lacking in content of practical teaching and so on. To solve these problems this article puts forward some improving solutions to improve quality of teaching and students’ abilities of practice and innovation. Keywords: 1

Business administration major; Practical ability; Practical teaching system

INTRODUCTION

of practical teaching system and makes detailed plans according to contents in different learning periods to make a gradual improvement process in students’ practical ability. At the same time, the deficiency existed in the current practical teaching system is going to be optimized.

Business administration discipline is an applied science that systematically studies the basic law and the general method of management activities by using multidisciplinary theory, method and technology in many areas, its purpose is to study the various types of organizations’ management behavior and rule taken how to use limited resources to achieve organizational goals[1]. Practical teaching is to improve students’ practical ability through participating in practical activities under the theoretical guidance. Practical teaching and theory teaching have a close relation and relative independence relation of each other at the same time. Therefore, it is meaningful and plays an important role in improving the quality of business administration professional practical teaching and promoting the innovative talent training to set up a practical teaching system. On the analysis of the business administration professional practical teaching system, Xing He[2], thought that the goal of practical teaching is the core of practical teaching system, playing a guide role, therefore the validity of goal is essential, while, he has not explained the specific goals in the 4-year school life respectively in detail. Huang Lei and Zhang Yuhua considered[3–4] that inadequate teaching resources strongly impact on the implementation of practical teaching, resulting in unsatisfied effects, hoping a stable cooperation between colleges and enterprises to ensure practice for students. This article, in view of problems existing at present in the business administration, proposes its own problem-solving methods, sets specific goals

2

PROBLEMS OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION IN THE PRACTICAL TEACHING SYSTEM

In recent years, as employment situation of college graduates is increasingly severe, the employment issue becomes a hot topic among students and school. Society has higher and higher demands to the students’ comprehensive ability, and graduates fail to meet the needs of social development. Therefore, in order to cultivate excellent intellectuals, meet the demands of the society, and promote the further developments of the society, colleges continuously research to look for a better practical teaching system. At present, although many universities have some practical activities. However, the achievement of practical teaching is not particularly significant; graduates still cannot meet the requirements of society. There still exist in many problems in cultivating students’ practical ability, which mainly displays as follow. 2.1 Indeterminate goals of practical teaching For students in business administration major, the purposes of the practical teaching are to cultivate students’ practical ability and improve their

65

ICIEES_Book.indb 65

4/3/2015 7:08:33 AM

make others to work on it, furthermore, students in practice not neither create benefits for the enterprise, nor increase the workload of staff. Therefore, in general, enterprises are not willing to accept the students in business administration major to practice, which means for most schools the number of practical teaching base is in short, leading unsatisfied effect. 2. Lacking of teachers. Business administration is a strongly practical major; therefore there is a higher requirement for teachers’ practical skills. In fact, most teachers teaching management administration start their teaching career directly after graduate without real management experiences. Only equipped with theoretical knowledge, they also are not particular understand the operation process of the enterprise. Therefore, it is difficult to cultivate students with practical abilities. 3. Lacking of funds for practical teaching. The shortage of funds cause that the construction of environment cannot meet the requirements of practical teaching, many universities now are short of practical teaching base and teachers possessing practical ability, leading to professional practice and graduation practice which exercise students’ comprehensive application ability and innovation ability become a formal education.

application and innovation ability; nevertheless, a lot of practical teaching in majority colleges is a formality. Practical teaching is usual regarded as a complementary to theoretical course, lacking system plan from different students in different grades[4]. For example, many colleges do not arrange the corresponding practice for freshman, in the sophomore year, students directly are arranged to contact management theoretical knowledge. What the management is on earth, they can only look for the answer in the books, but if the students have real management experience, perhaps they will have a deeper and more thorough understanding of management. 2.2

Sameness in form and innovation-lacking in content of practical teaching

In many colleges, the system of practical teaching is consisted of experiment, curriculum design, social investigation, production practice, graduation practice. In the first grade, theoretical course is conducted, then the main course and corresponding experiment, curriculum design, social investigation in the following 2 years. Production practice is settled in junior year summer vacation, graduation design is planned in senior. Through the entire process of the practical teaching, experiments mostly are demonstrative experiments and replication experiments and schedule too little unable to improve the innovative capability of students, due to the sameness curriculum design in content, they can copy each other. In practice, the management is too difficult to get started easily, so in the process of practice, a lot of students are not for actual operation, just for a visit. For these reasons, in the entire process of the practical teaching, the improvement of students' practical innovative ability is not very obvious. 2.3

2.4

Lacking of standard in evaluation of practical teaching

In recent years, many colleges have realized the importance of practical teaching to cultivate applied person with practical ability, therefore they have implemented the practical teaching, but effect is not very ideal. Theory courses in the process of implementation have corresponding appraisal system and assessment standard, however, for the practical courses, testing the level of students’ practical ability is only decided by a report student submitted, which judging students’ practical courses are qualified by teachers’ subjective will, there is no corresponding practical process assessment, therefore, some students with perfunctory attitude can copy other students’ reporting of the practical course, so they will spend less time and effort in it, finally, students’ practical ability is not improved at all.

Imperfect practical teaching support system

1. Off-campus practical teaching base cannot meet the requirements. The construction of practical teaching base makes great sense to students in business administration major. For engineering students, they can carry out experiments, master the experimental process, and draw relevant conclusions in the laboratory. But as management limiting to many subjective factors itself, students can only get the results corresponding to a certain limited situation when they carry out experiments, inferring how important contacting a specific environment is for them. Through indepth enterprise practice in enterprises, they will learn how to use theoretical knowledge to solve practical problems, meanwhile, will improve their practical ability. But due to the management mostly linked to important business of firm, so companies generally are not willing to

3

OPTIMIZE PRACTICAL TEACHING SYSTEM ABOUT BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Practical teaching system is a system to guarantee and carry out the enforcement and development of practical teaching content. The following aimed at

66

ICIEES_Book.indb 66

4/3/2015 7:08:33 AM

train the students’ comprehensive and innovative ability.

present problems existing in the practical teaching system, some optimizing measures are put forward to improve the practical teaching system and the quality of practical teaching. 3.1

3.2

Improve the practical teaching content system

The content of the practical teaching is the embodiment of practical teaching goal and task, which practical teaching contents will be arranged reasonably according to the practical teaching goals, to make the goal and task of practical teaching be linked in practical teaching, make the student master the complete knowledge in practice and improve their practical ability so that their ability can meet the social demand. According to the practical teaching goal, the practical teaching content system is constructed. (As shown in Table 1)

Clear practical teaching goal

Practical teaching goal system is the core of the practical teaching system and plays a role of guidance and driver, thus the validity of goal is very important[4]. The overall goal of practical teaching is to improve the student’s practical ability and makes them learn to use the theoretical knowledge and methods to solve practical problems through carrying out the practical teaching activities. The students will gain a strong consciousness of innovation and comprehensive ability by cultivating their basic skills and professional technical skill, so that problems in the practical work will be solved quickly, effectively and creatively, the strong ability to adapt the new technology and new business will be possessed and the potential for sustainable development will be provided carrying out the practical teaching activities[5]. During the four years of study in university, the overall goal of practical teaching in different time could separate into the following objectives:

1. The experiment teaching. The experiment course can enhance students’ theoretical knowledge and their ability analyzing and solving problems. Although experimental teaching has been introduced in universities already, the arrangement is unreasonably. For low years students in business administration major, they have poor knowledge of management, so corresponding activities, such as demonstration experiment, replication experiment, should be carried out to make them understand basic process and method about management, when they turn into senior, comprehensive applied experiments should be carried out to improve their ability of analyzing and solving problem, meanwhile stimulating their innovative consciousness and improving the comprehensive ability to use knowledge.

1. Basic quality training. In the first year of college, students mainly study the public courses, at the same time, the related knowledge and process of management will be learned by some practical activities, such as cognitive practice, factory visiting. The purpose of teaching is to make students learn basic knowledge and improve their management quality. 2. Basic skills training. In the sophomore year, the students begin to learn professional courses, carry out experiments, participate in social practice activities and related simulation design competition, the purpose of teaching is to make the students master the basic professional knowledge and practical skills so that they will obtain the ability to solve basic problems. 3. Professional skill training. In junior year, students learn the professional knowledge, meanwhile, some activities such as curriculum design, production practice, simulation design and summer internship will be opened, the purpose of teaching is to train students’ ability to analyze and solve problems and improve their innovative ability and theoretical knowledge. 4. Comprehensive and innovation ability training. Fourth grade in the university, entrepreneurship training should be set up, the process of entrepreneurship training is to train the students’ ability finding problems and analyzing and solving problems, this process can

Table 1.

Practical teaching content system.

Business administration’s practical teaching content system Experiment teaching

Demonstrative experiment Replication experiment Comprehensive and applied experiment Design and research experiment

Experience teaching

Cognitive practice Curriculum design Production practice Simulation teaching Case teaching Video teaching Role-play teaching Social practice Science and technology contest

Action teaching

Professional practice Carve out training

67

ICIEES_Book.indb 67

4/3/2015 7:08:33 AM

improve students’ practice ability, because it not only can strengthen their theoretical basis but train their ability of applying the theoretical knowledge to solve practical problems; After entering university fourth grade, students have certain professional knowledge, at the same time, they also have some practical experience, so the school can organize student to carve out practice. In this semester, according to interests, the students can attend market investigation and analysis by forming a group about three or four persons, and then writing a business plan, finally its feasibility should be analyzed by the teacher. For better business plan, students may apply for the undergraduates’ venture capital fund, but for worse business plan, students can improve it for the existing problems by summary and reflection in combination with the actual case under the guidance of the teacher, and then constantly optimize their business plan; Finally, students will use their own entrepreneurial process to write their graduation thesis. This training process is beneficial for students both strengthening theoretical knowledge and exercising practical operating ability and inspires innovative consciousness.

2. The experience teaching. Experiential teaching is a teaching form which makes students, in the process of experience, understand and construct knowledge and develop ability by creating the actual or repeat scene and opportunities to emerge or reproduce or restore teaching content according to students’ cognitive characteristics and law. The experiential teaching could encourage students to explore things and consider question and hands-on actively so as to enhance the students’ practical innovative ability. For the students of grade one in business administration major, management is a completely new concept, therefore, we should carry out the understanding practice for them, visiting place of university-enterprise cooperation, arranging students to participate in social practice activities during the summer and winter vacation,the purpose of teaching is to make them understand management and increase the perceptual knowledge for management, stimulating the learning interest and improving the study enthusiasm so that they will obtain a good foundation of learning management knowledge. When students begin to learn basic professional courses, the activities, such as curriculum design, ERP simulation, the enterprise management’s scenario simulation, should be opened by logical combination so that students can understand and experience the operation process of enterprise and main business about management activities, the purpose of teaching is to stimulate students’ innovative enthusiasm of management and improve the students’ management practical ability. When students begin to learn professional course, their professional knowledge become rich, this activities should be introduced such as video teaching, case teaching, science and technology contest, which can make students better understand the professional knowledge and more quickly master the professional skills so that their skills about analyzing and solving problems will be improved, their innovative spirit and practical ability will be cultivated and professional ability such as the expression, communication and teamwork will be enhanced[4]. 3. The action teaching. The action teaching is through taking action to learning, that is, some practical problems will be solved by participating in some practical projects, and then more experience will be got by summarizing and reflecting. It is necessary for the action learning to possess the solid theoretical basis. So the action learning course should be introduced in the junior year, When the student has learned the professional theory course, professional practice should be introduced in order to

3.3

Strengthen the practical teaching support system

Practical teaching support system has a certain requirement for practical teaching environment and practical ability of teachers. The practical teaching environments include the construction of laboratory and off-campus practical base and supporting for students’ professional practical activities after class, and so on[4]. 1. The construction of practical teaching environment. In order to ensure the successful implementation of experiment teaching, constructing laboratory about business administration major needs to invest lots of funds such as software purchase, equipment configuration, personnel training of laboratory and so on[6]. For the construction of off-campus practical base, college need to pay the larger investments; the establishment of a lasting relationship with the enterprise can make students enter the enterprise to study, not visiting. At the same time, the relevant personnel training of enterprise make them possess a certain ability to guide students when they encounter problems. 2. The construction of practical teaching faculty. The teacher participating in the practical teaching must have certain practical experience; they cannot only have theoretical knowledge without practical experience. Schools could send outstanding young and middle-aged teachers to

68

ICIEES_Book.indb 68

4/3/2015 7:08:33 AM

with innovative conscious, and it is an important platform to cultivate the students to master the scientific method and improve practical ability. Through the study of new practical teaching system, it can definite the goals of teaching cultivating management persons and improve the students' learning enthusiasm and initiative and stimulate their innovative conscious but also cultivate the students' practical skill. In this article, we analyze the problems and reasons current existing in business administration major and put forward the corresponding optimization measures, it mainly includes clearing teaching goal, completing the practical teaching content system, strengthening the practical teaching support system and optimizing the teaching assessment system. In short, for business administration major only by establishing the complete practical teaching system can we cultivate applied persons with practical ability and meeting social requirements.

neither study in famous universities at home or abroad nor train in the large and mediumsized enterprises in order to update the teachers’ knowledge and keep the most excellent teachers. At the same time, schools should hire manager possessing rich experience as a part-time teacher in the enterprise. 3. The construction of funding support system of practical teaching. Teaching fund is the premise to ensure implementation of practical teaching, the teaching activities are not carried out well without fund. Therefore, college should be supported by state and government in the process of implementing practical teaching, and it should strengthen the construction of laboratory and practical teaching base and purchase experimental teaching software construction, it also need to increase investment for teachers to provide a assurance to carry out the practical teaching activities well. 3.4

Improve the practical teaching evaluation system

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This study was financially supported by the teaching research project of Xian University of Technology.

Student’s performance in practical teaching activities cannot be judged only by a report, the learning process should be considered in activities. Such as the students’ attendance, the spending time in learning, the proficiency of operating and the standardization of experimental report and so on. They will be set corresponding score according to important degree in order to avoid some students rely on others and copy others report, this way can supervise and urge students to learn and stimulate their enthusiasm and initiative of learning. Attendance can be assessed by roll call; the spending time can be assessed by the number of student’s communicating with the teacher and the student’s performance in the practical teaching; the proficiency of operation is assessed according to the number of error and severity in the operating. College can cultivate students’ good learning habits and learning ability by continuously improving practical teaching assessment system and promote students to learn. It is of great significance for improving the students’ practical ability and realizing the goal of practical teaching. 4

REFERENCES [1] Hu Yongquan. 2006. Experiment teaching courses system research of business administration discipline. Education & Modernizatio(3):141–144. [2] Xing He & Wu Pingan. 2012. Exploration constructing practical teaching system about business administration’s applied undergraduate major. Journal of Changchun University, 22(6)766–768. [3] Huang Lei, Ye Yong & Li Ming. 2012. Practical teaching system analysis of Business administration major existing in problem and countermeasure. Journal of Panzhihua University, 29 (4):76–78. [4] Zhang Yuhua. 2009. Construction and practice of practical teaching system of undergraduate major of business administration. Journal of Guangdong University of Foreign Studies, 20(6):89–92. [5] Zhang Zhongfu. 2011. Establishing practical teaching system centered on ability training. Experimental Technology and Management, 28(2):12–14. [6] Xue Jiangai. 2010. The researching practical teaching system construction of Business administration major. Education & Economy, (11):101–102.

CONCLUSIONS

Practical teaching is an effective way to consolidate and deepen the theoretical knowledge, it is an important process to cultivate high-quality persons

69

ICIEES_Book.indb 69

4/3/2015 7:08:34 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Study on fuzzy modeling and detection using a hybrid-adaptive multiple physiological signal analysis in dementia-switched singularly perturbed modeling ChiJo Wang & JuingShian Chiou Department of Electrical Engineering, Southern Taiwan University of Science and Technology, Tainan City, Taiwan

ABSTRACT: The current design would utilize the use of several physiological information that includes cholesterol, blood pressure, blood oxygen, blood glucose, and heart rate variability are described in this article. Moreover, it would also aid doctors in providing correct early diagnosis of the dementia patients. When dementia is treated in a timely manner it can slow down its degenerative effects and improve the symptoms. The article will collect information on the physiological information of dementia patients using data mining process. Keywords: 1

Fuzzy modeling; Switched systems; Singularly perturbed systems is asymptotically stable for an arbitrary switching signal [3]. Alternatively, one can construct a quadratic common Lyapunov function for the family of linear systems [equation] as shown in [4]. In the last two decades, there has been increasing interest in the stability analysis and control design for such switched systems. The motivation for studying switched systems id from the fact that many practical systems are inherently multimodal in the sense that several dynamical subsystems are required to describe their behavior which may depend on various environmental factors, and that the methods of intelligent control design are based on the idea of switching between different controllers. For the recent progress and perspectives in the field of switched systems, see the survey papers.

INTRODUCTION

Switched systems are an important class of hybrid systems. In the study of switched systems most works have been centralized on the problem of stability and stabilization. If all the subsystems have a common Lyapunov function, we have many choices of switching strategy to make the whole system stable. In [1], the conditions for the existence of a common Lyapunov function and the selecting patterns of switching strategy were given. For switched linear systems, the existence of a common Lyapunov function is equivalent to stability of switched systems under the arbitrary switching laws. However, many switched systems do not have a common Lyapunov function. Therefore, it has received a lot of attention to look for a restricted class of switching laws under which switched systems are stable. A switched system can be described by a family of continuous-time subsystems and a rule that orchestrates the switching between them. Such systems arise, for example, when different controllers are being placed in the feedback loop with a given process, or when a given process exhibits a switching behavior caused by abrupt changes of the environment. For a discussion of various issues related to switched systems, see the recent survey articles [2]. This article is concerned with the following problem: find conditions on the individual subsystems which guarantee that the switched system

2

MAIN RESULTS

Consider the switched singularly perturbed systems as follows: x1(t ) = A11 _ i x1(t (t ) A12 _ i x2 (t ) + B1 _ i u(t )

(1a)

ε x 2 (t ) = A21 _ i x1(t (t ) A22 _ i x2 (t ) + B2 _ i u(t )

(1b)

where x1 R n1 , x2 R n2 , n ( n1 + n2 ) is the order of the whole system, u R is the control and are constant matrices with appropriate dimension for, and ε is a small positive singular perturbation

71

ICIEES_Book.indb 71

4/3/2015 7:08:34 AM

parameter. i is a switching rule which takes its values in the finite set I { , 2, , r}. Furthermore, the subsystems of switched singularly perturbed systems (1) can be obtained: The slow switched singularly perturbed systems:

systems (2). This we now do in the following theorem. First, let

x1s (t ) = A0 _ i x1s (t ) B0 _ i us (t ) 1s (t

where the matrices Li respectively, satisfy

⎡ζ1( ⎢ ⎢⎣ζ2 (

(2a)

where A0 _ i A11 _ i − A12 _ i A2−21_ i A21 _ i and B0 _ i = B1 _ i A12 _ i A221_ i B2 _ i . The fast switched singularly perturbed systems:

ε x 2 f (t ) = A

i x2 f

+B

iu f

(t )

(2b)

(3a)

u f (t ) = G f _ i x f (t )

(3b)

Li ( ) and H

G1 _ i

I

(7a)

ε ( 11 _ i _i + F12 _ i = 0

(7b)

i )H i

Hi (

_i

(5)

A11 _ i + B1 _ iG1 _ i ,

F12 _ i

A12 _ i + B1 _ iG2 _ i ,

F21 _ i

A21 _ i + B2 _ iG1 _ i ,

F22 _ i

A22 _ i + B2 _ iG2 _ i .

_i )

(8)

(9a)

x2 (t ) = − A221_ i ( A21 _ i u(t ) = us (t ) + u f (t )

B2 _ iGs _ i )x s + x2 f + O( )), (ε ) (9b) ( , ε * ].

CONCLUSION

This is the first article about the switched singularly perturbed systems that elucidates the relationship of controller and observer design between the original systems and the subsystems are obtained by using the singular perturbation reduction techniques. We show that the reduced subsystems are indeed the O( ) approximation of the original system. The problems of designing the composite controllers and observers of multi-dimension fast subsystem, and calculating a better bound ε for switched singularly perturbed remain open, and are the interesting topics for future research.

Furthermore, the closed-loop forms of individual systems (1) may be rewritten as

where F11 _ i

i

(4)

G f _ i A221_ i B2 _ i Gs _ i + G f _ i A2−21_ i A21 _ i

F12 _ i ⎤ ⎡ x1(t ) ⎤ F22 _ i ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ x2 (t ) ⎥⎦

ε

x1(t ) = x1s (t ) + O( ),

3

⎡ x1(t ) ⎤ ⎡ F11 _ i ⎢ε x (t ) ⎥ = ⎢ F ⎣ 2 ⎦ ⎣ 21 _ i

Hi ( )

0 = F22 _ i Li − ε Li F111 _ i + ε Li F12 1 _ i Li − F221 _ i

for all finite t ≥ t0 and for all ε Gf _i

(6)

is applied to the system (1), the state and control of the resulting closed-loop individual system, starting from any bounded initial conditions x1(t0 ) and x2 (t0 ) , are approximated according to

where G2 _ i

)⎤ , ) ⎥⎦

u(t ) = G1 _ i x (t (t ) G2 _ i x2 (t )

and the composite control as u(t ) = G1 _ i x (t (t ) G2 _ i x2 (t )

ε Hi ⎤ ⎡ x1( ⎥ I n2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ x2 (

Theorem 1: Let G2 _ i be design such that Re λ ( 22 _ i _ i 2 _ i ) < 0. Then, there exists an ε * > 0 such that if the composite control

In general, the analysis and controller design of switched singularly perturbed systems can be accomplished by first separating the original systems (1) into the slow and fast subsystems (2a) and (2b), respectively, and then obtaining the composite results for systems (1). That is, suppose now the subsystem controllers, whom are to be designed according to the slow and fast mode performance specifications, have the form us (t ) = Gs _ i x1s (t )

) ⎤ ⎡ I n1 ε Hi Li ⎥=⎢ Li ) ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣

ACKNOWLEDGMENT This study is supported by the National Science Council, Taiwan, Republic of China, under grand number NSC 102–2221-E-218-017 and NSC 1002632-E-218-001-MY3.

As we have indicated, no research article ever discussed the relationships of state trajectories between the original systems (1) and the reduced

72

ICIEES_Book.indb 72

4/3/2015 7:08:34 AM

REFERENCES

[3] Wu, H.: ‘Decentralized adaptive robust control for a class of large-scale systems including delayed state perturbations in the interconnection’, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control, 2002, 47, pp. 1745–1751. [4] Xia, Y., and Jia, Y.: ‘robust sliding-mode control for uncertain time-delay systems: An LMI approach’, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control, 2003, 48, pp. 1086–1092.

[1] Kokotovic, P.V., Khalil, H.K., and O’Reilly, J.: ‘Singular Perturbation Methods in Control: Analysis and Design’ (Academic Press, London, 1986). [2] Naidu, D.S.: ‘Singular Perturbation Methodology in Control Systems’ (IEE and Peter Peregrinus Ltd, Stevenage Herts, UK, 1988).

73

ICIEES_Book.indb 73

4/3/2015 7:08:39 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Learner’s motivation recognition in e-learning environment F. Ghorbani & Gh. A. Montazer Information Technology Department, School of Engineering, Tarbiat Modares University, Tehran, Iran

ABSTRACT: Motivation is an important element for academic and professional success because efficient learning or high performance do not takes place without it. A student may have a certain degree of motivation. But the teaching styles, the structure of the course, the nature of the assignments and informal interactions with students have a large effect on student motivation. Therefore, in order to improve the learning and teaching process efficiency, we should consider the learner motivation. The goal orientation theory of motivation provides a viable framework to study the aims of students. Studies on academic motivation from the perspective of goal orientation have been plentiful in recent years. But as far as it is concerned, this perspective has not been considered and no research work conducted to recognize the learner’s goal orientation in e-learning environment. In this paper, a fuzzy intelligent system has been designed to identify the learner’s goal orientation based on the Elliot, McGregor and Gable model. Learners’ interactions with the e-learning system were employed as indicators to recognize their motivation from perspective of goal orientation. The system results have been compared with the result of goal orientation questionnaire performance. This comparison shows 85% accuracy for system results. Keywords: 1

e-learning; motivation; goal orientation; fuzzy expert system

INTRODUCTION

2

Motivation to learn refers to the desire of the learner to learn the content of a training program (Noe, 1986). Studies have indicated that motivation to learn is a predictor of course-outcomes and is influenced by both individual and situational characteristics (Colquitt et al., 2000; Klein et al., 2006). Goal orientation theory is a social-cognitive theory of achievement motivation. Whereas other motivational theories (e.g., attribution theory) examine students’ beliefs about their successes and failures, goal orientation theory examines the reasons why students engage in their academic work (Yough & Anderman, 2009). Many researches examining goal orientations has used self-report survey instruments. Students are asked to complete surveys that assess students’ personal goals, and their perceptions of classroom and/ or school goal structures (Yough & Anderman, 2009). None of the conducted researches were not sufficient in literature to automatic learner goal orientation identification, especially in e-learning systems. In this paper, a fuzzy intelligent system, named ALGOIS, is designed to identify the learners’ goal orientation based on the Elliot et al model automatically using learner’s behaviors in an e-learning system. The paper is organized as follows: the goal orientation model is described in Section 2. The designed fuzzy system is introduced in Section 3 and the experimental results are discussed in Section 4 and finally, the conclusion is drawn in Section 5.

THE GOAL ORIENTATION

In order to understand the basic properties of goal orientation theory, it is important to understand how to conceptualize the goals in the research literature. Performance and mastery are the major goal-orientations which are discussed in psychological aspect. People who set performance goals are often focused on winning, looking good, and being evaluated well while mastery goals seek to improve and learn, no matter how awkward people might look to others. People who set mastery goals usually seek out challenges and persist in the face of difficulties (Woolfolk, 2008). Students hold mastery goals when their goal is to truly understand or master the task at hand (Murphy & Alexander, 2000). Students who are mastery-oriented are interested in selfimprovement and tend to compare their current level of achievement with their own prior achievement (Harackiewicz & Elliot, 1993). In contrast, the students hold performance goals when their goal is to demonstrate their ability compared with others (Murphy & Alexander, 2000). Students who are performance-oriented are interested in competing, demonstrating their competence, and outperforming others; they tend to use other students as points of comparison, rather than themselves (Harackiewicz & Elliot, 1993). Elliot and Harackiewicz (1996) find out and theorized an approach-avoidance distinction that had not been considered. Atkinson introduced

75

ICIEES_Book.indb 75

4/3/2015 7:08:39 AM

with grade point average, deep processing, and exam performance. Also, low achievement was associated with performance-avoidance goal orientations, whereas academic success was frequently correlated with performance-approach goal orientation, and sometimes associated with mastery goal orientations. In Addition, the attributions of failure to task difficulty led to the avoidance of challenging tasks (Elliot & Dweck, 1988). Based on different behaviors that associated with different goal orientations, learners’ behaviors can be used as an indicator to automatic identification of his/her goal orientation. According to previous discussion, the behavioral factors of goal orientation are shown in Table 1. However, these behaviors are influenced by a wide variety of variables and uncertainty. Fuzzy sets theory is one of the most appropriate mathematical theories to deal with uncertainty (Georgiou & Makry, 2004). Fuzzy theory can be utilized to quantitative and qualitative information about learners’ behaviors. Also, fuzzy inference mechanisms help to make inferences about the learner’s goal orientation based on their behaviors. To design a fuzzy expert system, we should describe input and output variables as a linguistic variables. The relation between these fuzzy variables should be expressed as fuzzy rules (Huang et al., 2006). In designed system, some learner’s behaviors are associated to goal orientation as fuzzy input variables (see Table 1). These behaviors should be expressed as the linguistic variables. Linguistic variables represent a range of values corresponding to the network behaviors. We use logged data from the underlying LMS and teacher assistances’ view to define three linguistic variables named “low”, “medium”, and “high” for each behavior as shown in Table 2. These variables have been defined as trapezoidal fuzzy numbers. The goal orientation (output variable) is defined as a fuzzy number with the “avoidance-approach”,

the concepts of approach and avoidance into the motivation literature, positing that some people sought successes (approach) while others looked to avoid failures (avoidance) (McCollum & Kajs, 2007). According to these concepts, Elliot et al., (1999) split the performance goal orientation into performance-approach and performance-avoidance. Performance-approach oriented students looked to gain positive judgments of their competence in relation to other people, whereas performanceavoidance goal oriented students sought to avoid negative judgments of their competence in relation to other people (McCollum, 2004). Thus, a threedimension model of goal orientations was created to include the approach-avoidance distinction. 3

AUTOMATIC LEARNER’S GOAL ORIENTATION IDENTIFIER SYSTEM (ALGOIS)

Learners’ goal orientation analysis based on selfreports can be influenced by a wide variety of errors because of some reasons such as wrong answers or wrong self-reports. Some learner characteristics and behaviors associated with the different goal orientations that can applied to automatic goal orientation identification. Mastery-oriented students pose high intrinsic value on learning (Butler, 1987; Covington, 1999) and apply deep information processing strategies, such as reading multiple examples (Ames, 1992). They choose tasks and spend a great deal of time on them (Schunk, 1996). The students that set mastery goals interest in class and lectures (Church et al., 2001; Harackiewicz et al., 2002). Masteryoriented students believe that effort is the key to success rather than ability. Mastery goal orientations are positive predictors of academic performance (Elliot & McGregor, 2001). Performance oriented students led to some other characteristics and behaviors. Performanceapproach oriented students try to achieve better grades than their classmates, whereas performanceavoidance oriented students do not like to receive lower grades than their classmates (Elliot & Harackiewicz, 1996). They have low effort and persistence (Elliot et al., 1999) and feelings of incompetence and fear of failure (Elliot, 1999; Elliot & Church, 1997). They use surface strategies and are disorganized (Elliot et al. 1999), while performanceapproach oriented students have good academic achievements (Barron & Harackiewicz, 2001). A performance-approach goal orientation was positively correlated with academic achievement (Barron & Harackiewicz, 2001; Harackiewicz, 2002). Elliot et al. (1999) found performance-avoidance to be positively correlated with surface processing and disorganization, and negatively correlated

Table 1. The behavioral factors for goal orientation identification. Mapped network behaviors Goal orientation

Grades (GR), Participation in Chat Rooms and Forums (PICF), Adding Posts in Forums (APF), Difficulty Level of Assignments and Examples (DLAE), Dedicating Time for a Course (DTC), Participation in Troubleshooting Groups (PTG), Delay in Assignment Delivering (DAD), Search about the Subject of Course (SSC), Number of System Entrance per week (NES)

76

ICIEES_Book.indb 76

4/3/2015 7:08:39 AM

“performance-approach” and “mastery-approach” values as shown in Fig. 1. Fuzzy rules are extracted based on the relation between network behaviors and learners’ goal orientation. For example, Middleton and Midgley (1997) found that students with a performance avoidance orientation take the unchallenging tasks, and are frequently reluctant to show their work to others, whereas students with a performance approach orientation want to be the best and to appear to be the most competent. They spend more

Table 3.

Some extracted fuzzy rules.

Goal orientation Avoidance— performance

Table 2. The definition of linguistic variables as fuzzy sets. Linguistic variables Behaviors

Low

Grades (GR) Participation In Chat and Forums (PICF) Adding Post in Forums (APF) Difficulty Level of Assignments and Examples (DLAE) Dedicating Time for Course (DTC) Dedicating Time for reading examples and assignments (DTE) Participation in Troubleshooting Groups (PTG) Delay in Assignment Delivering (days) (DAD) Number of Entrance to System in a week (NES)

(0,10,14) (13,15,16,18) (17,18,20) (0,3,6) (5,6,8,10) (9,11,15)

Figure 1.

Medium

Performance approach

High

(0,1,2)

(1,3,7,10)

(8,10,15)

Low

Medium

High

(0,60,80) (70,80, 90,110)

(90,110, 250)

(0,3,5)

(3,6,8,10)

(9,12,30)

(0,3,5)

(3,6,8,9)

(8,10,15)

(0,1,3)

(2,3,5,6)

(5,7,10)

(0,2,3)

(2,3,4,5)

(4,5,7)

Mastery approach

Extracted rules If PIF is low and DTC is low and DLAE is low and DAD is high and NES is low, THEN the goal orientation is avoidance performance If GR is low and APF is low DLAE is low and DTE is low and DAD is high, THEN the goal orientation is avoidance performance If GR is low and PICF is low and Dedicating time for course is medium DTC and DAD is medium and SSC is low, THEN the goal orientation is avoidance performance If GR is high and PICF is medium and DLAE is medium and DTC is high and DAD is low and NES is high, THEN the goal orientation is performance approach If GR is high and APF is medium and DLAE is high and DTC is high and DTE is high, THEN the goal orientation is performance approach If GR is high and PICF is medium and APF is medium and DTC is high and DAD is low and SSC is medium, THEN the goal orientation is performance approach If GR is medium and PICF is high and APF is high and DLAE of is high and PTG is high and DAD is medium, THEN the goal orientation is mastery approach If GR is medium and DLAE is high and DTC is high and PICF is high and DAD is low and NES is high medium, THEN the goal orientation is mastery approach If GR is medium and DLAE is high and DTC is medium and PTG is high and SSC is high and NES is medium, THEN the goal orientation is mastery approach

time on assignment and course and take challenge tasks (Middleton & Midgley, 1997). We can claim in e-learning system, such persons takes high difficulty level assignment, uses system many times per week and participation in forums and chat rooms frequently. Using linguistic variables, this analysis can be expressed as following fuzzy rule: “if Participation in Forums (PICF) is high and the Difficulty Level of Assignment and Examples (DLAE) is medium and Number of System Entrance per week (NES) is medium, then the goal orientation is performance approach”. Table 3 shows some extracted rules based on the same analysis for other orientations.

Linguistic variables of system.

77

ICIEES_Book.indb 77

4/3/2015 7:08:39 AM

Table 4. results.

System’s output AGQ System

1 2

0.5 1

PA MA

0.492 0.632 0.283

PAA PA PA PA PA PAA

(15.92,13,7,51,2,3,3) (19.28,13,10,10, 85,6,0,4) (16.73,6,7,63,2,9,4) (18.97,2,4,76,1,4,5) (19.57,9,4,32,1,2,4)

4

[1] Ames, C. (1992). Classrooms: Goals, structures, and student motivation, Journal of Educational Psychology, 84, 261–271. [2] Barron, K.E. & Harackiewicz, J.M. (2001). Achievement goals and optimal motivation: Testing multiple goal models. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 80, 706–722. [3] Butler, R. (1987). Task-involving and ego-involving properties of evaluation: Effects of different feedback conditions on motivational perceptions, interest, and performance. Journal of Educational Psychology, 79, 474–482. [4] Church, M.A. Elliot, A.J. & Gable, S.L. (2001). Perceptions of classroom environment, achievement goals, and achievement outcomes. Journal of Educational Psychology, 93, 43–54. [5] Colquitt J.A., LePine J.A. & Noe R.A. (2000). Toward an integrative theory of training motivation: meta-analytic path analysis of 20 years of research. Journal of Applied Psychology, 85, 678–707. [6] Covington, M. (1999). Caring about learning: The nature and nurturing of subject matter appreciation. Educational Psychologist, 34, 127–136. [7] Elliot, A.J. & McGregor, H.A. (2001). A 2 × 2 achievement goal framework. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 80, 501–519. [8] Elliot, A.J. (1999). Approach and avoidance motivation and achievement goals. Educational Psychologist, 34(3), 169–189. [9] Elliot, A.J. & Church, M.A. (1997). A hierarchical model of approach and avoidance achievement motivation. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 72(1), 218–232. [10] Elliot, A.J. & Harackiewicz, J.M. (1996). Approach and avoidance achievement goals and intrinsic motivation: A meditational analysis. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 70, 461–475. [11] Elliot, A.J., McGregor, H.A. & Gable, S. (1999). Achievement goals, study strategies, and exam performance: A mediational analysis. Journal of Educational Psychology, 91(3), 549–563. [12] Elliot, E.S. & Dweck, C.S. (1988). Goals: An approach to motivation and achievement. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 54, 5–12. [13] Georgiou, D.A. & Makry, D. (2004). A learner’s style and profile recognition via fuzzy cognitive map. In 4th IEEE international conference on advanced learning technologies (ICALT’04). [14] Harackiewicz, J.M., Barron, K.E., Pintrich, P.R., Elliot, A.J. & Thrash, T.M. (2002). Revision of achievement goal theory: Necessary and illuminating. Journal of Educational Psychology, 94(3), 638–645. [15] Harackiewicz, J.M. & Elliot, A.J. (1993), Achievement goals and intrinsic motivation, Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 65 (5), 904–915.

Goal orientation

Learner’s Learner’s behaviors number values

3 4 5

REFERENCES

Comparison between ALGOIS and AGQ

PA MA

EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS

To evaluate the ALGOIS efficiency in learners’ goal orientation identification, its results was compared with the results obtained from the Elliot’s Achievement Goal Questionnaire (AGQ), which apply to determine learner’s goal orientation, was completed by the 23 MSc students enrolled in an online graduate course. We used logged files from Tarbiat Modares University’s LMS (moodle2). According to the collected data, there is no difficulty level of assignments and search about the subject of course was found. These behaviors were removed from associated behaviors to goal orientation. Table 4 shows a comparison between ALGOIS and AGQ results. PAA, PA and MA are the abbreviations of performance-avoidance approach, performance approach and mastery approach, respectively. The system accuracy is about 85%. 5

CONCLUSION

In this paper, a fuzzy expert system, named ALGOIS, was designed and implemented to detect the learners’ goal orientation based on their behavior, automatically. The proposed system used some learners’ network behavior as the input variables. The output variable of ALGOIS is the goal orientation. The fuzzy rules were extracted based on the dependency between mapped behaviors and the learners’ goal orientation. Based on the comparison between ALGOIS results and those obtained by the AGQ, the ALGOIS accuracy to identify learner’s goal orientation is about 85%. These results show that the ALGOIS can predict learner’s goal orientation in e-learning environment using his/her network behaviors with a reasonable precision.

78

ICIEES_Book.indb 78

4/3/2015 7:08:39 AM

[16] Huang, Y.P., Lu, C.C. & Chang, T.W. (2007). An Intelligent Approach to Detecting the Bad Credit Card Accounts. in 25th IASTED International Multi-Conference Artificial Intelligence and Applications, Innsbruck, Austria, 1–6. [17] Klein, H.J., Noe, R.A. & Wang, Ch. (2006). Motivation to learn and course outcomes: the impact of delivery mode, learning goal orientation, and perceived barriers and enablers. Personnel psychology, 2006, 59, 665–702. [18] McCollum, D.L. (2004). Development of integrated taxonomy of social goals (Doctoral dissertation, Penn State, 2004). Dissertation Abstracts International 65(9-A), 3279. [19] Murphy, K.P. & Alexander, P. (2000). A motivated exploration of motivation terminology, Contemporary Educational Psychology, 25, 3–53.

[20] Noe, R.A. (1986). Trainee attributes and attitudes: Neglected influences on training effectiveness, Academy of Management Review, 11, 736–749. [21] Pintrich, P.R. (2000). An Achievement Goal Theory Perspective on Issues in Motivation Terminology, Theory, and Research, Contemporary Educational Psychology, 25(1), 92–104. [22] Schunk, D.H. (1996). Goal and self-evaluative influences during children’s cognitive skill learning. American Educational Research Journal, 33, 359–382. [23] Woolfolk, A. 2008, Educational Psychology, 10th ed. Boston: Ohio State University, 2008. [24] Yough, M. & Anderman, E. 2009. “Goal Orientation Theory” retrieved from http://www.education.com/ reference/article/goal-orientation-theory/available on 9/20/2013.

79

ICIEES_Book.indb 79

4/3/2015 7:08:39 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Research on current situation of student independent study under network environment Qun Cai College of Science of Honghe University, Mengzi, Yunnan, China

Jing Jin College of Teacher Education of Honghe University, Mengzi, Yunnan, China

ABSTRACT: Independent study under network environment has become one of the main forms of contemporary college students’ learning. The students of Department of Physics of Yunnan Honghe University as the research object, this paper mainly use questionnaire to survey the current situation of the students’ using the Internet to learn, the students’ ability of using the network, the role of teachers playing in the network learning model. The paper points out that the construction of teaching websites and the teaching reform of network self-learning is necessary. Keywords: 1

The Internet; self-learning; teaching reform

INTRODUCTION

2.2 Research methods This research adopts the questionnaire investigation. It starts from the relevant factors affecting the network learning. This paper designed the “independent study under network environment questionnaire”, Questionnaire mainly investigates the basic situation of college students using the Internet, the situation of the student using network to learn, the role of network autonomous learning in students’ study, and guiding role of teachers in student’s network learning.

With the advent of the Internet age and the expansion of the network influence, the network has been in full swing in the university campus, have “net” for many college students (Zhu Huaguang, 1987). Using network for autonomous learning has become one of the main purposes of contemporary college students accessing to the Internet and one of the main forms of college learning. Independent study under network environment refers to the learners to use network media, the initiative to apply and control their own meta cognition, motivation and behavior to do network course learning (Jiang Shengli, 2004). The purpose of this study is to learn more about the specific circumstances of the students’ network learning, to improve the deficiency existing in the network teaching, to guide students to learn better, so as to improve the efficiency of the college students’ network learning. 2 2.1

3

RESULTS AND ANALYSIS

3.1 The basic situation of college students using the internet The questionnaire first makes a survey on general situation of college students’ using the network, including whether the students have their own computers, internet place, time and purpose, and so on.

SUBJECTS AND METHODS 3.1.1 A small number of students have own computers There are 84 students in this survey, only 42.86% of the students have their own computer. This is due to the students being investigated are freshmen, relative to other grades the degree of demand for computer is not high; In addition, a large number

Research subjects

The freshmen of Department of Physics of Yunnan Honghe University as the research object, we issued 84 questionnaires, 84 copies were recovered, the recovery rate is 100%, effective questionnaires are 84, and the effective rate was 100%.

81

ICIEES_Book.indb 81

4/3/2015 7:08:39 AM

students’ purpose surfing the Internet presents diversity, “learning” has become one of the main reasons for students to surf the Internet, and most of the students are willing to use the web to get more learning resources and information.

of students in Honghe University come from rural or remote mountainous areas, family economic situation is relatively worse, they do not have the financial ability with computers. 3.1.2

Diversified students surf the internet location In answer to their surfing the internet location, the students who own computer choose to surf the internet in the dormitory, no computer students choose to surf the internet in school network or internet cafes, someone also choose to surf the internet in the dormitory with their classmate who own computer.

3.2

Analysis on the situation of student using network

3.2.1

Students have the consciousness of learning by network The statistics in the situation of students using the internet found that 57.14% of the students consider “network is helpful to learn, but little”, 42.86% of the students think network are of great help in learning; no students think network is helpless to learn. Stating that the vast majority of students have realized the network have the learning function, and has been gradually set up the consciousness of using the Internet to learn, but they do not have clear consciousness. Therefore, correctly guiding the student to use network for learning and improving the learning efficiency is a major responsibility for every teacher.

3.1.3

The survey found, each student will go to the internet, no matter whether he has a computer The average time spent online per day is shown in Table 1. Through the data in Table 1 we draw the following conclusions. Proportion of the student who surf the internet 2–3 hours a day is 74.32%. Learning is a very tense for freshmen, their average class hours is at least 5–6 a day, and more homework.

3.2.2

Most of the students have the basic skills of online learning When answering the question “which way to take once encountered problems in the learning process”, 64.29% of the students choose “to collect related data using network”, 26.19% of the students choose “to ask students”, only 9.5% of the students choose “to ask the teacher for solving. More than half of the students’ choosing are the “collecting data by online” explain most of the students have the basic skills on network learning. At the same time, 88.10% of the students think it is necessary to set up a school network skills training courses to help themselves adapt to the new study way, adjust their learning methods to adapt to the network, which shows that students’ online learning skills cannot adapt to the learning needs for themselves.

3.1.4

The diversity of students’ purpose on surfing the internet Survey statistics about students’ purpose of online are shown in table 2. Some students choose two options or more than two options. Showing from this table, 42.86% of the students are just for entertainment, making up the largest percentage of the four items, which shows that most students surf the internet just for playing. But the other three proportions accounted for 80.95% together, which can be seen from the data that the students are for entertainment, playing games, watching movies is a one-sided view. In fact, the Table 1.

Student average daily online time statistics.

Time Number of students (people) Proportion (%)

Table 2. Purpose

One hour

Two hours

There hours

Four hours

More time

20

34

26

2

2

23.81

40.48

30.95

2.38

3.3

In the process of students using e-learning, there are 69.05% of the students who think that teachers are “very necessary” to provide the sites about the courses, there are 30.95% of the students believing that the sites which the teachers provide are “dispensable”, no students consider it is “not necessary” for teachers to provide teaching sites. It can be seen, students prefer teachers to provide teaching websites related the courses, which offer online learning resources, which makes it easier to learn. In response to “When the teacher provides curriculum-related network resources

2.38

Statistics about students’ purpose of online. For Obtain Entertain- Outside learning information ment contract

Percentage 28.57 (%)

30.95

42.86

The analysis of students’ needs for the teaching website

21.43

82

ICIEES_Book.indb 82

4/3/2015 7:08:39 AM

4

in the campus network, will you take the initiative to read it?” 95.23% of the students said they would take the initiative to read; but 4.76% of the students said they would not. Thus, the teaching site is in great demand. 3.4

Today the teaching method “upside classroom” that is popular at home and abroad, can effectively promote the college students’ ability of self-study, the model demands more for the network teaching platform, proceeding the reform of network teaching and improving the quality of network teaching will be able to effectively promote the network self-learning ability of the students. The reform of network teaching can be the proceeding from the following aspects.

The analysis of the students’ dependence for teachers in the process of self—learning

The Survey shows that in the process of students’ self-learning online, only 14.29% of the students will “take the initiative to exchange with teachers and classmates”, 83.33% of the students “rarely exchange with teachers and classmates”, and only one person thinks that it is not necessary to exchange with teachers and classmates. When asked, “Can teachers play a role well in the students ‘use of the network for independent learning process’?”, 85.71% of the students response that “they can”, only 14.29% of the students response that “they can not. When they answered “which way will you choose in the process of studying professional courses?”, 78.57% of the students want to learn with a teacher in the classroom, while 16.67% of the students are willing to proceed network self-learning, there are students who are willing to learn in both ways. Only 9.25 percents of the students are willing to “selflearning.” The above data shows that the students are not suited to the way of learning by self-learning network, they are very confused, they rely on teachers too much, they prefer to exchange with teachers and classmates, to learn with the teacher in the classroom, the teacher has always played a vital role in the whole learning process, they hope that teachers can give students more help and direction. 3.5

THE MEASURES TO ENHANCE STUDENTS’ SELF-LEARNING ABILITY THROUGH THE NETWORK

4.1

Keep the net flowing

Even through there is no more than half freshman have computers, they can carry on online autonomous learning through various channels. As a kind of new learning mode, online autonomous learning is gradually accepted and the students are adapting to the learning trend actively. Meanwhile most of them prefer to surf on the internet in the dormitory, namely the school should keep the net flowing thus put them into learning state easily, quickly and enjoyably. The school should apply the network information technology to incubate good environment that conform to the study requirements, develop their learning initiative completely, and let them obtain knowledge and emotional experience through comprehensive perception and experience, and finally promote the learning effect. 4.2

The analysis of students’ demands for teaching reform of self-learning network

The teaching website’s construction is imminent

The investigation shows that students need teaching sites, But now the construction of the teaching site is not perfect, Constructivism thinks that students construct their own form to acquire knowledge, By teaching sites, focus and difficult course content can be presented through a variety of forms such as video, images, software, and other shows in detail. This will facilitate the students to operating materials by themselves, feel knowledge, and build their own knowledge system. Therefore, schools should actively building teaching courses and put into use, this will help students get targeted learning resources, facilitate student learning, improve network efficiency of learning, and promote student self-learning.

The survey shows that 92.86% of the students believe that teaching reform of the network selflearning is very necessary, whereas 85.71% of the students believe it can improve students’ selflearning ability through independent learning online. Now students’ learning is inseparable with network, it is more and more common to use the network to learn for the university students after school. However, the online courses in my school are under construction, and other sites for selflearning on the network can not completely fit with the school classroom, leading the efficiency of students independent learning through network is not high. It can be seen, the current network teaching in our country can not meet the needs students learn through the network. Therefore, to promote online teaching reforms and to improve the environment of students’ self—learning network is imminent.

4.3

The creation of network skills training courses

The investigation showed that 88.10% of the students felt that it is necessary to set up network skills training courses. For now, the opened

83

ICIEES_Book.indb 83

4/3/2015 7:08:39 AM

4.5

“computer-based” lessons teach basic computer knowledge, and “networking skills” courses that can help students to know how to conduct independent learning had never opened before. This requires our educational administration department should be appropriately adjusted curriculum, such as the information retrieval that can help improve students’ network literacy to meet the needs of students learning network. 4.4

Students should promote network skills consciously

Although the network brought convenience to learning, students have not fully understood the powerful network function, and the skills of mastering network are also less. The more is a state of disorder using the Internet to learn. Students need to improve the process of skills learning online urgently to meet the need of network learning. As a result, students should enhance their own network technique through various channels, to satisfy the needs of network autonomous learning. Anyway, network autonomous learning teaching reform needs schools, teachers and students working together. “Taking students as the center” requires the school to provide powerful hardware support and policy support. Teachers need to give full play to the guiding role, exerting students’ subjective initiative and creativity. Improve students’ ability to analyze and solve problems through the network autonomous learning.

Strengthen the teachers’ role of guiding in students’ web-based autonomous learning

Teachers should give full play to the guiding role in the teaching and guide the student to carry on the network autonomous learning, due to the students’ in adaptation to the network learning and the dependence on teachers. Network autonomous learning, emphasizing the students’ autonomous learning, determines the main status of students. However, we cannot ignore the teacher’s leading role. In order to raise the level of students’ webbased autonomous learning, we should attach importance to teachers’ leading role and the great importance to the students’ main character. We should develop the web-based autonomous learning with the principle of the guiding role of teachers and the main status of students. We all know that the network information is too rich and students are prone to distraction because of the lack of self-control and self-study ability (Ma Jingjing, 2009). So the teachers’ guiding role is crucial. Teachers may arrange more web work in the teaching process, and guide students to active learning in the internet. And students will also learn and reading automatically and a virtuous circle formed. This requires teachers to provide more network teaching resources, set up courses of teaching website carefully, help students clear purpose, and guide students to study website actively in order to improve the efficiency of online learning.

REFERENCES [1] Zhu Huaguang. Discussion about the Positive Effect of College Students’ Network Learning. Taiyuan SCI-TECH. 2002(6):56–57. [2] Jiang Shengli. Analysis of Web-based Self-regulated Learning Monitoring and Controlling. Modern Educational Technology. 2004(5):46–48. [3] Ma Jingjing. Survey of Graduate autonomous learning behavior and countermeasures. Shaanxi Normal University. 2009. [4] Chen Bo. A Case Study on the current situation of Internet using in the learning in Teachers College of Nibo University. Modern Educational Technology. 2005(1):37–39.

84

ICIEES_Book.indb 84

4/3/2015 7:08:39 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Analysis of dynamic image sequence based on Dynamic Programming Zheng Sun & Lixin Wang Department of Electronic and Communication Engineering, North China Electric Power University, Baoding, China

ABSTRACT: The dynamic image sequence analysis includes detection, tracking and motion estimation of dynamic objects of interest from the image sequence. Dynamic Programming (DP) is an optimization approach that decomposes the overall problem into several sub-problems; its essential characteristic is the multistage nature of the optimization procedure. In this paper, applications of dynamic programming in tracking dynamic objects both in 2D and 3D and estimating displacement fields from dynamic image sequences are discussed by taking the coronary angiographic sequences as examples. Both problems are solved through globally minimizing a predefined cost function. With DP, the global optimization is implemented to acquire a steady global optimum, low computation cost and numerical stability. Experimental results and related discussions are given for clinically acquired image data in order to demonstrate the validity. Keywords: Dynamic Programming (DP); Dynamic image sequence; Motion tracking; Motion estimation 1

INTRODUCTION

optimal path linking all matched point pairs with the lowest accumulated cost according to a predefined cost function with DP. At the beginning, m = 1, the cost of each node, [s1(1), s2(n)] (n = 1, 2, …, N) is saved. At step m (m ≥ 2), a path ending at [s1(m), s2(n)] with minimal accumulated cost should be found. The node [s1(m), s2(n)] is linked with each node in the previous steps, [s1(m − 1), s2(l)] (l = 1, 2, …, N). Among these paths, the one with minimal accumulated cost is selected. Above steps are repeated until at step m = M, the ultimate optimal path is the global optimum of the overall problem, {[s1(1), s2(u(1))], [s1(2), s2(u(2))], …, [s1(M), s2(u(M))]}, where u(⋅) is the matching function. At each node, [s1(m), s2(n)], the cost of the path linking it with previous nodes, [s1(m − 1), s2(l)] (l = 1, 2, …, N), should be calculated and saved. Therefore, the complexity of the algorithm is O(MN2).

Dynamic Programming (DP) (Bellman 2003) is a mathematical tool for solving problems exhibiting properties of overlapping sub-problems and optimal substructure with advantages of global optimization, low computation cost and numerical stability. According to the principle of optimality, a multi-stage problem is decomposed into a series of single-stage problems. Since proposed, DP has been widely applied in production scheduling, engineering development and optimal control, and so on. (Abbas et al. 2012, Wan et al. 2014). Both tracking and quantitative estimation of dynamic objects’ motion field from dynamic image sequences can be effectively solved through optimizing a properly predefined cost function. DP is a good choice to solve both optimization problems with advantages of global optimization and low computation cost. In this paper, tracking coronary vessel skeletons in 2D and 3D as well as quantitatively estimating their global motion fields from in vivo X-ray coronary angiographic sequence are taken as examples to illustrate applications of DP in analysis of dynamic sequential images. 2

3

ANALYZING DYNAMIC IMAGE SEQUENCE

In this section, we take 2D and 3D tracking and 3D motion estimation of coronary vessel skeletons from X-ray coronary angiographic sequences as examples to illustrate applications of DP in dynamic image sequence analysis.

DISCRETE OPTIMIZATION WITH DP

The points to be matched are denoted as two data sets, {s1|s1(m) = [x(m), y(m)] (m = 1, 2, …, M)} and {s2|s2(n) = [x(n), y(n)] (n = 1, 2, …, N)}. A complete registration between s1 and s2 is to find a globally

3.1

Tracking vessel skeletons in 2D images

With the snake model, skeletons of main coronary vessel branches are tracked along the angiographic

85

ICIEES_Book.indb 85

4/3/2015 7:08:39 AM

sequence. According to a priori knowledge about coronary arterial dynamics, vascular morphology is not expected to change drastically during a short period of the cardiac cycle. Consequently, the convergence result of the snake in the previous frame can be taken as the initial plan in the current frame. We define the normalized internal energy term Eint as follows: E int (i ) =

d− |

i

|

i 1

max d

+

vi

− 2vi + vi +1

a d

,

Figure 1. Tracking the results of a vessel segment skeleton from the first and second frame. (a) initial snake in the first frame; (b) vessel skeleton in the first frame; (c) initial snake in the second frame; (d) vessel skeleton in the second frame.

(1)

where vi = (xi, yi) (i = 1, 2, …, N) is ith snake nodes (snaxel) and d is the average distance between adjacent snaxels. max d is the maximal distance between adjacent snaxels. The improved continuity constraint causes snaxels to distribute more evenly than the original one (Kass et al. 1989). The external energy term, Eext, includes the two terms as follows: Eext

E iimage mage + E con .

Figure 2. Tracking the results of a vessel segment skeleton from subsequent frames.

(2)

target (Zhou et al. 2013). The evolution is towards decreasing of the total energy and finally ends when the total energy remains unchanged. The solution is ensured to converge at a global optimum. We used X-ray coronary angiographic image sequences acquired in vivo with PHILIPS Integris CV cardiovascular angiography system during the routine cardiac catheter examinations to demonstrate the algorithm. The image acquisition rate is 15 fps, image size is 512 × 512 pixels, pixel size is about 0.3 mm, and gray-levels range in [0–256]. Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 illustrate a case with a sequence of LCA (left coronary artery) acquired from RAO30°CAUD24. Experiments proved that the window size w (in pixels) in Equation (5) should be a little larger than the maximal diameter of the coronary arterial lumen projection, which, according to a priori knowledge, is about 20 pixels. Therefore, w = 21 was chosen and the same for all time-points of the sequences meeting this requirement.

where Eimage is the normalized constraint obtained directly from the image data, E image =

I ( i ) ∇I ( i ) + , 255 255 2

(3)

where I(vi) and |∇I(vi)| are intensity and intensity gradient value of vi, respectively. Econ is the external constraint, Econ Eggray ray + E disp .

(4)

where Egray is the normalized intensity similarity constraint at both endpoints of the snake, E gray =

1 255( 2w + 1) ( 2w + 1) w

×

w

∑ ∑ | I (x

t i

Δx

w Δyy

w

+ x, yit + Δy )

(5)

− I t −1 ( xit −1 + x, yit −11 + Δy )|

3.2

measuring variation of intensities in the w × w neighborhood centered at the endpoint between successive frames. Edisp is the displacement similarity constraint at middle snaxels, Edisp

d (i ) d (i (i

)

Tracking vessel skeletons in 3D

We presented a top-down method based on the snake model (Sun et al. 2010) to sequentially (4D, that is, 3D plus time) reconstruct coronary vessel skeletons from a pair of angiographic image sequences. The snake, represented with a 3D B-spline curve, deforms directly in 3D to adapt its projections to the projective lumen centerlines in the image pair (see Fig. 3(a)). Searching for optimal solutions of 3D snake can also be implemented with DP. The searching area for the optimal solution of each snaxel is a small cube centered at the current snaxel as shown in Fig. 3(b). Experimental results with a pair of nearly orthogonal angiographic sequences acquired from RAO-

(6)

where d(i) and d(i − 1) are displacement vectors at vi and vi-1 between time-point t−1 and t. The snake representing the vessel skeleton deforms continuously through minimizing its energy function. With DP, it is treated as an optimal matching or registration process between the initial snake and the

86

ICIEES_Book.indb 86

4/3/2015 7:08:39 AM

value of cineangiographic frame rate is 15 fps, can completely meet such a requirement. The reconstructed 3D vessel skeletons represented with B-spline curves at different timepoints are uniformly sampled to obtain ordered skeleton point sets, {si|si(m) = [x(m), y(m), z(m)] (m = 1, 2, …, M; i = 1, …, T)}, where Mi is the total number of skeleton points at time-point i and T is the total number of frames in the acquired image sequences. Due to cardiac expansion and contraction, the number of skeleton points of a same vessel segment at different time-points may not be equal. Here, Mi ≥ Mi−1 is assumed. In order to estimate global displacement field of a same vessel segment at each temporal interval, the two point sets at successive time-points, si and si−1 are matched to find optimal correspondence between them. We define the matching error function as follows:

Figure 3. (a) Snake deforming in 3D; (b) Searching optimal snake in 3D with DP.

E ( m − 1, n′, m, n) n) =

) + Τ( m, n) (7) + Κ( m, n) U ( n)]

D(m, m − 1) = |d(m, n) − d(m − 1, n′)| is the motion smoothness constraint, where d(m, n) = si(n) − si−1(m) and d(m − 1, n′) = si(n′) − si−1(m − 1) are the displacement vector of si−1(m) and si−1(m − 1), respectively. T(m, n) = τ i ( ) τ i −1 ( m ) and K(m, n) = κ i ( ) κ i −1 ( m ) are the shape similarity constraint, where κi(x) and τi(x) are the curvature and torsion of curve i at the point x, respectively. U ( n) = | n n | is the unmatched region constraint to ensure matching uniformity, where n and n′ are indexes of points in si matched to si−1(m) and si−1(m − 1), respectively. Optimal correspondence between two skeleton point sets is obtained through minimizing the matching error function in Equation (7). With DP, the optimization is implemented to obtain the global optimum and numerical stability. In order to speed searching, we adopt additional constraints to limit searching area of possible solutions according to a priori knowledge of arterial dynamics: (a) ∀m, ∃n| si−1(m) → si(n); (b) if si−1(m) → si(n) and si−1(m − 1) → si(n′), then n ≥ m, n′ ≥ m − 1 and n′ < n, avoiding cross matching; (c) if si−1(m) → si(n), then n − m ≤ Mi − Mi−1. In Fig. 5, reconstructed 3D skeletons of LCA main branches from one pair of angiographic sequences are shown. Estimated global displacement

Figure 4. Tracking the results of main vessel branch skeletons of LCA at three time-points.

30°CAUD24 and LAO46°CRAN21 are shown in Fig. 4. The 2D vessel skeletons on both projections can be obtained by back-projecting the 3D skeletons onto both imaging planes according to angiographic view angles and distances from the X-ray spot to the correspondent imaging plane recorded during image acquisition. 3.3

Mi

∑ [ D(m, m m=2

Estimating 3D motion fields of vessel skeletons

Estimated 2D motion fields from angiographic image sequences may not reflect actual dynamic performances of coronary vessels. 3D motion estimation has drawn more and more attentions of cardiac researchers (Chen et al. 2013). The main disadvantage of optical-flow-based methods is that unavoidable errors existing in imaging system calibration parameters may be introduced again into the ultimate results during back-projection, besides the defects of optical flow. We estimate global displacement field of 3D vessel skeletons reconstructed from a pair of approximately orthogonal angiographic sequences through elastically matching skeletons of a same vessel branch between consecutive time-points. The optimal correspondence is found through minimizing a matching error function with DP. The main assumption is that coronary vessels are not expected to change their shapes drastically during a short period of the cardiac cycle. The typical

Figure 5. Superposed 2D vessel skeletons on both (a) LAO and (c) RAO projections and (b) reconstructed 3D skeletons at different time-points.

87

ICIEES_Book.indb 87

4/3/2015 7:08:41 AM

The complexity of the algorithm does not depend on the complexity of dynamic performances. Thus, the same matching error function can be used to solve different types of motion or deformation. Also, correspondence between the same object at different time-points can be obtained while it is impossible with optical-flow-based methods. With DP, the multi-stage matching problem is transformed into a series of single-stage problems, which are then solved separately to obtain global optimum. The solutions of sub-problems are saved during optimization in order to avoid repetitive computations. The computation time took in searching optimal matching of one vessel segment skeleton consisting of about 2000 points with DP is about 1 second on a normally configured computer (CPU AMD AthlonTM 64 × 2 dual core 4000 + processor, 1G RAM). However, the drawback is that the precision of estimated motion field highly depends on that of the reconstruction of 3D vessel skeletons.

Figure 6. Estimated motion fields of 3D coronary vessel skeletons between subsequent time-points observed from two views.

fields of 3D vessel skeletons at four time-points are shown in Fig. 6, where correspondent skeleton points at successive time-points are connected with line segments representing displacement vectors. 4

DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSION

Initialization, definition of energy function and optimization are essential issues for applications of the snake model in segmenting and tracking image features of interest from sequential images. As to the first two issues, it is flexible for different types of images and dynamic objects to obtain successful results. For minimization of the energy function, three methods have been proposed. The first one is variational algorithm for iteratively solving E-L partial differential equations at the early stage (Kass et al. 1989). Its wide applications are hampered due to complex calculation, high computation cost and local convergence, and so on. The second one is DP, a well-known optimization tool. Compared with variational algorithm, DP is very suit for programming to implement algorithms due to its numerical stability. The ultimate optimum is ensured to be the global one since the evolution is towards decreasing of the total energy. However, the complexity of DP algorithm is O(MN2) in solving discrete registration between two data sets respectively including M and N elements. Consequently, in the case of large data sets, the required memory space is very large. The third one is greedy algorithm (Williams & Shah 1992). Compared with DP, it is simpler and faster because its complexity is O(MN). However, its ultimate result may not be the global optimum because the evolution is not towards decreasing of the total energy. For quantitative motion field estimation from sequential image sequences, one of effective methods is to elastically match target features at different time-points. A matching error function is minimized under the assumption that the dynamic object is not expected to change its shapes drastically during a short period of time. Compared with optical-flow-based techniques, any a priori knowledge about object’s dynamics is not required, (such as patterns of motion and deformation, and so on.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This study was supported by National Nature Science Foundations of China (grant number 61372042) and the Fundamental Research Funds for the Central Universities.

REFERENCES [1] Abbas Q, Celebi ME, Fondón García I, 2012. Skin tumor area extraction using an improved dynamic programming approach. Skin Res Technol. 18(2):133–142. [2] Bellman R, 2003. Dynamic Programming. Princeton University Press, Dover paperback edition. [3] Chen M, Zheng Y, Wang Y, Mueller K, Lauritsch G, 2013. Automatic 3D motion estimation of left ventricle from C-arm rotational angiocardiography using a prior motion model and learning based boundary detector. Med Image Comput Comput Assist Interv. 16(Pt 3):90–97. [4] Kass M, Witkin A, Terzopoulos D, 1987. Snakes: active contour models. International Journal of Computer Vision. 1(4):321–331. [5] Sun Z, Tian M, Sun J, 2010. Sequential reconstruction of vessel skeletons from X-ray coronary angiographic sequences. Computerized Medical Imaging and Graphics. 34(5):333–345. [6] Wan H, Ge J, Parikh P, 2014. Using dynamic programming to improve fiducial marker localization. Phys Med Biol. 59(8):1935–1946. [7] Williams DJ, Shah M, 1992. A fast algorithm for active contours and curvature estimation. CVGIP: Image Understanding. 55(1):14–26. [8] Zhou Y, Cheng X, Xu X, Song E, 2013. Dynamic programming in parallel boundary detection with application to ultrasound intima-media segmentation. Medical Image Analysis. 17(8):892–906.

88

ICIEES_Book.indb 88

4/3/2015 7:08:42 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

A study on the differences of development of teachers’ educational technology ability Jingling Qiu, Xiaojun Yang, Jing Li & Bangze Chen School of Education of Tibet University for Nationalities, Xianyang, Shaanxi Province, China

ABSTRACT: This study mainly adopted the methods of questionnaire, interview, classroom observation and comparative methods, in the perspective of “Educational Technology Ability Standards for Elementary and middle schools Teachers” (CETS) issued by Ministry of Education, based on the requirement of consciousness and attitude, knowledge and skills, application and innovation, social responsibility in Educational Technology Ability Standards for Elementary and middle schools Teachers. Finally, we drawn the conclusion that in the 0.05 level of significance there are significant differences (Sig. = 0.000 < 0.05) in the aspect of knowledge and skills and the urban and rural teachers’ educational technology application and innovation ability (Sig. = 0.000 < 0.05), but there is no significant difference in the aspect of consciousness and attitude of the teachers’ Educational Technology Ability between male and female (Sig. = 0.123 > 0.05), rural and urban teachers (Sig. = 0.918 > 0.05). There is also no significant difference in the social responsibility of urban and rural teachers’ education technology ability (Sig. = 0.103 > 0.05). Keywords: 1

Teacher’ Educational Technology Ability; CETS; Differences

INTRODUCTION

study is to explore the teachers’ educational technology ability development differences. The specific purpose is to analyze teachers’ educational technology ability by using questionnaire survey and test, in order to understand men and women teachers’ educational technology ability development, provides a base for further research, but also for the domestic primary and secondary school teachers’ educational technology ability to research and reference.

The investigation and research shows, at present, China’s primary and middle school teachers’ educational technology ability has differences, those differences are reflected not only in urban and rural teachers, but also the teachers from the education and occupation development stage and other aspects. This part of the study is to explore the male and female teachers’ educational technology ability in the process of the development of the different characteristics, to help teachers targeted and selectively attended training and teaching practice. 2 2.1

2.2

Hypotheses

This study assumes that primary and secondary school teachers’ educational technology ability has no differences.

THE PURPOSE OF THE STUDY AND HYPOTHESIS

3

Research purposes

Primary and secondary schools teachers’ educational technology ability standards (CETS) (Trial Implementation) was issued on 15 December, 2004 (Ministry of education of China, 2004) [1] which will be the first standard for teachers’ educational technology ability, is divided into, consciousness and attitude, knowledge and skill, application and innovation, social responsibility and teaching application of several dimensions, the purpose of this

STUDY PROCESS AND METHOD

This study adopts questionnaire and interview methods. Research tool was created for “teachers’ educational technology ability questionnaire survey”, the samples are teachers from primary and middle schools in urban and rural of Gansu, Shaanxi, the sampling range of Guangdong, parts of primary and middle schools of Xinjiang province. The specific implementation of the process as shown in Fig. 1 (Wang Baojin, 2004) [2].

89

ICIEES_Book.indb 89

4/3/2015 7:08:42 AM

Figure 1.

3.1

Research process.

with independent sample t test, ANOVA and multiple factor variance analysis methods.

Research questionnaire

On the basis of CETS (Trial Implementation) (Ministry of education, 2004) [1] and the teacher of Li Song “educational technology ability feature description research and design” (Li Song, 2005) [3] and NETS⋅T-2000, NETS⋅T-2008 and many other scholars research results, primary and secondary school teachers’ educational technology ability is designed in the initial questionnaire. After the finishing of the initial questionnaire, some people of instructors, tutors and some doctoral students, graduate students are asked to assess the appropriate, representation and readability of the questionnaire dimensions and items, then were tested in the school of Xindun, Zhangye City, Zhangye middle school, the first middle school and Dangzhai primary school of Zhangye City and 5 other schools. The test measured using t-test item analysis subscale total score, score high (top 25% of subjects) and low packet (after 25% of subjects) in each question score the average difference comparison, and the resulting Critical Ratio (CR) are higher than the critical ratio of the look-up table, having a differential force, then completed the formal teachers’ educational technology ability questionnaire on the basis of which. The formal questionnaire includes five parts, 45 questions. The consciousness and attitude is 10 items. 3.2

3.2.2 Validity Validity, also known as correctness, refers to a test, can measure to the test to measure psychological or behavioral trait of degree. (Wu Minglong, 2003) [4] Measurement validity is higher, indicating that the more measurement results can show the desired measurement results of the real character. In the study, “validity”, which refers to the degree of correctness, is a test of the extent to which tested it intended to test. It includes two aspects: the meaning is examined to what characteristics, the second is the check to what extent. (Chen Xiangming, 2000) [5] In the quantitative research, validity is generally divided into three categories: content validity, construct validity and criterion-related validity (Eyre Bobby, 2005) [6]. This study guarantees the questionnaire validity from the content validity and constructs validity. Evaluation questionnaire internal entry and reflect the relationship between the structure and the commonly used statistical method of factor analysis. Evaluation of a questionnaire measuring results and related indexes relationship according to the structure hypothesis, using some indices (refers to the hypotheses and to evaluate the structure related behaviors, such as the research object grouping phenomenon), and then by using analysis of variance and correlation analysis test structure and the relationship between packet indicator. Relationship strength can be judged through three ways (Liu Zhaojie, 1997) [7] (1) F value as the basis, the bigger F value, which indicates the two close relationship; (2) The relative validity. Relative validity of each factor and “structure” between the relative strength, and its validity coefficient’s significance is different.

Sampling and testing method

This study, used non-random sample method, conducted a questionnaire survey respectively in Xinjiang, Gansu, Shaanxi and Guangdong Province, part of the city and rural school teachers in middle and primary schools (including IT teachers). The questionnaire was answered on the spot or by mail, email, internet and other means personally sent to the subjects’ teachers by myself and my students who teach as practice teachers in the subjects schools. 1000 questionnaires were sent out, 974 questionnaires recovered, the recovery rate is 97.4%. By eliminating incomplete and ineffective questionnaire strictly, we received 966 effective questionnaires, with 99.17% questionnaire efficiency.

the relative validity =

F value between groups max F value between groups (3)

Convert F value to the correlation coefficient 2 Fdf df rxy = Fdfdfb bdfw If is the t test, then the: rxy = t2 t ddf (Liu Zhaojie, 1997) [7].

3.2.1 Data processing The questionnaire data were processed and analyzed by using SPSS 16.0 for Windows, mainly

90

ICIEES_Book.indb 90

4/3/2015 7:08:42 AM

educational technology is the important part of teachers’ quality. The survey shows that the educational technology effectively to optimize the process of teaching, to cultivate innovative talents have an important role is 86%, in which the male teacher is 474 (49.1%), and 492 is female (50.9%). But in the teaching process, it has been integrated into the information technology and the discipline teaching conformity accounted for only 18%, the vast majority of 74.2% is for the open class, indicating that teachers in curriculum teaching are not always using information technology and curriculum integration assisted for their teaching. 25.5% of the teachers thought the effective use of technology in education to improve the quality of teaching and the significance of the role of the survey is very important. 57.1% of teachers think that the effective application of teachers’ educational technology to improve the quality of teaching and the significance of the role is very important. And female teachers understand well than the male teachers. 40.1% of the teachers think that educational technology to promote their life-long learning, to achieve personal professional development has important role and help, 51.6% of the teachers thought it has certain help. About 30% of the teachers can use technology to teaching process and teaching effect are often reflect on the teaching and evaluation, 55% of the teachers are occasionally for reflection and evaluation. And about 88% of the teachers agree that teachers should use distance learning, online communities such as education and technology to promote their knowledge and skills. Do the teachers’ educational technology consciousness and attitudes related to gender? do city and countryside teachers’ educational technology consciousness and attitude have significant difference? This further independent samples t test. From the table 2 we can see men and women teachers’ educational technology consciousness and attitude mean is 18.3608, the standard

3.2.1 Reliability test The questionnaire reliability used the Cronbach’s Alpha coefficient to express. It overcomes the partial binary method shortcomings, for the current social science research is the most commonly used reliability test method. Use SPSS 16.0 for windows Reliability Analysis questionnaire test results as shown in table 1. 3.3

Teachers’ ability of dducational technology development research on gender differences of general

3.3.1 Research situation In a survey of 966 teachers, men and women are approximately equal, male teachers are 474(49.1%), female teachers are 492(50.9%). Rural teachers are 643, accounting for 66.6%. 323 teachers are from city, percentage is 33.4. Investigation shows, 83% of the teachers’ office can access into internet, it also shows the vast majority of the school has basic conditions for working and learning. In the investigation, most teachers are under the age of 40, up to 863 (89.3%); the subject a teacher teaches is mainly English (or) physics (or) mathematics (or) the Chinese (or) IT. 3.3.2

The comparative study of men and women teachers’ educational technology capability development This study assumes that the teachers’ educational technology ability is zero correlation with gender. 3.4

The relationship between men and women in and teachers’ ability of educational technology consciousness and attitudes regarding

In the survey of 966 teachers, 858 teachers think that educational technology has important meaning and function to improve educational informatization, the total number of investigations is 88.8%, where in, male teacher is 411 (42.6%), female teacher is 447 (46.2%), that men and women teachers are in the awareness of the problem of difference. 88.2% of the teachers thought ability of Table 1.

Table 2. Effect of different sex under the teachers’ educational technology consciousness and attitude of basic descriptive statistics and 95% confidence interval.

The cronbach’s alpha of questionnaire.

Category

Cronbach’s alpha

No of items

Consciousness and attitude Knowledge and skill Social responsibility Application and innovation Questionnaire total scale

.848 .903 .735 .768 .871

10 10 10 9 31

95% Confidence interval for mean N

Mean

Std. Deviation

Std. Lower Error bound

Upper bound

Male 474 18.3608 5.03462 .23125 17.9064 18.8152 Female 492 17.9085 3.98850 .17982 17.5552 18.2618 Total

966 18.1304 4.53536 .14592 17.8441 18.4168

91

ICIEES_Book.indb 91

4/3/2015 7:08:42 AM

significant differences. In the use of distance learning, online communities such as education and technology to promote their knowledge and skills and the improvement of educational technology to improve the quality of teaching the effective application of the significance and role of them are significantly different. The men and women teachers’ personality and gender, female teachers than male teachers speaking, in the network learning and network virtual learning community of education and technology to promote their knowledge and skills and the use of educational technology to improve the teaching quality, because the test is only related to teachers’ technical level more knowledge than ability, therefore, there will be female teachers in this respect stronger than male teachers. Overall, we drawn the conclusion that there was no significant differences between male and female (Sig. = 0.123 > 0.05), rural and urban teachers (Sig. = 0.918 > 0.05) in the aspect of consciousness and attitude. The knowledge and skills of educational technology teachers has significant differences in the 0.05 level of significance, t = 7.586, df = 509.064, p = 0.000 < 0.05, the mean difference was 3.005168, the standard error is 0.40226, 95% confidence interval estimation for the mean difference is (2.26139, 3.84197). The urban and rural teachers’ educational technology application and innovation ability has significant difference in the 0.05 level of significance. t = 4.858, df = 570.328, p = 0.000 < 0.05, the mean difference was 1.25168, the standard error is 0.25763, 95% confidence interval estimation for the mean difference (0.74566, 1.75770). There was no significant difference in the 0.05 level of significance of social responsibility of urban and rural teachers’ education technology. t = 1.633, df = 518.266, p = 0.103 > 0.05, the mean difference was 0.16621, the standard error was 0.10181, 95% confidence interval estimation for the mean difference (−0.03380, 0.36623).

Figure 2. Male and female teachers’ ability of educational technology consciousness and attitude of the overall level.

deviation is 5.03462, the standard error is 0.23125, female teachers’ mean is 17.9085, the standard deviation is 3.98850, the standard error is 0.17982, female teachers are lower than that of the male teachers. Judging whether the homogeneity of variance can be observed through the Levene’s test of homogeneity of variance of the results to determine, from the test results t = 1.544, df = 900.700, Sig. = 0.123 > 0.05, there was no significant differences in the level of 0.05. There was also no significant difference between urban and rural teachers’ education technology consciousness and attitude (t = −.103, df = 580.674, Sig. = 0.918 > 0.05). Teachers’ ability of educational technology of consciousness and attitude of the overall level are shown in figure 2. 4

CONCLUSIONS

As the same way, we can make the following conclusions that male and female teachers in educational technology to promote information significance and role have no significant differences, the capability of educational technology is the important part of teachers’ quality, the effective application of educational technology to optimize the teaching, cultivating innovative talents has important role. Gender difference in the application of teachers’ educational technology in their teaching process, the teaching effect for reflection and evaluation, the promotion of lifelong learning, to achieve personal professional development, the integration of information technology and subject teaching and the application of the network or other means to continue to learn new knowledge and new technology to improve their own quality structure and no

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The research work was supported by the Ministry of Education Research of Social Sciences Foundation projects of China under Grant No. 13XZJA880001 and the Teaching Reform and Research Foundation of Tibet Autonomous Region under Grant No. 2011ZGGJ16.

92

ICIEES_Book.indb 92

4/3/2015 7:08:42 AM

REFERENCES

[5] Chen Xiangming. [translator]: Qualitative research in Social Sciences. Education Science Press: Beijing. 2000:388–396. In Chinese. [6] Eyre Bobby. [translator]: Qiu Zeqi. Social research methods. Huaxia press: Beijing. 2005:140–141. In Chinese. [7] Liu Zhaojie. Evaluation of questionnaire reliability and validity. Chronic disease prevention and control of China.1997. 174–177. In Chinese. [8] Zhou Jie. Big Five Personality Questionnaire (BFI) structure validity analysis. http://www. wenlun.com/ lwcs/so_article.asp?id = 10120210019.

[1] Ministry of education. On the issuance of “primary and secondary school teachers’ educational technology ability standard (Trial Implementation)” notice. teacher [2004] 9. In Chinese. [2] Wang Baojin. Quantitative research: a questionnaire, sampling, measuring. 2004. In Chinese. [3] Li Song. Educational technology ability feature description research and design. Northeast Normal University. Master’s degree thesis. 2005: In Chinese. [4] Wu Minglong. [translator]: SPSS statistical practice. Beijing Science Press: Beijing. 2003: In Chinese.

93

ICIEES_Book.indb 93

4/3/2015 7:08:43 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The practice and reflection of curriculum design for communication engineering major Ya Liu & Xiong Shi School of Electrical and Electronic Engineering, Wuhan Polytechnic University, Wuhan, China

ABSTRACT: The communication engineering major in Wuhan Polytechnic University chooses highfrequency electronic circuit in their teaching process as the professional foundation course and accordingly carry out curriculum design. In the meantime, superheterodyne radio and wireless FM microphone are taken in teaching content. They successfully combine the high-frequency circuit theory which is difficult to understand with the high-frequency circuit application which is difficult to adjust and survey. In this case, students gain a chance to deeply understand high-frequency circuit and to improve the designing, debugging and testing ability. After the students’ practice in four grades, some guidance and experience are gained. Keywords: 1

Communication engineering; High-frequency electronic circuit; Curriculum design

INTRODUCTION

to practical learning step by step, and gain preliminary mastery of general procedure and basic computing method, and also train their practical ability and innovation ability. Another is diploma project, which can motivate students to use their knowledge and skill to handle specific engineering technology topics and promote knowledge to transfer to ability. Since 2004, the institute of electrical and electronic engineering in Wuhan Polytechnic University has established communication engineering. One the basis of the features of its professional curriculum and combined with its demands to graduates, improvement and exploration for the curriculum design of the major’s key curriculum, high-frequency electronic circuit, are proceeded. The combined training of analytical calculation of high-frequency circuit, simulation of circuit parameter, debugging and testing of welding, gains good result. Most students increased their perceptual knowledge to high-frequency circuit and experienced the combination of circuit theory and practice.

The issuing of 4G license in 2013 symbolizes the rapid development of communication technology in the past decade. The development of technology pushes the communication industry to become forerunner industry and pillar industry which rives the increasing of national economy. Accordingly, the higher education of communication engineering major is growing quickly with the development of communication technology and industry. At present, communication engineering major has been an interdisciplinary and broad-caliber major with good practicability and wide service, which contains mobile communication, optical fiber communication, digital communication, network technique and many other fields. The development of communication technology and improvement of communication industry demand that the graduates should be equipped with solid theoretical basis and the ability of exploitation, production, administration, research and teaching in communication industry. To adapt to the requirements, in the teaching process of communication engineering major, all kinds of experimental curriculum and practical training are carried into schedule according to the curriculum provision and teaching progress[1]. The practical training of designability has two kinds. One is that, after the accomplishment of some important technological foundation course or professional course, combined training of the learned knowledge is taken, so that the students can be lead from theory

2

FUNCTION AND STATUS OF CURRICULUM DESIGN

Curriculum design is an important internship and practical training with designability. On the basis of learned knowledge of one course and related prerequisite courses, in the training which contains one or more key points of this course, synthetic

95

ICIEES_Book.indb 95

4/3/2015 7:08:43 AM

systems, communication theory, computer network, high-frequency electronic circuit. But limited by teaching time, students’ time and energy, and experiment condition, the curriculum design link cannot be arranged in every course. Usually it is arranged in several key courses. It becomes an important issue which courses are chosen. Making a general survey of the development of the communication industry in recent years, we can find that the wireless communication technology helps human to be free from the wires, and makes life and work more convenient. From fixed-line telephone to mobile telephone, internet with cable to wireless internet, Bluetooth to wireless sensor networks, the advantages of wireless transmission is completely shown. In the background, the wireless communication is developing rapidly, considering that the high-frequency electronic circuit is indeed an important fundamental course and a difficult course for students, we choose this course to arrange curriculum design in, which will play an important role in the students’ understanding to basic theory of wireless communication and building basic concept of wireless communication. High-frequency electronic circuit is also called as communication electronic circuit. It contains high-frequency amplifying circuit, high-frequency oscillating circuit, transducer, modulation and demodulation, noise and noise factor. It analyzes and explains all the links of launch and reception in wireless communication system. Meanwhile, the experimental course matched to theoretical courses is set up. In the course, students verify the content of theoretical courses on experimental box by simple debugging and measuring. This traditional teaching and experiment pattern is defective. Firstly, the circuit of experimental box is designed according to specified experiment process; the debugging and measuring method is very distinct, so that most students only finish operation according to the steps and cannot get deep understanding to the circuit theory, analytical calculation and operation principle. Secondly, the experimental box not only has whole functional circuit in each link, but also has ancillary circuit such as junction point, measurement point, debugging point; it is so fully functional and takes the possible damage into consideration that the students only need to connect several wires and simply debug, no link of components choosing, welding, debugging and fault detecting. Students cannot gain deep understanding to processing of circuit and cannot improve the practical ability. Moreover, students cannot learn the process of circuit design and cannot build a complete knowledge chain form circuit theory to electronic products. In consideration of the importance of highfrequency electronic circuit course and above

theoretical analysis, design calculation, entity production, installation and debugging, testing and analysis, modeling and simulation, students experienced a general engineering design training[2]. Usually it is the last important teaching link of this course, which can lead the students from theory learning to practical operation step by step, and combine the familiar theoretical analysis and formula calculation with engineering estimation, design and drawing, and experimental debugging. Its aim is that, the students can experience the fundamental skill training which contains calculation, drawing, consulting manual and datum, and learning standards and specifications, then build correct design idea, linking theory with practice, and can be able to use the theory and practical knowledge to analyze and solve problems. Curriculum design is obviously different from the ordinary exercises; it is much more difficult and has bigger scale. Its scope of knowledge is wide and needs the students use their knowledge learned in all courses. There is no fixed solution, only by proceeding from practice, investigating and research, consulting datum, scheme comparison, design calculation, drawing, and experimental debugging, a scheme accord with the design task requirements can be choose. For example, a student in electrical and electronic institute, after the electronic technical course, designs an amplifier and a stabilized voltage supply, or designs analog-digital converter. Curriculum is also different from other general fundamental experiments. The aim of fundamental experiment is to verify the basic theory. In fundamental experiment, students can only learn preliminary understanding to the procedure and basic approach, and build perceptual cognizance to basic theory, cannot learn how to handle engineering problem[3]. Curriculum design course can give the students a chance to use both their brain and hands, to independently practice. Students can apply experimental installations to test the problem in theoretical design, in order to make the design perfect, combine theory with practice, and indeed transfer knowledge to ability. Title, author and affiliation frame.

3

COURSE SELECTION AND CONTENT DESIGN OF THE CURRICULUM DESIGN OF COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING MAJOR

3.1 Course selection The compulsory elementary courses and professional courses in communication engineering major are electromagnetic field theory, microwave theory, artificial circuit, digital circuit, signals and

96

ICIEES_Book.indb 96

4/3/2015 7:08:43 AM

4

defects of traditional teaching and experiment, this course is chosen to carry out curriculum design, in order that above defects can be improved. 3.2

CORRECTLY HANDLING SEVERAL RELATIONS IN THE TEACHING OF CURRICULUM DESIGN

Referring to teaching and management practice of the student from 2010 to 2013, the below several relations should be handled successfully.

Content design

It directly influences the teaching result of curriculum design whether we choose proper topic. The topic of curriculum design should firstly meet the requirements in training program, which is to say to combine theory with practice, inheritance with innovation, to completely motivate student’s subjective initiative. The deepness, breadth and difficulty should be proper and suitable to student’s condition, so that students can have full workload and be able to fulfill it in specific time[4]. As an academic advisor, if we can make full efforts to carefully issue topic, offer good guidance, teach students accordance with their aptitude, we can both train the students with basic skill and motivate their inspiration of creation. The topic can be traditional topic which has advantage in teaching, and also can be actual engineering design topic from production and scientific research which is helpful to motivate student’s interest and enthusiasm. But it should be processed; a design instructor should be established as the references for the students to finish a project. In wireless communication field, amplitude modulation and frequency modulation are the most classical modulation system, and super heterodyne is the most classical receiving mode. The content of this course, high-frequency electronic circuit, contains above cores. We arrange students to carry out installation and debugging of super heterodyne radio in their spare time. Through the installation and debugging of super heterodyne radio with six transistors, students can deeply comprehend the operating principle of this radio; for the radiating portion, the installation, debugging and testing of wireless FM microphone can be proceeded accordance with the curriculum design of high-frequency electronic circuit. The content of curriculum contains four aspects:

4.1 Referring to classical circuit and designing new circuit During the curriculum design, firstly, the data and circuit diagram of existed electronic components should be collected and understood. Then to analyze and compare according to the design specification, on the basis of the experience of some scheme, some innovation and progress can be taken. The “referring” means to “imitate” based on analyzing and comparing existed design data; innovation does not mean to completely throw off the original scheme and design a new one. Combining the specific condition and requirement, we should dare to propose new idea, new scheme and new structure. Even some improvement is also a success. 4.2 Theoretical calculation of circuit, specific design and debugging of circuit Theoretical calculation is only one of the bases of confirming the related parametric of highfrequency circuit. Beyond that, the distribution parameter, circuit board craft, specialty of connector should also be taken into consideration. If the parameter of circuit cannot be gained, the empirical formula is used to estimate, other parts should be debugged. In the process of designing, theoretical calculation, empirical estimation and practical debugging complement each other. 4.3 Guidance and thinking Curriculum design itself is engineering skill training for students; usually it is accomplished under teacher’s guidance. In teaching, teacher plays the role of organizing, leading, testing, checking and solving some difficult problems. Teacher cannot take on what ought to be done by students, and also cannot indulge them, but should hold the key chance and link to guide and supervise, advocating students to think more and dig into research, promoting the attitude of being serious and conscientious, of meticulosity, putting right any mistake, being opposed to the attitude of being content with superficial understanding, copying and imitating, muddling through the work[5]. Reinforce tutorial to students with low ability; give chance to students with high ability to show their potential. Training

1. Recognition, welding, debugging and testing of components. 2. Analysis of circuit principle and high-frequency equivalent circuit, and theory calculation. 3. Simulated analysis with simulation software. 4. Writing of curriculum design report and discuss. Regarding to above four aspects, the instructor high-frequency electronic circuit is compiled, which sets clear requirements and aims of curriculum design, shows the key step and offers the student necessary reference data.

97

ICIEES_Book.indb 97

4/3/2015 7:08:43 AM

is difficult to understand with high-frequency electronic component and circuit board, leading students to experience the trouble and gain in circuit design, debugging and testing. Over the attempt in four grades, students report that they gained a lot; many students get rid fear and boredom to this course high-frequency electronic circuit, and grow interest in it and improved practical ability, which lays foundation for students to adapt to the development of communication industry as soon as possible after graduation. In the meantime, as teachers and research office, how to make further improvement on teaching ability and how to enhance students’ practical ability and design capability are important issues we have to deeply think through.

of students’ ability should run through the whole process. 4.4

Keeping off repetition and accepting repetition

When there is mistake, or circuit parameter does not reach the demand, or the distribution of circuit board is unreasonable, repetition is needed. It should be prevented. One reason why it occurs is that the designer is not serious or is lack of experience, second is that designer does not completely understand the design scheme, or blindly copies and imitates ignoring the actual conditions, third is the unreasonable programming. Some students so not pay attention to above questions, which results in problems and lead them to rework in insufficient time. Students must clearly understand. In the process, some numerical value and component parameter need to go through repeated theoretical calculation and experimental amendment, students should also know this is normal condition in design process.

5

REFERENCES [1] DEC. 2009, Teaching guidance sub-committee of Electronic information and science and engineering, Study on development strategy of communication engineering major, Beijing. [2] Xudong Yao, Strengthen the curriculum design and innovation ability, [Journal article] China University teaching, 6th 6011. [3] Yunhu Luo Dec. 2009, Curriculum design innovation based on project teaching method, [Journal article] Electric and electron academic journal. [4] Nianyuan Zhan 2009, Electronic technology curriculum design based on project teaching method, [Journal article] Guangxi social sciences, 1st. [5] Zhao Hong 2006, Innovation of research teaching and university teaching, [Journal article] Higher education research.

SUMMARY

Curriculum design is very important in improving the practical ability of students in the teaching process. The communication engineering major in Wuhan Polytechnic University choose highfrequency electronic circuit in their teaching process to carry out curriculum design, successfully combine the high-frequency circuit theory which

98

ICIEES_Book.indb 98

4/3/2015 7:08:43 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The humane concern to learners in distance learning of pervasive environment Qifeng Che & Yuan Fang Hexi University, Zhangye City, Gansu Province, China

ABSTRACT: IT—supported instruction has gone into the traditional education field deeply, it has also influenced the area of distance learning, and aroused the transfer from “teach—based teaching” to “learning—based teaching” among the two big families of education. Thus cause a new challenge to both teachers and students. In this article, we try to study the humane concern to learners in distance learning of pervasive environment from the perspective of “Learning Facilitating Events”, to help teachers and students improve their performance in learning and facilitating of learning by taking full advantage of Learning Facilitating Events, and to promote distance learners have a better integration into the distance learning finally. Keywords: Distance Learning; Pervasive Environment; Pervasive Learning; Learning Facilitating Events 1

SPEAKING FROM THE PERVASIVE ENVIRONMENT

2

What is “The Pervasive Environment”? It is a quite new concept, to understand it, we have to know what is “The Pervasive Computing”. The Pervasive Computing developed on the basic of network technique and mobile computing. It focuses on network service which is customer-oriented, unified, self-adapting, in another word, the technique of which people can get good quality of network service by any device, from any net, or at any time under a pervasive environment. To make it more detailed, pervasive environment here includes networks, devices, and services. Networks contain Internet, mobile networks, telephone networks, television networks and a variety of wireless network. For pervasive computing, there are various contents, including computer, mobile phone, car, appliance and any other device that can surf the internet via any networks. The service comprises computing, management, control, resource scan and so on. From the above, we know the features of pervasive computing as below: The convenient service at any time, in any place, in any way; Different networks (different networking protocols, different bandwidth), different devices (screens, platforms, and resources), different personal preferences, etc. This viewpoint is inextricably linked with the postmodern view of Educational Technology.

THE NEW HUMANE CONCERN BROUGHT FROM LEARNING FACILITATING EVENTS FOR DISTANCE LEARNERS UNDER THE PERVASIVE ENVIRONMENT

2.1 The significance of Learning Facilitating Events Information Technology provided strong support for design and implementation of IT-supported instruction, the implementation of Learning Facilitating Events needs the help of Information Technology as the technical means, these influences the depth and breadth of learning. Common technical means of Learning Facilitating Events are: Visual Reality, concept map, adaptive course, blog, E-Learning Portfolio, digital library, visual classroom, chatroom, bulletin board, mobile learning, BBS, E-mail etc. These multimedia can be utilized by teachers to facilitate the communication and cooperation with students. On the other hand, students also can improve the learning ability on their own by using these facilitating learning media. 2.2 New humane care for distance learners brought from Learning Facilitating Events 2.2.1 New humane care for distance learners brought from the application of blog Blog is short form of Weblog, that is, running account published and read on the net, or called as

99

ICIEES_Book.indb 99

4/3/2015 7:08:43 AM

“web journal” in general, it consists of simple and updated frequently posts. But Blog is not equal to the web diary which carries an obvious symbol of privacy. It is the efficient cooperation between privacy and publicity, and not only the pure expression of personal ideas and record of daily chores, the contents it provides can help people and be communicated by them, possesses the ability to contain the whole internet, with a high spirit of sharing and value. Since Blog is based on the internet, it can be conducted easily, quickly and with a low cost. For those blog users, you can apply for a private cyber space from the Internet Service Provider by spending a few minutes, you can give your own opinions and comment other blogs with convenience and fast, building your net image quickly without learning complicated techniques, as long as you are able to type, then you can handle your blog. In addition to these, blog is also characterized by openness, privacy, and interactiveness, as a private cyberspace, blog users can voice their own ideas on a specific topic openly, and retain the comments they got on personal website; Secondly, users can publish articles with a topic, the blog will keep all the comments from others automatically, remind users who have quoted or scanned those articles; Thirdly, users can return the blogs back easily according to the record, thus they may have a more deeply research and interflow on an interested issue. The share spirit and convenience of management are the core themes of the prosperity of blog, which will lead us to a more tolerant and open world. Bloggers can express ideas optionally, try to find the resonance among others, explore problems mutually and promote each other; Users can publish and update contents by own, classify them expediently to manage via this platform. Throughout the whole distance learning system, interaction between teachers and students, students and resources, students and students is the basic form of information. As a new form introduced into institution, blog not only can stimulate teachers’ motivation of study and teaching, but also let the three interactions gain more efficient way for communicating, this kind of interaction can figure out difficult due to the spatial and temporal separation of the teachers and students, then students can get the first-hand experience of humane care. The utilization of blog helps teachers to achieve a integration of mouth to ear instruction and internet instruction. The feature of blog which records information at any time keeps the dynamic of teachers’ thoughts, and students could relearn one specific facilitating process, he can leave a message when meeting some problems, try to have a face-to-face communication with teacher later for a more detailed understanding and obtaining the knowledge.

Constructivist Learning Theories believe that, teaching should be student-centered, the role of teacher is to organize, guide, help and improve the whole process of instruction, utilize situation, collaboration session and other factors of learning, giving full play to student’s initiative, creating enthusiasm and pioneering spirit, and blog is just the very technical way which students can make the best of online resources via it, facing real problem situation directly, which teachers can give a faceto-face tutorship from it and provide corresponding help to various students and solve the problems occurred during the distance learning by learners. 2.2.2 The application of digital library in Learning Facilitating Events With the continuous development of Educational Technology, as one of learning facilitating events, digital library play a concrete and practical role, with it, teachers can conduct plentiful of Instructional Designs and Instructional System Developments, relying on the support of digital library technology and utilization of abundant resources, making distance learning materials well illustrated and informative, arouse student’s initiative and enthusiasm for learning. Also we can conduct the teaching from the view of advantage of libraries themselves, to create situations by using Modern Educational Technology, break through the limits of space and time, building learning-supported service system efficiently, and make the most of personal potential. As distance learner, you can also enhance the ability of obtaining information and independent study through the learning facilitating function of digital library, D-library provides convenient way of learning and flexible learning content, students can obtain needed knowledge at any time from real-time and interactive guide for learning. They can also utilize the features of real-time interaction and resources sharing to break through limits of space and time, to improve initiative and enthusiasm, and strengthen the ability of obtaining information via created visual space, improve the availability and independence of self-learning. 2.2.3 The application of E-Learning Portfolio in Learning Facilitating Events E-Portfolio is the collection of kinds of materials and information which related to the process of students learning, based on computer and network technology, is the production of student-centered instruction. Functions of it are as below. ELP is not only a digitalized, electronized growing record, but also a personal resume with creativity and personality. For instance, Blog, Moodle are all a form of ELP, though they differ from each, all can upload, save information, all can evaluate

100

ICIEES_Book.indb 100

4/3/2015 7:08:43 AM

Figure 1.

Chart of structure and function of ELP.

the students by teachers, themselves, and others. As one learning facilitating tool of IT-supported Instruction, it improve the effects of learning facilitating in IT-supported Instruction. Distance learners then can make use of the flexibility of ELP, select functional modules suit them purposefully in terms of their own interests, hobbies, and learning style. These satisfy the learners’ needs, promote the individuation of learning process and contents for learners, and strengthen learner’s initiative and enthusiasm. The more significant change for distance learners brought from ELP is the interchange and communication amongst teachers, students, social personnel and peers, collecting home, school, society, teachers, and students truly, promoting the achievement of collaborative learning. ELP is an assessment learning tool with reflection, process and expansibility, also a carrier of manifesting and certifying the situation for learning and living of both past and present. By analyzing and reflecting on the learning objectives they have achieved, students can view the success rate of every self-learning stage, and revise learning strategy optionally, to achieve the goal of optimizing learning methods and promoting learning, thus ensure the learning activity for distance learners be carried down smoothly. 2.2.4

The application of the 3G mobile learning in Learning Facilitating Events 3G is the abbreviation of the 3rd Generation, means the third technique of mobile communication, a new generation of mobile communication system which combines wireless communication with Internet and many other media communication, it is able to handle image, music, video streaming and other forms of media, provide kinds of information services including website browse, teleconference, electronic commerce and so on. Mobile Learning is a new learning mode which emerges after digital learning, it combines digital learning with mobile computer technique. 3G mobile learning is learner-centered, solve well the problem between students, teachers, and students

with online education college because of the distance of psychology and communication, thus information can be passed timely and efficiently, and learning efficiency can be improved. The flexible and instant feature of 3G provides a highquality learning facilitating effect for both learners and teacher. Learners can bring into play the advantage of mobile network amply in the force of 3G networks, gain knowledge at any time by utilizing mobile teaching terminal devices (mobile phone, PC, PDA), interact with each other, and when receiving learner’s problems, servers will retrieve data base following the method of keyword matching, return the answers to users automatically, through this immediate questions, respond promptly ways, raising learning efficiency conveniently and quickly. A diagram of 3G network is as below. 3G mobile learning enables the implicit knowledge to become explicit for learners, tacit knowledge is a kind of inner knowledge relates with specific contexts, when learners meet some problems cannot be solved, they can get instant connection with students and teachers, and to ask them to help analyze the tough matters, delivers their problem-solving methods and experience to learners through mobile support system, to make the implicit knowledge explicit. Learners can make the most of this advantage, learning experience and skill from the other, so that can solve the existing problems. By establishing various databases, collecting a large number of tests, graphics, sound and a lot of books, and retrieving the material needed from these resources, teachers can eventually process the coursewares for teaching, students can easily access required contents through the mobile network. Teachers can announce teaching plans, information and notification through the mobile network learning platform and to keep track of the learners, and remind the learners to learn in accordance with established learning plans, and make the appropriate assessment of their recent performance.

Figure 2.

Mobile learning network.

101

ICIEES_Book.indb 101

4/3/2015 7:08:44 AM

3G mobile learning breaks the constraints of space, time and region, so that learners can learn freely for different purposes and in different ways, since 3G mobile learning’s environment is moving, so are teachers and students, thus enhance the communication between teachers and students, as a learning facilitating tool, improved the attention of people to education, and allocate more resources for education, give full play to the initiative and creativity of student. 3

THREE OTHER TYPES OF LEARNING FACILITATING EVENTS AND THE HUMANE CONCERN OF DISTANCE LEARNERS

Based on the internet, there are numerous communication means be derived to reinforce communication between educators and learners. For instance, QQ platform, podcast, microblog, fetion and so on, a common character of these tools is the convenience to use, easy to get, and cheap costs. For this reason, they can solve the personal, learning and communication problems which distance learners met during learning, firm the confidence of receiving this kind of learning continuously for distance learners, and also promote the developments of every mode of teaching in the distance learning. One of the biggest difference between distance education and traditional education is that traditional education students are under the continuous face-to-face supervision of the teachers, so they can have a good communication with teachers, on the contrary, because of the separation of teachers and students in distance learning, students cannot obtain humane concern like in the traditional

education, so it is necessary to re-integrate the relationship between teaching and learning in distance education, and hope the students to feel the presence of educational organizations from the continued humane concern, enhance the efficacy of student learning and improve the acceptability of form of distance education in the society. In summary, in the ubiquitous environment, humanistic care for distance learners has been improved a lot, to a certain extent, these make up the regret of the distance learners due to the separation of time and space, and also solve the problem of high dropout rate in distance education effectively. Learning under the ubiquitous environment also fits the feature of Information Era very well, thus people can get any content they want to learn at any time and any place. REFERENCES [1] Huang Xiaohua. Analysis of the value orientation of education policy under the distance education dropouts Continue Education Research. [2] Yang Rencong. Effective Strategies for improving the Autonomous Learning of distance learners Journal of Qiongzhou University. [3] Li Jing. Review of the Learning Strategies under remote learning environment of the individual in the learning community Software Guide (educational Technology). [4] Hu Fangxia, Li Maoliang, Ren Yanjun. Applied research of E-commerce in modern education Journal of Chengdu University (Educational Science Edition). [5] Xu Bo. Research of Learner-centered Campus Culture Construction in distance education Journal of Inner Mongolia Radio & TV University.

102

ICIEES_Book.indb 102

4/3/2015 7:08:44 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The research and practice on the relationship between research and teaching in university* Guijie Liu, Yingchun Xie & Qingli Zhang Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering, Engineering College, Ocean University of China, Qingdao, Shandong, China

ABSTRACT: Aimed at the reality of emphasis on research and contempt teaching in universities, on the basis of in-depth analysis of the relationship between teaching and research at home and abroad, this paper discusses the strategies of handling the relationship between university research and teaching, and proposes the innovative teaching model by using scientific research to promote innovative talents training, and expect to provide the ideas for the interacting and developing collectively between university teaching and research. Keywords: 1

Higher Education; Teaching; Research; the Training Model of Innovative Talents

INTRODUCTION

In the present era, the competition between countries in the entire world is the competition of innovative talents in the final analysis. The countries having more qualified personnel can hold the development initiative in the development of the economic society. Universities have the advantage of knowledge-intensive, information-intensive, and talent-intensive. The long term historical accumulation makes the universities to become the cradle of talent as a matter of course. To cultivate the high quality innovative talents is not only the demands of higher education, but the trend and momentum of talent cultivation. Universities, as a high level base for talented cultivation, play an irreplaceable role in the talent cultivating process. Teaching is the basic method to talent cultivation and the primary task of teaching is generally considered as helping students to broaden and accumulate basic knowledge. Lecturers can directly influence the quality of the trainees due to their dominating functions on the teaching works. The debates that whether scientific researches should be developed in colleges have never been stopped since the 20th century. Some reckon that researches have bad influence on the teaching, but others think this can promote the teaching processes. The development *Supported by key research project of education teaching of Ocean University of China (2013ZD03).

trend of researching and teaching is different between China and other countries. In some developed countries, such as America, German, France and Japan scientific research has gradually separated out from colleges and transferred to institutions funded by government, corporations and private research institutes. The colleges’ function in scientific research in this countries drops to a second place. However, domestic universities get increasing research tasks and research grants year by year. Recently, the debate about the advantage and disadvantage of scientific research in colleges can be heard anywhere and both sides of the debate have their own reasons. So the relationship between research and teaching in university may need further investigation. Meanwhile, the relationship is an eternal topic in the development of higher school and has different features in different circumstances. Teaching and research are the two of the most important functions of colleges. But a sharp conflict exists between those two kinds of functions for a long time. The phenomenon of putting emphasis on scientific research more than teaching is relatively common. How to assort with the two contradictions that is stressing the theme of teaching as well as strengthening the scientific research is becoming an urgent problem. In this paper, the relationship between scientific research and teaching is deeply analyzed. The paper aims to explore the function of universities in talent cultivation and to broaden the mind in cultivating innovative talents of the new era.

103

ICIEES_Book.indb 103

4/3/2015 7:08:44 AM

2

THE STATUS OF RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN RESEARCH AND TEACHING IN COLLEGES

2.1 The research and teaching appears the tendency of separation in overseas college [2] Teaching and scientific research have been the two main functions of higher school, since Humboldt proposed the point of view that teaching should be combined with scientific research in the early 19th century. However, the research and teaching appears the tendency of separation in developed countries after the World War II. And specialized research institution was founded and developed rapidly. In the late 80s, there are more than 2000 research institutions in American colleges. The colleges in the top 25 possess 48 institutions on average. With the rapid development of professional research institution, the research in the colleges was gradually transferred to those professional research institutions. The research function of university is gradually retreated. In developed countries, this tendency of separation existed not only in universities. Some institution outside the colleges also developed rapidly. Recently, there are three kinds of extramural research institution: institution established by the government ministries except the education; institutes or research centers founded by the industrial enterprise; and the institutions founded by non-profit organization. Among them, Japan is the model in this aspect. In late 80s, 14000 companies establish research institutions, and their ability in research is even better than that in colleges. Those research institutions become important scientific place in developed countries. Scientific research is conducted outside the colleges. In a word, scientific research and teaching is gradually separated apart in developed countries. 2.2

The coexist of research and teaching in domestic colleges [3]

In our country, with the development of society, the colleges’ three major functions—teaching, research, and social service-have been general acknowledged. Research and teaching, usually regarded as twin brothers, are the main functions of colleges, especially in research-teaching university. In the decades, colleges obtained increasing research giants and provided powerful support for the scientific development of our country. But the professional title appraisal system puts more emphasis on the research than that in teaching. As a result, when the research grants is getting higher and higher, the promotion of research for teaching appeared to a tendency of decline, and even has bad influence on the teaching. For instance, some professors who bear heavy burden in research do not pay attention to the undergraduate teaching. Some of them are even unwilling to undertake

teaching task for undergraduate, leading to the undergraduates lose the chance to learn from famous professors. Some leaders who are responsible for the teaching task issued a sigh in the teaching seminar: once the research work was upgraded, the level of teaching would suffer a downgrade. In some famous colleges, undergraduates may find that their professors are not interested in the teaching at all, but in the so called research task. Professors have no choice, because assessing professional title and post promoting mainly refer to the research results. Those teachers who engage in teaching work are unlikely to be promoted. Which is the direction of the scientific research in college? What kind of relationship should be between scientific research and teaching? How to make the scientific research in line with teaching and promote each other? In which way can research in colleges make a difference in talent cultivation? Those questions raised extensive attention in academia and deserved a deep thought by managers and professors in college. 3

3.1

INITIAL ANALYSIS OF THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN RESEARCH AND TEACHING IN DOMESTIC COLLEGES Research is an important approach to talent innovations in colleges [4]

To elaborate the viewpoint clearly, we might be start with the analyze of the definition of innovative talents. Innovative talents are defined as the ones who possess the quality of innovative sprite and innovation capability. The innovative talents usually own strong curiosity and thirsty for knowledge, good selflearning and exploring ability, solid theoretical basis, rich scientific knowledge, rigorous scholarship and the brave to explore the unknown field. At the same time, the innovative talents should have the brave sprite of devoting his life to the defense of truth, good moral, healthy physique; excellent psychological qualities are also required. They are the successors of our culture, and the creators and transmitters of latest scientific achievement, and also the cultivators of future scientist. Innovative talents have such several features as below: 1) commendable innovation characteristics 2) tough creative will 3) acute innovative insights 4) advanced innovative ideas 5) rich innovative knowledge 6) scientific innovation practices. From the definitions and features of the innovative talents, it is not difficult to draw a conclusion that the theoretical knowledge and practice is necessary in the process of cultivating innovative talents. Only through thorough practice, the knowledge can be transferred into capability. Scientific research and teaching are two of the basic activities among teachers in higher school. Science

104

ICIEES_Book.indb 104

4/3/2015 7:08:44 AM

is the source and teaching is the stream. Advanced scientific achievement can improve the teaching level of lecturers in universities. Comprehensive colleges, full of academic masters and having a large number of innovative teachers, directed a large amount of advanced national projects. Combining research and teaching is a good method to cultivate talents. Scientific achievements can make students strengthen their engineering concepts and engineering research method. The combination of research and teaching can improve the development of teaching and enhance teaching quality. As a result, the engineering capability and professional competence of students can be improved. So if the relationship between research and teaching can be balanced properly, scientific research can have driving effects in cultivating the innovative talents. 3.2

The reason why colleges put more emphasis on research [5–6]

With the speed of technology transferring into real productivity getting faster, science and technology play a more important role in the development of society and every country paid much attention on the scientific research one after another. In order to speed the development and transformation of science in our country, Deng Xiaoping put forward the theory “Science and technology are primary productive force” and set forth the strategy of invigorating China through science and education. The policies such as the substantial increase of research grants, the reformation of research investment mechanism, and various assessment criteria proposed positively by the government, guided and encouraged the university to strengthen the scientific research work and the status of research to be a further promote. Under the influence of the society and macro policy, scientific research is getting more and more attention. Due to the advantage in talents accumulating, universities’ function in research is paying a significant role in the development of society and technology progress. At present, the ability of scientific research has become an important indicator when evaluating the overall strength of universities. And then the phenomenon that research is more important than teaching appears. Because of those issues, some professors are unwilling to undertake teaching task, and prefer to spend their time in scientific project. They regard teaching as an affiliated task. If they perform the teaching task in this kind of mentality, the effect of teaching must be influenced. The phenomenon is obvious in undergraduate program. This kind of phenomenon has a negative effect on teaching, and an imparting negative energy, not a positive energy, will be passed to students.

3.3

The strategies to coordinate the development between research and teaching [7]

It is the imperfections in the professional title appraisal system and post appointment system that caused the issue that research is more important than teaching. The scientific research works in universities is innocent. So reforming the current professional title appraisal system and post appointment system is the way to settle this problem. First, reform policies, which can motivate the professors experienced in scientific research engage in the cultivation of innovative talents, are necessary. On one hand, absorb undergraduates into research teams, and train their innovative thinking. Theory and practice can be combined through participating in the research project. A better understanding of the knowledge can be achieved by students. On the other hand, scientific research project can be written into the textbook as part of the experiment. The consciousness of innovation and the ability to solve practical problem can be cultivated. Teaching and scientific research are both unified and stimulating to each other. Teaching is the basis of scientific research; scientific research is the development and improvement of teaching. Talents cultivating and scientific research rely on each other and promote each other. The combination of those two things is the best way to cultivate talents and the way to allocate the resources optimally. 4

4.1

MEASURES OF POSITIVE INTERACTION BETWEEN RESEARCH AND TEACHING The status of teaching in colleges is unchangeable

The basis task of college is cultivating talents for society and it is the long-cherished wish of colleges. Newman says in his book University Ideal that “College is a place to pass on universal knowledge”. Teaching is the basic function of colleges all the time. Undertaking the teaching task, especially the undergraduate teaching task, is the central mission of every professor, and it is also the ineluctable duty for every teachers. Wu Qidi, vice minister of education, pointed out that “The undergraduates education and teaching must be considered as the center of the colleges’ various work to improve the quality of teaching. The colleges should attach great importance to teaching, teacher and education quality.” So as to achieve this goal, when making policy, assessing title and recruiting teachers, teaching should be putted at the central status. And priorities should be given to those teachers who combined teaching and research properly. At the same time, restrict the promotion of those teachers who only conduct the research work. Only in this way, the central status of teaching can be guaranteed.

105

ICIEES_Book.indb 105

4/3/2015 7:08:44 AM

4.2

Strengthen the effect of research in cultivating talents

Scientific research, as another function of higher education, should be organically integrated with teaching and with a view to the high-level construction of teaching staff, under the premise of providing technology support to our country. Through undertaking the scientific research project, teachers should improve the consciousness of innovation and creative capability. And they can also teach the knowledge in line with the progress of technology in the world to the students. On the other side, research can create a platform for students to combine their theory with practice. Through carrying out research activity with teachers, undergraduates will master the capability to settle practical problems. It is an effective way to cultivate innovative talents. 5

THE PRELIMINARY STUDY AND PRACTICE IN THE MODE OF INNOVATIVE TALENTS' TRAINING

For building an innovative country, technology is the key; talent is the core; education is the foundation. Innovative talents could not be cultivated without innovative teachers. Innovative teaching staff cannot be built without the support of scientific research. Whether the research and the teaching can blend with each other or not; its key point is the innovation of teaching model and curriculum system. Since the year 2010, the major Electro-mechanical Engineering has been authorized by the Ministry of Education as “outstanding engineer plans”; the teaching model and curricular system have been reformed. The status and function is highlighted in the cultivating innovative talents. Some successful experience was gained. The concrete method is as following:

of knowledge can spiral upward to a new level. Let students realize how to learn knowledge, how to deal with practical problems. So they can be the qualified talents with knowledge and capability. 5.2

Cases of teaching with scientific research

In the period of learning, the question asked the most by students is what can be done by learning so much knowledge. If this issue could not be handled properly, the students will lose their interest, goal, and motivation to learn. Although some students can achieve good scores, they do not process the ability to settle practical problems. There are two reasons for this result; first one, the lack of experiment make the teaching so boring, and theory could not connect with the practice. Second, because there are so few examples and some of them are even incomplete, so the students could not digest the new knowledge. Aimed to solve this problem, through the school-enterprise cooperation and establishing R&D center, young lecturers have the chance to undertake research project, and those research projects can be compiled into teaching case as part of the teaching. Then combined with the practical teaching link, the students can relate the theory to the practice, the ability to settle practical problems and innovative thinking method can be trained. So the students can peruse knowledge in a research way. Through exploring the new teaching method which is featured by the motivation of research project and teaching case, the teaching staff, not only responsible for the teaching, but in change with the scientific research. Considering the responsibility in cultivating the talents, the initiative is remediated in the discussion of teaching method, and in which way can the teaching and research work develop virtuously. REFERENCES

5.1

Scientific project-driven teaching practice patterns

Establish the scientific research team including professor, associate professor, and lecturer, postgraduate and undergraduate. Participating in the scientific research is a necessary process of teaching practice for undergraduates. Transform part of the research into the innovative experiment, and count to the credit. The consciousness of innovation, creative spirit, creative ability, and teamwork of undergraduates can be achieved in the team. Under the motivation of research project, the rotational and Trinitarian teaching pattern included teaching, research, and practice can be performed. The close connection between research and teaching can be realized and students’ creative thinking ability can be trained. On the basis of this foundation practice can also be performed. And then back the theory to teaching, the accumulation

[1] Binglin, Zhong. 2009. Research on system of innovative talents training. Chinese University Teaching 11:22−24. [2] Meng cheng, Zhao. 1999. The trend of separation between research and teaching in developed country. R&D Management 11(4):51–53. [3] Zhongxiong, Yuan. 2012. The combination of teaching and research in cultivating talents. Chinese Power Education 29:17–18. [4] Qiang, Wang. 2001. The research on model of cultivating innovative talents. Journal of Northeastern University (social and science edition) 3(3):229–231. [5] Guocheng, Lv. 2012. The thinking about the relationship between research and teaching of engineering colleges Higher Education Forum 2:35–36. [6] Qiuying, Han. 2012. The analysis of teaching and scientific research of comprehensive university. Modern Education Science (01):118–121. [7] Rujun, Cao. 2011. The connection between research and teaching among teachers. Study on Development of Education 01:52–55.

106

ICIEES_Book.indb 106

4/3/2015 7:08:44 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

A text analysis study on the business schools’ mission statements of 985 universities in China: Based on the stakeholder’s view Wei Chu & Yanhai Zhao School of Management, Lanzhou University, Lanzhou, China

ABSTRACT: The business schools from “985 Project” universities are the best representatives of Chinese business schools, and their missions give expression to their educational objectives and values. This research adopts the text analysis method to investigate the mission statements of all the business schools of 39 “985 Project” universities in China. By the specialized software of ROST, this study discusses the challenges and difficulties of these business schools as well as the stakeholder’s expectations on these schools in regard to their mission statements. According to analysis results, some suggestions are given to enhance the future development of these business schools. Keywords: 1

Social responsibility; Business schools; Mission; Text analysis; Stakeholder

INTRODUCTION

Nowadays, the public is paying a closer attention to the problems related to Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) such as environmental protection, food security and product quality, etc. And these arose some criticisms on the present business education, blaming that those business schools have taken a wrong approach in educating the future managers. Meanwhile, it is also expected that the business schools should take a more responsive and contributing approach to its business education. The mission statements from 39 “985 Project” business schools are chosen as study object for the reasons that, they are not only the first steps of these schools’ strategy designing and implementing (Xiaolu Jiang et al., 2012), but they can also reflect the overall development planning of these business schools. Based on a stakeholder’s point of view, this paper tries to analyze their mission statements.

2

LITERATURE REVIEW

2.1 Business schools and CSR Being in close contact with enterprises, business schools are becoming an important stakeholder in the business world. Leading the research and debate, business schools around worldwide are

keeping a more watchful eye on enterprises, especially in regard to CSR. In fact, the related theories have already formed a rather complete system with a substantial volume of research outcomes. Ying Chen (2009) wrote that the origin of CSR can be traced back to the British, Oliver Sheldon, as early as 1923. Later, many other contributions have been added into CSR, such as “triple bottle line”, “responsibility pyramid” and stakeholder’s theories. The last theory has fast attracted increasing attention in the academic circles. And one of the most accepted definition of stakeholder is proposed by Archie B. Carroll & Ann K. Buchholtz (2004). 2.2 Business schools’ stakeholders Scholars have already made a number of observations concerning business schools’ responsibility and their stakeholders. Prof. Fanghua Wang (2008), dean of Anti business school of Shanghai Jiaotong University, has, for instance, pointed out that business schools should take the responsibilities of “role”, “behavior” and “moral”. And Prof. Howard Davies (2004), dean of London School of Economics and Political Science, suggested that modern university’s stakeholders include government, faculties, students, alumni and other sponsors. Based on the existing literature, the authors of this paper have shown the business schools’ stakeholders in the following chart:

107

ICIEES_Book.indb 107

4/3/2015 7:08:44 AM

the word frequency statistics was to report the frequency of the word or phrase appears in Chinese content, then the significance and impact of these words of the discipline can be analyzed. 4 4.1

RESULT Business schools’ characteristics

According to the statistical results in table 1, the following observations can be drawn.

Figure 1.

3 3.1

Stakeholders of business schools.

METHODOLOGY Research object

The paper has selected all the 39 business schools of national “985 Project” universities as research object, which are managed by China’s Ministry of Education. The national “985 Project” was initiated by President Zemin Jiang’s public address at the conference for celebrating the 100th anniversary of Peking University in 1998 (Hou, 2005). By this national project, these best public universities of China will receive special government funding to raise the overall level of China’s higher education. 3.2

Research instrument

The paper uses the method of text analysis, which can translate qualitative, nonsystematic symbolic content into quantitative and systematic data (Lin & Dai, 2008). By text analysis, some phenomena and development process that people can’t directly observe and explore can be analyzed in a systematic and quantified manner (Tu, 2009). At present, among all the softwares, ROST, NVivo, PatCount and so on have received wide appreciation and utilization. This paper has chosen the software of ROST for its advantages in the treatment of words and phrases in Chinese, where the software can conduct word segmentation processing and filtering processing for Chinese text by counting the frequency of the words (Ma, 2011). The software ROST offers a large number of analysis functions, where this paper mainly makes use of its functions of word segmentation and word frequency statistics. The word segmentation is used for words in Chinese, and it can count words separately. Shuang Xu (2010) argued that

1. Expectations to become first-rank business schools The frequency of “first-rank” is highest in table 1, which is counted for 58 times. We thus know that the majority of these 39 business schools have taken the first-rank as their development goals. In addition, the words of “famous”, “development” and “endeavor” have also reflected this willingness. 2. Talent education as the core The basic missions of the universities world-wide are transferring knowledge and educating people. The frequency of the word “talents” reflects this, where the word appeared for more than 40 times, indicating business schools’ emphasis on talent education. Moreover, such words as “ability”, “students”, and “research-based” also show a clear emphasis on talent education. 3. Social and economic development promotion Compared with other words, the words of “society”, “economic”, “culture”, “service” and “contribution” have a relative higher frequency, showing that business schools’ attention to the social and economic development, and their ambition to promote the economic development and social advancement. It is understandable, for as public organizations, these schools should and must contribute to the advancement of commercial civilization and the social advancement. 4. Emphasis on discipline construction The frequencies of the words such as “discipline”, “research”, “academic” and “teaching” are respectively 34 times, 32 times, 20 times and 20 times. This has shown that business schools’ focus on the disciplinary construction and their efforts to create an appropriate learning environment. 5. Vague measures for future development For these business schools, one of their weak points is their relative less attachment to strategic planning. For instance, the frequencies of the words such as “strategy”, “reformation” and “internationalization” are relatively less, and from this, it can be observed that these schools have yet formed innovative strategies for their future development. 6. Lack of attention to corporate needs and sustainable development Since the word of “enterprise” appeared only 9 times in the all statements, it is clear that the corporate needs are not widely recognized as the

108

ICIEES_Book.indb 108

4/3/2015 7:08:44 AM

Table 1.

Word frequency.

Words

Frequency

Words

Frequency

Words

Frequency

First-rank Construct Cultivate Development College Talents Innovation Society Discipline Research Level Economic Famous Endeavor Academic Teaching Feature Ability Science Insist

58 56 55 54 51 40 37 35 34 32 30 29 25 24 20 20 20 20 19 16

Know-ledge Research-based Create Students School running Culture Scientific research Serve Advantage Contribution Theory Education Custodian View Achievement Practice Strength Comprehensive Enterprise Reformation

15 14 14 14 13 12 12 11 11 11 11 11 10 10 10 10 10 9 9 8

Internationalization Quality Universities Qualified teachers Elite Strategy Overall Leading Hierarchy Struggle Spread Awakening Sustainable Advanced Serve the society Foster Positive Move forward Exploit Communication

8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5

*Source: author reorganize according to ROST software analysis results.

first priorities for business schools’ development. Furthermore, the few mention of the word “sustainable” reflects that they have not regarded sustainable development as their primary task. According to the analysis above, this paper has summarized the similarities and differences in regard to the mission statements of 39 business schools in the following table (Table 2). 4.2

Table 2. Similarities and differences of mission statement. Items

Content

Similarities

They all strive to build a well-known and advanced business school; They all emphasis on talents training and discipline construction; They all aim to contribute to the advancement of society and the development of economy. There are great differences for business schools to choose their paths of development; The awareness of assuming social responsibility is different in business schools.

Differences

Business schools and their stakeholders

By the software ROST, this paper has also paid special attention to the mention of stakeholders in the mission statements of 39 business schools from “985 Project” universities (Table 3). As shown in Figure 1, business schools’ stakeholders cover a large range of actors. But, as the text analysis has demonstrated, the words of “college”, “talents” and “society” have a relative high frequency (Table 3), and that of “enterprise” and “qualified teachers” have only a marginal frequency. In fact, the word “society” represents only a general tendency, but not a clear operational path for development. At the same time, from these mission statements, it is clear that these business schools care most their students. The frequency of the words such as “talents” and “elite” makes this evident. As the stakeholders such as “enterprise” and “qualified teachers” are mentioned by a few schools, the percentage is marginal. Another point is that few business schools have made clear statements concerning the development of their teachers and their connection to enterprises.

* Source: author. Table 3. Mention of stakeholders in the mission statement. Words

Frequency Words

Frequency Words

College 51

Students

14

Talents 40

Enterprise

9

Society 35

University

8

Frequency

Qualified 8 teachers Serve the 6 society

* Source: author.

In short, it can be observed that what those business schools care the most are their students. But as the stakeholders of business schools are multiple, the few mention of specific stakeholders should arose the public’s attention.

109

ICIEES_Book.indb 109

4/3/2015 7:08:44 AM

5

SUGGESTIONS

By the analysis above, this paper has the following recommendations to promote business schools future development and to enhance their connection with stakeholders on a larger scale. 5.1

Talents training

As the talents’ education is the top priority in the development of business schools, emphasis should be laid to meet the society’s requirements for business elite education, where these talents should be qualified regarding to their knowledge and skill level, but also be endowed with appropriate value and understanding toward CSR and sustainable development. 5.2

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

Teaching method diversification

The students of business schools are different from others, and they expect to gain knowledge that can be applied in practice. Consequently, the traditional teaching model can’t meet the needs of these students in the teaching process, and the teachers should pay more attention to the combination of theory and practice. And thus the interactive and participative methods should be applied such as case teaching, mobile classroom and panel discussion etc. 5.3

Development approach

Each business school has its own unique advantages and disadvantages, and thus they should form distinctive emphasis and approaches to development. But as the text analysis shows, the development paths of these schools are somewhat uniform and vague, where the superficial words such as reform and internationalization have replaced clear or operational development measures. Thus for a better and differentiated development, these business schools should adopt a more diversified and distinctive approach. 5.4

Connections with enterprises

Business schools should also strengthen their relationships with corporate partners to provide a more constructive platform for their students, alumni, faculties and other partners as well. This should be realized by a number of new cooperation approaches, joint-research, joint-training, internship and life-long learning etc. 6

approach of stakeholder. By way of text analysis, the similarities and differences of these business schools’ mission statements have been shown. While the majority of business schools have laid enough emphasis on their basic task of talent education and social contribution, the vague mention of clear and operational development measures, and the lack of accent on corporate and stakeholders’ participation have also shown some limits to their mission statements. Based on the analyses, this paper has suggested some measures for business schools to enhance their development through elite education, teaching method diversification, development approach and connection with business.

CONCLUSION

In this paper, the mission statements of all the 39 business schools of national “985 Project” have been analyzed by the ROST software by an

The authors of this paper thank the Chinese Fundamental Research Funds for the Central Universities (Project No. 11LZUJBWZY052) and Course Construction Project of Lanzhou University (Project No. 13SMJXYJ001) for their support. REFERENCES [1] Carroll, Archie B. & Buchholtz, Ann K. 2004. Business and society: ethics and stakeholder management: 47. China Machine Press. [2] Chen, Ying. 2009. Theory and practice of Corporate Social Responsibility: 6. Beijing: Economy and Management Press. [3] Davies, Howard. 2008. Developing a university strategy in the 21st century. Proceedings of ChineseForeign University Presidents Forum (second) 168–170. [4] Hou, Guangming. 2005. Theoretical exploration and innovative development of Research Universities in China: 36. Beijing: Tsinghua University Press. [5] Jiang, Xiaolu, Xu, Mingzhi & Zhang, Dan. 2012. A study of vision-guided university development approaches in China. Journal of Graduate Education (3): 1–8, 14. [6] Lin, Qiao & Dai, Weiqi. 2008. Research on status in the practice of Corporate Social Responsibility of Ningbo’s private enterprises: Based on the method of text analysis. Market Modernization (14): 93–95. [7] Ma, Qiufang. 2011. Content analysis of media signs of tourism destinations: A case study of Shaanxi. Tourism Science 25(3): 35–44. [8] Tu, Duanwu. 2009. Education policy text analysis and its application. Fudan Education Forum 7(5): 22–27. [9] Wang, Fanghua. & Su, Yong. 2008. The social responsibility of business school: the viewpoint of China. Wen Hui News. [10] Xu, Shuang. 2010. The Research trend on drug therapy for systemic inflammatory response syndrome based on Burst Detection: 6–7. Shenyang: China Medical University.

110

ICIEES_Book.indb 110

4/3/2015 7:08:44 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

2-3-3-2 based teaching evaluation for data structure course L. Guan, X.L. Zeng & X.G. Zhao Wuhan International Trade University, Wuhan, Hubei, China

L. Li Wuhan University of Technology, Wuhan, Hubei, China

ABSTRACT: Higher vocational education is essential in our higher education system. We have done long-term research on improving education quality, especially on how to evaluate course quality. With the support of our education project, namely “2-3-3-2 based course evaluation method for higher vocational education”, we propose an applicable evaluation method that targets at pushing students to study actively and positively. We hope that the teaching quality can be improved and student’s ability can be enhanced through this research. Keywords: 1

Higher vocational education; Data structure; Course Evaluation; Evaluation methods

HIGHER VOCATIONAL EDUCATION COURSES

Cultivating application-oriented technical skills is the main objective of current Higher Vocational Education (HVE). Under the current education situation, HVE must fully commit to the cause of stimulating economy development and employment engagement. At the same time, it must radiate the strategy of combining production and research. This should be the unique characteristic of modern vocational education. As an important component of education system, on the one hand, modern vocational and technical education follows the convention of other higher education forms and possesses the general characteristics of higher education. While on the other hand, it also has some distinctive characteristics compared with the general standards and requirements of tertiary education. Therefore, vocational and technical education in teaching should have its distinctive requirements and characteristics. Otherwise, it may easily turn into the “hard tack” version of university-level education or the “blind arrogance” of technical secondary schools. Students graduated from higher vocational education are required to acquire the scientific and cultural knowledge and the basic professional knowledge. They are also required to master in professional and operational skills. In this way, students are equipped with the professional adaptability, innovation ability, entrepreneurship and the spirit of pioneer.

Currently, the phenomenon of “management and teaching difficulties” prevails in most of higher vocational colleges, since students who vary in the starting point and ability levels are overall of poor quality. To deal with this worrying situation, we have gathered a lot of feedback about the quality of education and teaching by yearly repeated researching and analyzing of students’ fundamental information and course assessment situation. The current inflexible and one-way assessment method in our country has no longer met the requirements of modern professional training. The conventional assessment method of students’ academic achievement performance which is largely implemented in China is usually in the form of “final written examination (about 60%−70% of the total score) + supplementary continuous assessment (about 30%−40%, which is usually scored by attendance, homework and class performance, and teacher has decision-making power over this part of grade)”. It seems not the case that “one exam one fate”, but in reality it is. The reason is that it does not matter whether students study hard on daily bases, or whether they master the key knowledge and skills of the course, as long as they cram before the exam and pray sincerely, most students will pass the exam. As a result, the content in which students should mastered is actually not be implemented. One typical phenomenon is that the graduates feel that it is very difficult to have a job, which directly affects their future development.

111

ICIEES_Book.indb 111

4/3/2015 7:08:44 AM

2

mode has been formed. The details of the assessment items are adjusted by the actual situation of the specific course.

THE INTRODUCTION OF “2-3-3-2” ASSESSMENT MODE

Taylor said that the development of the evaluation method is not only a purely technical issue, but also a fundamental activity to constantly improve the educational practice. Even if high-level teaching goals are set and lively teaching activities are launched, the teaching could be hollowing out for unable to evaluate if an assessment method, which can accurately grasp the degree of the student mastering the target, is not developed. Based on the practice of “2-3-5” program evaluation model in the past, we mainly focus on increasing projects that can assess the overall quality of students and improve students’ learning proactivity combining the characteristics of modern vocational college that is increasing the refining project in the performance assessment. For example, if students can report and exchange their feelings of a part of the course in the form of lecture or symposium, it will be beneficial in improving the ability of language expression, analyzing and dealing with problems. We can judge the depth of students’ understanding of knowledge and whether they have mastered the knowledge by their presentation. In the appraisal system, we can give them some bonus points based on the quality of the completion to motivate the students to engage in the process of learning professional courses actively. It will be helpful to guiding and supervising students to utilize the knowledge and cultivate self-learning ability, ultimately reach the purpose of promoting a better learning atmosphere, improving teaching effectiveness and enhancing academic ability that students are asked to complete the reporting, presentation and communication within the stipulated time and prompted to comb, analyze, summarize and understand the knowledge they have learned. “2-3-3-2” course quality assessment model is the assessment of student academic, which adopts performance evaluation and written evaluation in one course with the corresponding rates of 70% and 30%. The performance evaluation includes “observation or talking evaluation, works completion evaluation and the actual show evaluation” and other assessment projects with the percentages of 20%, 30%, 20% respectively, which sum up to 70%. Final written evaluation takes only 30%. The notion of performance evaluation and written evaluation comes from the book of Educational Evaluation, written by TanakaKoji who is a professor of Kyoto University. Combined with the current situation of China’s vocational education and the actual cognitive ability of contemporary students, with carrying on specific research and improvement, the based course evaluation method for higher vocational education “2-3-3-2” assessment

3 3.1

DATA STRUCTURE COURSE EVALUATION SCHEME Data structure course introduction

In computer science, data structure is a comprehensive professional basic course, which is an interdisciplinary curriculum combining mathematics, computer hardware and computer software. It is a discipline that studies the object data in computer operation of program design and the relationships and operations among them. Data structure plays a connecting role in the professional curriculum system. The prerequisite of this course is an advanced programming language course, such as C language programming course. Data structure studies the relationship among data in the abstract, with the help of practice arithmetic operation. Therefore, it is difficult to understand the concepts and terminologies. To realize an algorithm is also depending on the level that one masters the grammar, syntax, and control structure of specific advanced language programming design and how fluently one applies them. Hence, it is difficult to master the course to the majority including undergraduate students and college students, let alone vocational students who are weak in understanding and inevitably will face more difficulties. Based on years of vocational teaching experience, we decided to adopt the “2-3-3-2” Curriculum Evaluation Model to enhance the students' initiative of studying, cultivate the students' professional quality, and improve the teaching effect and the students’ professional skills level after practice exploration and research for ages. 3.2

Data structure course evaluation scheme

According to the teaching content and objectives of data structure course, there are 14 weeks of the course and 4 class hours per week among which theory and practice share equal time. Basically one knowledge module should be completed in one week. Two class hours are used to state basic theory, and the other two for practices, in which students are required to finish a practical operation, which is about 11 times in total of the course. There are two big comprehensive assignments as big projects and a theoretical written test as the final exam. In order to reflect the idea of studentcentered teaching, each choice and score as the assessing project should be dealt with humanity. 10 high scores of homework are chosen as the basis

112

ICIEES_Book.indb 112

4/3/2015 7:08:44 AM

Table 1.

Evaluation form of data structure course. Performance assessment

Assessment components

Written test evaluation

Attendance and performance in class

Rates Presentation Forms

30% Final exam

20% Roll book

of evaluation items. The higher score of two main comprehensive exercises is the basis for assessing achievement items. Of course, to encourage students to study hard by themselves, a number of bonus items are set, such as one can get 5 scores if he talks something about the pre-order program knowledge associated with the course in a class with high quality and completed PPT. Creative algorithms, critical thinking and some other items can also be set as bonus points. All of these are in order to inspire students’ learning interest of professional knowledge and enhance their selfconfidence in professional learning. According to the “2-3-3-2” course appraisal model, combined with the students' cognitive rules and characteristics of the course, the data structure course evaluation form is designed as the following table. 3.2.1 Performance assessment To make sure the performance evaluation system implement successfully, relative work should be prepared and the whole course plan should be completed before the course. In particular, various data tables should be designed according to the characteristics of the curriculum (such as class attendance sheet, scores registration form, etc.). The appraisal should be seriously permeated to the students in the first lesson. We also need to make sure that students realize the importance and meaning of the performance curriculum assessment, which is not a mere formality, and it does not mean that one can get scores without actual efforts. Each record will be included in the evaluation system and become a basis of personal academic achievement assessment, such as class attendance, homework, and questions asked in the class, etc. Each score will be graded according to the records at the end of the semester. 3.2.1.1 Attendance and performance in class Attendance rate will be checked by each class’ records and the total score is 20 points. Classroom performance will be assessed by questions, answers and the disciplines in the classroom.

Practical operation

Big assignments

Bonus items

30% Statistics of the home-work

20% Big Project

1–5 points Reference materials

3.2.1.2 Practical operation Practical operation, a total of 30 points, is an important indicator of the evaluation system. Each time carries 3 points. Students should finish their homework according to the requirements and hand in to the teacher on time. The teacher should mark each student’s homework carefully and grade according to its completeness. If there is no principal mistake, the student can get full mark. This requires teachers to perform their duties seriously and encourage students to complete assignments on time. Common mistakes of students should be recorded well that should be commented and corrected in the next lesson. This can maximize the program and finally realize the purpose of the process assessment. 3.2.1.3 Big project This project, as an advanced entry, is 20 points with some difficulties. The project is used to test students’ comprehensive ability, to select students with more professional potential and to inspire potential students’ interest in future exploring the professional knowledge. Hence, only two projects are arranged. One is simple and the other is difficult, and only the higher score can be chosen as the assessment score. Therefore, students will get scores. There is no need to worry about the problem that the student cannot get scores for difficulties and the total score significantly declines. 3.2.1.4 Bonus items Bonus-item is a program to mobilize students’ learning activities and enhance students’ selfconfidence of professional learning. It motivates students to challenge with courage and face difficulties without fear, and reflects students’ comprehensive ability. 3.2.2 Written test evaluation The content of written test should focus on assessing students’ professional skills and knowledge quality. The teacher should make sure that it not only assess the curriculum knowledge, but also assess capacity and quality of the student, and reflects what should know and should be. The

113

ICIEES_Book.indb 113

4/3/2015 7:08:45 AM

content should not overemphasize the professional appraisal system but rather really take the test as an effective means of achieving educational goals. Therefore, the content of the written test is mainly to assess the key points, basic theory knowledge, concepts, classic algorithm and common mistakes. The test that accounts for 30 points should be arranged within a week after the end of the course. It is an assessment method to turn the form of past assessment that a test is the end into process to help students’ to develop a good study habit for life. The final course grade can be a “ripe and simple thing” that students acquire the knowledge and improve their ability. Finally, the ultimate goal of education can be realized. 4

THE EFFECT OF ASSESSMENT SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION

In the process of data structure instruction, the “2-3-3-2” assessment model was implemented since the first lesson, and strengthened in each stage of teaching. In the meantime, records were made well in each teaching activities. At the end of the teaching process, the academic performance of students were summarized and analyzed. By comparing students’ achievements with previous sessions, it shows that the effect of teaching is much better. 4.1

Examination promotes learning and teaching

Process-oriented assessment, highlighting the core skills of training courses

We make the assessment system implement the teaching process, and combine the theory and practice assessment closely, to highlight the core skills training courses. 4.3

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT This paper is undertaken as part of the project 2103B398 supported by Hubei Province Education Science. REFERENCES

The establishment of assessment system of data structure course mobilizes the students’ learning initiative and enthusiasm, and cultivates good study habits. It also changes the situation that students skip classes casually. It plays a significant role in urging students to study hard, and reduces the failure rate. In this way, the method improves students’ learning ability and overall career accomplishment. 4.2

Teachers must carefully comb the entire teaching goals, and demands strictly on themselves in the teaching process to implement the assessment system seriously in each link of teaching. It promotes the improvement of teaching levels. There is also a space for improvement regarding the implementation of data structures course “2-3-3-2” appraisal model. In particular, the design of homework should pay more attention to master the basic knowledge. The big assignment had better be completed by a team, while specific division of labour should be made. In addition, the implementation of this appraisal model will increase teachers’ workload, leading the teachers who have large number of students to carry heavier burden. In short, this program implemented in the teaching process further improves the quality of teaching courses, enhances the students' academic level, professional skills and overall quality, and provides an effective empirical material to “vocational education curriculum quality evaluation system “2-33-2” assessment mode research” project.

Improving teaching skills

[1] Goyal, S.K. 1977. An integrated inventory model for a single supplier-single customer problem. International Journal of Production Research vol. 15: 107–111. [2] Banerjee, A. 1986. A joint economic-lot-size model for purchaser and vendor. Decision Sciences vol. 17: 292–311. [3] Li, L. et al. 2012. Internet Software Development Platform Supporting Teaching and Learning. In Proceedings of 2012 International Conference on Education Reform and Management Innovation (ERMI 2012):33–37. [4] Lv, H. 2011. Studies on Quality Assurance for Australian Vocational Education Curriculum. Beijing. Foreign Language Teaching And Research Press. [5] Jiang, D.Y. 2007. Main Teaching Streams Of Modern Vocation Education in German: Its Theory, Practice & Innovation. Tsinghua Press. [6] Liu, X. 2009. Credit System and Education Management of University Students. Shandong University Press.

The establishment of “2-3-3-2” assessment system puts forward higher requirements to teachers.

114

ICIEES_Book.indb 114

4/3/2015 7:08:45 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

A study on the contemporary college students’ ideology of preparation to job with field trip and obtain employment Tianbiao Huang Zhejiang Ocean University, Zhoushan, Zhejiang, P.R. China

ABSTRACT: In recent years, university graduates in the employment of college students has become increasingly prominent, employment difficulty to enlarge unceasingly, especially in the global financial crisis, the employment situation is very serious. In this context, in order to understand the current employment situation and employment orientation, group in late December to early 2008 October employment tracking survey of Ningbo area graduates of 06[1], in 2009 February to the first ten days of March in the first problem the financial crisis on China’s employment effects of deep under the career orientation and policy cognition of undergraduates objective to study the. Suggestions on the construction of the government leading, employment service cooperation supply mechanism participated by the University, enterprise and the non government organizations, and actively create conducive to promoting the overall institutional environment of College Students’ employment.[2] Keywords: College students; Employment orientation; questionnaire survey; The policy cognitive level; Employment service 1

INTRODUCTION

Since the third quarter of 2008, the Wall Street began in America subprime mortgage crisis gradually evolved into a global financial and economic crisis, in this context, resulting in severe external shocks on China’s economic development. At the same time, the scale of university graduates in China has increased year by year. In 2000, the college graduates is only 1070000, 2001 and 2002 were 1140000 and 1450000. In 2003, the number of graduates for the first time in 2000000 (2120000), the average every year to increase daily[3]. The Premier Wen Jiabao in 2009 “government work report” clearly pointed out the need to “make every attempt to promote employment”, “put in a prominent position to promote the employment of College graduates”. Office of the State Council in 2009 2 issued a “notice” on the strengthening of the work of university graduates’ employment, the employment of college students employment requirements on top of the work. Local governments, universities and enterprises, social sector in providing various kinds of service to college students’ employment. On the eve of the outbreak of the financial crisis, we through the graduates of 06 higher vocational employment in the Ningbo area of investigation, according to the investigation of career orientation and policy awareness of university students in

Zhejiang, analysis of contemporary college students is how to treat these policies and services, the concept of employment, employment psychology, employment orientation in the new period, what are the characteristics of.[4] For our university to continue to promote the employment of university students, the government and the universities should be how to further improve the employment policy, optimize the employment service system; these questions as the core issue of this research concerns. 2

OBJECT AND METHOD OF STUDY

1. Investigation object; selected 1200 college students in 10 universities in Zhejiang Province as the research object, there are 7 undergraduate colleges, 3 colleges. In order to understand the graduates’ employment in the follow-up survey enterprise units of work, life and so on, selected graduates 06 Vocational Colleges in Ningbo area of Zhejiang Province, for our university to continue to promote the employment of university students, to provide a reference[5]. 2. The survey tool for life; making use of the “employment of graduates tracking survey (enterprises)”, “employment of graduates tracking survey (students)” conducted a questionnaire survey, the questionnaire validity by Delphy method, the questionnaire designed by

115

ICIEES_Book.indb 115

4/3/2015 7:08:45 AM

the audit project, the industry recognized project shall be retained, the controversial project to remove, and then the content validity of the questionnaire to make qualitative evaluation. The students by using the self-designed “under the financial crisis on the career orientation and policy questionnaire” survey, the questionnaire consisted of 30 items, after three rounds of expert investigations, retained 25 topics, including basic personal information, the employment situation cognition, career orientation selection, employment policy cognition in four parts. Questionnaire reliability test used retest, after a month of 100 students received the retest, retest correlation coefficient 0.86. A total of 1186 questionnaires were recovered, 1093 effective questionnaires (because of its incomplete answers from 93), the recovery rate is 98.83%, effective rate was 91.08%[6]. 3. Measurement and data processing; sampling methods for stratified cluster sampling. To assist all questionnaire by trained school counselors teacher or student cadres under test, test after recover questionnaire. In each of the subjects to answer after, on the spot of the filled content to conduct a comprehensive inspection, carefully check, timely correction. The above two kinds of the recovered all the questionnaire data are encoded by the research group of examine and verify, and then enter the computer, using software for statistical analysis. 3

ANALYSIS OF STUDENTS RESEARCH CONTENTS AND RESULTS

The students considered that the test of the financial crisis on employment impacts, using gender as a set of variables for independent samples T test, and family economic income for the group variables were single factor analysis of variance, the results are shown in figure 1. In “the financial crisis on the impact of employment” on this issue, there are significant differences between different gender students (p < 0.01); from the score, girls think that the influence of the financial crisis is more serious, from the overall average college students thought that “the financial crisis has great influence on the degree of” employment of different family income; students agreed that the “degree” of financial crisis on employment effect increases with the decreasing of household income, and the difference was significant (p < 0.01), this may be due to the financial crisis brought to the lower family income family impact even more dramatic, from lower family income students sense of self employment has more impact. As shown in Figure 2, the graduates and non graduates answer situation comparison can be

Table 1. Student financial crisis at different income families consider the impact on employment statistics.

Demographic variables

The influence degree of the financial crisis on employment situation

sex

2.83 + 0.87

The level of family income

Male (n = 550) Female (n = 543) t Superior (n = 51) midding-grade (n = 739) low-grad (n = 303) F

2.97 + 0.71 −2.83** 2.63 + 1.00

2.89 + 0.76 2.97 + 0.84 4.13**

*p < 0.05, **p < 0.01, ***p < 0.001 (Note: the impact of financial crisis on the scoring method for employment of college students: the option “A” for 4 points, “B” for 3 points, “C” for 2 points, “small D” for 1 points, “E didn’t what effect” for 0 points).

found, the graduates than non graduates tend to think of “Great influence” or “The impact is relatively large”, but the difference is not significant. Overall, the students generally thought “Great influence” or “The impact is relatively large”. College students’ confidence in the future of employment; in response to financial crisis, “you how to” their employment confidence, as shown in Figure 5, the more obvious differentiation of college students: 48.03% of college students said “confidence is small”, 40.05% of the students chose to “faith, another 6.69% large” choose “no confidence,” 4.95% said “great faith”. Under the background of financial crisis, the employment of college students self-confidence, there existed significant difference between different gender (p < 0.001), from the score, girls with low self-esteem and the problem of gender discrimination. (3) during the period of employment form choice; “if you can not find the ideal job, are you willing to accept is the choice of the multiple choice questions what”, mainly about college students employment during the practical career orientation. According to the results of the survey (see chart 28), 38.36% of the students choose to “participate in the employment trainee transitional employment”, followed by “individual business, entrepreneurship” (29.68%), range, that is prepared to deal with such state of college students in many ways, means that in the possible such period, employment of college students will be divided largely. In addition, students

116

ICIEES_Book.indb 116

4/3/2015 7:08:45 AM

Table 2.

Graduates and non-graduates on account of the financial crisis on employment statistics.

−

Great influence

The impact is relatively large

Influence

The relatively small impact

What effect did not

Graduates Non graduates

1.34 8.78

57.31 55.13

8.58 9.65

1.58 5.04

1.19 1.39

Table 3. Independent samples T-test, and household income levels for the group variable ANOVA considering the financial crisis on employment statistics.

Demographic variables

The employment confidence of students under the financial crisis

Sex

1.53 + 0.72

The level of family income

Male (n = 550) Female (n = 543) T Superior (n = 51) midding-grade (n = 739) low-grade (n = 303) F

1.35 + 0.66

Figure 1. Students in the financial crisis, if not find a dream job, willing to accept given the choice of employment statistics.

4.33*** 1.61 + 0.67

efforts, the different professional, record of formal schooling graduates can benefit equilibrium.

1.45 + 0.70 1.39 + 0.69 2.33*

*p < 0.05, **p < 0.01, ***p < 0.001 (Note: the confidence scoring method in college students’ Employment under financial crisis: “A has no confidence” for 0 points, “B confidence small”; 1 points, “C confidence greatly” 2 points, “D great faith” for 3 points).

to the city community’s intention is higher than that of the western region and rural. “City community employment” (28.48%), “on a part-time job informal employment” (25.39%), “to find employment in the western region” (23.01%), “to the rural grass-roots employment” (21.19%). These options are in the proportion of 20%–40%. Analysis of the current situation of College Students’ employment objective and subjective cognition based, group think, should be perfected “employment” system; “employment” stage is the transition stage between “school students employment” and officially “posts employment”. This investigation shows, identity of college students policy suggestions. On employment policy is very high, the employment policy to continue to provide favorable conditions to promote. But, has launched the employment policy also exist the problems of single forms of contents, the coverage is not broad. Therefore, the government should further expand, deepen and improve the employment policy, enrich its content and forms, increase publicity and promotion

1. The government should further improve students’ employment policy, promote the coordinated employment policy system and other policy system, and actively build conducive to promoting the overall institutional environment of College Students’ employment. The survey found, college students to work on small and medium-sized enterprises have a strong desire, but the national development and Reform Commission SME Department data show, the first half of 2008 6.7 of thousands of small and medium-sized enterprises closed down, a considerable number of small and medium-sized enterprises are facing difficulties such as capital strand breaks, it and the national implementation of tight monetary policy has a direct relationship between[10] (P135). Under the influence of the financial crisis, small and medium-sized enterprise survival more difficult, only through the financial, taxation, management services and multiple ways of supporting the development of SMEs, to the greatest extent to enable SMEs to absorb and give full play to the function of College Students’ employment. 2. Establishing training system, further expand, deepen and improve the employment policy, promote the employment system innovation. China has not yet to establish a true sense of the internship system, schools, enterprises have not yet established mutually supporting “practice market”, leading to a series of problems in practice of College students. It is necessary to establish the training system in the talent market, the

117

ICIEES_Book.indb 117

4/3/2015 7:08:45 AM

relevant departments should work in students’ practice, relevant policies and regulations, so that on the one hand makes the students understand the enterprise need what kind of talent, you really lack what knowledge and skills through practice; college and enterprise “intimate contact”, after graduation can choose each other. On the other hand, also can make the enterprise reduce training cost, convenient for enterprises to find suitable talent. Every summer and winter vacation, some big companies will recruit g intern, outstanding students to the company practice, through this channel to find more talents. 3. Students’ practice related legislation should follow, “labor law” should be to regulate the frequent practice in the course of the problem. The students practice, such as the school is responsible for; and students after graduation practice becomes a kind of market behavior, once a problem, should according to the relevant laws to deal with, but this one is still in the “vacuum zone”. Before set up in real practice system, improve the students’ practice guidance mechanism is a pressing matter of the moment. 4. The university should strengthen the internship and employment guidance to do the following: To encourage the students to actively seeks out internships; looking for internships and jobs, pay attention to methods. The company generally not announced internship opportunities, can take the initiative and its human resource department, the initiative for internship opportunities. But special attention is recruitment company, its are short of hands, in the absence of recruit suitable staff conditions, is likely to be temporary alternative choice intern. To guide students to avoid the cold; looking for internships, should avoid popular internships and practical web site, the courage to get upset, focus information and practice internship peak, the likelihood of success is greater instead. The prompt students bogey free lunch; between intern and internship units is a win-win relationship, active and the other that I don’t want money to work is bad, that their own lack of confidence. The value of pay must return value, does not exist for the internship, to create value for the employer intern is needed by the other, and the rational consideration to intern value unit will give students more opportunities for exercise. 5. The survey shows, the concept of employment of university students, career orientation, policy aspects and so on are characterized by diversity, there are many differences between the different education level, family income, gender,

professional group of University students. This means that the effective employment policy should be based on the subdivision of college students based on the formulation and implementation, consideration should be targeted to the different educational level, family income, gender, major characteristics of the college students, college students employment service coverage to more students. College students employment policy and service system to fully take into account the actual demand of different levels, different characteristics of the groups of College students.

REFERENCES [1] Li Peilin, Chen light gold. Turn back the powers of darkness: Chinese social development to meet new challenges – from 2008 to 2009 China social situation forecast report. Ru, Lu Xueyi, Li Peilin. 2009 China social situation analysis and prediction on. Beijing: Social Science Document Publishing House, 2008. [2] Wu Yiying, Wang Ying. Relationship between college enrollment and employment of graduates of the quantitative analysis of. China employment, 2005, (6). [3] Sun Qingbin university employment policy and employment concept transformation. Journal of Harbin University, 2004, (6). [4] Zhang Han, Guo Shaofeng. Employment because of elitism]. news, 2009-03-02 (4). [5] Wu Keming. The occupation search theory and college students’ voluntary unemployment education science, 2004, (8). [6] Mo Rong. 2008 ∼ 2009 analysis of employment situation and prediction of. Ru, Lu Xueyi, Li Peilin. 2009 China social situation analysis and prediction on. Beijing: Social Sciences Academic Press, 2008. [7] Li Chunling, Wang Boqing. Investigation report on employment and wage level China students. Ru Xin, Lu arts, Li Peilin. 2009 China social situation analysis and prediction on. Beijing: Social Sciences Academic Press, 2008. [8] Mo Rong. 2008 ∼ 2009 analysis of employment situation and prediction of. Ru, Lu Xueyi, Li Peilin. 2009 China social situation analysis and prediction on. Beijing: Social Sciences Academic Press, 2008. [9] Huang Zhongyong, Zhou Jianmin, Chen Lingxia. The evolution of China s employment policy value analysis of theory, 2006, (8). [10] Ji Suping. College students employment gender discrimination phenomenon and the influence factors of Nanjing University of Science and Technology: 2006. [11] Yang Yuanyan. Our country employment policy studies at the 2007 of Wuhan University of Technology, Ji’nan daily press, 2010-02-16.

118

ICIEES_Book.indb 118

4/3/2015 7:08:45 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Research on database education reform for applied talents Chongjun Fan, Yunpeng Yang & Qinglei Zhang Business School, University of Shanghai for Science and Technology, Shanghai, China

ABSTRACT: Database course is a basic and core course in economic management and computer majors. However, the theory is too difficult to understand, resulting non-active, no goal when students learn the theory and technology, ultimately the teaching is ineffective. Implementing Open experiment teaching has important realistic meaning in training applied talents with innovative quality. In university of Shanghai for Science and Technology as an example, this paper explores teaching idea, teaching goal, practice platform, the selection of teaching material, usage of Chinese and English in class, and method of examination in the practice of bilingual teaching in the subject of database system to train applied talents. The research provides the reference for the further database course teaching system reform for applied talents of colleges and universities in China. Keywords: 1

Database Course; Education Reform; Applied Talents

INTRODUCTION

In the early 1980s, database was the core course of computer major in most of the colleges and universities of China. But with the rapid updating and upgrading of the modern communication technology and network technology, database is a basic and core course in economic management and computer majors nowadays. However, the major of Business school training mode is quite different from Computer school. Business school of China is mainly composed by economic management majors towards the goal of applied talents. In business school of university of Shanghai for Science and Technology, information management and information system major is the representation major which expertise covers management, economy and computer classes, and so on, the training target is focusing on the marketing theory and the practice of information technology. As a compulsory curriculum, database is an important bridge between programming language, program design and system development, its teaching quality relates to whether the students can form a reasonable knowledge structure or not in the future. There have been many literatures published for database about the curriculum system, training objectives and teaching mode in recent years [1–10], but more is to discuss the computer specialized curriculum system and teaching mode[1–8], seldom focused on the discussion database course teaching mode of Business school talent training. Some teaching problems have been exposed, such as the theory is too difficult to understand, resulting nonactive, no goal when students learn the theory and

technology, ultimately the teaching is ineffective and so on. Practice has proven that, Open experiment teaching has important realistic meaning in training applied talents with innovative quality. According to the database teaching experience for many years, and combining with many long engaged in database and experienced teachers, this paper explores teaching idea, teaching goal, teaching design, practice platform, the selection of teaching material, the database content and method, using of Chinese and English in class, and method of examination in the practice of bilingual teaching in the subject of database system to train applied talents with the help of the Business school of university of Shanghai for Science and Technology. The research provides the reference for the further database course teaching system reform for applied talents of colleges and universities in China.

2

THE PROBLEM IN DATABASE EDUCATION

2.1 Lacking integration and interaction Database is an application of highly integrated course, curriculum involves the area wide, deep content. The part of theoretical concept is abstract and logical. It is difficult to show the practical application of database technology to students in real case. The result of students can’t integrate the database of each knowledge point, so that students in this course lose interest. Students study in a passive state, poor interactivity between teachers and students. Database has the characteristics, such as comprehensive practice

119

ICIEES_Book.indb 119

4/3/2015 7:08:45 AM

course hours long, high integrated degree, process management, etc. Because of the lack of diversification of teaching methods to mobilize students according to their aptitude interest in learning, students often study in a passive state. In addition, because of the teaching place Scattered, single channel of communication between teachers and students, with one-way communication is given priority to, often hard Collaborative discussions and exchange of learning, interactivity is poor.

visualize. Practicality is a one of the greatest features of database course. Teacher lectures still poured style mode, the lack of teacher-student interaction, it will form a one-way transmission, ineffective teaching. However, in the teaching process, some teachers are still using traditional knowledge for teaching, which can’t keep up with the demands of the times.

2.2

Students’ subject consciousness is not strong, lacking innovation. At present many teachers are still staying in traditional face-to-face imparting knowledge. According to the original class Routine standard teaching plan, students tending to be step-by-step, lack of spirit of independent thinking, and not using creative knowledge to explore and to solve practical problems.

Emphasis on theory, light application

Ignoring the cultivation of the students’ ability of practical application, students are emphasized to understand and grasp the basic theoretical methods. In actual teaching, the teachers’ too much emphasis on the basic theory and method of control, spending too many classes on basic theory and methods, and ignoring the cultivation of students practical skills of database technology, make the students feel the course is too boring and empty, and don’t know how to use these theories and methods to solve practical problems, can’t meet enterprise database applications and technical personnel needs. Too much emphasis on the basic theory and the teaching method of mastery, in too many classes to teach basic theory and methods, and ignore to cultivate students the practical skills of database technology, make the students feel the course is too boring and empty, make the students know how to use these theories and methods to solve practical problems, also cannot meet the needs of enterprise technical personnel on the application of the database. 2.3

Single teaching content and goal

Although there are many database book versions style, teaching material content is outdated, there is a lack of innovation and application contents. Textbook example is the same, such as a variety of related materials are holding student database system, library database systems and some other school management system for case, provides teaching resources too less. And the update teaching content can’t keep up with the project practice requirements change. Because the database technology has the characteristics of fuzziness, complex changes and quick updates, the reasonable, practical teaching materials and teaching Material is very less, updating teaching content was lagged, and did not meet the advanced database technology, even the disconnection. The students can’t understand the powerful function of the Database system. 2.4

Little practical experiment and experience

In the process of teaching practice, the lack of case experimental demonstration can’t make it to

2.5

3

Lack of self-creativity and self-innovation

IMPROVEMENT OF TEACHING CONTENT

3.1 Teaching target Teaching targets decide teaching content and pattern. Development of information techniques makes the companies’ operating circumstances and methods change all the time. As modern manager needs to know the abilities and characters of information techniques or information systems macroscopically, as well as information techniques that how to support the improvement of companies management and accomplishment of implement strategies. Based on such general cultivation target, it can be ensured that the concrete teaching target of Database curriculum is that: make students get to control the related basic principles of database technology, the database system functions and features, have a clear awareness of information and a great ability of information application; make students to have a sufficient understanding of the supportive role of information system information techniques in the information society to the strategies. 3.2 Educational content Teaching model is divided into curriculum system, content and method three aspects. In order to reach the teaching target of database curriculum, it should be modified scientifically and properly and teaching content should be designed. The core of the teaching mode is Curriculum system and Content of the design, and the selection of teaching method is testing the concrete practice of the teaching model design. This course characteristic is widely coverage of knowledge, deeply of content, quickly of change. So before the at the beginning of

120

ICIEES_Book.indb 120

4/3/2015 7:08:45 AM

Figure 1.

The database course content and goal.

course require students must have knowledge of the related disciplines, As the result of that students can have a certain foundation and accept ability. The teaching content and target are shown in Figure 1. 4 4.1

MODIFICATION OF PRACTICAL TEACHING

5

The experiment teaching

PROMOTION OF TEACHING ABILITY

5.1 Diversified teaching methods

The target of this experiment teaching is to instruct students perceptual knowledge database, understand the basic structure and functions of database system, master the use of database system management, train students’ ability of innovation and actual operation. 4.2

this target, case study should substitute for teaching purely principles. Teachers should guide students take advantages of MIS knowledge to analyze and solve practical management problems by connecting principles and practice through case study, to improve the management efficiency, decision making level and profits of business, to make the students have a direct understanding of totally new concept and ways of working brought by information times. Course should include some real practical examples, like database system in some industries, some system’s construction and operation etc., can make them have a direct understanding of database system. In the concrete teaching theory knowledge, it can take examples throughout teaching methods, so that a theory corresponds to a case, guide the students to be positive, profound and systematically solve problems. Database except for the great integration, a strong practical applicability is another characteristic. The practice of course is so important that would be helpful to study and understanding the curriculum. Through practice, students could apply their learned knowledge from curriculum as possible and strengthen their abilities to analyze and solve problems all by themselves at the same time. The practical teaching is shown in Figure 2.

Network-assisted teaching

Database curriculum contains both many relative abstract theories and the wide variety of application background, negative study is difficult to perfectly learn the knowledge. While class discussion and ask-and-answer part which analyze questions on the class is a very efficient method, and this is popular among the database students. At the same time, teachers will find out problems of teaching

Network-assisted teaching is to fully exploit the advantages of the campus network designed for students without limiting the time and place of the dynamic course of study web pages. Online learning modules should be included with course description, syllabus, electronic lesson plans, computer experiments, curriculum assessment and course interaction. It mainly to complete teaching Q, through the network communication, the issues will be raised by the students through online discussion, and providing students with a better practice teaching purposes. 4.3

Case study

When teaching the database theories, this subject should pay attention to cultivating of information awareness, information ability and information character to help student form abilities of applying the curriculum knowledge in practice. In order to reach

Figure 2.

The Diversified Teaching Methods.

121

ICIEES_Book.indb 121

4/3/2015 7:08:45 AM

during the class discussion, what’s more, modify the teaching plans in time. Database technology is the product of information technology and management thought. Not only the introduction of the basic concept of information techniques should be noticed, which dynamically display the whole process of information system development, but more attention should be paid to the mature business management software function and implementation strategy is introduced. And drawing a great many of easy-understanding chart should not be ignored, such as organization structure chart, function structure chart, business process chart, data flow chart and data dictionaries. With modern teaching methods and equipment, taking advantages of information techniques to make vivid multi-media courseware can eliminate abstract and boring sense, while improving their ability by using multi-media instruments in the work. 5.2

Majorization the teacher level

Since the characteristics of the course is comprehensive and strong practicality, coupled with the rapid development of information technology, as the teacher of the course, not only need to have a strong knowledge of computer application ability, but also to have the experience of the development of database system or use essentially, Oracle, Mysql database system implementation experience. And teachers should constantly learn professional development direction and technical trends, more engaged in the professional field of practice. Schools to continuously optimize the teachers’ knowledge structure, age structure, academic structure, build a high level, dynamic adaptation to the development of the teaching faculty team. In this way can meet the needs of the application-oriented talents. Application course teaching should not be confined to the traditional teaching mode, starting from the angle of management talents, and constantly explore new teaching mode, stimulate students interest, cultivate their ability of analysis, problem solving. Teaching methods should be paid attention to by injection to heuristic, discuss and research the change. 6

CONCLUSIONS

With the rapid development of information technology, the requirement of database technology is higher and higher; we should speed up the database of teaching mode reform and the cultivation of applied talents, in order to meet the needs of society. Database teaching has to deal with the relationship between theory and practice; diversified teaching methods are proposed in order to improve students’ comprehensive ability and the quality of education.

One hand, basic concept and content needs to focus on teaching in class. The other hand, as the carrier, network teaching platform expands the form and connotation of classroom, makes the teaching process more open by building an independent and innovative learning platform for the students. The author put forward the improvement ideas and strategy, had verified through practice, the curriculum teaching reform obtained some success, but how to better improve the quality of teaching, the application of the experimental product promotion of students is still a difficult task, also need various efforts. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This research was supported by the key research project of Shanghai Municipal Education Commission of China (No. 14ZZ131) and the research project of university of Shanghai for Science and Technology core curriculum project “database principle”. REFERENCES [1] Xueyong Gu. 2009. Connecting Abstract Theories with Concrete Engineering Skills in the CDIO Learning Cycle. Higher engineering education research 1: 11–23. [2] Xuechan Li. 2008. Database course teaching reform in colleges and universities. Educational criticism. 3: 100–101. [3] Jiayin Chen, Wanchun Guo. 2012. Reform Practice of Database Application Course in Higher Vocational Schools. Vocational and Technical Education 33(14): 31–33. [4] Wenfang Fu. 2011. Discussion on experimental teaching mode of Database principle and application. Experimental Technology and Management 28(8): 291–293. [5] Shan Wang, Sa Shixuan. 2006. Introduction to database systems. Beijing: Higher education press. [6] Keping Yuan, Peizeng Gong, Zhiqiang Yang. 2011. Application and practice innovation of database technology and application course Routine teaching mode. China University Teaching 11: 37–40. [7] Jingsong Gao, Lili Deng, Durui1 Sun. 2003. Design and implementation of internet-based CAI of“Database Theory”. Journal of Central China Normal University (Nat. Sci.) 31(1): 21–24. [8] Yunfang Fu. 2011. Discussion on experimental teaching mode of “Database Principle and Application”. Experimental Technology and Management 28(8): 291–293. [9] Jiadong Teng. 2010. Research on information management and information systems professional characteristic Curriculum construction innovation of finance and economics Colleges and universities. E-Business Journal 12: 75–77. [10] Zhangcheng Lu. 2014. The graduation comprehensive practice teaching mode reform based on the network of professional e-commerce. E-Business Journal 1: 81–82.

122

ICIEES_Book.indb 122

4/3/2015 7:08:45 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The researching of educational technology majors students on the training mode of practical innovation ability Bangze Chen School of Education, Tibet Nationalities Institute, Xian Yang, China

Xiaobo Yang School of Information Engineering, Tibet Nationalities Institute, Xian Yang, China

ABSTRACT: It is not only one of the core objectives in current higher education reform, but also the core content of the teaching reform in higher education to cultivate students’ practical ability in our country. This paper discusses about the training mode of innovative practice ability of students of educational technology, it is proposed about student-centered, construct consciousness, problem oriented, and innovative projects, combined of conventional teaching and personality cultivation, experiment and practice, research and practice of innovation. Keywords: 1

Majoring of Educational Technology; Innovation and Practice Ability; Training Mode

INTRODUCTION

Development of modern science technology and the continuous deepening of the education reforming promoted the rapid development of the modernization of education which is widely used in education through the training of education technology in all kinds of colleges and universities. But it is not perfect enough of the education technology professional training system, especially the practice innovation ability of students is not enough who cannot fully meet the needs of social development, that is a universal problem in our country university and it is more serious in education technology professional. The training target of education technology professional in our school is to cultivate the applied talents having comprehensive development and strong comprehensive quality that mainly oriented to Tibet and other parts, graduates can make a real contribution for the social and economic development in ethnic minority areas. As a result, it is particularly important to cultivate the abilities of practical and innovative of the students. This paper centres on the innovative spirit and innovative ability training of students. It sums up a set of meet the demand of Tibetan society that combined with college students’ psychological and physiological characteristics, improved the comprehensive quality of college students, effective ways, methods and measures of the practice ability and innovation ability training to improve the comprehensive quality of college students

through researching, exploring and practicing about the innovation ability training of the education technology professional students, students’ innovation consciousness, innovation spirit and creative ability can be trained in the period of problem solved and active practice participated in, which enhanced the students’ overall quality obviously, improved all kinds of individual ability better in order to adapt to the requirement of Tibetan society.

2

THE BASIC IDEA OF INNOVATION TALENTS TRAINING

2.1 Methods of cultivating of innovative talents Appling related principle of pedagogy, psychology, and philosophy and education technology and so on, analyzing and researching about the thoughts, work ability, learning and the present situation of the education technology professional students, in order to explore the innovation practice ways and methods of talent training. which proposed and practiced the innovative talent training system which is a main line of students’ innovative spirit and innovative ability,and integrating of fundamental, gradation, systemic into one. It extends the ability of analyze and solve problems in the past which stressed simple to the ability of ask questions further, and rises to the level of innovative education.

123

ICIEES_Book.indb 123

4/3/2015 7:08:45 AM

2.2

Teaching philosophy of cultivating innovative talents established

We researched the characteristics of innovative talents’ knowledge, thinking and ability, dissected the source of students’ innovation ability in order to cultivate innovative talents to serve local economy and social development. We put forward the idea of talent cultivation of thick foundation, strong profession, important practice and multi object, constructed the teaching model from knowledge, ability, quality three aspects set and integrating curricular and extra-curricular, rationale and practical experiment as a whole, highlighted the training of innovative spirit and practical ability. We also put students’ innovation spirit and innovation ability training as main line, highlighted the applicability and technical professional characteristics, inspired the students' innovation consciousness, enabled the students to face the problem, cultivate innovative thinking, and develop innovation ability.

3

INNOVATIVE TALENTS TRAINING SYSTEM OF INTEGRATING FUNDAMENTAL, HIERARCHY AND SYSTEMATIC CONSTRUCTED

It is little accounted of practical teaching in traditional teaching mode so students’ practical ability is not strong, solving practical problems and operational ability skills are poor, the skills of analyzing and solving problem are weaker, the ability of adapting to employment is worse. In order to solve those problems, it put forward the innovative talent training system which is a main line of training the innovative spirit and innovative ability of students and integrates fundamental, gradation, systemic into one. 3.1

Geared to the needs of all students, training hierarchically and foundation solidly ext and indenting

All courses are arranged practice activities for students in the specialized training plan, and innovation consciousness of student is gradually cultivated through the course of “practical experience”, so students not only can learn in order to practice, pay attention to the reality, try to analyze and solve practical problems using the theory, but also innovate in practice continuously. 3.2

Training by stages and ensuring the education innovation continuously

Enabling students to understand the fun and value of practice through the experimental practice and sev-

eral of activities participated in based courses of first year. In second stage students can enter the laboratory with questions or participate in various practice activities of professional courses that students’ ability of focusing on practical and solving practical problems can be trained. And students can put forward some research projects on their own professional course studying and implement under the guidance of teachers which improve their ability as the subject of practice and cultivate innovative consciousness in third stage, It extends the ability of analyzing and solving problems in the past which stressed simple to the ability of ask questions further, and rises to the level of innovative education. So progressive cultivating mode guaranteed the innovative education of student for four years continuously, and the innovation activities was throughout in teaching activities from entrance to graduation. 3.3

All-round and three-dimensional training to encourage students exploring

Strengthen the function of innovative educational through optimizing the content of experiment teaching, increase the intensity of opening laboratory in time and space, from establishing opening laboratory system to cultivate experimental ability and integrated design capabilities. It not only provides practical training opportunities for teachers and students, but also provides conditions for cultivating students’ comprehensive practical and innovation ability through cooperating with a number of companies and establishing the outside-school practice bases. 4 IMPLEMENTATION EXPERIMENT AND PRACTICE TEACHING MODE WHICH TAKING THE STUDENT AS THE MAIN BODY, PROMINENT SPECIALIZED CHARACTERISTIC, INSPIRING INNOVATION CONSCIOUSNESS, CULTURING OF INNOVATIVE THINKING IN PROBLEM ORIENTED AND DEVELOPING INNOVATION ABILITY 4.1

Practice teaching system of the educational technology specialty is integrated and optimized

4.1.1

Strengthen the function of innovation education of experimental and practice We encourages students to work out the experimental solutions better, trains their active analysis and problem-solving ability, practical ability, active exploration of the spirit of research, manipulative ability and the exploration spirit of initiative study. At the same time, expands students’ thinking space, enhances innovation capability by

124

ICIEES_Book.indb 124

4/3/2015 7:08:45 AM

strengthening the innovation education function of the professional practice course and establishing innovative experiment project hierarchically. 4.1.2

Implementing of “open experiment teaching” It is the inner demand of the development of the education to implement open teaching. Opening laboratory where free laboratories and practice learning opportunities are provided for students that attracts students to participate in practical activities actively, cultivates the ability of thinking and exploration, spirit of analysis, stimulates the creativity of students. 4.1.3

Playing the role of outside-school practice base Making full use of all the advantages of resources to improve the practical ability of student together, by constructing outside-school practice base stable, it provides not only the practical training opportunities for teachers and students, but also the condition for training ability of comprehensive practical and innovation of student, which has important significance to improve the quality of practice teaching and cultivate the ability of practical and innovation of student. 4.1.4

Combining the training of young teachers’ professional practice skills with the cultivating of students’ innovation ability Realizing the docking of the professional development of young teacher and the practical activities of student by encouraging young teachers to participate in teaching practical skills program actively which the major of educational technology is related and the teaching practice is combinated closely. At the same time the young teachers use professional knowledge to guide the practice of students that in one hand it strengthens the professional knowledge of young teachers, on the other hand it improves innovation ability the students, which achieves a healthy circle of teaching and practice. 4.1.5

Making full use of the rich resources of out-school, creating more practical chances for students The rich practice opportunities and resources of out-school can encourage students to create more social value using their knowledge which exercised their practice ability at the same time, also contributed to society, enhanced the social adaptability and laid a solid foundation for integrating into society better when they graduated in the future. Students participate in the off-campus practice which can strengthen technical operation and cultivate the innovation practice ability.

4.2

Highlighting the characteristic of specialty and strengthening the cultivation of individuality

4.2.1 Propeller for tasks and competition For all kinds of the students’ innovation activities such as academic competition and practice teaching tasks, leading properly in topics, declaration, implementation, summary and the other, encouraging to participate actively, and cultivating practice innovation ability. 4.2.2

Establishing the platform of scientific research innovation Through selecting the outstanding students who participate in the management of laboratory and scientific research work of teachers, which not only improved the ability of autonomous learning and independent researching, but also solved the problem of lacking of energy of teachers, also combinated the teaching research actively with the cultivation of students’ innovation ability. 4.2.3 Organizing interest groups It will become a common and effective way of learning that based on the personal interest under the condition of information technology. The students can form a volunteered group according to personal interests and abilities, the technical guidance and necessary experimental materials is provided which encouraged the independent development of students, cultivated their ability of group cooperative learning. So the effective communication and learning have been set up between students as well as teacher and pupil, the sharing and development of students’ innovative activities is realized. 5

CONCLUSIONS

The training of innovative ability of the education technology professional students not only directly affects the problem of employment, but also influences seriously to the survival and development of the major. So the colleges should adhere to the educational principle of student-oriented and development-coordinated of knowledge, ability and innovation in the teaching through setting up practical practice system to develop the innovative ability of students, playing the role of the guidance of teachers in education practice, promoting teaching reform, improving the comprehensive quality of students. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This work was financially supported by Tibet nationalities institute plan (09my115): Study on the development of Modern Distance Education

125

ICIEES_Book.indb 125

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

in primary and secondary schools in Tibet, The professional actual practice combat capability improvement plan of Tibet University Teachers of Tibet Province (2012): The educational technology ability training of Tibet primary and middle school teachers Based on the Rural Distance Education Project and the Ministry of Education Research of Social Sciences Foundation projects of China under Grant No. 13XZJA880001. REFERENCES

[2] ZhiaoYi Li, Nov. 2013, Study on construction of practical teaching system with educational technology in newly established local universities, Experimental technology and management Vol. 30 No. 11:182–186. [3] JinFeng Zhou & ChunXian Liang, Dec. 2012, Strategies for Improving Specialty Practice Ability of Local Normal College Students—A case study of Guangxi Teachers Education University, Journal of Guangxi Teachers Education University: Natural Science Edition Vol. 29 No. 4:106–110. [4] JinLiang Zhang, 2011, The Strategy for Fostering Educational Technology Professionals’ Practical Wisdom, Modern Educational Technology Vol. 21 No. 3: 58–60.

[1] Hong Gao, Sep. 2012, On the Cultivation of Educational Technology Majors’ Creative Ability, Journal of Changchun Normal University (Natural Science) Vol. 31 No. 9:128–129.

126

ICIEES_Book.indb 126

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Research on helping employment difficulties of students by department of computer science and software engineering, Jincheng college of Sichuan University Ling Hou Department of Computer Science and Software Engineering, Jincheng College of Sichuan University, Chengdu, China

ABSTRACT: In developing school, every university should pay full attention to employment-oriented development of each student. Whatever outstanding students or stylistic active students, schools should set up the appropriate platform, so that they play a meaningful role, and be demonstrated, especially the employment difficulties faced by the students, they need to be more concerned about. School should take effective measures to them, and help needy students to solve the problems pertinently, and then make them back to normal students. This article took Sichuan University, Jin Cheng College of Computer Science and Software Engineering for example to research helping employment difficulties faced by students. In practical work, we explored a classification for students from poor management, and use the bedroom and class structures difficult for students to demonstrate the platform, practical and effective measures to counselor part-time teacher two fold emotional care models. Keywords: 1

help; employment difficulties; category management; class activities; part-time teacher

ANALYZE THE REASONS FOR EMPLOYMENT DIFFICULTIES FACED BY STUDENTS TO FORM

The formation of the employment difficulties faced by students is a social necessity of the development, social development accidental. It’s not only from the objective nature of the physiological characteristics, but also from the subjective nature, human factors, or derived from the social system, the development of the social structure. Taking Sichuan University, Jin Cheng College of Computer Science and Software Engineering for example, the reasons may from the following “difficulties”: 1.1

First, “adjust difficulty”

It’s usual in our department, especially for freshmen. Because the freshmen from different cities, such as Chongqing, Guizhou, Yunnan, Hainan, have varying family environment, education, upbringing, learning basis of life. Basically the 90 students, to university, learning, lifestyle, natural environment and other aspects of corresponding changes in self-care ability to adapt and adjust capacity is generally weak. For example, they can’t adapt to the collective life, quadruple bedroom per personal per schedule time to bring up at night; substandard school cafeteria food appetite, and

often there is no appetite or rely on instant noodles and bread; in the new campus, the classroom often feel nervous, irritable, and even can no longer stick to it. So if the freshmen can’t adjust to them, they will affect their entire college life, and ultimately lead to employment difficulties. 1.2 Second, “study difficulty” Learning difficulties and setbacks is the most significant to our department. Most students of our department receive deployment of admission, many students find it difficult to adapt to because the content, form and methods of university education, are grossly different from high school and there are great changes, coupled with the professional difficulty resulting in. A large number of studies have shown that poor academic performance is one of the main reason causing the anxiety of college students. Many professional adjust students have learning problems, including learning methods, learning attitude, interest in learning, test anxiety, etc, and they often think of the transfer system or home reread, the psychological feeling of loss, depression, guilt, and the first semester students through the university life so contradictory, and then final exams are affected, in the end students loss more interest and confidence in university life. Jin Cheng College of

127

ICIEES_Book.indb 127

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

Sichuan University Computer Science and Software Engineering knowledge is more difficult, larger and more employment for the professional and technical post, if learning difficulties can not be resolved, and ultimately employment will not to be implemented. 1.3

2

Third, “interaction difficulty”

When students especially for inward and science students access to school, they have to face how to get along with students around, and how to build harmonious interpersonal relationships. Each different life backgrounds, different geographical life, different personality traits, coupled with a lack of communication skills with people, coupled with the inherent adolescent mental atresia, shy and sensitive, so that students inevitably encounter in the process of interpersonal communication various difficulties, resulting in loneliness, confusion and other issues, serious impact on their lives and learning. For example, the tragedy caused by the Ma Jiajue’s event is a typical interaction difficulty, and communication barriers between the students, the negative emotions accumulated over a long place to vent, leading to the final tragedy. It’s necessary to have student employment working environment, and good teamwork is a must. If the exchanges in the University are relatively simple, there will be difficulties. So employment difficulties can be imagined. 1.4

Fourth, “emotional difficulty”

Students in the late physiological youth mature, love and sexual problems can’t be avoided. Under normal circumstances, through study, work, recreational activities and normal social way, students can make the normal release of physiological energy. However, some students due to lack of proper understanding and a scientific attitude, knowledge, lack of mental preparation to sexual maturity, and thus confused and does not apply to their own psychological, unable to grasp the normal scale in dealing with the opposite sex, there emotional problems when at a loss, affecting normal life and study, even employment resistance. 1.5

parents, spontaneity, to avoid competition for jobs; lack of employment interview skills, I do not know how to sell yourself in the job, are unable to show his strength, in the interview process fear, anxiety, and performance disorders.

Fifth, “career difficulty”

Most of these students feel strange and worried about the future career because their professional knowledge is weak, introverted, weak language skills, coupled with their own will be engaged in the IT industry the lack of practical and adequate mental preparation, career development planning Weak awareness of employment, and rely on the idea to be serious, over-reliance on the schools and

HELPING THE EMPLOYMENT DIFFICULTIES FACED BY STUDENTS IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE SCHOOL

In the era of knowledge economy, universities pay more attention to the quality of education. The quality of people from a variety of factors including natural, psychology and social qualities, the lack of any on the one hand can’t be regarded as healthy individuals. Simply imparting knowledge is not knowledge-based economy on the university requirements, focusing on a comprehensive capacity-building of quality education is the key, colleges and universities not only to teach students with the knowledge, but also science, culture, and skills into each student’s abilities and qualities, that is to cultivate students’ creative thinking to solve the problem, the scientific exploration of the spirit of flexibility and capacity factors, while the employment difficulties faced by students is that some members left behind in this process. For college students, college life is a critical period of transition from “school” to “social” individual identity and social role changes, learning enhanced awareness of self-development and lifestyle changes, social expectations improve the social and personal factors, making college students from the body, ideological, psychological, many behavioral changes in their own learning, emotional, psychological, some problems on the exchanges also will be generated to provide them with a variety of dynamic, and they catch up others. School students are the main subject of development, “the student is center of all the work” is always the educational philosophy of the university. In the specific course of their work, schools help poor students through a variety of ways to achieve, both as cultural concepts, but also a social responsibility to direct services difficult, needy students, so that the difficulties students reduce pain, increase the power to provide more convenient conditions for its development, and can early realize the transformation to the normal student. Eventually become useful people to society. 3

HOW TO HELP THE NEEDY STUDENTS

To assist the students for employment difficulties, Sichuan University, Jin Cheng College of Computer

128

ICIEES_Book.indb 128

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

Science and Software Engineering has taken lots of measures to improve this situation. 3.1

Category management

Building systematic helping setup is the basic premise to carry out all work. Firstly, it could change our proactive work into an active way. When we gain our work initiative, we could try our best to resolve the difficult situation at the beginning and provide the most efficient help for our student. Secondly, by combining our supporting programme with other program in the college, it helps us to clarify the relationship between each stage purpose and the final objective. Furthermore, efficient supporting work could be implemented feasibly. Thirdly, the supporting system will be thoroughly implemented in the process of our programme development. As the vulnerable group in the university, it is hard for students with difficulties to obtain their requirements on their own. In order to efficiently help them in this situation, we leaned to them in certain degree when we was setting up and executing the programme. Furthermore, the following aspects were considered: the complexity of difficulty expression, differentiation of grade and gender, enforceability and flexibility of corresponding rules, the range of beneficiary etc. On the future, we will not only continue to complete our diversity existing financial aid system for students in financial difficulty with various scholarship, student loan support opportunities, but also establish aid record for each “difficult study”, based on their request reasons and types, so as to improve the efficiency and systematic structure of our supporting programme. Finally, we could reach our aim which is to feasibly protect the interest of our “difficult student”. 3.2

To guide them by occasions

Laid the foundation of the Jin Cheng College of Sichuan University “three assistants, to the bedroom, classroom activities as a platform to give the” difficult students “full right to discourse the reason of why the poor students were considered is that they are vulnerable groups. They need to be cared, helped, and aided, they are always in the passive position. It make them have not the awareness of take part in some activities, they even don’t have the hunger to express their wishes. They are lack of the abilities to express smoothly and the correct way to express when they want to. And because of they don’t have the authority, when they have the abilities and the right way, they get ignored then can’t be recognized. We give each of them a role to into the games, to explore their potential, let them involve in the organization of the activities.

We want to change the situation of them don’t join in or “be joined in”. Through this, we want to increase the consciousness of them to join the games, we are concentrate more on the cultivation of abilities and offer them the chances, to let them have the opportunities and place to express themselves, we push them study by themselves instead of by others, finally, become a normal college student with super abilities. 3.3

Increase positive emotion supporting

The Jin Cheng College of the University of Sichuan implements multi-management method for students who are both studying the course of computer science and software system and facing employment difficulty. This method is focus on the emotional support and communication. As considering positive communication influence from personal tutor, teacher assistant and parents, we encourage different people frequently to talk with the students after following their study life in the university and share their helps and opinions. Also, we will provide kindly reminds for parents before they talk with their child so as to help the communication go smoothly, for examples, put yourselves on the student’s shoes, try to think on the student’s side, mind the talking method or words you will use etc. Under these, students will feel warm and emotional satisfaction. Hence, by effectively bringing society and family influencing into the method, more people will get to know student’s difficult situation, understand student’s dilemma, show their tolerance and support the students both mentally and physically. Our “supporting program” for the student in difficulty will be established effectively. 3.4

Establish psychological poverty defense mechanism

It’s important to establish psychological prevention mechanism to help student avoid, relieve, and get out of the psychological poverty which is produced by the setbacks. Firstly, do a mental health survey for the new students and establish the files about the poor student in order to know about their mental conditions. And prevent the emergence of the psychological problems and stop the development of the psychological problems. Next, encourage the class committee to pay attention to the poor students, and if they had any problems, report the problems immediately and stop the bad problems at its very beginning. 3.5

Guide the poor student in every kind of forms

Although, we started the job of help poor student once the set foots in our college, because of

129

ICIEES_Book.indb 129

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

the conditions’ changes there also come up with some problems when they get jobs during the period of practice. So, in order to help these students, we strengthen the teaching management and meanwhile, according to the classification of management principle, we strengthen employment guidance, did some researches about the poor students regularly. We can help them solve the problems of employment by talking with their parents, teachers, themselves and recommend some jobs for these students. The establishment of student’s employment difficulty supporting system is a long time job, and we are just at the stage of exploration. Finally, we are going to learn from experience in practice and reach the target of not giving up any student and making most students find good jobs. 4

SUMMARY

The student’s employment difficulty supporting system is a long time project to be finished and we are still at the exploratory stage for the system. However, we have never given up for any chance to improve, learned from the pass employment direction work we took for different grades, revalue our teaching behaviors from the first year student.

Then, we will truly commit to our promise: will not give up anyone, increase student’s employment and seek out the most suitable work experience for our students.

REFERENCES [1] Qian Zaijian, on the Employment of Disadvantaged Groups and Their Social Support Countermeasures; Nanjing University of Technology (Social Science Edition); 2005 03. [2] Liu Yajun, Difficulties and Causes of Employment of College Graduates; Scientific & Technical Information of Gansu (Management Science); 2006 06. [3] Wei Hua, Wu Tang, Application-oriented University Student Employment Difficulties Faced By Factor Analysis And Countermeasures, “Education and career, 11 of 2010. [4] Yang Jinyun, The Reason For The Difficulty Of College Student Employment And Countermeasures, education and occupation, 2010 36. [5] Bai Bing, Students Employment Difficulties Cause Analysis And Guidance strategies,” Health Vocational Education, 2010 11. [6] Yang Zhen, On The Poor College Students Employment Psychological Problems And Counter Measures, “Graduate Employment in 2007”. [7] Peng Dan Ling, General Psychology, Beijing Normal University Press, 2004.

130

ICIEES_Book.indb 130

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Teaching reform of Engineering Thermodynamics for cultivation of innovative talents majored in Thermal Engineering J. Li & X.Y. Wang School of Energy, Power and Mechanical Engineering, North China Electric Power University, Beijing, China

ABSTRACT: Cultivation of high-level innovative talents is of great importance all over the world. Teaching reform must be carried out in the higher education field to achieve this target. This paper investigates the new mode of innovative talents for undergraduates majored in Thermal Engineering by the specialized basic course of Engineering Thermodynamics. The cultivation target, cultivation mode, as well as detailed method of this teaching reform is discovered and analyzed. The main purpose of teaching reform is to promote cultivation quality of innovative talents for undergraduate students. Keywords: 1

Teaching Reform; Cultivation of Innovative Talents; Engineering Thermodynamics

INTRODUCTION

Cultivation of high-level innovative talents is of great importance for in colleges and universities. Hence, teaching reform must be carried out in the higher education field to achieve this target. In the world, different countries attach high importance on the cultivation of outstanding talents. In China, “The outline of the national long-term talent development planning from 2010 to 2020” is drawn up to cultivate world-class top-notch innovative talents in fundamental subject field in China (Chinese Government, 2010). Specifically, Chinese Ministry of Education formulated “Young talents development plan” to activate cultivation program for young talents especially in universities and academies (Ministry of Education, 2012). Innovative talents cultivation is also seriously and highly considered in North China Electric Power University (NCEPU). In 2009, “Innovation Experiment Class Project” is carried out for firstgrade class. Based on ascendant subjects in University, guided by scientific innovation, clued by innovative talents cultivation, this project focuses on the cultivation of top-quality talents with potentials to solve scientific issues and inter-disciplinary talents with solid professional foundation. With the demonstration and radiation effect, this project aims to promote the cultivation quality of university talents substantially. This paper investigates the new mode of innovative talents for undergraduates majored in Thermal Engineering by the specialized basic course of Engineering Thermodynamics, which is Beijing Elite Courses, as well as core course in NCEPU (Li J. 2014a). How to promote cultivation of quality of

talents against main problems occurred in cultivation process of talents, and how to discover new cultivation mode for top-notch innovative talents against special development potentials students, is the significant topic faced by teaching group of Engineering Thermodynamics. Some researches have been carried out on this topic (Qiu W. 2012, You Y. 2014). This paper studies the course construction and teaching reform of Engineering Thermodynamics to promote the cultivation quality of university talents, through which to play a role of guide and demonstration for other specialized basic courses and specialized courses.

2

TARGET OF TEACHING REFORM OF ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS

2.1 Global target of teaching reform The global target of teaching reform is: according to the rule of talents cultivation and successful experiments in oversea universities and academies, push on the course construction and teaching reform of Engineering Thermodynamics in depth. Through the reforms on teaching contents, teaching methods, assessment system, etc., cultivate the students not only solid basic knowledge and skill, but also positive innovative mind, innovative learning method, open international vision, comprehensive quality, and other core abilities. 2.2 Periodical target of teaching reform The phase of teaching reform can be classified into three periodical phases. In the first phase, build

131

ICIEES_Book.indb 131

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

advanced course philosophy and overall design, complete detailed course teaching plans, and collect related course materials. The general plan is essential and very important since it gives the construction direction for the course. Teaching plans and course materials are the foundation of the course. In the second phase, introduce researchbased contents such as forefront of energy and power engineering field, dynamic and optimize course design, strength students’ research innovative consciousness, basic research innovative skills and abilities. The third phase is complete the construction and reform of course innovative system and teaching method reform in the course. In this process, research-based teaching process, such as major work, small paper, class discussion, investigation report, independent experiment, science and technology competition, project research, etc. are carried out completely in the classes of Engineering Thermodynamics course. 3

HOW TO EXECUTE TEACHING REFORM IN ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS

Different methods of teaching reform are carried out in the course of Engineering Thermodynamics, namely as following.

promotion on teaching and research, give spare time and more space for students to discover freely on the interested knowledge, which can effectively improve their attendance degree and recognition degree, as well as their learning confidence. In the mean time, effective guide in class by experienced teacher can improve students’ abilities of propose questions, find questions, and analyze questions during the course study procedure. 3.3

In China, popular teaching mode is examinationoriented education system, namely spoon-feeding education mode causes the loss of activities and interests to pursuit knowledge, and students are cultivated with lack initiative spirit and self-exploration ability. Hence, quality and ability education is emphasized in the course, as well as learning mode and solving problem method, instead of teaching knowledge mechanically. Interests-oriented education mode can fill in desire on knowledge and self-study awareness during learning process. At the same time, projectoriented is also introduced in the course, researchbased project exercises are encouraged to activate students’ research interests. 3.4

3.1

Build advanced course philosophy and overall innovative design

Investigate and use for reference education idea and teaching mode for undergraduate in famous aboard universities. Combined with good existing tradition of the course, specific teaching philosophy for Engineering Thermodynamics is formed gradually. Based on this philosophy, overall innovative design is generated subsequently. This teaching reform method first performed Innovation Experiment Class in NCEPU. Teaching philosophy and overall course design is reflected in all the teaching links, such as classes including supervisor class, lecture class, discussion class. 3.2

Build students-centered and teacher-guided class

Abandon the mode of teacher as center, or class as center, or teaching book as center, perform the reform of teaching mode and teaching method, carry out the education in accordance with student’s aptitude, to achieve diversity development of university students. According to the combination of inside and outside class, the method of jointly

Cultivate innovative consciousness and innovative ability

Perform reform of innovative teaching methods

First of all, strict and complete teaching design is formulated, including teaching plan, course system, teaching mode, teaching methods, course execution procedure project, etc. Strictness, diversity and innovation should be reflected in the teaching design. These are of great importance in the course construction. For examples, seminar class should be flexible, innovative, and cooperative, lecture class should be open, strict, and graceful, discussion class should be free, lively and diverse. At the same time, the essence of research-based teaching process is always reflected in the class, such as major work, small paper, class discussion, investigation report, independent experiment, science and technology competition, project research, etc. are carried out perfectly and completely in the course of Engineering Thermodynamics. 3.5

Cultivate ability of information technology for modern talents

Information technology has been greatly developed in recent years and brings opportunities as well as challenges for university courses. How to effectively

132

ICIEES_Book.indb 132

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

use information technology in traditional course is hot issue faced by higher education. Digital resources for Engineering Thermodynamics include electronic teaching resources: course introduction, course specification, teaching plan, key and difficult problems, exercises in the class, exercised after class, references, PowerPoint presentation, exercise library, example library, lecture library, material library, academic paper library, further reading library, micro teaching voice library, micro teaching video library, etc. (Li J. 2014b). These digital materials can be assisted in the course to provide good learning materials for students and can also create opportunities of self-study, self-explore, and self-create. Besides, network resources such as open courses can enlarge the international vision of talents. 4

CONCLUSION

In this paper, teaching reform of Engineering Thermodynamics for cultivation of innovative talents majored in Thermal Engineering is discussed. The cultivation target, cultivation mode, as well as detailed method of this teaching reform is discovered and analyzed. The main purpose of teaching reform is to promote cultivation quality of innovative talents.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT The research was sponsored by Beijing Teaching Reform Project (Project No. GJJG201404) and Beijing Teaching Co-construction Project. REFERENCES [1] Chinese Government. 2010. The outline of the national long-term talent development planning from 2010 to 2020, http://www.gov.cn/jrzg/2010– 06/06/content_1621777.htm. [2] Ministry of Education. 2012. Ten-year development plan for education informatization from 2011 to 2020. http://www.moe.gov.cn/publicfiles/business/ htmlfiles/moe/s3342/201203/133322.html. [3] Li J. 2014a. Course construction and teaching reform for Engineering Thermodynamics. Teaching reform conference for energy and power specialty in China. Zhenjiang. [4] Qiu W. 2012. Research on teaching reform of Engineering Thermodynamics. Chinese Electricity Education. (21): 62–63. [5] You Y. 2014. Exploration and practice on reform of Engineering Thermodynamics. Chinese Electricity Education. (3): 80–82. [6] Li J. 2014b. Application of information technology in Engineering Thermodynamics. 2014 World Conference on Computer Applications and Information Technology. Dalian.

133

ICIEES_Book.indb 133

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Integration of Kazakhstan postgraduate education into international environment U. Abdibekov, D. Zhakebaev, O. Karuna & Ye. Moisseyeva Al-Farabi Kazakh National University, Almaty, Kazakhstan

ABSTRACT: Kazakhstan’s aiming at becoming a part of the international community representing economy, science and education at the due level, being useful for world has led it to the necessity to change the Republic educational system in accordance with the international requirements and standards. Brief analysis of the systems and indexes of introduction of the Kazakhstan education mechanisms into the international environment is represented. The perspectives of the world education innovation potential development with the participation of the Kazakhstan university science have been specified. The Kazakhstan education system adaptation mechanisms according to education quality requirements of the leading universities of the world have been proposed. Keywords: 1 1.1

educational activities; postgraduate education; PhD; quality; ECTS credits

PROBLEM Transition to the three-stage education system

The Republic of Kazakhstan is one of the first CIS (Community of Independent States) republics took a three-stage system of education—Bachelor, Master and Doctoral studies. After the adaptation period of the new technologies in education, the necessity of its integration into the international education environment arises. 1.2

Modern education in Kazakhstan

Current priorities and prospects of the Kazakhstan’s system of the higher professional postgraduate education as the foundation of the human resource and the creative potential of society development are formed under the influence of the complex uneven and interdependent trends of the evolution of the educational situation in Kazakhstan. One of the important factors is the prevalence of human and other forms of intellectual capital in education, as well as the increasing demand for this kind of the capital in Kazakhstan. Another trend is the increased openness of graduate and postgraduate education, differentiation of knowledge, development of new forms of competition, educational interaction of the subjects at different levels. Essential characteristics of the concept of the modern postgraduate education are flexibility, diversity, availability in time and space. Besides the need in adaptation to changes in professional

activities, the postgraduate education manifested in Kazakhstan as doctoral (PhD) studies is transformed into a process of continuous development of human personality, knowledge, skills, and abilities to make judgments and to take various actions. Quality of the postgraduate education allows to train competitive specialists of new formation, which possesses extensive fundamental knowledge and will be able to adapt quickly to changing labor market demands and technologies. For the development of the graduate and postgraduate education, the credit system of education was introduced in 2005 instead of the traditional system of educational process. The credit system encourages an active independent work of students, provides eligibility of individual educational trajectory, mobility, a greater degree of academic freedom of bachelor, master and doctoral students, supporting the recognition of documents on education in the world educational environment (Nazarbayev 2009). Today domestic universities are provided with significant academic freedom. Researches used in education have been intensified. While research organizations’ participation in the educational process of universities increases, it is important to further improve the mechanism of integration of university and academic science. As a result, this will decrease the gap between the content of education and the current state of science, which did not allow universities to fully transform from training a “specialist” to training a “specialist—researcher” who is able to creatively accept new scientific ideas,

135

ICIEES_Book.indb 135

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

to be a conductor of new technologies and to manage modern technological processes. In the higher and postgraduate education, transition to holistic training system (Bachelor— Master—Doctorate) and opening at the leading universities PhD program in collaboration with leading foreign universities with relevant international accreditation are performed. The new model of scientific and scientific-pedagogical staff, based on the real integration of education and science should be implemented using updated master and PhD programs which optimally combine educational and research components. In the postgraduate education the doctoral education programs should involve scientific and methodological orientation of training and deep specialized training in the appropriate field. The modern system of the postgraduate education should meet the needs of market economy, globalization processes, and recognized international standards. One of the necessary conditions for this is the increasing of young people’s interest in obtaining the academic and scientific degree. This will allow universities to solve the problem of the teaching staff update. The credit system which Kazakhstan accepted in 2005 requires significant restructuring of work of both a teacher and a student. The teacher must constantly take care of his personal professional growth, build his work in the classroom on the interactive teaching methods, have a sufficiently large arsenal of tools and techniques to constantly monitor and adjust the independent work of graduate and postgraduate students, develop their creativity and ability to work to develop their personality. The credit system is primarily such an educational system which is based on a high level of selfeducation and creative adapting knowledge. One of the elements of the educational process under the conditions of education credit technology is the use of score-rating system of evaluating students’ educational achievements. Grading policy should be based on the principles of objectivity, transparency, flexibility and high differentiation. Almost every university has developed its own system of evaluation and distribution of rating points by type of control and by the results of the examination, and the overall rating score for students on a discipline. It should be noted that the main trend of graduate and postgraduate education today is the improvement of quality of specialist training, the development of innovation education integrated with intensive research activities, and the enhancement of educational and information technologies. Therefore, in order to solve this main problem it is necessary to change the technology of the educational process, adapt it to the interests of students,

improve and reasonably combine traditional and interactive forms and methods of teaching.

2 2.1

ADAPTATION Educational technology analysis

Within this study, detailed analysis and review were done of the educational technology in the leading (Times Higher Education World Reputation Rankings) universities in the world such as: 1. Harvard University, United States 2. Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT), United States 3. University of Cambridge, United Kingdom 4. University of Oxford, United Kingdom 5. University of California, Berkeley, United States and others. Since currently the uniting into a single environment of the global economy is relevant, and education is becoming available to citizens of various countries, the need to create identical conditions for education arises (Solt 2009). After performing the analysis of activities of the above universities in the present work an attempt to develop a range of innovations were undertaken that allow to adapt the educational environment of the Republic of Kazakhstan to the global one. At present, on the basis of the Law “On Education” in 2007, the Ministry of Education and Science of the Republic of Kazakhstan has already developed a number of regulations and the project “Long-term education development program until 2020”, which set out priorities, purposes, objectives and mechanisms of improving the education system in our country. It is defined that experimentally introduced in Kazakhstan PhD doctoral programs went through a period of adaptation and have positive results. Some suggestions for improvement of the program, based on the previous analysis of the existing PhD doctoral programs in a number of member-states of the Bologna process, are given below. 2.2

Improving and adaptation mechanisms

International accreditation of Kazakhstan educational programs of bachelor, master and doctoral studies showed that the overwhelming majority of specialties in Kazakhstan absolutely meet international requirements. In this connection, it is possible to conclude cooperation agreements between leading Kazakh and international universities at the state level (Parag 2008), and to carry out the following activities on the basis of these agreements:

136

ICIEES_Book.indb 136

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

− exchange of students and teachers, allowing them to receive the theoretical training in various universities. One can actualize this item by including in the curriculum disciplines offered by foreign partner universities. It is recommended to receive training during the first year of master or doctoral studies, a foreign university being capable to develop a paid summer school for a group of students from the Republic of Kazakhstan or to prepare a program for training during the 1st semester. For this purpose, finance could be allocated from the state budget of Kazakhstan; − distance learning. One can distinguish this method of theoretical training as a separate item. Benefits: lower costs (there is no need to invite foreign experts to the university; there is no need to send a PhD student to a foreign university); training in disciplines of foreign university may be provided at the same time as the training at Kazakhstan university, thus it becomes unnecessary to receive training also in the summer or in the third semester. As a consequence, the next problem that needs immediate solution is the problem of improving the knowledge of a foreign language (English as an international). It is apparent that for successful international cooperation, it is necessary to improve language training of PhD students (Gahungu 2011, O’Hara 2009). For this reason it is recommended to implement the following suggestions: − requirement of sufficient high level proficiency in the English language for admission to master and doctoral studies. It can be done through an entrance exam in English, or by more effective way: it can be demanded from an applicant a certificate testifying a sufficient level of English proficiency (IELTS, TOEFL, Cambridge Certificate of Advanced English, Cambridge Certificate of Proficiency in English, etc.); − introduction to curriculum subjects taught in English, this case not dealing with the disciplines offered by foreign universities but with the training at domestic university. It also requires the presence at the university of appropriate teaching staff which meets the requirements of the English proficiency for PhD courses and creation of an appropriate methodology; − postgraduate education informatization. One of the purposes of the postgraduate education informatization is to create conditions to optimize the learning process by reducing contact hours and classroom work. This increases the amount of time spent on teacher scientific and methodological support of educational process and students’ independent work. Therefore, the informatization appears as not a goal itself but as the most essential condition for improving the quality of

education. The informatization of the education also means a breakthrough in the development of distance learning, the establishment of which is currently hampered by a lack of necessary digital resources in the peripheral universities. Besides, introduction of the distance learning technologies are intended to give positive economic effect, because the demand for getting a second higher education without discontinuing work is estimated from 20% to 30% of the adult population. Information scientific and pedagogical resources of each particular Kazakhstan university should occupy a prominent place in the information environment of Kazakhstan. This will allow universities to become part of the single world information and educational environment.

3

CONCLUSION

Implementation of mechanisms proposed in this paper will allow to create fully competitive medium in the single educational environment, which will significantly affect the development of knowledgebased industries in many countries.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT This research is supported by the Ministry of Education and Science of the Republic of Kazakhstan grant “Development of scientific and methodological basics to improve PhD education programs and specialized training PhD doctoral students” under the priority “5. The intellectual potential of the country, 5.2 Basic and applied research in the field of economic, social and human sciences”.

REFERENCES [1] Gahungu, A. 2011. Integration of Foreign-Born Faculty in Academia: Foreignness as an Asset. The International Journal of Educational Leadership Preparation 6 (1): 1–22. [2] Nazarbayev, N. 2009. Strategiya razvitiya obrazovaniya: Cherez novyi menedzhment—k novomu kachestvu podgotovki specialistov (Education Development Strategy: Through new management to a new quality of training). Almaty: Atamura. [3] O’Hara, S. 2009. Vital and Overlooked: The Role of Faculty in Internationalizing U.S. Campuses. IIE Study Abroad White Paper Series 6: 38–45. [4] Parag, Kh. 2008. The Second World Empires and Influence in the New Global Order. N. Y.: Random House. [5] Solt, F. 2009. Standardizing the World Income Inequality Database. Social Science Quarterly 90 (2): 231–242.

137

ICIEES_Book.indb 137

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

ICIEES_Book.indb 138

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The developmental trends of Tianjin information service industry in international competition context: A content-analysis approach Lin Wang School of Management, Tianjin Normal University, Tianjin, China

YinYin Lou Library of Tianjin Medical University, Tianjin, China

ABSTRACT: This article analyzes the developmental trends of the information service industry in Tianjin in international competition context through a content analysis of the reports on People’s daily since 2000. New and high-tech sunrise industries such as cartoon industry, electronic information and supercomputing are becoming the hot spots of the information service industry in Tianjin. Decisionmakers of corporate in these industries should pay attention to Tianjin city when they make investment decision. Corporate in these industries that choose Tianjin as the business base may get more supports from local government and earn more profits. Keywords: 1

Information Service; Tianjin; Content-analysis

INTRODUCTION

In the dynamic environment of today’s era, international competition shows a dynamic, complex and interactive feature [1]. To seize the information service industry has been an important trend and a new economic growth point of modern service industry with its unique advantages [2] in the era of knowledge economy under the international hyper competitive environment. With the construction of Tianjin Binhai New Area being included into the overall national development strategy, the social and economic development in Tianjin is entering the crucial period of strategic economic structural adjustment. [1]. Thanks to the policy advantage, Tianjin has good infrastructures and first-class commercial environment for the development of information service industry. Systematic analysis of the developmental trends of the information service industry in Tianjin is favored to take advantage of the information service industry in Tianjin, to improve the efficiency of the industry in Tianjin, to optimize its economic structure, and thus effectively enhance the industry core competitiveness in Tianjin. 2

CONTENT ANALYSIS OF THE INFORMATION SERVICE INDUSTRY IN TIANJIN

Information service industry is a complex of specialized industries that produces information,

collect information, process information, store information, transmit information, retrieve information and make use of information by means of the modern science and technology such as computers and communication networks, and provide information services to the society in the form of information products. There are three kinds of information service industry: information transmission service industry, IT service (IT services) industry and information resource industry, which mainly refers to the information content industry. There is a lot of business concerning information service industry, including system integration, value-added network service, database service, consultation service, maintenance training, electronic publishing and exhibitions [3]. Modern information service industry, that is, electronic information service industry, mainly includes information, processing information service, software, consulting, and network information service [4]. 2.1 Data collection We searched the full-text database of major newspapers in China of CNKI (China National Knowledge Infrastructure) from August 17, 2012 to August 20, 2012 (search time). Because People’s Daily is the most widely read, the most authoritative and the most influential national newspaper in China, We chose People’s Daily as the source of publication and limited the time: 2000–2012.

139

ICIEES_Book.indb 139

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

2.2

Data analysis

After exact matching, we got the search results and deleted duplicate documents and got 681 reports finally. These 681 reports were indexed. We calculated the indexed terms, collected synonyms, deleted irrelevant words and got 40 subject headings. Then we calculate the word frequency and arranged these subject headings according to word frequency from high to low. The top 20 high frequency subject headings are as below: Electronic Information (77), Consultation (49), Information System (32), Network Information Technology (26), Computer Software (25), Electronic Communication (19), Network Platform (13), Network Platform (13), Supercomputing (12), Network Information Service (11), Non-network Information Service (10), Database (9), Gene Chip (7), Training (7), Agricultural Information (6), Information Resources (6), Network Literature Service (6), Information Processing (6), Cartoon (6), E-government (5), Integrated Circuits (IC) (5). Co-occurrence frequencies of these top 20 subject headings in the 681 reports were calculated and results an original 20 × 20 co-word matrix. The matrix is a symmetric matrix. Data on the diagonal are the frequency of the subject headings, and data which are not on the diagonal is the co-occurrence frequency of the two subject headings. The original co-word matrix is the observed value of co-occurrence frequency. Co-occurrence frequency is directly affected by the respective frequency of the two subject headings. In order to eliminate the effect of difference in absolute value of the original co-word matrix and reveal the actual co-occurrence relationship between the subject headings, we used Salton coefficient [5] that indicates the relative strength of co-occurrence of the subject headings to standardized dispose of the original co-word matrix and get the standard coword matrix. Standard co-word matrix is shown in Appendix. We made a multidimensional scaling analysis of the standard co-word matrix by using SPSS11.5 software and got the strategic coordinate graph of subject headings. The coordinate graphs can relatively and intuitively reveal the structure of a research field. It takes the average of all the twodimensional arrays (centrality and density) as the origin and divides all the factors into four quadrants. Factors falling into different quadrants have different meanings. Strategic coordinate graph is a two-dimensional coordinate system with centrality and density as parameters, in which, the X-axis is centrality, the Y-axis is density. Density is used to measure the strength of the internal relationship between the factors, which indicates the ability of the factors

Figure 1. Strategic coordinate graph of subject headings.

to maintain and develop themselves. Centrality is used to measure the degree of interrelationship between one factor and the other factors. The larger the centrality is, more closely one factor and the other factors are related and the closer to the center of this structure the factor is. Strategic coordinate graph of subject headings is shown in Figure 1. Figure 1 shows that both the centralities and the densities of information system, training and agricultural information in the first quadrant are larger, that is, they have a close internal relationship and they are in the center of the research structure; the densities of cartoon, electronic information and supercomputing in the fourth quadrant are smaller, that is, they have loose internal structure and the research in these areas is not yet mature, while the centralities of cartoon, electronic information and supercomputing in the fourth quadrant are larger, that is, they are closely related to others in the structure and may become the research focus in the future; network information technology, electronic communication, gene chips and network literature service in the second quadrant are on the edge of the research; database, network platform, and consultation in the third quadrant are far from the research focus and densities of database, network platform, and consultation in the third quadrant are not larger, that is, the research in these areas is not yet mature and they are not the research focus yet. 3

CONCLUSION

This article analyzed the current state and trends of the information service industry in Tianjin through a content analysis of the reports on People’s Daily since 2000, revealing that digital cartoon electronic information and super computing industry have become the development focus of Tianjin information service industry. Decision-makers of corporate in these industries should pay attention to Tianjin city when they make investment decision.

140

ICIEES_Book.indb 140

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

ICIEES_Book.indb 141

Table 1.

Standard co-word matrix (Part 1).

141

Electronic information Consultation Information system Network information technology Computer software Electronic communication Network platform Super-computing Network information service Non-network information service Database Gene chip Training Agricultural information Information resources Network literature service Information processing Cartoon E-government Integrated circuits

Consultation

Information system

Network information technology

Computer software

Electronic communication

Network platform

Supercomputing

Network information service

Non-network information service

1

0.0162801

0

0.134097

0.113961

0.156866096

0.031607

0.032898

0.03436

0

0.0162801 0

1 0.1515229

0.1515229 1

0 0.1733438

0 0.176777

0 0.202776776

0.039621 0.245145

0 0

0.129219 0.213201

0 0.167705

0.134097

0

0.1733438

1

0.196116

0.089984254

0.054393

0.169842

0

0.062017

0.1139606 0.1568661

0 0

0.1767767 0.2027768

0.1961161 0.0899843

1 0.183533

0.183532587 1

0 0.063628

0.057735 0

0 0

0 0.072548

0.031607 0.0328976 0.0343604

0.0396214 0 0.1292191

0.2451452 0 0.2132007

0.0543928 0.1698416 0

0 0.057735 0

0.063628476 0 0

1 0 0.083624

0 1 0

0.083624 0 1

0 0.091287 0.095346

0

0

0.1677051

0.0620174

0

0.072547625

0

0.091287

0.095346

1

0.0379869 0.1722922 0 0.0465242

0.0952381 0 0.1079898 0.1166424

0.1767767 0 0 0.1443376

0 0.1482499 0.0741249 0

0.066667 0.377964 0 0.08165

0 0 0 0.093658581

0 0 0 0

0 0.109109 0 0

0.100504 0 0 0.123091

0 0 0.119523 0

0.0930484

0.0583212

0

0.0800641

0.08165

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0.0800641

0

0

0

0.235702

0

0.258199

0 0 0.1019294

0 0 0

0 0.1581139 0

0.1601282 0.0877058 0.1754116

0 0.089443 0.268328

0 0 0.102597835

0 0 0

0.353553 0.129099 0.129099

0 0 0

0 0.424264 0

Electronic information

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

ICIEES_Book.indb 142

Table 1.

Standard co-word matrix (Part 2).

142

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

Electronic information Consultation Information system Network information technology Computer software Electronic communication Network platform Super-computing Network information service Non-network information service Database Gene chip Training Agricultural information Information resources Network literature service Information processing Cartoon E-government Integrated circuits

Information resources

Network literature service

Information processing

Cartoon

E-government

Integrated circuits

Database

Gene chip

Training

Agricultural information

0.037987

0.172292

0

0.046524

0.093048

0

0

0

0

0.101929

0.095238 0.176777

0 0

0.10799 0

0.116642 0.144338

0.058321 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0.158114

0 0

0

0.14825

0.074125

0

0.080064

0

0.080064

0.160128

0.087706

0.175412

0.066667

0.377964

0

0.08165

0.08165

0

0

0

0.089443

0.268328

0

0

0

0.093659

0

0

0

0

0

0.102598

0 0 0.100504

0 0.109109 0

0 0 0

0 0 0.123091

0 0 0

0.113228 0 0

0 0.235702 0

0 0.353553 0

0 0.129099 0

0 0.129099 0

0

0

0.119523

0

0

0

0.258199

0

0.424264

0

1 0.125988 0 0

0.125988 1 0 0

0 0 1 0

0 0 0 1

0.136083 0.154303 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0.507093 0 0

0.136083

0.154303

0

0

1

0.166667

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0.166667

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0.333333

0

0

0 0 0

0 0 0.507093

0 0 0

0 0 0

0 0 0

0 0 0

0.333333 0 0

1 0 0

0 1 0

0 0 1

Corporate in these industries that choose Tianjin as the business base may get more supports from local government and earn more profits. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT This article is an achievement of youth project of Chinese National Social Science Fund “Research on influencing factors and search patterns of SME managers’ information behavior”.

[2] Chen Yu, Lu Yong, Yang Bo. Analysis of the competitiveness of the information service trade in Jiangsu and the strategy for improvement. Practice in Foreign Economic Relations and Trade, 2011, 12:86–88. [3] Information service industry. Retrieved August 3, 2012, http://baike.baidu.com/view/71931.htm. [4] Xu Guangkui, Sun Yumei. Comparative study of the traditional information service industry and the modern information service industry. Information and Documentation Services, 2001, 4:67–69. [5] Zhou Yue. Bibliometric analysis of journal papers about domestic library cultural theme. Journal of the China Society of Indexers, 2012, 2:13–19.

REFERENCES [1] Lou Yinyin. Research on the core competence of universities or colleges in Tianjin oriented to the development of Binhai New Area. Tianjin: Tianjin Normal University, 2009.

143

ICIEES_Book.indb 143

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Investigation of female college students’ dormitory interpersonal relationship—taking Chongqing Normal University as an example Na Zhong Chongqing Normal University, Chongqing, China

ABSTRACT: The dormitory is a main place for college students to study and live in, that is to say, a good interpersonal relationship in dormitory influences the mental and physical health of college students directly. Generally speaking, the interpersonal relationship of female college students is often with some characteristics. In this paper, I choose some female students of Chongqing Normal University to finish my research, and analysis the factors, which influence them to handle their interpersonal relationship, from the following aspects: different grades, different family backgrounds, and different lives. Of course, about how to deal with these problems on interpersonal relationships, and I also put forward some measures for them. Keywords: 1

Female college students; Dormitory; Interpersonal relationship

INTRODUCTION

2.2 The methods of research

To the contemporary college students, the dormitory is not only a sleeping-place; a well interpersonal relationship in dormitory has a great effect on study, and physical and mental health. The related survey indicates that the interpersonal relationship in dormitory is harmonious, most of the students can handle the problems they meet on interpersonal relationship, and this shows the maturity of college students’ maturity. For the particular physiology and psychology of female college students, the interpersonal relationships of them have much more influence on their college life than the other people. There are some undesirable interpersonal relationship comes out among the female college students, this not only brings some difficulties for the school management, but it also takes some disadvantages for the development of the students. In this paper, I analysis the factors which influence the interpersonal relationship from the following three aspects: different grades, different family backgrounds, and different life styles. And I also put forward some measures to deal with this. 2 2.1

THE SUBJECTS AND METHODS The subjects of research

In this paper, I choose some female undergraduate students from freshmen, sophomores, juniors and seniors from Chongqing Normal University as the subjects of this research.

The main method of this research, I used the questionnaire method and comparative analysis method. The questionnaire method contains two parts: Closing and opening (35 items of uncertain choice and an opening question). About this research, I gave out 300 questionnaires and 295 gave back, apart from 22 invalid questionnaires, there are 273 valid questionnaires left. The effective percentage of the questionnaires is about 91%. 3

RESULTS OF THE RESEARCH

The subjects of the research come from different grades, different majors and different families, therefore this paper analysis the factors which influence the interpersonal relationships in the female dormitory from the three aspects. 3.1 Differs in grades The research indicates that the communications and interpersonal relationships of different grades have different characteristics. First, seeing from the rate of dormitory time and the leisure time, the higher the grade is, the less time they will stay in the dormitory, apart from the sleeping time, the higher the grade is, the less time they will stay in the dormitory on average. Among the freshmen, about 68% of the female students stay in the dormitory more than 5 hours everyday, the sophomores about 43%, while the juniors only have 20% and

145

ICIEES_Book.indb 145

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

the seniors only have 5%. Second, seeing from the point of solving contradictions, there are great differences of the methods on dealing with problems of different grades. The freshmen and sophomores take the “speak-out directly” as the main method of dealing with the problems (the freshmen take 43% and the sophomores take 54%). While the seniors and juniors are a little euphemistic and implicit, they take QQ, message and some other indirect ways as the mainly handling methods (seniors take 41% and juniors take 52%). We can see something from this phenomenon, the older the students, the more maturity and modest they will be, they tend to handle problems they meet with indirect ways and avoid the confrontation. 3.2

Differs in families

The research shows that: the family backgrounds have great influences on the dormitory interpersonal relationship. In this research, about 71% of the female students think that the differences of family have great influence on the dormitory interpersonal relationship, 18% think the family backgrounds have little influence and 11% think no influence. First, seeing from the condition of family economy, there is a difference on poor and rich among female college students. The richer may have more available resources than the others, and they may have a happier life, and more gregarious. While, the female students from economically disadvantaged families are always conscious, and mental stress is relatively larger. This also led the rich and the poor have nothing to talk with. Second, seeing from the difference between urban and rural, the girls from urban have advantages on interpersonal relationships, while the rural girls seem to have the few resources of interpersonal relationship, especially the confidence and opening on interpersonal relationships, the urban female college students are more confidence and more opening, they show more selves when meet divergence. Third, seeing from whether the student is one-child in her or his family, the only child has been the main part of college education. The only child of a family shows great dependence on their parents, after leaving their parents to the college, the various defects of ability gradually exposed, tensions in the relationship problems are more and more prominent, when they are dealing with others, they also behave more self, and the other part students are more caring to others. 3.3

Differs in living

The research shows that different life style is one of the most important factors of influencing the interpersonal relationships.

First, the different rest time conflict caused by the different rest time is one of the most common factors of interpersonal relationships in dormitory. About 78% of the female college students think all the students should fall asleep before 12 at night, and 13% of the female college students live a healthy life, which require them to get up and go to bed early (they often go to bed at 10:30, and get up at 7:30), and about 9% of the female college students think they insist on their own time on the condition that they have no influence on their roommates. From this research, we can see that it is difficult for the students who come from different cities to keep the same rest time, it is hard for people to change a habit which is formed in a long time in a short time, what’s more, the female students always have exquisite psychological characteristics, therefore, the contradictions among female college students are unavoidable. Second, the different habits on hygiene. In the research, we can see that, about 61% of the female college students think the hygiene conditions of the dormitory has a great effect on the interpersonal relationships, 29% think this just has a little effect, and the rest 10% of the female college students think it has no impact on the interpersonal relationships. While on solving the hygiene of dormitory, about 84% of the female college students take the ‘on turn’ way to clean the dormitory, only 16% of the female college students do the clean on their own. There is another survey shows that, the most intolerable details in the dormitory are the following: personal hygiene, foot odor, not clean the dormitory hygiene, snoring, answer the phone at rest time, different views on turning on or off the light and fan, coming back to dormitory lately, taking the strangers to the dormitory, using the other’s things without permission. To the problem of changing living habits belongs to all the members in the dormitory, about 65% of the female college students show disagree, and only 3% of them take no sense on it. 4

SUMMARY OF THE RESEARCH

From the above analysis, we can see that the interpersonal relationship in the female dormitory of college is harmony. From the vertical perspective, in terms of interpersonal perception, the freshmen have the highest harmony interpersonal relationship than the other grades, and the lower grades take a positive to the interpersonal relationships. Most of the time, they can respect and take care of each other. While on the solving of handling contradictions, the higher the grade, the lower communication, and the initiative will be lower too. Although the interpersonal

146

ICIEES_Book.indb 146

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

contradictions exist in every grade normally, the female students of Grade One are the most positive when handling the interpersonal contradictions. From the lateral view, as the factors of influencing the dormitory interpersonal relationships, family economic status, living area, living habits and individual differences in personality are more or less becoming the factors of influencing the interpersonal relationships. However, most of the female college students are able to take a positive attitude to deal with the interpersonal contradictions and problems. With the growing of age, the thoughts of female college students become maturity gradually, so they can find more reasonable and effective ways when dealing with the dormitory interpersonal relationships. 5

IMPROVING STRATEGY

5.2

Although there are many kinds of contradictions in the female dormitory, generally speaking, these are changeable. If we want to improve the undesirable interpersonal relationships among female college students, we need to know about the characteristic of them and take measures, cultivate their favorable interpersonal relationships ability. We can do this from the following aspects. 5.1

series of students’ activities, strengthen the cohesion and the sense of honor on the dormitory. For example, carry the health assessment activities dormitory, civilized quarters competitions, dormitory culture festival and so on. At the same time, the school can also hold some groups activities, such as choral competition, tug of war and so on. This kind of activities emphasize the cooperation and mutual aid, by encouraging the dormitory members collective participation, all members will be built into the team cooperation, it will gradually cultivate the students’ team spirit and collective sense. We can see from the research, during the group activities, roommates will get respects, understandings and cooperation, easy to be imperceptibly to produce lubricating effect relationships quarters to complete the cultivation of healthy personality.

School

The school should pay attention to and strengthen the management in the girls’ dormitory, take the interpersonal relationships of the female college students as the key point of ideological and political education in university, from the working mechanism, working team, designing of courses and other aspects. First, take the dormitory as the important base of ideological and political education. For example, build up a consultation room around the dormitory, arrange professional counselors, set up the right time for the girls, so as to provide channels for resolving contradictions bad relationships; Second, improve the system of instructors live in the dormitory. The instructors should go into the dormitory regularly, only when the instructors go into the female dormitory, can the instructors find out the dormitory problems, know about the ins and outs of the dormitory and take right measures to handle the practical problems, avoid the contradictions deeper. Third, in order to help them improve their interpersonal skills, school should open courses specifically for female college students’ interpersonal communication and guide the female college students to deal with the dormitory relationship scientifically. Strengthen the construction of the second classroom. Take the dormitory as unit, developing a

Family

Parents should take the initiative to establish an effective mechanism for parents to communicate with school. Through the above investigations, differs in family is an important factor of influencing the girls’ interpersonal relationships in college dormitory. So parents take an important part in the handling interpersonal relationships of female college students. Parents should change their Utopian wish on children’s education, changing the “talent” education into “human” education. Especially for the students who have entered into college, they have grown to be maturity not only in physiology, but also in mental health, they have independent thoughts. Parents must be based on the growth of the age and change the way for the past education, and take the “people-oriented” education in science. For instance, before the end of every school holidays, parents should teach children some fundamental principles of handling the relationships with other people and remind them regularly. With the growth of age, the children’s thoughts become more maturity; these basic principles will be better understood and made into their own thoughts. During the learning term, both teachers and parents should give more attention to the children, help them to build and improve their interpersonal relationships, and timely feedback. Schools and parents should establish an effective communication mechanism, so we can know the information of students at any time. 5.3

Students themselves

First, as a female college student, one should strengthen their self-cultivation, cultivate their own collective consciousness, and develop healthy habits. For example, make a regular rest time, keep the dormitory clean, not speak loudly when the others

147

ICIEES_Book.indb 147

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

are sleeping, and not use the others’ things without permission. Second, the students should establish healthy interpersonal concepts. This requires the female college students’ view the individual difference directly, learns to understand others, learn to see things from the other people’s vision, and learn to transposition thinking. Third, learn to the needed interpersonal communication knowledge and skills. In our daily life, learn to contact with others activity. If one needs to express his different views, one should choose the right time and proper tone, meanwhile, one should take positive attitude to the contradiction he meet, and do some efficient communication, this can finally resolve conflicts effectively. 6

CONCLUSION

The poor dormitory interpersonal relationships has a great influence on the college students’ study and life, it may hinder the female college students’ physical and mental developing healthy. As a college teacher, it is our responsibility and obligation to help the female college students to deal with the

problems they face. And, I believe, as long as we think highly of this kind of problem, and deal with it correctly, cultivate the knowledge and skills on communication of the female college students and try to seek for the measures to control this kind of problem, we are able to help them to improve their interpersonal relationships and guide them to seek a better future. REFERENCES [1] Chuanxin Xu. 2005. Research on college students’ dormitory interpersonal relationship quality. Study of contemporary youth 05(4):42–44. [2] Lianhai Wu, Quanmei Gu. 2008. The current college students’ dormitory interpersonal basic factor characteristic analysis. The spirit of the medical journal 08(6):442–444. [3] Yangjun Tu. 2007. The analysis of the cause of the influence college students’ dormitory interpersonal relationship analysis. Journal of Huazhong Normal University graduate 07(4):53–56. [4] Jianfeng Yang. 2009. Female college students’ dormitory interpersonal relationship status quo analysis. Lishui university journal 09(6):98–100.

148

ICIEES_Book.indb 148

4/3/2015 7:08:46 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Research on education reform and practice of Ergonomics based on the teaching idea of progressive cross-modular L. Lin & M.Q. Yang Mechanical Engineering School, Guizhou University, Huaxi, Guiyang, Guizhou Province, China

ABSTRACT: In order to reach the requirement of the practical property of the Ergonomics and the demand for application-oriented talents in today’s society, this paper presents a teaching idea of progressive cross-modular of Ergonomics to train the application-oriented talents. This education reform is oriented by application of theoretical knowledge and organized by design practice. Furthermore, progressive learning chain is established by the close connection of each modules, that is “theoretical knowledge learning module” to achieve theoretical study, “design example learning module” to achieve application of theory, and “innovative design practice module” to achieve application and innovation of practice. At same time, the “participation learning module” is interspersed in the learning chain. Therefore, the original learning mode of “passivity, dependence, and unicity” of Ergonomics has gradually shifted to a modern learning mode of “initiative, diversity, experience, and practice” by education reform of Ergonomics. This education reform and practice have an important theoretical significance and practical value on cultivation of application-oriented talents, and it provides a reference for other universities as well as the teaching of other similar courses. Keywords: 1

Ergonomics; education reform; industrial design; progressive cross-modular teaching ideas

INTRODUCTION

Modern “Ergonomics” is a discipline with extraordinary practicalness and a main course in industrial design, it solves the problem of human-centered engineering technologies, theories and data which are very important in the basic theory teaching of industrial design. The purpose of this discipline is to create pleasant human-machine-environment system based on the physiological and psychological features of human and it researches the relationships of the various factors that belong to the “human-machine-environment” system by applying systematic and scientific theory and method. The factors of human are the main design principles in Ergonomics and then provide a theoretical basis and methods to design product (machine), which is easy to operate, safe, and comfortable. It is the required course for industrial design students to enter the professional comprehensive training of product design, graphic design, environmental design, and exhibition design. Its discipline ideas, research methods and research processes provide thinking route and direction of design, it enables designers to understand design and find design opportunities in a more rational way, and thereby designers can correct and innovate their design according to the Ergonomic principles. Therefore,

as an independent course unit, the Ergonomics assists in a number of professional design courses, meanwhile, the effect of teaching of Ergonomics is directly related to the effect of teaching of other professional design class curriculum[1] and the effectiveness of the cultivation of the applicationoriented talents. In the past, many Chinese colleges adopt instilling way to teach theoretical knowledge, there is few design examples which are application for theoretical knowledge, still lack of initiative learning process that student participated in and important design application. This situation occurs in teaching because of the lack of awareness on “Ergonomics” teaching sufficiently and traditional teaching concepts influenced today's teaching mode [2]. Thus, students accept boring theory knowledge passively, and they can not feel the fun of learning and can not realize the importance of the course on guiding the follow-up design courses. More important, on the one hand, students can not deeply understand theory knowledge, on the other hand, they can not combine theory and practice together. And this condition eventually caused an armchair strategist. Therefore, the teaching of ergonomic far not reached the proper value and role for design specialty that stressed creativity and practice. In order to train application-oriented talents effectively and

149

ICIEES_Book.indb 149

4/3/2015 7:08:47 AM

play the due role of this course, there is only one way by designing the reasonable thought of teaching, establishing property content of teaching, innovating methods of teaching, intensifying the teaching of practice to achieve the target of training application-oriented talents. 2

THE TEACHING IDEA OF PROGRESSIVE CROSS-MODULAR

The teaching idea of progressive cross-modular is the core idea of the teaching reform of “Ergonomics”. As shown in Figure 1. This teaching idea is oriented by the application of theory knowledge, and the purpose of teaching in this teaching idea is a design practice. Progressive learning chain is established by the close connection of each modules, that is “theoretical knowledge learning module” to achieve theoretical study, “design example learning module” to achieve application of theory, and “innovative design practice module” to achieve application and innovation of practice. Then the “theoretical study”-“application of theory”-“application practice”-“practice innovation” progressive learning chain is built through the implement of teaching idea of progressive cross-modular. In the progress from theory to practice, the “participation learning module” is interspersed in the learning chain. This teaching idea of progressive cross-modular converts passive learning to active learning mode effectively, and changes the status that students accept knowledge passively in regular Ergonomics teaching.

Figure 1.

Beside, “practice in learning, learning in practice” learning concept[3] is implemented by the progressive learning chain. Meanwhile, this kind of learning chain makes teachers to grasp the teaching task and the key points in the teaching of each module easily, and insure the quality and effect of teaching. At the same time, the “interactive learning module” can improve students’ interest in learning and improve their learning outcomes. 3

THE REFORM OF TEACHING CONTENT BASED ON “THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE LEARNING MODULE”

Recently in China, the course of Ergonomics is not only offered by the subject of industrial design, but also by the specifies of vehicle engineering, safety engineering, road and bridge, management, art, machinery, packing, electronics, industrial engineering, decoration engineering, and so on. The emphasis of each textbook for each profession is a bit different because the requirement of each profession is discrepant. For industrial design, Ergonomics focuses on safe, comfortable, and efficient design based on human physiological and psychological, and to establish a harmonious relationship between human and machine. Based on this, in this education reform, the teaching content have been integrated, refined, additions and deletions based on the original course content. For example, similar content or parts of similar nature are grouped together, the chapters and contents which have

The sketch map of teaching ideas of progressive cross-modular.

150

ICIEES_Book.indb 150

4/3/2015 7:08:47 AM

large deviation with the property of industrial design have been deleted properly, and frontier knowledge of Ergonomics have been introduction and update dynamically in time. For the arrangement of teaching content of this education reform, the original chapters have been rearranged, which start from the relevant contents where the students have life experience, step by step from the familiar to the unfamiliar. For instance, work seat is a kind of stuff that is experienced by each student, the design of work seat belongs to the learning content of sixth chapter under the original arrangement, now it brings to second chapter, and the “human” factors related to the design of work seat will be learn combining the knowledge of human measurement data. Such content arrangement make students to build a familiar sense when they contact to the theory knowledge of this subject first time, make students to understood clearly that this course is close related on actual life, thereby remove the feeling of strangeness of this course and the fear sense of theory knowledge learning, help students to establish the learning interest. 4

TEACHING METHODS REFORM BASED ON THE “DESIGN EXAMPLE LEARNING MODULE”

Industrial design training goal is to develop the industrial design professionals with innovative design capabilities. Therefore, the application of Ergonomics is the focus of teaching. This education reform transforms theoretical knowledge into a design example in order to better integrate Ergonomics knowledge into practice. The teaching method of example has a positive effect to help students deepen their understanding of theoretical knowledge, and clear-cut the value of knowledge. The members of the education reform trying our best to find a variety of related design examples, and a conscious arrangement and re-designed to highlight the related theoretical knowledge. The boring theory knowledge can be converted into a variety of well-known examples around students. Arrangement for the teaching content and teaching organization have brought out the new trend of teaching that is the “theory explain-centered” teaching change to the “example studies-centered” teaching[4]. This arrangement not only can more effectively improve teachers’ teaching initiative, but also can reduce students’ boring sense of theoretical knowledge. And it is value to improve the effectiveness of teaching and learning. In addition, students can find human-computer problems which exist in real life by “design example

learning module” learning, and their ability to identify problems, analyze problems and problem-solving can be improved by analyzing human-computer problems. 5

PRACTICAL TEACHING REFORM BASED ON THE “INNOVATIVE DESIGN PRACTICE MODULE”

The “innovative design practice module” consists of a series of periodical small design projects and a comprehensive big design project. The innovative design practice is the last link in the whole learning chain. And the purpose of the innovative design practice is to progress students’ talent to apply the knowledge learned form this course to the design practice after each section of the theoretical study. For teachers, they will be able to discover whether students have mastered the knowledge learned through the implementation of the periodic small design projects. For students, they can solve the problems which they meet in their life by applying the theoretical knowledge of Ergonomics. Therefore, the stage of innovative design practice is very important to students to realize that the creative design source is not found so difficult as imagine and they have capability to dispose of the difficult in life by design. These experiences help students to build a concept that creativity is “simple”, and design is “happy”[5]. Comprehensive big design project is the final step after a series of periodical small design projects have been finished. This step integrates all dispersive and independent knowledge into a comprehensive design emphasizing on innovation. This step not only helps students to further comprehend the theoretical knowledge, but also strengthen their practical ability and innovation capacity. 6

REFORM OF TEACHING METHODS BASED ON THE “PARTICIPATION LEARNING MODULE”

Example teaching, practice teaching, and participation teaching reflect the diversification of teaching methods. Participation teaching has become an indispensable part of modern teaching. Therefore, the “participation learning module” was introduced into teaching reform. First, teachers choose appropriate teaching content and design participation way. Second, teachers as facilitator to enable students to participate in interactive games which contain theoretical knowledge of Ergonomics. There is a reminded that teachers must hold a good time, the interactive games can not take up

151

ICIEES_Book.indb 151

4/3/2015 7:08:47 AM

too much teaching time. Finally, teachers should explain theoretical knowledge combined with interactive results timely. For example, one of the interactive games is to simulate school registration process for freshmen. First, the NO.A receptionist guide freshmen fill out a form. Then the NO.A receptionist is replaced by B when the NO.A receptionist bent over to pick up another form to freshmen. Next, NO.B receptionist gives freshmen another form and talks them the game is over. Finally, all students participating in this game are told to describe what they find in the game. Teachers explain the knowledge of human perception that implied in this interactive game when all participator finished the process of description. In addition, teachers also explain these phenomena caused by perceptual characteristics in real life, as well as the significance of perceptual characteristics for design guidance. 7

CONCLUSION

Students can significantly recognize the importance of this course in terms of enhancing the professional competence and training by applying of the progressive cross-modular teaching ideas of Ergonomics. And students learn more correct attitude on study than before. Furthermore, the original learning mode of “passivity, dependence, and unicity” of Ergonomics has gradually shifted to a modern learning mode of “initiative, diversity, experience, and practice” by education reform and practice of Ergonomics. In addition, a system process that from basic theory to the basic application,

form application analysis to the application practice is finished. The education reform will provides a reference for other universities as well as the teaching of other similar courses, and will exert positive effects on modern education. We will effort to bring teaching out of the classroom and bring it into the company in the further, and further strengthen the training of applicationoriented talents by combining the enterprise and teaching. ACKNOWLEDGMENT The authors are grateful to the Guizhou University (contract number JG2013012) for funding this research. REFERENCES [1] Xiao Ming-Yan. Thinking of the Ergonomic courses construction in industrial design. Market Modernization. 2009(23), pp136–137. [2] Chu Jie, Lv Xin-Ming & Zhang Yuan-Qun. Education reform and practice of Ergonomics based on the culture of creative ability. China Forestry Education. 2012(06), pp75–77+39. [3] Wang Xing-Kai. Research on the “Ergonomics” under practical design theory and teaching practice mode. Chinese Market. 2011(49), pp209–210. [4] Yan Chao-Hua. Research on the education reform and practice of Ergonomics. Journal of Hefei University (Social Science Edition). 2008(04), pp113–116. [5] Feng Yan-Chun. Research on the teaching methods of safe Ergonomics based on the idea of practice. Heilongjiang Science and Technology Information. 2013(04), p162.

152

ICIEES_Book.indb 152

4/3/2015 7:08:47 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The calculation of the standard unit cost of the universities in Heilongjiang Province Y. Duan, J.Y. Zhang & G.J. Duan Harbin Institute of Technology, Harbin, China

ABSTRACT: Recently, the cost of higher education has caused attentions of school administrators, government departments and researchers. At this time, the calculation of standard unit cost is of important significances. It is the necessary condition to formulate the financial allocation and cost sharing mechanism. And it is of much significance to supervise the use of university funds. In this article we aim to calculate the standard unit cost of the universities in Heilongjiang Province and used the method according to the “Indexes of Basic Conditions for Running Colleges and Universities” released by the ministry of education in 2004 and the real situation of Heilongjiang Province. The result we get is that the standard unit cost we calculated of the universities in Heilongjiang Province is 16196.84 Yuan. Keywords: 1

Higher education; Standard unit cost; Basic educational standards

INTRODUCTION

Although the financial allocation of higher education has increased year by year, but the tension of fund of ordinary higher education has gradually exposed. Facing this kind of phenomenon, the problem of “how much is the cost of higher education” has caused widespread concern in society1. Therefore the calculation of cost of common higher education becomes very important. This article will calculate the standard unit cost of the universities in Heilongjiang Province. 2

THE CALCULATION OF THE STANDARD UNIT COST OF THE ORDINARY UNIVERSITIES

Education has always been an important strategy of China. Higher education is an important part of it. The healthy development of the education cannot be without adequate and reasonable financial support. Recent studies have found many questions of the fund investment of higher education China. For example, families of some area have beard too much for the higher education than they can5. China’s financial investment on higher education, did not meet the level of the development of economics, and also it did not meet the need of higher education’s development2. In this case, measure the standard culture cost of the universities is of much significance:

It has great significance to develop higher education financial allocation policy. For China, financial allocations have been an important source for the higher education. Therefore, reasonably and adequate input of financial allocation is important and formulate the financial funding policy correctly we need to clear the standard unit cost. There is an important significance to formulate higher education tuition standard. At present, the government announced that the tuition standard occupies about 25% of the cost of college student, but the public still questioned the tuition standard, and they think that the tuition standard is too high4. To formulate reasonable tuition standard we must be clear of the cost of higher education. It has important significance to supervise the use of university funds. The waste of education cost in our country is serious3. To achieve the purpose we also need to know the standard unit cost. 3

THE DEFINITION OF THE ESTIMATION OF STANDARD CULTURE COST OF EVERY ORDINARY UNIVERSITY STUDENT

The standard cost of student culture refers to the basic function of higher education. We analysis and calculate the average cost per student through research. At present, the standard average college training cost is considered to be a reasonable training cost. “The Supervision and Examination

153

ICIEES_Book.indb 153

4/3/2015 7:08:47 AM

Methods of Higher Education Cost” released by the state development and reform commission has clearly defined composition of the cost of higher education. The training cost of higher education is consisted of personnel expenditure, public expenditure and the expenditure to assistant individuals and families, and the expenditure on the depreciation of fixed assets. The specific calculation formula is as equation (1): Standard unit cost = Q +

+W + R

(1)

In the equation, Q represents the average staff expenditure. W represents the average expenditure to assistant the individuals and families. E is the meaning of the average expenditure on the depreciation of assets. R represents the average public expenditure.

4

THE DEFINITION OF THE STANDARD OF THE ESTIMATION OF STANDARD CULTURE COST OF EVERY ORDINARY UNIVERSITY STUDENT

The “Indexes of Basic Conditions for Running Colleges and Universities” released by the ministry of education in 2004 has specified the index of running colleges. This article will calculate the standard culture cost of every ordinary university student based on the standard published in this file. All the standards we used will be listed in the following table.

5 5.1

STANDARD UNIT COST CALCULATION Standard personnel expenditure on per student (E)

In Equation (2), Q1 represents the standardized expenditure on teachers distributed to every students, Q2 represents the standardized expenditure on staffs’ expenditure. 5.1.1 Standardized expenditure on teachers distributed to every students (Q1) When calculate the wages of teachers and workers in this article, we have not estimated it according the level of the teachers and staffs. We collect the real education expenditure on teachers and workers and total number of staff and teachers of corresponding year. Then use these two numbers to divide to get the average wage and welfare of teachers and staffs of the universities in Heilongjiang Province. We can get the number of teachers and workers who work in universities of Heilongjiang Province according to “Chinese Statistical Yearbook 2012”. The data are 72744. Then we can get the real expenditure on teachers and staffs of Heilongjiang Province according to “Chinese Statistical Yearbook of Education Funds 2012”, the data are 3585.3 million. Therefore, we can get Equation (3) as follows: Q1

M /K K

(3)

In Equation (3), M presents the standardized expenditure of one teacher. K represents the ratio of students to teachers. M = 3585301000/72744 = 49287 (Yuan). And we can get the ratio of students to teachers is 18 according to the “Indexes of Basic Conditions for Running Colleges and Universities”. Then we can get the value of Q1 = 49287/18 = 2738.17 (Yuan). 5.1.2 Standardized expenditure on staffs distributed to every student (Q2) This article will from the actual situation of Heilongjiang province to determine the proportion of the number of workers account to the teachers. We definite the proportion is “b”. We get the value of b is 0.62. Then we get another equation and we can use the equation to get the number of Q2.

Personnel expenditure proportion is relatively large. “Reform of Income Distribution System and Institutions of Staff” released by the ministry of education, ministry of finance, the ministry of personnel has regulated that college wage job performance wage system. The performance salary is consisted of post wage, grade salary, performance wage and subsidies. The basic wage standards shall be formulated by the state, but policies about the salary and position have not been released. Therefore there is no clear standard to reference to. Therefore, in this article uses the historical data to calculate the standard personal expenditure. The personal expenditure is divided into two parts when we estimate it. It is consisted of teachers’ expenditure and staffs’ expenditure. The specific calculation formula is as Equation (2):

Then we will get the value of Q2 according to Equation (4).

Q Q1 + Q2

We divide the expenditure on individuals and families into two parts. First part is the expenditure

(2)

Q2

4928

(K b )

(4)

Q2 = 49287(18/0.62) = 1697.67 (Yuan) Therefore, Q = Q1 + Q2 = 4435.84 (Yuan) 5.2

Standardized expenditure to assistant individuals and families (W)

154

ICIEES_Book.indb 154

4/3/2015 7:08:47 AM

on scholarship and grants. The second part is the average expenditure on retired person. According to the current policy, Retirees’ funds have been paid when they are on work. So it is contained in the part standard personnel expenditure. So in this part we should not calculate the expenditure on retired person. We only need to calculate the expenditure on scholarship and grants. For scholarships expenditure of the universities, at present it has already been institutionalize and normalized. Higher schools establish scholarships system according to a certain proportion which scholarships account for tuition fee. We call this proportion c. Then we can get the Equation (5) as follows: Average expenditure on scholarship = I ∗ c

(5)

In the Equation (5), “I” represents the average tuition. After referencing to lots of documents and investigate, we find that the number of c is 20%. At present, although the Heilongjiang Department of education, Price Bureau and Department of Finance have issued the “The Notice about the Adjustment on Tuition of Ordinary Higher School”. Most schools customize the standard fees according to this notice. But some universities will adjust the tuition according their own situation. Therefore, considering the actual situation, we will estimate the tuition by investigation. After investigate we find that the tuition is from 3500 Yuan to 10000 Yuan, and most majors’ tuition is about 5000 Yuan. So we choose 5000 Yuan as the average tuition. According to Equation (5), we can get the value of average expenditure on scholarship = 5000*20% = 1000 (Yuan). Therefore, W = 1000 (Yuan). 5.3

The expenditure on depreciation of the fixed assets (E)

The expenditure on depreciation of fixed assets is consisted of educational administration of building, students’ dormitory, equipment and books. Then we get the Equation (6) to estimate “E” as follows: E

E1 + E2

E3 + E 4

(6)

In the Equation (6), E1 represents the average expenditure of depreciation on the depreciation of educational administrative house. E2 represents the average expenditure on dormitory depreciation. E3 represents the average expenditure on the depreciation of equipment. And E4 represents the average expenditure on the depreciation of books.

5.3.1 Average expenditure on the depreciation of educational administrative house (E1) We can calculate the average expenditure of depreciation the value of E1 as in the following equation. E1

P ∗X F

(7)

In the Equation (7), P represents the average cost of buildings in Heilongjiang Province. X represents the average administration building area distributed to every student in the universities of the Heilongjiang Province. F represents the rate of depreciation of buildings. We can know that the average cost of buildings of Heilongjiang Province is 1611 Yuan according to the “Statistical Yearbook of Heilongjiang Province 2012”. The average administration building area per student of the student in the universities of the Heilongjiang Province is 14 square meters per student according to the “Indexes of Basic Conditions for Running Colleges and Universities”. Depreciation of buildings is generally 50 years. So F = 1/50 = 0.02. Then we can get the value of E1 according to the Equation (7). E1 = 1661*14*0.02 = 465 (Yuan) 5.3.2

Average expenditure on depreciation of dormitories distributed to per student (E2) We can calculate the average expenditure on depreciation of dormitories distributed to per student as in the following equation. E2

P ∗S F

(8)

In the Equation (8), P represents the average cost of buildings in Heilongjiang Province. S represents average dormitory building area of every student in the universities of the Heilongjiang Province. F represents the rate of depreciation of buildings. We can know the value of F and P from the above paragraph. P = 1661 Yuan. F = 0.02. The average dormitory building area is 6.5 square meters per student according to the “Indexes of Basic Conditions for running Colleges and Universities”. Then we can get the value of E2 according to the Equation (8). E2 = 1661*6.5*0.02 = 215.93 (Yuan) 5.3.3

Average expenditure on the depreciation of equipment distributed to per student (E3) We will estimate the average expenditure on the depreciation of equipment as in the following equation. E3 T ∗ H

(9)

In the Equation (9), T represents the average value of the equation distributed to every student.

155

ICIEES_Book.indb 155

4/3/2015 7:08:47 AM

H represents the rate of depreciation of the equipment. We got the value of H according to the “Indexes of Basic Conditions for Running Colleges and Universities”. T = 5000 Yuan. And H is about 0.125. Therefore we can get the value of E3. E3 = 5000*0.125 = 625 (Yuan)

expenditure of the universities in Heilongjiang Province in the year of 2011 is 7366 million according to the “Chinese Statistical Yearbook of Education Funds 2012”. The number of the number of Undergraduates in Heilongjiang Province is about 804448 persons. Then we can know the value of R according to the Equation (11).

5.3.4

R = 7366315000/804448 = 9156 (Yuan)

E4

Considering all these results we have got in the above paragraphs, we will get the value of standard unit cost according to the Equation (1). Standard unit cost = Q + W + E + R = 16196.84 (Yuan).

Average expenditure on the depreciation of books distributed to per student (E4) We shall calculate the value of the average expenditure on the depreciation of books as in the following equation. Z ∗X V

(10)

In the Equation (10), Z represents the average number of books distributed to every student. X represents the average price of books. V represents the rate of depreciation of books. The average number of books distributed to every student is about 100 volumes per student according to the “Indexes of Basic Conditions for Running Colleges and Universities”. After investigate, we find that the average price of books is 30 Yuan. The depreciation period of books is about 10 years after we investigate it. So V = 1/10 = 0.1. Therefore, we can get the value of E4 according to the Equation (10). E4 = 100*30*0.1 = 300 (Yuan) Then we can get the value of E according to the Equation (6). E = E1 + E2 + E3 + E4 = 1605 (Yuan) 5.4

Average public expenditure distributed to every student

There is no standard of public expenditure in the “Indexes of Basic Conditions for Running Colleges and Universities” 1. So in this article we will account it with the actual educational funds expenditure. The regional statistical detail of expenditure of higher education funds is counted in the “Chinese Statistical Yearbook of Education Funds 2012”. There is one project named “goods and services expenditure” in this file and it is the value of public expenditure which we want. We can estimate the average public expenditure by the following equation. R Y /U

(11)

In the Equation (11), Y represents total goods and services expenditure. U represents the number of students. We can know the total goods and services

6

CONCLUSION AND ANALYSIS

The standard unit cost of the undergraduate of the universities in Heilongjiang Province is about 16196.84 Yuan. When we compare the standard unit cost we have calculated to the number of the result other researchers have calculated years before, we find that the standard unit cost has increased rapidly. At this time we may draw a conclusion that the government should increase investment to ordinary higher education to meet the funding needs of higher education. Even to the extent that the regulatory authorities can determine the total fund amount of universities according to standard unit cost and the number of students and to formulate a reasonable financial allocation according to the total demand. When we use 5000 Yuan as the average tuition of Heilongjiang Province ordinary colleges’ students, we find that the proportion the tuition accounts for the standard unit cost is about 30.87%. This ratio is higher than what the government had announced. This shows that the individuals and families are taking too much of the cost of higher education. We do suggest that the government should increase the level of subsidy given to students in order to reduce the families’ economic pressure. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This article is a stage result of the Heilongjiang Province Natural Fund Project (G201305), the project supported by “the Fundamental Research Fund for the Central Universities” (grant number HIT.HSS.201233), the graduate student education innovation program funded projects in Heilongjiang Province (JGXM_HLJ_2011046) and the graduate education teaching reform project of Harbin of Technology (JGYJ-201205).

156

ICIEES_Book.indb 156

4/3/2015 7:08:48 AM

REFERENCES [1] Bochun, Chen., Xianyu, Wang & Li, Liu. 2005. Calculation of common higher education cost based on educational standards. Science of Education. 21(2): 41–44. [2] Changjun, Yue. 2011. The international comparative study of higher education funds supply and demand. Education Review of Peking University. 9(3): 92–104.

[3] Chi, Zhang. 2014. China’s higher education cost sharing system problems and countermeasures. Journal of Shangqiu Normal University. 30(1): 133–136. [4] Hanxiang, Hu., Haifen, Yang & Hongming, Wang. 2008. Analysis on the standard cost of higher education. Price of China. (5): 29–32. [5] Zhaohui, Chu & Ruyong, Changxi, Huang. 2008. Conditions, questions, and coping strategies of the cost sharing of figher education. Education Research of Tsinghua University. 29(1): 85–93.

157

ICIEES_Book.indb 157

4/3/2015 7:08:48 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Innovative management based on risks prediction A.I. Kostogryzov & P.V. Stepanov Institute of Informatics Problems of the Russian Academy of Sciences, Moscow, Russia

G.A. Nistratov & A.A. Nistratov Research Institute of Applied Mathematics and Certification, Moscow, Russia

L.I. Grigoriev Gubkin Russian State University of Oil and Gas, Moscow, Russia

O.I. Atakishchev Southwest State University, Kursk, Russia

ABSTRACT: The aim of this paper is to present the probabilistic models of risk prediction for complex systems in conditions of destabilizing factors and/or threats and supporting them with software technologies. Against the existing methods, the calculated risks analytically depend on the time of periodic control, monitoring and recovery for every element of the system. This approach of risk prediction is proposed as an analytical core of innovative management in a system life cycle. A rational use in system engineering and education allows to go “from a pragmatical filtration of information to generation of the proved ideas and effective decisions”. Keywords: 1

Analysis; Effectiveness; Model; Optimization; Probability Process; Quality; Risk; System

INTRODUCTION

The procedure of risk prediction is an analytical core of system management in a life cycle. makes identical decisions everywhere. At first, the set of destabilizing factors and/or threats against quality and safety is defined. Then taking into account available resources, the possible measures of neutralization should be chosen or developed. Technologies of system control, monitoring and recovery of lost system integrity are used as counteraction against destabilizing factors and/ or threats (system integrity is understood as a system state when system purposes are achieved with required quality and safety). But what about the effectiveness of system management? The goal of this work is to propose the probabilistic models of risk prediction and supporting them by software technologies to provide analytically innovative management for complex system. The approaches are based on use and developing earlier probabilistic models (Kostogryzov et al., since 2000). Thus at every step of system life cycle, the development of processes is supported by analytical predictions— see Figure 1. It allows also to solve the tasks of analysis and optimization. And it means that the required knowledge about future system operation

is more clear and the best preventive decisions can be found in real time before critical events. This approach is used in system engineering and education to provide and increase system quality and safety. Applications in Russia cover systems in various fields: systems operated by government agencies, manufacturing structures (including enterprises, oil & gas and transport facilities, and hazardous production systems), food storage,

Figure 1. System engineering problems which are solved on the base of quality and risk predictions.

159

ICIEES_Book.indb 159

4/3/2015 7:08:48 AM

power generation, financial and business, aviation and space industry, emergency services, municipal economy, etc. 2 2.1

PROBABILISTIC MODELLING OF PROCESSES General proposition

Existing practices for providing system quality and safety were reviewed (including approaches of system standards ISO 9001, ISO/IEC 15288, IEC 60300, 61508, CMMI, etc.). The main results of the survey are (Kostogryzov & Stepanov, 2008): all organizations need adequate knowledge to solve the problems, but only some part from them uses probabilistic models; used models are highly specialized, input and calculated metrics are adhered strongly to specificity of systems. At the same time in general case, knowledge mining for system analysing and optimizing can be implemented on the base of probabilistic modelling system processes. Really, any process in all areas is a repeated sequence of consuming time and resources for outcome receiving. As a rule, the moments for any activity beginning and ending are random events on time line. Moreover, there are the repeated performances for majority of timed activities (estimations, comparisons, controls, analysis, etc.) during system life cycle. Unfortunately probabilistic estimations from one sphere are not used in other spheres because of methodologies for risk analysis are different and interpretations are not identical. The methods for quantitatively risk prediction on strong probability level are in creating stage yet. As a consequence, probabilistic estimations are not comparable, experience from other spheres of safety is missing, an universal objective scale of measurement is not established yet. The term “Admissible risk” in use should be defined on probability scale level only in dependence on corresponding methods. It does not allow to find latent knowledge in different spheres and solve preventively the main problems of analysis and synthesis in given limitations (including a substantiation of system requirements to optimal parameters of control, monitoring and counteraction measures). This work focuses on using universal metrics in a systems life cycle: probability to lose system integrity considering possible damage (as metric for risk prediction) during a given period for an element, subsystem, system or probabilities of success (correct operation). The results depend analytically on the time of periodic control, monitoring and recovery system integrity. Calculation of these metrics allows to predict quality and risks

on an uniform probability scale, quantitatively to prove levels of admissible risks. The prediction of risks can use widely monitoring data and statistics. In general case a probabilistic space (Ω, B, P) for estimation of system operation is proposed. Here Ω is a limited space of elementary events (“correct operation” and “a loss of integrity”); B is a class of all subspace of Ω-space, satisfied to the properties of σ-algebra; P is a probability measure on a space Ω. Because Ω = {ωk} is limited, there is enough to establish a reflection ωk → pk = P(ωk) like that pk ≥ 0 and ∑ pk = 1 . The examples k of dozens such models exist (Kostogryzov et al., since 2000). 2.2

Risk prediction by probabilistic modelling

Nowadays in system development and utilization, an essential part of funds is spent on providing system protection from various dangerous influences on system integrity (these may be failures, defects events, “human factors” events, etc). Two general technologies of providing protection from critical influences are examined: periodical diagnostics of system integrity (technology 1), without monitoring between diagnostics, and additionally monitoring between diagnostics (technology 2)—see Figures 2, 3.

Figure 2. Some accident events for technology 1 (left— correct operation, right—a loss of integrity during prognostic period Treq.).

Figure 3. Some accident events for technology 2 (left— correct operation, right—a loss of integrity during prognostic period Treq.).

160

ICIEES_Book.indb 160

4/3/2015 7:08:49 AM

Technology 1 is based on periodical diagnostics of system integrity, which are carried out to detect danger sources penetration into a system or consequences of negative influences (see Figure 2). The lost system integrity can be detected only as a result of diagnostics, after which system recovery is started. Dangerous influence on system is acted step-by-step: at first a danger source penetrates into a system and then after its activation it begins to influence. System integrity cannot be lost before a penetrated danger source is activated. A danger is considered to be realized only after a danger source has influenced on a system. Technology 2, unlike the previous one, implies that operators alternating between each other trace system integrity between diagnostics (operator may be a man or special device or their combination). In case of detecting a danger source, an operator recovers system integrity. The ways of integrity recovering are analogous to the ways of technology 1. Faultless operator’s actions provide a neutralization of a danger source trying to penetrate into a system. When operators alternate, a complex diagnostic is held. A penetration of a danger source is possible only if an operator makes an error, but a dangerous influence occurs if the danger is activated before the next diagnostic. Otherwise the source will be detected and neutralized during the next diagnostic. It is supposed for technologies 1 and 2 that the used diagnostic tools allow to provide necessary system integrity recovery after revealing danger sources penetration into a system or consequences of influences. Assumption: for all time input characteristics, the probability distribution functions (PDFs) exist. Thus the probability of correct system operation within the given prognostic period (i.e. probability of success) may be estimated as a result of using the next models. Risk to lose integrity is an addition to 1 for probability of correct system operation (“probability of success”) R = 1 − P. The next variants are possible for technologies 1 and 2: variant 1—the given prognostic period Treq is less than the established period between neighbouring diagnostics (Treq < Tbetw. + Tdiag); variant 2—the assigned period Treq is more than or equals to established period between neighbouring diagnostics (Treq ≥ Tbetw. + Tdiag). Here Tbetw is the time between the end of diagnostic and the beginning of the next diagnostic, Tdiag is the diagnostic time. For the given period for prediction (Treq.), the next statements are proposed (formulated by Kostogryzov since 1994). Statement 1 (for technology 1). Under the condition of independence of considered characteristics, the probability of providing system integrity for variant 1 is equal to

P(1) (Treq) = 1 – Ωpenetr * Ωactiv(Treq),

(1)

where Ωpenetr(t) is the PDF of time between neighbouring influences for penetrating a danger source; Ωactiv(t) is the PDF of activation time of a penetrated danger source. Statement 2 ( for technology 1). Under the condition of independence for the considered characteristics, the probability of providing system integrity for variant 2 may be equal to measure (a) P(2)(Treq) = N((Tbetw + Tdiag)/Treq) P(1)N(Tbetw + Tdiag) + (Trmn/Treq) P(1)(Trmn), (2) where N = [Treq./(Tbetw. + Tdiag.)] is the integer part, Trmn = Treq – N(Tbetw + Tdiag); measure (b) P(2)(Treq) = P(1)N(Tbetw + Tdiag)P(1)(Trmn)

(3)

The probability of success within the given time P(1)(Tgiven) is defined by (1). Statement 3 ( for technology 2). Under the condition of independence for the considered characteristics, the probability of correct system operation for variant 1 is equal to Treq

P( ) (Trereqq ) = 1 −

∫ 0

Treq

dA( )

∫

d

penetr

*

act. act

( )

(4)

τ

Here A(t) is the PDF of time from the last finish of diagnostic time up to the first operator error. Statement 4 (for technology 2). Under the condition of independence of the considered characteristics, the probability of providing system integrity for variant 2 may be equal to measure (a) P(2) (Treq) = N((Tbetw + Tdiag)/Treq) P(1)N(Tbetw + Tdiag) + (Trmn/Treq) P(1)(Trmn), (5) measure (b) P(2) (Treq) = P(1)N(Tbetw +Tdiag) P(1)(Trmn), (see (3)), where the probability of success within the given time P(1)(Treq) is defined by (4). The final clear analytical formulas for modelling are received by Lebesque integration of expression (4) with due regard to Statements 1–4. The models are supported by software tools (Kostogryzov et al., since 2000). Comments: measure (a) allows to perform latent knowledge mining in the possibilities and impacts of every control because N is integer part. Measure (b) allows to mine latent knowledge by average value of probability on the level of classical PDF.

161

ICIEES_Book.indb 161

4/3/2015 7:08:50 AM

3 3.1

B(t) = P(min (τ1, τ2) ≤ t) = 1 − P(min (τ1, τ2) > t) = 1 − P(τ1 > t) P(τ2 > t) = 1 − [1 − B1(t)] [1 − B2(t)].

THE SUPPORT BY SOFTWARE TECHNOLOGIES OF RISK PREDICTION The technologies for complex systems

Many models are applicable to the system presented as one element. The main output of modelling is probability of correct system operation or risk to lose system integrity during the given period of time. If probabilities for all points Treq. from 0 to ∞ are calculated, it means a trajectory of the PDF depending on threats, periodic control, monitoring and recovery. And the building of PDF is the real base to risk prediction for a given time Treq.. In analogy with reliability, it is important to know a mean time between neighbouring losses of integrity (like mean time between neighbouring failures in reliability (MTBF), but in application to quality, safety, etc. The PDF allows to define mean time of correct (safe) system operation by traditional methods (Feller, 1971, Klimov, 1983, etc.). The idea of risk prediction is based on probabilistic modelling standard processes and consists of the following. Any process represents a set of the works, which are carried out with any productivity at limitations for resources and conditions. This amount of works is characterized by expenses of resources (cost, material, human), accordingly works can be executed for different time with various qualities. And conditions are characterized by a set of random factors influencing processes. From the point of view of probability theory and the theory of regenerating processes, it is possible to suppose formally that all processes on macroand micro-levels are cyclically repeated in time line. Time characteristics of processes and frequency characteristics of any events are used as input. Probabilities of “success” during a given time or risks to lose system integrity are used as final or intermediate result of modelling. The basic ideas of correct integration of probability metrics are based on a combination and development of models (Kostogryzov et al., since 2005, K. Kolowrocki, 2011, etc.). For complex systems with parallel or serial structure, existing models can be developed by usual methods of probability theory. Let us consider the elementary structure from two independent parallel or series elements. Let the PDF of time between losses of i-th element integrity is Bi(t) = P (τi ≤ t), then: 1. time between losses of integrity for system combined from series-connected independent elements is equal to a minimum from two times τi: failure of 1st or 2nd elements (i.e. the system goes into a state of lost integrity when either 1st or 2nd element integrity is lost). For this case, the PDF of time between losses of system integrity is defined by the expression

(6)

2. time between losses of integrity for system combined from parallel-connected independent elements (hot reservation) is equal to a maximum from two times τi: failure of 1st and 2nd elements (i.e. the system goes into a state of lost integrity when both 1st and 2nd elements have lost integrity). For this case, the PDF of time between losses of system integrity is defined by the expression B(t) = P(max(τ1, τ2) ≤ t) = P(τ1 ≤ t)P(τ2 ≤ t) = B1(t)B2(t).

(7)

Applying recurrently expressions (6) and (7), it is possible to build PDF of time between losses of integrity for any complex system with parallel and/ or series structure. The mean recovery time for a system combined from serial independent elements may be calculated by the expression Trec. = Trec.1((1/TMTBF1)/(1/TMTBF1 + 1/TMTBF2)) + Trec.2((1/TMTBF2)/(1/TMTBF1+ 1/TMTBF2)), for a system combined from parallel independent elements Trec. = Trec.1((1/TMTBF2)/(1/TMTBF1 + 1/TMTBF2)) + Trec.2((1/TMTBF1)/(1/TMTBF1 + 1/TMTBF2)). Applying recurrently these expressions, it is possible to receive mean recovery time for any complex system with parallel and/or consecutive structure. In real practice during correct operation, the diagnostic time for each element is equal in average to Tdiag.. At the same time, if results of diagnostics require additional measures of integrity recovery this time is another (as a rule, it increases). To use the offered formulas (1)–(7), there is the proposed the algorithm for calculating the mean time of diagnostics iteratively with the given accuracy ε: 1-st iteration: Tdiag.(1) = Tdiag. that is given by input for modelling. That is for 1st iteration at detection of violation, it is supposed instant recovery of integrity. Risk to lose required integrity R(1) is calculated (for example, by the models of section 2). Here the recovery time is not considered; 2-nd iteration: Tdiag.(2) = Tdiag.(1) (1 – R(1)) + Trec. R(1), where R.(1) is risk to lose required integrity for input Tdiag.(1). Optimistic risk to lose required integrity R(2) is calculated as: …, n-th iteration is carried out after calculating risk R(n−1) for input Tdiag.(n−1): Tdiag.(n) = Tdiag.(n−1) (1 – R(n−1)) + Trec. R(n−1), where R(n−1) is risk to lose required integrity for input Tdiag.(n−1). Here recovery

162

ICIEES_Book.indb 162

4/3/2015 7:08:50 AM

time is considering with the frequency aspiring to real, hence risk R.(n–1) ) will aspire to the real. The last iteration is when the given condition is satisfied: |R(n)–R(n–1)| ≤ ε. All these ideas are implemented by the software technologies of risk prediction for complex systems off-line and on-line (Kostogryzov, Nistratov et al., 2004–2011)—there are, for example, the “Mathematical modelling of system life cycle processes”—“know how” (registered by Rospatent No 2004610858), “Software tool complex for evaluation of information system operation quality by Internet”—“know how” (registered by Rospatent No 2008612348), “Complex for evaluating quality of production processes” (registered by Rospatent No 2010614145). 3.2

Some statements of problems for system optimization in innovative management

The results of modelling processes can and should be used for optimization of systems operation on the base of risk prediction. For example, The next general formal statements of problems for system optimization are applicable (Kostogryzov, since 2004): 1. On the stages of system concept, development, production and support: System parameters, software, technical and management measures (Q) are the most rational for the given period if on them the minimum of expenses (Zdev.) for creation of system is reached: Zdev.(Q rational) = min Zdev.(Q), Q at limitations on probability of an admissible level of risks R(Q) ≤ Radm. and/or admissible level of quality Pquality (Q) ≥ Padm. and expenses for operation Coper. (Q) ≤ Cadm. and under other development, operation or maintenance conditions; 2. on operation stage: system parameters, software, technical and management measures (Q) are the most rational for the given period of operation if on them the minimum of risks is reached: R (Q rational) = min R (Q), Q at limitations on probability of an admissible level of quality Pquality (Q) ≥ Padm. and expenses for operation Coper. (Q) ≤ Cadm. and under other operation or maintenance conditions. Of course these statements may be transformed into problems of minimization of expenses or mathematical expectation of damages in different

limitations. System parameters, software, technical and management measures (Q) is a rule a vector of input—see parts 2 and 3 of this paper. There may be combination of these formal statements in system life cycle. 4

BENEFIT FROM INNOVATIVE MANAGEMENT

The presented approach of risk prediction allows to improve system management by effectively solving problems of system analysis and optimization. Expected pragmatic benefit from its application is the next: it is possible to provide essential system quality rise and/or to avoid wasted expenses in system life cycle on the base of modelling system processes. Traditional approaches consist, as a matter of fact, of a pragmatical filtration of the information. In the decisions a responsible person, making decision, is guided firstly by his/her own experience and the knowledge and the advices of those persons to whom command is trusted. By intuitively forming ideas which seem correct, this person chooses only that information which proves those ideas. The denying information is often ignored and is more rare—leads to change of initial idea. This approach can be explained from the facts that at absence or limitation of used models, it is difficult to investigate at once many ideas for the given time. The presented models, methods and software tools, reducing long time of modelling (from several days, weeks and months to few seconds and minutes) change this situation cardinally. The offered innovative approach for system management is at the beginning of substantiation of the system requirements, purposefully capable to lead to a success. Further, a responsible person, equipped by a set of presented (and others) probabilistic models and supporting them with software technologies, is powered for generation of the proved ideas and effective decisions. These decisions are physically clear because of using accessible and operative analysis and optimization of processes in system life cycle. The offered approach allows to go “from a pragmatical filtration of information to generation of the proved ideas and effective decisions”. The benefit from implementation in system life cycle is commensurable with expenses for its creation. 5

EXAMPLES

Example 1. Let the system formalization covers subsystem 1 (logically reflecting a human resource of

163

ICIEES_Book.indb 163

4/3/2015 7:08:50 AM

transport station as one element of system), subsystem 2 (considering vehicles in a control zone of station as one element of system), subsystem 3 (considering transportation infrastructure as one element of system), subsystem 4 (central power supply as the main and reserve elements), subsystem 5 (a centre of information processing and storage as combination of power supply subsystem, air conditioning subsystem, source of an uninterrupted supply, engine-generating installation), subsystem 6 (10 barriers against unauthorized access to valuable resources of station)—see Figure 5 left. We will not go deep into details of input and the results of modelling (input has been formed from statistic data for abstract fragment of transport station). We concentrate our attention only on knowledge mining from some integral distribution of risk to lose complex integrity depending on control, monitoring, counteraction, recovery measures and prediction time—see Figure 4. Comments: correctly a trajectory on Figure 4 is not fragment of PDF, because N = [Treq./(Tbetw. + Tdiag.)] is integer. It allows to feel on time line the possibilities of control, monitoring, counteraction and recovery measures used for different elements. If to use N = Treq./(Tbetw. + Tdiag.)—is real, monotonic increasing trajectory of PDF can be built.

Figure 4. Logic model of transport station fragment (PSS—Power Supply Subsystem, ACS—Air Conditioning Subsystem, SUS—Source of an Uninterrupted Supply, EGI—Engine-Generating Installation).

Figure 5. The dependability of integrated risk to lose system integrity during operation for 1–4 years.

Dependability of integrated risk to lose system integrity during operation for 1–4 years is demonstrated by Figure 5. Analysis of results shows that integrated risk to lose integrity of the system is changing from 0.11 (prognostic period = 1 year) to 0.67 (4 years). It is traditionally understandable that the risk to lose system integrity increases depending on increasing time period of prediction. But in practice it is often not so because of system periodic control, continuing monitoring and recovery measures. There are the features demanding a logic explanation. Serrated and non-monotonic character of risk dependence is explained by the periodic diagnostics of every element, monitoring presence or absence and their quantitative values. Immediately after diagnostic, the risk decreases because during diagnostic all dangers are detected and neutralized and at the beginning of a period after diagnostic, dangerous influences do not have enough time to accumulate and be activated. Nonetheless, there is a lack of protection accumulated for the previous full periods, that is why the risk does not decrease to 0. By the middle of a period between neighbouring diagnostics, there is an increase of the calculated risk because new danger sources can begin to influence. Moreover, for the longer period of prediction, the possibilities of monitoring are weakened, thereby the moment of operator error comes nearer. And, if on timeline the following diagnostic does not come yet, risk increases. Similar effects paradoxes are explained—for example, that risk to lose integrity during 2.96 years (0.58) is more than risk during more long time, i.e. 3.12 years, 58 days longer (0.57). One more effect of modelling: if not to predict for 2.04 years, and for 2 weeks longer (2.08 years, i.e. 2% longer period), the expected risk to lose system integrity increases from 0.28 to 0.36 (higher on 28%!). These results of knowledge mining should serve to develop preventive counter-measures concerning possibilities of control in time. Example 2. Let us analyse a fragment of the main gas pipeline Bovanenkovo–Ukhta (more than 1200 km) by probabilistic modelling of natural and technogenic processes. It is constructed over an earth surface. Subfragments between compressor stations (9 stations—Bajdaratsky, Jarynsky, Gagaratsky, Vorkuta, Usinsk, Intinsky, Syninsky, Chikshinsky, Maloperansky) are allocated. There are serial subsystems and every subsystem has parallel structure of elements (pipeline), see Figure 6. About 75–90% from the pipelines are under natural threats, including ice drift (threats for constructions). It is required to estimate risk to lose integrity (quality of operation) of fragment Bovanenkovo–Ukhta in 2023–2043.

164

ICIEES_Book.indb 164

4/3/2015 7:08:50 AM

Solving of a problem is the next (Burtseva A., 2013). According to estimations of experts, in 20–30 years there will be considerable changes of climatic conditions which will cause rise in temperature of frozen thicknesses, increase in depth seasonal thawing and, as consequence, decrease in stability and bearing ability of the bases for a gas pipeline and other engineering constructions. Technical characteristics of elements between compressor stations are considered as identical, except for the first subfragment (between stations Bajdaratsky & Jarynsky) which is underwater transition (reservation by four elements-pipelines), see Figure 7. Initial data for modelling have been generated depending on conditions of concrete sites and specificity of a territorial arrangement of a line. Results of modelling processes have shown that risk to lose integrity (quality of operation) for 20 prognostic years during the period 2023–2043 is equal to 0.6–0.8. In comparison with other precedents. these figures speak about expediency of undertaking of preventive measures, and also about necessity of working out the Plan of emergencies liquidation. If period between system controls will be reduced from 6 to 3 months, the risk to lose integrity in 2023–2043 is nearby 0.16–0.44. It is twice more low, rather than for an existing mode of maintenance and repair. On the basis of these results, the following recommendations are scientifically proved: To establish a risk level to lose integrity (quality of operation) 0.38 within 10 years of operation as admissible (on the basis of “precedent principle”).

Figure 6. The analysed fragment of the main gas pipeline.

Figure 7.

The structure for modelling processes.

To pass to the quarterly control of a condition of a system after 10 years of operation (i.e. since 2024). To use annual planning of maintenance measures service on the basis of modelling processes for rational risk management in admissible limits. 6

APPLICATIONS

An application of the proposed approach allows to solve reasonably well the next problems in system life cycle: analysis of quality and safety level, substantiation of quantitative system requirements to hardware, software, users, staff, technologies; requirements analysis, evaluation of engineering decisions, system utilization, improvement and development; analysis of problems concerning potential destabilizing factors and/or threats against quality and safety; prediction of bottlenecks; verification and validation system operation quality, definition of rational conditions for system use and ways for optimization, evaluation of customer satisfaction, etc. The probabilistic models of risk prediction and supporting them by software technologies are implemented into research and design institutes, industrial organizations and into education process in Gubkin Russian State University of Oil and Gas (Moscow), in Southwest State University, Kursk and in into other dozens of organizations in Russia. 7

CONCLUSION

The methodology for risk prediction, considering destabilizing factors and/or threats, the measures of control, monitoring and recovery for elements, subsystems and system, is proposed to improve system management. Interpretation of modelling is identical because universal metrics are used: probabilities of success or risk to lose system integrity during a given period. Probabilistic estimations are comparable and universal objective scale of measurement can be established. Monitoring data and statistics can be used in real time of system operation to predict risks and the effectiveness of preventive actions (connected with control, monitoring and recovery measures) to mitigate the risks. An “Admissible risk” can be substantiated by “precedent principle”. And the non-monotonic effects are the real arguments to find the measures and timeline moments for optimizing processes, elements, subsystems and system operation. Rational use of the offered approach in innovative management allows to go “from a pragmatical filtration of information to generation

165

ICIEES_Book.indb 165

4/3/2015 7:08:51 AM

of the proved ideas and effective decisions”. The benefit from implementation in system life cycle is commensurable with expenses for its creation.

[8]

REFERENCES [1] Feller, W. 1971. An Introduction to Probability Theory and Its Applications. Vol. II. Willy. [2] Klimov, G.P. 1983. Probability theory and mathematical statistics. Moscow: MSU. [3] Kostogryzov, A.I., Petuhov, A.V. & Scherbina, A.M. 1994. Foundations of evaluation, providing and increasing output information quality for automatized system. Moscow: “Armament. Policy. Conversion”. [4] Kostogryzov, A.I. 2000. Software Tools Complex for Evaluation of Information Systems Operation Quality (CEISOQ). Proceedings of the 34-th Annual Event of the Government Electronics and Information Association (GEIA), Engineering and Technical Management Symposium: 63–70. USA: Dallas. [5] Kostogryzov, A.I. & Nistratov, G.A. 2005. Standardization, mathematical modeling, rational management and certification in the field of system and software engineering (100 mathematical models, 35 software tools). Moscow: “Armament. Policy. Conversion”. [6] Kostogryzov, A.I. & Stepanov, P.V. 2008. Innovative management of quality and risks in systems life cycle. Moscow: “Armament. Policy. Conversion”. [7] Kostogryzov, A., Krylov, V., Nistratov, A., Nistratov, G., Popov, V. & Stepanov P. 2011. Mathematical models and applicable technologies to forecast, analyze and optimize quality and risks for complex systems, Proceedings of the 1st International

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

Conference on Transportation Information and Safety, ICTIS, 30 June–2 July 2011: 845–854. China: Wuhan. Kolowrocki, K. & Soszynska-Budny J. 2011. Reliability and Safety of Complex Technical Systems and Processes, DOI: 10.1007/978-0-85729-694-8. Springer-Verlag London Limited. Kostogryzov, A., Nistratov, G. & Nistratov, A. 2012. Some Applicable Methods to Analyze and Optimize System Processes in Quality Management, Total Quality Management and Six Sigma: 127–196. InTech. http://www.intechopen.com/ books/total-quality-management-and-six-sigma/ s o m e - ap p l i c abl e - m e t h o d s - t o - a n aly z e - a n d optimize-system-processes-in-quality-management. Kostogryzov, A., Grigoriev, L., Nistratov, G., Nistratov, A. & Krylov, V. 2013. Prediction and Optimization of System Quality and Risks on the Base of Modelling Processes: 217–244. American Journal of Operations Research, 3. http://www.scirp. org/journal/ajor/. Kostogryzov, A., Nistratov, A. & Nistratov, G. 2013. The Innovative Probability Models and Software Technologies of Risks Prediction for Systems Operating in Various Fields: 146–155. International Journal of Engineering and Innovative Technology (IJEIT), Volume 3, Issue 3, September 2013, http:// www.ijeit.com/archive.php. Burtseva, A. 2013. Quality management of operation of the gas transportation system in conditions of Yamal Peninsula. The dissertation on a scientific degree PhD. Scientific supervisor—Kostogryzov A.I., The Gubkin Russian State University of Oil and Gas.

166

ICIEES_Book.indb 166

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Calculation of the supply and demand of China’s public higher education funding Y. Duan, S.S. Song & J.Y. Zhang Harbin Institute of Technology, Harbin, China

ABSTRACT: The high speed development of economy and the rapid progress of science and technology need to rely on high-quality workers, while the development of higher education as an important way to cultivate high-quality talents has increasingly become the focus of our country and around the world. At the same time, in order to ensure the development of higher education, funding issue is also more and more concerned by the government and the community. This article uses statistical and linear regression method, from two aspects of supply and demand for a more in-depth analysis on China’s higher education funding, the supply and the demand of higher education funding of our country in medium and long-term have carried on the preliminary prediction, then deduce the approximate public higher education funding gap, put forward corresponding to rationalization proposals. Keywords: 1

Public higher education funding; Supply; Demand

INTRODUCTION

In today’s international competition, the final analysis is the competition of talents, especially the excellent talents and high-level talents competition. Therefore, in order to meet the challenge of knowledge economy, our country put forward the strategy of “rejuvenating the country through science and education” and the strategy of “reinvigorating China through human resource development”. China is the country which has the world’s most abundant labor resources, but only to develop education, especially higher education, we have to develop human resources fully and become a powerful country of human resources. At the same time, we should also see clearly that in our country the gap between supply and demand of funds for higher education remains high, our investment in higher education needs to be improved. 2

THE CALCULATION OF PUBLIC HIGHER EDUCATION FUNDING SUPPLY

2.1 The description of the indicator for public higher education funding supply Today, an important indicator of measuring a national government’s support for higher education is the index of public funding per student, namely public education funding per student

accounts for the proportion of the country’s real GDP per capita. But the data related to the indicators in China are not complete, so the calculation of the index of public funding per student in this article uses the data of “China Statistical Yearbook”, with the fiscal higher education funding per student accounting for the proportion of the country’s real GDP per capita instead; although the statistical caliber is slightly different, there is little influence on the result of the empirical analysis [1]. 2.2

The statistical description and prediction of public higher education funding supply

Table 1 shows the fiscal funding for per student and the real GDP per capita in China from 2002 to 2011, and according to these two sets of data to calculate the index of public funding per student, through the comparison of the data in each year, we found that the index of public funding per student showed a downward trend year by year, but the range of decline obviously has slowed down after the year 2006, even has a sign of slight increase in recent years; especially in the year 2011, the signs of rising are obvious, the change rate even reached 13.80. Through the index of public funding per student from 2002 to 2011 listed in Table 1, the change rate for the index of public funding per student in each year can be calculated, and then

167

ICIEES_Book.indb 167

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

Table 1.

The index of public funding per student calculation table.

Year 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 The average rate of change for the index of public funding per student 2020

The fiscal funding per student (yuan)

The real GDP per capita (yuan)

The index of public funding per student (%)

The change rate for the index of public funding per student (%)

6618.20 6297.13 6677.67 6379.86 6210.77 6787.10 8187.85 8831.88 10,510.95 14,026.62 –5.62%

9398.05 10,541.97 12,335.58 14,185.36 16,499.70 20,169.46 23,707.71 25,607.53 30,015.05 35,197.79

70.42 59.73 54.13 44.97 37.64 33.65 34.54 34.49 35.02 39.85

— –15.18 –9.38 –16.92 –16.31 –10.60 2.63 –0.14 1.54 13.80

23.68

the arithmetic average for the rate of change performed, to get the average rate of change for the index of public funding per student which is 5.62%; according to this rate of change, we can calculate that the index of public funding per student in China could reach a value of about 23.68% in 2020.

3

3.1

THE CALCULATION OF PUBLIC HIGHER EDUCATION FUNDING DEMAND

3.2

The statistical description and prediction of public higher education funding demand

3.2.1

The regression analysis of the index of public funding per student 1. The construction of regression model Through the establishment of regression model, we can calculate the average level for the index of public funding per student when given the level of economic development (i.e., real GDP per capita). The regression model used in this paper is as follows: Y = a + b ln X + u

The description of the indicator for public higher education funding demand

From the analysis on the part above, we know that the higher education funding supply is closely related to the country’s level of economic development, but in recent years the funds for higher education are in short supply in many countries. The development of higher education needs financial support, especially public education funding is indispensable, otherwise the higher education cannot be carried out smoothly. This article uses the index of public funding per student to measure the demand for higher education funding; similar to the data of public higher education funds supply, the data related to the indicators in China are also not complete, so we also use the data of “China Statistical Yearbook”, with the fiscal higher education funding per student accounting for the proportion of the country’s real GDP per capita instead of the index of public funding per student.

(1)

where Y is the dependent variable, which means the index of public funding per student for higher education needs public funds index, X is the explanatory variables, which means the real GDP per capita, introduced in logarithmic form, is to minimize the error, u represents a random disturbance term. Adopting the data of the UNESCO to do the linear regression, then using the regression results, we can calculate the international average for the index of public funding per student under the condition of giving the real GDP per capita. 2. Data explanation In this paper, data come from “world education indicators” of the UNESCO, “World Development Indicators Database” of the World Bank, “China Statistical Yearbook”[2], and “China Statistical Yearbook of education funding”[3]. When the data in the same year are inconsistent in each Yearbook, we use the latest Yearbook data. The years for the sample data selection are from 2002

168

ICIEES_Book.indb 168

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

Table 2.

The regression results table.

Explanatory variables

2002

lnX Constant a R2 N

–18.242 –16.68 –33.393 –38.782 –22.854 –29.579 –27.591 –28.235 –66.004 –86.443 203.467 192.761 352.397 409.209 255.058 323.266 303.814 309.807 682.010 822.745 0.16 0.186 0.257 0.333 0.312 0.277 0.331 0.332 0.186 0.16 47 47 57 56 53 50 54 58 56 27

Table 3.

2003

2004

2005

2006

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

The real GDP per capita prediction table.

Year

2002

2003

2004

2005

2006

2007

2008

2009 2010

2011

The real GDP per capita (dollar) 1135 1274 1490 1731 2069 2651 3414 3749 4433 5447 The annual growth rate of the real GDP – 12.25 16.95 16.17 19.53 28.13 28.78 9.81 18.24 22.87 per capita (dollar) (%) The annual average growth rate of the real 19.19 GDP per capita (dollar) (%)

to 2011, the real GDP per capita for each year is calculated at current prices in U.S. dollars. 3. The results of linear regression When doing the regression, the data are imported independently for each year and the linear regression is done 10 times in total; the regression results are as shown in Table 2. In the 10 regression results, the level of statistical significance for the regression coefficient of explanatory variables in each year all reached 1%; from 2004 to 2009, there are six regression equations’ determination coefficient R2 which are above 0.2, namely the goodness of fit is higher, the goodness of fit for the remaining 4 years is lower.

China from 2002 to 2011 is 19.19%, but due to the slow economic growth of China in recent years, the growth rate will not reach such high value, so this article sets the growth rate at 14.00% which should be more reasonable and meets the conditions. In addition, because the exchange rate fluctuations are hard to predict, the rate calculation is unified according to the dollar exchange rate in 2011. Then we can predict the real GDP per capita is $17713.36 in 2020, putting this number into the regression model, we can predict that by 2020 the value of the index of public funding per student needs to reach about 31.43% in China.

3.2.2

4

The prediction for the index of public funding per student Using the linear regression results above, we can predict the index of public funding per student for higher education in 2020, namely the level of the demand of higher education funding. In the 10 regression results above, this paper only uses the six results from 2004 to 2009, the goodness of fit values of which are higher, then putting the arithmetic mean of the six regression coefficients for the explanatory variables into the regression model, we get: Y = 325.592 − 30.072 ln X + u

(2)

To use the model for further prediction, it is also necessary to estimate the explanatory variable X, namely the real GDP per capita, the estimated condition is shown in the table above. Through Table 3, we can see that the annual average growth rate of the real GDP per capita in

THE MEASURE OF THE PUBLIC HIGHER EDUCATION FUNDING GAP

Through the analysis and prediction of the supply and demand of the public higher education funding, we can see that China’s public higher education funding gap is bigger. From the point of view of the index of public funding per student, we see the difference between supply and demand is as high as 7.75%. At the same time, according to the expectation of population development in 2020, China’s “strategic outline for the development of higher education” is expected to achieve the gross enrollment rate of 40% in higher education, then based on that, the gross enrollment rate of higher education has reached 23%, which is announced by the Ministry of education of China in 2007. Assuming that the annual growth rate of the gross enrollment rate is the same, and based on this to calculate the gross enrollment rate in subsequent years, then the annual growth rate of the gross enrollment rate of

169

ICIEES_Book.indb 169

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

Table 4.

High school student numbers prediction table.

Year

Average population for the year (10 thousand)

1998 1999 2000 2001

124,218 125,359 126,246 127,105

The birth rate

The year of birth population (10 thousand)

The number of higher The gross enrollment education enrollment rate of higher education (10 thousand)

1.56% 1.46% 1.40% 1.34%

1942.76952 1835.26308 1771.23138 1700.66490

2017 2018 2019 2020

2008 to 2020 is 4.3487%[4]. Assuming that a student from birth to enter a university needs 19 years, and according to the relevant annual population natural growth rate announced by the National Bureau of statistics, we can estimate the number of students in universities as in the above table. In this paper, we regard the total number of students for four consecutive years of higher education enrollment as the calculation value of the number of students for that year. The table above shows that by 2020, the number of students in universities will be around 27,173,095, whereby we can calculate that by 2020 China’s public higher education funding gap is as high as $37.3 billion.

35.20% 36.74% 38.33% 40%

2017 2018 2019 2020

683.854871 674.275656 678.912988 680.265960

of financial expenditure of the central and provincial governments, it has the real implementation of the related laws and regulations and policy measures which have been announced to ensure higher education funding investment. It should make the public higher education funding both in absolute quantity and relative comparable amount increase by a large margin, in order to narrow the public funding gap for higher education, to meet the requirements of the development of higher education, and to build China into a real powerful country in higher education.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 5

CONCLUSION

In recent years, the level of economic development in China has been greatly improved, GDP and per capita income are all obviously increased, the government fiscal investment in education on the absolute quantity is increasing year by year, but at present China’s fiscal investment for education accounted for the proportion of GDP is still not high. At the same time, from the prediction of the supply and demand situation on the medium- and long-term funding of higher education in China in this article, we can see that the problem of the overall shortage of investment for public higher education funding will be the key factor which hinders the development of higher education in China, so it is very urgent to make up for the public higher education funding gap. Therefore, the government should strengthen the public function for education itself; as the main undertaker of funds for higher education, it must further strengthen the role of the main channel of finance and increase the proportion of higher education funding expenditure in the level

This article is a result of the Heilongjiang Province Natural Fund Project (G201305), the project supported by “the Fundamental Research Fund for the Central Universities” (Grant No. HIT. HSS.201233), the graduate student education innovation program funded projects in Heilongjiang province (JGXM_HLJ_2011046) and the graduate education teaching reform project of Harbin Institute of Technology (JGYJ-201205).

REFERENCES [1] Changjun, Yue. 2011. International comparative study of the supply and demand of higher education funding. Peking University Education Review. 9 (3): 92–104. [2] The National Bureau of statistics. 2011. Chinese Statistical Yearbook. Beijing: Chinese Statistics Press. [3] The National Bureau of statistics. 2011. Chinese Education Funding Statistical Yearbook. Beijing: Chinese Statistics Press. [4] Wanpeng, Zhang & Qianhong, Wang. 2009. The matching feature analysis of fiscal input on education and demand of higher education funding. Fudan Education Forum. 7 (4): 48–52.

170

ICIEES_Book.indb 170

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The study of undergraduate research in teaching-oriented universities Tao Zhang, GuoXi Sun & JingLong Zuo Guangdong University of Petrochemical Technology, Maoming, Guangdong, China

ABSTRACT: In the process of undergraduate research, teaching-oriented universities have obtained certain achievements, and had some problems. In order to improve undergraduate research and cultivate high-quality innovative talents, the authors put forward improvements and methods in seven aspects including research propaganda, enterprise project, teacher management, research platform, academic competition, and incentive program. Facts have proved that the above methods are effective. Keywords: 1

undergraduate research; innovation; SRTP

INTRODUCTION

2

Universities of the world gave high attention to the undergraduate research and launched various projects to cultivate undergraduate innovation ability in the process of exploring innovative higher education. In 1969, MIT established the country’s first campus-wide program, the Undergraduate Research Opportunities Program, to encourage undergraduate students reach a certain degree to participate in teachers’ research program (Ash 2003). In 2007, the Chinese Ministry of Education launched the Student Research Training Plan (SRTP) (Lian 2011). With the rapid development of science and society, undergraduate research has become a trend in higher education, and played an important role in improving undergraduate students’ independent innovation ability, research ability, and practice ability (Laursen, Seymour, Hunter, Thiry & Melton 2010). Some universities in China belong to the teaching-oriented universities, generally referred to university dominated in teaching service to local economy. Since the beginning of SRTP, we found that it benefits students, teachers, and universities, and also found some problems (Elizabeth & Diane 2008). This article proposes improvements to further develop appropriate SRTP for teaching-oriented universities, according to the characteristics of the actual status of the universities and students. The improvements include seven aspects such as research propaganda, enterprise project, teacher management, research platform, academic competition, and incentive program.

EXPERIENCES

2.1 SRTP increases the students’ initiative in learning, and cultivates the students' scientific research patience and team cooperation ability SRTP usually consists of three or four students in the form of a team, each member undertakes the corresponding research work according to his/her ability. In the process of implementation of the project, mid-term examinations of project, daily management of teacher, and mutual support of team members, all of these encourage students to increase learning initiative, to overcome difficulties and complete the project. 2.2 SRTP enhances the mutual communication between teachers and students In the process of mentoring the project, the teacher often should ask about the progress of the project and help students determine the task solution. At the same time, students should obtain the required knowledge or direction of the project through guidance. The teachers can fully master the present level of the students, which is helpful for teachers to adjust the teaching plan in the later teaching and experiment arrangement. Views and opinions proposed by students in the project sometimes may also give some good ideas to the teachers in solving the problem (Pascarella & Terenzini 1991). By scheduling appropriate time allocations and project arrangement, teachers can find mutual promotion in the teaching process and guiding students, rather than restricting.

171

ICIEES_Book.indb 171

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

2.3

SRTP promotes the reform of curriculum

SRTP is a systematic project involving a considerable amount of knowledge, which requires avoiding defects on the students in a single discipline knowledge, is also useful to improve the students’ knowledge structure and master the multidisciplinary knowledge. In the teaching process, we can achieve the above purpose by reducing hours of theory, increasing the proportion of elective courses and experiments, enhancing students' practical abilities. We should learn from the advanced teaching methods from all over the world, improve the students’ learning efficiency, build a diversified evaluation system, so as to enhance the students’ creative and comprehensive ability. 3 3.1

SHORTCOMINGS Insufficient funds and less of approved projects

Generally there are two kinds of project applications for the teaching-oriented universities. One is student’ self-reliance project accounting for a large proportion, the other is teacher project. Students can apply for the college project according to their interests, collected information and professional characteristics, and other items, but funding of project is limited. Teachers with scientific research project which has sufficient funding choose a certain number of students to participate in relevant scientific research work each year. Subject to students’ knowledge structure and scientific research experience, generally few students are chosen, and are engaged in not very important scientific research work. Overall, the proportion of the number of students participating in the project in a class is probably 10%, which indicates that the number of participants is too small. 3.2

The teachers are not willing to guide the students, and the guide way of them exist a big difference

The way of directing students exist a big difference, and cannot achieve standardization. In the process of guidance, some teachers do not play their due responsibilities, and let the student complete the project freely, with not caring about student’s progress for a long time. Some teachers like to schedule the students’ work according to their own scientific research style, which leads to suppressing the students’ creativity and imagination and is adverse to the students’ self-innovation consciousness. 3.3

Compared with research universities, fewer students in teaching-oriented universities participated in SRTP, the reason of which may be due to lack of propaganda and their relatively weaker basic knowledge. When the project has been approved and enters into the acceptance stage annually, there is always part of the project not being completed. Perhaps the reason is: inadequate preparation before project application leads to student’s incapable of carrying out the project, or deviation of research methods leads to the lack of research time. Acceptance of the project in general is completed in the form of essay writing, patent application or the actual hardware. The annual statistics show that fewer papers are published or papers published in normal level, patent application or software copyright application is also less. The number of projects applied in practical engineering is less too (Volkwein & Carbone 1994). This case of limited funds invested into limited number of projects in teaching-oriented universities will affect the implementation of SRTP further. It shows that the projects of student should be carefully considered, instructors track project progress regularly, existing problems must be promptly corrected.

4

Teachers in teaching-oriented universities dominated by teaching, compared with the teachers in research universities, exist a litter weak in cultivating students’ scientific research ability and practical training. Teachers are busy with their own teaching and research work, whose consciousness in the aspects of directing students’ scientific research is poor. According to the number and the competition level of projects, universities reward teachers who had participated in SRTP, with no other more incentive way, and is a disadvantage to teachers participated in students’ scientific research.

The number of students participated in SRTP and the research achievement is few

4.1

IMPROVEMENTS AND METHODS Strengthen propaganda

To attract latent excellent students to engage in research and training, first strengthening propaganda is a good way. Universities regularly organize academic lectures for junior students, and invite senior students and instructors participated in research project to interpret SRTP. Seniors talk about learning ability, research innovation, project process and how to get help in the research process from the perspective of students. Instructors introduce SRTP from topics such as “What is SRTP? How to Select Topic?” with the outstanding projects as an example, and told the students how

172

ICIEES_Book.indb 172

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

to implement innovative projects, according to their interests and their ability (Gonzalez 2001). At the same time teachers also emphasize the patience in the process of scientific research, and develop good scientific literacy, which is very important in the future. 4.2

The introduction of enterprise project

In addition to the above-mentioned students’ selfreliance project and teachers’ project, projects come from the enterprises cooperation which is also a good way to SRTP. Projects from the enterprises are fewer in China, usually commissioned by the universities or teachers to solve a particular problem. Enterprises’ projects have adequate funding, which is beneficial for undergraduate students to understand actual social demand and solve practical problems. Such projects should be allocated properly to meet the students’ current ability by teachers, so it can both make up the lack of funds and improve students’ practical abilities. 4.3

good balance between students’ innovation and teachers’ guidance. 4.4

Establish scientific research communication platform

After the project is completed, the research achievements can be revealed in various forms. Detailed forms are as follows: brief research introduction or actual hardware, university’s annual scientific festival, website propaganda of universities and colleges, participating in competitions dominated by enterprises, etc. This not only enhances students’ pride and honor, develops oral communication and psychological quality, but also attracts junior students participate in the project, and may attract enterprises interested in cooperating with universities’ research projects. Through a number of methods, such as create undergraduate research web site, publish outstanding students’ research paper, collecting hardware, and software program of project, it helps to provide favorable research and innovation activities of undergraduate students.

Strengthen the management of instructor

Research level to some extent depend on the level of college instructors guide the level, so the development of post management responsibilities perfect instructor to guide time, frequency, content to do the detailed requirements. To some extent student’s research ability largely depends on the instructors’ ability, therefore formulating management responsibilities of teachers is necessary, including detailed guiding times, content and method, etc. Teachers who was irresponsible or do not complete the required guidance should be handled accordingly. Mutual evaluation of teachers and students of the University of Minnesota is a good assessment method (Zhang & Zhang 2008). The authors had directed the project “smart home based on ARM”, which can be regarded as a miniature product research and development, almost including from market research, product development and other aspects (Helen 2004). In the process of guidance, the authors mainly help students determine the direction of research and method to acquire information, and the detailed work including hardware design, software development, debugging and so on is completed by students independently. In this process, teachers need to organize the project members to attend weekly meeting, and the students present their views based on project progress, discuss the next task of the project together, which provide adequate communication opportunities for teachers and students (Johnson 2002). Meanwhile, the instructor should hold a

4.5

Academic competitions promote SRTP

Students’ participation in academic competitions is an effective way to promote SRTP (Link, Swann & Bozeman 2008). For example, students of authors’ university can take part in academic competitions including: National Electronic Design Competition held every two years, Electronic Design Contest in Guangdong Province held every two years, regional contest held by enterprises and related association, etc. The competitions not only stimulate students’ learning enthusiasm, but also urges students to improve their professional quality, cultivate students’ ability of obtaining information, strengthens the skill of analyzing and solving problem, and their communication and presentation skills. Participation in a high level of academic competition can not only cultivate students’ comprehensive ability to use basic knowledge, but can also develop students’ consciousness of innovation and team cooperation ability. 4.6

Increase incentives for teachers and students

Increasing the incentive of the completed project is helpful in attracting excellent teachers and students to participate in the project. For students, incentives can be used in the form of reward or credits, or provide favorable conditions for students during the time of looking for a job or graduate admission (Lian 2011). For teachers, universities may provide certain concessions in

173

ICIEES_Book.indb 173

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

the professional qualification, project application, and annual assessment. 5

CONCLUSIONS

Teaching-oriented universities had found some problems in the process of undergraduate research. The authors propose improvements and methods from seven aspects, which were proved to have some effect in fact. By only continuously using advanced methods of worldwide universities in the future can improve the level of undergraduate research. REFERENCES [1] Ash Merkel, C. (2003). Undergraduate Research at the Research Universities. New Directions for Teaching and Learning 2003:39–54. [2] Lian Quan, Q. (2011). The Present Situation and Reflections on the Undergraduate innovation Experiment Program in Research Universities of China. Journal of Higher Education 32:81–87. [3] Elizabeth, T. & Diane, G. (2008). Weaving Together Undergraduate Research, Mentoring of Junior Faculty, and Assessment: The Case of an Interdisciplinary Program. Innovative Higher Education 33:29–38.

[4] Zhang, J.M. & Zhang, Y. (2008). Reflections on scientific research training plan for universities students. Research in Higher Education of Engineering 6:98–102. [5] Helen, D. (2004). Designing and Implementing a Project-Based ICT Course in a Teacher Education Setting: Rewards and Pitfalls. Education and Information Technologies 9:387–404. [6] Gonzalez. C. (2001). Undergraduate research, graduate mentoring, and the university’s mission. Science 293:1624–1626. [7] Volkwein, J.F. & Carbone, D.A. (1994). The impact of departmental research and teaching climates on undergraduate growth and satisfaction. Journal of Higher Education 65:147–159. [8] Pascarella, E.T. & Terenzini, P.T. (1991). How college affects students: Findings and insights from 20 years of research. San Francisco, CA: JosseyBass. [9] Laursen, S., Seymour, E., Hunter, A.B., Thiry, H. & Melton, G. (2010). Undergraduate research in the sciences: Engaging students in real science. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. [10] Johnson, W.B. (2002). The intentional mentor: Strategies and guidelines for the practice of mentoring. Professional Psychology, Research and Practice 33:88–96. [11] Link, A., Swann, C. & Bozeman, B. (2008). A time allocation study of university faculty. Economics of Education Review 27(4):363–374.

174

ICIEES_Book.indb 174

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Comparative study of conditions of mass sporting activities in Guanzhong Region, Shannxi Province Chunlan Li College of Education and Public Management, Weinan Normal University, Shannxi, China

ABSTRACT: To have a in-depth understanding of the status quo and existing problems of mass sporting activities of Guanzhong Region of Shannxi Province, the paper, by applying the literature data method and field investigation, and by referring to the related data of Sports Bureau of Shannxi Province, made an in-depth study in the aspects of participation of sporting activities, sports organizations, activity sites, instruction of social sports instructors, and funds investment in mass sporting activities. The study result shows that, mass sporting activities in Guanzhong Region show a rosy prospect but there are many problems faced during their development. At the same time with analyzing the existing problems, the paper also proposes the feasible suggestions and countermeasures. Keywords: 1

Shannxi Province; Guanzhong Region; mass sporting activities; carry out

INTRODUCTION

In June 1995, State Council promulgated the “Mass sporting Program”, and in August of the same year, Standing Committee of the National People’s Congress passed the “Sports Laws of the People’s Republic of China”. After that, a series of regulations and rules have been promulgated, and the mass sporting activities and nationwide fitness activities have been developed in a healthy way. In order to guarantee the legitimate rights and interests of citizens to participate in the sporting activities, promote the nationwide fitness programs, improve the healthy quality of citizens, and increase the social harmony, the 33rd meeting of the 10th Standing Committees of the People’s Congresses of Shannxi Province passed the “Shannxi Provincial Mass sporting Regulations” (hereinafter referred to as the “Regulation”) on September 27th 2007 in accordance with the “Sports Low of the People’s Republic of China”, related laws regulations of Shannxi Province, and according to the real conditions of Shannxi Province. The “Regulation” took effect in December 1st 2007. In order to fully understand the mass sporting activities in the province after the implementation of the “Regulation”, the research team of the “Study on the Current Condition of Mass Sporting Path Project of Shannxi Province and its Development Strategy”, conducted a series

of researches on the mass sporting activities of Guanzhong Region of Shannxi Province. Based on the related data of Sports Bureau of Shannxi Province, and by processing and analyzing the investigation results, the research team has made an objective conclusion and proposed feasible suggestions. The study also provides reliable theoretical basis for related government agencies to optimize policies, and improve the effect of mass sporting activities, so as to promote the faster and better development of mass sporting activities in Shannxi Province. 2

RESEARCH OBJECTS AND METHODS

The research objects of the study are the residents of the communities of five cities of Guanzhong region of Shannxi Province, such as Xi’an, Tongchuan, Baoji, Weinan, and Xianyang (including both rural communities and urban communities). The research methods used in this study include the field investigations, random interviews, literature data, and mathematical statistics. The research on the aspects of population and geographical location, mass sporting activities, social sports instruction, sporting facilities, and investment on mass sporting activities of five cities of Guanzhong Region of Shannxi Province has been made.

175

ICIEES_Book.indb 175

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

3

INVESTIGATION RESULTS AND ANALYSIS

3.1

Population and geographical conditions of the cities of Guanzhong Region of Shannxi Province

Table 1 indicates the large population (permanent residents) of Xi’an city. The reason for the large population of Xi’an city is that it is the capital city of Shannxi Province, not only a geological center of Guanzhong Region of Shannxi province, but also a political, economic, and cultural (a lot of universities are located in this city) center of the province. Baoji, Xianyang, and Weinan are major industrial and agricultural cities of Shannxi Province, close to the capital city, Xi’an, and they are also concentrated with large population. 3.2

Mass sporting activities organized in the cities of Guanzhong Region of Shannxi Province (2011)

3.2.1 The number of activities and participants It can be seen from below table, the number of activities organized in Xi’an ranks in the first place, followed by Baoji, Xianyang, Weinan, Tongchuan, in sequence. The number of participants of Xi’an still ranks in the first place, followed by Weinan, Baoji, Xianyang, and Tongchuan in sequence. Comparatively, both the number of activities and participants of mass sporting activities of Xi’an ranks in the first place, therefore, it can be concluded that the mass sporting activities are well organized in this city. The number of participants in Weinan has reached as high as 500,000 person-times, although the city only organized 20 activities. From the

Table 1. Permanent residents of the cities (10,000 persons). Year

Xi’an

Tongchuan

Baoji

Xianyang Weinan

2010 2011

847.4 851.3

83.50 83.82

371.9 372.7

489.8 491.2

528.9 530.1

Table 2. The number and the participants of mass sporting activities organized in the cities. Xi’an Tongchuan Baoji Xianyang Weinan Number of 200 activities (times) Number of 60 participants (10,000)

22

120

37

20

3

45

17

50

above figure, it can be seen that the influence of mass sporting activities is great in this city, which reflects that the effect of the activities in this city is better than that of other cities. From the Table 1 it can be seen that, in Xi’an, 600,000 people participated in 200 sporting activities in 2011. The proportion of participants to its total population of 8.5134 million was only about 7%, while this figure was about 12% in Baoji, 9% in Weinan, and 3% in both Xianyang and Tongchuan. It can be concluded that, the proportion of participants of mass sporting activities in Guanzhong Region of Shannxi province is low. 3.2.2

The number of sports organizations and sports sites of urban areas and rural areas It can be seen from the Table 3, Xi’an, with its over 664 sports organizations and 1600 sports sites, ranks in the first place, followed by Xianyang, Weinan, Baoji, and Tongchuan in sequence. To a certain extent, it can be seen that Xi’an city highly regards the mass sporting activities. From the comparison between urban and rural areas, the growth rate of sports organizations of urban area was higher than that of rural area. The accumulative number of sports organizations also far exceeds the number of rural areas. Obviously, the number of sports organizations of mass sporting activities in urban areas is more than that of rural area, regardless of capital city or other cities, which reflects the gap of dual structure between urban and rural area. Since the awareness of mass sporting in rural area is weak, there are only few sports organizations, and they organize relatively few fitness activities. As a result, only few participants may take part in the activities. The mass sporting activities in rural areas need to be further strengthened. 3.3

Social sports instructors in cities of Guanzhong Region of Shannxi Province

In recent years, the social sports instructor team of China has been constantly growing, and so far it has exceeded 0.7 million. This figure is still increasing. However, as a country with the population exceeding 1.3 billion, there is only one social sports instructor for each 1,900 people. Comparatively, there is one social sports instructor for each 40 people in Germany, which has a large gap between two countries. From Table 1 and Table 4, it can be seen that, in 2011, newly increased population of Xi’an city was 39,300, with the newly added 1,338 social sports instructors, which means a new social sports instructor was added for addition of each 30 people. With this growth rate, the social sports instructor team of Shannxi Province will become stronger, enough to reach the target of

176

ICIEES_Book.indb 176

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

Table 4. Number of social sports instructors in the cities.

Table 5. Investment of cities on mass sporting activities (10,000 Yuan).

Xi’an Tongchuan Baoji Xianyang Weinan Xi’an Tongchuan Baoji Xianyang Weinan National 232 second level National 1106 third level

30

85

100

300

270

400

69 Fiscal 1000 94 expenditure Public welfare 8000 52 fund from lottery Social – 2 investment

617

one social sports instructor for each 1,000 people. In the study, the author conducted random interviews with some population groups. The interview result showed that, many participants neither knew how to choose suitable sports program for them, and nor how to take exercise. Most of them just simulated others but they did not know what the meaning of “aerobic exercise” and “anaerobic exercise” was. It is observed that people engaging in sporting activities lack sports knowledge, which, to some extent, reflects the weakness of guidance from social sports instructors. Failure of sports organizations in establishing an effective supervision mechanism on social sporting activities results in slack services and poor instruction results. Lack of sports instruction and insufficient sport health knowledge directly restricts the sporting activities of people of Shannxi Province. 3.4

Investment on mass sporting activities of the cities of Guanzhong Region of Shannxi Province

The “National Health Regulations” requires to incorporate the mass sporting cause into the related regional economic and social development plans, and to list the expenses of mass sporting work into local level financial budget. The public welfare fund from lottery arranged by administrative departments of sports is mainly used for mass sporting cause. Table 5 indicates that, the total investment of Xi’an city on mass sporting cause was 90 million Yuan in 2011, with per capita of 1.057 Yuan. This figure was 1.704 Yuan in Baoji, 1.445 Yuan in Xianyang, 1.291 Yuan in Weinan, and 1.766 Yuan in Tongchuan, all of which were far less than the required per capita investment of 3 Yuan. In the research, the author has also learnt that, although government has invested to build a lot of sports venues, most of them do not belong to “society”, or “communities”, but belong to some “departments”. Available sports venues to public are obviously insufficient, and the sports venues of schools and organizations rarely open to the public, which leads to insufficient sports facilities for mass sporting activities.

4

115

480

345

370

230

259.4

150

–

80

CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTIONS

1. Main factors for the poor effect of mass sporting activities in the cities of Guanzhong Region of Shannxi Province. Although regions and cities have strengthened their organization of the sporting activities, the overall degree of participation is low, especially in rural areas. The factors for causing this result include the weak consciousness in physical exercise, few sports organizations and few sports activities. It is suggested that sports administrative department should strengthen the promotion of mass sporting activities, to enhance the exercise consciousness of the public in the forms of propagandist manual, exercise handbook, audiovisual materials, and on-site lectures, to increase the number of participations of mass sporting activities and focus on the effect of activities, to encourage more participations through the influence of sports events, and thus to reach a degree of full participation of mass sporting activities. 2. Lack of sports instruction and insufficient sports knowledge directly restricts the mass sporting activities of Shannxi Province. Although the number of social sports instructors is increasing every year, the service quality of them is yet to be further improved. It is also suggested that social sports instructors should organize regular education programs for residents of communities, to allow them to understand the aims and significance of physical fitness, understand the importance of scientific fitness, and to allow them to master one or two basic sports methods and to be able to conduct simple self medical supervision. Meanwhile, sports administrative departments should strengthen the training, management, and appraisal on the social sports instructors, to encourage them to fulfil their duties of disseminating the knowledge of sporting activities, imparting sporting exercise skills, and teaching the sporting exercise method, and to organize related sports activities.

177

ICIEES_Book.indb 177

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The program of Education Bureau of Shannxi Province (2013JK0517). REFERENCES [1] Shannxi Provincial Bureau of Statistics. Shannxi Province Statistical Yearbook 2012. Beijing: China Statistical Publishing House, 2013. [2] Wu Changling, Zhu Yuanli. Instruction of Mass Sporting Activities. Shannxi: Shannxi Science & Technology Press, 2011.

[3] Editing Team. Current Development and Future of Sports Science. Beijing: Beijing Sport University Press, 2002. [4] China’s Mass Sports Survey Team. Investigation and Research on the Status Quo of China’s Mass Sports. Beijing: Beijing Sport University Press, 2005. [5] General Administration of Sport Plans to Increase the Investment in Mass Sporting. http://bjyouth.ynet. com/3.1/1105/25/5982663.html, May 25th 201. [6] Liuhong Zang A differential study on development of body-building path in XinJiang urban residential Areas ICMS2009, v 1, p 193–196, 2009.

178

ICIEES_Book.indb 178

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Effect of Leader–member high-quality exchanges on teachers’ organization commitment ShuJing Fu School of Management, Capital Normal University, Beijing, China

ABSTRACT: Leader–member Exchange in primary and secondary schools includes the low level exchanges and the high level exchanges. The former refers to only limited to conduct under the contract of employment. The latter is mainly based on feelings, respect and trust for social exchange. The empirical studies have shown that high-quality exchanges have positive effect on teachers’ organizational commitment. Keywords:

High-quality exchanges; Organization Commitment; Leader–Member Exchange

Studies of literature have shown that research on Leader–Member Exchange is not much seen in primary and secondary schools, and corresponding research is much less on what will bring to teachers’ organizational commitment due to their exchanges. This article analyzed the effect from an empirical perspective. 1

CONCEPT DEFINITION

This article mainly concerns two key concepts on the Leader–Member high-quality exchanges and teachers’ organizational commitments, we now elaborate this two concepts. 1.1

Leader–member high-quality exchanges

Leader–Member Exchange Theory (LMX Theory for short) first appeared in the researches of George B. Graen (1975), and so on. LMX Theory suggests that there is an ongoing, interactive exchange process between leaders and their subordinates. Two exchange relationships of the low level and the high level are developed by the exchange.[1] Lower-quality exchanges are only limited to conduct under the contract of employment.[2] Leaders exercise formal organizational authority, and provide the standard compensation and benefits of organization for the member in the case of exchange relationship. Promissory treatment is provided after subordinates finish the specific task, therefore, the whole process is like a deal. Members only assume their role within the job duties, follow legitimate work assignment of leadership, and

their work scopes will not exceed the employment contract required. Lower-quality exchanges mostly depend on economy, is the exchange between leadership and all members. High-quality exchanges develop between the leaders and their subordinates, are social exchanges beyond the required scope of the employment contract.[3] No task is clearly required to be finished for leadership and members in this case of exchange relationship, nor does it expressly stipulate as the contract that somebody must do something for each other, both sides are primarily for access to each other’s feelings, respect and trust. A sense of obligation between leadership and members is being strengthened, their feelings are becoming deeper, and their relations develop towards a higher level by this exchange. Members volunteered to put in extra work and effort at this time, and the leaders also want to give more support and help; members will get better performance, and the leaders will allow a greater affirmation, encouragement and a greater degree of autonomy. Since this exchange is more than the scope of job instruction, not willing to be done by all members, this is the exchange between leadership and partial members. This article focuses on effects of this exchange to teachers’ organizational commitment. 1.2 Teachers’ organizational commitment The concept of Organizational commitment is raised at first by sociologist Howard. S. Becker of United States in the 1960s, meaning the employees are fear of leaving their post that will lead to enormous losses and had to stay in the organization.[4]

179

ICIEES_Book.indb 179

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

The organizational behaviorist Bruce Buchanan II etc. on the basis of their researches, have redefined organizational commitment in the 1970s, arguing that commitment mainly be manifested as an emotional dependence of employees to organization. Employees are reluctant to leave an organization, which is by no means unilateral reason of devoting too many, or the reason for fear of losing their pensions and other benefits, but a lot of emotional dependence produced by the organization.[5] Since then, many scholars, such as Richard T. Mowday, Lyman W. Porter, Richard M. Steers, Stephen P. Robbins and so on have defined this concept. According to researches of scholars, this article suggest that teachers’ organizational commitment should be defined as the teachers’ attitude towards identification and admission of school, intention of identification to the goals and values of school, the inclination to do his best for the school, the tendency to maintain the interests of the school and the desire of belonging to the school organization. Different from signing a contract on work assignments as well as vocational roles between individuals and organizations, organizational commitment is a kind of “psychological contract”, it identifies internal “rule” of connection between the individual teacher and school organizations. Study on dimensions and measurements of organizational commitment, the more representative study is from Canada scholar John P. Meyer and Natalie J. Allen. In 1984, on the basis of previous researches, they made double-factor theory of “emotional commitment” and “remain committed”, in 1990, further developed organizational commitment into the three dimensional structure of emotional commitment, continuance commitment and normative commitment.[6] We went to the primary and secondary schools performing investigation and found that ideal commitment should be added in measuring dimensions of teachers’ organizational commitment in primary and secondary schools, therefore, this study uses four dimensions. Affective commitment refers to the identification of teachers to the school, they would like to do contribution for the survival and development of unit, with much affection, even no considering the reward and working beyond the duty; ideal commitment is focusing on personal growth, attaching importance to the continuous upgrade of their professional qualities, continuous pursuing educational ideals; normative commitment refers to compliance with social standards and school systems, performing occupational duties and taking teachers’ professional ethics as guidelines; ongoing commitment refers to willingness of staying and working in the schools, not leaving job and long-term working for the school.

2

EMPIRICAL ANALYSIS

In this study, leadership mainly refers to the primary and secondary school’s principals, and teachers mainly refer to the instructor, not including other administrative staff, it is principals and teachers that whose high-quality exchanges has effect on teachers’ organizational commitment. 2.1

Research method

The actual data of high-quality exchanges on teachers’ organizational commitment are mainly from the questionnaire, the questionnaire consists primarily of two major sections including highquality exchanges of principals and teachers as well as teachers’ organizational commitment. 2.1.1 Questionnaire design Based primarily on the previous studies on measurement of organizational commitment and Leader– Member Exchange, questionnaire design refers to Leader–Member Exchange (LMX7) questionnaire containing 7 titles provided by George B. Graen and M. Uhi-Bien, the questionnaire can make reliable and effective measurement to the level of LMX; Richard T. Mowday organizational commitment questionnaire etc. We have referred to the previous researches, meanwhile, we interviewed the principals, the director of teaching and moral education, the group leader of research on teaching and the grade, the classroom teachers and so on in the primary and secondary school, then the original questionnaire come into being. And then, many issues are found after investigation using the original questionnaire, on the basis of reading literatures again and conducting interviews, the second draft questionnaire come into being. After that, we performed pilot investigation, literature research and interviews once again. With an in-depth understanding of literature, and increases of depth and personnel of interviews, questionnaires have also been improved time and time again. 2.1.2 Questionnaire distribution A total of 1412 questionnaires are issued, 1217 questionnaires are collected, and only 987 questionnaires are valid. Main personnel to fill questionnaire are principals and teachers coming from 19 provinces, municipalities and autonomous regions of Chinese Mainland, regions are as following: Anhui province, Beijing, Chongqing, Fujian province, Gansu province, Guangxi Zhuang autonomous region, Hebei province, Henan province, Heilongjiang province, Hubei province, Hunan province, Jiangsu province, Jiangxi province, Inner Mongolia autonomous

180

ICIEES_Book.indb 180

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

region, Ningxia Hui autonomous region, Shandong province, Shanxi province, Shanghai and Xinjiang Uygur autonomous region. Some provinces and cities are also selected from the seven regions of Chinese Mainland to perform focused questionnaire, for example: Shanghai in Eastern China, Guangxi Zhuang autonomous region in Southern China, Henan province in Central China, Beijing in Northern China, Heilongjiang province in Northeastern China, Ningxia Hui autonomous region and Xinjiang Uygur autonomous region in Northwestern china and Chongqing municipality in Southwestern China. 2.1.3 Questionnaire statistics After questionnaires collection, we got rid of invalid questionnaires by filtering, and used SPSS16.0 as data-processing tools. Cronbach’s α coefficient of total questionnaires, high-quality exchanges and teachers’ organizational commitment for reliability analysis is 0.967, 0.903 and 0.844, respectively, all of them are greater than 0.8. Reliability coefficient is above 0.8 according to the principles of statistics, which shows that greater credibility of measurements. Therefore, overall reliability of the questionnaire is relatively perfect. Including three experts specializing in the measurement research and two experts specializing in educational leadership research, a total of five experts are invited to modify and perfect the questionnaire for the validity, therefore, the questionnaire has a better validity. 2.2

Findings

Based on the questionnaire, correlation analysis and regression analysis were performed. Correlate used in the study, mainly refers to Pearson correlation, the specific data are shown in Table 1. Correlation of questionnaires shows that all of Pearson correlation between high-quality exchanges and the various factors of teachers’ organization commitments are positive, which indicates that they were positively correlated; as the significant probability of Pearson correlation (Sig two-tailed test) is 0.00, less than the significance level of 0.01. According to the theory of statistics,

Table 1.

the conclusion is that there is a highly positive correlation between them. In regression analysis, we used “high-quality exchanges” as independent, and “teachers’ organizational commitment” as the dependent, the result of regression analysis is shown in Table 2. The data in Table 2 indicate: significance level of F statistic measurements (Sig.) is 0.00, less than 0.01, then expressed as the “high-quality exchanges” as independent can well explain the variability of the dependent, and “high-quality exchanges” independent has explained 40.9% of “teacher organizational commitment” dependent. Table 2 also shows, t-test for the statistic observations is 24.321 that is larger than 2, and the corresponding probability of the t-test Sig is 0.00 that is less than 0.01, indicating regression coefficients B is significant, it can be regarded as there is a significant linear relationship between “high-quality exchanges” independent and “teachers’ organizational commitment” dependent. The empirical studies for the primary and secondary schools have shownthat high-quality exchanges have positive effect on teachers’ organizational commitment. High-quality exchanges between principals and teachers is in favor of teachers’ identification to schools’ concept, inspiring them to make dedication for survival and development of school, even overlooking the paid, and working beyond duties range; can lead teachers to incessantly make progress, and persist to pursue education ideal; can make teachers upgrade sense of responsibility, and comply with various rules;

Table 2. Regression on effect of high-quality exchanges on teachers’ organizational commitment. Teachers’ organizational commitment R2 Adjusted R Square F Sig. of F Unstandardized coefficients Standardized coefficients T Sig. of T

.409 .409 591.522 .000 .375 .640 24.321 .000

Correlation on high-quality exchanges and teachers’ organization commitments. Affective commitment

Pearson correlation .578**

Ideal commitment

Normative commitment

Continuance commitment

.542**

.538**

.540**

**Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level (two-tailed).

181

ICIEES_Book.indb 181

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

can make teachers take school as home, and would remain long-term working in the school.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT The study was supported by Beijing Natural Science Foundation “Study on Behavior of Leader– member Exchange in Educational Organization” (9113019).

REFERENCES

[3] Liden, R. C.; Sparrowe, R. T.; Wayne, S. J. Leader– member exchange theory: The past and potential for the future. In: KM Rowland, GR Ferris Eds. Research in Personnel and Human Resource Management. Vol. 15. Greenwich, CT: JAI Press, 1997, 47–119. [4] Becker, H. S. Notes on the Concept of Commitment. The American Journal of Sociology, 1960, 66 (1):32–40. [5] Buchanan B. II. Building organizational commitment: The socialization of managers in work organizations. Administrative Science Quarterly, 1974, 19 (4): 533–546. [6] Allen, N. J., Meyer, J. P. The Measurement and Antecedents of Affective, Continuance and Normative Commitment to the Organization. Journal of Occupational Psychology, 1990, 63: 1–18.

[1] Liden, R. C.; Graen, G. B. Generalizability of the vertical dyad linkage model leadership. Acdemic of Management Journal, 1980, 23 (3): 451–465. [2] Dansereau, F. Jr.; Graen, G. B.; Haga, W. J. A vertical dyad linkage approach to leadership within formal organizations: a longitudinal investigation of the role making process. Organizational Behavior and Human Performance, 1975, 13: 46–78.

182

ICIEES_Book.indb 182

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Endowment and waqf in higher education A. Md. Yusof School of Post-Graduate Studies, Universiti Teknologi Malaysia, Johor Bahru, Johor, Malaysia

I. Omar Faculty of Geoinformation and Real Estate, Universiti Teknologi Malaysia, Johor Bahru, Johor, Malaysia

J. Johan Faculty of Civil Engineering, Universiti Teknologi Malaysia, Johor Bahru, Johor, Malaysia

ABSTRACT: Education becomes one of the basic keys to improve the dynamics of leadership wealth and social change and thus the quality of civilization. By way of widening the accessibility to education means improving the global wisdom of the knowledge-based society, hence, the quality of human civilization. This paper compares the philosophy, role, and the effectiveness of endowment and waqf in supporting higher education around the world. This theoretical paper reviews how endowments and waqf functioned and contributed for the development of higher education around the world. It also provides the avenue to explore the potential endowments if it is managed professionally, trustworthily and effectively. Keywords: 1

Philantrophy; Endowment; Waqf; Higher Education and Sustainability

INTRODUCTION

The right to equal access to education is clearly outlined in the Article 26 of The Universal Human Right Declaration, This article provides that: 1. Everyone has the right to education. Education shall be free, at least in the elementary and fundamental stages. Elementary education shall be compulsory. Technical and professional education shall be made generally available and higher education shall be equally accessible to all on the basis of merit. 2. Education shall be directed to the full development of the human personality and to the strengthening of respect for human rights and fundamental freedoms. It shall promotes understanding, tolerance and friendship among all nations, racial or religious groups, and shall further the activities of the United Nations for the maintenance of peace. In promoting education as being accessible by everyone in various countries, some may be denied their rights to education due to financial constraints. Thus financial assistance is needed to make education accessible by everyone. In this context, the state funded education model has been adopted for centuries along with the rising of private learning institutions. However, as financial

becomes tight due to a number of unfavorable budget cuts especially during the economic and subprime crisis. Just like the other sector, education now faces a pronounced and profound dilemma. The education sector is facing the two prominent challenges; to replace the funding shortfall arising from the reduction in state support, and the security of investment required for future growth. The setting up of philanthropy has been a solution to the financial problem in education sector that strengthen the financial support from the state wherever possible. This paper is aimed at comparing the role of philanthropy fund generated under endowments (non-Islamic) and waqf (Islamic) in maintaining and sustaining higher education in the world. This theoretical paper reviews how endowments and waqf functioned and contributed for the development of higher education around the world. 2

PHILANTHROPY IN EDUCATION

The spirit of philanthropy signifies “the love of humanity” in the sense of caring, nourishing, developing and enhancing “the mankind” on both the benefactors’ (by identifying and exercising their values in giving and volunteering) and beneficiaries’ (by benefiting) parts. The most conventional

183

ICIEES_Book.indb 183

4/3/2015 7:08:52 AM

modern definition of philanthropy is “private initiatives, for public good, focusing on quality of life” (Zunz, 2011). Philanthropy began to reach its modern form in the 17th century in Europe. The philosophers have proposed that philanthropy is the essential key to human happiness, conceived as a kind of “fitness”—living in harmony with nature and one’s own circumstances. Self-development, manifested in good deeds toward others, was the surest way to live a pleasing, fulfilling, and satisfying life, as well as to help build a commonwealth community (McGully, 2010). The expansion of these ideas spread the practice of charitable and philanthropic activity among voluntary associations and rich benefactors that promote charitable organizations. The findings of religious school, universities, hospital and affordable houses are a typical contribution of philanthropy. Whilst education is facing the biggest challenge of evaluating the impact of grants, it has been one of the significant sectors supported by philanthropy. An estimated 5000 trusts and foundations distributed AUS1 billion in grants and donations in Australia, which makes a significant proportion goes to education. In Ireland, for example, 90% of the philanthropic donations go to higher education. Academic institutions, such as colleges and universities, will frequently control an endowment fund that finances a portion of the operating or capital requirements of the institution. In addition to a general endowment fund, university may also control a number of restricted endowments that are intended to fund specific areas within the institution. The most common examples are endowed professorships and endowed scholarships or fellowships (University of Colorado, 2013). 3 3.1

ENDOWMENT AND WAQF IN HIGHER EDUCATION Waqf—islamic endowment

A waqf is an inalienable religious endowment in Islamic law, typically donating a building or plot of land or even cash for Muslim religious or charitable purposes. The term waqf literally means “confinement and prohibition” or causing a thing to stop or stand still. The legal meaning of waqf is the detention of specific thing in the ownership of waqf and the devoting of its profit or products “in charity of poors or other good objects”. The permanent nature of waqf results in the accumulation of waqf properties that are devoted to provide capital asset that produce an ever increasing flow of revenues/usufructs to serve its objectives. In addition to this, the diversity of its objectives provides support for widespread activities. This huge accumulation of waqf plays an important role in

the social life of Muslim societies and communities (Kahf, 1995). Waqf financing of education usually covers libraries, books, salaries of teachers and other staff, and stipends for students. Financing was not restricted to religious studies especially at the stage of the rise of Islam. In addition to freedom of education, this approach of financing helped creating a learned class not derived from the rich and ruling classes. At times, majority of Muslim scholars used to come from poor and slave segments of the society and very often they strongly stood in defence of the public masses and opposed the policies of the rulers (Al-Syed, pp. 237–258). As a result, this institutional change is an extremely important process of dynamic social change in the Muslim society that is unprecedented in the history of humanity. As such, the waqf-financed education has been widening the educational accessibility in the Muslim world. This contributed a lot to the dynamics of leadership change and wealth circulation, and eliminated chance of creating aristocratic class that monopolizes wealth and political power (Kahf, 2012). Although religious education is usually covered by waqf on mosques, education in general has been the second largest recipient of waqf revenues. Since the beginning of Islam, in the early 7th century, education has been financed by waqf and other voluntary contributions such as the awqaf of the Ayubites (1171–1249) and the Mamalik (1249– 1517) in Palestine and Egypt. Moreover, Jerusalem had 64 schools at the beginning of the 12th century, all of them were waqf and supported by the awqaf properties in Palestine, Turkey, and Syria. Of these schools 40 were made awqaf by the Ayubites and Mamalik rulers and governors (Al `Asali and Kamil, 1983). The University of Al-Azhar was founded in Cairo in 972 and was financed by its waqf revenues until the government of Muhammad Ali in Egypt took control over the awqaf in 1812 (Kahf, 2012). In Turkey, during Ottoman Empire (1300– 1924), Sultan El-Hac Sulayman El-Hac donated 70,000 dirham in 1513 where nearly 45% has been used for the construction of schools and the balance for investment purposes which the return has been used for running the schools (Abdul Rahman, 2003). Interestingly, in 1969 Koc Foundation was established to uphold higher education, among others. The Waqf University Fatih Sultan Mehmet was established in 1470 (Fatih Sultan Mehmet Waqf University, 2013). In Egypt, the total waqf land is estimated at 394,000 acres. In 2006, the return from waqf investment was EGP125 million ($25 million). In waqf education, Al Azhar University in Cairo was established in the 9th century with about 700,000 primary and tertiary stu-

184

ICIEES_Book.indb 184

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

dents and the cost of managing 62 faculties was at EGP100 million ($20 million) per annum in 2012. In the United Arab Emirates, Zayed University has been established in 1998 and fully sponsored by waqf. The enrolment of students to this university was recorded near to 9,000 undergraduate students. Since 2008 philanthropic has been started as one of the funding sources. Increasing education funding for this university due to allocating federal funds based on students enrolments. The funding concept imposed on each student enrolled based on the type of program registered; lab-based or lecture-based. This model allows the university’s funding in accordance with the number of students enrolled (Zayed University, 2013). In Indonesia, Muhammadiyyah a non-governmental organisation funded 172 higher institutions throughout the country including Hamka Muhammadiyyah University in Jakarta. Another non-governmental organisation, Nahdatul Ulama financed about 21,000 religious-based educational institutions throughout the country. 3.2

Endowment

A financial endowment is referring to a donation of money or property to an institution. The amount of endowment is representing the total value of institution’s investment. Among the public charity, private foundation and trust that manage endowments are academic institutions such as colleges, universities and private schools and may extend to cultural institutions and religious establishment. • True endowment funds are received from external donors with restriction that the principal or gift amount is to be retained in perpetuity and cannot be spent. • Term endowment funds all or part of the principal may be expended only after the expiration of a stated period of time or occurrence of a specified event, depending on donor wishes. • Quasi endowment funds must retain the purpose and intent as specified by the donor or source of the original funds and earnings may be expended only for the specified purpose. An endowment may come with stipulations regarding its usage. At universities, typically 4–6% of the endowment’s assets are spent every year to fund operations or capital spending. Any excess earnings are typically reinvested to augment the endowment and to compensate for inflation and recessions in future years. This spending figure represents the proportion that historically could be spent without diminishing the principal amount of the endowment fund. However, the financial crisis of 2007–2010 had a major impact on the entire range of endowments globally.

The earliest “endowed chairs” were those established by the Roman emperor and Stoic philosopher Marcus Aurelius in Athens in AD 176 (Frede, 2009 in Kruczkowska et al. 2013). Aurelius created one endowed chair for each of the major schools of philosophy: Platonism, Aristotelianism, Stoicism, and Epicureanism. Later, similar endowments were set up in some other major cities of the Empire (Lynch, 1972). In the United Kingdom, the practice of endowment was adapted to the modern university system beginning in England in 1502 with the establishment of the first endowed chairs in divinity at the universities of Oxford and Cambridge. Today, the University of Glasgow has fifteen Regius Professorships. Private individuals soon adopted the practice of endowing professorships. Isaac Newton held the Lucasian Chair of Mathematics at Cambridge beginning in 1669, more recently held by the celebrated physicist Stephen Hawking (Bruen, 1995). In the United States, the endowment is often integral to the financial health of educational institutions. Alumni or friends of institution sometimes contribute capital to the endowment. The endowment funding culture is strong in the United States and Canada but less pronounced overseas, with the exceptions of Cambridge and Oxford universities. Endowment funds have also been created to support secondary and elementary school districts in several states in the United States.

4

ANALYSIS AND DISCUSSION

4.1 Endowment and waqf Harvard has the largest university endowment in the world worth $32 billion. Unfortunately, Harvard suffered 30% loss in 2008–09 due to economic recession. Later reports suggest that the loss was actually more than double that figure, a reduction of nearly 50% of its endowment in the first four months alone. It was also estimated that the loss to be in the range of $12 billion. Consequently, Harvard halted the construction of the $1.2 billion Allston Science Complex, resulting in protests from local residents. Harvard announced that its endowment earned a 21.4% return and was valued at $32 billion for the fiscal year 2011. Harvard’s endowment helps to fund operations critical to the University’s educational and research objectives. In fiscal 2011, distributions from the endowment contributed almost a third of the operating budget. Endowment income supports Harvard’s academic programs, science and medical research, and student financial aid programs, which allow the University to admit qualified students regardless of their ability to pay.

185

ICIEES_Book.indb 185

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

Table 1.

Endowment and waqf education.

Top 10 Universities with Endowment and Waqf Education (USD/£) in 2013

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Universities

Endowment Waqf

Harvard University USA Yale University USA University of Texas System USA King Abdullah University of Science and Technology SA Stanford University USA Cambridge University UK Oxford University UK University of Edinburgh UK University of Manchester UK Kyoto University, Japan

$32.3b $20.8b $20.5b $20b $18.7b £4,900m £3,772m £284m £169.2m $2.2b

Source: Various.

More than 60% of Harvard undergraduates are receiving need-based scholarship aid this year, totalling more than $160 million (Harvard University, 2011). The average undergraduate student on financial aid pays only $11,500; in addition, an average of one in five students pays no tuition, based on economic need. Throughout Harvard, scholarships and awards to students from University funds have almost tripled over the past decade, reaching $450 million (Harvard Management Company, 2011). The College’s industry-leading financial aid policies are designed to make Harvard more affordable for families across the economic spectrum, a commitment that has remained a high priority despite the current economic uncertainty. The endowment has earned an average annual return of 12.9% over the past 20 years, outperforming the Policy Portfolio benchmark by 310 basis points per year. The average annual return has also outperformed a simple 60/40 stock/bond portfolio over the past decade by 510 basis points per year—adding roughly $15 billion of value versus what would have been earned by a more traditional portfolio (Harvard Management Company, 2011). Yale University, the pioneer of an approach that involved investing heavily in alternative investments such as real estate and private equity, reported an endowment of $16 billion as of September 2009, a 30% annualized loss that was more than predicted in December 2008 (Hechinger, 2009). Many universities with very large endowments would require less than 5% to pay full tuition for all their students. For example, it has been estimated that if in 2006 all the Harvard students had paid the maximum in tuition and fees, it would have amounted to less than $300 million (Murphy,

2013). It would require less than 1% of the endowments of Harvard and Yale to allow all students to attend tuition-free; Stanford, MIT, Princeton and Rice would require less than 2% of their endowments and 29 other schools would require less than 3% for all their students to attend tuitionfree (Munson and Miller, 2008). Cambridge’s 31 independent college endowments, which run some two-thirds of the total Cambridge endowment of £4.3 billion. Oxford’s central endowment managed around £630 million in July 2010, while its 38 colleges ran £2.7 billion (Wilkes, 2011). Many individual Oxford and Cambridge colleges have diversified away from historic concentrations in land, some of it owned for hundreds of years, instead buying other asset classes including hedge funds, some run by former students. Despite moves to modernise how the ancient institutions run their money, experience during recent market turmoil means many of the individual colleges are choosing to keep managing money for themselves. As a comparison, universities in the Islamic world have also playing a significant role in widening the accessibility to higher education. Amongst those which are notably significant including Al-Azhar University in Egypt and King Abdullah University of Science and Technology in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. Respectfully, universities in developing economy in Asia are still struggling to establish their endowments and waqf at higher education institutions. 5

CONCLUSION

Findings consider an extremely important process of endowment and waqf education in widening the accessibility to higher education and its sustainability. It refers to the dynamics of social changes in the society and history of humanity. The evolution of mankind and global wisdom was driven by endowment and waqf education worldwide since from its establishment thousands of years ago. Offering endowment and waqf financed education had uplifted the poor to have an equal opportunity with the rich to acquiring education at a time when education reflects in power and wealth. Consequently, this contributes a lot to the dynamics of leadership change and wealth circulation in the knowledgebased society, circulated power and wealth and eliminated chance of creating aristocratic class that monopolizes wealth and political power. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT The authors would like to acknowledge the financial contribution granted by the Ministry of Higher

186

ICIEES_Book.indb 186

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

Education Malaysia and Universiti Teknologi Malaysia for the financial assistances in undertaking this research on waqf education.

REFERENCES [1] Abdul Rahman. 2003. Athar al-Waqf al-Islamiyy fi al-hayat al-‘ilmiyyah Bi al-Madinah al-munawwarah, Madinah al-Munawwarah: Markaz al-Buhuth wa alDirasah. pp. 9–14. [2] Al-Asali, Kamil Jamil. 1983. “Mu’assat Al-Awqaf wa Madaris Bait Al-Maqdis, [Awqaf institution and the schools of Jerusalem], in the Proceedings of the Symposium of Awqaf Institution in the Arab and Islamic World, Institute of the Arab Research and Studies, Baghdad pp. 93–112. [3] Al-Syed, Abd Al-Malik, “Al-Waqf Al-Islami wa AlDawr Al-Ladhi la`ibahu fi Al-Numuw Al-Ijtima`i fi AlIslam” [Islamic Waqf and the role it played in social development in Islam], in Idarat wa Tathmir Mumtalakat Al-Awqaf, op.cit., pp. 225–304. [4] Asimov, N. 2009. Stanford University endowment loses big. Article from SF Chronicle. Accessed on 3rd May 2014, http://www.sfgate.com/education/ article/Stanford-University-endowment-loses-big3287657.php. [5] Bruen, R. 1995. A Brief History of The Lucasian Professorship of Mathematics at Cambridge University. Boston College. [6] Fatih Sultan Mehmet Waqf University. 2013. www. fatihsultan.edu.tr. [7] Harvard University. 2011. Harvard financial aid program tops $160M for first time.Accessed on 1st May 2014, http://news.harvard.edu/gazette/story/ 2011/02/harvard-financial-aid-program-tops-160mfor-first-time/. [8] Harvard Management Company. 2011. Harvard University Endowment Earns 21.4 Percent Return For Fiscal Year Ended June 30, 2011. Harvard Public Affair & Communications, Harvard University. [9] Hechinger, J. 2009. Yale Endowment Down 30%. Article from The Wall Street Journal. Accessed on 3rd May 2014, http://online.wsj.com/news/articles/ SB125261190641700555?mg=reno64-wsj&url=http% 3A%2F%2Fonline.wsj.com%2Farticle%2FSB125261 190641700555.html#.

[10] Kahf, M. 1995, “Al-Nusus Al-Iqtisadiyyah fi Al-Qur’an wa Al-Sunnah” [Economic Texts in the Qur’an and Sunnah], Scientific Publication Center, King Abdul Aziz University, Jeddah. [11] Kahf, M. 2012. Waqf and Sustaining Economic Development. Accessed on 1st May 2014, http:// www.onislam.net/english/shariah/contemporaryissues/islamic-themes/452593-waqf-and-sustainingeconomic-development.html. [12] Kruczkowska, K., Leijenhorst, S. & Wakka, F. 2013. Fundraising for the Erasmus Centre for Family Business. Rotterdam School of Management, Erasmus University. [13] Lynch, J.P. 1972. Aristotle’s school; a study of a Greek educational institution. University of California Press. pp. 192–207; 213–216. [14] Marty Sulek,” On the Classical Meaning of Philanthropia. Nonprofit and Voluntary Sector Quarterly, 39(3), 385–408. [15] McCully, G. 2010. Philanthropy Reconsidered (A Catalogue for Philanthropy Publication, 2008, 1–21). [16] Munson, L. and Miller, C. (April 2008). “Endowment Reform: Why Universities Should Share Their Vast Wealth and in the Process Make Higher Education More Affordable” (PDF). Center for College Affordability and Productivity. pp. 11–14. Retrieved 4th May 2010. [17] Murphy, B. (September 4, 2007). “Harvard Endowment Should Mean Free Tuition”. The Daily Campus. Accessed on 4th May 2014. [18] Ramadan, M.M. dawr al awqaf fi dacm al Azhar. In Symposium of Awqaf Institution, op. cit (pp. 125–148). [19] University of Colorado. 2013. Introduction to Development. [20] United Nations Universal Declaration of Human Rights 1848. 1949. United Nations. SiSU http:// www.jus.uio.no/sisu. [21] Wilkes, T. (November 1, 2011). Cambridge University’s endowment fund lags Ivy league. Article from Reuters. Accessed on 4th May 2014, http:// in.mobile.reuters.com/article/financialsSector/ idINL5E7M124F20111101. [22] Zayed University. 2013. “Zayed University SelfStudy Report for Moddle States Commission on Higher Education” (PDF). Zayed University. [23] Zunz, O. 2011. Philanthropy in America: A history. Princeton University Press.

187

ICIEES_Book.indb 187

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

College campus culture construction research education based on students’ habits Yu Rong College of Media, Changchun Normal University, Changchun, Jilin, China

ABSTRACT: College campus culture construction is a project, persistence of relevant schools and students are very important for reputation. The cultivation of the students’ habit is an important content of school education, how to cultivate students’ good habits in the process of the construction of college campus culture is an important subject. This paper discusses about this problem. First, the current campus culture construction in the process of common long-term goals, analyze the problems such as lack of strong operational means of education. And then puts forward the subject of students’ habits to develop education process based on the thinking of the construction of campus culture. By analyzing, the specific operational methods provide an important reference for the current college campus culture construction. Keywords: 1

Campus culture; Nurturance education; college education; culture construction

INTRODUCTION

2

Campus culture refers to under certain historical condition, the school in its life cycle in the process of formation and curing the Shared values, beliefs, code of conduct and behavior and all kinds of facilities in a variety of rules and regulations, in particular humanities spirit[1]. College campus culture construction is the modern education in colleges and universities must consider one of the major problems in the process, and to form a reasonable and effective long-term cultural mechanism is a long-term process of osmosis. Therefore in the process of construction is more need for the top-level design, through the reasonable construction in the cultivation of campus culture with its own feature. The nurturance education is one of the unavoidable problems in the process of education in colleges and universities. Good habits is not going to education, so have to exert a subtle influence on for a long time to campus culture to influence student's code of conduct, so that they do not consciously towards good habits change, and this is one of the inherent functions of campus culture construction[2–5]. This paper discusses about the current problems existing in the construction of campus culture, and puts forward to develop education as a basis for the concept of campus culture construction, to how they are manifested in the process of building a campus culture at the same time to carry out some analysis form the path of education.

THE CURRENT UNDERGRADUATE COURSE COLLEGES AND UNIVERSITIES CAMPUS CULTURE CHARACTERISTICS

Current undergraduate course colleges and universities campus culture is given a priority to with historical heritage, the domestic famous universities such as Tsinghua University and Peking University with long history and concentrate resources, its campus culture with relative characteristics, the humanities are deep in the field of culture, most of students in this college for a few years will unconsciously strip out the characteristics of some schools, that is the beauty of campus culture. But like many ordinary provincial senior or private colleges which emerged in recent years, campus culture is a new transaction, in the process of planning and management of the whole school tend to ignore this has long-term, the effect is very slow the top-level design of campus culture construction. Even if some of the colleges and universities, which has some top design characteristic culture construction of the slogans also because do not have operability and often appear in the leadership change a slogan of myopia style and cannot stick to it. Nurturance education is an important aspect of university education, the behavior habit education is often not alone in the classroom lectures, ideological guidance will be able to fully embody. The so-called “a, XiaZiChengQi”, no good campus culture, to achieve nurturance education to

189

ICIEES_Book.indb 189

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

students almost cannot be completed. And really put forward to develop education as a starting point for campus culture construction of ordinary university is not much, even if there are some due to the lack of some important means and path cannot hold on for a long time. But want to rely on the spontaneous development to implement to develop education in the school education is not possible. Therefore very necessary in the construction of campus culture in colleges and universities how to form a study on the corresponding education, promote the development of the corresponding culture, and improve the university’s cultural soft power. 3

THE DEVELOP EDUCATION ENLIGHTENMENT TO THE CONSTRUCTION OF CAMPUS CULTURE

Essence of nurturance education is the education to cultivate students to form a good habit. When students enter colleges and universities generally have stepped into adulthood. At the age of the students in behavior, individual character although there is also a process of mature, stable, but because after nearly 20 years of growth, its many habits have curing, to get one into the campus will be able to change is impossible. Found through the education practice, and to be preaching through compulsory education or to change the students’ daily behavior habits is futile. And the importance of good habits education is self-evident, a famous educator WuShenSiJi also has a wonderful metaphor: “good habits are the people in the capital in the nervous system, the capital will continue to increase, the interest of a person life can enjoy it, and bad habits is unable to repay debts, moral this debt can torture at growing interest, make him the best innovation failure, and to guide him to the point of moral bankruptcy.” Good habits are the accelerator, is helpful to take off the wings of a; bad habits are chains, are hard to break free. Life habit, into a habit, and habits. Therefore the education in colleges and universities is to correct the habit of college students cultivation is a very important education content. Since the usual classroom education and ideological education can effectively realize the nurturance education of students, then what should I do? Cultural heritage is a kind of up and down inside the soft power, a university without a kind of positive, hardworking it is hard to mass culture to develop is the quality of students. Therefore, it is necessary in the construction of campus culture to develop education. Will develop education in the whole concept of cultural construction, is a necessary and inevitable

campus culture construction needs. Formation and completed the construction of campus culture is not going to, therefore in the process of construction need both to fully implement the feature in the top-level design, and needs at a reasonable path of long-term persistence. 4

IN THE PROCESS OF BUILDING A CAMPUS CULTURE EMBODIES NURTURANCE EDUCATION PATH

The China youth and children research center researcher sun said that: “a lot of facts have proven that habit determines a person’s success or failure, can also lead to career, the most fundamental education is to develop education.” Through the analysis of the above have clear nurturance education requires characteristic campus culture of colleges and universities to exert a subtle influence on education. So-called “moistens everything silently”, to make students in imperceptible in has the characteristics of school culture, regardless of to which aspects of the society in the future, all can reflect the brand of campus culture in colleges and universities. Construction of the campus culture, however, is very laborious, especially the top of the building design should be culture. In this paper, based on the above analysis, and some were put forward to develop the education of the path of the construction of campus culture, the following specific analysis. In the hardware construction of school culture. Such as green choice in the construction of pure yulan, proud cold plum, high-minded conifers, tall and straight bamboo plant can reflect the effect of refreshing and pleasant, so cultivation students’ temperament, to purify the mind. School building cannot be a machine-made, to contain the aesthetic culture grade, the modeling of campus building and layout to show as much as possible the rich ideological content and value pursuit. University can open in front of the library, teaching building, and so on, the arrangement of some square sculpture, their monumental significance or symbolic significance, or play a decorative role. School road, such as building name also reflect spiritual implication, the school campus culture through in every detail. Want to reflect in the design of the top floor of the school system to develop education. School system culture hidden in the school of the ceremony, interpersonal relationship, the education idea, teaching methods, curriculum and knowledge and technology, school management organization structure, development planning, education, goals, tradition and custom, and even psychological atmosphere. So schools in developing the

190

ICIEES_Book.indb 190

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

long-term goals requires a combination of school culture construction historical lineage practice, put forward their own characteristic culture, and stick to it for a long time. In the process of the most important is to locate their own campus culture characteristics, can determine through conferences, a variety of forms such as questionnaire, and then formulate corresponding standardization system, and at the same time need to strengthen the supervision and restraint mechanism of form a complete set, so as to ensure its effective implementation. As a result of the execution object is protean, so in the entire process of execution need to adhere to the principle and flexibility, make “QuanLiHua” system of “human nature is changed”, promote the development of students’ physical and mental pleasure ground. Students in the daily moral education embodies form features. This is one of the core content of the whole campus culture construction, the implementation under the system on the top of the clear daily cultivation function of moral education is a key to the success or failure of the construction of campus culture. In the process should reflect democracy, equality, people-oriented concept, and so on. If fully arouse the enthusiasm of students, a multilevel and multidisciplinary cross, valuing the theory of literature and art characteristics. Can also through the reasonable system of labor education to the student, let students experience through these experiences “behold dishes, each all pain”, make them form the good qualities of serving the public. To reflect the democracy of school, at the same time must pay attention to the management of the campus and students to participate in, dynamically in the construction of campus culture to absorb some good ideas and

thoughts. The improvement of the school campus culture connotation, meet the needs of times development.

5

SUMMARIZES

This paper from the perspective of managers and teachers in university for the current college campus culture characteristics are analyzed, and points out its existing problems. To solve these problems, this paper puts forward in order to develop education of the thinking of the construction of campus culture, and the ideas for the path analysis, it also puts forward a series of means and methods of implementation. The study of this problem helps for the current college especially at the provincial level and the construction of campus culture in the universities run by the local theoretical guidance.

REFERENCES [1] Mei Yiqi. A solution. Journal of university of tsinghua journal, 1941, (1). [2] Xia Xiang Far. University campus culture construction and the moral cultivation of college students education. Journal of university of education science, 2006, (3): 91–93. [3] QuLianHua. The basis of ideological and moral cultivation course practice teaching. Journal of education research, 2005, (4): 75–76. [4] Of Li Fang; The scientific outlook on development under the vision of university campus culture construction research. Hunan university; In 2007. [5] QuLianHua; Ideological and moral cultivation course practice teaching on the basis of Education exploration; 04, 2005.

191

ICIEES_Book.indb 191

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Definition, process, performance and influencing factors of management innovation Foguan Li Chongqing Three Gorges University, Chongqing, China Guizhou University of Finance and Economics, Guiyang, China

ABSTRACT: Management innovation is the process that organizations achieve their intended target by more effectively coordinating relationship and integrating resources, in order to adapt better to the changing environment. The process of Management innovation is the practice in the management field of innovation process, which begins from the generating of innovating motivation to the implementing of innovating activities and will repeat continually. We can measure management performance by comparing the changing of enterprise earnings caused by the continuous improvement of management innovation. The factors of Management innovation are divided into external and internal factors, which the external factors are the external pressure to management innovation; internal factors are the intrinsic motivation to management innovation. Keywords: 1

Management Innovation; Definition; Process; Performance; Factors

INTRODUCTION

Chinese enterprise management innovation is an urgent issue in business practice which has caused widespread concern both in theory and practice. Therefore, it is necessary for us to combine the abroad literature of management innovation, so as we can understand the definition, process, performance and factors of management innovation. 2

THE DEFINITION OF MANAGEMENT INNOVATION

Innovation theory should be traced back to the earliest definition of innovation by Schumpeterian. [1] After this, the innovative theory developed gradually and formed an independent theoretical field. Management innovation theory is the extension of innovation theory, and its representative person is Ray Stata (1989). He proposed the management innovation in companies for the first time, compared management innovation with product innovation and process innovation, and then pointed out that management innovation is the bottlenecks in the development of enterprises, which also have not received wide attention. [2] But for what is management innovation, he did not make clearly defined. Pierre-Jean Benghozi (1990) distinguished management innovation with technology innovation and market

innovation, and pointed out that enterprises to solve the problem is not only technical and economic issues, but also management issues, such as internal collaboration processes, control of development costs, personal management, etc. So he put management innovation out from the scope of market and technology. [3] Although the earliest literature mentioned management innovation is foreign, but for a clear definition of management innovation began two Chinese scholars—Rui Mingjie and Chang Xiuze. Rui Mingjie (1994) thought that management innovation is the creation of a more effective paradigm of resources integration, this paradigm can be the whole process of management to achieve corporate objectives and responsibilities by effective integration of new resources, and can also be detail management of new specific resource integration and goal-setting. [4] Most Chinese scholars are more inclined to this definition. Chang Xiuze (1994) thought that management innovation is the radiation of organizational innovation in business-level. He defined management innovation as the introduction of new management methods, and thought management innovation goals is to reduce transaction costs. [5] But in him, the definition of the meaning and objectives of management innovation is relatively narrow. After this, the concept of management innovation is considered more and more important by domestic academics and

193

ICIEES_Book.indb 193

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

entrepreneurs. Chinese study of management innovation is basically summarizing for practical experience. The study is qualitative analysis and has not been formed unified concept platform and theoretical framework. From the definition of management innovation given by some domestic and foreign classic literatures, we know that management innovation involves many non-technical innovation aspects of organization, and management innovation can enhance organizational performance. And according to the research by Damanpour et al., management innovation can be divided into the original type-based and the introductive management innovation. [6–8] Based on these literatures, we can assume that management innovation is different from the products, processes, and technology and market innovation. Management innovation is new, more effective ways that can allocate and utilize organizational resources better, so as the organization can better adapt to the external changing environment. Management innovation can be classified to original and introductive management innovation. 3

THE PROCESS OF MANAGEMENT INNOVATION

Currently only management innovation lab of London business college is engaging the study of management innovation. Birkinshaw and Mol (2006) thought that the management innovation process is divided into four stages: dissatisfaction with current status → inspiration of other innovative sources → innvention → internal and external confirmation. Birkinshaw, Hamel and Mol (2007) made further refinement of the management innovation process: on the basis of the management of innovation and refinement process: unusual problem → assumed new practice → internal new practice → theorizing of new practice → new threat or opportunity → new idea → experiment of external ideas → theorizing of practice. [9] There are no literatures about the discussion and research on management innovation domestically, and management innovation is mentioned only indirectly by some scholars. Such as: discontent be discovered and confirmed → find countermeasures → analyze equity relationship → implement and evaluate. [10] But the theoretical and practical factions have a common understanding that management innovation the basic process: “deficiency causes needs, advantage needs determine motivation, motivation leads to action”. Management innovation is caused by the inadequate and further enhance in management of enterprises that the main innovators realized, and also is affected by internal and external environment changes and innovators’ values. [11]

Process of management innovation is the practice in the field of innovation process. Process of management innovation can be described as: demand caused motivation (or new ideas) generating of management innovation, search, choose and approach the target, carry out activities to meet the needs of management innovation after finding the target, new needs of management innovation generating after the old needs be melted, conduct new action to meet new needs. 4

PERFORMANCE OF MANAGEMENT INNOVATION

Scholars hold different views on whether management innovation can improve the performance of the enterprise. One view is that management innovation is beneficial for businesses through productivity improvement achieved to improve business performance. [12] At the same time, some scholars have also proposed the performance improvement of enterprises produced by management innovation is more than other forms of innovation. [13] Another view is skeptical or negative attitude on management innovation: Knights and McCabe (2000) thought that the introduction of new management practices is the only one way to strengthen the control of employees; Staw and Epstein (2000) proposed that the beneficiaries of management innovation are only the consulting firms who sell the way of management innovation. [14] Current research has developed a variety of performance measurement index system, which divides into two angles: efficacy and efficiency, based on the research units of innovation, technological innovation and product innovation. [15] The measure of efficacy is mainly using the index system in Oslo Manual (1997) developed by OECD [16]; the main index of index system of efficiency is cost and time of innovation, and measured from two parts: subjective and objective. But so far, researchers have not yet developed a performance measurement index system for management innovation, mainly due to the lagging that the impact of performance by management innovation and the difficulty in separation that the performance enhancing induced by technological and management innovations. Production of any kinds of new things will impact two aspects, but the importance is which aspect dominating. Management innovation is changes of original management. It is beneficial for enterprises to solve problems in original management. This benefit may require a long period in the future so as to be manifested, but the cost of management innovation may produce short-term decline in performance of enterprises. Objects of management innovation are the entire environment

194

ICIEES_Book.indb 194

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

of enterprises. It is difficult to match the cost and earnings of management innovation, but we can compare the earning changes of the different stages of management innovation with the assumption that other circumstances are unchanged. 5

REFERENCES

INFLUENCING FACTORS OF MANAGEMENT INNOVATION

Study of influencing factors of management innovation has just started shortly relatively to the study of influencing factors of innovation. Influencing factors of management innovation mainly study influencing factors in the level of enterprises. We can distinguish influencing factors of management innovation from two aspects that are external and internal influencing factors. After arranging the literature, we believe that external influencing factors of management innovation is relative to the innovating bodies, which contains external and own influencing factors of enterprises. External influencing factors of management innovation include: social culture, industrial policy, corporate reputation, corporate innovation networks, market changes, changes in economic system and technology. Internal influencing factors of management innovation are intrinsic motivation in management innovation. Intrinsic motivation in management innovation is not a single reason but diverse, and which generally have the following factors: entrepreneur, leadership, self-realization, the pursuit for the income by innovating bodies, responsibility, psychological needs for innovations, ownership structure, corporate information construction and so on. Presently, domestic and foreign literature on management innovation has not covered the influencing mechanism between external and internal factors, the reason may be many scholars believe this area is not important, so as they ignored the study. We believe that external influencing factors of management innovation are the external pressure for management innovation, and internal influencing factors of management innovation are the intrinsic motivation for management innovation. Driven out under the external pressure and intrinsic motivation, bodies of management innovation will produce a strong desire and motivation for innovation, and then result in innovative behavior.

[1] Schumpeter. Theory of Economic Development. Beijing: Commercial Press, 1990. [2] Stata, R. Organizational Learning-The Key to Management Innovation. Sloan management Review, 1989 (63):245–267. [3] Pierre-Jean Benghozi. Managing Innovation: From ad hoc to Routine in French Telecom. Organization Studies, 1990, 11(4):531–554. [4] Rui Mingjie. Wisdom beyond superb—innovation of modern enterprise management. Series of modern enterprise institution, Shanghai Translation Press, 1994. [5] Chang Xiuze et al. Study of modern enterprise innovation. Tianjin People’s Press, 1994. [6] Birkinshaw, J., Crainer, S. & Mol, M. How management innovation happens. Sloan Management Review, 2007, (47):81–88. [7] Cai Houqing, Wang Lei. Features, processes and mechanisms of enterprise management innovation. Chinese Market, 2007, (35):30–31. [8] Sun Yan, Tao Xueyu. Process model of management innovation. Scientific Management Research, 1999, 17(1):13–17. [9] Michael J. Mol, Julian Birkinshaw. The sources of management innovation: under what conditions do firms introduce new management practives?. CIS User Group. DTI Conference Centre. 1 Victoria Street, 2005. [10] Hamel, G. The why, what and how of management innovation. Harvard Business Review, 2006, (84):72–84. [11] OECD. Oslo Manual (Third Edition), 1997. [12] Birkinshaw, J., Crainer, S., Mol, M. How management innovation happens. Sloan Management Review, 2007, (47):81–88. [13] Hu Baodi. Barriers analysis of enterprise management innovation. Enterprise economy, 2003, (8):111–112. [14] Zhang Hong. Innovation-oriented mode of private technological enterprise innovation mode. China Soft Science, 2004, (11):158–161. [15] Huang Jingfu. Enterprise Development and Innovation. China’s industrial economy, 1999, (7):72–75. [16] Xie Hongming. The impact of social capital on organizational innovation: An Empirical Study and Implications on Chinese enterprises in the Pearl River Delta region. Scientific Studies, 2006, (1):150–158.

195

ICIEES_Book.indb 195

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

ICIEES_Book.indb 196

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Study on Chinese higher education financial crisis from the cost-sharing perspective Jiawu Gan Economics and Management School of Wuhan University, Wuhan, China Yunnan University of Finance and Economics, Kunming, China

ABSTRACT: At present, the financial crisis has affected the quality of higher education seriously, and has threatened the safety of universities. The reasons of financial crisis mainly include the high speed of enrollment scale of universities, lack of government appropriation and investment of social capital. It is an inevitable choice to resolve the universities financial crisis, promote the reform of educational system and the healthy development of higher education, by improving the cost-sharing. Keywords: 1

Higher Education; Financial Crisis; Cost-sharing; Mechanism of Settlement

INTRODUCTION

At present, the financial crisis has affected the quality of higher education seriously, and has threatened the safety of universities. Some experts think that the scale of loan of Chinese universities has exceeded 400 billion Yuan, and debt-ridden universities will affect its safety. According to the data of National Audit Office of China, at the end of 2010, just the 1164 local universities debt amounted to 263.498 billion Yuan. Taking into account the actual situation on current debt of the local government, it is not realistic that all of loans are paid back by government. If all of debts are paid back by student or family, most families can’t undertake it. Also it is not realistic that all of loans are paid back by social. Therefore, it is important to research the mechanism costsharing. 2

RESEARCH REVIEW

Higher education cost-sharing theory was put forward by American education economist D. Bruce Johnstone in 1986. D. Bruce Johnstone (2004) thinks that the cost of higher education should be paid by the government, or taxpayers, parents of students, student, private or social career donors. The current serious universities debt crisis has seriously hindered the healthy development of Chinese higher education. W.J. Zhang (2000) have empirically analyzed the various type of per

capita annual income, consumption structure of education, and the various stages of education of bearing rate of family expenditure which is based on national household sample survey statistics, and think that it is good way to the development of education and the implementation of quality education by increasing investment and enforcing universal quality education. C.H. Wang, R.C. Peng (2007) think that it is urgent that other object also should be paid, and the traditional system that the cost is only paid by government is not subject to current situation. Y.W. Wang (2006) have analyzed the change condition between government funding and personal tuition and fees, the elasticity coefficient of higher educational funds, and bearing rate of individuals, and suggested that control the rapid expansion of scale of higher education, focus on the change situation of educational finance index of per student, realize the diversification of higher education funds source. Y. Liu, F. Zhang (2004) think that higher education tuition have exceeded the ability of most of the residents by empirical analysis, it is good way to establish the effective system of compensation standard to poor students, based on the ability of residents. Y.B. Zhang, et al., (2008) suggest that establishing the cost sharing model by students, universities, government, enterprises and members of the community, through collecting differential tuition from students and their parents, broadening funding channels, optimizing fund from government and social to achieve higher education cost sharing.

197

ICIEES_Book.indb 197

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

3 3.1

THE REASONS OF UNIVERSITY FINANCIAL CRISIS The high speed of expansion of higher education and the implement on evaluation of undergraduate teaching level

Since enrollment expansion in higher education in 1999, Chinese higher education has achieved great development; the scale of higher education has historic changes. Enrollment increased from 1.5968 million in 1999 to 6.6176 million in 2010, at the speed of 28.58% average year. The number of enrolled students increased from 4.1342 million in 1999 to 22.3179 million in 2010. With expanding of enrollment in higher education, Ministry of Education has promulgated Undergraduate Teaching level evaluation criteria, which put forward some quantitative evaluation about hardware facilities and software conditions. For the non-compliance of school conditions, Ministry of Education will give yellow card warning or red card warning, even cancel the qualifications. Facing with the expanding enrollment and evaluation criteria, universities try its best to finance, and improve school conditions by loaning. Therefore, the basic reasons of financing crisis are the high speed of development of higher education in China and the quantitative evaluation criteria which are put forward by the Ministry of Education. 3.2

Lacking of government appropriation

Since expansion of enrollment, the basic construction is the main purpose of the universities loans. At the situation of lacking of government investment, universities turn to banks for help, so universities have become the substitute of the government. Under the situation of expansion of enrollment, because of lacking of government appropriation and compensating the historical debts, the loan of universities is a reluctant choice in china. Universities have no choice but finance shift from government to banks, as a means of financing. In other words, under the expansion of enrollment, the government has not fulfilled the obligations of running school and the responsibility of investors. 3.3

Lacking of investment of social capital

As we all know, it is the advantage that universities accelerate the transformation of scientific and technological achievement. University has been the important position of basic research and technological innovation. We need to convert patent inventions and new knowledge to productivity, and get the actual benefit. In recent years, Chinese

universities have made tens of thousands of scientific and technological achievements, which provide rich resources for scientific and technological achievements convert to practical productivity. But we should clearly realize that the situation of the transformation of scientific achievement is not still optimistic. One report of a research on the arrangement of the Ministry of Education shows, because of the conversion mechanism of scientific and technological achievement lacks internal power mechanism, social investment and the carriers of external economic mechanism, the scientific and technological achievements are up to 6000∼8000 in Chinese universities every year, but it is converted to productivity less than 10%. 4

THE PROBLEMS OF MECHANISMS OF COST-SHARING

4.1 The share of cost of government is inadequate According to the State Council promulgated in 1993, China Education Reform and Development Program, China will achieve the target that government appropriation for education proportion of GDP will reach 4%. In recent years, the government appropriations for education are increasing, but the target has reached only 3.66% in 2010. Under the current system, the funds of higher education are still mainly relying on the government appropriation. With lacking of government appropriation, capital will restrict the development of higher education seriously; even bring about the problem that higher education competes resources with basic education. 4.2 The share of cost of university is inadequate Under the situation of single source of income, because educational funding comes mainly from government appropriation and tuition and miscellaneous fees, other source of funding is relatively small. Besides government appropriation in universities income funds, there are tuition and miscellaneous fees and other earnings gains. According to the data of China Statistical Yearbook 2011, except for government appropriation and tuition and miscellaneous fees of income from teaching research and other auxiliary activity in Chinese education, other educational funds has been hovering at between 6% to 10%. Even in the highest business income in 2003, the proportion of other business income accounted for only 9.67%. Under the inertia of history and lacking ability to market-oriented of universities, universities used to rely on the government. When the government appropriation began to decline, universities had

198

ICIEES_Book.indb 198

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

to rely on tuition. When the tuition has reached a certain height, universities had to rely on loans from bank. 4.3

The share of cost of society is inadequate

From the situation of the world, there are two financing model in the world of higher education, mainly from government appropriation and private investment. The main problem of the Chinese higher education is the single model of running school; universities rely on government appropriation, and lack of other income and financing channels. From the source of education funding structure, in the existing higher educational costsharing, the ability to share of cost of society is too weak, the funds of social organizations, private school, social donations and fund-raising school less than 5% share of the proportion of higher education funding, much lower than the level of the developed Western countries. 4.4

The share of cost of student or family is excessive

Facing with the financial pressure of popular education, because of the ability to share of cost of society is too weak, the pressure of government and individual share of cost is increasing. Wang’s research (2006) shows that tuition of university accounted for the proportion of urban residents’ disposable income from 34.5 percent in 1996 was increasing to 70.3 percent in 2000 quickly, then was decreasing to 43% in 2005 gradually. The tuition of university accounted for the proportion of rural residents’ disposable income was increasing from 86.7% in 1996 to 196.9% in 2000 quickly, and then was decreasing to 140 percent in 2005 gradually. Tuition has put great pressure on higher educational expenditure of resident.

government really can not afford to expand the scale of the public school system, it is a better choice to support the development of private school. Therefore, the country should be appropriate to selectively exit from the field of higher education, and let capable enthusiasm private capital involved in, aim at establishing basic market principles of choice, multi-capital, competition, demand-driven funding, and self-determination, and promote the market-oriented and diversification of higher education. Universities should change the system of school funded by government to the system of school, which is mainly funded by government and subordinately funded by society. With introducing market-oriented, government can improve the efficiency of management of higher education, as the same time; alleviate its financial pressure. The government appropriately supervises and regulates the market-oriented system of higher education, and the quality of education will not be declined. With the research of educational reform in France, Green thinks that government enhances the management of education actually by market-oriented education and education decentralization. 5.2

There is no appropriate educational system of government appropriation, which has lack of persistent effect mechanism, for the reason that lead to government appropriation did not reach the legal proportion to 4% in a long time. China should make a law on the Protection of Educational Fund, which takes educational fund as emphasis on priority guarantee, ensures that the education budget in place, and education funding is increased according to law, and gradually increases the proportion of education financial expenditure. 5.3

5 5.1

THE CONCLUSIONS AND INSPIRATION The share of cost of society need to be increased

According to the research of World Bank experts Joan Ross, the rate of return of investment in education is high. Especially in the low-income developing countries which are short of human capital stock relatively, and the rate of investment in education is higher than physical capital, and the personal rate of return of higher education is higher than social rate of return. So, we can consider allowing private capital to invest public universities with various ways, aim at private capital playing an active role. Moreover, under the situation that

The share of cost of government need to be increased

The share of cost of university need to be increased

Except for traditional functions of teaching students knowledge, telling students the way to live, answering students’ questions, scientific research and public services, higher universities directly participate in the construction of social-economic and provide with social product for exchange. Therefore, on the one hand, universities should try effort to expand the financing channels, and take full advantage of changing the scientific and technological achievements into practical productive and serving society to finance. On the other hand, because universities have many experts, professors, researchers, complete disciplines and advanced laboratory equipment, with which universities can

199

ICIEES_Book.indb 199

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

solve a number of great scientific research projects of enterprises by strengthen contacts with companies. The cooperation between universities and companies not only saves the investment in scientific research funding and reduces the experimental risks, but also increases funding for scientific research, enhance the research strength, achieve complementary advantages, share resources and benefits. As the same time, universities can resolve the financial crisis with this way.

REFERENCES [1] L. Lin. Resolving the universities financing crisis should be taken real market-oriented measures. Southern Weekend, 2007-05-10(C21 Version). [2] D. B. Johnstone. The Economics and Politics of Cost Sharing in Higher Education: Comparative Perspectives. Economics of Education Review, 2004, 23(4) pp.403. [3] W. J. Zhang, F. H. Chen, J. P. Chen. The Empirical Research on Educational Consumption. Education and Economy, 2000 (3) pp.15–20. [4] C. H. Wang, R. C. Peng. The Review on Current Educational Cost-sharing Policy in China. Journal of Higher Education Research, 2007(1)pp.31–32. [5] Y. W. Wang. Changes in Funding Source of Higher Education in China: An Analysis of the Relationship between Government Funding and Student Tuition and Fees. Economics of Education, 2006 conference papers. Research on Education Tsinghua University, No. 5, 2006, pp.42–48. [6] Y. Liu, F. Zhang. Empirical Analysis on Residents Payment Ability for Higher Education and Research on Tuition Policy. China Soft Science, 2004(2) pp.14–20.

[7] Y. B. Zhang, S. Q. Peng, H. S. Ai. An Empirical Study of Cost-Sharing of high education in China. Modern University Education, 2008 (2) pp.79–112. [8] X. R. Zhu. The Countermeasures of Government Response to the Debt Crisis of Colleges and Universities. Times Report (Academic Edition), 2011(12). [9] D. G. Wu. Rational Thinking and Solving Strategy of the College Loans. Educational Research, No. 4, 2007, pp.18–25. [10] George Psacharopoulos. Returns to Education: A Further International Update and Implication. Journal of Human Resource, 1985(4) pp.583–604. [11] R. Zhu. The Research on Formation and Resolve Mechanism of the Risk of Debt of University. Public Finance Research, 2010 (4), pp.71–74. [12] IIEP. Financing Secondary Education in Developing Countries. 2005. 352, OECD. Education Trends in Perspective Analysis of World Education Indicators. 2005. pp.77. [13] Philip A. Woods, Carl Bagley & Ron Glatter. School Choice and Competition: Markets in the Public Interest. London & New York: Routledge, 1998. pp.138. [14] Bray, Mark (2003a). Control of Education: Issues and Tensions in Centralization and Decentralization. In R.F. Arnove & C.A. Torres (eds.) Comparative Education: The Dialectic of the Global and the Local. Second edition. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield. 1999. pp.207–323. [15] Andy Green. Education and Globalization in Europe and East Asia: Convergent and Divergent Trends. Journal of Education Policy, 1999, Vol.14, No.1:55–71. [16] X. Z. Shuai, J. M. Xu. Colleges and Universities to Avoid the Risk of Debt and Repayment of Countermeasures: Example of Colleges and Universities in Shandong Province. Scientific Decision-Making, 2009(6).pp.40–52. [17] D. D. Dill & P. N. Teixeira, Program Diversity in Higher Education: An Economic Perspective. Higher Education Policy, 2000, 13(1) pp.99–100.

200

ICIEES_Book.indb 200

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The research on the teaching reform of computer basics J. Wu North China Institute of Science and Technology, Sanhe, Hebei, China Qinghai Normal University, Xining, Qinghai, China

G.Z. Hou Army Aviation Institution of PLA, Beijing, China

ABSTRACT: This paper describes about the research conducted on the teaching reform of basic computer study. Aiming at the present problems existing in basic computer education, some measures of teaching reform are proposed from three stages such as teaching preparation, teaching implementation and teaching evaluation. Keywords: 1

Teaching Reform; Teaching Preparation; Teaching Implementation; Teaching Evaluation

INTRODUCTION

Innovation is the soul of a nation’s progress. It is a vital important problem relevant to the nation and state. In our practical teaching work, this problem is becoming more and more important. Facing the booming of high-tech industry and the rapid advance of network process in the world, computer teaching is facing new development opportunity, and also facing new challenges. In this environment, it is important to improve students’ ability on computer application and lay a good foundation of computer knowledge for future study and work. The teaching target of basic computer education is to enable students to master the basic knowledge and skills of computer and use computer as a tool to access and communicate information, to lead the students to enter the computer science, to lay the foundation of the follow-up study for the students. However, basic computer requirements are not the same from the different knowledge backgrounds and different professional requirements. Some use basic computer education as the pure methods, means and skill trainings. Some use it as an important part of the professional training goal. However, each student’s own situation is not the same. Teachers are facing with how to do differ from man to man and how to teach students in accordance with their aptitudes. However, the teaching target of the traditional teaching is not targeted. The teaching means is single and boring. It is obvious that the traditional teaching can not meet the requirements of modern society for students. Therefore, the reform of basic computer teaching[1−3] is imperative.

A teacher is the direct organizer and executor of the teaching activities, and plays a very important role in teaching. If you want to make the teaching reform very fruitful, the most important is to change your teaching concept. That is to say we should choose our teaching contents when we prepare lessons, and we should apply effective teaching methods to our lessons. Because the choice of teaching contents and teaching methods will directly affect our teaching effects and achieve the teaching goals. 2

TEACHING PREPARATION

There is a consensus in principle for the selection of teaching content in the community of basic computer education. The consensus is that basic computer teaching is oriented to application and pays attention to be practical. Basic computer teaching content can not copy the teaching content of computer professional. It is also not a simple cut, which make basic computer teaching materials as the simple edition of the computer professional teaching materials. In order to prepare the suitable teaching contents, we should adopt the following measures. First, break through the limitations of syllabus. The computer teaching is the computer application ability training on students. But the development of computer technology is very fast. The computer course syllabus often lags behind the rapid development of computer technology. The syllabus of basic computer teaching that we use is not adapted to the national level examination and practical applica-

201

ICIEES_Book.indb 201

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

tion demand. So we can not perform completely in accordance with our current syllabus in the teaching activities. We should conduct our curriculum teaching on the base of the current syllabus by combining our national grade examination outline with different professional needs for computer base. Second, break through the limitations of teaching material. Teaching material is the basic tool for our teaching. But because of the faster development of computer, higher demands on the practical ability of students, wider knowledge which the national level examination and other examinations involve, teachers should have the ability to conduct teaching by transcending material limit in the teaching process. For example, in the teaching process of “C programming language”, teachers can use a main teaching material and use multiple auxiliary materials according to the teaching need. Meanwhile, they should find other relevant materials according to the feedback in the teaching process. In this way, teachers can make reference to all the materials when preparing lessons. And then sum up the teaching contents which are suitable for our own teaching. The teaching contents include the basic knowledge, examples of each chapter as well as our homework. The contents of each part will be picked up. So our teaching effects will certainly better than with only one teaching material. Third, break through the limitations of thinking. Computer teaching is the basic skill training on students. Therefore, we should determine the teaching methods and contents with the goal of training the practical ability of students. In particular, emphasize the need to jump out of the superstition of authority. For example, if we use one textbook, we can not say that it’s the examination content and we only use it to prepare for the examination. We should pefer the collective lesson preparation. It means that all the teachers of basic computer course sit down together and discuss the teaching contents of each chapter until they get satisfactory teaching contents. In order to accomplish the teaching task with a better effect, everyone can decide on their own teaching methods by combining their own specific circumstances, such as students’ level, with some effective contents from others. The contents discussed above are only for teaching preparation. And we think teachers should also do the following aspects in the real teaching implementation. 3

3.1

Strengthen practice

The teaching of basic computer course is to cultivate the computer application ability of students. The ability is not learned from listening and seeing, but from practicing. Only students are hands-on, they will have senses of accomplishment and then generate interests in courses, which will make them learn more easily. Therefore, we think that let students’ hands-on, mind and participate in more targeted practice. The students can have high perspicacity through practice and can handle very skillfully. The biggest difference between the former teaching and the current teaching is that we pay more attention to cultivate students’ practical ability at present. 3.2

Encourage and guide the exploration learning

The constructivist learning theory thinks that students construct their own knowledge structures in the process of the interaction between themselves and the learning contents. Teachers should guide students to explore the regularity knowledge in practice and sublimate the perceptual knowledge to rational height. Only in this way, students can infer other things from one fact. The teacher plays a great guide in this process. 3.3

Carefully design the teaching structure

We think that basic computer teaching should teach the students to learn with questions. For example, when students contact with an application software for the first time, it’s enough to master how to use the help and do some basic understanding to the software. The students can not learn deeply. In the further teaching, students will be interested and take the initiative to go if there are application requirements. That is the “learn in order to practice”.

4

TEACHING EVALUATION

Teaching reform is a systematic work that includes teaching preparation, teaching implementation and teaching evaluation. Therefore, in order to make the reform with the best effect, we think that we should also reform the teaching evaluation to stimulate the students’ computer learning enthusiasm, arouse students’ study initiative and improve the computer application ability. We think that we can reform the teaching evaluation from the following aspects.

TEACHING IMPLEMENTATION

In order to mobilize the study enthusiasm of students and guide the students to learn actively, we reform the teaching way from the following aspects.

4.1

Vigorously promote the network examination system

The network examination systems include student examination systems, teacher evaluation systems

202

ICIEES_Book.indb 202

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

and database management systems. The systems store a lot of exercises, examination papers and user information. It is easy for teachers to produce a paper from the database randomly, conduct online examinations at any place, get scores immediately, and conduct statistics, analysis and evaluation instantly. 4.2

Introduce computer certification system of country or enterprise

The development trend of the current computer education is that combine occupation training with daily teaching. From this point of view, the computer rank examinations relevant to our country or the computer ability tests set by some well-known enterprises are introduced into the computer teaching in universities, which are as the evaluation methods of relevant courses. The way mentioned above can make the students have clearer goals. And then can improve the students’ internal driving forces of autonomous learning. In addition, this evaluation methods can also save the time and economy cost by students’ occupation ability raise. 5

CONCLUSION

The teaching reform of the basic computer course is a systematic engineering. It involves all aspects of teaching process. And it can be carried out through the various methods and forms. We will put the above ideas relevant to the reform of the basic computer education into the practical teaching process. And we will verify the effects of these reform measures.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This study was financially supported by the Fundamental Research Funds for the Central Universities (3142014087, 3142013098, 3142014125, 3142014096, 3142014085), Natural Science Foundation of Qinghai Province of China (2012-Z935Q, No.2012-N-525), Key Prevention and Control Technology of Major Safety Accidents in Production (2013). REFERENCES [1] Fan, M.Z. 2010. Practice and thinking on the reform of basic computer teaching. Computer Education (1): 90–92. [2] Huang, X. 2011. Discussion on the teaching reform of computer base in university. Journal of Hunan University of Science and Engineering 32(4): 59–61. [3] Han, G.H. 2014. Research on the reform of basic computer teaching. Software Guide 13(2): 162–164. [4] Hu, P., Fu, C.J. & Li, M. 2011. Thinking on the computer grade examination and computer basic teaching reform. Chinese out of School Education: 167–168. [5] Ling, Y. 2010. NCRE and computer foundation teaching reform of higher education. Computer Education (21): 138–141. [6] Huang, Z.G. 2013. Exploration on the teaching reform of computer base based on the status of computer grade examination. Science and Technology Information (23): 54–82.

203

ICIEES_Book.indb 203

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

University R&D, formation of high-tech firms and employment growth Yongjun Guan, Min Qu & Xiuna Liu School of Finance and Economics, Guangxi University of Science and Technology, Guangxi, P.R. China

Wenling Zheng School of Management, Guangxi University of Science and Technology, Guangxi, P.R. China

ABSTRACT: Based on the ten years’ panel data from 27 provinces in China, this paper, on one hand, studies the relationship between the R&D of universities and the emergence of Hi-tech firms; on the other hand, it discusses the effects of the R&D of universities and the emergence of Hi-tech firms on the development of district economy. The results show that the R&D of universities not only will stimulate the formation of Hi-tech firms, but also have the direct and indirect influence on the region economy. R&D will improve the employment via the formation of Hi-tech firms. Thus, to some extent, the R&D of universities exerts a positive effluence on economic development of region. Keywords: 1

University R&D; Formations of New firm; Employment Growth

INTRODUCTION

The R&D is of great significance for the long-term development of a country, a region or an enterprise. Generally, R&D can improve the rate of knowledge accumulation, knowledge has spillover effect, raise funds for science and technology, especially the R&D investment scale and strength, will lead directly to an increase in patent quantity, the new product output, thus increasing R&D investment is an important means for a country to realize independent innovation and sustainable economic development. In China, the enterprises, scientific research institutions and university have different roles in the process of regional innovation and economic growth: Although the enterprises is the main power of regional innovation, due to that the R&D investment intensity is too low, and most funds of R&D is used to buy foreign technology and equipment, therefore, independent innovation ability of enterprises is weak; As we know, the university is the cradle of knowledge, which has the most abundant research resources, for example, it has a large number of researchers and research funding and create large number of patents. In particular, the model that university involves in the R&D of enterprises is a unique, at present, Key Laboratory of National, National Research Center of Engineering Technology, mostly set up in colleges and universities; it has been the main motive of high-tech innovation combining technological resources with enterprise’s demand.

Wu Yuming and He Jiankun (2010) study showed the relationship between university, R&D of enterprise and regional innovation output drew the conclusion that the effect R&D of university on regional innovation output is positive, but statistically not significant. While the related research shows that, the spillover effect of university R&D for regional innovation activities positive impact. Whether University of R&D contribute the high technology entrepreneurship or not? How much contribution that high-tech venture to a region economy? Research on effect that university R&D on the regional innovation output is less. In this paper, using the 27 provinces in the ten years’ 2002– 2011 data, considering the impact of university R&D on formation of high-tech enterprises, examining whether spillover effect exists and whether the formation of high-tech enterprises have a positive effect on regional economic growth? 2

LITERATURE REVIEW AND HYPOTHESIS

2.1 Relations between university R&D and formation of high-tech firms Based on the view of knowledge, knowledge spillovers on geography improve enterprise innovation output in short time, but generally the spillovers effect is short, because a lot of individual enterprises are likely become free riders, for example, in the process of R&D, hidden knowledge could spill

205

ICIEES_Book.indb 205

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

over into outside and used by other enterprises to obtain economic benefits and gradually the benefit will be reduced. Knowledge spillover here is mainly knowledge transfer between the enterprise clusters. While out of the cluster, the university and the enterprise combines together, knowledge spillover effect of university R&D could benefit the enterprise for a long time. Some research indicated that the R&D innovation of high-tech industry is closely related to the innovation achievements. In the high-technology industry, Anselin (1997) study showed that university R&D has a significant positive correlation with the high-technology innovation activities, and generate knowledge spillovers through geographical research affect the private sector directly or indirectly; Dumais (1997) also pointed out that the university R&D has a strong correlation with local innovation activities, while the company R&D is not the most best catalyst[5] for cluster output of innovation activities; on the contrary, Wu Yuming (2007) study showed that university R&D effect on regional innovation output is positive, but not statistically significant, but the innovative contribution of company R&D to output is significantly positive. This may be because of China’s hi-tech industry is affected by the impact of national policies to a certain extent, but in the later development, innovation activities and innovation are closely related to R&D activities. Bruce (2007) study showed the university effects on the formation of enterprises and economic growth based on the local data of America, and pointed out that university R&D has a positive relationship with new venture creation. Douglas (2006) study showed the relationship between the site chose of high-tech corporations and R&D of university in USA, and found that the R&D expenditures of university play a positive significant effect on the site chose of high-tech corporations, also the spillover effect may be extended to about 145 miles of radius around the university. 2.2

Relations between formation of high-tech firms and economic growth

When Schumpeter (1934) started to study on the relationship between innovation and economic growth. He pointed out that the innovation improves overall needs of the region and breaks the original market structure and lead to the redistribution of market resource. And also he put forwards the creative destruction. Wang liping (2008) study showed the relationship between the innovation and economic growth using the co-integration theory and Granger causality and found that there is a positive significant correlation between technology innovation and economic growth, and also technology innovation is the motives of economic growth.

For a region, employment growth is the important indicator of economic growth. The new firm will provide many positions and many workers crowed in, then new demands emerging lead to re-created job. Many scholars pointed out that the new firm creates the abundant position and stimulates the development of the region economic. In summary, the university, as a body of region innovation, its R&D would push the development of the region innovation in a form of knowledge spillover and has a positive effect on the formation of new firm, especially the high-tech corporations. Therefore we can infer the formation of high-tech corporations could stimulate employment growth and new demand emerging and lead to re-created job. So we come up with the following hypothesis. Hypothesis 1: The Formation of high-tech corporations has a positive relationship with the R&D of university in a region. Hypothesis 2: The Employment growth has a positive relationship with the formation of hightech corporations. 3

MODEL DESIGN AND DATA

This paper selects High-tech Industrial Development Zone of China as the samples and study the relationship between the R&D of university and formation of high-tech corporations and the relationship between the formation of high-tech corporations and region economic growth. 3.1 Model design In order to testify the hypothesis 1, we chose the number of formation of high-tech corporations as the dependent variables; the R&D expenditure of university, Growth ratio of GDP, size of region market, purchasing power of region consumer, region education level and time as the independent variables and controlling variables; In order to testify the hypothesis 2, we chose the number of employment in private company and employment growth ratio as the dependent variables, the number of formation of high-tech corporations, the R&D expenditure of university as the independent variables and controlling variables. Here we construct the model as follows: FN Nt = a + aaURD a2 IPC C1t a3RP1t 1URD1t + a4GDP G G a5Trend + ε TEM1t

a a FN Nt a2URD U 1t + a3RP1t + a4GDP G G a5Trend + ε

EMCG Gt = a + a1FN Nt + a2URD U 1t + a3RP1t + a4GDP G G a5Trend + ε

(1) (2) (3)

206

ICIEES_Book.indb 206

4/3/2015 7:08:53 AM

Table 1.

FN TEM EMCG URD1 IPC1 RP1 GDPG Trend

Descriptive statistics and correlations of variables. Mean

S.D

FN

TEM

EMCG

URD1

IPC1

RP1

GDPG

Trend

116 2.35 0.09 5.22 3.82 4.57 0.12 5.5

344.3 0.34 0.26 0.67 0.15 0.26 0.06 2.88

1 −0.02 0.29** 0.35** 0.35** −0.18** 0.22** 0.14*

1 −0.14* 0.52** 0.22** 0.79** 0.05 0.20**

1 0.123* 0.174** −0.123* 0.091 0.029

1 0.617** 0.248** 0.348** 0.437**

1 −0.108 0.500** 0.697**

1 −0.061 0.036

1 0.561**

1

*p < 0.05, **p < 0.01.

where FN stands for the number of formation of high-tech corporations, which could be regard as the important indicator of R&D spillover of university; URD stands for the R&D expenditure of university, in order to reduce the systematic error, we got a log processing, URD1 is the logarithm of URD; TEM1 stands for the logarithm of the number of employment in private company; EMCG stands for the employment growth ratio RP1 stands for size of region market and it is the logarithm of RP, which is the number of population in a region; IPC1 stands for purchasing power of region consumer and it is the logarithm of IPC, which is the household dispose income in a region. GDPG is the growth ratio of GDP, Trend is the time variable, values are from 1 to 10, they show the vibration of macro economy. 3.2 Data All the data we derive from the website of China state statistical bureau, China statistical yearbook and China science and technology statistical yearbook. We chose ten years’ data from 2002–2011 and also we get rid of the Tibet, Chongqing, Qinghai and Ningxia owing to the missing data. Therefore we get the panel data about 10 years 27 provinces.

Table 2.

Result of regression about equation (1).

Independent variable

FN

C URD1 IPC1 RP1 GDPG Trend N F-statistic Adjusted R2

−941.95 (173.60)*** 178.06 (7.72)*** 385.10 (43.49)*** −283.83 (14.72)*** 477.70 (73.90)*** −17.65 (2.06)*** 6561 58.42 0.21

***p < 0.001. Table 3. Result of regression about equations (2) and (3). Equation (2)

Equation (3)

Independent

TEM1

EMCG

C FN

−2.58(0.04)*** −0.00008 (8.46E-05)*** 0.27(0.008)*** 0.78(0.01)*** −0.47(0.42)***

0.24(0.06)*** 0.00013 (1.29E-05)*** 0.13(0.012)*** −0.17(0.014)***

URD1 RP1 GDPG Trend N DW Adjusted R2

6561 1.888 0.72

−0.01(0.002)*** 6561 1.894 0.06

***p < 0.001.

4

RESULTS AND ANALYSIS

Table 2 shows the results of the Equation 1. It shows that the R&D expenditure of university, household dispose income in a region and GDP growth ratio have a positive significant effect on the number of formation of high-tech corporations, testifying the hypothesis 1. From the Equation 2, it can be seen that the R&D expenditure of university has a positive significant

effect on the number of employment, and the impact coefficient is 0.27, in Equation 3, we can understand the R&D expenditure of university has a positive significant effect on the number of employment, and the impact coefficient is 0.13. Therefore, the university plays a vital role in the region economy development. The results show that the R&D expenditure of university has a direct and indirect influence on the economic development. The indirect way is the

207

ICIEES_Book.indb 207

4/3/2015 7:08:54 AM

R&D expenditure of university could have an influence on the formation of new firm and lead to the economy growth in a region. 5

corporation in China: mediating effects of innovative policy’ and Guangxi University of Science and Technology doctoral funding ‘Economic Consequence of Innovation Policy in Liuzhou city’.

CONCLUSIONS AND SUGGESTIONS

In order to develop the high-tech corporations, Chinese government takes measures of production, education and research to stimulate it, the R&D of university have a positive spillover effect to formation of high-tech corporations and the formation of new firms could lead the employment growth and demand increasing, which is a virtuous circle and benefit to the development of economy. First, the R&D expenditure of university could stimulate the formation of new firm. China should realize the sustain development of economy via science and technology innovation, the university has the benefits of science and technology innovation. And we should put a great emphasis on the role of university. Therefore we can broad the funds sources of R&D, raise the amounts of funds supporting, stimulate the combination of university scientific research and corporations, and exemplify the spillover effect of university R&D. Second, economic growth stands for the reduction of surplus labor and the increasing of productivity of labor. This paper shows that formation of new firm could stimulate the growth of region economy. As we know, new firm needs more talents and labors. New demands arise due to more talents and labors and finally benefit to the development of region economy. In final, the R&D expenditure of university has a direct and indirect effect on the development of economy. That is to say, the R&D expenditure of university could benefit to the economic growth via a positive influence on the formation of new firm besides stimulate it in a direct way.

REFERENCES

ACKNOWLEDGMENT This study was funded by The Ministry of Education, Humanities and social science funding ‘R&D investment and performance for high-tech

[1] Wu Yuming, He Jiankun. Dynamics econometric analysis on the relationship between the R&D of university and patents in municipal region. Management of science and research, 2010, (3): 93–98. [2] Wang Liping. Positive research on the R&D Knowledge spillover of Chinese university. Chinese soft science, 2008, (12):54–59. [3] Dumais, G., Ellison, G. & Glaeser, E.L. (2002). Geographic concentration as a dynamic process. Review of Economics and Statistics, 84(2), 193–204. [4] Anselin Luc, Attila Varga & Zoltan ACS (1997). Local geographic spillovers between university research and high technology innovations. Journal of urban economics, 42(1997), 422–448. [5] Bruce A. Kirchhoff, Scott L. Newbert, Iftekhar Hasan & Catherine Armington (2007). The influence of university R&D expenditures on new business formations and employment growth. ET&P 2007(7) 543–559. [6] Jaffe, A.B. (1989). Real effects of academic research. American Economic Review, 79(5), 957–970. [7] Brent D. Beal & Javier Glmeno, (2001). Geographic agglomeration, knowledge spillovers, and competitive evolution. Academy of Management Proceedings BPS: A1-A6. [8] Douglas Woodward, Octávio Figueiredo & Paulo Guimarães (2006). Beyond the Silicon Valley: university R&D and high-technology location. Journal of Urban Economics, 60(2006), 15–32. [9] Reynolds, P.D., Miller, B. & Maki, W.R. (1995). Explaining regional variation in business births and deaths: U.S. 1976–88. Small Business Economics, 7, 389–407. [10] Armington, C. & ACS, Z.J. (2002). The determinants of regional variation in new firm formation. Regional Studies, 36, 33–45. [11] Tether, B.S. (2000). Small firms, innovation, and employment creation in Britain and Europe: A question of expectations. Technovation, 20, 109–113. [12] Wennekers, S. & Thurik, R. (1999). Linking entrepreneurship and economic growth. Small Business Economics, 13(1), 27–55.

208

ICIEES_Book.indb 208

4/3/2015 7:08:54 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Research on ideological and political education in the new media age Zhengyang Wang & Chunmei Liu JiangSu Institute of Architectural Technology, Xuzhou, Jiangsu, China

ABSTRACT: With the advancement of technology, relative to the newspaper, campus radio, campus television and other traditional media in terms of network and mobile phones as the representative of the new media, since new media technology has been widely penetrated into all aspects of campus life, to the ideological and political education have brought the new opportunities and challenges. Ideological and political workers should correctly understand the new media campus, improve the ability to use new media to work on campus, and give full play to the combined effect of the old and new campus media, establish and improve the leadership and organization mechanisms to strengthen campus network culture construction, improve the media literacy of college students of new media, through the integration of the ideological and political education resources, build college ideological and political education of new media platforms, control of the proceedings under the new media environment on campus ideological and political education initiative. Keywords: 1

New Media; Ideological and Political Education; Accomplishment; Initiative

INTRODUCTION

sparked a campus media revolution. Campus media “Five Foot Kingdoms” situation is taking shape.

Campus media organizations at all levels within the university campus dedicated communication carriers and media information to students and staff on campus. It is with social media has significant differences: the spread of limited space inside the university campus, spread fixed objects in the school staff, focused on the dissemination of news and information, study guides, and so on. In the analysis of campus media, the traditional view of the campus media confined “by the media, school construction,” I believe that this classification is too general and delayed, from the “dissemination of information carrier,” meaning the actual impact of this starting to produce and disseminate, campus media should be expanded to “appear on campus and use the media.” New Media Campus is a new form of media university campuses in recent years, with the establishment and operation of campus network and appears. Newspaper, campus radio and campus television are the three pillars of campus media, and they are a traditional campus media. Propaganda plays a role in the main force. The emergence of the internet as a symbol of the international media—the fourth network, increasingly tight the campus traditional media, with its information fast, easy to use features, recognized and accepted by the majority of teachers and students. Meanwhile, with the increase of mobile phone users on campus, campus-based information platform for mobile phone networks in the form of the emergence of a new campus media,

2

NEW MEDIA CHARACTERISTICS AND IDEOLOGICAL AND POLITICAL EDUCATION

Political education of college students are particularly concerned about the contemporary object and keen to accept new things, “new media” is a relative concept, it actually changed things with history. With the new media, we can play it in combination with a variety of network tools to move constantly changing referent object. Any era will have the advantage of a relatively new, building horizontal and vertical vector series of ideological and political education, such as the media. Currently, including 3G, 4G network, blog, micro blogging, mobile phones, virtual theme websites, mobile news, blog, micro-blog, BBS, MSN, QQ and several communities, PDA, MP4, IPTV, and so on, a contemporary sense of “the new word campus platform to deliver relevant forms of media loved to college.” The advantage of the new media is that it has changed the ideological and political education of a traditional mass media, and strives to make ideological and political education from the carrier plane multipoint mode of transmission, good interactivity, immediate and effective to three-dimensional, static variable dynamic, thus forming a broad sharing platform. Resistance, high level of integration with the ubiquitous network and other characteristics.

209

ICIEES_Book.indb 209

4/3/2015 7:08:54 AM

Timeliness and convenience of the new media have greatly increased the superiority of thought is: abundant resources, convenient, open sharing, respect the political education of personality, strong interaction, virtual simulation, more humane. Technological change guide because new media has the characteristics of cross time dissemination of information, education content with “media interaction”, “resource sharing”, from a media terminal transfer to another terminal, promote the interconnection between a computer network and mobile phone network, all kinds of readers, thus forming a “streaming” phenomenon, the radiation force of ideological and political education penetration is greatly improved, achieving full of new media on the ideological and political education, full coverage, full penetration into the. Students through the mobile phone, microblog and other new media can acquire knowledge and information in any place, any time. Students through the new media to social reality and hot news, can understand the various social phenomenon, different national ideology, familiar with party and state guidelines and policies, and so on [1].

3

3.1

THE NEGATIVE IMPACT OF NEW MEDIA ON THE IDEOLOGICAL AND POLITICAL EDUCATION New media “no barrier” of ideological and political education to increase the difficulty

Blog, E-mail, MSN and other new media communication without borders, information dissemination super regional, cross-cultural features open wide but its contents disorder. As the new media is not just the communication tools, but also plays a shaping ideas and concepts to construct a function, so different ideologies and cultures all political forces strive to use its propaganda, attract audience. Released after the intervention of new media campus information, dissemination and use of more freedom, a few Western countries with a network of high-tech monopoly, the output of its ideology, values and ideas of some decadent culture and lifestyle. College has not yet formed a stable values, still form a rational judgment, if the long-term effects of bad information by easily lead to lost ideals and beliefs, values, confusion, legal and moral sense weakened, ideological and political education in order to increase the difficulty. 3.2

The virtual nature of the new media is apt to cause some students appear personality disorder and cognitive biases

New Media has a strong virtual and anonymity, which gives the behavior provides a great degree

of freedom, people’s subjectivity and creativity into full play. But some students are still immature, to identify weak, easy to indulge in a virtual environment virtual space free to play initiative, virtual reality personality and personality change frequently, easily induced weakening of personality disorder and sense of responsibility; some students escapism, immersed in unreal personal achievements, interpersonal alienation, are likely to cause mental disorders and identify. Known bias, sometimes leading to moral anomie and even criminal behavior. Such as the use of new media, publishing false news, spreading rumors and creating virus software and even theft of money and goods of others, such as through the network [2]. 3.3

New media content diversity weakens the function and effect of ideological and political education

New media information dissemination was the decentralized state, with uncertainty and discrete, multi-dimensional propagation mode increases the difficulty of government control of information sources. Under the new media environment, complex, diverse excess information affecting college students to identify and select the right to information. Especially the excessive pursuit of commercial interests, some of the new media is filled with fastfood culture, vulgar culture; some hit the bottom line of social morality and public values, to a certain extent, interfering with people’s ideas, feelings and attitudes, interfering with student’s value judgments, lifestyle and ideals. Contemporary, mainstream values and different ideologies presented from time to time in the new media, the different value perspectives and diverse new media content so that some students in the socialist core value system into their own values in the process of pursuing adverse interference, increasing the difficulty of the ideological and political education, weaken the function and effect of the ideological and political education [3].

4

4.1

INNOVATIVE WAYS TO USE NEW MEDIA CAMPUS IDEOLOGICAL AND POLITICAL EDUCATION WORK Correct understanding of new media, new media initiative to promote the use of ideological and political education to achieve new development

In recent years, with the spread of modern media forms and rapid development environment, a variety of new media are emerging campus, the speed of development, high frequency of changes, affecting

210

ICIEES_Book.indb 210

4/3/2015 7:08:54 AM

a wide range of far more than the traditional campus media. The new campus is the inevitable product of modern media, new media is growing deep into the results of colleges and universities. Colleges and universities should take the initiative to promote the use of new media to achieve the ideological and political education in the new development. We should soberly campus network and other new media has become increasingly integrated into the campus every aspect of life, young college students, has increasingly become the ideological and political education can not ignore the environment and manner. Colleges and universities to enhance the sense of responsibility and urgency, serious thinking, in-depth study, to accelerate the pace, improve the working mechanism, so that the ideological and political education in colleges and universities in the information age to keep new vigor and vitality. To strengthen the ideological and media positions are building schools, especially to expand the campus network, mobile phones and other new media positions, to create a clear positioning and distinctive features, complementary functions, extensive media coverage of the school system is to strengthen cooperation with social media, enhanced political education of college students attractiveness and cohesiveness. Use the new media to promote ideological and political education work, and gradually establish a traditional means and new media full integration, multi-level, wide coverage guide mobilization system, more active and effective use of new media to do college students under the guidance of the new situation work, to become a new platform for effective organization of university students, guide students, serving students, safeguard the legitimate rights and interests of the college. 4.2

Integration of old and new media campus resources, give full play to the combined effect of the old and new campus media

New media campus is growing deep into the media results university campus emerged as the new media is not the opposite of a traditional campus media, the relationship between them is not who instead of who’s relationship, but rather the basic orientation of cooperation and complementary relationship. We have to blend traditional media and new media together to achieve complementary advantages and common play an active role in the ideological and political education work. Campus fusion of old and new media resources is the integration between campus media, both news subjects are different, the integration of different business entities, but also the technology, the integration of different modes of transmission of different propagation, and thus make the campus media to form

an organic whole. Campus fusion of old and new media resources is better able to play in promoting the advantages of each campus media, it is used to optimize the allocation of resources for each campus media, an important measure to improve the utilization of media resources. 4.3

Students new media to improve media literacy, regulate the rational use of new media on campus

New media literacy as every university student living in a modern society must have the basic quality, contemporary integral part of quality education. Currently, new media through the dissemination of advanced concepts, play and cultural and educational functions such as transfer function of ideological growth has played a positive role in guiding, but it is undeniable that new media and traditional media, for it is a contemporary college students. The “double-edged sword”, but because of the openness of new media, interactive and virtual sex and other characteristics, so that this “double-edged sword” more “sharp.” In the new media, some false, the spread of harmful information and vulgar content polluted the new media environment. Students strengthen media literacy education new media, new media culture of discernment, so that it can resist the adverse effects of new media information and use of new media, new features to improve themselves have a very real sense. Universities should new media literacy education in school quality education areas, develop new media literacy by organizing lectures and the creation of required courses, elective courses spread knowledge of new media, new media applications will penetrate into the teaching of the courses, so that students understand new media. You can also take advantage of existing social practice of new media education, such as teacher blog, personal microblog, SMS, and so on, guided by teachers and education to enable students to enhance their practice through new media, media literacy. Meanwhile, the school should also be strengthened and new media, the legal concept of moral consciousness of college students, university students develop and improve the ability to consciously resist the harmful information, consciously abide by norms and ethics of new media, new media rational use of resources. 5

EPILOGUE

Colleges and universities while the socialist core value system is used to guide public opinion front of new media, and actively integrate the advantages of resources, we must optimize new media information environment, establish regulatory

211

ICIEES_Book.indb 211

4/3/2015 7:08:54 AM

mechanisms campus information new media, new media technologies for information dissemination conditions channels, approaches a more strict supervision and management, the formation of organic management to run the chain, which is good in the new media environment ideological and political education organization security. Government information departments should strengthen the internet, mobile phones and other new media monitoring and management, accelerate the construction of the new media regulations production and dissemination of information, to review the law and filter information, to strengthen the defense capabilities of the socialist ideology, clean network from the source. Colleges and universities to establish a sound regulatory mechanism campus media information, through the construction of a network of virtual organizations, and other ways to set up your network administrator to increase supervision of information dissemination, but also the timely establishment of the campus network

spokesman mechanism, establish a sound for unexpected events, groups emergency preparedness and rapid response mechanisms of the events in the new media environment to promote the theme of socialism with Chinese characteristics. REFERENCES [1] Zhang Yongting. Approach Innovation of College Ideological and Political Education under the Background of Campus New Media, Journal of China University of Petroleum (Edition of Social Sciences), 2011, 27(5):103–108. [2] Wang Liren, & Zheng Xiaoguang. Review of the Effectiveness of Ideological and Political Education Research, Journal of China Journal of Ideological & Theoretical Education, 2007, 5; 65–68. [3] Li Haiyan. Causes and Countermeasures weaken the effectiveness of ideological and political education of, Heilongjiang Researches on Higher Education, 2006, 3; 73–75.

212

ICIEES_Book.indb 212

4/3/2015 7:08:54 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The alert correlation analysis of intrusion detection Dong Xu, Da Wei, Jianqi Zhu, Xuewei Cheng & Ming Li Computer Science Department, Jilin University, Changchun, China

ABSTRACT: With the development of network technology, network multi-step attack becomes one of the primary means of network attacks. However, when detecting the multi-step network attacks, IDSs show some problems such as redundant alarms and lack of real-time warning. In this paper, an Alert Integration and Association Method (AIAM) is proposed. The method raises the alert of network multistep attacks through fusing the redundant alarms and detects them by using intrusion correlation analysis. And also it generates attack sequence diagram through the self-learning associated library. The experiment shows that the present method is effective with the well-known DARPA 2000 dataset. Keywords: 1

Intrusion detection; Alert correlation; DARPA 2000

INTRODUCTION

With the increasing number of network multistep attacks, the alert correlation method plays an important role in intrusion detection. When the multi-step attacks occur, IDSs (Intrusion Detection Systems) widely generate a number of disorder alarms. These alerts are difficult to reflect network multi-step attacks effectively. Therefore, how to detect alerts effectively is the key to detect network multi-step attacks. IDSs are usually affected by the physical environment, so it extracts good attack sequence difficultly. In this paper, we use AIAM to correlate network multi-step attacks completely and show it clearly. 2

RELATED WORK

With the development of network security technology, network multi-step attacks have become the important research topic in network security. In general, IDSs are the important tools to detect network multi-step attacks such as malicious behaviors (e.g. scan host and DDOS). However, IDSs often have many problems like redundant and false alarms, lack of early warning capability. To overcome the above problems, these alarms by using the alert correlation method to remove redundant alarms and extract attack sequence. Alert correlation method usually analyzes raw alerts generated by IDS. Different analytical methods lead to the different result. There are three kinds of common use of alert correlation method: (1) Alert correlation method based on

feature similarity was proposed by A. Valdes and K. Skinner [1]. While the approach to correlate alerts by feature similarity is simple, convenient and has better real-time performance, the effect of redundant alarms fusion is not well, the number of alerts is still much and correlation result is complex. (2) Alert correlation method based on causal was proposed by Peng Ning [2] and Frederic Cuppens [3]. Peng Ning made the TIAA network alarm correlation analysis tool based on the idea. Since Peng Ning used the causal method based on Bayesian probability, TIAA can correlate alerts effectively. However, it has large search space, longer processing time, big resource consumption and poor real-time performance. (3) Alert correlation method based on timing causal was proposed by Xinzhou Qin [4]. He proposed the method based on Granger Causality Test causal correlation engine. We can find the new attack sequence by calculating Granger Causality Index to achieve alert correlation, not requires the prior conditions on aggressive behaviors. However, the method can produce large errors. Of course, people also proposed other methods [5], [6] and [7]. For the above alert correlation methods that exists redundant alarms, high complexity, bad realtime performance, big errors and other issues, it is difficult to distinguish the relationship of alerts in the above methods. The method based on alerts similarity is good real-time and accelerates the fusion rate. The correlation effect of the method based on causal alert correlation is very well, and we can consider when correlating alerts. In order to extract the new attack sequence, we can also consider the idea of self-learning. In order to over-

213

ICIEES_Book.indb 213

4/3/2015 7:08:54 AM

come the above problems, we propose AIAM to solve these problems. AIAM can extract attack sequence in detecting real-time multi-step attacks. By combining related library and feature library, we extract new feature to feature library, then correlate alerts and generate the final attack sequence. In order to compare the effect of two methods, we obtain experimental results by using TIAA and AIAM. 3 3.1

ALERT INTEGRATION AND ASSOCIATION MODEL Architecture and module

In Figure 1, the AIAM model has three phases: (1) data preprocess, (2) alert integration and association, and (3) result generate. Phase 1. Data preprocess: We collect raw alerts by IDSs when malicious host attacks victims. In order to deal with alerts effectively, we need to standardize the alert format. Phase 2. Alert integration and association: We use the alert integration method to fuse raw alerts. After fusing alerts, we can use alert correlation method to correlate alerts. Finally, the correlation result can be obtained. Phase 3. Result generate: According to the result generated by using AIAM, we can automate make attack sequence figured by using drawing tools. 3.2

Alert library

Alert integration and association frame.

4

ALERT INTEGRATION AND ASSOCIATION METHOD

IDSs identify network attack alert by extracting the feature of each packet. In order to understand overall attack intention, we need to collect the full attack alerts library by IDSs, and we can accurately process alert correlation by using the AIAM. In order to extract complete attack sequence, the paper uses AIAM to alert fusion and correlation in two parts. They are alert integration and alert association. 4.1

In the alert integration and association module, this paper extracts base alerts by using alert correlation

Figure 1.

method. We need to use alert library including: base alert library, feature library and associated library. Definition 1: Base alert library is the alert dataset that uses alert integration extracts from raw alert library. Definition 2: Associated library is the library that stores alerts causal relationship. It contains the field {Id, Prerequisite, Consequence and Weight}. {Id} is the number of alarm item, {Prerequisite} is the leading alert, {Consequence} is the subsequent alert, and {Weight} is the probability of alerts correlation. Definition 3: Feature library is a set of features that stores the feature of each attack phase. The primary purpose is to store a new attack signature. We can make new feature add to the feature library and generate the associated library.

Alert integration

Definition 4: Alert integration method is a method that removes false and redundant alarms, and extracts the primary features. The primary purpose of alert integration method makes every step attack alerts fuses into a small number of visual alerts. In order to show integration alerts visually, the paper defines the base alert format. It is mainly used to fuse false alarms and irrelevant alarms and stores base alerts. The base alert format is {CID, IP_SRC, IP_DST, SPORT, DPORT, TIMESTAMP, and SIG_NAME}, where {CID} is the base alarm code, {IP_SRC} is the source IP address, {IP_DST} is the destination IP address, {SPORT} is the source port, {DPORT} is the destination port of base alert, {TIMESTAMP} is the timestamp, and {SIG_NAME} is the alert name. The method fuses alerts via calculating the weighted value of alert property. Alert integration method which is used to calculate the value has two parts: (1) alert attribute similarity calculation and (2) alert weighted value calculation.

214

ICIEES_Book.indb 214

4/3/2015 7:08:54 AM

4.1.1 Calculate alert attribute similarity We need to calculate the similarity of alerts by using the number, then classifies and calculates the different attributes of alerts. Through quantitative calculation, we can calculate the value of alert similarity clearly. Where T ∈ [0,1]. 0 means different class, 1 means the same class. Alert attributes include IP, port, timestamp, type and name. Ti =

{

0, alert1attr ≠ alert2 attr 1, alert1attr = alert2 attr

n

WT T ∑W

(2)

i i

i =1

After using the above alert fusion method, we find that the number of fusion alarms has been reached the expected goal. 4.2

Alert association

Definition 5: Alert association is the associated method that extracts correlation alerts by using the base alert library. We need to traverse the alert library. If there is no new alert in feature library, we need to add new alert to the feature library. By calculating the correlation, we can generate association rules and add it to associated library. Alert association can add new base alert to associated library adaptively and add new feature to train new base alert library. 4.2.1 Calculate base alert feature similarity In this section, we traverse base alert library. If the feature of the alert is not in feature library, we need to find the sequence of the feature set through distinguishing the similarity. The number of the feature class needs ourselves to set. The paper set five feature datasets is used to classify Table 1. Attr

Alert weight value. NAME

Weight 5

4.2.1.1 Calculate alert attribute similarity For alert queue, we need calculate the difference of two alerts alert1 and alert2 properties. The property of alerts we need to calculate includes time, port and number. Where I is the property of the alert and X is the maximum value.

(1)

4.1.2 Calculate alert weighted value To observe the similarity and the weight value in Table 1, we need to calculate the weighted value of two alerts alert1 and alert2. where Ti is the similarity of two alerts alert1 and alert2. Wi is the weight value of alert property. S is the final weighted value. If S is greater than 7, we think that the alarm can be fused. S (alert1, alert2 )

and study the alert feature, then we can realize self-learning.

SIP

DIP

SPT

DPT

TIME

2

3

2

2

1

Ti (alert1, alert2 ) =

{

0,| alertt1i − alert l t2i |> X 1,| alert1i − alert ale l t2i | 2.99, it indicates that enterprises are at security, with little probability of bankrupt to be considered; when 1.81 < Z < 2.675, it shows that businesses are in predicted gray region, with unstable financial condition; when 2.675 < Z < 2.99, enterprises might run into financial trouble. Through computation, the observation of Z-score in some enterprise for years will enable us to find the first sign of finance in crisis.

3 3.1

EMPIRICAL STUDY Empirical study of business commercial-age model

Through literature research, the present-essay writers adopt SunJianwei’s (2010) improved model, namely: having revised Japanese scholars’ commercial-age model, determine proper models: when Zi > Z , linear interpolation is made at the age of 20–40; when Zi < Z , linear interpolation is made at the of 40–80. The data extracted from business

324

ICIEES_Book.indb 324

4/3/2015 7:09:08 AM

Table 1.

Enterprise vitality index system.

Business Survival Vitality Power

Growing power

Current assets/current liabilities × 100% Year-end total NPL/year-end total asset × 100% Total liabilities/total asset × 100% Total liabilities/stockholder’equity × 100% Increasing rate of current-year main business income/ previous-year main business income × 100% Sale income/average total fixed-asset × 100% Sale income/average total asset × 100% Net profit/stockholders’equity × 100% Owner’s equity during report period/owner’s equity during the same period of previous year × 100% Net value of fixed assets/original value of fixed assets Total amount of contribution made by business to community/average total assets × 100%

Current ratio NPL ratio Asset-liability ratio Equity ratio Increasing rate of main business income Turnover of fixed asset Turnover of total capital Net-asset income rate Value-added value of assets hedge

Fixed-asset newness rate Ratio of contribution to community Regenera- Proportion of non-main business tion income Proportion of R&D staff Proportion of intangible asset in total asset Leader’s average age Construction of business culture Asset size

Non-main business income/total income × 100% Number of R &D staff/total number of staff × 100% Intangible assets/total assets × 100%

Natural logarithm of total assets

The present essay is based on the division method of industry segment in Tianxiang Investment.

age accorded with bionic man’s natural age and take on positive correlation between composite value and business vitality. 3.1.1 Determination of indicator system In the light of research literature on the characters and business vitality of listed firms in China’s machinery sector, the indicators are constructed as business vitality indicators as follows: Consultant Ltd. Co. (by 2011), with 229 listed firms in machinery sector as a target for empirical analysis. Since indicators need data for 3 years or more, the firms listed for less than 3 years have been eliminated or 86 listed firms in the same sector for less than 3 years eliminated. Besides, there were 11 firms with incomplete data and 132 firms designated as model enterprises in the end. Data source indicates that the corporate annual report provided by Tide Website and data by Xiangcai Securities are employed and equipped with Excel and SPSS16.0 statistical software to analyze data. In indicator system, “assets size” and “R&D proportion” are data for 2011 and “entrepreneurial cultural construction” for assessment indicators while other 14 indicators are mean value from 2009 to 2011, with indicator data standardized. As “NPL ratio, assets liability rate and equity ratio” are in reverse scoring, so the three indicators are

calculated in reverse direction. “entrepreneurial cultural construction” indicators contain “construction on entrepreneurial culture”; stress of business on shareholders’ equity; rules and regulations; brand reputation; visual identifying system, whose weight is 0.2, 0.2, 0.25, 0.2 and 0.15 through comprehensive calculation. The concrete measures mean inviting 5 relevant staff, evaluating subjectively 5 projects mentioned above in 132 firms and summarizing each score, namely: The total score of some firm for “construction of entrepreneurial culture = (single-item score *weight)/5. 17 items of indicators mentioned above involve distinction-degree T test: indicator ranked upper 27% in the first group and lower 27% in the second group to make T test by comparing mean value between the two groups, with the result as follows. Distinction-degree test shows that there exist no obvious gap to be eliminated when confidence coefficient reaches 95% and “rate of contribution made by enterprises to society”, “proportion of non-main business income”, “proportion of intangible assets in total asset” and “senior executive average age” P > 0.05. The retained 13 indicators are applied to the calculation of composite value in business vitality.

325

ICIEES_Book.indb 325

4/3/2015 7:09:08 AM

Table 2.

Independent samples test.

13

F

sig

t

df

Sig (2tailed)

Current ratio

18.053

.000

NPL ratio

38.416

.000

Asset liability ratio Equity ratio

16.237

.000

21.267

.000

Growing rate of main business income Turnover of fixed asset Turnover of total assets Net-asset earning rate Asset hedge and valueadded ratio Newness rate of fixed asset Rate of contribution to community Asset size

10.233

.002

2.547 2.547 3.119 3.119 2.269 2.269 2.238 2.238 2.975 2.975

68 44.507 68 37.139 68 35.161 68 38.377 68 36.105

.013 .014 .003 .003 .026 .029 .029 .031 .004 .005

15.338

.000

10.590

.002

7.716

.007

15.469

.000

3.910 3.910 2.981 2.981 5.293 5.293 3.317 3.317

68 39.257 68 56.565 68 53.116 68 36.037

.000 .000 .004 .004 .000 .000 .001 .002

.300

.586

1.112

.295

5.452 5.452 1.884 1.884

68 67.607 68 67.700

.000 .000 .064 .064

7.134

.009

Rate of nonmain business income R&D staff proportion Proportion of intangible assets in total asset Average age of high-rank leaders Entrepreneurial cultural construction

3.712

.058

3.108 3.108 1.036 1.036

68 61.920 68 46.341

.003 .003 .304 .306

7.236

.009

2.008

.161

2.801 2.801 .928 .928

68 53.845 68 40.731

.007 .007 .357 .359

1.099

.298

1.954 68 .055 1.954 51.155 .056

.662

.419

5.295 68 .000 5.295 66.691 .000

Z

i =1

(wi signifies weight of various indicators, Xi standardized value of various indicators) Z = 0.0847X1 + 0.0813X2 + 0.2113X3 + 0.1017X4 + 0.0411X5 + 0.0751X6 + 0.0404X7 + 0.0933X8 + 0.0411X9 + 0.0192X10 + 0.0339X11 + 0.0702X12 + 0.0067X13 Of which X1∼X4 shows business survival, X5∼X10 business growing power and X11∼X13 business regeneration. The division of business age helps calculate the commercial age of each enterprise and linear interpolation applied to convert Zi between 20 and 80 years old. Table 4 and table 5 offer the names of firms at upper and lower tan among 132 firms in terms of commercial age. 3.2 Z-score model empirical study Targeting both upper and lower 10 firms indicated from empirical-analysis conclusion of “business age” for analysis, we adopt Z-score model in Altman to calculate separately Z-scores for 3 years. X, X2, X3, X4, X5 in Z-score model originate from the data of annual report for listed firms in machinery sector provided by Giant Network, with the results shown as table 6 and table 7.

4 4.1

3.1.2 Weight determination Variable coefficient _ is adopted to determine weight, namely: C.V = S/X 100% _ Of which S stands for standard deviation, X for mean value. 3.1.3

∑ wi X i

Business-vitality composite value and business age According to indicator system mentioned above and weight, the composite value of business vitality is shown as follows:

BASIC CONCLUSION AND RESEARCH REVELATION Basic conclusion

Table 4 indicates the commercial age of upper ten firms ranges from 20 to 33, implying the firms have stronger sustainable development capability. The commercial age of lower 10 firms in table 5 ranges from 64 to 80, implying weaker business vitality and poorer sustainable development capability. Out of upper 10 firms in terms of commercial age (table 6), except for heavy industry in Dalian, ST China A, ST Tang Pottery with Z-score smaller than 1.8 at financial crisis, 7 firms get their Z-score bigger than 1.8 at secure financial state or gray zone excluding heavy industry in Dalian whose Z-score is smaller than 1.8. Besides, the commercial age of the business is aged 24.9 and ranked 2nd, thus leaving two models analysis contradictory. The mean average of X indicator in Z-score calculation for three years shows heavy industry in Dalian X1 is 4.32%, X2, X3, X4 being 11.35%, 5.04%

326

ICIEES_Book.indb 326

4/3/2015 7:09:08 AM

Table 3.

Indicator weight.

Current Ratio X1 NPA ratio X2 Asset-liability ratio X3 Equity ratio X4 Increasing rate of main business income X5 Turnover of fixed assets X6 Turnover of total assets X7 Net-asset earning rate X8 Asset hedge and value-added ratio X9 Fixed-assets newness ratio X10 Asset-size logarithm X11 R&D technical staff’s ratio X12 Entrepreneurial Cultural Construction X13

X mean value

Standard deviation

2.0617 0.2378 0.8008 1.4770 22.6255 4.7037 0.7258 8.8194 1.3127 0.6314 3.4145 16.1539 82.1417

2.0059 0.2220 1.9425 1.7250 36.6688 4.0535 0.3363 9.4507 0.6198 0.1396 1.3275 13.0216 6.2772

Total Table 4.

C.V variable coefficient

Weight (normalization)

0.9729 0.9339 2.4257 1.1679 1.6207 0.8618 0.4634 1.0716 0.4722 0.2210 0.3888 0.8061 0.0764 11.4824

0.0847 0.0813 0.2113 0.1017 0.1411 0.0751 0.0404 0.0933 0.0411 0.0192 0.0339 0.0702 0.0067 1

Upper ten of commercial age in listed firms in machinery sector.

Names of firms

Time of founding

Z composite value

Commercial age

Rank

Jiahao in Shanghai Heavy Industry in Dalian Linhai Stock Times Technology Xingma Auto Baode Stock ST China Shenkai Stock ST Tang Pottery Standard Stock

2001 1999 1996 1984 1999 2001 1984 1993 1996 1999

1.6722 1.2654 1.2601 1.2413 0.8310 0.7725 0.7525 0.7123 0.6838 0.5932

20.00 24.90 24.96 25.19 30.12 30.83 31.07 31.55 31.89 32.98

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Table 5.

Lower-10 listed firms in machinery sector in terms of commercial age.

Names of firms

Time of founding

Z composite value

Commercial age

Rank

Jicai Petroleum Zhonglu Stock Jinshan Development Hongcheng Stock Zhongfa Technology ST No.2 textile ST Beiren ST Building Machinery SST China Textile ST West Axel

1996 1993 1993 1996 1998 1991 1993 2001 1992 1993

−0.4199 −0.4241 −0.4393 −0.4535 −0.4792 −0.4917 −0.4966 −0.5135 −0.5853 -0.7414

62.89 63.12 63.93 64.68 66.05 66.71 66.97 67.87 71.70 80.00

123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132

and 10.62%, whose indicator mean value is lower, thus z-score is lower, leaving the result of commercial age calculated different; judging from the variation of z-score trend, the “financial assessment of “Times Technology” and “Baode Stock” have been converted from “trouble” to “security”, taking on upturn trend. The lower 10 firms get their Z-score smaller than 1.8 in terms of commercial

age in basic agreement with the calculated result of business age (as shown at table 7). 4.2 Research revelation Z-score model and “business age” model are entirely different methods for solution to business sustainable development. Though there is some-

327

ICIEES_Book.indb 327

4/3/2015 7:09:08 AM

Table 6.

Z-score and assessment of upper-ten firms (2009–2011).

Names of firms

Z 2009

Assessment

Z 2010

Assessment

Z 2011

Assessment

Jiahao in Shanghai Heavy Industry in Dalian Linhai Stock Times Technology Xingma Auto Baode Stock ST China Shenkai Stock Tang Pottery Standard Stock

2.3996 1.1343 4.9932 2.8249 2.1114 2.7754 −34.1503 2.3343 −0.1757 2.4658

Grey Crisis Security Trouble Grey Trouble Crisis Grey Crisis Grey

2.5261 1.0038 4.4370 2.2059 3.1029 3.5469 −36.6499 2.5279 −0.8221 2.7316

Grey Crisis Security Grey Security Security Crisis Grey Crisis Crisis

2.2979 0.9566 3.8453 19.0427 1.9688 2.9202 −37.6908 2.1473 1.5749 2.6403

Grey Crisis Security Security Grey Security Crisis Grey Crisis Crisis

Table 7.

(2009–2011) Z-score for lower-10 firms in.

Names of firms

Z (2009)

Z (2010)

Z (2011)

Jicai Petroleum Zhonglu Stock Jinshan Development Hongcheng Stock Zhongfa Technology ST No.2 Textile ST Northern People ST Building Machinery SST China Textile ST Western Axel

1.2100 1.5335 1.2773 0.8572 0.6735 −0.3058 0.1962 0.6361 0.0866 0.5197

0.9667 1.3107 1.2807 0.8099 1.0630 −0.2845 0.9025 0.7593 0.4256 −0.1044

0.5221 1.6273 1.6989 0.8134 1.1309 0.5462 0.9037 0.9071 0.1904 0.5221

thing in common in terms of business operation and strategy to deal with problems, their research idea is different. 4.2.1 Similarity The business age and financial prewarning (Z score) are adopted to make an assessment of the basic situation of enterprises through financial indicators and assessment-model construction. The financial indicators in the indicator system stem from financial statement of listed firms, with stronger operability and applicability, with two methods subjected to previous financial data to evaluate previous and present operation of a business as basis for the operation decision of a business. The financial indicators of business age in indicator system covering financial prewarning model (Z score) are armed with some financial indicators to show capabilities of repayment, operation and profit. In current document, Z score makes an enlargement of indicator system and improvement of assessment model. “business age” varies indicator system from sector to sector. 4.2.2 Difference First, difference exists in theoretic basis and framework. Ecology and ecological theory of organiza-

tion backs up the research in business vitality. As “business age” to quantize business vitality, it is a concrete manifestation of business bionics in business management research. The research in financial pre-warning model is focused on application and revision of financial prewarning model. The research and carding are wanted in the basic theory of financial pre-warning model, hence the theoretic system is implicit for financial crisis prewarning. Second, indicator system is in disagreement. Z-score method is equipped with certain financial indicators, from forecast to postmortem analysis for prewarning. The lower Z-score is, the more likely the enterprise will go bankrupt. The calculation of business Z-score for many years running can be used to judge whether an enterprise will go bankrupt but ratio indicator used by Z-score method is not necessarily regular. Z-score model with critical value as judge standard is scientific, efficient and sensitive, with higher forecast accuracy. However, Z-score is based on assets liability and profit statement as a base for measurement rather than cash flow statement and data in capital market and nonfinancial indicator fails to be represented in Z-score model to make its indicator integrity inadequate. Z-score model offers an important instrument for

328

ICIEES_Book.indb 328

4/3/2015 7:09:09 AM

integrated financial analysis of a business and plays a role of pre-warning mechanism but various factors need to be integrated and problems analyzed in an all round way as a result of gap in the nature of listed firms, phase, business size and location until financial prewarning role is played. “Business age” through analysis of factors influencing business vitality, from the three dimensions of survivability, growing force and regeneration as well as indicator system combining financial indicator and non-financial indicator, represent better business sustainable development and bear realistic significance on business management. The indicator system of business commercial-age pattern necessitates a profound analysis of colinear problem between indicators. In the meantime, business commercial-age pattern is yet to be expanded to non-listed firms to learn in full about the situation and development of the sector. Third, the comments on enterprise development available are mostly evaluation on “current situation of enterprises” and part of “post-event” appraisal, whose value is to find problems and back up policy. Financial crisis prewarning and “business age” are of forecast comment, whose value is to find problems beforehand and reveal main

factors affecting enterprise sustainable growth and its future potential. In enterprise research, we seldom apply “enterprise commercial age” for sustainable pre-warning system but financial-crisis prewarning research is more mature. Obviously, we can learn a lot of research method to make a research of current enterprise situation, financial pre-warning system and its future development potential. REFERENCES [1] Li Qiang, “Construction of Phased Financial Prewarning Pattern in Listed Firms of Machinery, Equipment and Instrument Categories”, Hei Longjiang International Trade and Economy, 3rd Issue 2010, P157–160. [2] Li Fan, Du Zhitao, Li Lingjuan, “Prewarning Pattern of Business Finance: Theory Review and Comment”, Management Comment, 9th Issue 2009, P146–147. [3] Sun Jianwei, “Comment on Commercial Age Model and Textile Enterprise Vitality”, CAS Graduate School of Management, 2010. [4] Xu Yanmei, Gu Ligang, “Evaluation and Revision of Commercial Age Model”, Comment on China’s Economy, 9th (22)2003, P13–17.

329

ICIEES_Book.indb 329

4/3/2015 7:09:09 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Selecting marketing channel members based on Analytic Hierarchy Process Yilan Dai & Xiaoyu Wang Beijing Normal University, Zhuhai, Guangdong Province, China

ABSTRACT: Selecting an appropriate marketing channel member becomes a key factor to success under the increasingly competitive business environment. As the Analytic Hierarchy Process (AHP) is widely utilized in many fields, this paper applies it into area of marketing channel member selecting. Combing with quantitative and qualitative method, this paper provides a thorough analysis of working principles and analyzing methods of AHP. It finally proposes the precautions of this scientific method in real practice. It could be mentioned that this topic has certain practical significance since that the analytic hierarchy process simplifies the selection process, reduces the influence of subjective factors, and enhances the scientific and rational factors. Keywords: 1

Analytic Hierarchy Process; marketing channel; decision; judgment matrix; consistency

INTRODUCTION

In the highly competitive market economy environment, to the enterprise, rational judgment and decision making becomes more and more important. Selecting the appropriate marketing channel members as the manufacturer partners directly affect whether the delivery of the manufacturer’s product can be transferred to the hands of consumers timely and accurately; thus affecting the manufacturer distribution costs and vendor service quality and also influence the brand image in the consumers’ minds. Therefore, for vendors, marketing channel member selection must be strict and cautious. AHP, proposed by an American tactician T.L. Saaty, is widely used and get improved by entrepreneurs of all ages (Li, 2009). AHP is a combination of qualitative and quantitative analysis, through AHP decision makers give weighting factor for each program, and then determine the merits of different options by order of weighting coefficients. The principle of AHP will be factors in a complex problem into different levels according to the classification of the association and relationship between; depending on the expert experience accumulated over the years to determine the level of importance of each level related factors, and the consistency criterion to judge the accuracy; and then synthesized in the hierarchy, finally sorting each decision factors on the importance of

objectives. Analysis of decision thought thinking and decision makers dealing with complex issues of law are consistent, which includes two kinds of qualitative and quantitative processing problem of the form. The results can provide reliable reference for decision makers. When making decisions using the AHP, we would generally follow four steps: First, analyze the relationship between various factors in the model system, and create a system of hierarchical structure. Second, compare the same level of importance of each element in the hierarchy of norms to keep up with a comparison to get the judgment matrix. Third, by calculating the matrix elements of the right to determine the appropriate criteria weights, and determine the consistency of the matrix. Final step is to calculate the weight of each level of the system size, and sorting. 2

SELECTING MARKETING CHANNEL MEMBERS BASED ON ANALYTIC HIERARCHY PROCESS

Below is the relevant data from 5 companies when selecting a marketing channel member in an IT company. Four factors of cost, efficiency, reliability and product life are considered when selecting the main marketing channel member. Its data are as follows:

331

ICIEES_Book.indb 331

4/3/2015 7:09:09 AM

2.1

Create a system of hierarchical structure

A (aij )nxn

The key thing to use AHP is to establish the hierarchical model so that complex problem is decomposed into several simple components with the different levels, namely the top, middle and bottom layers. 2.2

Judgment matrix structure

In the analytic hierarchy process, judgment matrix should be first set. Then we should calculate based on the merits of the programs, finally determine the optimal solution according to the total pros and cons of each index. In this step, the weighting coefficients should be determined. In the following, the next levels of element C are denoted U1, U2, ..., Un. For the importance of two elements of Ui and Uj, the formation of judgment matrix can be referred below. Table 1.

Cost

Efficiency

Reliability

Product life

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5

8.5 k 7.5 k 7k 5.5 k 4.5 k

90 85 87 75 70

20000 15000 11000 9000 6000

13 14 13 12 10

Table 2.

2.3 Weight vector and the consistency index The judgment matrix A obtaining from AHP is not necessarily fully meet the conditions of reciprocity, when a number of criteria can be used to measure the degree of judgment matrix A. That is a judgment of weight vector matrix of order n, when the judgment matrix A should have the following equation.

Meaning

1 3

The same importance The former is slightly more important than the latter The former than the latter obviously important The former is more important than the latter strongly Two elements compared to the former than the latter is extremely important The intermediate value of adjacent judgments

5 7 9

2,4,6,8

⎡ ⎢1 ⎢ ⎢ w2 ⎢ A = ⎢ w1 ⎢ ... ⎢ ⎢ wn ⎢⎣ w1

w1 w2 1 ... wn w2

w1 ⎤ wn ⎥ ⎥ ⎡ w1 ⎤ w2 ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ... w ⎡1 wn ⎥⎥ = ⎢ 2 ⎥ ⎢ ⎢ ... ⎥ ⎣ w1 ... ... ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎥ ⎣wn ⎦ ... 1 ⎥ ⎥⎦ ...

1 w2

...

1 ⎤ ⎥ wn ⎦

(2)

Meaning of 1–9 scale.

Proportional scaling

Table 3.

The above judgment matrix has the three important properties as follows: (1) aij > 0; (2) aij = 1/aji; (3) aij = 1, can be called reciprocal matrix. For such a judgment matrix consisting of n elements, we only need to calculate the upper triangular or lower triangular matrices. According to the format of AHP, judgment matrix can be shown below in Tables 3 & 4.

Basic data of five companies.

Member

(1)

Using matrix right w on type Aw = nw can be obtained, which indicates that the W is a A feature vector, characteristic root of n. If the A is consistent with the inverse matrix, are: aij a jk = aik If the judgment matrix is inconsistent, the largest eigenvalue of matrix of is greater than N, reactive element feature vectors of the W is not the real U1, weight U2, occupies in the target, the CI records for the judgment matrix is not consistent degree. The CI value is:

The indicator of cost.

G1

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

Weights

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5

1 8.5 k/7.5 k 8.5 k/5.5 k 8.5 k/5.5 k 8.5 k/4.5 k

7.5 k/8.5 k 1 7.5 k/7 k 7.5 k/5.5 k 7.5 k/4.5 k

7 k/8.5 k 7 k/7.5 k 1 7 k/5.5 k 7 k/4.5 k

5.5 k/8.5 k 5.5 k/7.5 k 5.5 k/7 k 1 5.5 k/4.5 k

4.5 k/8.5 k 4.5 k/7.5 k 4.5 k/7 k 4.5 k/5.5 k 1

0.1475 0.1671 0.1790 0.2279 0.2785

332

ICIEES_Book.indb 332

4/3/2015 7:09:09 AM

Table 4.

The indicator of efficiency.

G1

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

Weights

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5

1 85/90 87/90 75/90 70/90

90/85 1 87/85 75/85 70/85

90/87 85/87 1 75/87 70/87

90/75 85/75 87/75 1 70/75

90/70 85/70 87/70 75/70 1

0.2211 0.2088 0.2138 0.1843 0.1720

Table 5.

Average random consistency.

n

1

2

3

4

5

RI

0

0

0.58

0.9

1.12

6

7

8

9

10

11

1.24

1.32

1.41

1.45

Table 6.

1.49

The weight of synthetic method. Level

A1

A2

…

Am

Level A

a1

a2

…

am

B1 …

b11 …

b12 …

… …

b1 m …

Bn

bn1

bn2

…

bnm

The B level of total order m

1.51

∑a b

j 1j

j =1

… m

∑a b j

mj

j =1

CI =

λmax − n n −1

(3) m

In the consistency judgment matrix, CI = 0. Due to the different problems and different human knowledge, RI can be introduced as part of its evaluation index, When n = 1 ∼ 11, RI values are shown in Table 5 (Xu, 2000). The ratio of CI and RI is the ratio of consistency, which is denoted by CR. When the CR is less than or equal to 0.1, the judgment matrix has satisfactory consistency. While cost index is the reverse index, the higher the less favorable, and efficiency indicators are positive indicators, the more favorable the higher the efficiency of the program. According to the formula of AHP, we get the consistency of four indicators judgment matrix as follows: W1 = [0.1475,0.1671,0.1790,0.2279,0.2785]

T

W2 = [0.2211,0.2088,0.2138,0.1843,0.1720]T

C ∑ a CI j

CR =

j

j =1 m

∑ a RI j

(4) j

j =1

In this way we can get the weight coefficient of each decision scheme for the total target and consistency index, decision makers can make corresponding decision according to these two. By calculating comes the total level of the four indicators for sorting: V = WU = [0.2993,0.2029,0.1924,0.1962,0.1979]T U is right AHP calculated each index, U = [0.4,0.2,0.2,0.2]T. So we can get sort of the five members of the marketing channel A1 > A2 > A5 > A4 > A3.

W3 = [0.3297,0.2495,0.1803,0.1475,0.0984]T W4 = [0.2097,0.2258,0.2097,0.1935,0.1623]T 2.4

3

Sort of total AHP

The total order is in accordance with all factors from high to low level step by step, in order to get the lowest layer element is n by the evaluation elements of total ranking order. If A contains M A1, A2... The rank weights, Am, A1, a2... Am, B1, n elements in the next level in B, B2... The rank weights, Bn Aj b1j, b2j,... So, Bnj, total order weight B level as shown in Tables 2 & 3. Factor B levels in the consistency ratio:

AHP PRECAUTIONS IN PRACTICE

After years of research and development, AHP has been widely used, including the consistency of the theory, scaling theory and sorting methods and other decision-making methods of combining research. 3.1

Consistency

In AHP consistency test, consistency is the core content. If the judgment matrix is inconsistent, then the credibility of the weights thus obtained is

333

ICIEES_Book.indb 333

4/3/2015 7:09:09 AM

very low, and the results will be misleading. Saaty (1980) proposed that CR can be a basis judge the consistency in the judgment matrix. If CR is less than or equal to 0.1, the judgment matrix is consistent. Otherwise the judgment matrix does not have the consistency. Currently CR is used widely to judge the consistency, but that its value is 0.1 has been questioned by many scientists in the literature. Monsuur (1997) proposed an improved consistency of testing methods, which does not give corresponding critical value, judging by the ratio of the matrix to meet the conditions to test whether it has the consistency. In the judging process, we need to examine all elements of the matrix within a set threshold and there has no relevant theoretical basis. So even though many scholars questioned threshold, but so far no one is able to make more reasonable inspection methods.

After the stratified analysis by level, the target layer factors and measures factor is fairly clear, and the criterion layer involves the intermediate factors of its design and the complex relationship, we need to distinguish the relationship carefully. At the same time, we also need pay attention to the factors between the upper and lower layers and different groups of relations. In the packet by using the analytic hierarchy process, we should make the number of factors affecting each factor not exceed nine. In analytic hierarchy process, if the factors at the same level is more than nine, we should regroup. Usually we would increase the number of layers in order to reduce the number of each group of factors, so as to ensure the accuracy of judgment. 4

3.2

Scale problems

CONCLUSION

AHP scale is used to determine the qualitative judgment, the purpose is to provide an important factor in the extent of the value given to each indicator. Scale indicators have been proposed so far where the scale of 1 to 9 indicators is most widely used, but the drawback is there is no equivalent between the consistency of judgment matrix and people thinking of consistency (Xu, 2000).

As a link between production and consumption, marketing is a bridge to connect companies with the market. The choice of members of marketing is a very important component in the field. As there are many factors to consider in the selection, it’s very difficult for decision makers to make decisions. The proposed method is another application field of AHP, proved that AHP is a scientific way to choose to solve marketing problems.

3.3

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

Ranking method

In AHP order method, approximate sorting and optimization ranking is the most commonly used method. The columns and inverse normalization method, and the normalization method, and product method, Fang Genfa and with the characteristics of law are approximate sorting method, least square method, and logarithm least squares method belong to the set of least squares optimization ranking method. In the judgment matrix consistency conditions, various methods can be derived from the same weight, but some of the literature has revealed the method is the optimal sorting method. 3.4

Others to note

Making the problem construct into ladder level is the basis for the use of AHP. In problem analysis, we should have to be strictly distinguish the relationship among these factors, so as to ensure the results are accurate and effective. Therefore, in the use of analytic hierarchy process, constructing the hierarchical structure is very important.

The corresponding author of this paper is Yilan Dai. This paper is supported by the Major Program Fund of National Science Foundation of China (Project number 71090403/71090400). REFERENCES [1] RongJun. Li. Introduction of Operations Research. Beijing. Science Publisher, 2009:201–205. [2] ShuBai Xu. Principles of AHP.Tianjin: Tianjin University Publisher, 2000:1–4. [3] T.L.Saaty. The Analytic Hierarchy Process. McGrawHill Inc, New York, 1980. [4] Monsuur H. An intrinsic consistency threshold for reciprocal matrices. European Journal of operational research, 1997, 96(2) 387–391. [5] Srinagesh Gavirneni. Benefits of co-operation in a production distribution environment. European Journal of Operational Research. 2001. [6] Karl Morasch. Strategic alliances as Stackelherg cartels-concept and equilibrium alliance structure. International Journal of Industrial Organization. 2000.

334

ICIEES_Book.indb 334

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The effectiveness analysis of legalization of ideological and political education Lanfang Wu North China Electric Power University, Baoding, Hebei, China

ABSTRACT: China’s new social transformation and requirement promote the development of ideological and political education towards law and the legalization of ideological and political education has become an inevitable trend of social development. But the effectiveness of legalization of ideological and political education is not good, which has attracted more and more people especially the ideological and political workers attention. Therefore. we should deeply study the factors influencing the effectiveness of the legalization of ideological and political education, strengthen the standardization, authority and effectiveness of ideological and political education and realize the theory breakthrough and practice innovation of the legalization of ideological and political education under the rule of law, so as to lay the foundation for further development and innovation of ideological political education. Keywords: 1

Ideological and political education; Legalization; Effectiveness; Analysis

INTRODUCTION

2

China’s new social transformation and requirement promote the development of ideological and political education towards law and the legalization of ideological and political education has become an inevitable trend of social development. But the current situation and problems of the legalization of ideological and political education in China have been difficult to meet the needs of social economic and political development, and greatly hinder the further implementation of the strategy of ruling by law. So we should strengthen the standardization, authority and effectiveness of ideological and political education, innovate ideas and approaches of further development of the legalization of ideological political education, and realize the theory breakthrough and practice innovation of the legalization of ideological and political education under the rule of law. The ideological and political education is the lifeline of all the work and has always been the focus of research in academic and practical field. This paper is based on the original research results, responses the call of governing the country according to law, follows the pace of the times and stresses practical value of the legalization of ideological and political education so as to provide the reference for the innovation of ideological and political education.

NECESSITY AND BASIS OF THE LEGALIZATION OF INFLUENCING FACTORS OF MENTAL HEALTH

The legalization of ideological and political education means to establish and improve laws, regulations and corresponding systems of ideological and political education, and to carry out ideological and political education in accordance with the law. In other words, the legalization of ideological and political education integrates the spirit and principle of law into polities, economy, culture and social life of ideological and political education. It is not simple application of the concept of rule of law, and it conforms to the trend of the development of human civilization. This is the inevitable trend that ideological and political education exploits, innovates and keeps pace with the times, and it is also the objective requirement of China’s construction of socialist spiritual civilization. As a practical activity, ideological and political education must unify the theoretical principles and people’s words and deeds in practice to effectively solve the problems in ideological and political aspects. At the same time, the ideological and political education is a social ideology and it is a part of social culture. Only in the overall cultural development pattern can the unique value be achieved. At present, theory of the rule of law requires ideological and political work legalization development by

335

ICIEES_Book.indb 335

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

itself. The legalization of ideological and political education is the specific measures for implementation of the strategy of ruling by law, is the effective way to improve the ideological and political education level, and it is an important means to realize the scientific education and to establish long-term management mechanism. So it is a strategic task of great urgency. 2.1

The philosophic basis of the legalization of ideological and political education

The ideological and political education in a certain history period is always compatible with the mainstream of the world view and the values of this period. Now the mainstream of China’s world outlook and values is Marx’s world outlook and values. The materialism is the basis of the legalization of ideological and political education. Law of contradiction provides dialectics foundation with the legalization of ideological and political education. The theory of historical materialism is a pointer for legalization of ideological and political education. 2.2

The legalization of ideological and political education is the need to get out of immorality

In the social environment of the multi culture, people’s world outlook, outlook on life and values are in the process of diversified development. The socialist culture, China traditional culture, western culture and mass culture intertwine, forming a social atmosphere of multiple ideological and moral concepts. The moral decay phenomenon that appears in the process of China’s political reform seriously affects the formation of the correct outlook on life and the values, and it is a severe challenge to core value of socialism moral. On one hand, multiple moral values lead to weakness of the socialist morality. On the other hand, evaluation standards of moral is anomie. Morality is a kind of value and different moral represent different evaluation criteria. At present, because of the moral evaluation standard diversification, people can find one or more values to judge a kind of behavior, which makes people fall into confusion and moral perplexity. The evaluation standard of socialist moral system is too rational and from social reality, which easily lead to inconformity between theory standards and practice standards, even a serious departure from the phenomenon of the socialist moral standard.[1] The phenomena indicate that guiding role of socialist morality cannot rely on simple propaganda. The ideological and political education is one of the most important methods in our moral education and we must use legal means to improve the moral level of people.

2.3

The legalization of ideological and political education is the means and guarantee advancing the ideological education in university

The legalization has played an important role in advancing the work of ideological and political education in university. But there will be some development bottlenecks to a certain stage. For example, the lifelong education has formed social consensus in theory, but the implementation mechanisms are not yet mature. Due to the lack of rigid constraints and the guarantee of legal system, the actual operation is often a mere formality and can not produce effectiveness of lifelong education. [2] Therefore, the development of ideological and political education work must use legal means to optimize the education policy environment. According to the policy, we should perfect the relevant rules and regulations so as to achieve unification of policy guidance and practical requirements. Similarly, the legalization is guarantee for the development of ideological education. The essence of the legalization embodies the human-oriented idea and democratic decision can integrate students multiple appeal. The legalization compulsively resolve the various contradictions appeared in ideological and political education and realize the balanced allocation of resources through legislation, law enforcement and other means. 2.4

The legalization is need of development of the ideological and political education under the harmonious environment

Harmonious law is the basis of ideological and political education work. The premise to realize the social harmony is equal rights, reasonable distribution, equal opportunity and justice. It is impotent only depending on personal virtue and it must rely on the harmonious law to coordinate the interests of different parties. So harmonious law is effective means to achieve fairness and justice. The Swiss educator Pestalozzi put forward that the aim of education is the development of all the strength and ability of person. The development should be comprehensive development, harmonious development and free development. The school serves the overall development of students as the focus, do everything for all students, treat every student democracy and equality, respect each student’s individuality and make every student to grow up healthy.[3] The management innovation of ideological and political education under the harmonious law should start with thinking, grasp the details and create situations to touch the emotion and to shock the heart. The scattered fires are gathered together, then they can produce light

336

ICIEES_Book.indb 336

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

and heat to illuminate the sky. We can create the miracle of the ideological and political education. [4] Therefore, the legalization is not only a requirements specification for the development of ideological and political education in new period, but also an effective safeguard mechanism. The legalization of ideological and political education avoids the shortcomings of traditional ideological and political education. It includes not only the basic content of ideological and political education, but also the connotation of the times. It is niche targeting to carry out the work and should be the exploration of ideological and political education in the new period. [5] 3

3.3

THE EFFECTIVENESS ANALYSIS OF LEGALIZATION OF IDEOLOGICAL AND POLITICAL EDUCATION

The ideological and political education according to law is the objective requirement of the country under the rule of law. It can effectively guarantee activities systematization and standardization and the effectiveness of education. But there are many weakening and problems in China’s current ideological and political education, such as the thought is not clear, the means are not tough enough and the effect is not ideal. It can not adapt to the development of China’s political and economic culture. 3.1

The concept of legalization of ideological and political education has not really set up

From the current situation of ideological and political education of our country, the legal provisions and the actual operation process are blank in the rule of law. The phenomenon inconsistent with law appears in ideological and political education because of lack of law concept. Due to lack of law, the subjectivity and arbitrariness of ideological and political education are strong, which weakens the effect of ideological and political education to a certain extent. 3.2

idealistic and divorces from reality. The content of our existing rules and regulations is programmatic and principled. The legislation focus on content and lack of procedural legislation. At present, China still has not a special complete law or regulation on ideological and political education. The majority of ideological and political education laws and regulations are scattered in education and other types of social laws and regulations. The form of ideological and political education lack of standardization and institutional legislation, and it is usually issued in the forms of notice and opinion rather than legislation, which lack of mandatory and long-term security.

The system construction of the legalization of ideological and political education is not keeping up with the times and the form is not standardization

For a long time, our country can not grasp the connotation of rule by law. People pay excessive attention to legal system and ignore legal research on implementation and application of law in the process of the construction of political education. They also focus on the study of legislative texts and ignore the research on legal value goal. The legislation of ideological and political education is too

Execution means is inappropriate and ineffective

The policy content is abstract and macroscopic, which lead to poor operation and applicability in the implementation process. Due to the lack of specific implementation mode, implementation process, funding and resource allocation are arbitrary. It can not well distinguish between the main rights and obligations and it is unable to quantify worker’s labor and accountability. Therefore the behavior of ideological and political education cannot be bound by the law. In addition, the policy implementation and implementation effect in different regions or different departments is obviously different. It is difficult to form the work situation of sharing resources and sustainable development. Which causes the development imbalance among regions and sectors in ideological and political education. 3.4

Supervision and relief is not perfect

If there is only the sound system without strict inspection, the system will become a mere formality, which requires the measures of corresponding inspection, appraisal, rewards and punishment so as to make the system to be implemented. Of course, the system is minimum standards. It is not enough to adopt a negative attitude and to not violate the system. Therefore, it is essential to actively guide people to consciously abide by the system and form a good habit of compliance in the implementation of the system.[6] The legalization of ideological and political education has a significant impact on the realization of rule of law. The ideological and political education should shoulder the responsibility social legal education and instill citizens legal consciousness and the concept. If the education disaccords with the laws and regulations, the effect of legal education is very poor. Some problems still exist in the supervision in current ideological and political education, such

337

ICIEES_Book.indb 337

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

as supervision regulations are not enough systematic and institutionalized, steering behavior is not daily and routine and the supervision results summary feedback are usually neglected. China’s relevant laws and regulations are principle and fuzzy, resulting in the educated remedial rights are not effectively protected. These deficiencies in the legalization of ideological and political education in China lead to the confusion of ideological and political education and also made a huge resources waste of education. At the same time, the requirements of rule of law is all activities of the countries should be carried out according to law. Of course, the ideological and political education is no exception. But the lack of the legalization lead to severe problems of rule of man and the ideological and political education is difficult to maintain normal order. Therefore, the status quo of China’s ideological and political education is difficult to adapt to the needs of the development of China’s market economy, and especially cause a huge obstacle on China’s strategy of ruling the country by law.

theory and practice in the ideological and political education is a serious and realistic problem. The ideological and political education is an important means of modern management and has the incomparable advantages of other management tools. In the process of the rapid development of the legalization, we should critically use legal value theory and law environment theory to study on the development of people ideological and psychological changes, and implement the spirits of the equality ideas, people-oriented, service awareness and managing school by law. It has important implications and profound significance to improve the effectiveness of ideological and political work and promote the healthy operation of the entire social order.

4

REFERENCES

CONCLUSION

The innovation of the ideological and political education represents the general trend. So we must explore further development and innovation road of the ideological and political education, enhance the study of the legalization of ideological and political education, and strengthen the normalization, authority and effectiveness of the ideological and political education to realize the theory breakthrough and practice innovation of ideological and political education in the environment of ruling the country by law. At present, the effectiveness of ideological and political education has aroused attention of people, especially the workers on ideological and political education. Setting up the equal thought and strengthening the sense of service are a new challenge for ideological and political workers. Promoting the all-round development of people and achieving to substantial leap in the field of

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This research was financially supported by “the Fundamental Research Funds for the Central Universities”, NO. 12MS132 And “Project of Education Department of Hebei Province 2014”.

[1] Wu Qiong. Research on the Legalization of Ideological and Political Education. Wuhan University of science and Technology, 2011:20. [2] Pang Zhiwei. Discussion of Ideological and Political Education of University under the Perspective of Optimization, Theory Learning, 2012(16):279. [3] Peng Gongjun. The Theoretical Thinking of Harmonious Education, Liaoning Youth Network, http:// www. lnqn.com, June, 2007. [4] Zhu Guoliang, Zhao Dehai. Discussion on Harmonious Society and the Ideological and Political Education. Science and Technology Innovation Herald, 2009(1):204. [5] Feng Gang. The Innovation and Development of Universities Ideological and Political education Since the 16th Party Congress. China Higher Education, 2012(10):68. [6] Zheng Yongting. The Methodology of the Ideological and Political Education. Higher Education Press, Beijing, 2010:325.

338

ICIEES_Book.indb 338

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Analysis of the effect on moral education exerted by peer groups among college students and countermeasure research Min Song China University of Geosciences, Beijing, China

ABSTRACT: A non-official group named peer group is pervasive among colleges and universities, which serves as a significant channel for the socialization of college students and exerts influence on the establishment of their value system, behavior pattern and moral trait. To perform moral education targeted at college students, attention should be paid to the existence of peer groups and the study of its role as well as function so as to give play to its positive effects. In addition, on the basis of respect and understanding, peer group should be made as an important medium for students’ self-taught and also an effective platform for moral education through the development of group culture and cultivation of group core people, and so on. Keywords: 1

students; peer group; moral education

INTRODUCTION

Colleges and universities have always laid great emphasis on the moral education towards college students. However, the problem of low effectiveness has constantly beset moral educators in colleges and universities. The root lies in that “moral education towards college students is straying away from their moral needs, that is, the moral education is not integrated with college students’ moral needs.” To make moral education effective, educators should first gain their psychological acknowledgment and raise emotional resonance to satisfy their inner needs, and the peer groups, prevalent in colleges and universities, are able to provide psychological satisfaction and acknowledgment since interpersonal code of conduct, value, moral identity are more easily accepted among peer groups in colleges and universities, where the students’ values and behavioral patterns are consistent with the group and it will play a significant role in their moral development. 2

TRAITS OF PEER GROUPS IN COLLEGES AND UNIVERSITIES

A peer group is comprised of people with relatively equivalent social standing and of the same age. In this paper, a peer group among college students means a spontaneously-formed non-official group made up of young college students who are bonded with emotional relationship, who share the same

interests, hobbies, values and code of conduct, and who have frequent communication and interaction among each other. It is an importance environment for their growth and development, an important place for their moral cognition and moral experience, also a piece of land for their moral practice. Values and code of conduct among peer groups can exert unconscious influence on the socialization and moral development of the teenagers and advance their development regarding emotion, cognition and the ability of morality practice. The traits of peer group and its significant influence on moral formation can be demonstrated in the following aspects: 2.1 Leaders are included in peer groups, who play core roles Non-official leaders in peer groups refer to those who serve as the heads in the group. Those people may not either be nominated and dispatched or elected but have great influence in the group, play a leading role for other members and have bigger say in group decisions. Equipped with more outstanding abilities than other members generally, non-official leaders direct the group by naturally-established authorities among members. They are expert in observing and adjusting group atmosphere and maintaining members’ interests, whose view of life, value system, morality and conduct will serve as guidance for other members and would be emulated by others, consequently greatly influence the development of individual ideology and morality within the group.

339

ICIEES_Book.indb 339

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

2.2

A peer group is spontaneously formed with relatively strong cohesiveness

Establishment of a peer group is the result of free combination among college students in accordance with their own wills, who share common hobbies, common experience, common needs and common cultures. All of these make these young people foster a sense of emotional acknowledgment and psychological reliance. According to the Stage of Moral Development theory by Kohlberg, a prominent psychologist in the United States, teenagers entering higher education are in the stage of social covenant and ordinary moral principle orientation. Therefore, peer groups take an eminent position in the establishment of moral cognition and values for college students. For them, peer groups are where they can perceive and experience morality. 2.3

Members in peer groups enjoy equal standing and close interactions

Members of college student peer groups are featured by relatively equal interpersonal relationships. In the group, each member has a tiny space of his own and all people are in a relatively equal footing, jointly constituting a stable social network. Members among the same peer group can share information, help each other and become friends following the same path and sharing common ideals. As a non-official group, it negatives institutionalized interpersonal relationships but cherishes mutual emotion bonds, so it needs no power to make interference. Equal membership combined with intimate relationships interrelates with each other, forming a survival environment for peer group members. Conferred with equal and democratic atmosphere in peer groups, teenagers experience development in their ability of subjective judgment, accelerate their transformation from external control to self-discipline, and also enhance the ability of morality practice. 2.4

Members in peer groups share common value system and have their own sub-culture

Because of shared interests, hobbies and convergent value system, members in peer groups form a non-official and closely-tied community. Convergence in value is the foundation for the existence and development of a group. This kind of group sub-culture provides the new value standard and code of conduct, which has various ways to present itself, such as shared likes and dislikes, interests and aspirations, similar language styles, common worshiped idols or similar consumption and dressing styles. Such sub-culture can exert substantial

effect on the development of individual values and morality and will have positive effect whether complying with mainstream culture advocated by us.

3

ANALYSIS OF EFFECT ON MORAL CULTIVATION EXERTED BY PEER GROUPS AMONG COLLEGE STUDENTS

The presence of peer groups satisfies the needs of college students psychologically and emotionally, gives members a sense of belonging and security through group interaction, and has a significant impact on the views of life, values and ethical behavior of its members. College students learn how to get along with people in groups, which is an inevitable process before they enter the adult community. To first become a qualified member of the group, and then for the community; this is the logical development of young people’s moral development. 3.1

The crowd mentality among group members provides a prerequisite for morality development

Crowd mentality refers to a kind of psychology that individuals are inclined to external effects and demonstrate behavioral patters conforming to public opinions or the majority’s viewpoints. Characteristic of strong cohesiveness and high homogeneity, members in peer groups are prone to crowd mentality. None of us excludes the need for security and belonging. Therefore, to obtain psychological security, individuals choose to follow the trend in order to avoid loneliness, frustration and other negative emotions resulting from isolation. Therefore, individuals are likely to comply with value system and behavioral pattern in group. Group members always take their leaders as examples by imitating their behavioral styles and learning from their moral traits like honesty, magnanimity and optimism. And through mutual learning and mutual influence, members in peer groups become convergent in their ideology and behavior, thus making these moral ideas, value systems and behavioral patterns fixed and transmitted within the peer groups. As a result, group members will conform to these values. Certainly, crowd mentality can have a dual effect on moral development. On the one hand, members are able to learn social norms; on the other hand, college students may acquire ill-natured ideology or habits blindly when following the trend, which is consequently influencing the individual moral development.

340

ICIEES_Book.indb 340

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

3.2

4

The peer group satisfies college students’ demand for a sense of belonging and security

Since college students are not financially independent of their parents’ support, their conduct will undoubtedly be restrained by their parents at home and regulated by teachers within campus. Such external control conflicts with their inner desire for independence and freedom, so the feeling of depression and loneliness constantly afflicts these young people, pushing them to find their own shelters. Under such condition, the peer group, completely belonging to the young people, provides them with satisfaction and desirable experience. Young people within peer groups will perform social comparison, which is a basic starting point for peer communication since they need affirmation for self-value and establishment of security via social comparison. A sense of belonging arises through the youth’s communication, activities and cultural identity within peer groups. These young people tend to demonstrate their self-value by playing a certain role in the peer group and unbosoming their vexation to obtain emotional comfort. Hereby, the peer group has not only satisfied the youth’s need but also won their hearts. 3.3

The peer group will have impact on teenagers’ value systems and behavioral patterns

Owing to mutually frequent contact and mutual trust among members in peer groups accompanied by their compatibility in mentality and emotion, they are prone to accepting mutual influence. Opinions from peer groups increasingly take priority when the youth are setting living goals and value systems. Peer groups among young people are the aggregation of frequent contact featured by wide interaction range and mutually emotional appeal and psychological allusion. In peer groups, people will unconsciously think and act in consistence with common ways within the groups. In other words, the young people have been infused with group values and behavioral patterns. It is noted on the surface level that members within the same peer group display similarity in their attire and dressing styles and some groups even present conspicuous external marks. With deeper observation, we can find that peer group members are similar in terms of behaviors, interests and hobbies, thinking patterns and consumption habits. Because the young in general concern a lot about peer’s comments on them and hope to be embraced by group members to gain satisfaction and happiness, they will take the initiative to emulate other members and therefore easily absorb in the group’s value systems and behavioral patterns.

COUNTERMEASURES TO BRING MORAL EDUCATION AMONG COLLEGE STUDENTS IN PEER GROUPS INTO FUNCTION

Moral education targeted at college students should not only lay great emphasis on explicit education channels such as classrooms, political parties and other organizations, classes and student organizations but also incorporate peer groups into moral education cause to exploit implicit education’s advantage into full play and ultimately establish a new education mode combined by both explicit and implicit lessons. By guiding a healthy development of peer groups, we want to make it a crucial approach for moral education towards college students and implement moral education towards college students by fully exploiting peer group’s traits. 4.1

Show sufficient respect and understanding to peer groups among college students

During the implementation of moral education, moral educators would by no means gain desirable results without full understanding and respect of the learning subject. Moral educators must show acknowledgment and respect to peer groups in colleges and universities and cannot ignore or easily negate these groups since every college student will join in one or more peer groups to satisfy their demand for emotion and interests. On the basis of respect, educators are supposed to take the initiative to understand these groups and know their group objectives, member composition plus activity routines. If change permits, educators should also have frequent communication with group members, understand their latest ideas and strike genuine conversations with them. If possible, moral educators can provide them with some support within their capacity, win group members’ trust. Especially group leaders and deliver the signal of understanding, respect and acceptance. Such understanding and respect to students is the basis for the implementation of moral education. 4.2

Enhance major guidance to group leaders

Leaders within peer groups are generally the core of the group with relatively high authority and great say, whose ideology and conduct serve as guidance to other group members and students are more inclined to imitate and follow their ideology and conduct. Therefore, we should pay more attention to the guidance of group leaders to motivate them to mobilize group members so as to form cor-

341

ICIEES_Book.indb 341

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

rect ideology and conduct through their own positive influence and leadership. By doing so, double results would be yielded. Everyone has a demand for “self-realization”, of which the group leaders, especially, have great awareness. Moral educators should find out these leaders in peer groups and train up them to be the backbone in official organizations. These group leaders should be encouraged to participate in the management of official organizations, such as political parties, classes and other organizations for purpose of bringing their leading role into play and becoming bonds between moral educators and college students. The main goal is to make more people know, understand and accept the school and teacher’s aim as well as objective in moral education and cultivate them as the backbone in the cause of moral education. 4.3

Take full consideration to the traits of subculture among different peer groups and implement oral education specifically

The emergence of sub-culture in groups among college students poses both new venue and challenges for moral education in colleges and universities. With the advent of sub-culture in groups among college students, moral educators have no choice but to accept that it is a new phase in which group culture has become a part of social and cultural environment. Therefore, they have to fully evaluate and understand the effects and restrictions on group members exerted by such cultural background. Sub-culture traits of different groups should also be taken into account to fully exploit and develop the potential moral education value

of peer groups. Group sub-culture is, in nature, an intermediary agent influencing moral education result, which can deliver processed culture to group members. Moral educators in colleges and universities should take the guidance of cultural construction in peer groups as a priority and take non-compulsive measures to exert indirect effects by adhering to the principle of tolerance and understanding. Moral education is wide in its content and range, so it is impossible for peer groups to absorb in all contents. Educators ought to bring the limited effect and function of peer groups among college students into play according to their types and traits. Moral educators must be aware of such limitation and always conform to the principle of “doing something and refraining from doing other things”. Peer groups can have enormous influence on college students’ socialization, value system, the perfection of personality and other aspects, so moral educators must consider this trait, actively leading college students to be syntonic and gregarious, helping them to learn interpersonal communication and team cooperation and also enhance their establishment of desirable moral traits such as collectivism, integrity, respect for others and self-discipline.

REFERENCES [1] Zhang Xuxin. Dilemma and Reflection of Contemporary Moral Education. Studies in Ideological. 2013.1. [2] Yuan Guilin. Western Moral Education Theroy. Fujian Education Press. 2005.5.

342

ICIEES_Book.indb 342

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The co-integration relation research on the number of higher education and national economy Yilan Dai & YiJun Liu Beijing Normal University, Zhuhai, Guangdong Province, China

ABSTRACT: In this paper, based on the data of China from year 1978 to 2011, it conducts an empirical study on the relationship between the number of China’s higher education and economic growth using the co-integration theory. Research shows that there is no co-integration relationship between the number of universities and China’s economic growth, and it implies that there is no a long-term equilibrium relationship between the two. While the number of university is the Granger reason for China’s economic growth, and it suggests that the scale of higher education has a positive effect on national economic growth. The analysis also provides data support for the further development of higher education in our country. Finally, this paper has some practical significance since it puts forward some suggestions to follow when expanding the scale of higher education according to the actual situation of China. Keywords: 1

co-integration analysis; number of universities; economic growth; Granger causality test

INTRODUCTION

With the arrival of knowledge economy, higher education, as the main way of the main driving force of technological progress and human capital investment, is playing more and more important role in a country’s social and economic development. Since the reform and opening up, especially since 1999, China’s higher education has realized great leap forward development. The relationship between higher education and economic growth become a hot academic research, and made extensive research. Domestic scholars mainly concentrated in three areas: the first is a qualitative study on the relationship between higher education and economic development, Zhao (2011) et al. have concluded that there is relationship of mutual promotion between higher education and economic development. The second is the study of higher education’s contribution to economic growth. Cui Yuping (2001) & Liu Lin (2007) have measured the contribution to economic growth rate of China’s higher education in different periods using the factor analysis method. The third is to study the relation between development and regional economic growth of higher education. Zheng Ming & Zhu Huaizhen (2007) analyzed the relationship between higher Chinese education and economic growth based on the division of provinces based on the provincial

panel data analysis. Ping (2007), et al. (2010) used time series data of higher education in the provincial panel data analysis and regional economic growth relationship. In addition, few scholars have studied the relationship between the higher education investment and economic growth. Wu Hui & Liu Zhixin (2009) used the econometrics method to analyze the relationship between the financial investment in higher education and economic growth in China. Overall, the current research on the relationship between higher education and economic growth in domestic is more qualitative analysis rather than quantitative analysis. This paper attempts to start from the General Higher Education School of existing scale, exploring the existence of integration relationship between the scale and the economic growth in the number of point of view, and put forward some suggestions for the sustainable development of higher education. 2

THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN NUMBER OF CHINA HIGHER EDUCATION AND GDP

2.1 Variable selection This paper selects the natural logarithm of the GDP of 1978–2011 (LNGDP) and the number of colleges and universities of the natural logarithm

343

ICIEES_Book.indb 343

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

Table 1.

ADF unit root test results.

Variable

(c,t,k)

ADF

1% critical value

5% critical value

10% critical value

Stable

LNNUMBER d(LNNUMBER) LNGDP d(LNGDP)

(c,t,0) (c,t,0) (c,t,1) (c,t,3)

−0.89 −3.44 −2.91 −3.58

−4.26 −4.27 −4.27 −4.31

−3.55 −3.56 −3.56 −3.57

−3.21 −3.21 −3.21 −3.22

no yes no yes

(LNNUMBER), in order to avoid the non-linear relationship between variables, but also to reduce the changes of variables and the number of differential. In this paper, the variables are the natural logarithm transform. All the data are from the China Bureau of statistics statistical yearbook 2012. Measurement software is used in the present study EViews 6.0. 2.2

The co-integration research between China higher education and economic growth

2.2.1 The unit root test According to the basic principle and method of unit root test, EViews 6.0 statistical software is used to relate indexes of China from 1978 to 2011 and the data unit root test. We have found that the natural logarithm of the actual GDP of 1978–2011 (LNGDP) and the number of colleges and universities of the natural logarithm (LNNUMBER) are non-stationary time series, and these after a series of first-order differential D (LNNUMBER) and D (LNGDP), tested were stationary series, namely the above variables were I (1) process. 2.2.2 Grainger causality test Based on the logarithmic EViews 6.0 software on the 1978–2011 the number of regular institutions of Higher Education (LNNUMBER) and China’s GDP log (LNGDP) Grainger causality test, results show that the logarithmic to the number of regular institutions of Higher Education (LNNUMBER) as a logarithmic form of GDP in China (LNGDP) Grainger reasons. Its F value is 9.07, F value that corresponds to the P value is 0.001, less than 0.05, so we should reject the null hypothesis. Not vice versa, logarithmic form of GDP in China (LNGDP) log is not the number of colleges and universities (LNNUMBER) Grainger reasons, its F value is 1.80, F value of the corresponding P value of 0.184, more than 0.05, do not reject the null hypothesis;. The results are as shown in the following table. This result with the general expectation is not the same, generally we believe that GDP will have a great effect on the number of colleges and universities, and this result with our

Table 2.

ADF unit root test results.

Pairwise Granger causality tests Date: 07/09/13 Time: 16:27 Sample: 1978–2011 Lags: 2 Null hypothesis

Obs

F-Statistic

Prob.

N does not Granger Cause GDP GDP does not Granger Cause N

32

9.07

0.001

1.80

0.184

Table 3.

Residual stability test results.

Null Hypothesis: E has a unit root Exogenous: Constant, Linear Trend Lag Length: 0 (Automatic based on SIC, MAXLAG = 8)

Augmented Dickey-Fuller test statistic Test critical values: 1% level 5% level 10% level

t-Statistic

Prob.*

−0.87

0.95

−4.26 −3.55 −3.21

prediction is not consistent, that the development of education will be the first to affect the development of China’s GDP, if we continue to try to change the number of delays, perhaps will not get the same results. 2.3

The co-integration test

The essence of co-integration is that although the individual is not stable, two or more than two nonstationary time series, if there is a co-integration relationship between them, is a linear combination of them is stable. Therefore, in the co-integration analysis economic significance, for the two have their own long-term fluctuation variables, if they

344

ICIEES_Book.indb 344

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

are co-integrated, then there exists a long-term equilibrium relationship, on the contrary, a longterm equilibrium relationship does not exist. When co-integration relationship is explored between different economic variables in the test, the main use of regression residual two step EG co-integration test based on the relationship between, mainly applicable to the inspection of two variables. First, LN (GDP) and LN (NUMBER) co-integration regression, regression results are obtained as shown in the following table. ln number = 4.738125 + 0.219759 ln gdp

(1)

(23.03291) (11.45357) Residual then generates the co-integration regression of a smooth ADF test, the test results are shown in the following table. Its ADF value is −0.87, 1% value is −4.26, 5% critical value is −3.55, the 10% critical value is −3.21, and the residual is non-stationary. There is no co-integration relationship between the logarithmic to the number 1978– 2011 of ordinary high school (LNNUMBER) and China’s GDP log (LNGDP). Namely there has no a long-term equilibrium relationship between. 3

CONCLUSION

Based on the above analysis and test, we found there is no evidence of a co-integration relationship between logarithmic to the number of 1978–2011 in our country higher education (LNNUMBER) and China’s GDP log (LNGDP), that there is no a long-term equilibrium relationship between the two. However, we found that the logarithmic to the number of regular institutions of Higher Education (LNNUMBER) is a logarithmic form of GDP in China (LNGDP) Grainger. That is to say, the effect of higher education’s development and the scale of GDP in China is obvious. Therefore China should continue to maintain the high school development scale corresponding. At the same time we need to pay attention to the growth in the number of university development is not all development. Development does not only refer to the scale and speed, the more important is the quality, structure and benefit. Only two of the unity combines we do achieve healthy development. According to the actual situation in our country, we have put forward the following two suggestions for the sustainable development of higher education in this paper. First, the scientific planning and reasonable positioning are fairly important. According to

the national and local needs, we should consider the actual ability and level, their rational positioning and clear the institutions of the strategic development goals in the universities. According to China’s current economic, social development level and the support of higher education financial status and also the different needs of different levels of talent as well as the development of the area, we need to improve the high level of institutions of higher education scale and the quality level of school, highlighting the school characteristics. Second, we need to deepen reform and strengthen management. We should make full use of the limited resources, take the school management as a career with careful operation. Thus we may realize the coordinated development of the scale, structure, quality and benefit as a sustainable development. REFERENCES [1] S.K. Zhao et al. The relationship between higher education and economic growth in the theoretical model and Empirical Research. Chinese Higher Education research, 2011 (09). [2] Y.P. Cui. Chinese higher education to the economic growth rate. The Contribution of Education and Economy, 2001 (01). [3] H.M, Song & Rong Wang. Higher education to measure the contribution rate of economic growth and the correlation analysis. Research in Higher Education of Engineering, 2005 (01). [4] Liu Lin. The contribution of China higher education to economic growth rate studies. Journal of Hefei University: Natural Science Edition, 2007 (01). [5] M. Zheng & H.Z. Zhu. Higher education and regional economic growth—Based on the provincial panel data China empirical research. Education Research of Tsinghua University, 2007 (04). [6] P. Shi. Shaanxi province higher education and economic growth (between J). Journal of Northwestern University: Philosophy and Social Sciences Edition, 2007 (06). [7] D.Q. Huang & L.R. Peng. The relationship between higher education and economic growth in Guangdong empirical research. Journal of South China Agricultural University: Social Science Edition, 2009 (04). [8] Z.D. Tang et al. Development of higher education and regional economic growth empirical study— Taking Liaoning Province as an example. Modern education management, 2010 (03). [9] H. Wu & Z.X. Liu The financial investment Chinese relationship between higher education and economic growth model. Journal of Harbin Institute of Technology, 2009 (07). [10] X. Chen. Coordination of the relationship between Chinese higher education investment and economic growth analysis. Journal of Yunnan University: Social Science Edition, 2010 (01).

345

ICIEES_Book.indb 345

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

ATTACHMENTS Year

GDP (Billion)

Number of higher education

1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011

3645.2 4062.6 4545.6 4889.5 5330.5 5985.6 7243.8 9040.7 10274.4 12050.6 15036.8 17000.9 18718.3 21826.2 26937.3 35260 48108.5 59810.5 70142.5 78060.9 83024.3 88479.2 98000.5 108068.2 119095.7 134977 159453.6 183617.4 215904.4 266422 316030.3 340320 399759.5 472115

598 630 675 743 811 879 947 1016 1054 1063 1075 1075 1075 1075 1053 1065 1080 1054 1032 1020 1022 1071 1041 1225 1396 1552 1731 1792 1867 1908 2263 2305 2358 2409

346

ICIEES_Book.indb 346

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Practice with project-based teaching of mechanical vibration to international engineering students K.M. Wang Faculty of Aerospace Engineering, Shenyang Aerospace University, Shenyang, China

ABSTRACT: This paper introduces the practice of teaching mechanical vibration to international engineering students using project-based method. The main advantages of project-based method over conventional method are analyzed and an example of carefully designed project is given. The procedures of the teaching practice are described and the benefits are discussed. Practice results show clearly that through project-based teaching and learning, the students behave more actively, show more interests, work more rigorously, and hence master the knowledge more thoroughly. More importantly, they also learn some more valuable capabilities for their future engineering careers, such as comprehensive analysis and team cooperation. Keywords: 1 1.1

Engineering education; Teaching reform; Project-based teaching; Mechanical vibration

INTRODUCTION How it started

Mechanical vibration is one of the courses I have been teaching for over 30 years at Shenyang Aerospace University, but for over 20 years, I never thought of project-based teaching. Then, in the year of 2007, I began to teach international graduate students from IPSA, a French postgraduate school in aerospace engineering. That was the first time in my teaching career to have the opportunity to teach engineering courses to foreign students in English, and that was also a big challenge. To me, the challenge is not the language; it is how to teach French students in a way that is effective to them. At that time, I did not have any previous experience, but I knew I should not teach the French students using exactly the same method as I teach Chinese students. Fortunately, before I took the first class in 2007, I had chances to talk with some French teachers and students. Based on what I realized about their education system and the prominent characteristics of the French students, I made a decision to use project-based method to teach the course of mechanical vibration from the very first class of that year. 1.2

Why project-based teaching method

Generally speaking, the French engineering students have high interests in practical or close to practical engineering problems in the course

learning process, but they hate pure theory and long equations. Unfortunately, mechanical vibration is a course full of abstract theories and complicated equations. Project is the magic thing that can bridge the big gap between the students’ characteristics and the course feature. With interesting and challenging projects in mind, the seemingly boring theory and equations will not be boring anymore. This makes the teaching and learning of the course much more effective. Another reason for taking project-based method is that it can provide more opportunities to enhance comprehensive qualities of the students, such as team cooperation and cost analysis abilities. 1.3 What this paper presents The course includes four major chapters and a project is designed for each chapter. This paper is only about the first project, “Vibration Suppression”, corresponding to the first chapter, vibrations of single-DOF systems. The project is about how to reduce the vertical vibration of a motor mounted in the middle of a simplysupported uniform beam. This paper reports the purposes, the design, the tasks and the requirements of the project, the implement of the project-based teaching method using this project, and the results of this teaching practice. Conclusions are drawn about the advantages of project-based teaching method over conventional method and the key factors for successful project-based teaching.

347

ICIEES_Book.indb 347

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

2

MAIN TEACHING CONTENTS OF 1-DOF SYSTEM VIBRATIONS

2.1

X Y

Important basic concepts

Making students fully understand the basic concepts of mechanical vibration is one of the important purposes of this course teaching. The basic concepts about 1-DOF system vibrations are absolutely important part for setting up a solid foundation. The following concepts are the necessary materials for forming strong bottom layers of the foundation. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Degree of freedom; Vibration model, three elements and forces; Natural frequency (undamped and damped); Damping effects (on free and forced vibration); Equivalent damping, damping measurement; Resonance (condition and effect); Three types of excitation, three sets of curves; Vibration isolation (active and passive); Characteristics of free and forced vibrations; Parallel and serial springs.

2.2

Calculation of natural frequencies and steady-state responses to three different types of excitation is the most important part of calculation ability the student should grasp. The following equations are the most useful ones for these calculations. The natural frequency for any linear vibration system that can be simplified to 1-DOF system is

ωn =

k m

(1)

where k is equivalent stiffness and m equivalent mass. The equations for steady-state responses to three different types of harmonic excitation are x

X sin(ω t − ϕ )

(2)

where X=

F0 /k ⎛ 2ζλ ⎞ , ϕ = aarctan cta ⎜ ⎝ 1 − λ 2 ⎟⎠ (1− λ 2 )2 + (2ζλ )2

(3)

for force excitation; X=

( me/M )λ 2 ⎛ 2ζλ ⎞ , ϕ = aarctan cta ⎜ 2 ⎝ 1 − λ 2 ⎟⎠ ( − λ ) + ( ζλ )

for rotating unbalance excitation; and

⎛ ⎞ 2ζλ 3 ϕ = arctan ⎜ ζζλ λ )2 ⎟⎠ ⎝1 − λ

(4)

(5a)

(5b)

for base motion excitation. In equations 3 to 5, F0 is the amplitude of excitation force, m and M are rotor mass and total mass respectively, e is eccentricity of the rotor, Y is base motion amplitude, ϕ is phase lag to excitation, λ is frequency ration, and ζ is damping ratio. 2.3 Teaching purposes Understanding the above listed basic concepts and basic equations plays very important role for solving practical vibration problems. The teaching purposes of these contents are to make the students thoroughly understand the profound physical meaning of both the concepts and equations, and to train the students’ practical abilities to use the knowledge freely and comprehensively in engineering scenarios. 3

Important basic calculation equations

1+ (2ζλ )2 (1− λ 2 )2 + (2ζλ )2

PROJECT-BASED TEACHING METHOD VS. CONVENTIONAL METHOD

3.1 Shortcomings of conventional method Although the classical and conventional lecturehomework-examination teaching method has been widely used over the years around the world, it has the following major disadvantages. 1. Usually the students don’t know why they have to learn all the stuff lecture after lecture, they are often bothered by the idea that what they are learning may be just useless. So their attitude is often passive or even negative, they lack clear motivation and strong passion to learn what they are taught. 2. Most of the home works can be finished by simply using what they just learned from last lecture. To finish homework in this “learned-what-usewhat” mode, the students don’t need to make any independent thinking about what knowledge to use, whereas this is an important ability for solving practical engineering problems. 3. Passing examination seems the final goal to learn a course for most of the students. Memorizing without understanding can help students pass most of the tests, but after the test, they soon forget what they memorized for the test. 4. Teamwork cooperation and the combination of theory and practice are critically important for training engineering students, but it is difficult for the conventional teaching method to provide such environment.

348

ICIEES_Book.indb 348

4/3/2015 7:09:10 AM

3.2

Advantages of project-based method

Project-based teaching focuses on training students’ ability of solving practical problems through working on project(s). Compared with the traditional method, it has the following advantages. 1. With a project or projects in mind, the students’ attitude toward course learning is more active and they have clear purpose and strong motivation to study and explore the knowledge. 2. Working on project is more interesting and challenging than doing simple homework. Through this process, students’ enthusiasm of independent thinking and creative thinking is well inspired. They also need to digest the knowledge thoroughly and do a lot of comprehensive analyses to provide effective solutions to project problems. 3. By utilizing the knowledge learned to solve practical project problems, the students can master the knowledge much better than mechanically memorizing the knowledge before examination. 4. Project-based teaching also gives the students a lot of opportunities to learn valuable skills necessary for excellent engineers beyond the course knowledge, such as teamwork cooperation, cost analysis, and practical engineering considerations. 3.3

Challenges to teachers

Compared with traditional teaching mode, projectbased teaching approach requires teachers to have enough engineering background or experience, only understanding textbook knowledge is not qualified for this teaching mode. Without enough practical engineering experience, it’s not possible for the teacher to design good project. Another challenge is teaching skill, creative teaching skills are necessary to maximize benefits from well-designed projects. 4

THE PROJECT DESIGNED

Based on teaching purposes of vibration of oneDOF systems practical ability training requirements, the following project is carefully designed. The name of the project is vibration suppression. The system is schematically shown in figure 1. For low frequency vibration, this system can be simplified to and treated as a 1-DOF system. The problem, the objective, known details, requirements, and restrictions of the project are given below. Problem: Excessive vertical vibration in operating. Objective: Reducing the beam vibration and dynamic force transmitted to the base. Task: Providing solutions to reducing both vibration and force transmission. Known details: The motor is rigidly mounted to the middle of the simply supported uniform

Figure 1. Vibration system of an electric motor in the middle of a simply-supported uniform beam.

rectangular beam. The following information about the system is known: Beam geometry: Width by height by length = 0.20 × 0.06 × 2.00 m Beam material properties: Young’s modulus E = 2 × 1011 N/m2 Mass density ρ = 7800 kg/m3 Motor mass: Total mass (including motor support): mt = 105 kg Rotor mass: mr = 30 kg Motor speed: n = 1440 rpm Measured harmonic vibration: Displacement amplitude A = 160 μ Frequency f = 24 Hz Measured (indirectly) equivalent damping ratio: ζ = 0.01 Requirements: Providing solutions to 1. Reducing the vibration displacement amplitude to less than 20 μ; 2. Reducing the dynamic force transmitted to the base to less than 10% of the original force. Restrictions: For providing solutions by changing or improving something, the students are not allowed to 1. Change the motor, its position, or its speed; 2. Change the length of the beam; 3. Change the number or position of the supports. Notes: This project is teamwork of two students. 5

IMPLEMENT OF THIS PROJECT-BASED TEACHING

The unique part of this project-based teaching practice is the way it is implemented. Unlike most other practices such as examples listed in the references, to maximize the benefits, this project work started at the very beginning of the course teaching. The problem, objective, and task of the project were

349

ICIEES_Book.indb 349

4/3/2015 7:09:11 AM

showed to students at the beginning of first lecture. The detail information and data necessary for providing solutions were not given to students directly. The students were asked to think of what parameters they needed to solve the problem. This is the very first phase of the project and the first task of the students is to determine what detail information they need by independent thinking. This first step is important because in their future career as engineers when facing similar problems, this is the very first thing they need to do. No one else will provide them exactly what they need without their request. Actually, only when the students have clear ideas about the theory and specific methods they will use to find solutions, can they really know exactly what parameters they need. So through the lectures, they were eager to learn more and they kept add more necessary parameters to their initial incomplete list. When they learned everything related with this project, they knew that they need the following parameters. The beam: dimensions and mechanical properties of the material, Young’s modulus and mass density, and force on the beam. The motor: mass (or weight, including support), exact position on the beam, the way it is mounted to the beam, rotating speed, gravity center, torque, and dimensions. Others: vibration frequency, vibration intensity, and damping constant. Although these three aspects of information are not enough yet, this means the students basically know what calculations and analyses they need to do to find solutions. Based on the students requested parameters, this matter was further discussed. Why some parameters in their list are not necessary or unrelated were explained. For example, force on the beam can be calculated from other data and torque of the motor has nothing to do with the vibration. Necessary information the students missed includes requirements for this work and restrictions on the solutions. After why they need to know requirements and restrictions were explained, the designed project described in section 4 was given to students. And then they were ready to work on finding solutions. At least two different solutions must be provided for each team, and they need to make comparison between the solutions, including the aspects of cost and ease and how easy it is to implement in practice. 6

TEACHING AND LEARNING RESULTS

In working on this project, the students need to use almost all the important concepts and equations listed in section 2. They have to find whether the excessive vibration is caused by resonance first. For this, they need to calculate natural frequency

of the system and compare it with excitation or vibration frequency. After realizing resonance is the cause, the second step is to change the natural frequency by improving the system. This has several possibilities and there is no simple standard solution, and this gives students a lot of room for independent and creative exploring using different methods and tools. The last step is to compare obtained solutions. The students learned all the important knowledge about 1-DOF vibration and also some practical skills by this single project. A typical report of 10 to 15 pages will be submitted, which includes the following contents. Calculation the natural frequency of the system: Equivalent mass of the beam; Stiffness of the beam; Natural frequency of the system. Calculation of rotor eccentricity and dynamic forces: Calculation of the eccentricity; Calculation of unbalance excitation; Dynamic force transmitted to support. Solutions: Changing the cross-section of the beam; Changing the material of the beam; Adding damper to the beam; Adding extra mass to the beam. Feasibility analysis. Comparison and conclusions. 7

CONCLUSIONS

Compared to conventional method, project-based teaching has proved much more effective, interesting, and also challenging. Students benefited more from this method in both knowledge understanding and practical abilities by involving themselves more actively in the more practical and comprehensive learning process. Teachers’ ability to design high-quality project and superb directing skills play a key role in project-based teaching. REFERENCES [1] McDermott, Kevin J., Nafalski, Andrew & Göl, Özdemir, 2007, Project-based Teaching in Engineering Programs, 37th ASEE/IEEE Frontiers in Education Conference, Milwaukee, WI. [2] Pereira, Diego Crespo, et al, 2011, A project-based teaching experience for simulation and optimization education, 7th International Conference on Next Generation Web Services Practices, 436–440. [3] Sterian, Andrew, Adamczyk, Bogdan, & Rahman, M.M. Azizur, 2008, A Project-Based Approach to Teaching Introductory Circuit Analysis, 38th ASEE/IEEE Frontiers in Education Conference, Saratoga Springs, NY. [4] Zhou, Ziliang & Donaldson, Anthony, 2010. Work in Progress—Project-Based Learning in Manufacturing Process, 40th ASEE/IEEE Frontiers in Education Conference, Washington, DC.

350

ICIEES_Book.indb 350

4/3/2015 7:09:11 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Early fault detection of gearbox bearings through combined vibration signal analysis method K.M. Wang Faculty of Aerospace Engineering, Shenyang Aerospace University, Shenyang, China

ABSTRACT: Although quite a few vibration analysis methods for bearing fault diagnosis have been reported as successful, new problems still arise in practical applications of these methods in some special situations. The specific difficulty encountered in this research project on bearing fault detection is the plunger pumps fixed to and driven by the gearbox generate very strong impulsive vibrations that make impact-recognition-based signal analysis approaches ineffective. A hybrid method was proposed that combines spectrum analysis, digital filtering, and crest factor analysis. The proposed method was proved effective in its application to more than 50 gearboxes. Keywords: Gearbox; Bearing; Vibration measurement; Spectral analysis; Digital filtering; Fault detection 1

INTRODUCTION

Several vibration analysis techniques for rolling element bearing fault diagnosis have been proposed around for many years (Harker, R.G. and Sandy, J.L., 1989), but each method has its limitations and each specific application of these methods needs to solve some new problems. For example, envelope analysis (Kadushin, David, 1991, Sturm, A. and Billhardt, S. 1991) is a well known effective technique, but it is only suitable to detect impulsive local damages. Crest factor (Smith, K.A., 1972) is another effective indicator for local fault existence, but when other impulsive vibrations generated by normal machine operation are much stronger than damage-generated impulses, the method would easily give false diagnosis. Directional spectrum analysis (Lee, C-W. and Park, J-P., 1996) gives better detection for inner race defects, but it needs two sensors for one bearing and this is a limitation for its practical applications. The specific situation encountered in this research project on nonintrusive fault detection techniques for improving the operation reliability of the locomotive transmission and lubrication systems challenged the available bearing diagnosis techniques. The task to detect damages at early stage by casing vibration analysis for one gearbox that drives two plunger pumps seemed not too tough initially with all the ready-to-use techniques available, but the real vibration measurement and analysis immediately presented some trouble. The normal vibrations generated by the pump are highly impulsive so that crest factor analysis can

not be directly used. Envelope analysis is not suitable to the situation because the two major early fault modes of the bearing are excessive clearance and abnormal noise which do not produce periodic impulses. So a combined vibration analysis method was proposed to solve the problem. Numerous field gearbox vibration measurements and laboratory signal analyses were conducted to make the method simple and reliable. 2

VIBRATION MEASUREMENT

The top view of the gearbox with positions of the vibration measurement accelerometers shown on it is schematically illustrated in Figure 1. The input

Figure 1. Top view sketch of the gearbox and 2 plunger pumps showing positions of the 4 accelerometers.

351

ICIEES_Book.indb 351

4/3/2015 7:09:11 AM

shaft was driven by the diesel engine at speed of 800 r/min. Each driven shaft drives a plunger pump at one end that provides the hydraulic pressure required for the train control. Four B&K accelerometers were placed on top cover of the gearbox close to the bearing housings, measuring vertical vibrations. The vibrations were recorded on a B&K tape recorder. The frequency span of the recorded signal is 12.8 kHz and the time duration is 30 s. More than 50 gearboxes were measured in an eighteen-month period and most of the gearboxes measured were inspected during the followed periodical overhaul. 3

VIBRATION CHARACTERISTICS

The vibrations picked up by the accelerometers are mainly contributed by the gears, bearings, and the plunger pumps, in which the vibrations produced by the strong impulsive motion of the plungers are always absolutely dominant. A typical time signal and its frequency spectrum of gearbox with its bearings in good conditions are shown in Figures 2 and 3 respectively. The vibrations also contain some frequency components transmitted to it from the diesel engine. The reciprocal pumping motion of the plunger is in an inclined direction forming about a 45 degree angle with the vertical plane, so it causes both vertical and horizontal vibrations. The drive gear has 49 teeth and the driven gears on both sides have 41 teeth each. The two identical plunger pumps have 7 plungers each. When the engine speed is 800 r/min, the main frequencies are as follows: The input shaft frequency fis =

800 = 13.33 Hz 60

fis = 65.33 Hz

fds

49 fis = 15.93 Hz 41

(3)

The plunger frequency fp

fds = 111.544 Hz

(4)

The above are all fundamental frequencies. For these frequencies, only the plunger frequency and its many high-order harmonic frequencies are always dominant for gearboxes with or without damages. Other frequency components are, for most of the measurements, rather weak and did not show clearly, even the gear mesh frequency. The strong frequency components up to around 2000 Hz are all harmonics of the plunger impulse frequency (See Figure 3). Figure 4 is the same spectrum, showing only the dominant harmonics with higher frequency resolution. The highest peak is the fifth harmonic of the plunger frequency. The gear mesh frequency is next to this

(1)

The gear mesh frequency fm

The driven shaft frequency

(2)

Figure 2. Typical casing vibration time signal of gearboxes with bearings in normal conditions.

Figure 3. Typical casing vibration frequency spectrum of gearboxes with bearings in normal conditions.

Figure 4. Typical casing vibration frequency spectrum of gearboxes with bearings in normal conditions.

352

ICIEES_Book.indb 352

4/3/2015 7:09:12 AM

peak with its amplitude only about one thirds of the dominant peak. From about 2000 Hz to 12000 Hz, the spectrum is usually relatively flat with very low amplitude. Some spectra may have some higher peaks at frequencies between 10000 Hz and 12000 Hz (See Figure 6), but these peaks are usually not related to any bearing faults and do not have value for bearing diagnosis. The strong impulsive characteristic of the pump generated vibrations can be recognized directly from the time signal. Figure 5 gives one such example. The impulsive feature of the vibration looks very similar to that caused by a local damage in bearing, but this has nothing to do with bearing damages. The cycle of the impulse is about 9 milliseconds; its fundamental frequency, 111 Hz, corresponds exactly to the frequency of propulsive motion of the plunger rods. Figure 6 and 7 give its frequency spectra. If the well-known crest factor or envelope analysis were directly utilized to such vibration signals, wrong diagnosis would be easily produced.

Figure 5. Casing vibration time signal of a gearbox with bearings in normal conditions.

Figure 7. Frequency spectrum of time signal shown in Figure 5, gearbox bearings in normal conditions.

4

Faults in a gearbox may take many different forms, but to make a specific diagnosis method simple and effective, every practical fault detection system is aimed at some specific fault modes. For this project, the overhaul inspection record of the gearbox indicated the gears are always in good condition; bearing faults are the only faults interested. Bearing faults themselves include various forms too, but based on the inspection record and the requirement of early detection, two main modes of early faults were determined. A bearing is defined faulty if the clearance between inner and outer races is excessive, or if abnormal noise can be heard when the bearing is turned by hand. Most bearings renewed during overhaul are because of these two forms of fault. So the early fault detection in this research is mainly aimed at these two fault modes. The obvious difference between the signals shown in Figure 2 and Figure 5, and the spectrum difference between Figure 3 and Figure 6, may represent different conditions in the plunger pumps, but to the bearing fault detection, this only presents some obstacles. And this is one of the specific difficulties this research must overcome. 5

Figure 6. Frequency spectrum of time signal shown in Figure 5, gearbox bearings in normal conditions.

MAIN MODES OF BEARING FAULTS

FAULT DETECTION

The fault detection criteria are determined based on theoretical analysis and comparison between signal analysis results and overhaul inspection results. Theoretically, if bearing clearance is excessive or if it generates abnormal noise when turned by hand, then some level of impact occurs in operation. For excessive clearance, these impacts are not periodic, but with some random nature. Envelope analysis is unsuitable for this situation. In time domain, these impacts are far too weak than the impulsive effect of the plunger pumps. In frequency domain, these

353

ICIEES_Book.indb 353

4/3/2015 7:09:12 AM

random impacts can cause more high-frequency components. For noisy bearings, the vibration nature is similar. The fault detection method has to use the high frequency information. Practically speaking, the difficulty is that there are other unknown factors that also generate high-frequency vibrations. Figure 6 shows an example. The high frequency components around 12000 Hz are obvious, but all bearings in the gearbox are in good conditions. Careful comparison between spectrum analysis results and overhaul inspection results reveals that, in most cases, the high frequency components at the right end of the spectrum do not relate to any bearing faults. The frequency range between 2500 Hz and 10300 Hz was determined to use for bearing fault detection. For faulty bearings, the crest factor corresponding to this frequency band gets higher, or the vibration level in this frequency band gets higher than normal value. According to this cause and effect relation, using the information provided in this frequency band, two criteria for early fault detection were established. The crest factor is obtained based on frequency spectrum analysis, band-pass digital filtering, and time domain signal reconstruction using the band pass frequency components. It is given by max( abs( xi )) RMS M

CF =

Figure 8. Time signals before and after reconstruction from gearbox with bearings in good conditions.

(5)

where RMS is the root mean square of the bandpass components, and is the reconstructed time series by inverse Fourier transform of the bandpass frequency components. Given by n2

xi

∑ G (k ) e

j

2π k i N

(6)

k n1

where n1 and n2 correspond to the lower and upper limits of the pass-band width, and G(k) is the series of forward Fourier transform of the original vibration samplings. The second criterion directly uses the band-pass RMS as a supplementary benchmark for those faults that may not result in high crest factors. The pass band for signal reconstruction is determined based on careful analysis of the vibration signals and the overhaul inspection results. The lower and upper limits are 2500 Hz and 10500 Hz respectively. Figure 8 gives an example of analysis results of gearboxes with their bearings in good conditions. The crest factor after the band-pass reconstruction decreased a little. Figure 9 shows an example of the analysis results for gearboxes with faulty bearings; in this case, the bearing was deter-

Figure 9. Time signals before and after reconstruction from gearbox with faulty bearings.

354

ICIEES_Book.indb 354

4/3/2015 7:09:13 AM

mined faulty and renewed because it generated abnormal noise when turned during the overhaul. The crest factor after the band-pass reconstruction increased from the original 4.2 to 6.4. Another faulty bearing example is given in Figure 10 for the second criterion. The time signal, its spectrum structure, and the crest factor of the reconstructed signal (only 3.8) all seems normal, but the RMS level of the band-pass signal reaches

4.4 m/s2, which is much higher than the normal value around 2 m/s2. This bearing was proven to have excessive clearance between the inner and outer races. All other bearings in this gearbox were found healthy and the analysis of signals from the other three accelerometers gave clear agreeable results. 6

CONCLUSIONS AND DISCUSSIONS

The strong propulsive effect of the two plunger pumps attached to the gearbox on vibration signals makes it difficult to detect bearing faults at their early stage through conventional vibration signal analysis methods. The proposed method, which combines band-pass signal reconstruction and crest factor analysis, gives better early fault detection in this specific situation. Faulty bearings in the gearbox usually have a band-pass crest factor over 5, or have a band-pass RMS level above 3 m/s2. These values can be different for different type gearboxes. It is noticed that the crest factor criterion 5 is mush higher than that given in most literatures, which is probably because of the impulsive loading nature of the gearbox and the band-pass reconstruction of the vibration signals. For over 200 bearings inspected during gearbox overhaul, this method achieved a correct diagnosis rate about 90 percent; this helped the railway maintenance department to manage the gearbox overhaul more efficiently. REFERENCES

Figure 10. Vibration signal analysis result of a bearing with excessive clearance.

[1] Harker, R.G. and Sandy, J.L. 1989. Rolling Element Bearing Monitoring and Diagnosis Techniques. Transactions of the ASME, Journal of Engineering for Gas Turbines and Power, Vol. 111, 251–256. [2] Kadushin, David. 1991. Rolling Element Bearing Fault Analysis Using Envelope Detection During an Experimental Case Study. Proceedings of the 3rd International Machinery Monitoring & Diagnostics Conference, Las Vegas, Nevada, 132–136. [3] Lee, C-W. and Park, J-P. 1996. Inner Race Fault Detection in Rolling Element Bearings Using Directional Spectra of Vibration Signals. IMechE Conference Transactions, Sixth International Conference on Vibrations in Rotating Machinery, 361–370. [4] Smith, K.A. 1972. Crest Factor Analysis for Rolling Element Bearing. Proceedings of the Meeting of the Mechanical Failures Prevention Group (18th), Gaithersburg, Maryland, 9–20. [5] Sturm, A. and Billhardt, S. 1991. Envelope Curve Analysis of Machines with Rolling-Element Bearings. IFAC Fault Detection, Supervision and Safety for Technical Processes, Baden-Baden, Germany, 529–533.

355

ICIEES_Book.indb 355

4/3/2015 7:09:13 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Study on the improved statistic algorithm in the graduation project packet achievement Y.K. Yan, Y.B. Cong & W.Y. Ma School of Mechanical Science and Engineering, Jilin University, Changchun, China

ABSTRACT: With the rapid development of higher education in China, it is very common to hold graduation reply in groups. In view of the problem that the standard for evaluation is difficult to consider the unbalanced learning ability among groups, this paper presents an improved statistical algorithm for the conformance of reply result based on the same mean value and variance of the usual performance, deduces the related calculation formulas. Calculation examples show that the method can overcome the influences above to some extent; it can be more practical in the evaluation of the graduation project. Keywords: 1

Usual performance; Statistical algorithm; Normal distribution; Mean value; Variance

INTRODUCTION

In the increasingly diverse context of higher education, the formative, heuristic purposes of assessment have become more prominent (Topping 1998). Graduation project is not only the final key process in the undergraduate education but also the important warrant for adult students to meet the requirement of graduating qualification. The objective evaluation of graduation project has become more prominent, because the scientific standardization of grading plays an important role in inspiring students and teachers’ enthusiasm and further improving the teaching basic principle. Traditionally, emotions have been neglected by educational research. Despite the ubiquity of emotions in the classroom, research on emotions in achievement contexts has been slow to emerge, with just a few notable exceptions (Pekrun 2006). There has been an increase in the number of studies on students’ achievement emotions during the past 20 years, but compared with cognitive and motivational constructs, students’ emotions continue to be not considered. The studies have shown that learning goals do exert a positive influence on both intrinsic motivation and performance when individuals encounter prolonged challenge or setbacks. In addition, performance goals that are focused on validating ability can have beneficial effects on performance when individuals are meeting with success (Grant 2003). Effective statistical algorithm should be constructive as it enables students to create their own meaning, constructs and conceptions of reality.

With the rapid development of higher education in China, randomized grouping is popular method when the students will reply to the graduation project. As for too many involved factors and diverse views of judges, it is quite difficult to guarantee an objective and consistent system performed in different groups. At present, it is a widely used simple approach to regulate the number of grade A and grade D. In other words, the achievement is assumed to follow the normal distribution in each group. However, there are the great individual differences among groups, such as the number of superior/inferior students is much bigger than that in common case. If the evaluation on the achievement still used a simple approach, it may lead to the obvious unfair phenomenon (Xueying 2006). Based on the research of achievement assessment in our university, this article puts forward the improved statistic algorithm of achievement in the graduation project packet reply which considered the course performance mean during the last four years as the usual performance and combined with the reply result of graduation project. The mean and variance of final achievement were equal to the mean and variance of the usual performance in each group. Hence interference is removed to a certain extent so that the evaluation quality will be improved. 2

METHODOLOGY

College students often pursue multiple goals in their classes. Some goals may be fairly general and

357

ICIEES_Book.indb 357

4/3/2015 7:09:13 AM

concern students’ reasons for taking a class, whereas other goals are more specific to what students hope to accomplish in the course to learn as much as they can about the subject or to obtain a high grade (Harackiewicz 2000). The basic idea of this paper is supposed that the learning ability of every student is steady, so we will consider the course performance mean as the usual performance of every student at first. The reply result of graduation project would be the normalized processing according to the usual performance mean and variance. We think this methodology is more reasonable than the same normal distribution in each group. Based on this assumption, we suppose the number of group is M and n(k) ( , M ) students in each group, it denote the distinct values of the usual performance by xi( k ) (i = 1,n(k) ) . We are particularly interested in the usual performance mean and variance in each group

n( k )

∑ Δy

(k ) i

∑x

x

=

n( k )

y ′= (k )

∑ (x

(k i

s

=

∑y

(k ) i

x ( k ) )2

i =1

(2)

n( k )

(8)

n( k )

∑ (a

′ =

i =1

n( k )

(k )

n( )

a( k ) ∑ Δ

yi( k )

x (k ) )

i =1

n( )

n( k )

+∑ x (k )

( )

i =1

(9)

i =1

n(

(1)

n( k )

x (k )

We take a ( k ) as the coefficient of variance in the normalized processing. The final achievement mean could be expressed as

=

n( k )

(k )

a ( k ) Δyi( k

yi( k

(k ) i

i =1

(7)

The usual performance mean x ( k ) and variance s ( k ) will be taken as the target value in the normalized processing. The final achievement can be expressed as

n( k )

(k )

=0

i =1

)

The expression (7) can be combined with the (k ) expression (9) to get y ′ x ( k ) . It states clearly the final achievement mean is the usual performance mean by the normalized processing in each group. The final achievement variance could be expressed as

The reply result of a student in grouping of graduation project is assumed to be yi( k ) , we also need to consider the reply result mean, variance (k ) and the difference of yi( k ) y

n( )

∑ (y

( ) i

σ ′=

′

)2

i =1

( )

n(

(10)

)

n( k )

y

(k )

∑y

(k ) i

=

i =1

(3)

n( k )

The expression (8) is put in the expression (10), we could get n( )

n( )

σ( ) =

∑ (y(i ) − y )2 ( )

σ ′=

i =1

n

Δyi( k ) = yi( k ) − y

(k )

∑y

(k ) i

i =1

∑(

yi( k )

i =1 n( k )

)

∑(

yi( ) )2

i =1

n(

)

= a ( k )σ ( k )

If we assume that σ ( concluded

(k )

a( k ) = (6)

i =1

= ∑ Δyy

)

)

(11)

= s ( ) , it could be

(k )

= ∑ Δyyi( k ) + ∑ y (k i

n(

= a(

y ) n( k )

i =1 n( k )

yi( ) )2

n( )

(5)

n( k )

( )

i =1

(4)

( )

We observe that since n( k )

∑(

( )

n

(k )

y

s( k ) σ (k )

(12)

In conclusion, the final achievement which considered the usual performance mean and variance by the normalized processing can be express as

(k )

i =1

Then the expression (5)∼(6) can now be combined to derive the expression (7)

yi( k )′ =

s ( k ) Δyyi( k ) + x (k ) σ (k )

(13)

358

ICIEES_Book.indb 358

4/3/2015 7:09:14 AM

3

APPLICATION

Table 3. order).

Computer-assisted assessment is an emerging growth area. We will illustrate the algorithm by using a concrete example in this section. If the students in some colleges are sampled and the sample size is n = 30. They are randomly divided into three groups and there are 10 students in each group. As shown in Table 1, the course performance mean of every student during the last four years was listed as the usual performance. We discovered that there was a significant difference in the mean value of the usual performance of three groups. The number of superior students was bigger in the first group and the number of inferior students was bigger in the third group. In other words, three groups of students' learning ability were not balanced. After each group of experts’ evaluation the reply results obtained were shown in Table 2. Table 1. Usual performance of three groups (descending order). Serial number

Usual performance of G1

Usual performance of G2

Usual performance of G3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

95 92 88 87 86 86 83 81 78 75

93 87 85 84 84 78 76 73 66 64

87 83 78 77 68 65 63 55 46 37

Mean Variance

85.1 6.08

79 9.35

65.9 16.23

Table 2. order).

Reply result of three groups (descending

Serial number

Reply result of G1

Reply result of G2

Reply result of G3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

96 88 86 84 78 75 73 67 64 54

94 88 85 82 78 76 75 65 62 50

93 87 84 81 76 73 72 66 62 45

Mean Variance

76.5 12.60

75.5 13.25

73.9 13.89

Final achievement of three groups (descending

Serial number

Final achievement of G1

Final achievement of G2

Final achievement of G3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

94.51 90.65 89.69 88.72 85.82 84.38 83.41 80.51 79.07 74.24

92.05 87.82 85.70 83.58 80.76 79.35 78.65 71.60 69.48 61.02

88.22 81.21 77.70 74.20 68.35 64.85 63.68 56.67 52.00 32.13

79 9.35

65.9 16.23

Mean 85.1 Variance 6.08

Table 2 showed the reply result based on the theory of normal distribution in each group. We found that there was no obvious difference in reply result mean and variance. However, there were significant differences of the student’s learning ability among groups. This assessment method may be unfair on the students’ part. In order to avoid the phenomena, we used the normalized processing described above and obtained the final achievement (see Table 3). Comparing Tables 1 and 3 showed that the final achievement was related to the usual performance. The mean and variance of the final achievement are equal to the mean and variance of the usual performance in each group. In order to further verify the validity of the results of treatment, taking into account the possible presence of experts on student research demands scale, scoring criteria are inconsistent, the Table 2 of the first group of reply result reduced by 5 points, the second group of the same, the third group of reply result improved by 5 points. It was shown in Table 4 after the converted reply result. Using the above normalized method on the reply results in Table 4, the final achievement obtained as showed in Table 5. Comparison of Table 5 and Table 3 showed the same two tables corresponding student’s final achievement, which was easy to see by the above normalization methods described herein. It both can balance the imbalance of the different groups of students learning ability, and also avoid the subjective assessment of experts. Application examples showed that students’ usual performance take into account the results of the normalization algorithm somehow remove the confounding factors in the evaluation of the graduation project pocket reply.

359

ICIEES_Book.indb 359

4/3/2015 7:09:16 AM

Table 4. The converted reply result of three groups (descending order). Serial number

Reply result of G1

Reply result of G2

Reply result of G3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

91 83 81 79 73 70 68 62 59 49

94 88 85 82 78 76 75 65 62 50

98 92 89 86 81 78 77 71 67 50

Mean Variance

71.5 12.60

75.5 13.25

78.9 13.89

Table 5. The converted final achievement of three groups (descending order). Serial number

Final achievement of G1

Final achievement of G2

Final achievement of G3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

94.51 90.65 89.69 88.72 85.82 84.38 83.41 80.51 79.07 74.24

92.05 87.82 85.70 83.58 80.76 79.35 78.65 71.60 69.48 61.02

88.22 81.21 77.70 74.20 68.35 64.85 63.68 56.67 52.00 32.13

Mean Variance

85.1 6.08

79 9.35

65.9 16.23

Achievement evaluation in higher education holds much promise and is becoming the reform orientation. This paper presents the improved statistical algorithm of achievement in the graduation project packet reply, which considered the course performance mean as the usual performance and the reply result was used to be the normalized processing according to the usual performance mean and variance. This method could solve the unbalanced learning ability among groups and improve acceptance and validity of achievement. It has a positive effect on student attitudes and may promote personal responsibility, and motivation. However, much further development and evaluation is needed, future work should focus on improving the methodological quality and more detailed reporting of studies. REFERENCES

It indicated that the algorithm was of adequate reliability and validity. 4

CONCLUSION

Teachers and students hold the main responsibility for improving undergraduate education. Examination of the students’ performances and experiences suggests an overlap of learning experiences and abilities among the various clusters of students with different background qualifications. Learning goals were positively associated with the use of deep-processing strategies and to self-efficacy. Performance goals were positively related to the organization in study strategies. Both learning and performance goals affected achievement indirectly through study strategies, self-efficacy. Use of effective assess processing strategies was positively related to effort relationship to achievement.

[1] Bandalos, D.L., et al. 2003. A model of statistics performance based on achievement goal theory. Journal of educational psychology 95(3): 604. [2] Elliot, A.J., et al. 1999. Achievement goals, study strategies, and exam performance: A mediational analysis. Journal of educational psychology 91(3): 549. [3] Ezepue, P. and K. Mwitondi 2006. Functional education in statistics and related disciplines: innovative and reflexive learning, teaching and assessment of Business Intelligence. Proceedings of the 2006 Hawaii International Conference on Statistics, Mathematics and Related Fields. [4] Grant, H. and C.S. Dweck 2003. “Clarifying achievement goals and their impact.” Journal of personality and social psychology 85(3): 541–553. [5] Harackiewicz, J.M., et al. 2000. “Short-term and long-term consequences of achievement goals: Predicting interest and performance over time.” Journal of educational psychology 92(2): 316–330. [6] Harackiewicz, J.M., et al. 2002. “Revision of achievement goal theory: Necessary and illuminating.” Journal of educational psychology 94(3): 638–645. [7] Pekrun, R., et al. 2006. “Achievement goals and discrete achievement emotions: A theoretical model and prospective test.” Journal of educational psychology 98(3): 583–597. [8] Rice, J.A. 2007. Mathematical statistics and data analysis, Belmont: Cengage Learning. [9] Topping, K. 1998. Peer assessment between students in colleges and universities. Review of Educational Research 68(3): 249–276. [10] Xueying, Yang., et al. 2006. Application of Fuzzy Synthetic Evaluation in Evaluation of Graduation Dissertation. Journal of Computer Technology and Development 16(8): 217–218. [11] Yakun, Yan., et al. 2013. Research on the Result Statistics Algorithm in the Graduation Project Packet Reply. Journal of Changchun University 23(8): 977–981.

360

ICIEES_Book.indb 360

4/3/2015 7:09:16 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Investigation of the interfaces between Second Language Acquisition and Language Testing Xinming Lin Basic Courses Department, Zhejiang Police College, Hangzhou, P.R. China

Jincheng Xia College of Foreign Languages, Zhejiang Business College, Hangzhou, P.R. China

ABSTRACT: Second Language Acquisition and Language Testing have largely been viewed as distinct areas of inquiry in applied linguistics and developed separately. Researchers, teachers and educators have done great work to link language testing with language learning, which have yielded meaningful and inspiring findings and many new perspectives on the development of both and their integrated uses in specific language teaching and learning. Keywords: 1

Second Language Acquisition; Language Testing; interfaces; integrated research

THE PRESENT RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN SLA AND LT

We seem used to the kind of already existing model in our mind, that is, after we have learned or have taught something, we usually and naturally make use of a test or self-assessment, to check how much we have taught or learned and what still remains for further development, what kind of adaptations should be made to promote the teaching or learning process. However, for a long time, as two important areas in language learning, Second Language Acquisition (SLA) and Language Testing (LT) have largely been viewed as distinct areas of inquiry in applied linguistics and have developed separately (Bachman & Cohen, 1998; Shohamy, 1998), with each area ignoring the concerns, foci and methods popularly used in the other, even though we all know their close relationship consciously or unconsciously. SLA and LT differ from each other in research perspective, focus of research, goal of research, and research methodology (Bachman & Cohen, 1998:2) (Figure 1). However, with the development of linguistic and teaching theories, researchers and educators have tried to link LT with language learning, and have done great work in this regard. And with the first paper entitled “The Interfaces between SLA and LT” published by Buchman (1989) on Annual Review of Applied Linguistics, a lot of researchers have been trying to establish the interfaces between SLA and LT from different orientations

Figure 1.

Differences between SLA and LT.

(Buchman & Cohen, 1998; Chapelle, 1998; Cohen, 1998, Douglas, 1998; Shohamy, 1998, 2000; Tarone, 1998; Skehan, 1998; Ellis, 2001). With their findings, we can get many inspirations about how to involve SLA in testing research and the results of testing research in SLA research. 2

THE DILEMMAS ONCE EXISTED

Shohamy (2000) investigated the relationship between and the relevance of SLA and LT based on the articles published in Language Testing and Studies in Second Language Acquisition, which indicated very limited interfaces between the two fields as well as limited relevance of LT to SLA.

361

ICIEES_Book.indb 361

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

And the problem between SLA and LT is that their close relationship only exists in theory, not in practice. The survey indicated SLA researchers have even ignored the importance of LT, and they also complain that LT has put the learning process aside and cannot adapt to the changes of teaching and learning as well as the teaching environment, the prominent importance attached to data analysis in LT has hurt the learners’ enthusiasm and LT developers’ creativity, more seriously, many testers know little about SLA theory and practice while developing the SLA tests with high reliability but with low validity. In practice, LT and SLA just work in parallel to solve problems without interrelation, and SLA researchers should be better informed about LT theories which are centrally relevant to the development and improvement of SLA theory and practice. The research from Shohamy (2000) is not meant to give us the disappointing indications, but it reveals that even though there are limited interfaces between SLA and LT, great potentials exist in them to become relevant to each other (Shohamy, 2000:551), which has also left great space for the researchers from both sides to develop and enrich the interdisciplinary theories and carry out more empirical interdisciplinary research.

3 3.1

INVESTIGATION OF THE INTERFACES BETWEEN SLA AND LT The close relationship between SLA and LT

SLA and LT are just like twins. The disciplines of SLA and LT belong to the same field, that of language learning. They share similar goals of understanding the process of language learning, assessing it and looking for ways to improve it (Shohamy, 2000:542). The ultimate goal of language teaching and learning is to help learners master the language, obtain the abilities to communicate with the language and gain the information required. The goal of LT is to provide a kind of scientific tool of measurement to evaluate the learners’ language competence objectively, correctly, and scientifically, and to reflect the gains and losses in teaching processes, so as to promote language teaching (Yang Hui-zhong, 1999:16). Language teaching and language testing have both experienced the processes of change from emphasizing language knowledge to language skills, then to practical language use. The development process of language teaching and that of LT are reciprocal. The popularity of a kind of language teaching methodology will be followed by a kind of corresponding model of LT. Teaching methodologies in different times are directed and guided directly by language concepts

and learning concepts, and the content and form of testing reflects such concepts. Language testing has become a multi-subject comprehensive science and a separate subject with its own research realm and research methodology; meanwhile it obtains its scientific content from linguistic theories, teaching methodologies, and learning theories, and obtains its scientific methods from the psychological measurements. It accompanies the development of language teaching. Without language teaching, there will be no language testing. Language teaching comes first, and language testing serves language teaching (Yang Hui-zhong, 1999:16). 3.2

The interfaces between SLA and LT

SLA and LT have much to gain from each other and can be viewed more productively as complementary approaches to inquiry into the nature of language proficiency and its acquisition. The central concern in SLA and LT is describing and explaining the variability in SLA and test performance, including language ability variability and variability in test performance, variability in strategies and task and context variables (Bachman, 1990:3). As an effective way of checking and enhancing teaching, LT must accommodate the needs of teaching and provide useful information for teaching methodology, thus producing certain positive backwash on the teaching process. And also, teaching practice can provide LT with valuable information so that LT can be more scientific and meet the teaching requirements. LT research brings a multi-componential view of language proficiency that is consistent with current thinking in the field, a wide range of instruments for measuring these different components, and multivariate approach to empirical research. SLA research, on the other hand, contributes a rich body of information about the factors that affect SLA, the processes that are part of it, and the developmental sequence it follows, along with a well-developed set of qualitative approaches to empirical research (Bachman, 1998:181). Ellis (1985) and Bachman (1990) have proposed their frameworks of sources of variability in SLA and LT respectively. Shohamy (2000) identified six areas potential contributions of SLA to LT and LT to SLA (Figure 2), which provides a framework for examining and analyzing the interfaces between SLA and LT. From what the SLA researchers and language testers have discussed about the relationship between SLA and LT, we can see there is a need for researchers in the two disciplines with common goals to make joint efforts to do the

362

ICIEES_Book.indb 362

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

Figure 2.

Contributions of SLA to LT and LT to SLA.

interdisciplinary research with clear awareness of the theories of both SLA and LT and readiness to involve the related theories of the other in their own research and practice. “Considering the factors to be considered in both SLA and LT, we focus on three sources of variability which are central to both fields: individual differences in the language abilities that are acquired or measured; individual differences in the strategies and other processes that individuals employ in language use, as well as on language test tasks and SLA elicitation tasks; variation in the tasks and context and their effect on language use, as well as performance on language test tasks and SLA elicitation tasks” (Bachaman, 1998:4). Ellis (2003) indicates that task has served as both a research instrument for investigating SLA and also as a construct under investigation in LT and introduces his framework of task-based assessment, including the theories, factors and procedures of designing the test, which focuses on both meaning and form, both reliability and validity. And a lot of task-based language assessments, which result from the considerations of the close relationships between SLA and LT, have been conducted to investigate the interfaces and to guide task-based language teaching and research, and new directions have been proposed for our further research. 3.3

The present research on the interfaces between SLA and LT and the development outlook in China

In China, with the development of teaching and testing theories and practice, people are more and more aware of the problems existing in the teaching and the testing processes, in which some of the problems have already been affecting the whole educational system and the students’ comprehensive development. And even though people attach importance to testing, they have little knowledge of testing theories, and even though they know the evaluation and selection functions of testing, they may reverse the relations between language testing and language teaching. The problems in the teaching, learning and testing processes are forcing researchers and educators to find new effective ways to solve the problems and smooth their relationship and achieve the optimum learning results.

Chen Jiliang & Kang Yan (2005) carried out a survey on the research papers done by Chinese scholars published on the five influential foreign language journals and found out that there are evident contributions from SLA to LT and LT to SLA, some of the researches have in fact covered contributions from both sides, in which 30.77% papers have intended to determine language competence (contributions from SLA to LT) (Wu Xudong & Chen Xiaoqing, 2000), 5.48% papers set up acceptable language competence models (contributions from LT to SLA) (Ma Guanghui & Wen Qiufang, 1999), while 19.18% papers in SLA used the LT statistic methods to testify the validity and reliability of SLA experiments (Wu Yi’an, 1993), 20.51% papers cover the individual learner variable differences in computerized adaptive testing (Zeng Yongqiang, 2002). However, most of the papers related seem to ignore the interfaces between SLA and LT, for example, the 5.48% papers about language competence have talked about the definition of language competence, but they fail to discuss it from the perspective of LT, nor to refer to any LT publications. The survey result has displayed that there are some improvements to Shohamy (2000) findings, but the reality is still dissatisfactory, most of the researches only refer to some of the aspects in the other. Han Baocheng (2003) illustrated the major concerns in task-based language assessment such as the alignment of task-based assessment with task-based instruction, positive “wash-back” effects of assessment practices on instruction, and the limitations of discrete skill assessment. The difficulties and complexities in designing a taskbased language assessment have forced language testers to reconsider many of the fundamental issues in SLA about what we want to assess, how we go about it and what sorts of evidence we need to provide in order to justify the ways in which we use our assessments (Han Baocheng, 2003), more researches have tried to analyze the authenticity and interactiveness of tasks in spoken English test in China, and the influence of computerized testing on the students’ perceptions of test and their performance, and investigation of students’ perceptions of multimedia testing (Kong Wen, 2012), as well as the effect of difficulty of multi-media task-based writing test on students’ performance (Zeng Lu & Wu Zhongjie, 2010). 4

THE INTERACTION AND INTERGRATION OF SLA AND LT

Considering the close relationship between SLA and LT, it is expected that the two disciplines will interact, share and contribute to each other. To investigate the interfaces between SLA and LT,

363

ICIEES_Book.indb 363

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

multi-perspective researches have been conducted. Bachman (1989) proposed three potential interfaces between SLA and LT based on the considerations of the experiment design and research methods, they are the covariance structure analysis of Ex post facto correlational data, qualitative investigation of test-taking processes, and the development of LT based on developmental sequences in SLA. Recognizing that taking a language test involves a complex set of interactions between the factors like testing environment, test input, the response expected of the test taker, and the test taker’s own language abilities, personal characteristics, and cognitive processes, LT researchers have begun to examine more closely the processes involved in test taking. Meanwhile, SLA researchers have been exploring alternative approaches to assessing language abilities that are based on SLA developmental considerations (Bachman, 1998:177–192). A book entitled “Interfaces Between Second Language Acquisition and Language Testing Research” (Bachman & Cohen, 1998) has discussed the nature of the relationship between the two fields and provides insightful analysis of the relationship between LT and SLA from various perspectives: besides the general perspective of the interfaces between the two disciplines (Bachman, 1998) and the possible relationship (Shohamy, 1998), there are construct definition and validity inquiry of SLA research (Chapelle, 1998), the inter-language variations and its implications for LT (Tarone, 1998); the use of strategies and processes of test taking (Cohen, 1998); the relationship between rating scales and SLA (Brindley, 1998); and testing method in context-based second language research (Douglas, 1998). The conclusion drawn from the papers is that there is room for more cooperation between the two fields and that these can lead to benefits for both (Shohamy, 2000:542).

ability, the roles of cognitive strategies and processes, the roles of task characteristics (Bachman, 1998:22–27). There is a strong need for two disciplines with common goals to co-operate their interdisciplinary research. Even though as two disciplines, SLA and LT can benefit from and learn from each other, and develop in parallel. We can take the general recursive route of research: we begin from the hypothesis from SLA, then testify or falsify by LT methods and explain the hypothesis from SLA and discover the potential problems. As Shohamy (2000) has found out, for language testers, they need to broaden and update the scope and views of testing from psychometric and statistical approaches and from tests to different types of assessment procedures, and construct LT theories that are based on current views of SLA theories by assessing more components of language, such as interlanguage variation, language processing, pragmatics, and aspects that address the context, complexity and dynamics of language, there will also be more approaches to LT need to be determined not only by theories of language abilities but mostly by what learners actually do and how they process language, language testers should also involve test-takers in decisions about the type of assessment procedures they feel comfortable with and be more attuned to educational context. Meanwhile, SLA researchers should be aware of and informed about the work of language testers and the relevance of LT to SLA researches, where and how research in LT can be useful and relevant. More importantly, both sides can involve the theories and experiences of the other in their own practical research and do the interdisciplinary investigations to enrich the theories and practice for both sides recursively.

5

REFERENCES

CONCLUSION

After the related researches to establish the interfaces between SLA and LT (Buchman, 1989; Buchman & Cohen, 1998), there is no essential progress, as researchers are still turning to the perspectives and methods in their own field, while ignoring the developments or lacking of knowledge in the other, and there is no real communication between the two. Hopefully, both SLA and LT researches are taking steps to work together to enhance the interfaces, besides the framework of potential contributions (Shohamy, 2000), Bachman (1998) proposed several directions for our further research, such as the characterizing of authenticity and the nature of language use tasks, the development of L2

[1] Bachman, L. 1990/1999. Fundamental Considerations in Language Testing, Oxford University Press. Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press. [2] Bachman, L. 1996/1999. Language Testing in Practice, Oxford University Press. Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press. [3] Bachman, L. 1998/2002. Second Language Acquisition and Language Testing Research, Cambridge University Press. Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press. [4] Bachman, L. 2002. Some Reflections on Taskbased Language Performance, Language Testing, 19:453–476. [5] Bachman, L. & Cohen A. (eds.). 1989. Interface between Second Language Acquisition and Language Testing Research. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

364

ICIEES_Book.indb 364

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

[6] Ellis, R. 2003. Task-based Language Learning and Teaching, Oxford University Press. [7] Ellis, R. 1985/1999. Understanding Second Language Acquisition, Oxford University Press. Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press. [8] Shohamy, E. 2000. The relationship between language testing and second acquisition, revisited, System, 28:541–553. [9] Chen Jiliang, Kang Yan. 2005. The Interfaces Between Second Language Acquisition And Language Testing, Foreign Language Research, 4:100–104. [10] Han Baocheng. 2003. On Task-based language assessment, Foreign Language Teaching and Research, 5:352–358. [11] Kong Wen & Wang Shuqiong. 2012. Students’ perceptions of multimedia testing. Foreign Language Testing and Teaching, 2:52–57.

[12] Ma Guanghui & Wen Qiufang. 1999. Researches on the factors influencing university students’ writing abilities, Foreign Language Teaching and Research, 4:34–39. [13] Wu Yi’an. 1998. What do tests of listening comprehension test?—a retrospection study of EFL testtakers performing a multiple-choice task, Language Testing, 1:21–44. [14] Yang Huizhong. 1999. Language testing and language teaching, Foreign Language World, 1:16–25. [15] Zeng Lu & Wu Zhongjie. 2010. The difficulty of multi-media task-based writing test and its influence on EFL writing,Computer-Assisted Foreign Language Education, 1:48–51. [16] Zeng Yongqiang. A Preliminary Study on Individualized Self-adaptive testing, Foreign Language Teaching and Research, 4:278–282.

365

ICIEES_Book.indb 365

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

The dilemma faced by rural migrant workers from China midwest areas with their return-home entrepreneurship and the countermeasures analysis—example Hunan Province Yufei Zhou Business School of Hunan Agricultural University, Changsha, Hunan, China

ABSTRACT: It a strong impetus to the local economic development and urbanization for the rural migrant workers to start business in their hometown. Nevertheless, there are many difficulties and problems in the process of the return-home entrepreneurship. The relevant government departments should take series measures so as to make a better business environment for the migrant workers and keep the sustained growth of the entrepreneurial trends, such as supporting different industries in different areas; relaxing the limit for loan or increasing financing ways; strengthening infrastructure construction; providing multi-faceted training to migrant workers, etc. Keywords: Return-home Entrepreneurship; Entrepreneurial Support; Entrepreneurial Economy; Migrant Workers Entrepreneurship 1

are 320 people chose ‘thought of it, but not the right time’. Which shows the trend of return-home entrepreneurship is still in the initial formation, most rural workers are prefer to work outside their hometown.

THE CURRENT SITUATION OF THE MIGRANT WORKERS ENTREPRENEURSHIP IN HUNAN PROVINCE

Hunan province lies in the south central of China, with Jiangxi province in the east, Chongqing municipality and Guizhou province in the west, Guangdong province and Guangxi Autonomous Region in the south and Hubei province in the north. There are 13 prefecture-level cities and one autonomous prefecture in this province, the resident population is 6638.9 million. It is a typical labor-exporting province, which has the net outflow population of 541 million in 2012. During the summer vocation, we made a questionnaire survey on the current situation of the migrant workers’ entrepreneurship in Hunan Province. We got 680 valid questionnaires from the total of 750 issued. Follows the basic situation: 1.1

The migrant workers have a strong sense of entrepreneurship, but with many apprehensions

We received 680 valid questionnaires about the willingness of entrepreneurship in the survey, there are 105 people, only 14% of the respondents have no intention of starting their own business. Most of the respondents have different levels of entrepreneurial intentions, among them, 80 people have already had their own business. However, there

1.2

Return-home entrepreneurship concentrated in townships with relatively good conditions

The entrepreneurs have a strong dependence on natural resources, so they generally select the counties or townships which relatively have transportation and location advantages as their entrepreneurial places. 1.3

At a small-scale, the business is difficult to form an aggregation effect

The vast majority of migrant workers generally choose small micro-enterprises and individual enterprises as the avenues of entrepreneurship, which lack driving effect and adsorption of labor resources. 1.4

The return-home entrepreneurial opportunities are confined

According to the survey, the entrepreneurship focused on aquaculture, processing industry, small industry and mining, food services, transportation, etc. with a small scale, a weak ability to withstand market risks, with lack of development poten-

367

ICIEES_Book.indb 367

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

tial and lack of attraction to migrant workers’ returning. 2

2.1

THE MAIN FACTORS THAT INFLUENT RURAL MIGRANT WORKERS’ RETURN-HOME ENTREPRENEURSHIP

2.3

Not enough publicity, migrant workers know insufficiently about return-home business preferential policies of local government

In the survey, we found that up to 52.21% people indicated that they did not know whether the government had introduced policies to encourage the return-home entrepreneurship, only 14.71 percent of the people believe that some policies play a role in certain degree for entrepreneurs. Visible, entrepreneurial preferential policies of local government is not propagated enough, there is no depth to the masses, which restricts the migrant workers’ returning home entrepreneurship enthusiasm. 2.2

Government’s efforts to implement the policies are inadequate

The survey shows only 38.81% people are aware there are entrepreneurship parks in their hometown, which inflected that although the local government attached great importance to migrant workers’ return-home business, and introduced great intensity encouragement policies, it still has some problems in the implementation of policies when they are specifically executed. A specific and detailed publicity progress is needed. We acknowledged in the investigation in Luxi County that the local government planned to build a trading center in Baisha town of the county city, in which they

Table 1. The situation of return-home entrepreneurial policy publicity. Whether know the local business park

Yes

No

Not sure

Number of people Proportion

260 38.81%

290 43.28%

120 17.91%

Table 2.

are rebuilding about 1000 shops for the migrant workers to start their business. However, the trading center is not rationally used due to the relevant supporting measures are not put in place, and some of the policies cannot be implemented sufficiently. Entrepreneurial funding sources

As to the entrepreneurial funding, a total 63.1% of respondents said they mainly come from their parents, relatives and friends, only 5% of them from the government entrepreneurial funds. The survey also found that most of the early entrepreneurs had encountered financing problems. With the expansion of the scale of their business, the problems must be resolved through the help of financial and credit institutions. Nevertheless, the county financial institute loans are reluctant to lend funds to the entrepreneurs who have uncertain futures, lacking of security of returnees subject to a variety of factors, such as risk aversions. Coupled with complex procedures, high costs, funding difficulties is still the biggest obstacle hindered the rural entrepreneurs. We interviewed 50 aquaculture industries in Rucheng County, only 15 among them expanded their scale through loans from financial institutions, the rest can only survive or get slow development through other means. Can be seen, the entrepreneur’s financial support is an urgent problem to be solved. 2.4

The relatively low caliber of migrant workers

In the survey, the proportion of education level with junior high school and below up to 43.7 percent, college and above only 28.15 percent; 68.4% of people did not participate in entrepreneurship training, 58.8% of them did not participate in any technical training. Many of the entrepreneurs have low caliber, who are not sufficiently prepared to face the various problems came up in the entrepreneurship and are weak to deal with marketing risks, they cannot make timely sensitive responses to the interference of the outside world. The problem may be less obvious in the early days, while as the company developed to a certain scale, the problem would ensue. Entrepreneurs’ comprehensive

Radiation effect of entrepreneurship park.

Policy publicity

No relevant policy

Not sure there’s any policy

Heard of but don’t know exactly

Known but don’t see the preference

Some of the policies are helpful

Number Proportion

100 14.71%

255 37.50%

190 27.94%

35 5.15%

100 14.71%

368

ICIEES_Book.indb 368

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

Table 3.

Entrepreneurial funding sources.

Entrepreneurial funding sources

Parents

Relatives

Friends

Bank

Government

Number of people Proportion

110 21.36%

140 27.18%

75 14.56%

165 32.04%

25 4.85%

Table 4.

Education levels of respondents.

Education level

Primary school

Junior high school

Senior middle school

College

Undergraduate and above

Number Proportion

80 11.85%

215 31.85%

190 28.15%

140 20.74%

50 7.41%

quality has become one of the major constraints for enterprises to grow. 3

3.1

COUNTERMEASURES AND SUGGESTIONS ON SUPPORTING RURAL MIGRANT WORKERS’ RETURN-HOME ENTREPRENEURSHIP IN MIDWEST AREAS Government should expand publicity efforts of preferential policies for return-home entrepreneurship

We learn from the survey that most people are not sure whether there are any preferential policies for entrepreneurship, which would cause a slow growth of the number of return-home entrepreneurs. However, if the government can be act as a promoter, a guide, to help more and more people to be aware of these policies, it will, to a certain extent, spark the entrepreneurial-minded people a passion for entrepreneurship, and help them to be more explicit on the pros and cons of entrepreneurial policies for various sectors at the choice of direction, to select a best entrepreneurial orientation. 3.2

Local government should take into account the entrepreneurs’ practical difficulties; focus on supporting different industries in different regions according to the actual situations

The development of large-scale farming sector is not practical in Hunan Province due to many parts of the province are located in hilly areas. Therefore, to encourage the development of local characteristic agriculture such as planting Ponkan and other crops can provide entrepreneurial opportunities for migrant workers at home and solve the problem of the return migrant workers’ employment and entrepreneurship in situ, so as to achieve a reasonable division of labor in industrial

development, thus making contribution to rural industrial structure adjustment. There are numerous of typical examples in this survey. Such as PU Shi town Wang Xi Village, combined with the practical organization of migrant workers based on their own characteristics development of different industries, had walked out of their own local characteristics agricultural road. According to preliminary rough statistics, the village is currently featured farmers over 10 households (of which there are 4 large), rice tobacco growers more than 40 households, 20 households in other industries, the private processing enterprises 2, more than 500 migrant workers in this village have basically started their business at the gate of their home. With rural economy developed, the farmers’ surplus, the whole village witnesses a vibrant scene. 3.3

Financial loan institutions should appropriately lower the threshold and try to expand the financing channels

Various financial services need to increase credit support to migrant workers’ return-home entrepreneurship, and appropriately reduce the requirement to meet more people’s needs for funds as well. The local government should expand the pilot of new rural financial institutions to explore the guiding of private financing, try to establish public financial foundation for entrepreneurs, to give different degrees of support in different industries and different stages of development finance and credit companies depending on the actual situations of different places; broaden the Rural Microfinance and guaranteed loans coverage, lower thresholds and counter-guarantee mortgage standards, the implementation of home business loan discount system; focus on discount given to migrant workers’ return-home entrepreneurs loans; lower discount approval criteria and give priority discount to the migrant workers

369

ICIEES_Book.indb 369

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

founded enterprises which in line with the conditions of agricultural industrialization discount; loan discount priority given to poverty alleviation projects which established in poor areas by migrant workers and in line with the conditions of poverty alleviation loan discount. 3.4

The government should implement entrepreneurial guidance; strengthen the training of entrepreneur skills

Migrant workers should be well organized to receive business skills training to improve their management levels. The Government provides migrant workers with free training of entrepreneurship, and establishes service centers based on the existing entities for them where the conditions permitted; freely provides project information, entrepreneurial guidance, small loans and politic advice, etc. so as to improve their management levels; help them develop business ideas to make their enterprises bigger and stronger. Investigation found that the some local governments, to encourage migrant workers’ entrepreneurship, regularly carry out various kinds of skills training for them every year and help some workers to establish constant contact with relevant experts and technical personnel to provide the necessary technical supports, turned out to be very good results. For the instance of Shimen Ponkan, with long-term guidance and training of experts and technical personnel, many migrant workers not only became large-scale Ponkan grower but also drove many other Pankan growers out of poverty, with the result that Pankan has now become an agricultural industry brand of Shimen. Therefore it is really an effective way to problem-solving for returned migrant workers to strengthen the entrepreneurial skills training, improve the quality of training, carry out training bases construction in the places where the conditions allowed.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This article is a phased research of the following: Research on Youth Project of National Social Science Fund (12CGL018), Research on the Coupling Mechanism between Migrant Workers’ Entrepreneurship and the New Country Culture Construction, Hunan Provincial Situation and Decision-making Consultation (2012ZZ94), Problems and Countermeasures Research on Entrepreneurship and Education of Returned Migrant Workers in Hunan Province. ABOUT THE AUTHOR Zhou Yufei, Male, MA, Lecturer of Business School of Hunan Agricultural University. REFERENCES [1] Wu Bi-bo. 2013. Present Situation and Countermeasures on Migrant Worker Returning Home for Business to Promote New Rural Construction Research of Agricultural Modernization January. [2] Chen Binhua. 2011. Present Situation and Countermeasure on Migrant Workers Returning Home entrepreneurship Journal of Dalian Normal University January. [3] Zhu Honggen, Kang Lanyuan. 2013. Migrant workers entrepreneurial motivation and empirical analysis of the impact on entrepreneurial performance— based on 438 samples of migrant workers home business of 15 counties in Jiangxi Province, Nanjing Agricultural University (Social Science Edition), September. [4] Zhou Yufei. 2009. Rational thinking on support college students going home for entrepreneurial under the perspective of Scientific Concept of Development, The Journal of Yunnan Provincial Committee School of CPC, September.

370

ICIEES_Book.indb 370

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Reform and exploration of college computer experiment teaching Yanrong Shi School of Computer Science and Technology, Shandong Institute of Business and Technology, Yantai, China Key Laboratory of Intelligent Information Processing in Universities of Shandong, Shandong Institute of Business and Technology, Yantai, China

ABSTRACT: The computer experiment teaching is a necessary step to verify the theory of classroom teaching, is an important way to cultivate students’ practical ability, innovation ability and team spirit of cooperation. Aiming at the existing problems in the computer experiment teaching, we carried out to study and practice the teaching reform of computer experiments from several aspects, and achieved certain results. Keywords: 1

Computer experiment teaching; College teaching reform; Different levels

INTRODUCTION

At present, some employers generally think students’ practical ability is not strong, the overall quality is not high, and a far from the employer’s expectations. Investigating its reason, main point is in our practice teaching. Computer experiment course is a very practical course, is the key link in the cultivation of students’ practical ability, analysis and problem solving ability, innovation ability. As an important part of the teaching system of computer specialty, experimental teaching is very important in the whole teaching process. In recent years, in our computer experiment teaching, discipline construction as guide, laboratory construction as an opportunity, according to the professional situation, learning from other college experience, we have done some exploration and practice of computer experiment teaching from the aspects of experiment teaching content and methods, which have effectively improved the quality of teaching, and made good teaching effect. 2

THE EXISTING PROBLEMS IN COMPUTER EXPERIMENT TEACHING

At present, major universities in our country pay more attention to computer theoretical teaching. As a key link in the teaching system of computer specialty, both from the teaching content, mode or hours, experimental teaching has not been paid enough attention. Most universities are not aware of the importance of experimental teaching to improve the quality of talent. Based on the theory of teaching, students will accept what the teachers

teach, lacking of initiative, innovation and learning. The mode of experimental teaching is old aiming to verify theoretical teaching. The content of experimental teaching is single, boring. Students often copy, haven’t form a global understanding to the problem. It is not conducive to the cultivation of students’ comprehensive ability and innovation ability. Almost every computer courses have corresponding experimental course, laboratory task is heavy, experimental hours are insufficient, so unable to let students do the experiment which is not completed within class in extra-curricular extension. In addition, some dangerous or destructive experiment can’t be made in computer, and some pioneering experiments can’t be opened. The assessment method in teaching is single, assessment content completely confined to the textbook knowledge. Lack of a comprehensive investigation on the students’ knowledge structure and practical skills, enable students to develop bad learning habits, and ultimately form strange phenomenon of high scores low capacity. Many students do not do preparation before the experiment, do not consider what data structure to use, or which algorithm to choose, until went to the lab, they improvised written source code, compiled and run immediately, then found a lot of mistakes, did not get the results they want. 3

REFORM AND EXPLORATION OF COMPUTER EXPERIMENTAL TEACHING

According to existing problems in computer experiment teaching, at present, we carried out the reform from the following aspects.

371

ICIEES_Book.indb 371

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

3.1

3.3

Change the concept, lay emphasis on experimental teaching and recognize the value of the experimental teaching

Establish an open experimental teaching system

Whether the schools, teachers or students, should correct thoughts, place the computer experimental teaching equally important to the computer theory teaching. Experimental teaching is no longer the courses supplement, or to verify the theoretical teaching, experimental teaching itself should be as an important aspect of teaching, appropriate to increase the number of hours of experiment course, to highlight the status of experimental in the computer teaching.

In the view of the present situation of few experimental hours for students, rational integrate experimental teaching resources, realize to open laboratory. Students can experiment booking through the network, can also search the time of laboratory opening by Internet. The running mechanism of opening laboratory can increase the degrees of freedom of the students on experiment, so that students can use their spare time to finish the experiment, at the same time to train the students’ autonomous learning ability.

3.2

3.4

Set up different levels of innovative experiment

Different from that previous experimental projects are mostly single theory of teaching content validation experiments, we divide the experiments into basic experiments and comprehensive experiments. Basic experiments are relatively small experiments, mainly is to let students understand the relevant concept and grasp the basic algorithms for them. Each basic experiment is combined with the actual level of the students to develop, moderate difficulty. Comprehensive experiments combine the experiment with theory and practice, the purpose is to make students learn how to use the classroom knowledge to solve practical problems. So, they are much more complex than basic experiments and more close to the actual. For example, the course of data structure, teachers can select application of various data structures in the actual development, such as student achievement management, parking management, maze solving, etc. Considering the different level of the students, we divide the experiment contents into compulsory and elective part. Students can select experiment through network. Students who have completed elective experiment will be given appropriate points. Since we provide multi-level experimental ladder for students to choose, students can complete the basic experiment, and then gradually do some higher level experiments. This step by step teaching mode avoid the situation of the students can’t start. In selecting the experimental project, we should pay attention to cultivating students’ interest in learning, try to set up some interesting questions, for example, the monkey king election, backgammon, etc. It can arouse the curiosity of the students and fully mobilize the enthusiasm of the students. At the same time, considering the connection between the courses, several related courses can be combined together to make a big design course, such as database and object oriented programming, which helps the students to understand the whole course system.

Standardize experimental evaluation mechanism

Change the single evaluation method that given score only according to the experimental result, and pay attention to attitude, experimental process, the ability of analyzing and solving problem and the experimental results. Integrated a variety of factors together determine the students’ experimental score. After each experiment, teachers assess the experiment score according to the experimental report, the quality of experiment and the students’ performance in experiment. At the end of the semester the grade of this course is the average value for each experimental score. 3.5

Do well in experiment preparation

From the teacher’s point of view, primary is to design experiment plan and pre experiment. Necessarily descript the experimental process, predict problems that may come along in the experimental, pre experiment, discover frequent problems in the experiment, so to find solutions to the problems. The teacher should give the task ahead of time, and give the necessary reference. The requirements of the students is to preview the experiment contents in advance, clear tasks, access to relevant information, advance write source code, familiar with the operating steps and essentials. 3.6

Bring competition mechanism into the experimental teaching

We advocate students to participate actively in the competition of various disciplines, especially in some professional field of well-known competition, such as the ACM contest, the national mathematical modeling contest, electronic design competition. In the actual design of the course, we refer to the requirements of the competition divide the students into groups. Starting from solving simple problems, require each group to complete

372

ICIEES_Book.indb 372

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

several design of increasing difficulty, and write a detailed code and summary report. In the training process, encourage students to achieve different scheme on the same topic. Through the approach of promoting teaching by competition and learning combined game, not only exercise the student thought, but also enhance their team spirit and innovation ability. 3.7

Hand in business, establish training bases

We have the spirit of complementary advantages, resource sharing, mutual benefit and common development, has established the long-term cooperation with Foxconn and other enterprises. School-enterprise cooperation, create innovative practice base, perfect the curriculum system construction, effectively improve students’ practical ability, and lay a solid foundation for students to go to work smoothly. 3.8

Bring virtualization technology into experimental teaching

Almost every computer course has a corresponding experiment, some strong operational course we carry out teaching while practice, class directly open in the laboratory, so the laboratory undertakes heavy task, there is very little time to free and open to students. In recent years, although the school has invested a lot of money for the laboratory construction, but the rapid development of computer technology, for the frontier with great experimental demand, still do not have enough money to buy equipment. In addition, some experimental content with a certain dangerous or destructive, causing the experiment could not be opened. The virtual machine created by VMware virtualization technology, can be just as real as the operation of computer. Not only can save the cost, save energy and reduce consumption, but also can as scheduled set up the experiment which cannot be opened before. 3.9

Strengthen the construction of experiment teaching team

Computer experiment teaching should not only let students learn how to measure several experimental data or simple verification, more important is to let the students establish the concept

of a system, cultivate their ability to analyze and solve problems, improve their ability of Engineering practice. This requires that teachers should not only have a strong theoretical knowledge, but also have very strong practical ability. Therefore, we must strengthen the construction of experimental teachers. The experiment teachers best with practical work experience in IT companies, which will ensure the implementation of the teaching reform of computer experiment course fundamentally. To the end, we introduce several highly educated, high-level talents once worked in the well-known IT enterprises for many years, at the same time, also regularly send young teachers to related enterprise training. 4

CONCLUSIONS

After several years of continuous exploration, computer experimental teaching reform in our college has achieved initial success. From the experimental process we can see the students’ practical ability and innovative ability have improved. Students repeated success in the ACM contest, students Qilu software design competition, electronic design contest, mathematical modeling competition and other competitions. Graduates of our school obtained the employer’s approval, the employment rate increased year by year. REFERENCES [1] Hu Xiang-hai, 2012. Computer experimental teaching reform scheme in college, journal of educational institute of jilin province, Vol. 28, No. 06, 69–70. [2] Liu Lun, 2013. The reform and research of open computer experimental teaching, Computer Education, No.2, 100–102. [3] Lu Yao, Fan Xue-song, Ding Wan-dong, 2013. Construction of Computer Technology Platform for Practice Teaching, research and exploration in laboratory,Vol. 32, No.10, 457–460. [4] Tang Xue-jun, 2013. Application of virtual technology in computer experiment teaching, Higher Education, No. 9, 163–165. [5] Yu Xiao-ming, Shen An-dong, 2010. Exploration and Practice of the Experimental Teaching Innovation of Computer, Research and Exploration in Laboratory, Vol. 29, No. 4, 83–85.

373

ICIEES_Book.indb 373

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Urban poor and housing affordability in Malaysia A. Md. Yusof, C.S. Chai & J. Johan Universiti Teknologi Malaysia, Johor Bahru, Johor, Malaysia

ABSTRACT: Urban poor is related to capability, social exclusion, participation and consensus, human rights and best visualized as a relative to accessibility of house ownership. An increasing need for housing especially in the urban area is driven by urbanization and industrialization. This in turn creates high demand which pressures prices in the event of supply scarcity. Therefore, this study is aiming to examine the housing affordability level of the people in Kuala Lumpur. Questionnaire survey is conducted rand to 939 respondents randomly in Kuala Lumpur. The result from the computation of housing index using median house price and median income exhibits severe housing unaffordable among urban poor and those in risk of becoming poor. To ease this acute affordability, the provision of houses in the City should concentrates on the building of lower and affordable houses. Keywords: 1

Housing; Affordability; Index and Malaysia

INTRODUCTION

According to UNICEF, urban growth and urbanization had shown a rapid growth in the country for the past 10 years. Urbanization reflects the transformation of national economy with growing population moving to cities for better employment and productivity increment. As more than half of the nation populations now are living in urban centre, there is a growing interest of sustainable development in urbanization. Although rapid urban growth has brought economic benefits to the nation, there has been an upsurge absolute number of urban poor because most of the nation’s wealth was used to serve the minority group of people (Satterthwaite, 2007; UNFPA, 2009; World Bank, 2009; Cecilia, 2012). Housing has been one of the basic needs for every human being. The right to housing is stated in The Universal Human Right Declaration and the Rio Habitat Agenda. As a result, housing has been investigated around the world upon which the central of the housing problems lie in three main sources: price, affordability and ownership. Home ownership is part of the government strategies to eradicate poverty and redistribute income particularly among low income people. Aminah and Chai (2012) suggest that in respect to housing, urban poor is best represented as a denial of the right to house ownership. This is due to the incapability to pay, as income obtained is relatively low at the time and place where they belong to. This paper critically analyses the affordability problem among urban poor in the city of Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia.

The paper computes affordability index for the City of Kuala Lumpur segmented by income and age group. Based on the information gathered in the survey, the indexes picture the reality of housing affordability in the city. The paper begins with a review on urban poor, housing and affordability which provides better understanding on the issue under investigation. 2

URBAN POOR AND HOUSING AFFORDABILITY

2.1 Urban poor In Malaysia, the economic growth is driven by the rapid expansion of industrialization process. Industrialization created a lot of opportunities. It also attracted a huge influx of people from non-urban areas. The statistics show that the annual urban growth is 4.9% as compared to overall growth of 2.3% nationally from 1970 to 2000. It is estimated that 60% of the population are in the urban area. Urbanization introduces a new dimension of poor that is urban poverty. Poor people in the city may earn greater cash income but perhaps unstable and inadequate to attain certain basic needs especially when considering high cost of living. Poverty has been a worldwide social phenomenon which is caused by a number of structural factors. Its nature extends beyond not possessing money to quench materialistic needs to inadequate resources that preclude them from having a standard of living which is expectable nationally. The working class

375

ICIEES_Book.indb 375

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

which possesses money but is unable to own basic needs such as housing, forms the urban poor. Le Breton et al., (1996) suggest that urban poverty still occurs in Malaysia. The urban poverty problem becomes more complex with an increase of income inequalities among inter-ethnic, intra ethnic and inter sector. According to the Department of Statistic, Economic Planning Unit (2008), the average monthly household income in Malaysia is RM3686. 57.8% of the families are members of this group and 29.3% are above average. This shows that the majority of families in Malaysia are falling under poverty line. However, Malaysia is classified as an upper middle income group ($3,976–$12,275) by World Bank Country Income Classification. Another poverty line has also been proposed by the City Hall of Kuala Lumpur. The City Hall uses RM3000 per month as poverty line; hence those who earn less than RM3000 per month in Kuala Lumpur are considered as poor. 2.2

Housing affordability

Urban poor may further resulted in the denial of basic need such as housing. It is government’s responsibility to ensure that every citizen is given an opportunity to decent housing. Housing has been main agenda in all 5 years Malaysian Plan. The 10th Malaysian Plan is targeted to provide adequate, comfortable, quality and affordable housing with comprehensive facilities and conducive environment. This helps to enhance the sustainability of the quality of life; enhancing the capability and accessibility of the people to own or rent houses; and setting future direction to ensure the sustainability of the housing. Affordability is referring to the ability of a person in providing something, which is usually referred to his ability in financial terms. Affordable housing is used to illustrate residential units that total housing costs are deemed affordable to those with median income. Anirban et al., (2006) mentioned that house affordability is a condition when people have the potential to save certain portion of their income to buy a house, as well as to pay for other expenditures in their working period. Affordability is mainly defined by the relationship between household’s housing expenditure and income. The study shows the percentage share of housing transactions by price range in Malaysia. It reveals that houses below MYR200000 are most frequently transacted. The shares are equally distributed between houses ranging between MYR250000–MYR300000. It is observed that in 2007 and 2008, there was an increase in share of transaction for houses up to MYR500000. For example, in 2008, share for houses MYR250000– MYR500000 was 12.27%.

It can be concluded that the affordable houses amongst Malaysians are those that cost less than MYR200000. Any attempt to deliver houses which are beyond affordability may fail to meet the objective, for instance, plans such as PR1MA and My First Home Scheme. Failure to carefully identify the need and willingness of the potential buyers could be one of the major factors leading to the failures. 2.3

Housing market in Malaysia

In the view of rising house price, The National House Buyers Association (HBA) had warned that the entire young generation of being locked out of the property market due to upsurge of house prices. Property prices in urban areas such as Kuala Lumpur and Penang rose to 40% in 2010 due to low interest and speculative buying. It is also evident that the property price jumped 5.9 times in 1989 to 10.9 times in 2010. This increase becomes a burden to young adults in property market whilst some of them were unswervingly falling into the urban poor category. Current Kuala Lumpur residential property is about MYR485000 which is roughly 9 times the average urban household annual income of MYR54000. Based on Bank Negara’s (Central Bank) guidelines, the loan repayment should not exceed one-third of income. Whilst low income group is eligible for public housing, the medium income category is severely unaffordable to own a property. Thus the immediate

Figure 1.

Malaysia house price index.

Table 1. Demographia international housing affordability survey. Housing affordability rating categories Rating

Median multiple

Severely Unaffordable Seriously Unaffordable Moderately Unaffordable Affordable

5.1 & over 4.1 to 5.0 3.1 to 4.0 3.0 & under

376

ICIEES_Book.indb 376

4/3/2015 7:09:17 AM

response was the government’s intervention. Those earned above RM3000 per month are expected to be dragged into the poor category as far as home ownership is concerned. For City of Kuala Lumpur, those who earn less than RM3000 per month is considered poor as RM3000 is adapted as poverty line. The house price index as in figure 1 shows the increasing pattern of house price in Malaysia. The house price increment is much than the growth in income. This suggests that Malaysians may face housing affordability problem and the best to prove this is to use affordability index. Figure 2.

2.4

It is important to identify and adopt appropriate tool to measure the level of affordability. Median multiple (median house price divided by gross before tax annual median household income) is used to rate housing affordability. The Median Multiple is widely used for evaluating urban markets. It is recommended by the World Bank and the United Nations and is used by the Harvard University Joint Centre on Housing.

3

METHODOLOGY

The research utilized secondary data that revolves around macro-economic and housing. These include published data on income, economic growth, house price indices and other macro-economic data. Investigation is done with the survey on the targeted group; undertaken to reveal the dilemma and related issues. The methodology involved a review on the concept of poor, where poor has been extensively undertaken. The understanding on the matter was captured in a standard questionnaire and became the main mean of primary data collection. A questionnaire survey on the targeted group was carried out in Kuala Lumpur area. A total of 939 respondents aged between 20–35 years old were selected to participate in the survey. The respondents provided suitable cohort for house buyers or potential house buyers. The heterogeneity in connection with geography and isolation, race and ethnicity as reviewed explains that urban poverty is driven by various factors.

4 4.1

Income profile of respondents.

Afforability index

ANALYSIS AND DISCUSSION Income profile

The profile of income for the respondents is visualised in the following figure 2. The figure shows that majority of the respondents in the City of Kuala Lumpur are within poor

category as defined by the City Hall of Kuala Lumpur. The average for the respondents is around MYR2500 which confirm to the finding by BBC News Magazine that average monthly income for Malaysian is MYR2888 in 2012. The research reveals that in general, the affordability level for housing is less than 20% of their income. An analysis of the most frequently transacted houses shows that houses priced at less than RM200000 dominate the market. However, the survey indicates that the respondents are more willing to buy houses that cost less than RM100000. The analysis further concentrates on the computation of affordability index for the respondents. Two incomes; individual and household are considered. In general, the median income for respondents is MYR2250 and the median house price is MYR239397. As the formula below applied;

(HAI ) =

Median House Price Annual median In I come

The HAI is 8.87. As this compare to Table 1, it demonstrates severe level of unaffordability. In order to achieve the affordable index of 3.0, the price of houses affordable for the individual is MYR81000. As household income is considered, the HAI is 7.25 and the backward calculation indicates that the affordable house for these household is MYR99000. The attempt to show that affordability may worst among youngster is visualised by the computation of HAI according to age group. Median incomes for different age group are used together with median house price. The results are shown in Table 2. The above table shows the severely unaffordable occurs when the housing index is 5 and above. It is clear that the 21–25 and 26–30 years old groups are within severely unaffordable to buy houses within the median range of the market. Only group 31–35 years old is within seriously affordable to buy

377

ICIEES_Book.indb 377

4/3/2015 7:09:18 AM

Table 2. Housing Affordability Index (HAI) and Affordable Houses (AH). Individual

Household

Group

HAI

AH (MYR)

HAI

AH (MYR)

Overall 21–25 years 26–30 years 31–35 years

8.87 9.97 7.25 5.32

81000 72000 99000 135000

7.25 7.80 7.25 3.80

99000 92000 99000 190000

high price contributed to affordability problem. In this case, poor is not referred to insufficient income but the income available is insufficient to serve as mortgage to be paid. In order to minimise poor in relation to housing, the houses built or offered for sale unit must match with the capability of potential buyers. If houses built are beyond the reachable appropriate income group, the group will be considered as poor in term of access to housing. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

median price houses. In order to explore which houses are affordable by the respondents, the backward calculation is performed. The HAI of 3 is applied for each assuming that will be the most affordable state. The table shows that for individual income, the most affordable houses for all is of MYR81000. However, as age segments are applied, the affordable houses vary as shown in Table 2. The affordable houses are from MYR72000 to MYR135000. The calculation of HAI based on household income also exhibits similar pattern but with some improvement in the value of HAI. The median household income for all is MYR2750, MYR2750 and MYR5250 for group 21–25, 26–30 and 31–35 years old respectively. This slight improvement has not change the ‘severely unaffordable’ situation among respondents except for 31–35 years old segment. The above infers that affordability problem affected younger people most as compared to others. As youngsters are working and live up the city, their need and problem require serious attention. From the market analysis, the reluctance of private developers to come up with the lower price housing schemes implies that government must interfere in housing affordable provision. 5

CONCLUSION

This study shows that based on Housing Affordability Index developed, working group in the City of Kuala Lumpur is facing housing affordability problem. Limited income available for housing and

This research is funded by Research University Grant, University Technology Malaysia. REFERENCES [1] Anirban M, Francis, K.W. Wong, and Eddie, C.M. Hui. (2006), Relationship Between Housing Affordability And Economic Development In Main China: Case of Shanghai, Journal of Urban Planning and Development, 132(1), pp 62–70. [2] Aminah Md Yusof and Chai Chang Saar (2012), Relative Poor and Accessibility to Home Ownership in the City of Kuala Lumpur. International Conference on Social Science (ICSSS 2012) San Diego, United State of America. [3] Cecilia Tacoli (2012), Urbanization, Gender and Urban Poverty: Paid Work and Unpaid Carework in the City. International Institute for Environment and Development (IIED), Population and Development Branch, United Nations Population Fund (UNFPA), New York. [4] Economic Planning Unit (2008), Official Website of Economic Planning Unit. http://www.epu.gov.my/ en/the-malaysian-economy-in-figures-2008. [5] Le Breton, M., P. Moyes, and A. Trannoy (1996), Inequality Reducing Properties of Composite Taxation, Journal of Economic Theory, 69, pp71–103. [6] Satterthwaite, D. (2007), Climate Change and Urbanization: Effects and Implications for Urban Governance. United Nations Expert Group Meeting On Population Distribution, Urbanization, Internal Migration and Development, New York. [7] UNFPA Vietnam (2009), Recent change in the sex ratio at birth in Viet Nam, UNFPA, Hanoi. [8] World Bank (2009), World Development Report 2009: Reshaping Economic Geography, The World Bank, Washington DC.

378

ICIEES_Book.indb 378

4/3/2015 7:09:18 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Determination of optimal number of doctors and appointment interval for an appointment Thepparit Sinthamrongruk & Napat Harnpornchai Chiang Mai University, Muang, Chiang Mai, Thailand

ABSTRACT: This paper proposes an adaptive-penalty Genetic Algorithm (GA) as a solution tool for determining the optimal number of doctors and appointment interval in an appointment system. The appointment system belongs to the class of individual block/fixed interval. To reflect the uncertainty, the length of service time for doctor consultation, the time required for the laboratory tests, and the time deviating from the appointment time are modelled by random variables, and no-show patients are considered. Using the adaptive penalty scheme, optimization constraints are automatically and numerically handled. The optimization results from the adaptive-penalty GA are verified and in agreement with those from direct simulations. Keywords: Outpatient service; Individual block/fixed interval appointment system; Optimal number of doctors; Optimal appointment interval; Uncertainty; Adaptive-penalty Genetic Algorithm; MSC classification 65K99 1

INTRODUCTION

Healthcare plays a fundamental and essential role in daily life. Demanding on outpatient service is persistently high. It is thus necessary to provide needed medical personnel as well as facility to maintain a prescribed level of service requirement. From an economic point of view, cost of outpatient service has tendency of increasing every year whereas financial support to the service may not be able to cope with such an increasing cost. It is widely recognized that the utilization of an appointment system is a systematic and cost-effective way for outpatient service. The appointment system is expectedly to reduce the arrival variability and to increase the convenience of patients. Design of an appointment system is, therefore, of paramount importance in order to attain effective and efficient outpatient services under management constraints. A typical appointment system that has been globally used is the class of individual block/fixed interval [1]. Outpatient departments are often provided with a number of doctors. Liu and Liu [2] considered two to five doctors in their simulation study of block appointment systems. Yeon et al. [3] investigated the scheduling problem with multi-doctor sharing resources. Major problems, in providing satisfactory healthcare service, are the shortage of doctors and the lack of appropriate pre-specified appointment

interval for consulting outpatients. The doctor shortage is a direct result of the economic constraints on training new doctors, which takes time and is costly. Therefore, the optimal assignment of suitable doctors to each hospital is required thorough consideration. The appropriate appointment interval is still an interest issue because it can drastically affect the service quality [4]. Consequently, the optimal determination of number of doctors and appointment interval for an appointment system is a crucial aspect when designing or revising an appointment system. The research on appointment systems has received intensive attention since the pioneering work from Bailey [5]. A comprehensive review of the literature on appointment systems can be found in [1]. The appointment rule and the patient information are two main factors that are considered in the analysis and design of an appointment system. In the view of system analysis and design, the appointment rule represents the operational mechanism of the appointment system with the patient information as the system inputs. The appointment rule is characterized by its parameters including block size, initial block, appointment interval, time begin session, and time end session. The patient information includes their punctuality, presence status, need of second consultation, etc. The performance of an appointment system can be measured in various manners. The basic performance

379

ICIEES_Book.indb 379

4/3/2015 7:09:18 AM

measures consist of waiting time of patients, idle time of doctors, and overtime of doctors. The analysis of the performance of an appointment system has received perpetual attention since the pioneer work from Bailey [5]. Different appointment rules and their performance were studied, compared, and reported under various situations of outpatient services. Both analytical and simulation-based approaches were employed in the analysis [1]. Prospect appointment systems can be obtained from the comparative analysis of different appointment systems. Although the comparative analysis can inform which appointment system has best performance, it may not reveal whether the systems meet desirable performance. This depends heavily on whether or not the systems and their associated parameters that result in desirable performance are included in the comparative analysis. In other words, the comparative analysis may not recognize and thus overlook the systems and their associated parameters that render desirable performance. Such a drawback also occurs in the case that the decision on the type of appointment systems that have already been developed, i.e. fixed appointment rules, but only the selection of its parameters need to be carried out under the condition of producing desirable performance. Search for the appointment systems, i.e. the appointment rules and parameters that lead to desirable performance is thus another crucial issue. The search of such prospect systems can be carried out in terms of an optimization problem and is referred to as the optimal design of appointment systems. This paper investigates the issue of resource management, more specifically; it focuses on identifying the optimal number of doctors and appointment interval for an outpatient appointment system. The appointment system which is considered here is a typical system used in the hospitals in Thailand and belongs to the class of individual block/fixed interval [1]. Parallel number of doctors, i.e. multiple doctors, is assigned to the system. However, only the patients with the appointments will be exclusively considered, i.e. excluding patients without an appointment. Accordingly, the disturbance against the appointment times from such randomly walk-in patients is eliminated. The patient punctuality is defined in terms of the difference between the time of appointment and the time of patient arrival, which could be resulted in either lateness or earliness. The arrival times of the appointed patients can be random around the appointed times. Regarding the presence status of an appointed patient, it is possible that some patients will not actually show up for the appointments, i.e. no-show patients. As no-show cases are unavoidable, it is also incorporated into the

model of the appointment system. In addition, some patients require second consultation to the same doctors after their laboratory tests. The fact of multiple doctors, no-show patients, and second consultation is simultaneously considered with the objective to simulate real service situations. To reflect the uncertainty, the length of the service time for a doctor consultation, the time required for the laboratory tests, and the time deviating from the appointment time are modelled by random variables. The determination of optimal doctor numbers and the appointment interval is then formulated within the framework of an optimization problem with relevant constraints, i.e. this leads to a constrained optimization problem. The number of doctors and the appointment interval are two design variables, given an expected number of appointed patients. This type of problems can be viewed as a resource planning problem which is critical to the management subject to the scarcity of doctors and the limitation of financial budget. The problem aspect applies to the planning of new outpatient departments or the improvement of existing ones in which the human resource and supporting budget is a major concern. The number of doctors and the appointment interval need to be determined in such a way that the service can accommodate outpatients at desirable performance and constraint satisfaction. It should be noted that the problem aspect represents one in other possible alternatives for efficient and effective planning or improvement of outpatient service. Various techniques were employed in the optimal design of appointment systems. Fries and Marathe [6] used dynamic programming to determine the optimal block sizes for the next period given that the number of patients remaining to be assigned is known. Liao et al. [7] applied dynamic programming to determine the optimal block sizes when service times are Erlang. Liu and Liu [8] developed a dynamic programming formulation to find the optimal block sizes in their study on a queuing system with multiple doctors with random arrival times. Pegden and Rosenshine [9] applied a Markov-chain based procedure to compute the optimal appointment intervals. Robinson and Chen [10] formulated the problem of finding the optimal appointment times as a stochastic linear program and solved it using Monte-Carlo integration. Denton and Gupta [11] presented a two-stage stochastic linear programming model to determine the optimal appointment intervals. Vanden Bosch et al. [12] proposed a fathoming approach to solve the same problem as that of Liao et al. [7]. Kaandorop and Koole [13] introduced a local search procedure to determine the optimal schedule with a weighted average of expected waiting times of patients, idle time of the doctor and tardiness

380

ICIEES_Book.indb 380

4/3/2015 7:09:18 AM

as objective. Güler [14] solved the schedule assignments of the residents and the senior academic staff to outpatient clinics using a hierarchical goal programming. Although the aforementioned optimization techniques proved the capability in obtaining solutions, they could only be applied to specific types of problems. This paper proposes a versatile search technique which is flexible to a wide spectrum of optimization problems. The proposed technique is based on the Genetic Algorithm (GA) which is a class of global search techniques that are inspired by evolutionary theory in biological sciences [15]. GA encodes potential solutions in the problem on a simple chromosome-like data structure and applies recombination operators to these structures so as to preserve critical information [16]. GA is often used as a function optimizer [17–19]. The GA literature documents a large number of successful applications in a wide variety of different domains, e.g. manufacturing systems [20]. The success is due to the following three important features [16–19]. First, the nature of populationbased search and the use of probabilistic transition rules to direct the search evolution reduce the possibility of being trapped in local optima. Second, the required information for the operation of GA is only the numerical value of the objective function. Third, the functions to be optimized can be implicit, non-linear, non-differentiable, and noisy. GA is applied also in the area of healthcare management. A GA was proposed for solving the surgery scheduling problem by Wang et al. [21]. A GA for solving a multi-objective problem of scheduling of radiotherapy treatments for categorized cancer patients was described by Petrovic et al. [22]. A combination of simulation method with GA was used for adjusting the schedule of the nurses in a hospital emergency department by Yeh and Lin [23]. It can be seen from the previously mentioned literature that GA is only applied for the scheduling-type problems. In this paper, GA will be utilized for solving another different aspect of the healthcare management system, i.e. for determining optimal number of doctors and appointment interval. Since the considered problem involves a number of complicate optimization constraints, a GA that can handle multiple and complicate constraints are proposed as an optimization tool. The proposed GA is specifically referred to as an adaptive-penalty GA [24]. Such an adaptive-penalty GA has proved its high capability in handling complicate constraints in an effective and efficient manner [25]. The structure of the paper is given below. Section 2 presents the modelling of appointment system and definitions of terms relevant to system characteristics and performances. The description

of GA and its application to the optimal design towards desirable performances of appointment systems are described in Section 3. Section 4 conducts a numerical example to elucidate the methodology. The conclusion is finally drawn in section 5. 2 2.1

PROBLEM FORMULATION Definition of appointment system

The following definitions, characteristics, and rules are applied to the appointment system of present interest, i.e. the local hospitals in Thailand. 1. The appointment system is in the class of parallel individual block/fixed interval. 2. There are nD parallel doctors. It is assumed all doctors have same skills and knowledge. For a given number of patients Npatient, the patients will be distributed to each doctor as uniformly as possible. For example, when nD is 3 and Npatient is 18, the number of patients assigned to each doctor is equal to 6. However, when nD is 3 and Npatient is 20, two doctors take care of 7 patients and one doctor is responsible for 6 patients. The number of patients assigned to the jth doctor is denoted as NOj. 3. It is possible that an appointed patient may be absent. The absence probability of each patient is equally designated to pabs. 4. It is possible that an appointed patient can have laboratory tests. Each patient has an equal probability of having laboratory tests of plab. After the tests, that patient needs another consultation. The second consultation is considered as another additional appointment case under the same doctor. Accordingly, a patient who has laboratory tests creates two consultation cases. If the patient, who needs the second consultation, arrives at the doctor room before the appointed patient in the schedule, the secondtime patient is given a priority to see the doctor. Otherwise, the second-time patient can see the doctor after the appointed patient in the schedule has finished the consultation. In other words, the First-Come-First-Serve (FCFS) principle is used when there is the interruption in the original schedule from second-consultation patients. All present patients have at least one consultation, i.e. their first consultation cases. 5. Each doctor may have different number of appointment blocks. Each block consists of only one consultation case. NPj is the total number of consultation cases, including both first and second consultations, under the jth doctor. This number counts each second consultation as a case of treatment. Consequently, NP Pj ≥ NO j .

381

ICIEES_Book.indb 381

4/3/2015 7:09:19 AM

6. The appointment interval is denoted by Δtblock. The appointment time at the beginning of the ith appointment block is designated to ti. Without loss of generality, t1 is set equal to zero. 7. The office hour is ended at tf. The graphical representation of an appointment system is shown in Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 shows an appointment system belonging to a doctor. The system shown in Figure 1(a) does not include the no-show and second-consultation patients. Figure 1(b) depicts an appointment system with a no-show patient. Figure 1(c) includes both no-show and secondconsultation patients. It is noted that the original ranks of appointed patients have been changed due to the interference from the patients requiring second consultations. The ranks of the patients subjected to the change are expressed in a format of two numbers. For example, 13(12) means that this patient is originally at the 12th rank in the queue but is then shifted to the 13th rank because of the interference. Figure 2 represents an appointment system with multiple doctors, no-show patients, and patients requiring second consultations. The variables and terms that are related to the service and performance indices are below. Aij : Arrival time of the ith-block of consultation case (either first or second) under the jth doctor in the appointment system Lij : Length of service time for the ith-block of consultation case (either first or second) under the jth doctor in the appointment system

Figure 2. An appointment system with multiple doctors, no-show patients, and patients requiring second consultations.

Bij : Starting service time of the ith-block of consultation case (either first or second) under the jth doctor in the appointment system Eij : Ending service time of the ith-block of consultation case (either first or second) under the jth doctor in the appointment system The arrival time of each consultation case is classified into two types. For the first consultation case, the arrival time is related to the appointment time as follows: Aij

ti + Δ iij

(1)

where Δ ij is the time deviating from the appointment time ti. The deviation time can be random and thus treated as a random variable. The punctuality of an appointed patient is interpreted from the condition early arrival ⎧< 0 ⎪ Δ ij ⎨= 0 punctual arrival ⎪> 0 late arrival ⎩

(2.1)

When considering that the earliness or waiting prior to appointment time is not a consequence of the appointment system as in [1], then Δ ij is defined as ⎧= 0 early and punctual arrival Δ ij ⎨ late arrival ⎩> 0

(2.2)

For the second consultation case, the arrival time is given by Aij

Figure 1. A part of an appointment system for a doctor.

EFij TLij EF

(3)

382

ICIEES_Book.indb 382

4/3/2015 7:09:19 AM

where EFij is the ending service time after the first consultation and TLij is the time required for the laboratory tests of that patient, respectively. The ending service time after the first consultation can be computed from Eq. (5). The starting service time Bij is obtained from Bij

(

max Aij E i

j

);

i = 2, ..., NP Pj

(4.1)

The total waiting time corresponding to the service from the jth doctor Wj is NP Pj

Wj

The total waiting time in the appointment system WT is thus nD

WT

(A t )

B1j

1j

Bij + Lij

EF Fij = Eij

(6)

for its used in Eq. (3). It is noted that the length of service time Lij is separated into two cases in all mathematical expressions. In the first consultation case, the length of service time for the first consultation L1ij must be used for Lij, i.e. setting L1ij

WA =

2.2

(11)

nD

NP

NP ∑N

(12)

j

j =1

The overtime of the jth doctor OTj is obtained from OT Tj = max

(

E NPj j t f

)

(13)

where ENP,j is the ending service time of the last consultation case under the jth doctor. The definition of the jth-doctor overtime implies that there is no overtime if the doctor finishes the work before the office hour. The total overtime in the appointment system OTT is nD

OT TT = ∑ OTj

(14)

j =1

(7.1)

L 2ij

The average overtime for a doctor OTA is OT TA =

1 OT TT nD

(15)

(7.2) The jth doctor idle time incurred just before the arrival of the ith-block of consultation case (either first or second) is

Indices of system performance

In this section, the relevant performance indices will be defined. First, the waiting time Wij of the ith-block of consultation case (either first or second) under the jth doctor is Wij

1 WT N P nD

where

The second consultation case fixes the length of service time for the second consultation L2ij for Lij Lij

(10)

j

The average waiting time of a patient WA is

(5)

Lij is equal to zero if the ith-block patient under the jth doctor is absent or no-show. In addition, when the patient under consideration requires the second consultation and Eij corresponds to the ending service time after the first consultation, then Eij is further used as EFij for the computation of the arrival time for the corresponding second consultation case. That is

∑W j =1

(4.2)

1

which reflects the fact that the first patient to each doctor can have the healthcare service only after the starting office hour. The ending service time of each consultation case, i.e. first or second consultation, is defined as

Lij

(9)

ij

i =1

and

Eij

∑W

(0, B

ij

− Aij

)

IT Tij = max

(

Aij

Ei

j

);

i

2, , NP NPj

(16.1)

and

(8)

(

IT T1 j = max 0 A j t1

)

(16.2)

383

ICIEES_Book.indb 383

4/3/2015 7:09:20 AM

functions will be done in turn using the probabilistic measures as well.

The total idle time of the jth doctor ITj is ⎧ NPPj Tij ⎪ ∑ IT ⎪ i =1 IT Tj = ⎨ NPP j ⎪ Tij + OT Tj ⎪∑ IT ⎩ i =1

; OT Tj ≥ 0

2.3

Optimization problems in design of appointment system

(17) ; OTj < 0

The inclusion of the overtime term into the computation of the total idle time suggests that the free time of the doctor before the end of the office hour be considered as an idle time as well. The total idle time in the appointment system ITT is

Optimization problems that appear in context of designing an appointment system include constrained and unconstrained optimization problems. Optimization problems generally aim at maximization or minimization of objective functions. The constrained optimization problem for maximizing an objective function is expressed as Maximize O ( x )

nD

IT TT = ∑ ITj j =1

Subject to g1 ( x ) ≤ 0

(18)

(21) (22.1)

… The average idle time for a doctor ITA is 1 IT TA = IT TT nD

g j ( x) ≤ 0 (19)

It is noted that the performance indices as defined above can be combined in a various ways to establish the performance functions of the appointment system. As an example, the performance of an appointment system is measured through the expected total cost of appointment system E[CT] as defined by E [CT ] = cW E [WT ] cOT E [OT TT ] cIT E [ IT TT ]

(22.2)

… gNC ( x ) ≤ 0

(22.3)

where O ( x ) is the Tobjective o function of x =[ ] , xk is the kth design variable, N is total number of design variables, g j ( x ) is the jth constraint, NC is total number of constraints.

(20) 3

where cW, cOT, and cIT are the cost per time units associated to WT, OTT, and ITT, respectively. The symbol E[f(X)] denotes the expectation of a function f(X). A comprehensive collection of performance measures used in the literature can be found in [1]. As mentioned in the previous sections, a number of appointed patients may not appear at the times of appointment and some appointed patients need to have laboratory tests and thus their second consultation. In addition, the patient punctuality, i.e. the deviation time from the appointment time, can be random. All of these incidents can be rationally modelled as uncertain events. The framework of probability theory will be utilized in this study to model and measure the uncertainty. The inclusion of these random events makes the defined performance indices become uncertainty too. The measurements of the uncertain performance indices will be then carried out using probabilistic measures. Consequently, the measurements in the system performance through the performance

GENETIC ALGORITHMS (GA)

3.1 General on GA GA is a class of global and stochastic search techniques that are founded in the mechanism of natural selection. GA combines Darwin’s principle of survival of the fittest and a structured information exchange using randomized operators to evolve an efficient search mechanism [17]. GA has been utilized to successfully solve various optimization problems in which the optimal solutions are searched and determined by GA, see e.g. [18,19]. Major properties of GA [16,18,19] are: 1. the population-to-population approach and the probabilistic transition rules attempt to make the search escape from local optima. The possibility of being trapped in local optima when searching for the optimum can be thus reduced using GA. 2. GA uses only the information of objective function, not the function derivatives or other auxil-

384

ICIEES_Book.indb 384

4/3/2015 7:09:22 AM

iary knowledge. The required information is the numerical value of the objective function. 3. GA does not impose much mathematical requirement about the optimization problems. Yet, the algorithmis simple and readily to be implemented. Accordingly, GA is robust and thus applicable whenever the numerical value of the objective function can be determined. Properties 1) and 2) make GA attractive to the design of appointment system where the appointment rules and relevant performance functions may not be able to express in explicit forms. In addition, the performance functions can be non-linear and nondifferentiable. The GA procedure starts with an initial set of randomly selected trial solutions, namely population. Each individual in the population is encrypted and referred to as a chromosome which represents a possible solution to the optimization problem. The chromosomes evolve through successive iterations, called generations. In each generation, the fitness of each chromosome is evaluated. The fitness of each chromosome reflects the potential to be the optimal solution. Each chromosome is reproduced according to its fitness value. Fitter chromosomes have higher probabilities to be selected for reproduction whereas weaker chromosomes tend to die off. The chromosome selection and reproduction are carried out in a reproduction process. The chromosomes resulting from the reproduction process form a mating pool and are collectively referred to as offspring. The offspring are later undergone genetic operations. The exploration of search space is carried out through the genetic operations where genetic operators are applied to existing chromosomes and transform them into new chromosomes. The genetic operators-derived chromosomes represent new trial solutions in the search space. The resulting chromosomes then form the new generation of population. It should be noted that GA works in two spaces alternatively. The selection process is performed in the space of original variables while the genetic operations are done in the space of coded variables. Both spaces are referred to as the solution and coding space, respectively [19]. The GA search is terminated when a prescribed number of generations have elapsed. 3.2

as a chromosome. A simple binary coding [16] is widely known and will be employed in this paper. According to the utilized coding scheme, each variable xj in solution space is represented by a binary string. The combination of these strings forms a chromosome in coding space. The evaluation of chromosome fitness is done in the solution space of xj while the genetic operations are performed in the coding space of chromosome. 3.3

Reproduction process

Reproduction in GA is a process in which individual chromosomes are copied according to their fitness values. This operation imitates the survival of the fittest or the natural selection following Darwin’s principle [26]. Fitness in an optimization by GA is defined by a fitness function. Based on the optimization problem as described by the objective function (21) and the set of constraints (22), the fitness function F(x) of a chromosome representing a vector x of variables in the solution space is defined as ⎧ ⎪ F ( x) = ⎨ ⎪O ( ⎩

O ( x)

; x is feasible

NC

) ∑ k jv j ( x )

; x is infffeeeasible

(23)

j =1

An adaptive penalty scheme which is introduced by Barbosa and Lemonge [27] and improved by Obadage and Hampornchai [24] is modified in handling the constraints. The improved adaptive penalty scheme shows its excellent capability in handling a very large number of constraints [25]. This adaptive scheme is given by

kj

(O ( ))

< vj (

inf

NC

)>

∑ ⎡⎣< v ( ) > ⎤⎦

2

(24)

l

l =1

where max(Oinf(x)) is the maximum of the objective function values in the current population in the infeasible region, vj(x) is the violation magnitude of the jth constraint. is the average of vj(x) over the current population. kj is the penalty parameter for the jth constraint defined at each generation. The violation magnitude is defined as

Chromosome representation

GA encrypts each trial solution into a sequence of numbers or strings and denotes the sequences

⎧g ( vl ( x ) = ⎨ l ⎩ 0

)

; gl ( x ) > 0 ; otherwise

(25)

385

ICIEES_Book.indb 385

4/3/2015 7:09:24 AM

The reproduction operator may be implemented in a number of ways. The easiest and well-known approach is the roulette-wheel selection [16,17]. According to the roulette-wheel scheme, the jth chromosome will be reproduced with the probability of Pj =

min (nD ,Δtblock )

E ⎡⎣CT ( nD ,Δtblock )⎤⎦ = cW E ⎡⎣WT ( + cOT E ⎡⎣OT TT (

)⎤⎦ Npatient N = 50 ⎤ ) block ⎦ N Npatient = 50 ⎤ ) block ⎦ N Npatient = 50

block

+ cIT E ⎡⎣ IT TT (

Fj NPop

∑F

N Npatient = 50

(26)

(27)

l

l =1

where NPop is the population or sample size. The fitness value Fj is obtained from Eq. (23). It is noted that GA utilizes only the numerical values of the objective function and of its associated constraints for the evaluation of the chromosome fitness (confer Eqs. (23) to (26)). This advantageous feature makes GA readily applicable to the design of complicate appointment systems where explicit mathematical expressions may not be derived. 3.4

Genetic operators

GA utilizes two genetic operators, namely crossover and mutation. Both operators have different mechanisms but aim at the same task which is exploring the solution space in order to attain optimal values. The crossover operator involves the swapping of genetic material (bit-values) between the two parent strings. This operator randomly chooses a locus (a bit position along the two chromosomes) and exchanges the sub-sequences before and after that locus between two chromosomes to create two offspring. A simple binary crossover with two cut points, namely two-point crossover performs the search by randomly selected two cut points along the chromosomes. The strings in between the cut points of both chromosomes are then exchanged each other. The crossover rate Pc is defined as the ratio of the number of chromosome that will be crossover to the population size. Mutation randomly flips or alters one or more bit values at randomly selected genes in a chromosome. The values of the selected genes are then converted either from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0. The mutation rate Pm is defined as the ratio of the number of genes that will be mutated to the population size. The mutation operation also assists the exploration for potential solutions which may be overlooked by the crossover operation. 4

NUMERICAL EXAMPLE

The appointment system described in Section 2 is considered in this section. The optimal design of this appointment system is defined as follows:

Subject to 1 D 50

(28)

Δtblock > 0

(29)

E ⎡⎣WA ( nD ,Δtblock )⎤⎦

N Npatient =50

E ⎡⎣OT TA ( nD ,Δtblock )⎤⎦ E ⎡⎣ IT TA ( nD ,Δtblock )⎤⎦

≤ δW

N Npatient =50

N Npatient =50

(30)

≤ δ OOT

(31)

≤ δ IIT

(32)

where δW, δOT, and δIT are the thresholds of the average waiting time of a patient, the average overtime for a doctor, and the average idle time for a doctor, respectively. It is noted that all expectations are conditional on a fixed number of patients Npatient equal to 50. The objective of the design is to determine the number of doctors nD and the appointment interval Δtblock such that the expected total cost of the appointment system E[CT] defined by (20) is minimized under the constraints (28) to (32). The design variables that minimize the objective function (27) and at the same time satisfy the constraints (28) to (32) will be referred to as the optimal number of doctors nD∗ and the opti∗ mal appointment interval Δtblock . The expectation of total cost and other variables like WT, OTT, and ITT signify that these are random variables. This is because WT, OTT, and ITT are the functions of the random variables shown in Table 1. cW, cOT, and cIT are set equal to 100, 600, and 300, respectively. The constraints (28) and (29) are the boundary constraints of the design variables nD and Δtblock, respectively. The constraints (30) to (32) are the time constraints. The appointment system of this exemplified outpatient department assumes that the total number of outpatients receiving the service is equal to 50. The absence or no-show probability of each patient pabs is equal to 0.20. The probability that an appointed patient will have laboratory tests plab is equal to 0.40. The ending time of the office hour tf is equal to 180. The length of service time for the 1st-consultation L1ij, the length of service time for

386

ICIEES_Book.indb 386

4/3/2015 7:09:24 AM

the 2nd-consultation L2ij, the time required for the laboratory tests TLij, and the time deviating from the appointment time Δij are treated as independent random variables whose distribution and associated parameters are given in Table 1. ∗ GA is used for determining nD∗ and Δtblock . Since it is the minimization problem, the fitness function (23) is defined as

(

Table 2. Threshold values in case of deterministic number of patients. Parameter

Magnitude (minutes)

δW δOT δIT

5 30 30

)

⎧ 1 E ⎡⎣CT nD , Δttblock ⎤⎦ ⎪ N Npatient =50 ⎪ 1 F nD,Δtblock = ⎨ ; ⎛ ⎞ 3 ⎪ ⎜ E ⎡C ⎛ n ,Δt ⎟ ⎞⎤ ⎛ ⎞ + k v n , Δ t ⎥ ⎜ ⎢ T⎝ D ⎟ ∑ j j ⎝ D block ⎠ block ⎠ ⎦ b ⎪⎜ ⎣ Npatient=50 ⎟⎠ Npatient=50 j =1 ⎩⎝

(

)

(nD , Δtblockc ) is feasible (nD , Δtblock ) is infeasible (33)

where E[CT(nD,Δtblock)] follows the objective function (27). The penalty functions, according to the constraints (30) to (32), are respectively. ⎧ E ⎡W n ,Δt − δW > 0 ( )⎤ N =50 − δW ; E ⎡⎣WA (nD ,Δtblock )⎤⎦ Npatient ⎪ N =50 v1 ( nD ,Δtblock ) Npatient = ⎨ ⎣ A D block ⎦ Npatient N =50 ⎪⎩ 0 ; othe h rwise

(34)

⎧ E ⎡OT − δ OT ; ⎪ ⎣ TA ( nD ,Δtblock )⎤⎦ Npatient N =50 v2 ( nD ,Δtblock ) Npatient = ⎨ N =50 ⎪⎩ 0 ;

(35)

⎧ E ⎡ IT − δ IT ; ⎪ ⎣ TA ( nD ,Δtblock )⎤⎦ Npatient N =50 v3 ( nD ,Δtblock ) Npatient = ⎨ N =50 ⎪⎩ 0 ;

The values of the thresholds are given in Table 2. The boundary constraints (28) and (29) are not included in the penalty terms because Table 1. Definition of random variables in the numerical example. Random variable Length of service time for the 1st-consultation (L1ij) Length of service time for the 2nd-consultation (L2ij) Time required for the laboratory tests (TLij) Time deviating from the appointment time (Δij)

Distribution (minutes) Uniform (10,20) Uniform (7,12) Triangular (10,20,30) Uniform (0,10)

⎡⎣

A

(

D

,

block

)⎤⎦ Npatient N =50

δ OT > 0

othe o rwise ⎡⎣

A

(

D

,

block

)⎤⎦ Npatient N =50

δ IT > 0

(36)

oth rwise othe

they are imposed directly on the search Algorithm as the search boundaries of prospect design variables. It is noted that the fitness function (33) involves the expected values. The relevant expected values appear in the objective function (27) and the constraints (30) to (32). This means that there must be the computation of the expected values for each individual of the chromosome population considered in the successive generations of the search. Monte-Carlo Simulation (MCS) is run for each individual chromosome to obtain its corresponding value of the fitness function. A sample of all random variables is generated according to their probabilistic descriptions and the evaluation of the required expected values is carried out for each chromosome. The execution of MCS for each individual of the chromosome

387

ICIEES_Book.indb 387

4/3/2015 7:09:25 AM

Figure 3. The history of the average fitness of the feasible chromosomes in case of deterministic number of patients.

population would be very time consuming and inefficient for a considerable sample size. A more efficient solution to this problem follows from the consideration that the potential chromosomes appear a large number of times in the successive generations during the GA search whereas the less potential solutions are gradually eliminated. Only a limited sample size is therefore necessary for MCS. The MCS sample size for the evaluation of the expected values in this example is thus set equal to 20. GA search employs the population size of 50. The number of generations used in the search is 50. A two-point crossover is utilized with the crossover rate of 0.80. The mutation rate is taken as 0.002. Figure 3 shows the search history. The optimal number of doctors nD∗ is equal to 5. The optimal ∗ appointment interval Δtblock is equal to 14 minutes. The distributions of chromosomes at various generations are shown in Figure 4. The results obtained from GA have been verified with the simulation. The verification is shown in Figure 5. It is noted that there are only 5 feasible solutions among all possible combinations. All 5 feasible solutions belong to the case of 5 doctors. The solutions are classified as feasible when they satisfy all the constraints (30) to (32). It is obvious that the constraints in this numerical example are complicated and can be obtained in terms of numerical values only. Nevertheless, the optimization result shows that the employed method of constraint handling as described by equations (23) to (25) effectively performs to obtain the optimal solution. 5

Figure 4. The distributions of chromosomes at various generations: (a) Starting generation, (b) 20th generation, and (c) 50th generation.

CONCLUSION

We have proposed a GA with an adaptive penalty scheme as an optimization tool for the optimal design of appointment systems for outpatient service. We have considered the appointment system

Figure 5. Verification of the optimal design from GA search in case of deterministic number of patients.

388

ICIEES_Book.indb 388

4/3/2015 7:09:26 AM

which is a typical system used in the hospitals of Thailand and belongs to the class of individual block/fixed interval. The adaptive-penalty GA has been applied in determining the optimal number of doctors and appointment interval. Using the adaptive penalty scheme, optimization constraints could be automatically and numerically handled. Since GA operates in a numerical manner, the algorithm is applicable to practical problems where explicit expressions of objective functions and constraints are not possible to derive. The application of the proposed methodology has been shown through a numerical example in which the uncertainty of system and input is incorporated. The numerical result has shown that the proposed methodology could effectively determine the optimal solution under a complicate objective function and the implicit constrains. From the viewpoint of economic, an efficient cost and quality management in healthcare service is attained by the proposed methodology. REFERENCES [1] Bailey NTJ. 1952. A study of queues and appointment systems in hospital out-patient departments, with special reference to waiting-times. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society 14: 185–199. [2] Barbosa H, Lemonge A. 2003. A new adaptive penalty scheme for genetic algorithms. Information sciences 156: 215–251. [3] Cayirli T, Veral E. 2003. Outpatient scheduling in health care: a review of literature. Production and Operations Management Society 12(4): 519–549. [4] Darwin C. 1869. On the Origin of Species by Means of Natural Selection, or the Preservation of Favoured Races in the Struggle for Life. (5th ed.). John Murray, London. [5] Deb K. 1995. Optimization for Engineering Design Algorithms and Examples. Prentice-Hall, New York. [6] Liu L, Liu X. 1998. Block appointment systems for outpatient clinics with multiple doctors. Journal of the Operational Research Society 49: 1254–1259. [7] Fries B, Marathe V. 1981. Determination of Optimal Variable-Sized Multiple-Block Appointment Systems. Operations Research 29(2): 324–345. [8] Gen M, Cheng R. 1997. Genetic algorithms and engineering design. John Wiley and Sons, New York. [9] Goldberg DE. 1989. Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning. AddisonWesley, Massachusetts. [10] Güler MG. 2013. A hierarchical goal programming model for scheduling the outpatient clinics. Expert Systems with Applications 40: 4906–4914. [11] Harnpornchai N. 2011. Genetic algorithm-aided reliability analysis. Proceedings of the Institution of Mechanical Engineers, Part O: Journal of Risk and Reliability 225(1): 62–80.

[12] Hill-Smith I. 1989. Mathematical relationship between waiting times and appointment interval for doctor and patients. Journal of the Royal College of General Practitioners 39: 492–494. [13] Holland JH. 1975. Adaptation in natural and artificial system. The University of Michigan Press, Ann Arbor. [14] Kaandorop G, Koole G. 2007. Optimal outpatient appointment scheduling. Health Care Manage Sci 10: 217–229. [15] Liao C, Pegden CD, and Rosenshine M. 1993. Planning Timely Arrivals to a Stochastic Production or Service System. IIE Transactions 25(5): 63–73. [16] Liu L, Liu X. 1998. Dynamic and Static Job Allocation for Multi-Server Systems. IIE Transactions 30(9): 845–854. [17] Michalewicz A. 1996. Genetic + Data Structures = Evolution Programs (2nd ed.). Springer, Berlin. [18] Obadage AS, Hampornchai N. 2006. Determination of point of maximum likelihood in failure domain using genetic algorithms. Int J Press Vessels Pipe 83(4): 276–82. [19] Pegden CD, Rosenshine M. 1990. Scheduling Arrivals to Queues. Computers and Operations Research 17(4): 343–348. [20] Petrovic D, Morshed M, and Petrovic S. 2011. Multi-objective genetic algorithms for scheduling of radiotherapy treatments for categorised cancer patients. Expert Systems with Applications 38: 6994–7002. [21] Reyes A, Yu H, and Lloyd S. 2001. An evolutionary hybrid scheduler based in Petri net structures for FMS scheduling. In Proceedings of International Conference on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 2001 IEEE, pp. 2516–2521. [22] Robinson LW, Chen RR. 2003. Scheduling doctors' appointments: optimal and empirically-based heuristic policies. IIE Transactions 35: 295–307. [23] Vanden Bosch PM, Dietz CD, and Simeoni JR. 1999. Scheduling Customer Arrivals to a Stochastic Service System. Naval Research Logistics 46: 549–559. [24] Vanden B, Gupta D. 2003. A sequential bounding approach for optimal appointment scheduling. IIE Transactions 35(11): 1003–1016. [25] Wang Y, Tang J, and Qu G. 2010. A Genetic Algorithm for Solving Patient-Priority-Based Elective Surgery Scheduling Problem. Life System Modeling and Intelligent Computing. Lecture Notes in Computer Science 6329: 297–304. [26] Yeh JY, Lin WS. 2007. Using simulation technique and genetic algorithm to improve the quality care of a hospital emergency department. Expert Systems with Applications 32: 1073–1083. [27] Yeon N, Lee T, and Jang H. 2013. Outpatients Appointment Scheduling With Multi-Doctor Sharing Resources. In: Johansson B, Jain S, Montoya-Torres J, Hugan J. and Yücesan E. (Eds.), Proceedings of the 2010 Winter Simulation Conference, 5–8 Dec. 2010, Baltimore, pp. 3318–3329.

389

ICIEES_Book.indb 389

4/3/2015 7:09:27 AM

This page intentionally left blank

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Problems and countermeasures of constructing foreign enterprises engineering practice education center in higher engineering education M. Zhao & G.C. Wang School of Mechanical Engineering, Jiangsu University, Zhenjiang, P.R. China

ABSTRACT: With the deep implementation of ‘Excellent Engineer Education & Training Program’, Foreign Enterprises’ status and function in engineering education are objectively recognized. In this paper related issues on the construction of engineering practice Education Center in these companies were analyzed. Through detail research on the list of the first approved national Education Centers in July 2012, it was concluded that number of involved Foreign Enterprises is small, general colleges’ cooperation enthusiasm is insufficient, support policies need to be further improved. To solve these problems effectively, five corresponding countermeasures were put forward. Wish the research would promote deeper cooperation between colleges and enterprises with different ownership. Keywords: Foreign Enterprise; Engineering Practice Education Center; College-Enterprise Cooperation; Higher Engineering Education Reform 1

INTRODUCTION

Engineering practice Education Center, clearly required by the ‘Excellent Engineer Education & Training Program’, is established to undertake engineering practice and training of different professionals. Besides basic function of general practice base outside colleges, the center is in charge of systematic theory and practice teaching, as well as engineering research and innovation. In this degree, it is regarded as a totally new platform and example of college-enterprise cooperation in China’s engineering education reform. As the cooperation growing deeper, programs with Foreign Enterprises involved appeared such as ‘Intel—Shanghai Jiao Tong University’, ‘Texas Instruments—Xidian University’. So far there have been few results about the new platform construction in the perspective of enterprises’ ownership, therefore, this research is extremely necessary and valuable both in theory and practice. 2

FEATURES OF CHINA’S CURRENT FOREIGN ENTERPRISES

Since from the 21st century, Foreign Enterprises have gradually become the most important investment approach of foreign capital in China, and now have even become the critical of China’s foreign trade and economy. At present, China’s Foreign Enterprises show the following characteristics:

First, the increasing of total number is slowing down. Until March 2013 the number of approved foreign enterprises has reached 768,000. Affected by the slow recovery from the economic crisis, in 2013 the increasing number has been only 1900 per month, while the figure was more than 2800 the year before. Second, the gross investment increased steadily. In 2012 the amount of foreign investment came to $111.716 billion, keeping the pace of more than one hundred billion U.S. dollars for continued three years, proving that the inner potential of Chinese market is still great. Third, foreign enterprises are still the investment body of foreign programs. According to the statistics released in 2011, in 22,388 foreign-invested programs foreign enterprises’ participation rate approached 80.8%. Fourth, investing gap between industries is large. In 2012, the number of Foreign Enterprises in manufacturing and wholesale and retail trade ranks the top two, where only in manufacturing the utilization of foreign capital accounts for 43.7% of the overall use of foreign capital[1]. With the deep expanding of industrial transformation and upgrading, foreign companies will be faced with new development opportunities. In order to participate in China’s market competition more widely, their demands for domestic high-level engineering talents are urgent. However, practice and innovation ability of China’s present engineering graduates is generally weak. It is usually

391

ICIEES_Book.indb 391

4/3/2015 7:09:27 AM

difficult to meet the requirements of foreign companies. Accordingly, many Foreign Enterprises began to actively intervene in the whole process of personnel training. Through the constructing engineering practice Education Center together with colleges, a real engineering environment for practice and innovation ability training is gradually created, and professionals’ comprehensive quality and market adaptability are effectively strengthened[2]. 3

PROBLEMS OF CENTER CONSTRUCTION IN FOREIGN ENTERPRISES

3.1

Total number of foreign enterprises is small

According to the ‘National Engineering Practice Education Center Management Policy (Trial)’, the cooperating enterprises should be those that are registered with an independent legal entity in industrial and commercial administrative departments of China, and their ownership is not limited. In the list of first approved national center, Foreign Enterprises account only for 3.35%, and are all manufacturing. In agriculture, forestry, animal husbandry and fishing, construction, information, environmental protection and other fields, colleges tend to choose domestic companies as talents training partners. While in electricity, water conversancy, telecommunications, mining, railways Table 1. Number of cooperating enterprises from different countries. Area

Number of enterprise

American French Germen Japan Hong Kong Taiwan

9 2 3 2 2 3

Total/Proportion

21/3.35%

Table 2. Number & distribution of colleges of different levels.

Sum Eastern Central Western

985

211

General

Strong-weak*

9 8 0 1

15 13 0 2

8 6 1 1

3 2 0 1

*Situation of one 985/211 college and one general college choose the same foreign enterprise as cooperative partner in center construction.

there is little involvement of foreign capital, thus large and medium state-owned enterprises are always welcomed. 3.2

Most colleges’ cooperation enthusiasm is insufficient

As for the colleges, nearly two-thirds (65.2%) are national key universities, 60% of which are 985 universities. In geographical distribution, only University of Electronic Science and Technology (Sichuan, 985,211) and Xidian University (Shanxi, 211) two are in western areas, while 75% are located in the east. What’s more, it is found that one enterprise could cooperate with colleges with different levels, just like Freescale Semiconductor (U.S.)—Tianjin Polytechnic University (general college)—University of Electronic Science and Technology—Suzhou University (985/211 college), SAP software (Germany)—Shanghai Jiaotong University (985,211 college)—Nanjing Institute of Technology (general college), and Eagle & Poor’s (Hong Kong)—Beijing Jiaotong University (211 college)—Yanshan University (general college). These ‘Strong-Weak’ model will undoubtedly promote communication between colleges and should be advocated vigorously. 3.3

Support policies need to be further improved

During the implementation of the ‘Excellent Engineer Education & Training Program’, we have to construct a number of provincial centers to support talents training for local industries and incorporate excellent programs not included in the national list. Currently, only Beijing and Liaoning have started to build province-level Education Center, while in other areas the progress is relatively slow. In addition, the management policy required definitely that the Ministry of Education, along with relevant departments of the State Council, must study and make systematic support policies to formulate enterprises to participate in the cooperation, to guarantee students’ safety and health during the practice, and to encourage enterprise engineers to undertake theory and practical teaching. Nevertheless, three years later promised rules have not yet been issued.

4 4.1

COUNTERMEASURES DISCUSSION Actively expand cooperation with foreign enterprises

Since 1980, American business circles began to come to the front, actively participating in the whole process of engineering education reform[3].

392

ICIEES_Book.indb 392

4/3/2015 7:09:27 AM

Business Roundtable formed by CEOs of American large companies appealed that in order to maintain America’s competitiveness in the 21st century, we must endeavor to training skilled scientists and engineers indispensable to future innovation[4]. In this view, we should refer to the good tradition and expand cooperation with them in scientific research, technology application, talents training model innovation, and so on. It is clear that Foreign Enterprises are not ‘exclusive rights’ of Key universities. General colleges should as well seek cooperation opportunity with foreign enterprises in more sectors and wider fields, especially in some newly-developing industries. In the construction of province-level centers actively explores the new cooperation modes and accumulate related experience. 4.2

Definite duties and strengthen communication

Unclear duty is one of the most crucial reasons for the chaotic management of previous practice base outside the school. Thus in the construction of the new platform, we should further definite duties. The enterprise should be the first responsible person in charge of formulating of training goals and programs, selecting enterprise mentors, implementation and evaluation, while the college should be the second one in charge of systematic engineering knowledge learning. Considering the particularity of foreign companies, it is necessary to enhance communication during cooperation. For example, both universities and enterprises should set up special management departments, hire professionals who not only know related technology but also grasp good ability of foreign language and people communication. Two sides should work together in accordance with the laws of engineering education and talents growing, actively promote the reform of engineering practice education model and strive to build individualized programs[5]. 4.3 Form an international tutors team There are a large number of excellent engineers and technicians in foreign companies, who were trained by advanced engineering education system abroad when they were young. For this reason, it is advisable to encourage outstanding foreign engineers with high technical level, rich experience, and strong sense of responsibility to engaged in students’ theory and practice teaching. By face to face foreign language teaching, international perspective and language skills will be trained better. Enterprises should put forward relevant policies, such as methods of transforming producing with teaching quality, subsidizing rules, and rewarding policies to support their work. Universities should

communicate with enterprises deeply and scientifically determine the proportion of foreign tutors, teaching hours and assessment methods. We ought to respect their reasonable demands, adopt their useful suggestions and keep improving the service level. We ought to focus on strengthening the communication between foreign and domestic tutors, enterprise and college tutors, encourage them to promote teaching skills step by step. Even more, foreign tutors may also be invited to colleges and involved in other activities in the future. 4.4

Enhance international understanding education

In different foreign enterprises, students can not only learn advanced technology, but also to feel foreign excellent engineering heritage and distinctive personality traits. For example, persistent and dedicate Japanese engineers, patient and modest Korean engineers, intelligent Indian engineers, flexible and learned Chinese engineers, and so on. As we all know, the character of personal determines character of an enterprise—corporate culture. Therefore, communication with foreign engineers also helps to understand culture of one country better, and also good for adapting to the new environment more quickly[6]. It is necessary to strengthen international understanding education. Students should gradually learn to feel enterprises’ core values in various ways just like foreign languages learning, enterprise practice, environment experience, and management style study. 4.5

Promote exchanges between different colleges via center construction

Focus on strengthening communication and interaction between colleges of various levels. First of all, colleges that cooperate with the same foreign enterprise must have common in educational philosophy, personnel positioning, discipline ascendancy. Leaders should series this opportunity to further promote communication on center construction, talents training reform and other advanced experience, further promote communication between teachers and students from different colleges. Second, with the ‘Excellent Engineer Education & Training Program’ spreading out, the number of participating students will keep increasing. However, resources such as highquality corporate tutors, equipment and instruments, and research opportunities are limited[7]. So only by strengthening coordination and cooperation between universities could the established training objectives be achieved with high quality efficiently.

393

ICIEES_Book.indb 393

4/3/2015 7:09:27 AM

5

REFERENCES

SUMMARY

Currently, the centers’ construction work is still in the exploratory stage, related experience is insufficient. But as long as we take the idea of ‘Pan-Engineering’, ‘Macro-Concept of Talented People’, ‘Macro Quality Concept’ as guidance[8], meet the requirements of ‘Excellent Engineer Education & Training Program’, pay sustained attention to the quality of personnel training and adhere to innovation, a complete set of scientific engineering education practice system will be eventually built up, laying foundation for the training of international new engineers.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT The authors are grateful to National Ministry of Education, Humanities and Social Science Fund, “Advanced Engineering Training” special: Research on Training of Engineering Spirit and Consciousness in Higher Engineering Education (number 10JDGC023), National specialty, Statelevel teaching team and National training model innovation zone project of P.R.C. for support of this project.

[1] Ministry of Commerce. 2013. Statistical table on national use of foreign capital. International Trade 2013 (05): 68. (in Chinese). [2] Chen Q.Z. & Dai G.H. 2012. Practice and exploration of talents training system construction based on the Engineering Practice Education Center. Changshu Institute of Technology (Educational Science Edition) 2012 (6):37–39. (in Chinese). [3] Li J.X. 2012. Advocating, Participating, Cooperating and Assisting—U.S. business’s role in engineering education reform. Higher Engineering Education Research 2012 (2):121–126, 155. (in Chinese). [4] Li B. 2008. Can Chinese enterprises be judges for education reform. China Youth Daily 2008-7-15:4. (in Chinese). [5] Lin J. 2012. Training excellent engineers via collegeenterprise full-scale cooperation. Higher Engineering Education Research 2012 (3):7–23. (in Chinese). [6] Yu Z.G. 2007. Cultural communication in collegeenterprise cooperation. Chinese Vocational and Technical Education 2007 (23):7–8. (in Chinese). [7] Yuan S.Q. & Wang G.C. Upgrade education idea, and improve the construction level of experimental model center. Chinese Higher Education 2010 (22):40–41. (in Chinese). [8] Zhao M. 2014. Research on the training of innovation ability for mechanical engineering professionals. Jiangsu University 2014 (15):41. (in Chinese).

394

ICIEES_Book.indb 394

4/3/2015 7:09:27 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Evolution of Japanese post-war Agricultural Support Policy Zheng Gu China Agricultural University, Beijing, P.R. China

ABSTRACT: This paper reviews the key agricultural support policies in Japan’s history. The aim of the research is to identify the relation between the level of support and the output of the policy during the economic development. Analyzing results shows that the level of agricultural support increased along with the growth of GDP, but declined in recent years due to the limit of WTO regulations. There is a strong relation between the level of support and the value of production. Agricultural support policy should maintain at a reasonable level to ensure the food security and food self-sufficiency. Keywords: 1

Agricultural support; policy; Japan; post-war

INTRODUCTION

OECD defines Agricultural Support Policy (ASP) as support, subsidy, assistance, and aid to farmers or the agricultural sector as a whole, which result from government policies that raise farmers’ revenues or reduce their costs. By combining the understanding the concept of policy, ASP can be described as what to do to support agriculture, and how to support it. Japan started its industrialization in the Meiji Restoration and then become one of the great powers before the World War II (WWII). Many researchers discussed the content of policy or examined the level of support for the past years. Allen (2013), Mulgan (2012) and Godo (2012) summarized the ASPs in Japan after the WWII. The milestones of the policies including the land reform by General Headquarters of Applied Powers (GHQ), Agricultural Basic Law, Basic Law on Food, Agriculture and Rural Areas, and Basic Plan for Food, Agriculture and Rural Areas. OECD (2010), Anderson (2009) and Godo (2012) calculated the level of support by the methods of OECD’s Producer Support Estimate (PSE), Nominal Rate of Assistance (NRA), Real Rate of Assistance (RRA), and Aggregate Measurement of Support (AMS) by WTO. Indicators show that the overall support to agriculture in Japan is higher than other developed countries, but the level declines in recent years, especially after Japan joined the WTO in 1995. Tian (2002), Diakosavvas (2002), and Anderson and Martin (2009) also discussed the methods for measurement of agricultural support policies, and there are various results by different approaches. Many other researchers studied the level support

to particular agro products, such as rice, beef, and others. The aim of this research is to review the agricultural support policies in Japan after WWII and identify the relation between ASPs and level of economy development. The research is conducted to answer the following research questions: 1) how the Agricultural Support Policies (ASPs) evolved in Japan after the WWII? 2) What is the level of support and outcome of these ASPs? 3) What is the relation between ASPs and level of economic development in Japan? The third question is the critical one in this research. It links the level of agricultural support with the level of economy development. The analyzing result will be the reference for China’s ASPs in the corresponding economy development levels. 2

JAPAN’S AGRICULTURAL SUPPORT POLICIES

The agricultural support policies in Japan can be traced back to the Meiji Restoration. The price of rice was protected by the government to encourage the rice production. The main policies to support agriculture were launched after the WWII, and this is also the period when GDP per Capita reached $1000. In this section, post-war ASPs in Japan are reviewed and key policies that have a significant impact to Japanese agriculture are analyzed. The seven aspects of policy are introduced for analysis and a table is developed to summarize the findings.

395

ICIEES_Book.indb 395

4/3/2015 7:09:27 AM

2.1

Overview for the evolution of policies

Since the Land Reform in 1946, Japan has proposed more than 30 policies to support agriculture. Shogenji (2010) reviewed Japanese ASPs in history and policies in recent years. During these policies, there are three key policies as milestones in the history of Japanese Agricultural Support, they are as follows: 1) 1947 Land Reform; 2) 1961 Agricultural Basic Law; 3) 1999 Basic Law on Food, Agriculture and Rural Areas. These three critical policies are analyzed sequentially below. 2.2

Land reform in 1947

Land reform started in 1947 and ended in 1950. There are two rounds of reform. The first round was conducted by the Japanese government at the time, which was not thorough. The second round was launched by the General Headquarters of Allied Powers (GHQ), and implemented by the Japanese government. The first agriculture support policy after the WWII. Agriculture production in Japan suffered during the WWII. The Food Control Laws during the war was conducted to increase the production of agriculture. Under the Food Control Laws, foods were delivered at a low price and distributed equally. Government had strict control of rice procurement and distribution. The aim of the two rounds of land reform was to encourage agricultural production and recover the economy from the devastation of the war. Increasing food production can improve food security, provide jobs and stable the society after the war. For the political perspective, the occupied authority hoped to destroy the roots of militarism. Land reform can restructure the fundamental economy structure. Moreover, unlike Germany ruled by two authorities after the War, Japan was totally under the control of GHQ, which US was the sole country in the organization. The policy of land reform can be implemented efficiently. For the economy perspective, conflict between landlords and tenant farmers became fiercer. Thoroughly land reform in communism areas in Asian had a huge influence in Japanese rural areas. Land reform can re-distribute the farming land equally to farmers, and resist communism spread in Japanese rural area. The Land Reform had a huge impact on landlords, who were the main resistant in the first round of Land Reform. However, in the second round, the policy left the landlords some interest compared to the one proposed by Russian. The landlords had to accept the policy rather than be confiscated to nothing. The Land Reform was conducted twice. The first round was proposed and implemented by

Japanese Government at the time. The second round was proposed by the United Kingdom with the support of the United of States, and carried out by the Japanese Government. The first round of land reform was not successful due to the resist from the landlords. Only 38% of the land was transferred. Two-third of the members in The Municipalities Agricultural Land Committee were land holders and the decisions were not benefit the tenant farmers. The land reform policy was not well implemented and the rent in kind was still maintained at a high level. The effect for the second round was much improved. Land transferred area reached 80%. According to the statistics from The Municipalities Agricultural Land Committee (1951), in 1941, the leasing land and owner farmed land were account for 46.2% and 53.8%. In 1949, these two figures changed to 13.1% and 86.9%. The rent and land prices were cheap to guarantee the farmers could afford to buy the land. Besides, the loan to farmers to purchase lands was in a fix rate, which became much cheaper due to the high speed of inflation after the war. Thus, the effect of land reform had no obvious difference with the confiscate land reform policy by Russian. Some scholars even commented the land reform in Japan was the most thoroughly land reform in a non-communism country. 2.3

1961 Agricultural Basic Law

The Agricultural Basic Law was the constitution of agriculture in Japan. A series of Acts in the following years were drafted based on this law. It was the base for Japanese agriculture from 1961 to 1999, until the new basic law proposed. The aim of Agricultural Basic Law was to increase the agricultural productivity, upgrade the production efficiency, and narrow the urban-rural income gap, and the welfare between farm and no-farm people. The Agricultural Basic Law targeted to transfer labors from agriculture sector to non-agricultural sector, and promote the utilization of agricultural machines. A set of policies were launched to realize the goal. The key contents are discussed along with the approach in the next section. However, the agricultural productivity growth was not satisfied. The control on agricultural products by the Food Control Law in 1942 was reduced by only left rice in the system. But the control for rice also relaxed compared with the 1940s. The rice producers organized together and lobby the government to raise rice price to narrow the gap between farmer and non-farmers. Only the effort for rice was successful, which occupied 40% of the total value of agriculture output in 1970.

396

ICIEES_Book.indb 396

4/3/2015 7:09:27 AM

The Agricultural Basic Law was just a guideline for agriculture development in long-terms without compulsory methods. Therefore, the effect of policy was limited. The limitation includes: 1) the food self-sufficiency rate declined continuously; 2) the increasing burden for state finance due to growth of agriculture subsidy; 3) lack of variety in farming household in micro level, and there were short of successors for agriculture production; 4) the low farming efficiency due to the interfere of government and monopoly of Agricultural Co-operatives. For the only relative successful rice production, the protection for rice price stimulated the production of rice. However, the surplus of rice cannot be consumed by domestic. It was also short of competitive advantage for export due to high price. The storage of the rice in 1969 is still in place today. The increase of industrial workers’ income leaded to the change of their diet structures. Rice was not as a main component of the food and the surplus of rice became worsen. Thus, the control on rice distribution was loosed and companies can participate in distributing the rice. In 1995, the Staple Food Law was proposed to replace the Food Control Law in 1942. The government was mainly responsible for the storage of the rice. 2.4

1999 Basic Law on Food, Agriculture and Rural Areas

The Basic Law on Food, Agriculture and Rural Areas was the update Agricultural Basic Law in 1961, and also recognized as the new agricultural basic law. Compare with the old law, Food and rural areas were added to the title, which reflect that the support policy’s focus covered more than the agriculture productivity and farmers’ income. The aim of the Basic Law on Food, Agriculture and Rural Areas was to ensure the stable supply of agriculture products, make effort to increase food self-sufficiency. This was the priority task for Japanese Agriculture Development. Specific objectives include: 1) Proposed the multi-function of agriculture, including conservation of national land, water resources and natural environment and maintenance of desirable landscapes and cultural traditions; 2) Sustainable agriculture development. Maintaining agricultural production basis including farmland, irrigation, workforce, promoting the natural cyclical function of agriculture and establishing a desirable agricultural structure where efficient and stable farm operators play a major role; and 3) Develop rural areas, by improvements in agricultural production conditions and rural welfare including living infrastructure. The content of 1999 Basic Law on Food, Agriculture and Rural Areas were implemented by the

Basic Plan on Food, Agricultural and Rural Areas. The Plan was redrafted every five years to update the contents. Some contents were proposed in the basic plans in 2000, 2005, and 2010 respectively. The key contents include: 1) In the first basic plan of 2000, the target rate of self-sufficiency was 45% based on calorie. In 2005, the rate of 45% was unchanged, but the target time was postponed to 2015. In 2010, it targeted to achieve 75% based on agriculture production values in 2020. 2) In 2000, the policy was focus on direct payment to farmers for price support. In 2005, the policy concentrated on direct payment to core farmers, and identify who were the core farmers to support. The policy aimed to assist farmers who satisfy certain conditions, such as the minimum requirement for farm size. In 2005, the plan allowed private companies to purchase farmland under certain conditions. In 2010, direct income subsidy to household with farm land more than 0.3 hectare, or sale volume exceeded 500,000 yen. Besides, the subsidy to rice was reduced. Thus, the burden transferred from consumers to tax-payers. Meanwhile, six industrializations were proposed to promote the multi-function of agriculture; 3) In 2010, the plan was proposed for the reform on Agricultural Co-operatives. It shrank the hierarchy from three levels to two levels to promote efficiency due to the reducing numbers of farmers. Extend new business as the decreasing return from finance and insurance. Compare with the old Agricultural Basic Law, the new basic law was more specific. There were detailed methods and approaches to achieve the goal. However, the political stage was not stable in recent years, and the governmental authority transferred from Liberal Democratic Party and New Clean Government Party to Democratic Party in 2009, and transferred back again in 2012. The policies were not consistent and hard to judge the effect in a short time. 3

THE LEVEL OF SUPPORT TO AGRICULTURE IN JAPAN

In this section, the levels of agricultural support in Japan are examined by the two methods, the Producer Support Estimate (PSE) by OECD, and Aggregate Measurement of Support (AMS) by WTO. The relation with support levels and other key economic indicators are compared to identify the logic in the progress of economy development. 3.1

Methods

PSE was proposed by OECD to examine the support level to agriculture, and AMS was developed

397

ICIEES_Book.indb 397

4/3/2015 7:09:27 AM

by WTO to test the distortion to agricultural international trade. They both reflect the level of agricultural support and are commonly used as indicators to analyze agricultural support policy. However, there are some differences between these two methods. For the policy coverage, PSE calculates all support to agriculture while AMS only cover the domestic subsidies. Tariff and export subsidies are not included in calculating the support (Tian et al., 2002, Diakosavvas, 2002). 3.2

Economic development and level of agricultural support

Amber box were reduced significantly. However, if we examine the trends before 1997 and after 1998, the trend of AMS is also consistent with the total value of production. The comparison result shows again that there is a positive relation between ASPs levels and total value of production, or the outcome of ASPs. Although the measurement of PSE and AMS are from different perspectives, the analyzing results prove the same relation between the indicators. 4

GDP per capita PPP in current US dollars is used to reflect the economic development in Japan’s history from 1970 to 2012. The curve of this indicator is marked as [1]. Agricultural support levels calculated by PSE and AMS are marked as [2] and [3] respectively. The data can be traced back to 1980s according to the database in OECD and WTO. The last curve [4] is the total value of production at farm gates. This indicator shows the outcome of policies and exam the effect of ASPs. As show in Figure 1, the GDP kept growth from 1970 to 2012. It dropped in 2009 due to the great earthquake in east Japan, which cause mass disaster to the national economy. The total value of production, curve 4, declined in the general trend. This reflects that the decreasing competitive ability of agriculture in Japan. Also, the declining shows the reducing rate of food self-sufficiency in Japan’s history. The PSE, curve 2, maintained a similar trend as the total value of production. This is a significant find that shows the effects of ASPs in Japan’s agricultural production. The value of agriculture production, or the incentive of farmers, is strongly related to the level of agricultural support. AMS, curve 3, dropped dramatically from 1997 to 1998. This was mainly due to the policy convert after Japan entered WTO. Methods belong to

Figure 1. The relation between economic development and level ASPs. Resources: OECD, WTO.

CONCLUSION AND FUTURE WORK

This paper reviewed the definition of agricultural support policy and the key policies in Japan’s history. There are two popular methods to exam the level of support, PSE by OECD and AMS by WTO. The analyzing results show that there is a strong relation between ASPs and the total value of agricultural production. The level of support should maintain at a certain level to guarantee the food security and self-sufficiency due to the weak status of agricultural after a nation’s industrialization. The research can be future developed in the following aspects: 1) NRA or RRA can be introduced. Nominate Rate of Assistance (NRA) and Real Rate of Assistance (RRA) can be introduced to examine the level of support again to improve the rigor of research; 2) More historical data are needed. Data from OECD and WTO are only started from 1980s. Estimate data can be used in earlier period to examine the trends and then reflect the relation between ASPs and value of production; 3) Cliometrics can be applied to examine the relation from the mathematical approach more rigorously. REFERENCES [1] Anderson, K. (2009) Distortions to agricultural incentives: A global perspective, 1955–2007, World Bank Publications. [2] Godo, Y. (2012) Evaluation of Japanese Agricultural Policy Reforms Under the WTO Agreement on Agriculture. 2012 Conference, August 18-24, 2012, Foz do Iguacu, Brazil. International Association of Agricultural Economists. [3] Honma, M. & Hayami, Y. (2007) Distortions to agricultural incentives in Japan, Korea and Taiwan. World Bank Agricultural Distortions Working Paper, 35. [4] Johnson, D.G. (1997) Agriculture and the Wealth of Nations. The American economic review, 1–12. [5] Kawano, S. (1969) Effects of Land Reform on Consumption and Investment of Farmers. Agricultural Economic Growth: Japan’s Experience, 374–397. [6] Mulgan, A.G. (2012) Japan’s agricultural policy regime, Routledge.

398

ICIEES_Book.indb 398

4/3/2015 7:09:27 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Reliability assessment of mechanical equipment based on GO methodology Z.R. Yin, D. Su & J.S. Li Xi’an Research Institute of Hi-Technology, Hongqing Town, Xi’an, P.R. China

ABSTRACT: This paper studies the reliability assessment issue of mechanical equipment. In order to solve the problems of low precision and efficiency in traditional reliability assessment of mechanical equipment, a method based on the GO Methodology is introduced into the relative fields, GO model is built with the consideration of shared signals, the probability calculation is simplified and an example is given about a module of some mechanical equipment, finally, the results is compared with the reliability parameters obtained from the Monte-Carlo method. Result shows that, compared with the traditional ways, this method can enhance the operation precision and the efficiency of simulation, it provides useful reference in the complicated, multiple states and time sequence problems. Keywords: 1

GO Methodology; Mechanical equipment; Reliability assessment; Monte-Carlo method

INTRODUCTION

For the complexity of using environment and uncertainty of influence factor, the reliability assessment of mechanical equipment is a hard work for relative research fields. Presently, the method based on simulation used frequently in reliability assessment of mechanical equipment. However, the shortage of this approach is obviously, it is hard to analyze the failure correlation between the mechanical components, and the efficiency of the method is also quite low. The accuracy of result is achieved at the cost of operation time, which makes it difficult to evaluation the reliability of complex mechanical systems. The GO methodology is a kind of reliability research approach based on probability operation (Williams RL et al. 1977). In this method, all the computation is based on the GO model, which is derived through analyzing systems according to certain rules, and the reliability parameters are obtained by processing qualitative analysis and quantitative analysis on the model. Compared with traditional method, GO methodology is suitable for processing multimode and time sequence problems. It provides a suitable solution for reliability assessment of complex system that is common in mechanical equipment. This paper applies GO methodology to the reliability analysis of mechanical equipments, the state cumulative probability is introduced to simplify the complex probability computation, a quantitative formula of shared signals is introduced to the issue. An example about reliability assessment of

some mechanical equipment is given to validate the performance of this method; finally the result is compared with result that derived from the Monte-Carlo Methodology. Tests show that, compared with traditional method, GO methodology is simple, direct and has a better performance in execution efficiency and operation accuracy. 2

GO METHOD

GO methodology is brought forth by the Kaman Science Company in 1960’s, and then it is extended by the EPRI. In 1980’s, Japan shipping institute developed the GO-FLOW method that is more suitable for dynamic systems based on GO methodology, this promotes the application of GO methodology further (Chu BB 1983). As a useful tool for reliability assessment, GO methodology analyze systems through GO graph, which can be translated from principle scheme according to certain rules. The application of GO method consists of two steps: up build the GO graph and carry out GO operation, the two elements of GO graph and GO operation are operator and signal (Z.P. SHEN et al. 2004). GO graph consists of operators and signals, once GO graph is established, and the data of the all operators are usable, we can calculate the state of the output signals from the first input signal according to the type of next operator, GO operation is the process of calculating output signals one by one following the signal number.

399

ICIEES_Book.indb 399

4/3/2015 7:09:28 AM

Operator stands for the component of system. The property of operator is type, data and rule of operation. Type is the major attribute of operator, it reflect the characteristic and function of operator. There are seventeen types of operator, named from type 1 to type 17. Data and rule of operation coincide with type, different operator has a different requirement of data and rule for operation. Signal represents the relation between the input signal and the out signal of component. Signal has two attributes: state value and state probability. Usually, the number 0, 1, …, N stand for the state value, value 0 represents for a advance state, state value 1 to N−1 represent the success states, the maximum state value N is the failure state, the correspond state probability of each state is P(0), P(1), …, P(N).

3

GO OPERATION

There are two kinds of quantitative calculation of GO method, the one first ascertain output signals according to the combination of input signals and component state, figure out joint probability of each combination, then figure out the different probability of output signals depend on different state values, the process of this method is complicated; the other method carry out calculation through introducing the cumulative probability of signals, this method is simple, direct and good to processing shared signals. This paper adopts the latter one to perform the operation. 3.1 State cumulative probability PS (i ) represents the state probability of the input signal in GO method, PR (i ) expresses the state probability of the output signal, where i stands for the state value of signals (Z.P. Shen et al. 1999). The definition of state cumulative probability of input signals is as follows: i

AS (i ) = ∑ PS (i )

i = 0,

, N 1,

AS ( N ) = 1 (1)

j =0

The definition of state cumulative probability of output signals is as follows: i

AR (i ) = ∑ PR ( j ),

i

N

AR ( N ) = 1 (2)

j =0

where A(i) represents the sum of state probability from state value 0 to state value i.

3.2

Shared signal

In GO graph, if a signal inputs into more than one operator, this signal is called shared signal of the following operators. The general method to process the shared signals is that: to the input signals of an operator, if there are no shared signals, the signals are independent with each other, the operation formula of the operator is same as usual; if there are shared signals exist in the input signals of an operator, the operation formula of the operator needs to be adjusted, all the shared signals should be find out, when the formula is expanded, there are many state cumulative probability of input signals in the production, if one input signal multiply together, the outcome should be divided with the state cumulative probability of their shared signals, when many input signals multiply to each other, we should treat two of them as a group, then keep on deal with the other. Suppose there are L shared signals in system, which is written as Sl , l = 1, …, L, the state cumulative probability of these signals is ASl , the state cumulative probability of system output signal is AR (Z.P. Shen et al. 2002). If we carried out calculation of operator one by one, saved item of the shared signal, finally, the state probability of output signal can be written as: l

AR

l

l

∑ ∑ ∑ ARK K ...K

K1 = 0 K 2 = 0 L

K3 = 0

∏ [(1 − ASl )(1 l =1

1

2

L

⋅

K l ) + ASl K l ]

(3)

where ARK K1K 2 ...K L is the state cumulative probability of system’s output signal in which all shared signals in a certain combination, K l = 0 denotes the state of the l-th shared signal in the combination is failure, K l = 1 indicates the normal state of the shared signal. 4

APPLICATION EXAMPLE

A simplified principle scheme for some mechanical derive system is shown in Figure 1. It consists of sensor, control signal, switch and indicate signal. The main function of the system is: according to the different data obtained by sensor, the control signal manipulates the open/close state of the switch, the exhibition of the indicate signal and the output power of the system. When three paths work normal, the state of system is normal. Given the failure probability of the component in the system, figure out the reliability parameter of the derive system. The corresponding GO graph of the system is shown in Figure 2.

400

ICIEES_Book.indb 400

4/3/2015 7:09:28 AM

Table 2.

Results comparison of the two methods. Monte-Carlo method

Reference Signal GO method 5000 times 10000 times value

Figure 1.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

The principle scheme of the derive system.

0.0001 0.0002 0.00035 0.00035 0.00035 0.00047 0.00047 0.00047 0.00141

Table 3.

0.00017 0.00025 0.00043 0.00040 0.00042 0.00055 0.00056 0.00051 0.00231

0.00012 0.00022 0.00037 0.00035 0.00036 0.00031 0.00048 0.00032 0.00162

0.0001 0.0002 0.0003 0.0003 0.0003 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 0.001

Time expend of the two methods. Mote-Carlo method

Figure 2. Table 1.

The GO graph of the derive system. The operator data of the GO graph.

Number

Type

Name

Failure rate

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10

Sensor Control signal Swtich 1 Swtich 2 Swtich 3 Indicate signal1 Indicate signal2 Indicate signal3 AND Gate

0.0001 0.0001 0.00015 0.00015 0.00015 0.00012 0.00012 0.00012 —

There are seven operators which correspond to the components in the graph, and the data and the type of operators are given in Table 1. Once the GO graph is set up and the data are input into operator, the state probability of all signals can be calculated through GO program. Something needs to say is that signal2 is a shared signal of the latter signals, so something must be done according to section before. To verify the precision of GO method, this paper chooses the typical Monte-Carlo method to simulate the reliability parameters of the derive system. Set simulation cycle as 5000 times and 10000 times respectively to meet the expect precision (J.Z. Xu et al. 2007). The comparison of the two methods is shown in Table 2, in which the reference value is the prior knowledge gained by experts and relative engineers in the application of derive system test and usage. The time expend comparison is shown in Table 3.

GO method

5000 times

10000 times

0.0213 S

2.5 S

11.3 S

From the part of simulation precision, we can see that the average of absolute error between GO method and reference value is 0.0001, which is smaller than the average of absolute error between the Monte Carlo method and reference value: 0.00012 (10000 times). However, from the part of execution efficiency, the time expend of GO method is 0.0213 second, which is far smaller than the time need to expend to attain the same precision level by the Monte Carlo method. With the complexity of the simulation increases, the advantage of GO method will display more and more clearly. Moreover, the GO method is more simple, practical and understandable than the traditional method; it has a huge future in engineering application of reliability assessment. 5

CONCLUSIONS

This paper studies the application of GO method in reliability assessment for mechanical equipment. The state cumulative probability is adopted to simplify the computation process, and a common approach for dealing with shared signal is derived, finally, an instance about some mechanical equipment is given as an illustration, and the result is compared with the Monte Carlo method. Result shows that, this method is direct, simple and has a higher compute accuracy and efficiency in comparison with the traditional approach. The research of this paper provides useful reference for reliability assessment problem of complex mechanical equipment.

401

ICIEES_Book.indb 401

4/3/2015 7:09:29 AM

REFERENCES [1] R.L. Williams & W.Y. Gateley. 1977. Use of the GO Methodology to Directly Generate Minimal Cut Sets In: Fussell I B, eds Nuclear System Reliability Engineering and Risk Assessment Pennsylvania: Society for Industrial and Applied Mathematics, 825–849. [2] B.B. Chu. 1983. Overview Manual GO Methodology. EPRI NP-3123 Vol 1. Washington: Electric Power Research Institute. [3] Z.P. Shen & X.R. Huang. 2004. Principle and Application of GO Methodology. Beijing: Tsinghua University Press.

[4] Z.P. Shen & J. Gao. 1999. GO methodology and improved quantification of system reliability. J Tsinghua University, 39(6):15–19. [5] Z.P. Shen & T. Zheng. 2002. Exact algorithm for complex system reliability using the GO methodology. J Tsinghua University, 42(5):569–572. [6] J.Z. Xu & Y. Li. 2007. Reliability Assessment of Complex Distribution System Using GO Method. Transaction of China Electronical Society, 22(1):149–153.

402

ICIEES_Book.indb 402

4/3/2015 7:09:29 AM

Information Engineering and Education Science – Zheng (Ed.) © 2015 Taylor & Francis Group, London, ISBN 978-1-138-02655-1

Shanghai platform on construction and sharing of moral education curriculum resources in schools and universities Shardrom Johnson Information Centre, Shanghai Municipal Education Commission, Shanghai, P.R. China

Minjie Bian & Daniel Hsu School of Computer Engineering and Science, Shanghai University, Shanghai, P.R. China

Jiajin Yuan College of Electronic and Electrical Engineering, Shanghai University of Engineering Science, Shanghai, P.R. China

ABSTRACT: According to the “Consideration and Research on Informatization of Moral Education Curriculum Resources in Schools and Universities”, the “Shanghai Platform on Construction and Sharing of Moral Education Curriculum Resources in Schools and Universities” is achieved by the “1+2” operating model, the cloud storage structure, the user classification management, and the scoring mechanism of resource sharing. In the platform, interactive resources are distributed, diversified resources are shown, resource retrieval is intelligent, and resource evaluation is real-time. After making the experiments, the platform accomplishes the basic requirements of digital platform for student moral education curriculum resource on the whole, and becomes one of the important research results about the “Construction and Sharing of Moral Education Curriculum Resources in Schools and Universities”. Keywords: Moral Education Curriculum Resources in Schools and Universities; Education Informatization; Construction and Sharing 1

INTRODUCTION

The Shanghai Platform on Construction and Sharing of Moral Education Curriculum Resources in Schools and Universities (hereinafter referred to as “the project”) is one achievement of the National Educational System Reform Project “Overall Planning the Moral Curriculum in Schools and Universities” (01-109-070). Based on the centrally managing and dispersedly storing, constructing resource management and application system platform of the moral curriculum resources in schools and universities (hereinafter referred to as the Moral Resource Platform) has been forming a sharing mechanism which links up longitudinally and gets through laterally in order to strengthen the pertinence and timeliness of moral resource construction in the network environment.

2 2.1

DESIGNING THOUGHT Architecture by distributed cloud storage

The cloud storage is a novel concept that extends and develops from the cloud computing concept.

It is a technology that gathers different kinds of storage devices in the network to work cooperatively based on the clustered application function, grid technology function, and distributed file system. It is also an application technology providing data storage function and business access function as the core of data storage and data management (Liren, Xing & Bo, Xu 2012). To construct Moral Resource Platform into an excellent moral resource sharing platform which works stably and utilizes resources conveniently, the project uses cloud storage architecture to manage and store moral resources, which means that moral resources are deployed in the cloud and stored in each branch center, users obtain resource from cloud (each branch center) through Moral Resource Platform to reduce the loading pressure of Moral Resource Platform and to increase the efficiency of resource utilization (Xiaomeng, Zhu 2012). At the same time, considering the quantity of moral resources and the long-term demand in the future, using cloud storage architecture is beneficial to improve the expansion of moral resources, convenience of user access, stability of system running and balance of comprehensive energy efficiency. The design architecture is shown as in Figure 1.

403

ICIEES_Book.indb 403

4/3/2015 7:09:29 AM

Figure 1. Cloud storage structure of Moral Resource Platform.

2.2

Strategy of content separation and user classification

Figure 2. Manager and user structure of Moral Resource Platform.

The network management technology which represented by CMS (Content Management System) can separate the content (text and pictures) of the website from the website architecture in order to link each page together by means of controlling the page display (Guoji, Song & Xuedong, Jiang 2013). Using CMS content separation technology, the website content can be managed, released and maintained conveniently, and it is unnecessary to rigidly write HTML code or set up each page manually. Portal site of Moral Resource Platform—Shanghai school moral education resource website is developed based on CMS technology. It owns many excellent designs based on template and it can accelerate the website developing, reduce the cost of development, make the website interface friendlier, and make the module adjustment more flexible in order to facilitate the later improvement (Wangsheng, Liao & Bingbing, Fan 2013). At the same time, for daily managing and maintaining Moral Resource Platform more efficiently and reasonably, the platform managing of moral resources uses hierarchical top-down model of management, however viewing the center resources which has been put in storage uses down-top auditing model. The user management structure is shown as in Figure 2. 2.3

Mechanism of star rating and point system for improving resource sharing

For safeguarding resource quality and achieve the goal of construction and sharing, Moral Resource Platform especially designs the “Resource Evaluation Method” during initial construction to evaluate whether resources are good or not and to support objective credible references for users (Chao, Du 2011). Resource evaluation mainly

Figure 3. The comprehensive evaluation mechanism of Moral Resource Platform.

divides into two parts, subjective evaluation and objective evaluation (Hui, Zhang 2012). Moreover, subjective evaluation divides into three parts, provider self-assessment, expert grading and user grading. Among the three parts, provider self-assessment is the initial evaluation of own resources during resource providers inputting resources; expert evaluation is evaluating the relevant experts of resource allocation by municipal managers in professional view; user grading is evaluating resources in the actual situation by resource users. Objective evaluation is the assessment automatically formed by Moral Resource Platform according to the using and browsing of resources. During the initial construction of Moral Resource Platform, the subjective evaluation index mainly includes resource interaction and click rate. All the indexes are divided into one-star to five-star. The subjective assessment and objective assessment of each moral resource acquired by system make the relevant weight calculation in order to make a comprehensive grade feedback showing on Moral Resource Platform. (As shown in Figure 3). At the same time, Moral Resource Platform also designs the user point system to improve the evaluation system which relevant points will be deducted

404

ICIEES_Book.indb 404

4/3/2015 7:09:29 AM

3

BASIC STRUCTURE AND MAJOR FUNCTIONS

During initial construction, Moral Resource Platform running with “1+2” system running mode and it consists of a web portal and two application systems, which domain name is deyu.edu.sh.cn. 3.1 Structure of “1+2” running mode

Figure 4. Platform.

“1+2” running mode of Moral Resource

if users use the resources. Points can be got when evaluating resources in order to encourage users take an active part in resources evaluation. The proportion of user grading will be enlarged in order to make the resource evaluation more objective, closer to actual use and have more referential meaning (Zhuozhuo, Li et al. 2011). 2.4

Combined running mode for improving platform extensibility

For improving development efficiency and the convenience of later management, maintenance and improvement, Moral Resource Platform uses the “1+N” running mode of the platform system which is Shanghai school moral resource website + platform supporting application system. During the first phase of construction, the platform is operated by the “1+2” system mode that links three parts, Shanghai school moral resource website, the management system of moral resources and the expert evaluation system of moral resources (As shown in Figure 4). During the future application, Moral Resource Platform can adjust the “1+N” combined mode according to the functional requirements (Jingbai, Tian 2008). At the same time, two application systems of Moral Resource Platform—the moral resource management system and the moral resource evaluation system—apply the popular three-tier architecture model to develop the system. The business of system function, data, and page layout are developed hierarchically and the efficiency of software development is improved to offer convenience for the maintenance of Moral Resource Platform. In addition, proven technique, NET development environment and Moral Resource Platform developed by SQL Server database are used to guarantee the system running and stability of the system running.

As shown in Figure 4, a web portal refers to Shanghai School Moral Resource network and two application systems refer to the moral resource managing system and expert resource evaluation system. 3.1.1 Shanghai school moral resource network Shanghai School Moral Resource network is the web portal of Moral Resource Platform. The network mainly supports users’ resource sharing, and users can search the required moral resource in the web portal. At the same time, Shanghai School Moral Resource network makes a dynamic comprehensive score for each moral resource and it supports relevant points for users who evaluate resources. 3.1.2 The moral resource managing system The moral resource managing system is mainly used for inputting and auditing moral resources. It is carried out by resource providers, resource auditors, branch center managers, and municipal center managers through bottom-top mode of inputting and auditing resources layer by layer. In the moral resource managing system, municipal center managers can evaluate resources through assigning experts for resources. 3.1.3 The expert resource evaluation system Relevant experts can complete evaluation assigned by municipal center manager through the expert evaluation system of moral resources. Relevant resources can be given as an objective, accurate evolution to guarantee the resource quality of Moral Resource Platform. 3.2 Main function 3.2.1 Resource display Besides topic map and navigation bar in Moral Resource Platform web portals, it can be divided into several modules such as resource display, user login, resource searching, bulletin board, ranking list and all kinds of forms. The module “resource display” mainly displays the latest and hottest resource recommended by experts for users reading; Bulletin board mainly displays resources ranked from top to bottom; “Points” is the final

405

ICIEES_Book.indb 405

4/3/2015 7:09:30 AM

comprehensive score which are calculated by the system according to its weight of the subjective or objective evaluation; “All kinds of forms” displays four parts, curriculums (activities), courseware (lesson examples), wares and materials for users selecting. In addition, users can look over, upload, download and comment on resources through the secondary column “normal user login”. 3.2.2 Resource uploading and downloading The resource sharing on Moral Resource Platform is based on cloud storage structure and it realized by distributive uploading or downloading. Resource providers input and upload the basic information and relevant attachment in the “moral resource management system”. Resources and relevant attachment are distributive uploaded to the relevant server according to the branch center or municipal center of resource providers. Resources can be displayed on the “Shanghai School Moral Resource Website” after relevant auditing. Users can upload and download interested resources from the relevant server in order to reduce pressure of downloading resources intensively. 3.2.3 Resource inputting and resource auditing Resources uploading on Moral Resource Platform realize relevant inputting and auditing. Resource providers describe basic information and upload relevant attachment of resources through “Moral resource management system” and these resources are audited by the relevant auditors. If resources pass the auditing, the resources will be formally stored into the data branch center or municipal center where auditors work. If resources failed the auditing, relevant amendments will be given so that resource providers can make changes and submit again. 3.2.4 Resource tabbed retrieval Resources on Moral Resource Platform are described through labels, including resource categories, application fields, applicable levels, applicable subjects, etc. Using of activation tagging make resource classification more hierarchical and more convenient to create index. Moral Resource Platform provides resources means for users’ resources research so that users can search required resources quickly (Peng, Li et al. 2013).

sharing and construction, resource star rating method is designed especially during the construction of “resource star rating method” to judge validity of resources and to guarantee the resource quality (Yibo, Chen 2012). Evaluation is divided into subjective evaluation (weight 0.7) and objective evaluation (weight 0.3). Moreover, subjective evaluation is divided into provider self-evaluation, expert evaluation and user evaluation (Wenzhi, Liu 2012). Evaluation includes five secondary specific labels, accurate contents, practical materials, abundant resources and convenient operations. Objective evaluation is formed automatically by Moral Resource Platform including resource interaction click rate. Subjective evaluation and objective evaluation acquired by Moral Resource Platform make a relevant weight calculation in order to get a comprehensive score. Moreover, objective and credible references are provided for resource using. Content of the star rating index is shown as in Table 1. In the index, each secondary index respectively uses five to represent the highest score. Four represents the 90 percent of the highest score. Three represents the 80 percent of the highest score. Two represents the 70 percent of the highest score. One represents the 60 percent of the highest score. The formulas are as follow. The variation formula of resource providers’ subjective evaluation is as Equation 1 follows: 5

∑ fj (

z

j

j =1

4.1

RESOURCE STAR RATING METHODS AND POINT METHODS

(1)

where fj means the score of subjective jth index (f1 = 10, f2 = 30, f3 = 30, f4 = 20, f5 = 10); zij means the star number of the subjective ith evaluating object and the jth index; i = 1, 2, 3 respectively represents provider self-evaluation, user evaluation and expert evaluation; j = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 respectively represents specific labels, accurate contents, practical materials, abundant resources and convenient operations. The variation formula of users’ subjective evaluation is as Equation 2 follows: 5

∑ fj (

z

j

j =1

4

)

)

(2)

The variation formula of experts’ subjective evaluation is as Equation 3 follows:

Resource star rating method

5

To promote the quality optimizing of moral curriculum resources and to realize the target of

∑ fj ( j =1

z

j

)

(3)

406

ICIEES_Book.indb 406

4/3/2015 7:09:31 AM

Table 1.

Star rating index. Evaluating object and weight Resource providers (0.1)

Evaluation index and weight Subjective evaluation (weight 0.7)

Users (0.2)

Experts (0.4)

Platform (0.3)

Specific labels (10 points) Accurate contents (30 points) Practical materials (30 points) Abundant resources (20 points) Convenient operations (10 points) Resource interaction (60 points) Click rate (40 points)

Objective evaluation (weight 0.3)

Sum 70 points

30 points

Sum

The generally variation formula of subjective evaluation is as Equation 4 follows: 3

Z

⎡

5

∑ ⎢⎢wi × ∑ f j ( i =1 ⎣

j =1

⎤ zij ⎥ ⎥⎦

)

(4)

where Z means the total points of subjective evaluation; wi means the weight of the subjective ith evaluating object (w1 = 0.1, w2 = 0.2, w3 = 0.4). The generally variation formula of objective evaluation is as Equation 5 follows: K

⎛ ⎝

3

1

⎞

2

∑ wi ⎟⎠ ∑ gi ( i =1

i =1

ki )

(5)

where K means the total points of objective evaluation; k1 means the star number of relevant resource interaction; k2 means the corresponding star number of click rate; g1 = 60 corresponds to the relevant resource interaction; g2 = 40 corresponds to the points of click rate. The generally variation formula of overall evaluation is as Equation 6 follows: F =Z+K

F = 100 ⎧5 ⎪4 90 ≤ F < 100 ⎪⎪ D = ⎨3 80 ≤ F < 90 ⎪2 70 ≤ F < 80 ⎪ ⎪⎩1 60 ≤ F < 70

(6)

where F means the total points of overall evaluation. The formula of changing overall evaluation into star number is as Equation 7 follows:

(7)

where D means the star number changed by overall evaluation. 4.2

Methods of resource points

To promote users to participate in the star evaluation of platform resources and to improve the objectivity of resource evaluation, Moral Resource Platform uses the resource point mechanism (Wenzheng, Yang et al. 2013). Users can browse or look over the resources on Moral Resource Platform for free. However, if users want to download of look over the complete relevant resources, they need pay the corresponding downloading points. The points required are preliminary set by resource providers, and they are fine adjusted according to the change of objective evaluation on Moral Resource Platform. Common users on Moral Resource Platform own the initial 10 points as resource points, each downloading will deduct relevant points, the complete platform resources cannot be downloaded or look over when lacking points. Points can be gained through making star evaluation to

407

ICIEES_Book.indb 407

4/3/2015 7:09:31 AM

the platform resources in order to promote the enthusiasm of participating in the resource evaluation on Moral Resource Platform; to highlight the excellent resources; to improve resource utilization rate; to promote more objective resource evaluation and to be closer to actual usage (Huixian, Wang 2013).

5 5.1

PRACTICE FEEDBACK Feedback of basic information

After finishing the relevant system testing in May 2014, Moral Resource Platform start a practical trail in Shanghai University, Baoshan Education Bureau, Hainan High School from June 2013 to September 2013. In October 2013, each practice unit submitted practice user experience and opinion reports according to their usage. Reports show that the each practice unit gives a favorable reception to the stability and operability of Moral Resource Platform. At the same time, they also make some specific suggestions about improving Moral Resource Platform, which includes: the label design needs to be more reasonable, some designs of search label should be improved to make resource classification and retrieval classification more reasonable; element of higher education can be supplied and the grade of higher school and curriculum resources; the design of the main page can be more humanized. The practice units also suggest that the page layout should be improved, several designing scheme should be chosen for users, and the affinity of homepage should be enhanced. 5.2

Improvement measures

Form November 2013 to December 2013, a special discussion about modification suggestion fed back by practice unit is held in order to further improve the usage effectiveness of Moral Resource Platform. Moral Resource Platform has been modified, improved and the preliminary modification plans came into being. In the aspect of improving searching label design, Moral Resource Platform asks resource providers must provide searching keyword in order to make the attachment classification more reasonable and make common users to find the required materials conveniently. At the same time, the column “user login” divides into three classes, network administrator, resource manager and common users so that different users can quickly find the relevant search portal to facilitate the platform operation. In the aspect of supplying higher school element, the content is classified into primary school,

middle school, senior high school and college in the navigation bar. At the same time, several subclass of college resources will be set under the “college” section so that Moral Resource Platform can cover every phase of studying. In the aspect of homepage, the “form” section will narrow pages about module placing, the rest modules can use small icons in order to make the page design more concise and more beautiful. At the same time, instructions and user guide will be placed on the homepage for guiding users. In the aspect of expanding the capacity of resource storage, the resources that are stored in each branch center should be cleared. The municipal center only manages the catalog of the branch center resources. Therefore, the contradiction of sharing and copyright can be well solved and the expandability of resources, validity and stability of resources can be improved. In the aspect of the impartiality of expert evaluation, the avoiding mechanism will be set in the expert evaluation system of moral resource in order to make sure that experts avoid the providers’ resources in the area where experts are. Therefore, the impartiality and fairness of moral resource evaluation can be guaranteed. 6

EXCEPTIONS

After almost two years of work, the initial construction of Moral Resource Platform has finished, passed the application test and achieve the original design goal. In the next stage, the following three aspects of Moral Resource Platform will be improved. First, the operational process of Moral Resource Platform can be further improved in the practical application. Now, Moral Resource Platform has completed the pilot test, however, the new informationalized platform can be really completed after a large scale and a certain time of practical use. For this purpose, the propaganda and promotion of Moral Resource Platform will be enhanced in the next stage. The corresponding module and function can be modified according to the practical use in the later large-scale operation in order to make Moral Resource Platform gradually become a more humanized, more convenient platform on sharing and construction which is closer to user needs. Second, the resources on the platform can be further enriched and the use efficiency of the platform can be also improved. More users are encouraged to take part in the sharing and construction of Moral Resource Platform through arousing three aspects, municipality, higher school or district and institution or school.

408

ICIEES_Book.indb 408

4/3/2015 7:09:32 AM

Third, the expandability of resources can be further improved (Johnson, Shardrom 2011). Based on the cloud storage structure, the basic facility of the each branch center can be further expanded in order to enhance the storage ability and visit ability, which lays the foundation of arranging the rules of moral in each studying phase. Shanghai Platform on Construction and sharing of Moral Education Curriculum resources in Schools and Universities will grow and improve continually with user requirement. At the same time, the platform will make preparations for providing the sharing of the excellent moral resources; for extracting the rules of moral education in schools and universities; for improving the quality of moral education.

[4]

[5]

[6] [7]

[8]

ACKNOWLEDGMENT [9]

This study was financially supported by the National Educational System Reform Project (01-109-070), by the National Natural Science Foundation of China (Grant number 61303097), by Research Funds of Shanghai Leading Academic Discipline Project (J50103), and by the Graduate Innovation Fund Project of Shanghai University (Grant number SHUCX070037; SHUCX120105).

[10]

[11]

[12]

REFERENCES [1] Liren, Xing & Bo, Xu 2012. Research of Network Teaching Resources Platform Building Based on Cloud Computing. Journal of Wuhan University (Natural Science Edition) 58(S1): 159–161. [2] Xiaomeng, Zhu 2012. Platform of Higher Education Resources Based on Cloud Storage (M.E dissertation). Xi’an: Xi’an University of Science and Technology. [3] Guoji, Song & Xuedong, Jiang 2013. Construction of University Website Based on CMS. Journal

[13]

[14]

of Hebei Normal University for Nationalities 33(2): 24–25. Wangsheng, Liao & Bingbing, Fan 2013. Design and Application of Attributes Custom Solution Based on CMS. Computer and Modernization 29(8): 140–144. Chao, Du 2011. The Design and Development of Resources Database of the Moral Principles and Class Management based on the “ISO/IEC19796” Standard (M.S dissertation). Wuhan: Central China Normal University. Hui, Zhang 2012. Cloud-Based Open Platform Building Research of Teaching Resources. Computer Technology and Development 22(1): 202–204, 208. Zhuozhuo, Li. Yan, Zhang & Heping, Xu 2011. From “Best Reader” to User Points System: User Motivation Innovation in the Academic Library. Library and Information Service 55(9): 71–75. Jingbai, Tian 2008. Towards Non-functional Requirements Analysis for Networked Software (Sc.D dissertation). Wuhan: Wuhan University. Peng, Li. Bin, Wang & Wei, Jin 2013. An Information Retrieval Method Based on Social Annotations. Journal of Chinese Information Processing 27(1): 39–46, 55. Yibo, Chen 2012. Personalized Knowledge Service Key Technology based on Linked Data and User Ontology (Sc.D dissertation). Wuhan: Wuhan University. Wenzhi, Liu 2012. Studies on Key Technologies of Resource Management in Network Virtualization Environment (Sc.D dissertation). Peking: Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunication. Wenzheng, Yang. Caiping, Xiong. Zhixian Bian & Xin, Hai 2013. Construction and Simulation of Pay Model on Regional Education Information Resources. China Educational Technology 34(6): 67–72. Huixian, Wang 2013. Study on the Incentive Mechanism for SNS User’s Participation (D.M dissertation). Peking: Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunication. Johnson, Shardrom 2011. Clustering Preprocessing of Data Resource. Shanghai: Shanghai Popular Science Press.

409

ICIEES_Book.indb 409

4/3/2015 7:09:32 AM

This page intentionally left blank

IRAICS

5

About the series The IRAICS Proceedings series is devoted to the publication of proceedings sponsored by the International Research Association of Information and Computer Science (IRAICS), a registered non-profi t international scientifi c association of distinguished scholars engaged in Information and Computer Science. The mission of IRAICS is to foster and conduct collaborative interdisciplinary research in state-of-the-art methodologies and technologies within its areas of expertise. The main fi elds covered by the series are Computer Engineering, Biomedical Engineering, Civil Engineering, Computational Intelligence and Complexity, Control Engineering, Electronics & Electrical Engineering, Energy Technology, Mechanical Engineering, Production & Process Engineering, Robotics, Signals & Communication, Sports Engineering and Business Engineering.

Information Engineering and Education Science

The 2014 International Conference on Information Engineering and Education Science (ICIEES 2014) was held June 12-13 in Tianjin, China. The objective of ICIEES 2014 was to provide a platform for researchers, engineers, academics as well as industry professionals from all over the world to present their research results and development activities in Information Engineering and Education Science. The program consisted of invited sessions and technical workshops and discussions with eminent speakers, and contributions to this proceedings volume cover a wide range of topics in Information Engineering and Education Science.

IRAICS proceedings series

ISSN Print: 2334-0495 ISSN Online: 2377-2077

Editor Zheng

Information Engineering and Education Science Editor: Dawei Zheng

an informa business

5